No matching fragments found in this document.
YOUR POST
A post in a Scientology Organization isn't a job. It's a
trust and a crusade.
We're free men and women-probably the last free men and women
on Earth. Remember, we'll have to come back to Earth some day no
matter what "happens" to us.
If we don't do a good job now we may never get another
chance.
Yes, I'm sure that's the way it is.
So we have an organization, we have a field we must support,
we have a chance.
That's more than we had last time night's curtain began to
fall on freedom.
So we're using that chance.
An organization such as ours is our best chance to get the
most done. So we're doing it!
L. RON HUBBARD
|ORG EXEC SEC |
| | | | | | | |
|Treasury | | |Technical | | |Qualifications |
|Secretary | | |Secretary | | |Sec. Sec. |
|Treasury Sec. | | |Technical Sec. | | | | | |
|Sec. | | |Sec. | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Departmen|Departme|Departmen|Departmen|Departmen|Departmen|Departmen|
|t 8 |nt 9 |t 10 |t 11 |t 12 |t of |t of |
| | | | | |Examinati|Review |
| | | | | |ons | |
|Departmen|Departme|Departmen|Departmen|Departmen|Director |Director |
|t of |nt of |t of |t of |t of |of |of Review|
|Disbursem|Records,|Technical|Training |Processin|Examinati| |
|ents |Assets &|Services | |g |on | |
| |Material| | | | | |
|Director |Director|Director |Director |Director | | |
|of |of |of |of |of | | |
|Disbursem|Records,|Technical|Training |Processin| | |
|ents |Assets &|Services | |g | | |
| |Material| | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1967
Remimeo
HCO Exec See Hat
Org Exec See Hat
Tech See Hat
Dept of Tech Services Hats
Dept of Processing Hats
Dept of Training Hats
TECH DIVISION, DEPARTMENTS OF
TECH SERVICES, TRAINING, AND PROCESSING
All Organization Boards are to be posted in accordance with the
following line-up which complies with HCO Policy Letter of February 28,
1966 entitled, "Danger Condition Data, Why Organizations Stay Small":
DEPARTMENT OF TECH SERVICES
Director of Tech Services
Tech Routing Section
Tech Routing Administrator
Tech Pages
Student Administration Section
Student Administrator
Student Unit and Level Log Clerk
Student Materials Supply Clerk
Student Location Clerk
Student Files Clerk
Student Pc Files Clerk
HGC Administration Section
HGC Administrator
HGC Pc Assignment Clerk
HGC Room Assignment Clerk
HGC Priority List Clerk
HGC Pc Location Clerk
HGC Files Clerk
Service Section
Service Administrator
Information Clerk
Housing Clerk
Transportation Clerk
Passport Clerk
Student/Pc Comm Courier
Tech Reservations Unit
Tech Reservations Administrator
Letter Typists
DEPARTMENT OF TRAINING
Director of Training
Basic Courses Section
Basic Courses Chief Supervisor
HAS Supervisor
HQS Supervisor
Dianetic Co-Audit Supervisor
Academy Courses Section
Academy Courses Chief Supervisor
Dianetic Auditor Course Supervisor
Level 0 Supervisor
Level I Supervisor
Level II Supervisor
Level III Supervisor
Level IV Supervisor
Saint Hill Special Briefing Course Section (Saint Hill
only)
SHSBC Chief Supervisor
Unit A Supervisor
Unit B Supervisor
Unit C Supervisor
Solo Section (Saint Hill only)
Solo Course Chief Supervisor
Unit D Supervisor (Class VI)
Solo Audit Course Supervisor (Grade VI)
Advanced Courses Section (WW only)
Advanced Courses Chief Supervisor
Clearing Course Supervisor
Asst Clearing Course Supervisor
OT Course Supervisor
Asst OT Course Supervisor
DEPARTMENT OF PROCESSING
Director of Processing
Case Supervision Section
Case Supervisor
Section A Auditors
Section A Leading Auditors
Auditors
Section B Auditors
Section B Leading Auditor
Auditors
Section C Auditors
Section C Leading Auditor
Auditors
Intern Auditor Section
Leading Intern Auditor
Intern Auditors
Note that only the services actually delivered in your Department of
Training are to be posted. Only Saint Hill would post the SHSBC and only WW
would post Advanced Courses.
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 NOVEMBER 1959
[Excerpt]
CenOCon
KEY TO THE ORGANIZATIONAL CHART OF THE
FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY OF
WASHINGTON DC TECHNICAL DIVISION
Purpose: To ensure good training and processing, good service and ARC
inside and outside the organization.
ACADEMY OF SCIENTOLOGY
Purpose: To train the best auditors in the world.
TRAINING ADMINISTRATOR
Purpose: To keep the materials and comm lines of the Academy in good
order. To keep a Roll Book. To prepare and collect certification materials.
HUBBARD CLEARING SCIENTOLOGIST COURSE
Purpose: To educate auditors in the techniques and skills necessary to
clear human beings.
COMMUNICATION COURSE
Purpose: To give people a reality on Scientology and to teach the
communication formula by Dummy Auditing.
UPPER INDOCTRINATION COURSE
Purpose: To attain ability to handle bodies, objects and intentions
fully.
THEORY & PRACTICE COURSE
Purpose: To create a competent auditor with a good grasp of theory and
practice of Scientology. All five levels of Indoc.
HUBBARD GUIDANCE CENTRE
Purpose: To do more for people's health and ability than has ever
before been possible and to give the best auditing possible. To help
people.
PROCESSING ADMINISTRATOR
Purpose: To handle the persons, communications and materials of the
HGC to the end of improving and continuing the quality and business of the
HGC.
SCIENTOMETRIC TESTING IN CHARGE
Purpose: To give all and any tests or exams that may be required to
any department or organization or personnel, and to keep and file results
accurately to assist research and presentation, and to have test materials
in abundance to hand.
PERSONAL EFFICIENCY FOUNDATION
Purpose: To run an amazingly successful HAS Co-Audit Course, to keep
new people coming in and the Co-Audit growing, at least five new people per
week, and cases cracked and everyone to get trained further or cleared
fully in the HGC.
LRH:js.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Note: The full Policy Letter is given in Volume 7, page 138.)
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 FEBRUARY 1961
[Excerpt]
Cen Orgs
Copy for each Staff Hat
Not for Franchise
PATTERN OF A CENTRAL ORGANIZATION
TECHNICAL DIVISION
The Personal Efficiency Foundation
The PE Foundation is the entrance door of the public into the services
of the Central Organization, a knowledge of Scientology and a higher level
of civilization.
Test Section
By means of advertising mailings and word of niouth, the public is
brought in to be tested and evaluated. This is done by the Test Section of
the PE Foundation. This section does everything possible to route new
individuals into a PE Course.
PE Course Section
A five evening PE Course is given weekly. Its curriculum is precisely
laid down. Its total purpose is to explain elementary Scientology and
prepare and route people into the Co-audit.
The HAS Co-audit Section
Using precise processes developed for this section only, the HAS Co-
audit (Do it Yourself Processing) seeks to improve cases and further
interest people in Scientology so that they will take individual HGC
processing and individual training.
Summary of the PE Foundation
The PE Foundation is an entrance point to Scientology. If it faih to
pass people from testing to a PE Course, from a PE Course to Co-audit and
from Co-audit to the Academy and HGC then it is failing its functions, the
unit will be low and the Central Organization faltering.
No section of the PE is an end-all where the public feels an action
has been completed. That the PE Foundation in itself does a great deal of
good is indisputable. However, the moment it relaxes on this fact and fails
to pass people along, it lets down every staff member in the other five
departments as well as its own people. A PE Foundation income is not
adequate to support even itself, and its services in training and
processing are not wholly adequate to functioning in life. It is an
entrance door. It must be alertly watched. Its numbers in testing, PE
Course and Co-audit today are the organization's units and Scientology's
people tomorrow.
The PE Director is now, next to the Assn Secretary, the most
responsible person for solvency in a Central Organization.
The Academy of Scientology
Headed by the Director of Training, the Academy is responsible for the
technical excellence of Scientology practice tomorrow.
Teaching two different courses in the same classes, the Academy trains
Hubbard Practical Scientologists and Hubbard Professional (HPA/HCA)
Auditors.
The Academy also teaches an upper level course once or more a year
known as the B.Scn (Hubbard Clearing Scientologist) Course.
Precise scheduling, crisp training and true, direct answers to the
students' questions makes an Academy.
The HPA/HCA Course enrolls more or less every Monday unless the total
average unit is to be gained expensively through individual processing
only.
The Practical course is the same as the old professional course except
that it is for people "Who don't want to practice Scientology
professionally". The professional course is a tougher version with more
requirements.
A bad Academy results in a bad HGC tomorrow as many graduates become
staff auditors.
A good Academy is known by its snappy scheduling and the degree of
basic data and action the student actually absorbs.
The Hubbard Guidance Centre
The HGC is headed by the Director of Processing, under whom come all
individual cases, (public and staff).
The D of P is the case czar of the organization.
The D of P's total administration is done by HGC Admin. The D of P
does not do admin, only technical, but is in charge of admin and all staff
auditors and the department.
The D of P (or in case of more than 30 pcs/week, a deputy D of P)
interviews HGC cases every five hours of processing to establish the
quality of goals and rudiments and what the auditor is running.
HGC Admin procures and assigns auditors, gives applicants from the
Registrar their case estimates, keeps the files of cases, oversees proper
auditor handling of forms, oversees testing or gets it done for HGC pcs
when PE testing is closed, finds and assigns rooms for auditing and keeps,
in general, the lines moving in the HGC.
If the D of P does these things or worse, takes preclears to process,
you don't have an HGC. You have a technical collapse.
HGC quality must be high and stay high. It is the highest technical
quality in the continent.
An HGC staff auditor audits directly on current run-down and produces
high case gains. HGC Staff Auditors are the most respected auditors in
Scientology and for a period of I I years have always gotten the highest,
fastest results in Dianetics and Scientology. A staff auditor may refuse to
process or refuse to release from processing any pc.
The HGC was born to show field auditors the results that could be
obtained, and lived on to carry the full burden of successful auditing
around the world.
Technical Report Forms
A report by each student is required each week by the D of T.
A report for each session given a pc is required from staff auditors
by the D of P. These are "reports to LRH".
All these are ultimately received by HCO WW.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:aec.js.rd
[Note: The full Policy Letter is given in Volume 7, page 147.1
THE PROMOTIONAL ACTIONS OF
TECHNICAL DIVISION 4
(From HCO PL 20 November 1965, The Promotional Actions
of an Organization, with the deletion of 71 per HCO PLs
15 December 1965 and 4 February 1966. These are given complete
for all divisions in Basic Staff Volume 0, starting on page 84.)
51. Technical Secretary - Co-ordinates and gets done the promotional
functions of Division 4.
52. Department 10 (Dept of Tech Services) - Makes the customers happy and
glad to be there.
53. Gives brisk service.
54. Acquires for the org a reputation for swift and excellent handling of
people.
55. Department 11 (Dept of Training) - Gives excellent training.
(Thesoundest possible promotion quickly mirrored in numbers
enrolling.)
56. Routes dissidents quickly to Ethics and slows to Review.
57. Briskly and punctually schedules classes.
58. Accomplishes lots of completions.
59. Turns out very competent auditors whose excellence promotes the
Academy (or College at SH) and Scientology.
60. Writes letters to possible prospective students to get the Academy
(or College at SH) full. (This is an old, old activity of the D of T
who never depends on Registrars or magazines.)
61. Makes sure the excellence of training that is there is bragged about
in magazines, etc.
62. Gets students (Free Scientology Centre) to find new, raw meat pcs of
their own around the town and audit them for student classification
and gets them to bring such pcs in for Release examinations and
declarations (during which they get routed through Registrar who
presents the award) and refuses any for classification in cases
already known to be a paying pc of some org or auditor.
63. Department 12 (Dept of Processing) - Gets excellent results on all
pcs.
64. Becomes well known for standard tech.
65. Spots SPs and PTSs early and routes to Ethics. Routes bogged cases
quickly to Review.
66 Takes responsibility for all cases in the whole area where the org
is.
67. Makes auditors look and act professionally outside the HGC so people
will have confidence in them.
68. Insists on clean, attractive HGC quarters and helps Materiel to
achieve and maintain them.
69. Gets pcs in such good shape they are walking advertisements for the
HGC and Scientology.
70. Writes letters to possible pcs (the D of P has had this duty for 15
years).
71. [Deleted per HCO PLs 15 Dec 65 and 4 Feb '66. Now appears as 85a.]
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.td
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 SEPTEMBER 1965
[Excerpt]
Remimeo
Advisory Councils
Advisory Committees
STATISTICS FOR DIVISIONS
Tech Division 4 -
Number of students and pcs completed in the week.
The number enrolled is really only partly the Tech Division's as if
they give good service they will get enrollments. However, the completions
are the real index of a Tech Division and shows up any weakness of the
division. So their statistic is only total completions of courses and
auditing. This of course includes graduations from any course and
completion of any result for the pc that brings a Grade Cert or just ends
intensives.
Completed of course means only certified or classed or graded. However
completion of a 25 hour intensive which satisfied the pc (no review at end
even if one occurred before the end) counts as a pc completed. Five hour
rehabs which did not result in a Grade are not completions. Five Hour
assists bought as assists are done of course in Qual and so are not a Tech
statistic.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
[Excerpted from HCO P/L 30 September 1965, Statistics for Divisions, a
complete copy of which is in Volume 1, page 328. Statistics in use for the
Academy and HGC prior to the 1965 Seven Division Organizing Board evolution
are given in Volume 1 on pages 318 and 323. The above P/L has been amended
by the following Policy Letters: HCO, P/L 27 April 1967, Tech Division
Statistic, page 10; HCO P/L 22 September 1969, HGC Statistic, page 12; HCO
P/L 29 March 1970, Tech and Qual Stats Revised, in the 1970 Year Book; HCO
P/L 17 June 1970 Issue II, OIC Change-Cable Change, Volume 1, page 359
(which also cancelled 29 March 1970); HCO P/L 5 February 1971 Issue V, Org
Gross Divisional Statistics Revised, page 20; and HCO P/L 5 February 1971
Issue 111, FEBC Executive Director Org GDSes, in the 1971 Year Book.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 OCTOBER 1966
St Hill and
WW only
Gen Non-Remimeo
OIC GRAPHS
Clearing and OT Course
Div IV Statistics, LRH Comm Statistic
Clears and OTs are not counted in the Div IV graph as they give an
improper view of some Gross Divisional statistics in that they mask
Releases actually made, an important datum.
The Gross Divisional Tech statistic includes only completions and
Releases made in Div IV. The HGC graph only includes Releases.
LRH COMM GRAPH
The graph of the LRH Comm and the Office of LRH Gross statistic shall
cease to be a point system and will be drawn hereafter I for 1. All
Releases, Clears and OTs made are included I for I in these graphs. (OIC,
in initially implementing this policy, should revise and backdate these
figures at least four weeks to plot a meaningful line.)
EXECUTIVE DIVISION COURSES
An additional packet of graphs each labelled Exec Div Courses shall be
added to the SH graphs and included also in the WW graphs to which it
actually belongs. They are as follows.
Graphs of Post Graduate Students:
Graph I - is a dual graph consisting of a straight continuous line
which shows the number of students on the Clearing Course and a dotted line
which shows the number of students on the OT Course.
Graph 2 - a continuous line; which shows the number of Clears made
that week (Thursday 2:00 p.m. to Thursday 2:00 p.m.) and a dotted line
(when it comes to apply) showing the number of OTs made.
Post Graduate Income Graphs:
Graph 3 - a line which shows the amount of money received by Saint
Hill for Clearing Course enrolments.
Graph 4 - a line which shows the amount of money paid in by OT Course
students for the OT Course.
Graph 5 - a line which shows the amount of money paid into Qual SH for
reviews by reason of the Clearing Course.
CLEARING COURSE SUPERVISOR STATISTIC
The statistic of the Clearing Course Supervisor will remain the number
of completions tallied as number of parts completed.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 APRIL 1967
(Amendment to HCO POLICY Letter of 30 Sept 1965,
"Statistics For Divisions")
Gen Non-Remimeo
OIC
Tech Sec
Qual Sec
Ad Council
Exec Council
TECH DIVISION STATISTIC
Number of Students completed in the week
Number of Preclears completed in the week.
The Tech Completions statistic remains, the only change being that it
is now a dual statistic of number of student completions and number of
preclear completions for the week. The definition of "completion" remains
as defined in 30 Sept 1965 Policy Letter.
It was found by a recent Board of Investigation that a total Tech
completions statistic looked good, but on a breakdown it was seen that this
was entirely due to an affluence only in preclear completions while the
total student completions statistic was actually in a state of collapse.
This had been masked from Ad Council and Executive Council and not given
its proper importance due to the condition having been concealed in the
total completions statistic.
Both preclear and student completions statistics are equally
important, reflecting different areas of the Tech Sec's responsibilities.
Each is half the product of the org and must be seen as it is.
Additionally, a collapsed student completions statistic, if unhandled, will
eventually lead to a collapsed gross cash statistic regardless of any
affluences in preclear completions.
So let's handle these two stats as they are and give preclear
completions and student completions the individual importance of a dual
gross divisional statistic for Tech.
This will mean a slight change in the OIC cable.
Written by a Board of Investigation
David Ziff, Joan Thomas, J.J. Delance
Exec Council WW
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD, Founder
LRH:jp.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 OCTOBER 1967
BPI
Auditor
FSMS
AUDITOR AND ORG INDIVIDUAL STATS
The Individual Statistic of any Auditor is
How many of his pcs have thereafter been trained in an organization.
The Individual Statistic of any organization (except SH) is
How many trained auditors exist in its area.
The Individual Statistic of Saint Hill is
How many trained auditors are there in the world.
LRH:jp.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 MARCH 1969
Remimeo
Tech & Qual
Hats
OIC Hats
COMPLETIONS STATISTIC,
TRIPLE GRADES, TECH & QUAL DIVISIONS
A completion is defined in HCO Pol Ltr 30th September, 1965 as
certified or classed or graded. It is further defined in HCO Pol Ltr 17th
October, 1966 Issue 11 as Grade Rehab, S & D, assist or See Check.
Since each question of a Triple Grade is considered as a type of
process by itself which handles not a different Grade (process subject
matter) but a different flow (aspect) of the subject being addressed, for
statistic purposes each flow of a Triple Grade should be considered as one
PC completion.
David Dunlop; Int Tech Officer WW
Jim Keely; Qual See WW
Bruce Glushakow; HCO Area See WW
Ad Council WW
Rodger Wright; LRH Comm WW
Jane Kember; Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:ei.eden
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 APRIL 1969
Refers HCO PL 31 March 69
Remimeo
xxxxx
HCO Policy Letter 3 1 st March 1969, Completions Statistic is herewith
cancelled,
as it
A) Changes the purpose of HCO Policy Letter 30 Sept 65 which states
that a completion is a grade completed.
B) Would give a possible 4 Bonuses to an Auditor per Auditing
Grade.
Proposed by
H.G. Parkhouse
2 D/G F WW
for
Jane Kember
LRH:ei.eden The Guardian WW
Copyright Q 1969 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
I I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 SEPTEMBER 1969
Remirneo
(Amends HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 Sept 1965)
(Amends HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 Mar 1969, 11,
Item No. 19)
HGC STATISTIC
The statistic for the HGC and the Tech Division is changed from PC
Completions to number of successful auditing hours delivered. This is in
line with HCO Bulletin, 29 July 1969.
TECHDIVISION
The statistic is the number of successful auditing hours delivered.
Number of student completions.
DEPT OFPROCESSING
The statistic is the number of successful auditing hours delivered for
the week.
This is the statistic of the D of P and the HGC Case Supervisor with
the HGC Auditor having the same statistic on an individual basis.
"Successful auditing hours" are judged solely by the -thoroughness and
exactness of technical application and are the total of sessions for which
the Case Supervisor gives the auditor a "well done".
R.C. Ash - Org Exec See UK
Allan Ferguson - Qual See WW
Rosalie Vosper - HCO Area See WW
Ad Council WW
Anne Tampion - HCO Exec See WW
Allan Ferguson - Org Exec See WW
Tom Morgan - Public Exec See WW
Rodger Wright - LRH Comm WW
Leif Windle - Policy Review Section WW
Jane Kember - The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:RA.ei.cden Copyright Q 1969
12
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 OCTOBER 1970
All Div IV Personnel
OES
HCO ES
HCO Area Sec
Dept 3 Hats
DIVISION IV ORG BOARD, IDEAL SCENES AND STATS
Following is the Division IV Org Board with the Sections and Units of
each Department listed and the Ideal Scene and new Stat given for each,
The Ideal Scene for each post should be studied and thoroughly
understood, as this is the exact purpose of the post.
The Stats have been worked out precisely so that each one brings about
the Ideal Scene for its particular post, resulting in a constantly
increasing Stat.
The Awareness Levels of the three Departments-Prediction, Activity,
Production are, of course, exactly right for bringing about the Ideal Scene
and raising Stats of the Departments, and remain unchanged.
Lt. Cmdr. Joan Robertson CS-4 for L, RON
HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JR:sb.rd Copyright@ 1970
13
TECHNICAL DIVISION THE PRODUCTION DIVISION DIVISION IV
TECHNICAL SECRETARY
Ideal Scene: Large increasing inflow from the area into Div IV
producing the specific product of the org which is fully audited preclears
and large numbers of well trained graduated auditors who are able and
willing to audit and train others.
Star: Dual: 1. Total number of well done auditing hours in HGC.
2. Total points of all Students in the Department of Training for
the week past based on the Flag Authorized Point System.
DEPARTMENT 10 DEPT OF TECH SERVICES
DIR OF TECH SERVICES
Ideal Scene: Superlative Service to every Student and Preclear and
to Departments of Training and Processing so that sufficient materials,
equipment, routing, assignments and admin are flawlessly handled resulting
in inflow of more Students and Preclears.
Stat: Dual: 1. Total number of preclears in the Tech Div for the
week, minus five
for any who blew, were misrouted, left incomplete, or on leave
andlor who have not been retrieved from past blows and misroutes.
2. Total number of students in the Tech Div for the week minus five
for any who blew, were misrouted, left incomplete, or on leave
andlor who have not been retrieved from past blows and misroutes.
TECH ROUTING SECTION
TECH ROUTING ADMINISTRATOR
Ideal Scene: Flawless routing of bodies and particles so that
Students and Preclears can get through their services with no delays.
Stat: Number of bodies routed correctly to completed cycle in or out
of
Tech Div, minus five for any one incorrectly routed or who went off
lines or was not scheduled after arrival.
TECH PA GES
Ideal Scene: Flawless routing of bodies and particles so that
cycles may be completed without delay to Staff, Students or Preclears.
Stat: Number of correctly completed routing cycles-minus five for any
incomplete or misrouted cycles.
STUDENT ADMIN SECTION
STUDENT ADMINISTRATOR
Ideal Scene: Flawless service to Students and classrooms so that
there is never a'stop on Student or Classroom functions.
Stat: Total number of correctly issued, newly issued or newly made up
course packs at hand minus 20 for every student on a course without
all
his materials in hand, cumulative until remedied.
STUDENT UNIT AND LEVEL LOG CLERK
Ideal Scene: Perfect Admin so that the logging reflects one for
one Bodies present with bodies enrolled.
14
Stat: Total number of correctly logged items minus five for any
omission or incorrectly logged item and plus ten for perfect student
attendance during week.
MA TERIA LS SUPPL Y CLER K
Ideal Scene: Sufficient numbers of material and packs for every
student with some to spare of every item on every checksheet on the
courses.
Stat: Total number of materials usefully supplied to the students and
classes
minus ten each for any that were missing, incomplete or in poor
condition.
STUDENT LOCATION CLERK
Ideal Scene: Every student enrolled present and on time at every
roll call or immediately located, brought in to Ethics and resumption of
classes.
Stat: Number of students on courses minus 10 for any absence for each
day, and plus 10 for perfect attendance for the week.
STUDENTIPC ASSIGNMENT CLERK
Ideal Seen e: Every student comparably twinned, assigned and posted
being audited and auditing.
Stat: Total number of students correctly twinned and assigned to co-
audit,
minus five for every student omitted, or incorrectly assigned or not
posted or not twinned.
STUDENTIPC FILES CLERK
Ideal Scene: Every student's file as auditor and pc complete and
in PT as a perfect record of full auditing and having been audited.
Stat: Number of correctly filed items for the week minus five for
every item
backlogged, misfiled or omitted and plus ten for files in correct
order
and in PT.
FILES CLERK
Ideal Scene: Course files in PT and excellent order for instant
reference and data on cour%es.
Stat: Number of correctly filed items for the week minus five for
every item
backlogged, misfiled or omitted, and plus ten for files in correct
order
and in PT.
TAPE EQUIPMENTAND MAINTENANCE UNIT
Ideal Scene: Tapes and tape machines in excellent condition and
sufficient number with every tape on every checksheet available to
students.
Stat: Number of tapes in excellent condition and plus five for every
tape
machine in good condition, and minus 20 for any missing tape on the
checksheets and every tape and tape machine in disrepair.
HGC ADMINISTRATION SECTION
HGCADMINISTRATOR
Ideal Scene: Lots of preclears being audited fully with flawless
scheduling and routing and many more being brought in.
Stat: Number of individual HGC Preclears correctly handled, scheduled,
and
receiving auditing plus five each for any with finished time sent to
15
registrar and cashier, and plus five for any paid preclear who was
started earlier than he was scheduled for.
HGC ASSIGNMENT CLERK
Ideal Scene: Lots of Preclears correctly assigned and scheduled
being fully audited and progressing up the grades.
Stat: Number of preclears correctly assigned on the board minus five
for any misassigned, omitted, or having to wait for auditors.
HGC ROOM ASSIGNMENT CLERK
Ideal Scene: Sufficient number of comfortable attractive auditing
rooms so that there are no distractions and no auditor or preclear has to
wait.
Slat: Number of correctly assigned auditing rooms plus five for every
room improvement cycle done.
PRIORITY LIST CLERK
Ideal Scene: Priority Service quickly available for any Preclear
who wishes and will pay for it without breaking up auditing already in
progress.
Stat: One point for every hour of priority auditing paid for and
delivered.
PCLOCATIONCLERK
Ideal Scene: Any pe missing or blown instantly located and brought
in to Ethics and resumption of service.
Stat: Number of pcs in the HGC minus ten for any absence from each
session, and plus ten for every week with perfect attendance.
FILES CLERK
Ideal Scene: HGC files in PT and excellent order for instant
reference and data on auditors, preclears and HGC.
Stat: Number of correctly filed items minus five for any backlogged,
misfiled or omitted and plus ten for files correctly in PT.
SERVICE SECTION
SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR
Ideal Scene: Adequately housed students and preclears having
adequate transport and area services with security in and good PR Area
Control.
Stat: Number of students and preclears correctly housed plus ten
points if no
flaps on housing, transport or passport lines, but minus fire for each
flap during the week.
Note: "Flap" is defined as a condition of panic or confusion or out
PR or error or delay in assignment resulting in any inconvenience to
the
student or pc,
WORMA TION CLERK
Ideal Scene: Helpful area information service given to preclears
and students so that morale is high and PR Area Control is good.
Stat: Number of helpful pieces of information on service lines given
to students or preclears.
LIO USING CLERK
Ideal Scene: Every student adequately housed with good morale and
PR Area Control.
16
Stat: Number of students correctly housed plus five points for every
proper
additional housing unit available, and minus ten for any housing flap.
Note: Use definition of flap as above.
Definition of Housing Unit is: any proper room which houses up to
three people, proper dormitories for six or more counting as ten
points.
TRANSPORTATION CLERK
Ideal Scene: Every student having necessary transportation
arrangements so that he can attend every service he has on time.
Stat: Number of students and preclears whose transport has been
arranged
during week, plus ten for no flap, and minus ten for every flap on
transport lines during week.
Note: Use definition of flap as above.
PASSPORTCLERK
Ideal Scene: Wherever passports are required, every student's
passport correctly handled with resultant lack of Port Flaps,
Stat: Number of student and preclear passports correctly filed and in
PTplus
ten for no flaps and minus 100 for every expired, lost, stolen or
incorrectly handled passport during week.
Note: Use definition of flap as above.
TECI-1 RESERVATIONS UNIT
TECH RESER FA TIONS A DMINISTRA TOR
Ideal Scene: Every paid or former preclear and student given a
definite starting time and bringing this time closer to PT.
Stat: Total number of paid students and preclears who started service
within
the week plus ten for every one starting at least one week before
originally scheduled.
LETTER TYPISTS
Ideal Scene: Lots of excellent, on-policy letters written to paid
or former preclears and students to bring them in and/or start their
service closer to PT.
Stat: Number of letters written to former students or preclears or any
who
have advance paid, plus ten points for any written to who come in for
service, minus 50 for any poorly written or off-policy written letter,
HSDC COURSE ADMINISTRATOR
(Note: The Dianetic Course Administrator would be required only in
Orgs with very large Academies or in Orgs where only Dianetics Courses are
given. SHSBCs and Academies will have the usual Course Administrators.)
Ideal Scene: To supply all required Student equipment, material
and supplies, and to route, log, record and file student cycles through the
course.
Stat: Dual: 1. Number of required items usefully added to course
materials less 50 points for any required item not available to students.
2. Number of student cycles properly routed, logged, recorded and
filed.
DEPARTMENT 11 DEPARTMENT OF TRAINING
DIRECTOR OF TRAIN17VG
Ideal Scene: Good tight courses producing lots of excellently trained
and fully
17
audited graduated auditors who are willing and able to train and audit
others by joining staff.
Stat: Dual: 1. Total number of combined points of all students on
courses based on Flag Authorized Point System.
2. Total number of auditors graduated.
DIANETIC COURSES SECTION
HSDC AND HSDG COURSE SUPERVISORS
Ideal Scene: Excellently run classes producing lots of HSDG
Graduates who are willing and able to train and audit others and who go on
to further training.
DIANETIC COURSE CHIEFSUPER VISOR
Stat: Combined points of all students on Dianetic courses based on the
Flag Authorized Point System.
HSDCSVPERVISORS
Stat: Combined points of all students on the HSDC Course based on the
Flag Authorized Point System.
HSDG SUPERVISORS
Stat: Combined points of all students on the HSDG Course based on the
Flag Authorized Point System.
ACADEMY COURSES SECTION
A CADEM Y CO URSES CHIEF SUPER VISOR
Ideal Scene: Excellently run courses by excellently trained
supervisors producing
lots of excellently trained fully audited auditors who continue on up
to
the next level and then to the SHSBC.
Sta t: Combined points based on the Flag Authorized Point System
of all
students on courses.
COURSE SUPERVISORS
Ideal Scene: An excellently run course producing lots of
excellently trained fully audited auditors who continue on up to the next
level.
LE VEL 0 CO URSE SUPER VISOR
LE VEL 1 CO UR SE S UPER VISOR
LEVEL 2 CO UR SE SUPERVISOR
LE VEL 3 CO UR SE S UPER VISOR
LEVEL 4 COURSE SUPERVISOR
Stat: Each supervisor has the combined points of all students on his
course, points based on the Flag Authorized Point System minus 3000 points
for every student absent more than 2 study days in the week.
SAINT HILL SPECIAL BRIEFING CO URSE SECTION
UNIT SUPER VISORS A, B, C
Ideal Scene: Tough, tight, complete training producing excellent
auditors who will go on to upper levels fully able to handle anything.
UNIT A SUPERVISOR
UNIT B SUPER VISOR
UNIT C SUPER VISOR
Stat: Each Supervisor has the combined points based on the Flag
Authorized Point System of all his students minus 3000 points for every
student absent more than 2 study days in the week.
18
SOLO SECTION
SOLO COURSE SUPERVISOR UNIT D CLASS VI
Ideal Scene: Tough, tight course producing superlative self-
determined auditors ready and able to go on to Clear and OT-and go on to
higher classes of auditing.
Stat: Combined points based on the Flag Authorized Point System of all
his
students minus 3000 points for every student absent more than 2 study
days in the week.
SOLO A UDIT SECTION
Ideal Scene: A tight, complete course producing well trained solo
auditors who will go on to Clear and want to take the Briefing Course.
SOL 0 A UDIT CO URSE SUPER VISOR
Stat: Combined points based on the Flag Authorized Point System of all
his students minus 3000 points for every student absent more than 2 study
days in the week.
DEPARTMENT 12 DEPARTMENT OF PROCESSING
DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING
Ideal Scene: An efficient, busy department with lots of well
trained auditors fully auditing many preclears up the grades so that they
will sign up for more auditing and go on to be trained,
Stat: Total number of auditing hours, less 25 for every pc backlogged
more
than 3 days.
TECH CASE SUPER VISORS
Note: Per "HGC Cure" HCO PL I Feb '66, the Case Supervisor may not
take Technical orders from the D of P. The Case Supervisor is under the
Tech See, not the D of P *
Ideal Scene: Flawless C/Sing of every folder so that every session
results in F/N, GIs at Examiner, and every preclear is fully and properly
audited without error.
Stat: % of FIN, VGI sessions at Examiner.
LEADING A UDITORS OF SECTIONS, A VDITORS
Ideal Scene: Many hours of well done auditing resulting in happy,
fully audited preclears who wish to become auditors and sign up for
training.
LEADING A VDITORS
Sta t: Total of all auditors'stats in his section, plus his own.
A VDITORS
Stat.- Total of well done auditing hours that FIN VGI at Examiner
plus !12
hour credit for every hour spent on folder error summaries, plus
credit
for past sessions that ended with FIN VGls which did not last to the
Examiner but brought about case progress and FIN VG1s later. If
sessions had no flubs.
Lt. Cmdr. Joan Robertson
LRH:JR:sb.rd CS-4
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Amended by HCO P/L 1 March 1972, Case Supervisor Statistic, in the
1972 Year Book.]
19
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 FEBRUARY 1971
Issue V
[Excerpt]
ORG GROSS DIVISIONAL STATISTICS
REVISED
(Amends HCO Pol Ltr 30 Sept 65 - Stats for Divisions)
TECH DIVISION 4
I Total points for all students in the Department of Training for
the week past, based on the Flag authorized point system, per the latest
HCO Policy Letter on Student points.
2. Total number of WELL DONE hours audited in the HGC for the week
past, as defined in HCO B 21 August 1970 "Session Grading. Well Done,
Definition of" and HCO B 18 Oct 1970 "Auditors Stats on FN VGIs."
LRH:HE:mes.rd HCO Aide
Copyright@ 1971 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Note: A complete copy of this Policy Letter can be found in the 1971
Year Book. See also HCO P/L 5 December 1972 Issue II, Student Completions
Statistic, in the 1972 Year Book.]
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 SEPTEMBER 1956
To Washington and London
FLOW LINE FOR PERSONNEL
The Procurement of Personnel for the Organization Technical Staff
should be from the field or the School to the HGC, from the HGC to staff
posts when important and need filling.
In other words, a blank for Day Instructor is filled from HGC staff-
the replacement on HGC staff comes from the field or from the students at
the School.
Exception-Business staff is occasionally transferred to Technical
staff.
Reason-it is easier to brief on auditing than on what we do in the
Organization. Auditing not Organization is real to field and student.
L. RON HUBBARD
20
THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C.
FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF I APRIL 1957
TECHNICAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE DIVISIONS
To better accomplish our goal, the organization is divided herewith
into two divisions:
Technical and Administrative
These bear as indicated on the new Organizational Board.
The head of the Technical Division has the title of Technical
Director. Under this post comes the Director of Training and the Director
of Processing and the Director of Testing and Counseling.
The Technical Director co-ordinates all training and processing
activities. He holds auditors' Conference, cheeks sessions, assigns
preclears, he passes on schedules and subject matter in training.
The Director of Administration passes on all administrative matters
including procurement and central files as indicated on the Organizational
Board. NO change is made in the posts of Director of Training or the
Director of Processing except that the Director of Processing is now
expected to take pTeelears when necessary and to keep a close eye on
procurement.
The Technical Director is to act as a bridge between service and
procurement and should work closely with the Registrar and Administration.
This is put into effect in Washington after a 6-months' trial in
London where the two divisions have functioned with a higher income level
than ever before. It is being tried on for size in Washington.
L. RON HUBBARD
Executive Manager
21
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HASI POLICY LETTER OF 7 MAY 1957
ASSIGNMENT OF AUDITORS, ROOMS, STUDENTS
Registrar has no authority to and must not assign auditors to
preclears, Auditing rooms to preclears or students to class.
Director of Processing has no right to direct Registrar in signing up
preclears.
Director of Training has no right to direct Registrar in signing up
students.
There is no co-operation between Registrar and Directors of Processing
and Training.
Registrar signs up anyone she pleases for any length of time with any
promise or compromise. Only when signing up is complete do Directors of
Training and Processing have any ownership.
Directors of Training and Processing cannot direct Registrar in
cutting back numbers of people to be processed or trained.
Registrar signs up. Director of Processing and Director of Training
cope with it.
If a person can "only be processed on Thursdays for the next two
years", Registrar signs up. Director of Processing can accept it or argue
the preclear into a three-week sprint.
Exception: IF the Director of Processing will not accept a preclear
for one week he feels is a 3-weeker, he can reject and send person back.
Exception: IF the Director of Training will not accept a student for a
higher course than he believes student can take, he can reject for a lower
course or processing.
Registrar just isn't in the HGC or the Academy.
Costs more processing when this is done wrong.
Penalty: Flagrant violation of this rule can bring about transfer from
post.
Registrar signs people up.
Director of Processing and Director of Training cope.
To do this otherwise is high treason to staff and public.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rd Copyright @1957
22
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C.
HCO INFORMATION BULLETIN OF I JUNE 1957
RIGHTS OF THE DIRECTORS OF TRAINING AND PROCESSING,
STAFF AUDITORS AND INSTRUCTORS
REGARDING PRECLEARS AND STUDENTS
The Director of Processing may refuse a preclear already registered on
the following grounds, and only on these grounds:
1 . Risk to Clinic by reason of low profile or connections.
1 Not enough weeks bought by pc (example: bought one, needs
three).
3. Non-payment of former debts to Clinic.
He may not refuse a pc on grounds of insufficient auditors or
inconvenience to staff. In case of refusal he returns pc to Registrar.
The Director of Training may refuse a student already registered on
the following grounds and only on these grounds:
1. Flagrantly needs processing of a more expert level than student
intensive.
2. Signed up for a course for which student not qualified by
earlier training.
3. Nori-payment of former debts to Academy.
He may not refuse students on grounds of insufficient instructors or
classrooms. In case of refusal he returns student to the Registrar.
A Staff Auditor may refuse to process a pc on following grounds:
1 . Psychotic past history of institutional nature.
2. Marked antipathy to case.
An Instructor may refuse training in his unit to a student who:
1 . Gives no evidence of having learned the basics taught in a lower
unit. (In which case he returns student to the lower unit.)
2. Flagrantly needs processing. (In which case he sends student to
Director of Training and thence to Registrar.)
3. Is chronically absent or tardy. (In which case he sends student
to Director of Training.)
4. Who disobeys school regulations. (In which case he sends student
to Director of Training.)
A Director of Processing may refuse to sign out or release a preclear
he considers vitally in need of further processing. In which case he sends
preclear to Registrar.
The Director of Training may refuse to send a student to the Examiner
by reason that he will not be a credit to the corps of auditors. He is
under no compulsion to train such a student beyond the allotted training
period but may do so at his discretion.
A Staff Auditor may refuse to release a preclear from the HGC whom he
feels in vital need of further processing regardless of the opinion or
administration of the Director of Processing or the Registrar. He should
send the pc to the Registrar but may give further processing whether or not
the preelear signs up for more and despite any remonstrance, of the
Director of Processing.
An Instructor may refuse to release a student to a higher class or to
Examination despite the opinion or the administration of the Director of
Training.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rd
23
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
ASSOCIATION SECRETARY DIRECTIVE
As per LRH's Memo of I I July 1957
TECH STAFF CERTIFICATE VALIDATION
All Technical Staff must have their certificates validated before
hiring, or by August 15th at the latest.
Jack Parkhouse
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 NOVEMBER 1960
[Excerpt]
Assn Secs HCO Secs Dir PrR
SIGN UP OF STUDENTS AND PCS
ACCEPTANCE BY D/P AND D/T
No pc or student may be sent to D of P or D of T without having been
signed up fully by PrR. D of P and D of T are not selling personnel.
D of P may increase required hours before technical acceptance of pc.
In which case pc is returned to PrR for re-signing.
D of T may reject a student for health or security reasons, at which
time PrR must re-sign for adequate processing. People with a Communist or
subversive record or who are studying Scientology for use in other healing
fields-psychology, medicine, psychiatry, psycho-analysis, Christian
Science, may not be accepted for training.
The D of T always does a security cheek particularly of above points
before accepting a student.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:js.rd
[Note: ThecompleteP01i Letter, entitled URGENT PR R,
'L L found in Volume 2, page 261.1
can
24
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 MAY 1961
Remimeo (Reissued on 21 June 1967)
All Staff
Tech Hats
Qual Hats A MESSAGE TO THE EXECUTIVE SECRETARIES
AND ALL ORG STAFF
QUALITY COUNTS
Clearing is now in the reach of every Scientologist.
Excellent Auditor training is now in the reach of every Academy.
And these are the only things in the long run that will count.
When 1 see an Organization staff panting after newspaper publicity or
going mad on the subject of dissemination, and at the same time turning in
to me bad results and poor student quality, 1 know somebody has their
targets mixed up.
Quality is the only thing that counts. If quality in training and
processing is not given first rank and constant priority by Secretaries or
Executive Secretaries, then all the administration in the world will not
make the grade for any Central Org.
Deliver the goods. That's a crude way to put it. But if you want a new
and better civilization you won't get it by advertising or worrying what
people think of you. You will get it only by releasing and clearing people
and sending them out into the society to get the show on the road in all
branches of human activity, including Scientology.
1 know we have been a long time without clearing people. But we're
clearing them now. What does it take to clear people? It takes highly
skilled and tightly supervised auditing. It takes good technology. It takes
good technical application. ' '
If you'll forget about how easy it is to mob students all up in a
class and actually confront each student as an individual, make sure he
knows every essential step he has to know, make sure all his questions get
answered, you'll have auditors that call audit.
Will you please put attention on raising technical skill in the HGC,
releasing people, clearing people, and on the quality of training in the
Academy to the end of getting every student capable of all the steps
necessary to release people.
1 have made the grade technically in the field of research. Now it's
time to drop all the booboo's and nonsense. All you have to do in an Org is
release and clear people and turn out auditors who can release people and
keep in contact with the public and treat them well and you're over the
top.
This morning 1 received a cable from an Org. An urgent cable. Did it
say, "How do you assess for a Pro-Hav level" or something sensible? No, it
didn't. It said, "Send us some biographical data for a newspaper article."
I spit. That Org is doing the lousiest job possible in Technical and is all
worked up to get publicity. What's this? Do they think a society in this
shape will approve Scientology into power? Hell no! And to hell with this
society. We're making a new one. So let's skip the approval button from a
lot of wogs and settle down to work to make new people and better people.
Then maybe you'll have a society.
Right here and right now this policy is laid down in concrete with an
atomic branding iron.. THE FIRST AND PRIMARY GOAL OF AN ORGANIZATION IS
DELIVERING THE FOREMOST TECHNICAL QUALITY THAT CAN BE DELIVERED IN ITS
AREA.
All right. I've made my technical target bang in the bull's eye. You
can release and clear. You can train auditors well. Well, Christ! Let's do
it, do it, do it!
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:ph.jp.rd Copyright Q 1961, 1967
25
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JANUARY 1962
CenOCon
URGENT
CRASH PROGRAMME
I WANT THIS DONE.
Not that Orgs are failing, they are not, but on the contrary are
advancing. Not that you don't have a lot to do routinely, you do.
BUT-our forward advance is stirring up certain exact problems common
to every office. There,are certain remedies for these problems. They are
all contained below.
This is what 1 want you to institute as the highest importance.
1 . HCO Area See. Get Org Ruds in, one after the other, as rapidly
as you can and then go over them again and again.
2. D of P-Outside pcs. At the end of each week's auditing on an HGC
pc, check that pc out for MISSED Withholds and pull them. Do this as D of
P, or appoint a special person who can really run a meter. The only
question asked is "Has a withhold been missed on you?" Clean up those
missed. If other ruds wildly out, return pc to his or her staff auditor to
get the pc squared away. Do this on Thursday as part of pc's auditing time.
Use a specialist, not the staff auditor.
Use a British Mark IV only. This will zoom ARC with org and get you
the re-sign ups you are now missing.
3. HCO Sec's Staff Staff Auditor. Take staff staff auditors into
HCO but pay them from Central Org. Run the staff through one by one and
only pick up Missed Withholds with a British Mark IV meter. Pick up the
missed W/Hs and then go to the next staff member. Applies to all staff
members. This is a specialist action. All HCO supervised, and HCO
supervises all staff auditing from here on. And keep the staff members
winning on their auditing.
4. D of T. Get personal with your students. Get them winning and
graduating. Make auditors, don't just follow routine. Make students
straighten up students. Personal interview students frequently. Get them
winning. Do training by check sheet, not by mass classes.
Get auditors graduating. Keep their interest up. Get students coming
out of the Academy and have them auditing to high quality.
5. HCO Board of Review. Take exam for Class II and Ill off the HCO
Area Sec. Do good, sound examination. Does the staff member know the data
not the commas. Find out what goofiness a person who can't pass an exam is
up against and straighten it up, don't just examine and fail people. Get
people passing perfect. Don't defy people to pass perfect. This data can be
learned. Remember that data exams are complemented with practical
performance. (We have a student at Saint Hill who knows all the HCOBs and
tapes perfectly and yet couldn't give an assist to a cat or read a meter
needle if he were threatened with hanging if he didn't do it.)
These are the things that will get the erg there and raise your units.
So please, please, please get on them fast and keep on them.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:sf.cden
26
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 JANUARY 1962
CenOCon
TECHNICAL DIRECTOR AND ADMINISTRATOR
The last time orgs ran with minimal upset, especially in London, two
posts, now empty everywhere, were filled. These posts werelechnical
Director, who oversaw all technical activities and Administrator who
oversaw all administrative actions.
These were two very busy posts.
Units have been reduced since 1958 by
(a) Lowered Technical results and
(b) Administrative Omissions.
In a City Office, these two posts, rather than the director of
department posts, should certainly be filled as a Tech Director can double
in brass as D of P and D of T. And an Administrator does the accounts and
Dir Mat posts and oversees CF and Address as well as income from the
Registrar.
So in a City Office these two posts should be filled at once, and some
executive posts dropped, at a great saving in units and personnel.
In a Central Organization such as London and DC these two posts should
be filled in addition to existing executive posts. The scrambles in CF and
Address alone create more income loss than the added units.
At present HCO Area is actually doing these two posts in almost all
orgs. HCO Area has its own duties such as Org Ruds and Hat Checks and is
finding it hard to do these as well as Tech Director and Administrator
supervision.
You may or may not fill'these posts elsewhere than London and DC. But
I feel it would increase income and effectiveness.
LRH:sf.rd L~ RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1962
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 MARCH 1962
STAFF REGULATION
RELATIONS WITH PCS AND STUDENTS
No staff member or part time staff member shall have sexual relations
or any kind of sexual relationship with any student or preclear who is not
their legal spouse, while that person is enrolled in the Academy as a
student, or in the HGC as a preclear; nor while a student who has been
released from the Academy is waiting to take his or her HCO Board of Review
test or examination; nor while a completed preclear is waiting to return
home.
Penalty for infraction of this policy: Dismissal, with full penalty of
failure to complete staff contract.
A notice to this effect should be posted permanently and prominently
on both student and staff bulletin boards.
LRH:ph.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1962
[See also HCO P/L 11 August 1967, SecondDymmic Rutees,
Volume 1, page 463.]
27
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 APRIL 1962
Central Orgs
All Staff
TECHNICAL DIRECTOR
BASIC HAT
(Cancels HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 Feb 1962, same title)
The function of the Technical Director is to take charge of all
technical activities in the organization. The Technical Director is
immediately below Association Secretary and immediately above Directors of
Technical Departments. The Technical Director is on a par with the
Administrator.
The Technical Director displaces the Technical Council.
The first three objectives of the Technical Director are as follows:
I To make absolutely and personally certain that every HGC
Preclear achieves
positive and real gains in every week's intensive in the HGC.
2. To make absolutely and personally certain that every student in
the Academy is able to audit on graduation and that graduation is done
rapidly.
3. To make absolutely certain that staff morale is kept high using
existing technology.
The above are the Technical Director's priority functions. It will be
found that when every week's intensive in an HGC pc makes a real and
positive gain for that pc, the pc will re-sign and send in his family and
friends and that when gains are not so achieved the procurement of pcs is
very difficult. It will also be found that the Academy stays full only so
long as tough tight 8-C is run on the students in scheduling and training
and students are not kept forever on course. Staff morale only stays high
when staff cases are kept cleaned up.
4. The Technical Director sees that the PE Foundation instruction
and scheduling are well done and that no technical departure is made which
will discourage PE attendees from enrolling.
5. The Technical Director sees to it that HAS Co-Audit processes do
not include any that would tend to miss withholds on people in co-audit,
which is to say, a withhold process must be ruled out if not done by an
instructor.
6. The Technical Director makes certain that proper technical
subject matter only is given in any course lecture and function.
Staff auditing effective now and staff staff auditors and staff
clearing programmes are transferred to the Technical Director. Staff staff
auditors are assigned directly to the Technical Director for his
supervision and assignment on staff auditing schedules. Staff staff
auditing in this respect includes HCO staff as well as Central Org staff.
Staff staff auditors while dominantly used to audit staff may also be
employed for other technical purposes by the Technical Director such as
cleaning up missed withholds on HGC pcs, checking out HGC pcs at the end of
intensive and checking out Academy students.
Staff technical training is done by the Technical Director or under
his or her supervision. Check sheets for classification, all check out
examinations for check sheets and all preliminary steps to final
examination for classification are done by the Technical Director or under
his or her supervision. HCO is responsible only for the final examination
given after all check sheets are filled out. HCO's responsibility for this
is under the HCO Board of Review.
The implementing of Technical programmes, the training of staff
auditors, instructors and staff staff auditors, the scheduling of classes
in the Academy or for any full or part time course of any kind whatsoever
is done by the Technical Director.
Note: There is no effort here to downgrade HCO. HCO has inherited this
hat little by little plus the Administrator Hat to such a degree that an
HCO See can no longer perform her basic functions.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd
Copyright Q1962 (Note: 18 Feb 1962, cancelled by this Pol Ltr, had
the same
text except for item number 6, which was added 6 April
1962.]
28
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 APRIL 1963
CenMon
DISTRICT OFFICES TECHNICAL REPORTS TO HCO WW
A District Office is regarded as an adjunct of its Area Central Org.
The technical standard and proficiency at each District Office in the
Technical Director's Central Org Control Area are to be under the closest
possible supervision of the Area Central Org Technical Director.
Since a District Office is intended to run simplified Co-audit
processes, no special reports are at this time envisaged as being necessary
to be sent to HCO WW other than the report on District Offices in the
Central Org Technical Director's Weekly Report.
Therefore, no OCA graphs, etc are now required to be sent to HCO WW.
However, the Area Central Org Technical Director will require these to be
sent to him along with any other report he may wish to be instituted from
his District Offices for his own information.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright@ 1963
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 APRIL 1963
CenOCon
I IMPORTANT CHANGES IN TECHNICAL REPORTS TO HCO WW
ALL technical reports hitherto being sent to HCO Technical Secretary
WW are now to be superseded by the attached.
Pre-cut stencils of these new reports have been sent to the RC0s at
Washington DC, Los Angeles, London, Capetown and Melbourne. These reports
should be run off on lightweight airmail paper, foolscap size (13" x W'),
red on white, as soon as possible for distribution to the Central Orgs in
their areas. (The. reports for Academy and HGC will be those requiring the
most copies.)
The object of these new reports is to streamline the tech report lines
thus minimising excess admin, and at the same time ensuring that the
technical standard of the highest possible quality is achieved in all
Central Orgs.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright (D 1963
29
(Original to Ron, duplicate held at Org for file)
TO RON
From Technical Director (Org location)
Friday
Dear Ron,
TECHNICAL DIRECTOR'S REPORT FOR TECHNICAL
AT- ORG FOR WEEK ENDING-
1. HGC.
Number of HGC pcs this week
My comments and progress report for each pc audited in this HGC is
attached.
Comment on HGC as a whole this week
I am making absolutely and personally certain that every HGC Preclear
achieves positive and real gains in every week's intensive in this HGC.
Initial Technical Director
2. Academy
Number of times the Academy was personally visited by me this week
hours spent
Number of new students in the Academy this week
Number of students attending the Academy this week
Number of students graduated this week
My comment and progress report for each student in the Academy this
week is attached.
Comment on Academy as a whole this week
I verify that students are not being treated as cases but as students.
A tough, tight 8-c is being run on students in scheduling and training and
I am making absolutely and personally certain that every student in this
Academy is able to audit on graduation and that graduation is being done
rapidly.
Initial Technical Director
3. Staff Morale.
Number of security checks given for new staff this week
My reports on progress on each member on Staff Clearing Co-audit is
attached.
The following questions have been nulled this week on all staff
members in this Org (including
all HCO staff):
"This past seven days, have you falsified any report?"
"This past seven days, what have you done that staff does not know
about?"
Comment on Staff Morale as a whole this week
I am making certain that staff morale is being kept high using
existing technology.
Initial Technical Director
30
4. PE Foundation.
1 have personally visted the PE Foundation-times this week-hours
spent.
Number on PE Course Number on Cornin Course
Number on other Courses (state name of Course also)
Number of Sign-ups from PE Course this week
Comment on PE Foundation as a whole this week
I have seen that the PE Foundation and scheduling are well done and
that no departure is being made which will discourage PE attendees from
enrolling.
Initial -Technical Director
5. Technical at District Offices in this Org ControlArea.
1 have received and inspected this week the 25-hour OCA (or equivalent
Graphs from the following District Offices
I have personally interviewed each District Officer (after Adcom) this
week. What advice was sought
I have personally made this week a monthly spot-check on
(location of District Office(s)
I am seeing that the technical is of the highest possible standard on
the Co-audit at each District Office in this Central Org Control Area.
Initial Technical Director
6. Course Lectures and Functions.
I have checked and made certain that the proper technical subject
matter only was given at these this week.
Initial Technical Director
7. Staff Technical Training.
Total number of passes this week
Total number of flunks this week
Total number of check-outs this week
The following staff (names)
passed final examination by HCO this week (state also classification
after each name).
Comment on Staff Training as a whole this week
Initial Technical Director
8. Comments and suggestions and recommendations
Best,
(Signed) Technical Director
31
HGC (Org location)
Distribution: Top two copies to RON, 2nd copy will be returned by
HCO WW to Tech Dir. Triplicate to be returned by Tech Dir immediately after
completion to DIP for action, then to HGC Admin for filing in pe's folder.
PROGRESS REPORT ON PC (name) for w/e
Previous HGC auditing (hours)
This Intensive from - to- amount of hours
This Intensive, Auditor's name Class
Main process run
Amount of time spent on main process (approx)- (hours)
How many ARC Breaks were there?
Test Results: Graph: Good Change I No change / Lowered graph*
IQ at start of this Intensive- After Intensive
Auditor's comment on progress
Date - Signed
Auditor
(All the above to be completed by the Auditor in time for the DJP's
end-of-weeklend-of-Intensive* Interview with pc, and handed to DIP.)
Director of Processing Interview Report
E-Meter reading at start of Interview: TJA_ Sens-Type of Needle
(DIP hands pc's copy of Test results to pc. AN numbered questions
hereon to be asked direct of pc.)
1 . "What is your opinion of your Test results?"
2. "In this Intensive, has your auditor missed any withholds on you?"
Yes/No* (meter null before proceeding further).
Result of Line Plot cheek with p
(Note each item not null and its read, also goal.) 3. "Have you
achieved your session goals?" Yes/No* "Your goals set for this Intensive?"
Yes/No* "Any other gains in this Intensive?" Yes/No* If answer is No to any
of these questions, state here goals or gains not made in this Intensive
4. "Are there any suggestions you would like to make?"
Future Processing planned/signed up for (hours)*
DIP readies pc towards end of Interview, then asks:
5. "In this Interview, is there anything you have failed to
reveal?" Yes/No*
DIP mills before ending Interview.
E-Meter reading at end of Interview: TA-Sens-Needle
DIP thanks pc then ends Interview.
Comments and instructions on current state of case
Date- Signed -Director of Processing
Technical Director's Report
I have personally reviewed this case.
My comments and instructions
Date Signed -Technical Director
HCO WW comment
Date Signed
*Delete inapplicable
32
ACADEMY (Org location)
Distribution: Top two copies to RON, 2nd copy will be returned by
HCO WW to Tech Dir. Triplicate to be returned by Tech Dir immediately after
completion to DIT for action, then to Acad Admin for filing in student's
folder.
PROGRESS REPORT ON STUDENT (name) for w/e
Title of Course: HPA/HCA/HPS/B.Scn/HCS/Retread/*
Date commenced on Course
Date due to Graduate
Length of time already on Course including this week -(weeks)
Stage reached on Course
Number of Passes this week
Number of Flunks this week
Number of Check-outs this week
(The above to be completed by the Academy Admin)
Unit Instructor's Comment
Date- Signed - Unit Instructor
(All the above is to be completed in time for student's brief end-of-
week personal interview with Director of Training and handed to D/T)
Director of Training Interpiew Report
Is student within schedule of Course? Yes/No*
To be asked directly of student:
"How are you progressing on Course?"
"What axe you having the most trouble with?"
"What are you succeeding best at?"
Director Training instructions
Date Signed Director of Training
Technical Director Report
Comment on progress of this student
Instructions and recommendations
Date- Signed Technical Director
HCO WW Comment
Date- Signed
*Delete inapplicable
33
To RON (Original to Ron, duplicate held at Org for file)
From Technical Director (Org location)
Dear Ron,
REPORT ON STAFF CLEARING CO-AUDIT FOR WEEK ENDING
Total number of personnel on Staff at this Central Org, including HCO
this week
Total number of staff audited this week
(Above and all number 1, 2, 3 and 4 below are to be completed by the
HGC Admin in readiness for Technical Director to complete this report.)
1. Name of pc Auditor's name Class-
2. Total hours received up to start of this week
3. Total hours given this week
4. Total to date
Process being run
How is case progressing?
1. Name of pc Auditor's name- -- - Class
2. Total hours received up to start of this week
3. Total hours given this week
4. Total to date
Process being run
How is case progressing?
1. Name of pc Auditor's nam Class
2. Total hours received up to start of this week
3. Total hours given this week
4. Total to date
Process being run
How is case progressing?
1. Name of pc Auditor's name - - Class--
2. Total hours received up to start of this week
3. Total hours given this week
4. Total to date
Process being run
How is case progressing?
1. Name of pe - Auditor's nam -Class-
2. Total hours received up to start of this week
3. Total hours given this week
4. Total to date
Process being run
How is case progressing?.
Reports are being regularly submitted to me. All schedules for
auditing are being strictly maintained. 1 have personally checked the Line
Plot of each Staff pc regularly and 1 have personally checked out each item
and each goal found on Staff.
Comment on Staff Clearing Co-Audit as a whole this week-
[Note: The forrn is extended to cover more Best,
preclears as above when run off for use by
the Technical Director.] (Signed) Technical Director
34
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 APRIL 1963
CenOCon
HCO WW POST DISBANDED - HCOIECHNICAL SECRETARY WW
The post of HCO Technical Secretary WW is to be disbanded.
Technical reports sent from Central Orgs to HCO WW are now to be
handled by and routed via Deputy HCO Executive Secretary WW to me.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright (D 1963
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I APRIL 1963
CenMon
TECHNICAL DIRFCTOWS WEEKLY REPORTS
At Orgs in which the Technical Director's post is yet unfilled, the
Assoc/Org Sec is to personally complete the new Technical Director's
Reports, as set out in HCO Policy Letter "Important Changes in Technical
Reports to HCO WW" dated April 4, 1963.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd
35
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 APRIL 1963
CenOCon
HANDLING ORG TECHNICAL QUERIES
With the new technical reports being handled now by the Deputy HCO
Exec See WW' it is not intended that technical queries be included. These
reports are Progress reports.
All Org technical queries should be well within the scope of being
handled by the Org Technical Director.
If the Org Technical Director is unable to handle a particular query,
he should always endeavour to settle the matter by telex with the senior
Technical Director within his continent or with his Continental Director.
In the very rare instances where a technical query cannot be settled
locally, a despatch should be sent to Ron by the senior Continental
Technical Executive stating the matter briefly and it will be handled
immediately.
Issued by: Robin Hancocks
Deputy HCO Executive
LRH:gl.rd Secretary WW
Copyright (D 1963 Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 JULY 1963
CenOCon
CHANGE OF ROUTING: ORG TECHNICAL REPORTS
The original copies of all Org technical reports are to be seen,
commented upon where necessary, and initialled by the Assoc/Org See prior
to being airmailed to HCO ww.
For Orgs in Southern Africa and Australia, Org technical reports are
to be routed via Continental Director and thence airmailed to HCO WW.
Delays on these tech report lines are to be minimised as much as
possible.
These changes of routing are made so as to put in the correct command-
lines.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
36
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 OCTOBER 1963
CenOCon
TECHNICAL COUNCIL
PURPOSE: To uphold and increase the Technical Excellence of the
Organiza
tion through supervision, advice and training.
DUTIES: To put in and maintain the technical lines and data in the
Organization. To clarify any technical difficulties.
MEMBERSHIP: The Technical Council is headed by the Technical Director,
and is
composed of any Staff Member who is a Saint Hill Graduate with
a Classification of III or above.
SCIEDULE: The Council will meet on order of the Technical Director:
as
needed to resolve technical difficulties as observed by its members;
on appeal from a Staff Member or Department Head.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.aap Copyright @1963
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 FEBRUARY AD 14
Remimeo (Reissued on 23 June 1967)
Tech See's Hat Qual See's Hat D of T Hat D of P Hat Registrar Hat
Franchise Field BPI
ENROLMENT ON SELF DETERMINISM
No applicant will be accepted at Saint Hill, or should be accepted by
any Organization for training or processing, who is not there oil his or
her own self determinism, but who has been ordered to training or
processing by an Organization, or who has been compelled to undergo
training or processing by, a manager, judge, relative or anyone other than
the applicant.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:gl.jp.rd , 1967
37
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 FEBRUARY 1964
CenOCon
TECHNICAL SUPERVISION CHANGES
Effective on receipt, the following changes should be made.
The post of Technical Director is abolished.
The post of Auditing Supervisor is abolished.
The new post of Case Supervisor is created.
A Technical Council is instituted.
The HCO Area See takes over the function of Technical Director, since
HCO is and always has been responsible for ensuring understanding and
proper application of Technical in the Org.
Part of the function of the Tech Director is taken over by the newly
created Technical Council. This consists of the HCO Area See (Chairman);
the Assoc See/Org See; the D of P; the D of T; the Case Supervisor; and the
Dir or PE. The council meets once a week. The Technical Council is not
substitutable for a Technical Director, since a council can only meet and
decide action, not handle the progress of individuals. Therefore, the
function of seeing that every student and pc is made happy is taken over by
the Case Supervisor.
Initially, the post of Case Supervisor may be filled by the present
Technical Director. The function of Case Supervisor is made clear from a
rundown or hat separately published.
The Case Supervisor is a HASI (FQ personnel but under the Supervision
of the HCO Area Secretary. On all matters affecting cases, whether Staff or
public pcs or Students, the Case Supervisor is answerable only to the HCO
Area Secretary.
The post of Auditing Supervisor is superfluous, since auditing in the
Academy should be supervised by the Practical and Theory Supervisors, or by
any available instructor, under the direction of the D of T. Schedules
should be arranged so that the Auditing units are not working at the same
time as Practical or Theory.
The report line to HCO WW should now be channelled to the new
corporation, Scientology Library and Research Ltd, which is concerned
partly with the maintenance of good Technical everywhere and the
preservation of Technical records. The correct terminal to send all
Technical reports to is Research Secretary WW.
The HCO Area See is responsible for seeing that these changes are
initiated smoothly and with minimum randomity.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
Org Supervisor WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd Authorised by:
L. RON HUBBARD
38
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 MARCH AD 14
CertOCon
URGENT
TECHNICAL REPORTS
All Central Organization technical reports shall hereafter be routed
personally to myself.
All Academy Student reports shall be addressed by the student to me
personally. Such reports shall be on a weekly basis.
A report on the Auditing of every HGC preclear shall be sent to me
personally at the end of each intensive. The form of such reports shall be
as in the past and should consist of copies of the actual auditor's
reports.
Emergency or difficulty cases may be made the ~ubject of cable or
telex. No such requests may be telexed or cabled so as to arrive Saturday
or Sunday at Saint Hill. Only reports arriving Monday to Friday noon at
Saint Hill will be handled.
Full information from and about every student and preclear, but not
public co-audit or PE members, must be sent through to me.
LRH:dr.gl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1964
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 28 October 1968,
Technical Reports, page 92.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 AUGUST 1964
General
Remimeo
Magazine
Editors
Dissern Secs
POLICY ON TECHNICAL INFORMATION
No technical information or reports may be printed or released except
from Saint Hill or approved first by Saint Hill.
Reason: Failures of the Wichita and Elizabeth centres are traced to
this action of random technology.
LRH:jw.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1964
39
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 SEPTEMBER 1964
[Excerpt]
AUDITING AND TRAINING POLICIES
COST OF SERVICE
You must realize, despite propaganda about our expensiveness, that our
services break into two parts.
(a) Cheap, broad services for everyone.
(b) Personal services at a much higher (but cheaper than any other
field) price.
Don't get confused and try to make (a) expensive or (b) cheap.
Whenever I get a plea from some staff to "cut our prices" I now
realize they haven't got (a) and (b) separate and they're confused and try
to identify all service with all service.
Make our cheap services (PE, HAS, Co-audit, brief assists) very, very,
very cheap. Give them away, in fact. This is broad, general Scientology.
You have to spend money to give them away. The book auditor, the Extension
Course, the dollar book, the magazine, these are all part of these cheap
services.
Most orgs err in never really spending money on cheap services. They
get all tied up with income needs and sell only expensive services and
never get a whirlwind of interest going.
Cheap service costs the org money. You have to hire staff just to
administer it. You have to have people to care for it. You answer letters
from book auditors (but the Letter Reg doesn't) and PE people and greet out-
of-Towners with a hostess.
You don't turn such traffic off because it doesn't buy. You form a
place for it to come to like a public lounge. You give it tape plays. You
whip it up to a roar. And you don't let it into your production departments
or lines because it bothers these and upsets them.
For instance, you never give away an Academy Course. You always charge
heavily for it. But you give public tape plays that train the "multitude".
ALL PERSONAL SERVICES RENDERED TO THE INDIVIDUAL RESULTING IN A GOOD
PROCESS RESULT OR A WORTHWHILE CERTIFICATE MUST BE CHARGED FOR HEAVILY.
COURSES
The in between on this above was the HQS Course. Hence the following
training policies are adopted as of January 1, 1965.
ALL HUBBARD QUALIFIED SCIENTOLOGY COURSES MUST COST THE SAME AS
HUBBARD CERTIFIED AUDITOR COURSES.
The policy of gradient course costs is abandoned as unsuccessful.
THE COST OF A CERTIFICATE COURSE MAY NOT BE LESS THAN ONE MONTH'S
AVERAGE PAY FOR THE AREA IN WHICH IT IS GIVEN AND MUST BE IN CASH.
By average pay is meant the average upper lower class or lower middle
class pay scale. (Example guesses: U.K. about f 50. U.S. about $500.
Australia aboutE75. South Africa about f 80.)
HIGHER LEVEL COURSES CAN BE CHARGED FOR AT HIGHER RATES (HCS AND HSS).
Have more courses of shorter duration with less in them.
The policy is-
DON'T TEACH CERTIFICATE COURSES OF MORE THAN ONE MONTH'S DURATION IN
CENTRAL ORGANIZATIONS.
DON'T HOLD STUDENTS BEYOND ONE MONTH.
40
This requires more certificates and classifications to be used.
Example: Have an HQS Course lasting one month. Next year have the
student back for his HCA. Next year get him in for his HPA, etc.
Make the student study at home "to get his classification so he can
enter the, next course" or "get some processing before next enrollment" if
the student seems shaky. Don't hold the student , on course because he's
shaky. Give him his certificate and note what he has to do before the next
one. Hold back classification if not sure.
PRESENT CERTIFICATES AT COURSE COMPLETION.
CERTIFICATES DO NOT DEPEND ON EXAMINATION.
ONLY CLASSIFICATION CAN REQUIRE EXAMINATION.
HAS
The exception in courses is HAS which is a public course and cheap.
DO NOT TEACH PROCESSING IN HAS COURSES.
Teach only study, good definition materials, the philosophy of life,
etc,
HAS CO-AUDIT
THE PUBLIC CO-AUDIT MAY ONLY DO SUPERVISED ITSA.
No Clay Table, definitions or any fancy processes of any kind may be
done in the Co-audit. Only R-I-C.
Co-audits will thrive if they're cheap and,attendees only listen.
Don't try for any results. If cases don't progress suggest HGC auditing at
regular rates "since you're a special type of case".
HQS
TEACH AN HQS STUDENT TO DO ASSISTS, 8C, HAVINGNESS AND TRIO WELL.
Whatever else they're taught, make sure they do the above well.
These were the howling successes of the late '50s. Polling all active
auditors showed they had their best results and realities on these only.
They're easy to teach. They work well.
Use the whole training programme for HQS but make them do these 4
things well as auditors and make them do them when they get out and process
pcs. And they'll mostly win. Try more and they'll do them too badly and
mostly lose.
HCA
TEACH THE BALANCE OF REPETITIVE PROCESSES, THE AUDITING CYCLE AND
METERS AT HCA LEVEL.
HPA
TEACH CLAY TABLE HEALING IN HPA COURSES.
HCS
TEACH CLAY TABLE CLEARING IN HCS COURSES.
HSS
Until 1968 GPMs will be taught only at Saint Hill.
CLASS REVISION
This gives the following table of certificates and classes.
PE-Level 0-actually begins the HAS Course.
HAS-Level O-Philosophy, study, no auditing but co-audit sign ups use
Itsa. Consists of about 60 lessons, mainly about Life and What Scientology
is and how to study "Learning how to Learn", vocabulary of Scientology.
HQS-Class I-Comm Course, Upper Indoc, Assists, 8C, Havingness, Trio.
41
HCA-Class II-Repetitive processes, metering.
HPA-Class III-Assessments, Clay Table Healing.
HCS-Class IV-Clay Table Clearing.
HAA-Class V-Not used just now.
HSS-Class VI-GPMs-Taught only at Saint Hill until 1968.
HGA-Class VII-Not yet being offered but mainly OT type processes
already developed.
This changes classification levels slightly at the bottom but only
because it didn't work out well the way it was laid out. This must not
interfere with the classification of existing Academy students because of
this policy.
PROMISES
DELIVER WHAT WE HAVE PROMISED.
We must do what we promise we will do even when it was a staff member
error. The best way to avoid embarrassment is not to promise what you won't
eventually deliver.
Acaderny students promised on enrollment what they'll receive must
receive it.
The above policy changes were made necessary by the policy that we
must have shorter courses more often and by the following policy, now
possible because of technical break throughs.
A COURSE MUST CULMINATE IN TEACHING A DEFINITE SKILL OR SKILLS.
When you plan a course, plan to have the student able to perform a
definite action well when he completes it. Don't have fuzzy generalized
ideas of a course such as "teach him to be an auditor", "Make him a
Scientologist" or "Make him a Class IV". Whatever you advertise as a
generality, the D of T and instructors must, in their own minds think of
making a student into an auditor that can do certain definite things, such
as "run an assist, do 8C, do trio, run havingness". Then all training
culminates in a skill and so can have a definite ending for both the
student and instructor.
The other knowledge that makes an auditor and a Scientologist is of
course strung out over these courses.
HGCs
HGCs MAY OFFER ONLY WHAT THEIR STAFF AUDITORS CAN DELIVER.
If the staff auditors are trained to certain processes the HGC can
offer them. If the staff auditors are not trained to certain processes,
they can't be offered.
PART TIME STAFF
Clarifying the position of "consulting auditors":
NO HGC MAY "OCCASIONALLY" EMPLOY AUDITORS.
This means exactly that an HGC auditor is a staff auditor all the
time, week after week, or he isn't ever used. The confusion on this is the
definition of "part time".
A "part-time" auditor is one who works part of the working week every
week for the organization and always the same part of the working week.
AN AUDITOR WHO HAS AN OUTSIDE AUDITING PRACTICE MAY NOT BE AN HGC
AUDITOR OR STAFF MEMBER.
STAFF MEMBERS MAY NOT AUDIT OUTSIDE PCS OR RECEIVE MONEY FOR AUDITING
STUDENTS OR PCS OUTSIDE THE ORG AND MUST BE BROUGHT IMMEDIATELY BEFORE
COMMITTEES OF EVIDENCE IF FOUND TO BE DOING SO.
For a staff member to do outside auditing for pay is very serious and
can lead at once to an org's collapse (and has done so).
CONSULTING AUDITORS
For an organization to hire an auditor "when a pc is available" is a
grave source of
42
trouble. The erg is not able to train such staff or hold a standard
and acts only as a procurer of pcs for field auditors. The public stays
away from such HGCs in droves by actual test. The practice is called
"Hiring Consulting auditorsP. It is forbidden.
It stems from a misguided effort to hold up units. It does hold them
up for a while and then collapses the org.
It is unfair to the field auditor since he is just kept hanging on in
some cases.
When this policy barring consulting auditors was first issued, it was
not meant to include "part time" staff. Part time staff is usually composed
of non-practising Scientologists who audit week-end or evening pcs for the
org and are on units every week, rain or shine. 1 am sorry if any ARC
Breaks were caused.
ASSIGNING AUDITING TIMES
THE REGISTRAR MAY NOT ASSIGN TIMES FOR AUDITING.
The most insidious practice the Registrar can drift into (next to not
signing up anyone) is selling times of audit.
The Registrar has no business in that department.
The Registrar sells quantities of auditing and refuses to promise,
when. This, the Registrar must say, is a technical matter and up to the D
of P.
THE DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING MUST NOT ASSIGN AUDITING AT LESS HOURS THAN
12Y2 PER WEEK.
Exception: Where a special programme of 5 hour assists if being sold,
the policy becomes "except not less than 5 hours per week for assists".
It is unfair to the pc to do the psycho-analytic nonsense. of an hour
or two a week as it doesn't even catch up with his PTPs and so wastes all
his auditing.
Further an org can go broke doing this. Its staff auditors are so
strung out in their assignments that they don't turn in a week's worth of
work yet draw full units. It's a sure road to low units and collapse to go
psycho-analyst on us and let the public buy an hour or two a week. Crazy in
fact. I've seen it happen with fantastic upsets. The idea gets around: the
public hasn't "got the time". for 25 hour intensives. It's just hearsay. In
actual fact if the D of P says, "Look here, you won't get any good out of
an hour a week. Just handling your current problems will eat up your
benefits. Take a week off and get 25 hours" 80% of them will. The rest, the
D of P says "All right, it's 21/2 hours a night for 5 nights (or 121/2hours
over the week-end)." And they will do one or the other.
AN HGC PC IS ENTITLED TO A CERTIFIED AUDITOR.
The above is long standing policy.
AN HGC STAFF AUDITOR MAY AUDIT ONLY PROCESSES WITH WHICH HE IS SURE HE
CAN GET RESULTS.
The above policy is a new stress on an old idea. The moral is, run
staff training courses to get staff auditors up to running higher levels.
ONE WEEK'S PROCESSING (25 HOURS) SHOULD COST AN AVERAGE MONTH'S PAY
(AS IN TRAINING).
But Processing of a special nature at higher levels can be charged at
higher rates.
No policies or programmes not specifically changed by the above are
changed. All other policies remain in force.
L. RON HUBBARD LRHijw.rd
[Note: A complete copy of this Policy Letter entitled Policies:
Dissemination and Programmes can be found in Volume 2, page 41. It was
modified by HCO P/L 19 October 1964, Pricing Formulas, Volume 3, page 95,
which was later cancelled by 14CO P/L 18 April 1965, Prices Lowered because
of New Organization Streamline, Volume 3, page 93.1
43
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 FEBRUARY 1965
REISSUED 15 JUNE 1970
Remimeo
Sthil Students (Reissued 28.1.73 to correct word on p. 48,
Assn/Org Sec Hat para 2. [Change in this type style.])
HCO Sec Hat
Case Sup Hat
Ds of P Hat
Ds of T Hat
Staff Member Hat
Franchise
(issued May 1965)
Note: Neglect of this Pol Ltr has caused great hardship on staffs, has
cost countless millions and made it necessary in 1970 to engage in an all
out International effort to restore basic Scientology over the world.
Within,5 years after the issue of this PL with me off the lines, violation
had almost destroyed orgs. "Quickie grades" entered in and denied gain to
tens of thousands of cases. Therefore actions which neglect or violate this
Policy Letter are HIGH CRIMES resulting in Comm Evs on ADMINISTRATORS and
EXECUTIVES. It is not "entirely a tech matter" as its neglect destroys orgs
and caused a 2 year slump. IT IS THE BUSINESS OF EVERY STAFF MEMBER to
enforce it.
ALL LEVELS
KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING
HCO See or Communicator Hat Check
on all personnel and new personnel
as taken on.
We have some time since passed the point of achieving uniformly
workable technology. The only thing now is getting the technology applied.
If you can't get the technology applied then you can't deliver what's
promised.
It's as simple as that. If you can get the technology applied, you can
deliver what's
promised.
The only thing you can be upbraided for by students or pcs is "no
results".
Trouble spots occur only where there are "no results". Attacks from
governments or
monopolies occur only where there are "no results" or "bad results".
Therefore the road before Scientology is clear and its ultimate
success is assured if
the technology is applied.
So it is the task of the Assn or Org Sec, the HCO See, the Case
Supervisor, the D
of P, the D of T and all staff members to get the correct technology
applied.
Getting the correct technology applied consists of:
One: Having the correct technology.
Two: Knowing the technology.
Three: Knowing it is correct.
Four: Teaching correctly the correct technology.
Five: Applying the technology.
Six: Seeing that the technology is correctly applied.
Seven: Hammering out of existence incorrect technology.
Eight: Knocking out incorrect applications.
44
Nine: Closing the door on any possibility of incorrect
technology.
Ten: Closing the door on incorrect application.
One above has been done.
Two has been achieved by many.
Three is achieved by the individual applying the correct technology in
a proper manner and observing that it works that way.
Four is being done daily successfully in most parts of the. world.
Five is consistently accomplished daily.
Six is achieved by instructors and supervisors consistently.
Seven is done by a few but is a weak point.
Eight is not worked on hard enough.
Nine is impeded by the "reasonable" attitude of the not quite bright.
Ten is seldom done with enough ferocity.
Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten are the only places Scientology can bog
down in any area.
The reasons for this are not hard to find. (a) A weak certainty that
it works in Three above can lead to weakness in Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten.
(b) Further, the not-too-bright have a bad point on the button Self-
Importance. (c) The lower the IQ, the more the individual is shut off from
the fruits of observation. (d) The service facs of people make them defend
themselves against anything they confront good or bad and seek to make it
wrong. (e) The bank seeks to knock out the good and perpetuate the bad.
Thus, we as Scientologists and as an organization must be very alert
to Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten.
In all the years 1 have been engaged in research 1 have kept my comm
lines wide open for research data. 1 once had the idea that a group could
evolve truth. A third of a Century has thoroughly disabused me of that
idea. Willing as 1 was to accept suggestions and data, only a handful of
suggestions (less than twenty) had long run value and none were major or
basic; and when I did accept major or basic suggestions and used them, we
went astray and 1 repented and eventually had to "cat crow".
On the other hand there have been thousands and thousands of
suggestions and writings which, if accepted and acted upon, would have
resulted in the complete destruction of all our work as well as the sanity
of pes. So 1 know what a group of people will do and how insane they will
go in accepting unworkable "technology". By actual record the percentages
are about twenty to 100.000 that a group of human beings will dream up bad
technology to destroy good technology. As we could have gotten along
without suggestions, then, we had better steel ourselves to continue to do
so now that we have made it. This point will, of course, be attacked as
"unpopular", "egotistical" and "undemocratie'. It very well may be. But it
is also a survival point. And 1 don't see that popular measures, self-
abnegation and democracy have done anything for Man but push him further
into the mud. Currently, popularity endorses degraded novels, self-
abnegation has filled the South East Asian jungles with stone idols and
corpses, and democracy has given us inflation and income tax.
Our technology has not been discovered by a group. True, if the group
had not supported me in many ways 1 could not have discovered it either.
But it remains that if in its formative stages it was not discovered by a
group, then group efforts. one can safely assume, will not add to it or
successfully alter it in the future. 1 can only say this now that it is
done. There remains, of course, group tabulation or co-ordination of what
has been done, which will be valuable-only so long as it does not seek to
alter basic principles and successful applications.
The contributions that were worth while in this period of forming the
technology were help in the form of friendship, of defence, of
organization, of dissemination, of application, of advices on results and
of finance. These were great contributions and
45
were, and are, appreciated. Many thousands contributed in this way and
made us what we are. Discovery contribution was not however part of the
broad picture.
We will not speculate here on why this was so or how 1 came to rise
above the bank. We are dealing only in facts and the above is a fact-the
group left to its own devices would not have evolved Scientology but with
wild dramatization of the bank called "new ideas" would have wiped it out.
Supporting this is the fact that Man has never before evolved workable
mental technology and emphasizing it is the vicious technology he did
evolve-psychiatry, psychology, surgery, shock treatment, whips, duress,
punishment, etc, ad infiffitum.
So realize that we have climbed out of the mud by whatever good luck
and good sense, and refuse to sink back into it again. See that Seven,
Eight, Nine and Ten above are ruthlessly followed and we will never be
stopped. Relax them, get reasonable about it and we will perish.
So far, while keeping myself in complete communication with all
suggestions, I have not failed on Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten in areas 1
could supervise closely. But it's not good enough for just myself and a few
others to work at this.
Whenever this control as per Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten has been
relaxed the whole organizational area has failed. Witness Elizabeth, N.J.,
Wichita, the early organizations and groups. They crashed only because I no
longer did Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten. Then, when they were all messed up,
you saw the obvious "reasons" for failure. But ahead of that they ceased to
deliver and that involved them in other reasons.
The common denominator of a group is the reactive bank. Thetans
without banks have different responses. They only have their banks in
common. They agree then only on bank principles. Person to person the bank
is identical. So constructive ideas are individual and seldom get broad
agreement in a human group. An individual must rise above an avid craving
for agreement from a humanoid group to get anything decent done. The bank-
agreement has been what has made Earth a Hell-and if you were looking for
Hell and found Earth, it would certainly serve. War, famine, agony and
disease has been the lot of Man. Right now the great governments of Earth
have developed the means of frying every Man, Woman and Child on the
planet. That is Bank. That is the result of Collective Thought Agreement.
The decent, pleasant things on this planet come from individual actions and
ideas that have somehow gotten by the Group Idea. For that matter, look how
we ourselves are attacked by "public opinion" media. Yet there is no more
ethical group on this planet than ourselves.
Thus each one of us can rise above the domination of the bank and
then, as a group of freed beings, achieve freedom and reason. It is only
the aberrated group, the mob, that is destructive.
When you don't do Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten actively, you are working
for the Bank dominated mob. For it will surely, surely (a) introduce
incorrect technology and swear by it, (b) apply technology as incorrectly
as possible, (c) open the door to any destructive idea, and (d) encourage
incorrect application.
It's the Bank that says the group is all and the individual nothing.
It's the Bank that says we must fail.
, So just don't play that game. Do Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten and you
will knock out of your road all the future thorns.
Here's an actual example in which a senior executive had to interfere
because of a pc spin: A Case Supervisor told Instructor A to have Auditor B
run Process X on Preclear C. Auditor B afterwards told Instructor A that
"It didn't work". Instructor A was weak on Three above and didn't really
believe in Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten. So Instructor A told the Case
Supervisor "Process X didn't work on Preclear C". Now this strikes directly
at each of One to Six above in Preclear C, Auditor B, Instructor A and the
Case Supervisor. It opens the door to the introduction of "new technology"
and to failure.
What happened here? Instructor A didn't jump down Auditor B's throat,
that's all that happened. This is what he should have done: Grabbed the
Auditor's report and looked it over. When a higher executive on this case
did so she found what the Case Supervisor and the rest missed: that Process
X increased Preelear C's TA to 25 TA divisions for the session but that
near session end Auditor B Qed and Aed with a
46
cognition and abandoned Process X while it still gave high TA and went
off running one of Auditor B's own manufacture, which nearly spun Preclear
C. Auditor B's IQ on examination turned out to be about 75. Instructor A
was found to have huge ideas of how you must never invalidate anyone, even
a lunatic. The Case Supervisor was found to be "too busy with admin. to
have any time for actual cases";
All right, there's an all too typical example. The Instructor should
have done Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten. This would have begun this way.
Auditor B: "That process X didn't work." Instructor A: "What exactly did
you do wrong?" Instant attack. "Where's your auditor's report for the
session? Good. Look here, you were getting a lot of TA when you stopped
Process X. What did you do?" Then the Pc wouldn't have come close to a spin
and all four of these would have retained certainty.
In a year, 1 had four instances in one small group where the correct
process recommended was reported not to have worked. But on review found
that each one had (a) increased the TA, (b) had been abandoned, and (c) had
been falsely reported as unworkable. Also, despite this abuse, in each of
these four cases the recommended, correct process cracked the case. Yet
they were reported as not having worked!
Similar examples exist in instruction and these are all the more
deadly as every time instruction in correct technology is flubbed, then the
resulting error, uncorrected in the auditor, is perpetuated on every pc
that. auditor audits thereafter. So Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten are even
more important in a course than in supervision of cases.
Here's an example: A rave recommendation is given a graduating student
"because he gets more TA on pcs than any other student on the course!"
Figures of 435 TA divisions a session are reported. "Of course his model
session is poor but it's just a knack he has" is also included in the
recommendation. A careful review isundertaken because nobody at levels 0 to
IV is going to get that much TA on pes. It is found that this student was
never taught to read an E-Meter TA dial! And no instructor observed his
handling of a meter and it was not discovered that he "overcompensated"
nervously, swinging theTA 2 or 3 divisions beyond where it needed to go to
place the needle at "set". So everyone was about to throw away standard
processes and model session because this one student "got such remarkable
TA". They only read the reports and listened to the brags and never looked
at this student. The pcs in actual fact were making slightly less than
average gain, impeded by a rough model session and misworded processes.
Thus, what was making the pcs win (actual Scientology) was hidden under a
lot of departures and errors.
1 recall one student who was squiTreling on an Academy course and
running a lot of off-beat whole track on other students after course hours.
The academy students were in a state of electrification on all these new
experiences and weren't quickly brought under control and the student
himself never was given the works on Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten so they
stuck. Subsequently, this student prevented another squirrel from being
straightened out and his wife died of cancer resulting from physical abuse.
A hard, tough instructor at that moment could have salvaged two squirrels
and saved the life of a girl. But no, students had a right to do whatever
they pleased.
Squirreling (going off into weird practices or altering Scientology)
only comes about from non-comprehension. Usually the non-comprehension is
not of Scientology but some earlier contact with an off-beat humanoid
practice which in its turn was not understood.
When people can't get results from what they think is standard
practice, they can be counted upon to squirrel to some degree. The most
trouble in the past two years came from orgs where an executive in each
could not assimilate straight Scientology. Under instruction in Scientology
they were unable to define terms or demonstrate examples of principles. And
the orgs where they were got into plenty of trouble. And worse, it could
not be straightened out easily because neither one of these people could or
would duplicate instructions. Hence, a debacle resulted in two places,
directly traced to failures of instruction earlier. So proper instruction
is vital. The D of T and his Instructors and all Scientology Instructors
must be merciless in getting Four, Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten into
effective action. That one student, dumb and impossible though he may seem
and of no use to anyone, may yet some day be the cause of untold upset
because nobody was interested enough to make sure Scientology got home to
him.
With what we know now, there is no student we enrol who cannot be
properly trained. As an instructor, one should be very alert to slow
progress and should turn the
47
sluggards inside out personally. No system will do it, only you or me
with our sleeves rolled up can crack the back of bad studenting and we can
only do it on an individual student, never on a whole class only. He's slow
= something is awful wrong. Take fast action to correct it, Don't wait
until next week. By then he's got other messes stuck to him. If you can't
graduate them with their good sense appealed to and wisdom shining,
graduate them in such a state of shock they'll have nightmares if they
contemplate squirreling. Then experience will gradually bring about Three
in them and they'll know better than to chase butterflies when they should
be auditing.
When somebody enrols, consider he or she has joined up for the
duration of the universe-never permit an "open-minded" approach. If they're
going to quit let them quit fast. If they enrolled, they're aboard, and if
they're aboard, they're here on the same terms as the rest of us-win or die
in the attempt. Never let them be half-minded about being Scientologists.
The finest organizations in history have been tough, dedicated
organizations. Not one namby-pamby bunch of panty-waist dilettantes have
ever made anything. It's a tough universe. The social veneer makes it seem
mild. But only the tigers survive-and even they have a hard time. We'll
survive because we are tough and are dedicated. When we do instruct
somebody properly he becomes more and more tiger. When we instruct half-
mindedly and are afraid to offend, scared to enforce, we don't make
students into good Scientologists and that lets everybody down. When Mrs.
Pattyeake comes to us to be taught, turn that wandering doubt in her eye
into a fixed, dedicated glare and she'll win and we'll all win. Humour her
and we all die a little. The proper instruction attitude is, "You're here
so you're a Scientologist. Now we're going to make you into an expert
auditor no matter what happens. We'd rather have you dead than incapable."
Fit that into the economics of the situation and lack of adequate time
and you see the cross we have to bear.
But we won't have to bear it forever. The bigger we get the more
economics and time we will have to do our job. And the only things which
can prevent us from getting that big fast are areas in from, One to Ten.
Keep those in mind and we'll be able to grow. Fast. And as we grow our
shackles will be less and less. Failing to keep One to Ten, will make us
grow less.
So the ogre which rnight eat us up is not the government or the High
Priests. It's our possible failure to retain and practise our technology.
An Instructor or Supervisor or Executive must challenge with ferocity
instances of "unworkability". They must uncover what did happen, what was
run and what was done or not done.
If you have One and Two, you can only acquire Three for all by making
sure of all the rest.
We're not playing some minor game in Scientology. It isn't cute or
something to do for lack of something better.
The whole agonized future of this planet, every Man, Woman and Child
on it, and your own destiny for the next endless trillions of years depend
on what you do here and now with and in Scientology.
This is a deadly serious activity. And if we miss getting out of the
trap now, we may never again have another chance.
Remember, this is our first chance to do so in all the endless
trillions of years of the past. Don't muff it now because it seems
unpleasant or unsocial to do Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten.
Do them and we'll win.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jw.rr.nt.ka.mes.rd Copyright @ 1965, 1970, 1973
4R
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 FEBRUARY 1965
(Reissued on 7 June 1967, with the word
Remimeo "instructor" replaced by "supervisor".)
All Hats
BPI SAFEGUARDING TECHNOLOGY
For some years we have had a word "squirreling". It means altering
Scientology, off-beat practices, It is a bad thing. I have found a way to
explain why.
Scientology is a workable system. This does not mean it is the best
possible system or a perfect system. Remember and use that definition.
Scientology is a workable system.
In fifty thousand years of history on this planet alone, Man never
evolved a workable system. It is doubtful if, in foreseeable history, he
will ever evolve another.
Man is caught in a huge and complex labyrinth. To get out of it
requires that he follow the closely taped path of Scientology.
Scientology will take him out of the labyrinth. But only if he follows
the exact markings in the tunnels.
It has taken me a third of a century in this lifetime to tape this
route out.
It has been proven that efforts by Man to find different routes came
to nothing. It is also a clear fact that the route called Scientology does
lead out of the labyrinth. Therefore it is a workable system, a route that
can be travelled.
What would you think of a guide who, because his party said it was
dark and the road rough and who said another tunnel looked better,
abandoned the route he knew would lead out and led his party to a lost
nowhere in the dark. You'd think he was a pretty wishy-washy guide.
What would you think of a supervisor who let a student depart from
procedure the supervisor know worked. You'd think he was a pretty wishy-
washy supervisor.
What would happen in a labyrinth if the guide let some girl stop in a
pretty canyon and left her there forever to contemplate the rocks? You'd
think he was a pretty heartless guide. You'd expect him to say at least,
"Miss, those rocks may be pretty, but the road out doesn't go that way."
All right, how about an auditor who abandons the procedure which will
make his preclear eventually clear just because the preclear had a
cognition?
People have following the route mixed up with "the right to have their
own ideas." Anyone is certainly entitled to have opinions and ideas and
cognitions-so long as these do not bar the route out for self and others.
Scientology is a workable system. It white tapes the road out of the
labyrinth. If there were no white tapes marking the right tunnels, Man
would just go on wandering around and around the way he has for eons,
darting off on wrong roads, going in circles, ending up in the sticky dark,
alone.
Scientology, exactly and correctly followed, takes the person up and
out of the mess.
So when you see somebody having a ball getting everyone to take,
peyote because
49
it restimulates prenatals, know he is pulling people off the route.
Realize he is squirreling. He isn't following the route.
Scientology is a new thing-it is a road out. There has not been one.
Not all the salesmanship in the world can make a bad route a proper route.
And an awful lot of bad routes are being sold, Their end product is further
slavery, more darkness, more misery.
Scientology is the only workable system Man has. It has already taken
people toward higher I.Q., better lives and all that. No other system has.
So realize that it has no competitor.
Scientology is a workable system. It has the route taped. The search
is done. Now the route only needs to be walked.
So put the feet of students and preclears on that route. Don't let
them off of it no matter how fascinating the side roads seem to them. And
move them on up and out.
Squirreling is today destructive of a workable system.
Don't let your party down. By whatever means, keep them on the route.
And they'll be free. If you don't, they won't.
L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:jw.rd
Copyright @ 1965, 1967
50
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 FEBRUARY 1965
DELIVER
Now that we can deliver, the first thought of every staff member in
every Org from Saint Hill through the main orgs down to the smallest
Franchise Office should be to deliver Scientology training and processing
to every person responding to their promotion. Books and all other items
should be delivered effectively and rapidly to buyers. Certificates should
be delivered to all who earn them. Classification should be delivered
quickly to those who can pass.
The action of Promotion is to offer as many as can be reached
something each of those reached will want and buy.
After Promotion obtains response, one must deliver. That means good
case gains to preelears and students, good reality and useful knowledge and
skill to every student.
Delivery, if not done swiftly and cheerfully and effectively, balls up
the lines, retards growth and keeps everyone marking time.
The first job of the books personnel is to deliver books ordered.
There is no other action to take. Just deliver. Keep the invoice line
simple by simply invoicing everything ordered and note whether paid or not.
In shipping books or such items not paid for, request the sum owing while
holding the first invoice and when it comes let invoicing make a new
invoice showing payment and let shipping relate it to the old. Refund
overpayments regardless of what the customer said unless it's a donation.
Keep book shipping simple. Deliver books. Be sure books are on hand and
deliver them. That's all one does in Books.
When someone buys training, sign the person up, and deliver the
training and a good case gain too.
When someone buys processing, give them the processing called for at
the pc's level whether you advertise you will or not and deliver a case
gain and a completed level.
Deliver. When promotion has promoted a response, don't get chatty with
the response. Just tell the person what it is, how much it costs, how easy
it is and when he should get it; or to come in and get it, and deliver.
Promote, organize and deliver.
We can now deliver technically.
You don't have to "make Scientology work". You don't have "to alter it
so it will work". You don't have to dream it up. All you've got to do is
be; skilled in doing exactly what's taught and you'll deliver handsomely.
you can deliver it, so deliver it.
On a pc who has never been processed, do Level 0. Give him or her an
HCO Board of Review certificate as a pc for that level when it is complete;
when a pc has Level 0 Grade certificate, do I. Etc. Boot them up as fast as
you can. Do only what the Levels are. Issue a certificate when they're all
flat on the TA for that grade.
On people who have been scattered through one or another of the
levels, finish up
51
anything missed in the lowest level, then the next level, then the
next, etc. When a pc has completed IV finally, be sure your staff can do~VI
on him.
To get an org or individual to deliver effectively, remove the
distractions from the delivery channel, remove the barriers to delivery,
detect and get rid of the non compliance to orders to deliver. And deliver
pure Scientology, effectively.
Get a move on. Learn what's to be delivered and deliver it.
Same with a course. Deliver it and certify you have. That's all.
You're selling wins. Deliver them.
The whole human race is about to start going up. They'll move to the
degree you deliver and no faster. So let's get the show on the road.
Nobody now has to do anything arduous. Just find people, make them
want and pay for delivery and then deliver.
That's all.
Let's go.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd Copyright @ 1965
52
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 APRIL 1965
Gen Non-Reinimeo I
HCO See Hat HCO JUSTICE DATA RE ACADEMY & HGC
Tech See Hat
. of P Hat HANDLING THE SUPPRESSIVE PERSON
. of T Hat THE BASIS OF INSANITY
The suppressive person (whom we've called a Merchant of Fear or Chaos
Merchant and which we can now technically call the suppressive person)
can't stand the idea of Scientology. If people became better, the
suppressive person would have lost. The suppressive person answers this by
attacking covertly or overtly Scientology. This thing is. he thinks, his
mortal enemy since it undoes his (or her) "good work" in putting people
down where they should be.
There are three "operations" such a case seeks to engage upon
regarding Scientology: (a) to disperse it, (b) to try to crush it and (c)
to pretend it didn't exist.
Dispersal would consist of several things such as attributing its
source to others and altering its processes or structure.
If you, feel a bit dispersed reading this Policy Letter, then realize
it is about a being whose whole "protective colouration" is to disperse
others and so remain invisible. Such people generalize all entheta and
create ARC Breaks madly.
The second (b) is done by covert or overt means. Covertly a
suppressive person leaves the org door unlocked, loses the E-Meters, runs
up fantastic bills, and energetically and unseen seeks to pull out the plug
and get Scientology poured down the drain. We, poor fools, consider all
this just "human error" or "stupidity". We rarely realize that such
actions, far from being accidents, are carefully thought out. The proof
that this is so is simple. If we run down the source of these errors we
wind up with only one or two people in the whole group. Now isn't it odd
that the majority of errors that kept the group enturbulated were
attributable to a minority of persons present? Even a very "reasonabl&'
person could not make anything else out of that except that it was very odd
and indicated that the minority mentioned were interested in smashing the
group and that the behaviour was not common to the whole group-meaning it
isn't "normal" behaviour.
These people aren't Communists or Fascists or any other ists. They are
just very sick people. They easily become parts of suppressive groups such
as Communists or Fascists because these groups, like criminals, are
suppressive.
The Suppressive Person is hard to spot because of the dispersal factor
mentioned 'above. One looks at them and has his attention dispersed by
their "everybody is bad".
The Suppressive Person who is visibly seeking to knock out people or
Scientology is easy to see. He or she is making such a fuss about it. The
attacks are quite vicious and full of lies. But even here when the
Suppressive Person exists on the "other side" of a potential trouble
source, visibility is not good. One sees a case going up and down. On the
other side of that case, out of the auditor's view, is the Suppressive
Person.
The. whole trick they use is to generalize entheta. "Everybody is
bad." "The Russians are all bad." "Everybody hates you." "The People versus
John Doe" on warrants. "The masses." "The Secret Police will get you."
Suppressive groups use the ARC Break mechanisms of generalizing
entheta so it seems "everywhere".
The Suppressive Person is a specialist in making others ARC Break with
generalized eritheta that is mostly lies.
He or she is also a no-gain-case.
So avid are such for the smashing of others by covert or overt means
that their case is bogged and won't move under routine processing.
53
The technical fact is that they have a huge problem, long gone and no
longer known even to themselves which they use hidden or forthright vicious
acts continually to "handle". They do not act to solve the environment they
are in. They are solving One environment, yesterday's, in which they are
stuck.
The only reason the insane were hard to understand is that they are
handling situations which no longer exist. The situation probably existed
at one time. They think they have to hold their own, with overts against a
non-existent enemy to solve a non-existent problem.
Because their overts are continuous they have withholds.
Since such a person has withholds, he or she can't communicate freely
to as-is the block on the track that keeps them in some yesterday. Hence, a
"no-case-gain".
That alone is the way to locate a Suppressive Person. By viewing the
case. Never judge such a person by their conduct. That is too difficult.
Judge by no-case-gains. Don't even use tests.
One asks these questions:
1 . Will the person permit auditing at all? or
2. Does their history of routine auditing reveal any gains?
If (1) is "No", one is safe to treat the person as suppressive. It is
not always correct but it is always safe. Some errors will be made but it
is better to make them than to take a chance on it. When people refuse
auditing they are (a) a potential trouble source (connected to a
Suppressive Person); (b) a person with a big discreditable withhold; (c) a
Suppressive Person or (d) have had the bad luck to be "audited" too often
by a Suppressive Person or (e) have been audited by an untrained auditor or
one "trained" by a Suppressive Person.
[The last category (c) (untrained auditor) is rather slight but (d)
(audited by a Suppressive Person) can have been pretty serious, resulting
in continual ARC Breaks during which auditing was pressed on without regard
to the ARC Break.]
Thus there are several possibilities where somebody refuses auditing.
One has to sort them out in an HGC and handle the right one. But HCO by
policy simply treats the person with the same admin policy procedure as
that used on a Suppressive Person and lets HGC sort it out. Get that
difference-it's "with the same admin policy procedure as" not "the same
as".
For treating a person "the same as" a Suppressive Person when he or
she is not only adds to the confusion. One treats a real Suppressive Person
pretty rough. One has to handle the bank.
As to (2) here is the real test and the only valid test: Does their
history of routine auditing reveal any gains?
If the answer is NO then there is your Suppressive Person, loud and
very unclear!
That is the test.
There are several ways of detecting. When fair auditors or good ones
have had to vary routine procedure or do unusual things on this case in an
effort to make it gain, when there are lots of notes from Ds of P in the
folder saying do this-do that-you know that this case was trouble.
This means it was one of three things: 1. a potential trouble source
2. a person with a big withhold 3. a Suppressive Person.
If despite all that trouble and care, the case did not gain-or if the
case simply didn't gain despite auditing no matter how many years or
intensives, then you've caught your Suppressive Person.
That's the boy. Or the girl.
This case performs continual calculating covert hostile acts damaging
to others. This case puts the enturbulence and upset into the environment,
breaks the chairs,
54
messes up the rugs and spoils the traffic flow with."goofs" done
intentionally.
One should lock criminals out of the environment if one wants
security. But one first has to locate the criminal. Don't lock everybody
out because you can't find the criminal.
The cyclic case (gains and collapses routinely) is connected to a
Suppressive Person. We have policy on that.
The case that continually pleads "hold my hand I am so ARC broken" is
just somebody with a big withhold, not an ARC Break.
The Suppressive Person just gets no-case-gain on routine student
auditing.
This person is actively suppressing Scientology. If such will sit
still and pretend to be audited the suppression is by hidden hostile acts
which include:
I . Chopping up auditors;
2. Pretending withholds which are actually criticisms;
3. Giving out "data" about their past lives and/or whole track that
really holds such subjects up to scorn and makes people who do remember
wince;
4. Chopping up orgs;
S. Alter-ising technology to mess it up;
6. Spreading rumours about prominent persons in Scientology;
7. Attributing Scientology to other sources;
8. Criticizing auditors as a group;
9. Rolling up Dev-T, off policy, off origin, off line;
10. Giving fragmentary or generalized reports about entheta that
cave people in-and isn't actual;
11. Refusing to repair ARC Breaks;
12. Engaging in discreditable sexual acts (also true of potential
trouble sources);
13. Reporting a session good when the pc went bad;
14. Reporting a session bad when the pe went up in tone;
15. Snapping terminals with lecturers and executives to make
critical remarks or spread ARC Break type "news" to them;
16. Failing to relay comm or report;
17. Making an org go to pieces (note one uses "making" not
"letting");
18. Committing small criminal acts around the org;
19. Making "mistakes" which get their seniors in trouble;
20. Refusing to abide by policy;
21. Non-compliance with instructions;
22. Alter-is of instructions or orders so that the programme fouls
up;
23. Hiding data that is vital to prevent upsets;
24. Altering orders to make a senior look bad;
25. Organizing revolts or mass protest meetings;
26~ Snarling about Justice.
And so on. One does not use the catalogue, however, one only uses this
one fact-no case gain by routine auditing over a longish period.
This is the fellow that makes life,miscrable for the rest of us. This
is the one who overworks executives. This is the auditor killer. This is
the course enturbulator or pc killer.
There's the cancer. Burn it out.
In short, you begin to see that it's this one who is the only one who
makes harsh
discipline seem necessary. The rest of the staff suffers when one or
two of these is
present. 1
55
' One hears a whine about "process didn't work" or sees an alter-is of
tech. Go look. You'll find it now and then leads to a Suppressive Person
inside or outside the org.
Now that one knows who it is, one can handle it.
But more than that, I can now crack this case!
The technology is useful in all cases, of course. But only this ,
cracks the "no-gain-case".
The person is in a mad, howling situation of some yesteryear and is
'1andling W' by committing overt acts today. 1 say condition of yesteryear
but the case thinks it's today.
Yes, you're right. They are nuts. The spin bins are full of either
them or their victims. There's no other real psycho in a spin bin!
What? That means we've cracked insanity itself? That's right. And it's
given us the key to the Suppressive Person and his or her effect on the
environment. This is the multitude of "types" of insanity of the 19th
century psychiatrist. All in one. Schizophrenia, paranoia, fancy names
galore. Only one other type exists-the person the Suppressive Person got
"at". 'Phis is the "manic-depressive" a type who is up one day and down the
next. This is the Potential Trouble Source gone mad. But these are in a
minority in the spin bin, usually put there by Suppressive Persons and not
crazy at all! The real mad ones are the Suppressive Persons. They are the
only psychos.
Over simplification? No indeed. I can prove it! We could empty the
spin bins now. If we want to. But we have better uses for technology than
saving a lot of Suppressive Persons who themselves act only to scuttle the
rest of us.
You see, when they get down to no-case-gain where a routine process
won't bite, they can no longer as-is their daily life so it all starts to
stack up into a horror. They "solve" this horror by continuous covert acts
against their surroundings and associates. After a while the covert ones
don't seem to hold off the fancied "horror" and they commit some senseless
violence in broad daylight-or collapse-and so they can get identified as
insane and are lugged off to the spin bin.
Anybody can "get mad" and bust a few chairs when a Suppressive Person
goes too far. But there's traceable sense to it. Getting mad doesn't make a
madman. It's damaging actions that have no sensible detectable reasons
that's the trail of madness. Any thetan can get angry. Only a madman
damages without reason.
All actions have their lower scale discreditable mockery. The
difference is, does one get over his anger? The no-case-gain of course
can't. He or she stays misemotional and adds each new burst to the fire. It
never gets less. It grows. And a long way from all Suppressive Persons are
violent. They are more likely to look resentful.
A Suppressive Person can get to one solid dispassionate state of
damaging things. Here is the accident prone, the home wrecker, the group
wrecker. ,
Now here one must realize something. The Suppressive Person finds
outlet for his or her unexpressed rage by carefully needling those they are
connected with into howling anger.
You see the people around them get dragged into this long gone
incident by mistaken identity. And it is a maddening situation to be
continually mis-ldentified, accused, worked on, doubled crossed. For one is
not the being the Suppressive Person supposes. The Suppressive Person's
world is Pretty hard to live around. And even ordinarily cheerful people
often blow up under the strain.
So be careful who you call the Suppressive Person. The person
connected with a Suppressive Person is liable to be only visible rage in
sight!
You have some experience of this-the mousey little woman who rarely
changes expression and is so righteous connected to somebody who now and
then goes into a frenzy.
56
How to tell them apart? Easy! Just ask this question:
Which gets a case gain easily?
Well, it's even simpler than that! Put the two on an E-Meter. Don't do
anything but read the dial and needle. The Suppressive one has the high
stuck T.A. The other has a lower T.A. Simple?
Not all Suppressive Persons have high T.A. The T.A. can be anywhere
especially very low (1.0). But the needle is weird. It is stuck tight or it
RSes without reason (the pc wearing no rings to cause an RS).
Suppressive Persons also can have the "dead" thetan clear read!
You see people around a Suppressive Person Q and A and disperse. They
seek to "get even" with the Suppressive Person and often exhibit the same
symptoms temporarily.
Sometimes two Suppressive Persons are found together. So one can't
always say which is the Suppressive Person in a pair. The usual combination
is the Suppressive Person and the Potential Trouble Source.
However you don't need to guess about it or observe their conduct.
For this poor soul can no longer as-is easily. Too many overts. Too
many withholds. Stuck in an incident that they call "present time".
Handling a problem that does not exist. Supposing those around are the
personnel in their own delirium.
They look all right. They sound reasonable. They are often clever. But
they are solid poison. They cant as-is anything. Day by day their pile
grows. Day by day their new overts and withholds pin them down tighter.
They aren't here. But they sure can wreck the place.
There is the true psycho.
And he or she is dying before your very eyes. Kind of horrible.
The resolution of the case is a clever application of problems
processes, never olw. What was the condition? How did you handle it? is the
key type of process.
1 don't know what the percentage of these are in a society. 1 know
only that they made up about 10% of any group so fat observed. The data is
obscured by the fact that they ARC Break others and make them misemotional-
thus one of them seems to be, by contagion, half a dozen such.
Therefore simple inspection of conduct does not reveal the Suppressive
Person. Only a case folder puts the seal on it. No-Case-Gain by routine
processes.
However this test too may soon become untrustworthy for now we can
crack them by a special approach. However we will also generally use the
same approach on routine cases as it makes cases go upward fast and we may
catch the Suppressive Person accidentally and cure him or her before we are
aware of it.
And that would be wonderful.
But still we'll have such on our lines in Justice matters from now on.
So it's good to know all about them, how they are identified, how to
handle.
HCO must handle such cases as per the HCO Justice Codes on Suppressive
Acts when they blow Scientology or seek to suppress Scientologists or orgs.
One should study up on these.
The Academy should be careful of this and report them to HCO promptly
(as they would potential trouble sources or withholds that won't be
delivered). The Academy must not fool about with Suppressive Persons. It's
a sure way to deteriorate a course and cave in students.
57
POLICY
When an Academy finds it has a Potential Trouble Source, a "withholdy
case that ARC Breaks easfiy" or a Suppressive Person enrolled on a course
or a blow the Academy must call for HCO Department of Inspection & Reports,
Justice section. This can be any HCO personnel available, even the HCO Sec.
The HCO representative must wear some readily identified HCO symbol
and must take a report sheet with a carbon copy on a clip board.
HCO must have present other staff adequate to handle possible physical
violence.
The student, if still present, must be taken to a place where an
interview will not stop or enturbulate a class, by Tech Division personnel.
This can be any Tech Division office, empty auditing room or empty
classroom. The point is to localize the commotion and not stir up the whole
Tech Division.
If Tech Division personnel is not available HCO can recruit "other
staff" anywhere by simply saying "HCO requires you" and taking them into
the interview place.
HCO has a report sheet for such matters, original and one copy for
Justice files.
The HCO representative calls for the student's folder and looks it
over quickly for TA action. If there is none (less than 10 divs/sess)
that's it. It is marked on the report sheet, "No TA action in auditing" or
"Little TA". HCO is not interested in what processes were run. Or why there
is no TA. If the course requires no meters the folder is inspected for
alter-is (which denotes a rough pc) or no case changes.
If there are no TA notations in the folder HCO should put the person
on a meter, making sure the person is not wearing a ring. One asks no
questions, merely reads the TA position and notes the needle and marks
these in the report sheet. The Tone Arm will be very high (5 or above) or
very low (2 or less) or dead thetan (2 or 3) and the needle would be an
occasional RS or stuck or sticky if the person is a Suppressive Person.
This is noted in the report sheet.
If the folder or the student in question says he has had no case gain
this is again confirming of a Suppressive Person.
If two of these three points (folder, meter, statement) indicate a
Suppressive Person, HCO is looking for two possible students when so called
in-the one who caused the upset and that student's coach or student's
auditor. There very likely may be a Suppressive Person on the course that
is not this student. Therefore one looks for that one too, the second one.
If a bit of questioning seems to reveal that the student's auditor was
responsible, test that student too, and enter it on a second HCO report
form. And order the other one to auditing at the student's own expense.
In short be alert. There's been an upset. There may be other persons
about who caused it. Don't just concentrate on the student. There is a
condition on the course that causes upsets. That is really all one knows.
When one walks in on it, find out why and what.
If the HCO tests indicate some doubt about either student being a
Suppressive Person, HCO asks about a possible withhold and enters any
result on the sheet and sends the students and sheet separately to the Tech
Division, Dept of Estimation. The procedure is the same for a Suppressive
Person but is "a withholdy pc who ARC Breaks easily" or simply "a withholdy
pc" if no ARC Breaks are noted. "Auditing recommended".
But there is a third category for which HCO is very alert in this
interview. And that is the POTENTIAL TROUBLE SOURCE.
For this person may only be audited further if he or she disconnects
or handles the Suppressive Person or group to which he or she is connected
and can't be sent to the HGC or back to the course either until the status
is cleared up.
ss
if this seems the case, there is no point in continuing the person in
the Tech Division and HCO takes over fully, applying the policy related to
Potential Trouble Sources.
This type of case will probably not be dangerous but quite co-
operative, and probably dazed by having to do something about his
situation. He or she has been hammered with invalidation by a Suppressive
Person and may be rather wobbly but if the Justice steps are taken exactly
on policy there should be no trouble. HCO can take a Potential Trouble
Source (but never a Suppressive Person) out of the Tech Division premises
and back to 14CO to complete such briefing. Remember, it is all one to us
if the Potential Trouble Source handles it or not. Until it's handled or
disconnected we don't want it around as it's just more trouble and the
person will cave in if audited under those conditions (connected to a
Suppressive Person or group).
A Suppressive Person found in an Academy is ordered to HGC processing
always. And always-at his or her own expense.
If the Suppressive Person won't buy auditing, or co-operate, HCO
follows steps A
to E in policy on Suppressive Persons in the Justice Codes; HCO may be
assisted in this
by Tech personnel. I
The point is, the situation must be handled fully there and then. The
student buys his auditing or gets A to E. There is no "We'll put you on
probation in the course and if . . ." because I've not found it to work.
Auditing or Suppressive Person A to E. Or both.
THE BLOWN STUDENT
The student however may have blown off the premises or he has gone
entirely. On a minor, momentary blow, where all it took was the student's
auditor and a few words to get the student back, the matter is not a real
blow.
But where the student leaves the premises in a blow or doesn't turn up
for class, the Tech Division must send an Instructor and the student's
auditor over to HCO Department of Inspection and Reports. An HCO
representative should go with them at once to pick up the student.
The student is brought back with as little public commotion as
possible and the procedure of HCO checkout, etc is followed as above.
THE GONE STUDENT
Where the student can't be gotten back (or in all such cases) the real
cause may be a Suppressive Person in the Course itself, not the blown
student or the upset student.
If the Suppressive Person is on the course (and is not the blown
student) HCO will want to know this. In all such cases the one who caused
the environment may not be the culprit.
The HCO representative calls for the blown student's case folder and
looks for TA. If there is none or for some reason the student wasn't
audited, or if no meters were used on that course, HCO seeks to find out
what the case's responses were to processing.
If the case seemed to change or improve yet the student is gone, HCO
looks over the blown student's ex-auditor for suppressive characteristics
such as satisfaction the pe blew, critical statements about tech or
instructors, case rough or difficult, lies about the circumstances, etc,
and if such signs are present, HCO orders the blown student's ex-auditor to
the HGC at the student's own expense.
If this interview with the blown student's auditor seems to indicate a
Suppressive Person beyond any doubt HCO orders the student to the HGC at
the student's own expense.
The blown student's course auditor will not be found usually to be a
Potential Trouble Source as these are seldom bad or rough auditors, so
questions about this possibility don't really apply.
59
But if this student (the blown student's auditor) is Suppressive, it's
HGC or A to E. If the student gives on A to E he or she may be returned to
course or to the HGC as HCO deems best.
In all such cases where a Suppressive Person is found, watch out for
legal repercussions by having reliable witnesses present during such
negotiations or upsets and take liberal notes for possible Comm Ev. This is
why there also must be an HCO representative handling it.
If there is no agreement to be audited and the student who is found to
be a Suppressive Person will not respond to A to E (because student has
blown and can't be found or because the student flatly refuses), the
student is considered terminated.
A waiver or quit claim is given or sent the student stating:
Date Place
I having refused to abide by the Codes of
(name and place of org) do hereby waive any further rights I may
have as a Scientologist and in return for my course fee of
.......... I do hereby quit any claim I may have on (name of
org) or any Scientologist personnel or any person or group or
organization of Scientology.
Signed
2 Witnesses
Only when this is signed the student may have his course fee returned,
but no other fees as he accepted that service.
The ex-student should realize this makes him Fair Game and outside our
Justice Codes. He may not have recourse of any kind beyond refund. And
after signing can only return to Scientology as per policy on Fair Game.
The HGC audits such a Suppressive Person sent to it on special
processes specially issued by HCO B for Suppressive Persons. It will be
found that adherence to these policies will make Academics very calm.
Note: Nothing in this policy letter waives or sets aside any policy
concerning the auditing of known institutional cases in an HGC. Persons
with histories of institutionalized insanity may not be audited in HGC.
L. RON HUBBARD
P.S. If you've wondered if you are a Suppressive Person while reading
this-you aren't! A Suppressive Person never does wonder, not for a moment!
THEY KNOW THEY'RE SANE!
LRH:wmc.cden Copyright @ 1965
CANCELLATION OF FAIR GAME: The practice of declaring people FAIR GAME
will cease. FAIR GAME may not appear on any Ethics Order. it causes bad
public relations. This P/L does not cancel any policy on the treatment or
handling of an SP. (From HCO P/L 21 October 1968, Volume 1, page 489.]
60
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 APRIL 1965
Issue II
Remimeo
All Instructors Hats
HCO Personnel Hats
HGC Auditors Hats
Sthil Executives
Sthil Instructors
Sthil Staff Auditors
DIVISION 4
TECHNICAL
ACADEMIES RELATION TO HCO JUSTICE STUDENT TRAINING
THE NO-GAIN-CASE STUDENT
Instructors must be alert for no-case-change cases on course and for
"withholdy pcs who ARC break easily", "blowy students" and "unstable gains"
cases.
Even indifferent auditing on even a haphazard course causes good case
gains.
The minority group of no-case-change in routine course auditing and
"withholdy" is very minor. These categories contain all the students who
disturb your course, are insolent to instructors, rant against rules, etc.
You are under no orders from me that you must please them but you are
under orders to report such cases to HCO.
You only use difficult case or student in the Academy as an indicator
of something worse. You aren't a staff auditor but an instructor. You want
proper auditor and case gain of course, and you'll get it (providing when
some student says it didn't work to find out exactly what the student did
that didn't work and you'll find it was never what was ordered).
However, on cases that are very difficult, watch it! These difficult
cases are more than cases. They mean trouble for you from that student and
for your class in ways you wouldn't look for. By concentrating on "tough
cases" you miss the fact that you have a whole class to handle. If you want
it handled, look rather at what these tough cases do to your class and
handle the "tough case" in a way to protect your course, not to make their
cases move.
In an Academy, don't try to handle your course environment with
student auditing!
Handle your course environment with good data, good 8C and discipline
and HCO justice machinery.
Your students now have their old course regulations suspended.
Instead, the justice codes are in. The students are Scientologists.
Becoming students gives them no new rights. And it doesn't remove their
justice rights either.
I've been through all you go through and I have found, by comparing
conduct on a course to conduct in the field afterwards, that the turbulent
student is a pc, not a student. He or she makes trouble. On the course and
afterwards.
The total symptom that alerts you to such a person is "tough case".
This is very easy to notice. Just look over the student case folders
and note that one or another student doesn't seem to get going. Note the
folder you have to work on. That's it. That's your trouble spot on the
course. Don't judge students by "conduct" or speed of study. Judge on
"tough case" only.
Routine auditing is good unless it's been alter-ised. Routine
processes work on good people.
The no-case-gain case makes you hunt for magical processes and fatally
leads to alter-is.
Now hear this:
The processes you have, even when only fair, are better than the
processes that will be dreamed up by students or anyone around your course.
The processes you use, if altered to "fit" some tough case will cease
to work on standard cases when so altered.
The "tough case" (who is also the difficult student) is the sole
reason one has an urge to alter a process.
You must be sure to push routine processes done routinely. When you
see a process being altered look for a "tough case" in the pc or the
student and call HCO promptly if you find the poor TA type case, the "no
change" response to routine processes.
Your approach is to run the standard processes in the right grade in
the right sequence. That's all you teach students to do and it's all you do
in case supervision.
When these "don't work" even when you force them to be correctly
applied, you have a tough case there. Don't louse up Scientology technology
to handle a "tough case". You don't have to invent the processes for it.
They already exist in the HGC. When you see alter-is, look for the tough
case and let HCO take it from there. We are, after all a team, and as a
team we can handle our environment.Your job is just teach and get run the
processes of the grade in the right sequence. Your job is to teach students
to do just that. Your job is to force the student to run the process that
should be run and run it right and to correct any alter-is savagely.
Never let some student tell you "it didn't work" without at once
plowing in there to look. You will find only one of two things wrong:
1. Your student erred in the wording, sequence or application of the
process through lack of study.
or
2. Either the student auditor or the student pc is a "tough case".
Don't let anybody try to vary a process to fit a case. If you do your
indicator is obscured in letting anybody fool about in "trying to make a
process work" or trying to get inventive just to crack a "tough case".
The majority of your course trouble and the tendency to alter-is
material comes from trying to force a "tough case" to get gains. Should you
alter or advise alteration of a process you are letting our side down. It
leads you into teaching students to alter-is and there goes the balloon. It
means they won't be able to run standard stuff successfully. And that means
(let's be brutal) they will miss, by non-standard auditing, on 90% of their
cases, the good people. They will slant all Scientology toward one nut and
we'll be a failed mess like psychiatry with our clinics full of psychiatric
cases not people.
The HGC (and perhaps one course level) is taught to handle "tough
cases". The processes for them are standard, too. You must hold the line
and answer a student's "didn't work" with "Exactly what didn't work?" and
"Exactly what did you do?" and you'll find they didn't do it, or it's a
tough case. Either way follow policy.
You must report a tough case to HCO at once.
For there sits a justice matter, not an Academy problem. It's not your
hat.
You see the no-gain-case, the "withholdy case that ARC breaks easily",
"the blowy student", "unstable gain student" and your tendency may be to do
something original or give the student some different process. If you do
you are madly off-policy. In the ordinary Academy Course you are not
teaching a "tough case" course. You are teaching a nice fast, workable
course for decent average cases. Your majority is composed of good
students. They deserve your time.
So this makes the "tough case" student the odd man (or woman) out.
They make a lot of commotion so one may think they are "everybody" on a
course. They're not. They are seldom higher than 10%. So you risk the 90%
of your course and all Scientology just to handle 10%.
Could I point out that the Protestant idea of recovering at any
expense and considering very valuable any sheep who strayed, was batty. How
about the whole flock? Leave them to the wolves while one ran off after
one? No, please don't go the route by doing that. It's pretty awful.
No, this "tough case" is for the HGC and HCO. And I'd darn well rather
you didn't give the person the technology before he straightens out as
he'll hurt people with it.
Such "tough cases" are possible to salvage. They're just cases. But it
takes an HGC to run them and it takes HCO to hold them still so they'll be
audited. Remember, we're a team. HCO and HGC are part of the team. Don't
steal their hats.
The "tough case" is judged only on the basis of case gain or lack of
it.
The Academy does not send students to the HGC for "slow study" or
dullness or any other reason except "tough case". That's firm policy. The
"tough case" is the only one you send.
There are 3 categories of these "tough cases".
1. The Roller Coaster Case.
The Potential Trouble Source. A suppressive person is on the other
side of this one. The case will get a gain and slump, get a gain and slump
over and over. It isn't a "manic-depressive" as the old 19th Century psycho-
analyst thought. It's a guy whose marital partner or family is going into
fits over this person's connection with Scientology. This is purely a
justice matter and belongs to HCO. He either disconnects or acts to settle
his or her situation. No halfway measures. But you can't do much about that
in an Academy. If you did you'd leave your class to the wolves. Get on-line
and route this mysterious fellow who can't get a gain without losing it the
next day or week over to HCO with a "Please investigate. Possible Potential
Trouble Source." Don't even bother to question the student. HCO will find
out. It's also illegal to audit them so HCO won't even route to the HGC but
will act as per policy on such.
Always err on the side of sending HCO too many students rather than
risk keeping one who is a liability to us all. But never send merely a
course "cut-up" or a lazy student whose case runs well. This policy is only
faintly discipline. It is actually excellent technology to a recurring
course problem.
2. The Withholdy Case.
The withholdy case is routinely ARC breaking and having to be patched
up, commonly blows, has to have lots of hand-holding. As your course
possibly isn't at that level it is too much to handle anyway and you're not
equipped to handle. But even if your course is equipped to handle the right
action is again HCO. Report this student to HCO with the label "withholdy
case that ARC breaks easily" or "Blow type case". And get HCO over to the
Academy. HCO may route to HGC at the student's own expense or get two tough
staff members to stand by while the withholds are explored on a meter in
case this is a real justice case or just a student lunch thief. The reason
for all that weird behaviour is always a withhold condition. You can't be
bothered. HCO, however, is interested in the No Report aspect of such a
case. This person hasn't told all that's sure. HCO can send to HGC or
refund or even Comm Ev.
3. The Suppressive Person.
The suppressive person does turn up to get trained. And when you train
them (a) their case doesn't change, (b) they cheer when their course pc
loses and gloom when their course pc wins and (c) they chatter about the
horrors of discipline and seek to lead student squirreling or revolt.
Their dream is a society wherein the criminal may do anything he
pleases without any faintest restraint. We sometimes get loaded up with
these characters but they run about 1 or 2 in 80 students usually. This
person has no faintest chance of making it unless handled for what he or
she is in an HGC. And if you train such you lend our name to all the
chicanery and injury they do with our tech and protect them with our name.
You've seen this case in another guise of squirreling - chatter-
chatter about phoney past lives when they were Cleopatra and so on
invalidating others' actual memories, talking only whole track to raw meat.
You've seen this one. It's suppression pure and simple and they know it!
And they don't ever get a case change and their ARC breaks don't heal, etc.
etc. etc!
The secret here is Continuous Overts which are then withheld. The
technical fact is they are quite gone and are solving a personal but long
gone problem by Continuous Overts. One can actually handle them if one
knows this seemingly tiny fact. One finds of course the PTP, not the
overts. For one has about as much chance pulling this fellow's overts as
moving the Earth by pulling weeds.
The suppressive acts this person does are solutions to solve some long
long ago problem in which the pc is stuck. To an HGC this is finding
conditions of environment the pc has had and discovering how he or she
handled them. But this is HCO-HGC business. The longer you wait to notify
HCO, the more harm will be done and HCO will get inquisitive as to why
there was no report from you on this. For here is the auditor heart
breaker, the natterer, the rumour factory, the 1.1 and the course and group
wrecker. Here's "Whee, kill everybody!" in person. Here also is the
possible government agent, the AMA BMA[1] stooge. Here is the guy who plans
to "squirrel" and "grab Scientology". Here is the boy. Or here is the girl.
But here is also a thetan buried in the mud. And if you let this person go
without attention he or she will soon become ill or die - or worse will
mess up or kill others. The person is the only real psycho. And if you let
him drift he'll soon wind up in the brain surgeon's suppressive hands. So
it's nothing to overlook.
People who have to solve their problems by shooting the rest of us
down are what made life such a hell in this universe. You have your hands
on the implanted, the warmonger, the wrecker. But still, this is what's
left of a human being and he or she can be salvaged. But only in an HGC,
not a course. Please! Here also is the criminal or the sex crazy guy or the
pervert who just had to break old rule 25 (the old no-sex Academy rule).
People who are sex crazy are over their heads in a collapsed bank that
they've collapsed themselves with overts.
Let's be real. This person throws people back in twice as fast as we
can pull them out! So why arm him with tech. Put on your label when you
send for HCO "No-Case-Change despite good tries with the routine processes
taught on this course that was closely supervised in correct application".
Let HCO take it from there. It's not Academy business.
Your routine procedure on any of the 3 types of case is:
1. Call HCO Department of Inspection and Reports;
2. Minimize disturbance;
3. Hold the student in an empty classroom or auditing room;
4. Stand by to help if things get rough;
5. Help HCO complete its report;
6. Let HCO (and probably HGC) take over from there and get back to your
students.
If you're going to grow and get your own case changes and have a good
time instructing you'll read this very, very carefully and put it very
briskly into practice.
At first you may not agree that you should be so sharp. It may be a
blow to feeling you can crack all cases. You probably can. But man, that's
an HGC hat. What are you doing wearing it as an instructor? By all means
crack the routine cases. But the tough ones? That's HCO and HGC.
The bigger we get, the easier all this will be.
But now let's mark a start in teaching courses that are fun for all by
giving the deep six to those who want a mess.
Okay?
Well, do it, do it, do it.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 APRIL 1965
Remimeo ETHICS
All Tech Div HATS
Students TRAINING AND PROCESSING
preclears REGULATIONS
All Qual Div HATS TECH DIVISION, QUAL DIVISION
TECHNICAL DISCIPLINE
STUDENTS' QUESTIONS
(effective on the Posting of the 1965 Org Board)
1. The only answers permitted to a student's demand for verbal
technical data or unusual solutions are
"The material is in (HCOB, Pol Letter or tape)."
"What does your material state?"
"What word did you miss in the (Bulletin, Pol Ltr or tape)T'
and (for requests for unusual auditing solutions)
"What did you actually do?"
Any other answer by Technical Secretaries, Ds of T, Instructors or
course personnel is a misdemeanour.
2. Any instructor teaching or advising any method not contained in
HCOBs or on tapes, or slighting existing HCOBs, Policy Letters or tapes may
be charged with a crime.
3. Any Instructor in any way obscuring the source of technology by
wrongly attributing it may be found guilty of a false report.
STAFF AUDITORS'ACTIONS
4. Any staff auditor who runs any process on any org pc that is not
given in grade and level HCOBs may be charged by the Tech See or D of P
with a misdemeanour.
5. Any alteration or non-standard rendition of a process is a
misdemeanour.
6. Any staff auditor running a pc above the pc's grade instead of
for the next grade, or running processes out of sequence in a grade may be
charged with a misdemeanour.
7. Any staff auditor reporting falsely verbally or in writing, on
an auditor's report may be charged with a crime.
8. Any staff auditor turning in an illegible report may be charged
with a no report which is a misdemeanour.
9. Any staff auditor attesting falsely to TA or falsely reporting
the flattening of a process may be charged with a misdemeanour.
10. Any staff auditor who receives orders to run an illegal process
must report the matter at once to 11C0 Ethics or Saint Hill, requesting
that the person so advising be charged with endangering the staff auditor's
job and repute.
STUDENT REGULATIONS
11. Former regulations for students are abolished.
12. Students are covered as Scientologists by the HCO Ethics Codes
and may request
recourse from injustice and have the same privileges as ally field
Scientologist.
13. Tech Secs, Ds of T, Supervisors and Instructors as well as
Qualifications Division
65
personnel may request a Court of Ethics from the Department of
Inspection and Reports for any student they find it necessary to discipline
under the HCO Ethics Codes such discipline being in lieu of a Committee of
Evidence. However the student may request a Committee of Evidence instead
if he or she feels a wrong is being done.
14. Any student knowingly altering technology, applying processes
improperly or using technology illegally on HGC pcs, on lower unit students
or the public while a student may be charged with a misdemeanour.
15. A student damaging another by wilful application of incorrect
technology may be charged by his Instructors with a Crime and a Court of
Ethics action must be requested by his Instructors.
16. A student falsely enrolling may be charged by the org with a
crime.
17. Blowing a course is handled under Suppressive Acts. If so
charged the student may have recourse if applied for before 60 days to the
Department of Inspection and Reports Ethics Section.
PRECLEAR REGULATIONS
18. Preelears are covered by HCO Ethics Codes.
19. A preclear may have recourse when feeling unjustly wronged by
applying to the Ethics Section of the Department of Inspection and Reports
of the org.
20. A preclear refusing to answer an auditing question may be
charged by the staff auditor with a "no report" and taken before a Court of
Ethics at once.
21. An HGC or staff preclear must report flagrant breaches of the
Auditor's Code to the Ethics Section of the Org, but if the report is false
beyond reasonable doubt the preclear may be charged with a Suppressive Act.
22. A student preclear or HGC preclear blowing an erg without
reporting to the Tech See, D of P or the Ethics Section first and who will
not permit any auditor to handle the matter at the erg where the auditing
occurred must be fully investigated at any cost by HCO in the pc's own
area. The auditing session must be fully investigated by the Ethics Section
and if any Auditor's Code breaks are found to have occurred in that
auditing the auditor may be brought before a Court of Ethics. The entire
matter and its final results must be reported to the Office of LRH at Sain~
Hill.
23. Charges against HGC or student preclears may also be made by the
Tech See, the Qualifications See, Ds of T, Ds of P, Instructors and staff
auditors.
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION
24. Any person undergoing Review is subject to the same actions as
in the HGC or Academy and any personnel of the Qualifications Division may
charge students and pcs under the Ethics Codes and bring them before a
Court of Ethics.
25. Persons charged by Qualifications Division personnel may request
recourse if wronged.
26. The Qualifications Division may request a Court of Ethics on
Technical Division personnel, preclears and students for false reports,
false attestations and no reports as well as other Ethics matters. And the
Technical Division personnel may on their part request a Court of Ethics on
Qualifications Division personnel, students or preclears.
This policy letter does not change any HCO Codes of Ethics but only
augments them for the purposes of assisting peaceful and effective training
and processing with the exact technology issued.
LRH:wmc.eden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyrighto 1965
[Amended by HCO P/L 27 October 1970, Issue II,
The Course Supervisor, in the 1970 Year Book.]
66
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinsfead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 APRIL 1965
Issue 11
Remimeo
TECH & QUA L DIVISIONS
TECHNICAL PERSONNEL
The first call on all Certified Auditors belongs to the Technical and
Qualifications Divisions.
Certified Auditors are primarily assigned to these Divisions and are
then additionally assigned to other posts.
At times of Technical and Qualifications overload, certified auditors
may be called upon to take up their technical duties no matter what other
Division they may be in; exempting only Executive Secretaries, Secretaries
and Directors of Departments who have the staff status number of their
post.
SKILL
The relative technical skill required of technical personnel is as
follows:
1. Review Case Cracking Unit
2. Review Cramming Unit
3. Academy
4. HGC
5. Qualifications Division personnel
6. Technical Division personnel.
The Director of Processing should, in choosing between two personnel,
be the better auditor than the Director of Training, but both should be of
high skilL
A Qualifications Secretary must, to be other than a Deputy, have
higher certificates, grades and status than other personnel in the
Qualifications Division and must have been trained as a Review Case
cracking auditor in the Saint Hill Department. of Review.
The Technical Secretary must have certificates, grades and. staff
status number senior to or equal to any auditor in the Technical Division
and must, to have other than Deputy status, have been interned in the Saint
Hill HGC.
INTER-DIVISION
Inside any Division (but not from one Division to another) Technical
personnel may be shifted without it being called a transfer from one
department to another or one unit or section to another within the
Division. This is true of all Divisions.
In Technical and Qualifications Divisions such shifts of post are
often valuable in
affording a change and gaining experience and understanding.
LRH:wmc.rd
Copyright@ 1965
L. RON HUBBARD
67
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1965
Issue III
[Excerptl
Remimeo
ETHICS
REVIEW
(Correction to HCO Pol Ltr 24 April 1965
and additional Ethics data) ,
As per HCO Pol Ltr of 28 April 1965, and others of later date, orders
to auditing or training may not be made as a sentence or used in an Ethics
Court or by a Comm Ev or any other reason. Auditing and training are
awards.
A student who is disruptive of discipline and acts contrary to the
Ethics Codes may not be ordered to Review by the D of P, D of T or Ethics
personnel or other persons in an org.
ORDERING STUDENTS & PCs
Tech and Qualifications personnel, particularly the Tech See and Qual
See and D of Estimations, the D of P and D of T, D of Exams and D of Review
and D of Certs may order students or pcs to Review or to course or to HGC
or anywhere in and around these two Divisions without any Ethics action
being implied. It is just normal, done to get students and pcs on the road
to higher levels.
Ethics actions may only suspend training or deny auditing.
Therefore, a student ordered to Ethics for discipline who does not
then give adequate promise and example of good behaviour and compliance
must be thoroughly investigated even to his or her own area and in the
meanwhile may not be trained or processed.
The student, however, may not be dismissed or expelled unless full
Ethics actions and procedures have been undertaken.
All sentences carrying a denial of training or processing must carry a
means of the right to be trained or processed being restored in a specified
time or under specified conditions.
STUDENTS AND PCs & ETHICS
The routine action of Ethics is to request a reappraisal of behaviour
and a signed promise of good behaviour for a specified time. If the student
or pe refuses to so promise, then the next action of Ethics is an
investigation of the student's course or pe's processing behaviour. When
then confronted with the data, if the student still refuses to promise,
Ethics undertakes a full investigation in the student's or pe's own area.
If the student or pe still refuses to co-operate, the student goes before a
Court of Ethics which may pass sentence.
RECOURSE
Only after sentence has been passed by a legal body such as a Court of
Ethics or Committee of Evidence or after an illegal disciplinary action may
a student or pe ask for a recourse.
Normally before asking for recourse a student or pe petitions the
Office of L. Ron Hubbard if unwilling to accept the discipline but this
must be done at once.
If the petition is unfavourably acted upon, the student or pc may ask
for recourse.
Recourse must be requested of the Convening Authority that had local
jurisdiction over the student or pe and may not be requested of higher
authority. A request to higher authority than the Ethics activity that
passed sentence is a petition, not recourse.
LRH:jw.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (~) 1965
[Note: A complete copy of this Policy Letter can be found in
Volume 1, pages 395--398.1
68
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF I JULY 1965
Tech Div Hats
Qual Div Hats TECH DIVISION
Ethics Hats QUAL DIVISION
Executive Hats ETHICS CHITS
This is a VERY important policy. When it is neglected the org will
soon experience a technical dropped statistic and lose income and
personnel.
The most attacked area of an org is its Tech and Qual personnel as
these produce the effective results which make Scientology seem deadly to
Suppressives.
The Suppressive is TERRIFIED of anyone getting better or more powerful
as he is dramatizing some long gone (but to him it is right now) combat or
vengeance. He or she confuses the old enemies with anyone about and looks
on anyone who tries to help as an insidious villain who will strengthen
these "enemies".
Thus Tech and Qual personnel are peculiarly liable to covert, off
line, off policy annoyances which in time turn them into PTSs. Their cases
will Roller Coaster and they begin to go off line, off policy and off
origin (see Dev-T Pol Ltrs) themselves.
This results in a technical breakdown and an apparency of busyness in
these divisions which does not in fact produce anything, being Dev-T.
The policy then is: NO TECH OR QUAL PERSONNEL MAY OMIT GIVING ETHICS
CHITS TO ETHICS ON ANY INCIDENT OR ACTION COVERED IN THE DEV-T POLICY
LETTERS OR WHICH INDICATES SP OR PTS ACTIVITY.
This means they may not "be decent about it" or "reasonable" and so
refrain.
This means they must know their Ethics and Dev-T Pol Ltrs.
This means they may not themselves act like Ethics Officers or steal
the Ethics hat.
It means that they must chit students who bring a body and ask for
unusual solutions; they must chit all discourteous conduct; they must chit
all Roller Coaster cases; they must chit all Suppressive actions observed;
they must chit snide comments; they must chit alter-is and entheta; they
must chit derogatory remarks; they must chit all Dev-T. Anything in
violation of Ethics or Dev-T Pol Ltrs must be reported.
Ethics will find then that only two or three people in those areas are
causing all the upset. This fact routinely stuns Tech and Qual personnel
when it is called to their attention-that only two or three are making
their lives miserable.
Ethics, seeing tech statistics drop, must investigate all this and
WHEN ETHICS FINDS the Qual and Tech personnel have not been handing in
Ethics chits, the Ethics Officer must report them to the HCO Exec Sec for
disciplinary action.
NON ENTURBULATION ORDER
What to do with the 2 or 3 students or pcs causing trouble?
Ethics issues a Non Enturbulation Order. This states that those named
in it (the SPs and PTSs who are students or preclears) are forbidden to
enturbulate others and if one more report is received of their
enturbulating anyone, an SP order will be issued forthwith.
This will hold them in line until tech can be gotten in on them and
takes them off the back of Tech and Qual personnel.
NOT THEORETICAL
This is not a theoretical situation or policy. It is issued directly
after seeing tech results go down, Tech and Qual cases Roller Coaster and
results drop.
Ethics found that the entire situation came about through no chits
from Tech and Qual personnel about troublesome people which resulted in no
restraint and a collapse of Divisions 4 and 5 Comm lines and results.
When Tech and Qual personnel try to take the law into their own hands,
or ignore issuing Ethics chits, chaos results, not case gains.
Keep Tech Results UP.
LRH:mh.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1965
69
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JULY 1965
Gen Non Remimeo
ASSIGNMENT OF TECH PERSONNEL
The Director of Review has first, immediate and urgent call on all
auditors not on duty due to the reason of their pcs being in Review. Any
waiting list has first call on auditors whose pcs have just been completed.
If there is no waiting list, such auditors are also on call to Review.
If there is no call by the Director of Review, first call on the
auditors is by the Director of Tech Service (Dept 10).
If the Director of Tech Service has no use for them, the third
priority on idle auditors is Dir Comm for Expediters.
COURSE SUPERVISORS
First call on Course Supervisors who have no students or whose classes
have been combined so as to leave them with no students is the D of P.
Second call is Academy Admin and third call is Dir Comm and nothing may
interrupt any of these priorities.
LRH:mh.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I JULY 1965
Amends and cancels HCO Policy Letter
of 5 July 1965
Gen Non Remimeo
ASSIGNMENT OF TECH PERSONNEL
QUAL DIV
Auditors are fully assigned by name to the Qual Div. The practice of
borrowing auditors from the Tech Div confuses the lines.
Assign enough auditors to Review to take care of the work. If it is
too consistently an overload, assign additional auditors, but on a
permanent org board basis, not a daily borrowing.
TECH DIV
First call on the auditors of the HGC who are not working is the Dir
of Tech Service (Dept 10).
If the Director of Tech Service has no use for them, the second
priority on idle auditors is Dir Comm for Expediters.
COURSE SUPERVISORS
First call on Course Supervisors who have no students or whose classes
have been combined so as to leave them with no students is the D of P.
Second call is Academy Admin and third call is Dir Comm and nothing may
interrupt any of these priorities.
LRH:ml.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright @ 1965
70
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 JULY 1965
Remimeo
All Tech Hats Tech Div
AJI Qual Hats Qual Div
RELEASES, POLICY ON
Every HGC auditor and executive and every person in the Qual Division
must be
checked out on the following materials rapidly as soon as put on
staff.
The final result of lower level auditing is Release.
If an auditor cannot detect it and if executives do not know what to
do with it,
FANTASTIC ERRORS WILL OCCUR THAT WILL ARC BREAK PCS WITH THE
ORG.
This is the major area of technical goofs-messing up Releases.
If an auditor does not recognize floating needles and TA position even
at Level 0,
he or she will miss the point where the pc goes Release and will
continue to audit the
pc.
CLEAR PHENOMENA ON THE METER
Books
I . E-Meter Essentials, pages 17 and 18, paragraphs 40, 41, 42, 43,
44, 45, 46 and 47.
HCO Policy Letters
I . Meter Checks-2 April 1965, paragraph entitled "Release Check".
SEC EDs
I . SEC ED 65 INT, 29 June 1965, Org Boom in Releases,
HCO Executive Letters
I . Data on Releases, 6 July 1965, page 2, number 7.
2. Former Release Programme, 5 July 1965, page 2, paragraph 2,
Ae Auditor
I . The Auditor, 8, page 3, column 1, paragraph 5.
HCO Bulletins
1. Model Session Revised, 3 July 1965, "Release Reached", paragraph
2.
RELEASES, VITAL DATA
HCO Policy Letters
1. Power Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
April 1965
2. Release Award . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4 May 1965
3. Releases, Vital Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 May 1965
4. Power Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 May 1965
5. Memorandum of Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 May
1965
6. 6 Power Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 June 1965
7. Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 6 July 1965
8. Release Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 July 1965
71
SEC EL)s
I . 47 INT
2. 50 INT
3. 51 INT
4. 58 INT
5. 59 INT
6. 64 INT
7. 65 INT
HCO Executive Letters
1. The Future Programme 3 May 1965
2. Saint Hill Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23 May 1965
3. Data on BPC and Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
June 1965
4. Snap and Pop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 June 1965
5. More Data on Release 29 June 1965
6. Data on Releases 6 July 1965
Auditor 8
1. Article, "The Road to Clea?'.
Classification, Gradation and Awareness Chart
1 . Chart
2. HCO Policy Letter, Classification, Gradation and Awareness
Chart, 5 May 1965.
TECHNICAL MATERIALS OF RELEASE
HCO Bulletins
I . Clear and OT Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
June 1965
2. Releases, Different Kinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28 June 1965
3. Release Rehabilitation of Former Releases
and Thetan Exterior . 30 June 1965
4. Model Session Revised 3 July 1965
5. States of Being Attained by Processing 12 July 1965
HCO Policy Letters
1. HGC PC Review Auditing Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
June 1965
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (D 1965
72
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JULY 1965
Gen Non Remimeo TECH DIV
& REGISTRAR
TESTING
All psychology type testing is herewith abandoned on HGC and Academy
lines (not public lines).
This means the OCA, APA, IQ and tests of any other description.
The reasons are as follows:
I . Testing makes registration lines hard to manage.
2. Tests test only what a person knew and do not test an increase of
awareness. They changed because of valence changes. Releasing has shown
they do not test increased capacity to learn or live or the pc's new
potential but only test the pe's data awareness, all of which comes from
the pe's past. A person knows only what he knew. Releasing and Clearing
give back the ability to observe, know and act. Any data returned to the pe
was data he knew before and was occluded. But this doesn't show up on
psychology type tests.
3. Different tests would be required to demonstrate what increase the
pc has had. The old type test, measuring valence shifts, invalidate a pc's
gains. He feels good, is alert and aware. The test only tests what he knew.
Therefore until new tests are developed that do show the current state of
the pe, the old type tests will not be used. Example - A Released OT can
tell you a great deal of newly observed data but, tested on psychology
tests can only say what he knew about life and cannot tell you what he now
knows because he is just now knowing it. Not having seen a baby since going
Released OT, he can only answer how he knew he reacted to babies. How he
reacts now to babies is unknown to him since there are no babies around to
react to.
4. The tests can be thrown by certain processes almost any way you
wish in very short times. IQ can be raised giddily by rehabilitating the
ability to withhold (DC HGC used this during an ACC with phenomenal results
in IQ gain). You can shift valences on a pc almost at will with "Where
would .... ~ . . be safe?" and other processes. But when you clean up the
pe himself you have what he knew or how he reacted and this is not yet
known at the time tests are given after processing. Pes are more apt to
know what they don't know in an increased awareness, coming off the manic
of pretended knowing or false data.
5. Modern processing by grades is not clued by any test we use. We
once had to have tests to tell us what to run. We now have advanced too far
to need the data.
ALLOWED USE OF TESTS
Tests may be used as a Public Service, on Introductory Evening
Lectures, by Field Staff Members or in any way as a purely promotional item
to give people a reality on their cases to invite auditing.
Once they have bought training or processing the tests have no further
value.
PRESERVATION OF TESTS
All test files in an org must be carefully preserved. They are a gold
mine of Research and Promotional material and are extremely valuable.
NO TESTS TO SAINT HILL
No further copies of pe tests or graphs need be sent to Saint Hill.
Auditor-Pc attestation forms (LRH Daily Report) and Certs and Awards
copies are sent instead as described in Policy Letters.
LRH:mh.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright @ 1965
73
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 JULY 1965
Remimeo
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
Tech Div
Qual Div
RELEASE DECLARATION RESTRICTIONS
HEALING AMENDMENTS
The following three policies emerged from a Comm Ev conducted at Saint
Hill 23 July 1965.
RELEASE RESTRICTED
No person who is dependent for his or her livelihood upon a
Suppressive Person or Group, may be awarded any Release award declaration
or pin as such a person is not released in his environment.
No Person who is dependent for his or her livelihood upon compensation
being paid for physical or mental disability, may be awarded any Release
award declaration or pin as there is too much vested interest in remaining
disabled.
HEALING AMENDED
All students of any course are debarred from visiting any medical or
healing practitioner unless they are given an Ethics clearance first and
all possibility of 11 roller-coaster" (sudden case decline) has been looked
into and any suppressives or bad auditing precisely isolated. The exception
is an emergency involving severe injury or infectious disease, but in this
case the student must be cleared by Ethics to be permitted back on course
or even in the org. This includes all accidents.
Course Supervisors are subject to Comm Ev in not so routing students
requesting to see a doctor.
All students must have permission to see a medical doctor except in
cases of severe emergency.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.bp.eden Copyright @1965
74
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I SEPTEMBER 1965
Issue IV
Gen Non Remimeo
SOME TECH DIV POLICIES
(Preserved policy from former Policy
Letters which have been cancelled)
LEGAL ASPECTS OF SIGN UPS
No persons may be admitted to an Academy or HGC who have not signed
waivers (release forms) of the old type.
All such waivers must include a statement that the person is there on
his or her own determinism and that the person has no record of being
committed in an institution or has a criminal record for felony.
Persons with such commitments or records should be referred to a field
auditor near their home and refused training or processing at the
organization.
Persons suspected of purely medical illness should be referred to a
doctor for competent treatment if such a doctor or treatment exists.
Minors must have their parents or guardians sign the waiver and any
note for time payments.
Known trouble sources as per recent HCO Policy Letter, all of which
remains in force, should be required to straighten up their lives before
enrolling or signing up for processing or should be forthrightly refused.
Anyone objecting to an E-Meter check should be refused entrance.
Thus by keeping the legal aspects straight you will be able to help
the many and not be messed up by a few. For a very few such.people (21 to
be exact) were the sole sources of grief in the 1950 boom.
To have a boom, you have to keep your nose clean legally or you can be
stopped by the enturbulence generated, both in the org and the public. Such
enturbulence is all that shortens your lines or overworks staff.
HUSBAND-WIFE TEAMS ENTERING ACADEMIES
Husband-Wife teams should not be forbidden. But in all cases where
husband and wife are trained to co-audit each other they must mail their
auditors' reports routinely to the D of P for which they will be charged a
nominal but real fee for case supervision.
Professional auditors or co-auditors who use auditing in or out of an
Academy to estrange husbands and wives are subject to a Court of Ethics at
their nearest HCO on any 2nd Dynamic misconduct complaint from either
party, husband or wife, and a penalty up to suspension of certificate may
be sentenced the offender if proven guilty.
During training it is against policy to team husbands and wives
together for practice drills even when they will be co-auditing after
leaving class,
Where possible husbands and wives should, however, be persuaded to
bring another couple to be trained rather than co-audit and it should be
arranged that the wife audits the other wife and the husband the other
husband after training. In this case it is all right to team them in any
pairing under training for drills.
SCHOLARSHIPS
No scholarships are now allowed.
COURSE FEES STANDARDIZED
Any course taught in a continental zone must conform to that zone's
course fees, and it must be approved by Saint Hill and not altered.
OUTSIDE COURSES
As present day level courses require a full Tech Division plus a full
Qualifications Division plus an Ethics Officer, no Academy courses may be
given outside Academy premises.
75
PE COURSES (BS COURSE)
PE Courses will still be taught by field auditors and franchise
holders, which is the BS Course. They result in a BEGINNING SCIENTOLOGIST
certificate.
STUDENTS
A course completion is a check sheet not a time period or a
classification.
It is now a crime to run a course without a check sheet or to change a
check sheet on a student after it's issued~ A different check sheet can be
issued to the next student that enrolls on that very same course. But once
issued, the same one is completed for a course completion of that course
and the student gets his certificate for the Level when it is and can take
his exam for class. There are 2 check sheets actually-Theory and Practical.
Both should be complete before you let a student go to the next
certificate.
COURSE TIMES
All courses in all orgs enroll any time of any day. No special courses
for certain dates will be tolerated in any org. Magazines should say
"Enrolls any time" after every course in every Academy Ad. If you don't you
go mad trying to get pcs every week for ad money and wind up with a
psychiatric ward for an HGC. The check sheet system used now at Saint Hill
for levels fits every course nicely and requires no "every 4 weeks". Saint
Hill enrolls all week long! Further, Supervisors in Scientology must not
personally lecture students on technology. If you want a current check
sheet for a level write your comm-member (HCO Pol Ltr of 13 March 1965) at
Saint Hill.
"CLEARS"
Sell Release with confidence. Only squirrelling on levels and rough
ARC Break handling can prevent it. The total rundown of processes is easy
to groove in in an HGC and should be adhered to violently if you want to
get results and releases. It's no myth now.
RELEASED STUDENTS
Students who are releases have to do all the required auditing as an
auditor. And get it passed. Release is an honorary, not a technical award.
But a truly floating needle release may not be further audited except for
Power Processes. A student doesn't know more about Scientology just because
he's released. He just learns faster. So the released student must do all
his auditing on pcs, subjective and objective. If you don't have any raw
meat for a student to do all his levels on, make the student scrounge his
own pcs off the street or city dump. Remember, don't panic on release. It
means the student like any other student must do all his required check
sheets and go on up, level by level just like every other student.
PLEDGING CODES
Applications for certificate must be made by every student. This
should give how they want their name on the certificate, address, and the
routing of the student out of the org, CF routing and all that.
This application must also carry a pledge stating that the applicant
subscribes to and promises to uphold the Auditor's Code, the Code of a
Scientologist and it must state he is informed of and will follow the
policies relating to gradation and classification.
CITY OFFICE AND CENTRAL ORG COURSES
City Offices may teach BS, HAS and HQS Courses. Central Orgs teach
these and may teach Level courses according to their status of org-these
courses being HRS by Class 0 orgs, HTS by Class I orgs (plus the HRS),
Class 11 orgs teach HRS, HTS and HCA, Class III orgs teach HRS, HTS, HCA
and HPA. In 1968 Central Orgs will also be given permission to teach HAA if
they have attained Class IV status.
LRH:ml.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1965
IModified by HCO PIL 12 October 1972 Issue 1, Sign-Up Made Simple,
which was cancelled by HCO P/L 1 December 1972 Issue IX of the same title,
also modifying the above policy letter, in the 1972 Year Book.1
76
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1965
Issue 11
Saint Hill issue only
STUDENT AND PC REPORTS
The Saint Hill Technical Division regularly receives student and pc
reports from its junior orgs. These should be checked over by Tech as per
usual Pol and then sent to Central Files. Central Files DOES NOT file them.
The Central Files Officer only checks them against CF to be sure we have
their addresses. He then sends the preclear reports to the Dept of Success
which files them by area. Both student reports and HGC reports are both so
filed.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rnl.kd Copyright @ 1965 .
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 DECEMBER 1965
[Amended 16 January 1970)
E-METERS ALLOWED
The Listing E-Meter and Mark V are the only meters allowed for use in
the Dept of Processing, Dept of Training, and the Qualifications Division.
This was announced in Auditor 10 and now becomes policy. ,
Further, students in training must have their own E-Meter. This policy
must be enforced if you expect to turn out auditors who can audit.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rnl.rd Copyright @1965
77
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I FEBRUARY 1966
Gen Non-Remimeo Issue III
Applies to
Saint Hill HGC CURE
info other orgs INTERNE TRAINING AND STAFF AUDITORS
(Results from Comm Ev I Feb 66 and my
studies of situation)
Interne and staff auditor and course supervisor training and the
training of Tech Division executives and any and all staff training of
whatever kind is transferred herewith to the Qualifications Division
Department of Review. (This does not include staff members taking standard
courses in the Tech Div at night.)
The severe drop in the Tech Division's HGC completion statistics which
began on 17 Nov 65 and reached bottom 14 Dee 65 and which did not properly
recover had only one large change connected with it: HGC Interne training
was transferred from the Qual Division to the Tech Division.
Mending a statistic fall consists of locating the change that preceded
it and undoing that change.
This has been done in this Policy Letter by returning Interne training
and staff auditor training back to Qual.
The Committee of Evidence of I Feb 66 revealed that the then Director
of Processing did not believe it possible to alter or change a statistic,
that one could only explain and justify one. It is possible also that the
feeling that one could not change a case , was forced on staff auditors at
that time. On this possibility, anyone taking charge of interne and staff
auditor training should stress the truth that an auditor can change cases
and can change them as fast as his auditing is smooth and by-the-book. An
auditor gets completions in exact ratio to the letter perfectness of his
auditing and his adherence to the exact technology we now have in
Scientology.
The Qual Sec need not necessarily change Interne Supervisors or times
of training unless he sees fit. It is pointed out that he is held
responsible for the quality of HGC auditor performance and technical
knowledge and how he achieves this is up to him.
The Director of Processing is held responsible for the amount of
auditing time put in on pes. Should results not occur by reason of poor
auditor performance on the advice of the Case Supervisor he should order
the auditor to Qual. And if the results are not forthcoming by reason of
non-compliance with the Case Supervisor's orders he should order the
auditor to Ethics for a hearing.
If an auditor auditing in and for the HGC receives an order from the D
of P or the Case Supervisor that is non-standard or is an extra-ordinary
solution he must file a job endangerment chit with Ethics at once and may
not execute the instruction.
The principal duties of the D of P are to get auditors putting in
auditing time and getting lots of pcs done and interview pcs to check
flatness or unflatness of processes. Checking must be done with a minimum
of waiting time by the auditor and pc. The D of P does not check out
release grade attainments as this is done by the Qual Examiner and any
double examination (by both D of P and Qual Examiner) must be held to a
minimum.
The D of P also musters his auditors before the morning session and
before the afternoon session and hands out folders at these times with a
minimum of session time loss.
The Case Supervisor does the folders. The Case Supervisor does not
interview cases but runs them by the book and folder. When a Case
Supervisor interviews cases or discusses them with the D of P or auditor it
has been found that only then do errors creep in and hold up progress.
Therefore the Case Supervisor and D of P must not occupy the same office.
The Case Supervisor may not take technical orders from the D of P. The
Case Supervisor is under the Tech Sec, not the D of P.
The D of P looks after staff auditors and Internes as Org personnel
and is their immediate superior.
The D of P is responsible for staff auditor procurement without
absolving HCO's personnel officer from it.
78
That auditors are on the job on time and are putt ing in their session
time and their conduct and their actions as staff members are all in the
province of the D of P.
The Qual Div's Dir Rev may remove an auditor from the active
processing list if he believes that auditor is not sufficiently trained but
if so must either take action to
further train or inform the Qual See the auditor may not be permitted
to audit, the
I Qual See informing the HCO Area See to transfer the person or
dismiss. Before the D of P can assign an auditor to audit he must have an
ok chit from Dir Rev.
The Leading Auditor idea may be preserved or discarded at the
discretion of the D of P.
The D of P assigns auditors to specific cases. This is done by Tech
Services in actual fact but only after consultation with or approval of the
D of P.
The Case Supervisor may order a staff auditor to review for clumsiness
or to Ethics for non-compliance but must do so through the D of P on whose
actual authority it is done.
The daily summary of results by the HGC is compiled by the Case
Supervisor and
promptly posted on a public board. Auditors sent to Ethics or Review
and pcs sent to Ethics or Review are noted by name on this board.
TABLE OF RESPONSIBILITY
FOR HGC STAFF AUDITORS AND INTERNES
Org Exec See - Full responsibility for quantity and quality of
service.
Qual See - Training arrangements for all Tech Personnel and
Internes.
Satisfied pes.
Dir Exams - Authority to Declare.
Dir Rev - OK to Audit chits, repair of goofs. Actual training.
Satisfied pes.
Dir Certs & Awards - Declares pe awards.
Chaplain - Port of refuge for pcs and auditors when all 6se
fails.
Tech See - Completion Statistic of the Tech Div, Executive
Personnel
appointments, general adherence to plan and design.
D of P - Staff Auditors and Internes as Staff Members, pe
auditor
assignment, auditing quarters state of and assignment,
Ethics and Review routing authority, auditor procurement,
pe procurement, checkouts for flatness of processes, head
of Dept.
Case Supervisor All Case Folders, results on cases, indicating
auditors and
pcs to Review or Ethics or Declare, posting results,
adherence to proper technology.
HCO Area See - Taking effective action on down graphs that
don't recover
at once.
Ethics Officer - All Ethics actions referred or found necessary.
Personnel Officer - Staff Auditor Procurement.
Dir Registration - New Internes.
I wish to point out that these were more or less the arrangements
which existed prior to the slump in November, and which were in force when
I was Case Supervisor.
1, as Exec Dir SH, hold the Org Exec See SH and through her the Tech
See SH
and Qual See SH responsible for seeing that these orders and
arrangements are carried out exactly for only these will cure the HGC
slump. And they will cure it only if exactly performed.
Note: This instance of a slumped statistic brings to view a curious
phenomenon I noted while studying it. Apparently there is a natural law
that "where interdependence does not exist, a slump may occur". This
applies to life, but it apparently is vital to an org. Where a function of
an org does not have lines across two or more portions of an org, the
function may slump.
In this case the action of auditing and responsibility for results as
earlier organized crossed Tech, Qual and HCO, 3 divisions. When Interne and
staff auditor training was dropped into Tech along with the auditing also
the tension went out of the line and the statistic slumped.
79
If this law is so, then any function of an org that is not dependent
on 2 or more portions of the org may slump. And on checking up I have found
that only those functions at Saint Hill which do not have lines into two or
more divisions are already slumped.
Thus a possible principle of organization exists-that a line, to
function, must cross divisions. A staff member, being a terminal must not
cross divisions. But lines of functions must.
This is only a comment but is curious enough to be remarked.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I FEBRUARY 1966
Remimeo
Tech Div
Qual Div
STAFF AUDITOR AND SUPERVISOR PROCUREMENT
The Director of Processing is responsible for procuring qualified
staff auditors, regardless of any action by Dept 1, Div 1.
This has always been the case and always will be.
The Director of Training is responsible for procuring Academy or
College Supervisors regardless of any action by Dept I Div 1.
Neither of these policies absolves Dept I Div I from the procurement
of staff Auditors and Supervisors.
QUAL DIV TRAINS STAFF
The Qualifications Division trains staff Auditors, Internes,
Supervisors, Ds of T, Ds of P and Tech Sees.
No other division than Qualifications may train staff.
Note: A recent slump in Tech statistics at Saint Hill followed at once
in a shift of training of Internes from Qual to Tech Divisions.
Note: A slump in HGC completions was traced to the Tech See and D of P
taking no interest or action in procuring HGC Auditors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden
80
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 FEBRUARY 1966
P,emimeo Issue 11
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
Ethics Hats TECH RECOVERY
My study of a Nov 1965 plummeting HGC Completion statistic indicates
certain policies are necessary in all HGCs and Qual Divisions.
The following errors were found:
I . The HGC ceased to look for former release grades to rehabilitate
and ignored opportunities to do so on the basis that "outer orgs have
rehabbed them all already". This came out in the Comin Ev held on a D of P
of that period. Of course, if the HGC failed to rehab earlier grades (or
earlier life overruns) it could achieve no later grades or Grade V. This
alone would have ended completions promptly on all grades and wiped out the
graph.
2. Invalidation of the appearance of a free needle and invalidating
any auditor who "thought he saw one". This wiped out all release
attainments and made for total overrun of all pcs of all grades. This error
existed for 15 years so it is not surprising that it got back in again.
3. Whenever an overrun occurred, "rehabilitation of it" was done by
running different new processes instead of standard rehab routine as in
HCOBs, i.e. Doing ARC Break, PTPs, Rudiments, anything but a real rehab of
that process that was overrun.
4. Abandonment of standard tech in favour of unusual solutions. This
is always present when a collapse of Tech occurs.
S. One SP was found in the middle of all this but after his departure
the statistic did not recover so one can assume another SP was in the
middle of it still or that the HGC remained PTS and didn't separate from
the SP found because he was so convincing, so reasonable and so persuasive
as to why a Tech statistic must remain down.
It is interesting that (1) above-ceasing to rehab lower grades-would
be absolutely fatal to any upper grades. Therefore this becomes policy:
NO UPPER GRADE OF RELEASE MAY BE BEGUN NEWLY ON A PC UNTIL ALL LOWER
GRADES ARE FULLY REHABBED TO FREE NEEDLE. THIS APPLIES TO ALL GRADES 0 TO
VII.
Regarding (2)-Invalidation of what a free needle is-and thus running
past all free needles, let it be noted that this is an Auditor's Code Break-
continuing a process that has ceased to produce change and is therefore a
crime. This was wrong too long to be allowed to go wrong again. Thus we get
the policy:
AN AUDITOR WHO HAS BEEN FOUND TO HAVE OVERRUN A FREE NEEDLE ON A
PRECLEAR MUST BE GIVEN AN ETHICS CHIT; AND IF THE ACTION IS SEVERAL TIMES
REPEATED, ETHICS MUST ORDER A FULL REVIEW OF THE AUDITOR'S CASE INCLUDING
AN EYESIGHT TEST AND CONDUCT A THOROUGH ETHICS INVESTIGATION AND HEARING.
Note that a Mark V Meter run with too high a sensitivity doesnot give
a marked change when a needle floats. Thus sensitivity must be reduced in
ordinary running and increased only to get in rudiments. Then a free needle
becomes more visible. A Mark V cranked up to 128 sensitivity looks like a
floating needle all the time at a casual glance on most pcs. Sensitivity 5
is ample.
Also, meters go out of 5,000 ohm calibration and don't read on the M
and F "Clear" reads and change of electrodes can change M and F "Clear"
reads.
A free needle, if a process is overrun vanishes with just one extra
command so an auditor must be aleyt.
Please also note that this has been part of the Auditor's Code for
ages-running past a flat point of a process has been forbidden since the
first formulations of the, Auditor's Code.
81
Regarding (3)- Rehabilitation by using other processes-the HCOBs on
rehabs are very explicit. To run another process would clobber the pc. Thus
we get the policy:
REHABILITATIONS MUST BE DONE BY REHABILITATING THE PC ONLY ON THE
PROCESS OVERRUN AND ONLY BY STANDARD HCOBS ON REHAB PROCEDURE.
Re (4)-Unusual solutions-we get the policy:
ANY AUDITOR ACCEPTING AN UNUSUAL SOLUTION WITHOUT FILING A JOB
ENDANGERMENT CHIT OR FOUND USING AN UNUSUAL SOLUTION MUST BE CHARGED WITH A
CRIME AND GIVEN AN ETHICS HEARING. FAILING TO REPORT AN UNUSUAL SOLUTION
ADVISED OR USED IS ALSO SO HANDLED. AN UNUSUAL SOLUTION IS ONE EVOLVED TO
REMEDY AN ABUSE OF EXISTING TECHNOLOGY.
On (5)-Statistic failing to recover after an SP is spotted in a
department gives us the 2 policies:
WHENEVER AN SP IS DISCOVERED AND DECLARED IN AN ORGANIZATION ALL HIS
ASSOCIATES IN THAT PORTION OF THE ORG MUST BE CHECKED OUT FOR OR GIVEN AN S
& D.
and
WHEN AN SP IS DISCOVERED IN AN ORGANIZATION, IS DISMISSED OR REMOVED
AND THE STATISTIC DOES NOT RECOVER, ANOTHER SP MUST BE LOOKED FOR.
It is noted that the general condition of the Completion Statistic of
Dee 65 to Jan 66 could be attributed to the above gross errors.
It is now certain that (1) Rehabilitation of earlier grades, (2) Free
Needle and (3) Rehabilitation by standard practice are primary targets in
our technology for anyone seeking to mess it up and that unwitting
tampering with these three things and lack of HCO Enforcement on them will
reduce HGC statistics and prevent their recovery.
Of course one could also go mad in the opposite direction-(I)
rehabilitate earlier grades endlessly on a pe regardless of how many times
a free needle had been obtained, (2) call any loosening up of a needle a
free needle and (3) refuse to even 2-way comm with a pc under repair for
overrun for fear it violates standard procedure for rehab.
The middle course is the correct course in this case. Relax and just
be very sure the pe has been properly rehabbed to free needle on each grade
up to the one one is going to start by demanding the awards of release that
were granted and if these weren't ever awarded, then do the rehabs
necessary grade by grade. The only sticky point in this is that if a pe had
ever been run on a higher grade without rehab of a lower, one must rehab
"from the top down" at times, tackling the highest overrun first, but
nevertheless doing all of them that were by-passed eventually.
The way to reco.-nize a free needle is watch for one. When it happens
you will see one. Then you will never afterwards wonder. The free needles.
available on a case can all be swallowed up by a failure to rehab all
grades ever by-passed or overrun. If no free needles show up on a case at
all then partially rehab any grade available for rehab back and forth until
one has one of them go free needle and then get a free needle on the
remainder. Life can also be an overrun and a pc never audited will respond
to a rehab of "somethirug overdone". This doesn't mean the pc went release
before Scientology-it
7
means that purpose overrun then jams-rehab of life situations of
overrun consists of hitting the purpose that was overrun and when this is
hit, the pc goes release in PT and was not a release in the past. An
example is an overrun located in 20 AD when the person, alert to
Christianity decided to be good, made it and then overran it for 1945
years. When the purpose was found (to be good) and dated and the overrun
spotted the needle went free. Rough auditing, bad TRs, "letting the pc
Itsa", etc can swallow up free needles. Also a totally ARC Broke meter that
won't read at all with bad indicators all over the place won't record a
read, looks sometimes like a floating needle, the difference being the pc
has total bad indicators-sour, mean, sad, etc. A free needle occurs most
often after a big cognition and the unskilled auditor looks at the pe who
is being bright and interesting and just doesn't see the needle float, asks
more questions and overruns, and the free needle vanishes-when a pc is
cogniting, look at the meter not the pe. And the instant the TA starts up
and the needle goes sticky suspect an overrun and check.
82
As for doing something else rather than Standard Procedure for rehab,
plain ignorance can cause it. The auditor's desire to help the pc if
unaccompanied by solid tech background leads to wild efforts, new processes
and anything but cool standard procedure.
When the person checking out pcs is also the case supervisor, unusual
solutions creep in. The most errors I've seen made by a Case Supervisor
were made after he had seen the pc or talked with the auditor. Cases have
to be run by report only and auditors have to be supervised and their
sessions listened to by somebody else besides the Case Supervisor. Tech is
Tech. There is such a thing as Standard Tech. Pc wild tales and hollow eyes
and auditor hobbyhorses have-to be kept off Case Supervisor lines. So there
must be a person who checks out pcs and supervises auditors and their
auditing performance but who never opens his or her face to suggest
instructions about the pc and only writes down that the auditor is rough or
the process is flat or the process is overrun. The Case Supervisor lives in
an Ivory tower. Sounds strange but unless it's done that way, wild
departures from Standard Rehab Procedure and from Standard Tech in general
will occur. Hell, all psychiatry went down that drain-the desperate
patient, the desperate measures. Squiiielling stems from the Case
Supervisor being the auditor supervisor and the pe interviewer. Oil, water,
being in two divisions, Commies and Fascists, dogs and cats won't mix.
Neither will the personal contacter of auditors and pcs and the Case
Supervisor ever successfully stay crossed. The individual practitioner
breaks down only because he does both auditing and Case Supervision.
Auditing is an organization action which is why today we have Field Staff
Members and HGCs.
Additional notes of things discovered in the investigation of the
plummeted statistic on Completions were:
1. Auditors rabbiting out of uncertainty and so stumbling past End
Phenomena and floating needles.
2. Case Supervisor getting auditors to ask leading questions on Pr
Pr 2-"Ask the pe if he is interested in Medical Practices".
3. D of P: "Find out what the needle is floating on".
4. Case Supervisor: Told auditor that a floating needle was not the
End Phenomenon of a Process in which "the TA had to be run out".
5. Lack of knowledge and understanding of the Technology and not
knowing the difference between such things as Anaten, Secondaries and
Engrams by Case Supervisor, D of P, and so confusing auditors.
Of course the one thing one can't technically overcome is an SP
keeping an area messed up. His case doesn't improve because of his
intentions and overts and fear of people getting better or being bigger
than he. When an SP dominates an area, only Ethics actions can handle.
The primary indicator of the presence of an SP in an org is a
plummeting statistic immediately after he starts handling a portion of it.
Indifferent leadership, even inaction can't drive a statistic down.
Only active suppression can.
So watch the statistics and don't get reasonable when they fall.
Either outside the org suppression has been brought down on that portion of
the org, making it PTS or there is an SP there. The final answer is what
happened just before the statistic fell. If a new appointment was made and
it fell, unappoint it fast. If nothing cures the down statistic find the SP
or handle the PTS situation because one or the other are there.
Completions stayed down for IS years. Then we found auditors never
noticed free needles. Now for Heaven's sakes, 15 years was enough. Don't
repeat the error!
It does work you know.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd
83
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill.Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 MARCH 1966
Remimeo
All Sen Staff
Tech & Qual
HGC CURE (Continued)
Long after I thought the final findings were all in in the Nov-Dec 65
HGC Completion Slump, another really gross HGC error showed up.
Training of HGC auditors was shifted from Qual to Tech Div just before
the fantastic down curve. This change was known and caused a heavy
investigation of the HGC.
But this datum was not disclosed until later:
STAR-RATED CHECK OUTS ON INTERNES AND AUDITORS DESPITE EXPLICIT
INSTRUCTIONS WERE DROPPED THE MOMENT THE TRANSFER FROM QUAL TO TECH
OCCURRED.
The newer auditors began to audit with no real data.
Thus we find the SP discovered in that investigation had discovered a
thorough way to depress a statistic-you didn't require check outs on
processes.
This gives us another vital datum-
IF YOU DO NOT REQUIRE HGC AUDITORS AND INTERNES TO CHECK OUT STAR-
RATED ON THEIR MATERIALS BEFORE THEY AUDIT HGC PCS THE COMPLETION STATISTIC
WILL GO TO ZERO. It did at once.
I think lack of this one datum has been holding back all the
statistics in any org that has not recovered.
Lack of star-rates on staff auditors and internes has been found to
crash an HGC and deliver no service.
Remedy it at once on all staff auditors, internes and supervisors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
84
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 MARCH 1966
Remirneo Issue 11
Ali Tech &
Qual Hats Tech & Qual
Students
Solo Audit Course
Interne Course URGENT
Cleafing Course
STAR RATES ON TECH AND QUAL STAFF
Effective on Receipt
ETHICS NOTE ALL ORGS - It is a High Crime not to have this Policy
continually in effect after I June 66 as it has been found to suppress orgs
when not kept in effect and to crash HGCs.
All HCO Bs and Tech Info and Advices of the following courses are STAR
RATED and the student may not begin to audit until they have all been
passed with Star-Rated type check outs with no comm lag,
INTERNE COURSE (Power Process and HGC Staff Auditors)
CLEARING COURSE (but not the platens)
All vital data required for auditing at Level VI must be checked out,
Star-Rated on the following Course:
SOLO AUDIT COURSE
All HGC and Qual Auditors and Internes must pass in all Scientology
Orgs star-rated all HCO Bs directly concerned with all the Level Processes
they will use on pcs, Rehabs, S & D and various Review actions and the Pol
Ltr$ governing the HGC and Review and any relation to Ethics before being
permitted to audit an HGC pc in any HGC anywhere or to audit in Review.
Note:- The above data applies to all orgs when they teach the listed
courses and applies to all HGCs at once.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
85
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MARCH 1966
Remimeo
Exec Secs Hats Exec - HCO - Tech - Qual
ES Comm Qual Hat Ethics
HCO See Hat
Dir I & R Hat URGENT
Ethics Hat
Tech & Qual Hats
LRH Comm Hat HIGH CRIME
Effective I June 1966
In any instance of a heavily failing statistic in Tech or Qual or a
chronically low statistic in Tech or Qual in an org or in any org which has
chronically low statistics in all divisions:
The Ethics Officer must look for this policy violation which is the
highest crime in Tech and Qual:
TOLERATING THE ABSENCE OF, OR NOT INSISTING UPON STAR-RATED CHECK OUTS
ON ALL PROCESSES AND THEIR IMMEDIATE TECHNOLOGY AND ON RELEVANT POLICY
LETTERS ON HGC INTERNES OR STAFF AUDITORS IN THE TECH DIV OR STAFF AUDITORS
OR INTERNES IN THE QUAL DIV FOR THE LEVELS AND ACTIONS THEY WILL USE BEFORE
PERMITTING THEM TO AUDIT ORG PCS AND ON SUPERVISORS IN TECH AND QUAL WHO
INSTRUCT OR EXAMINE OR FAILING TO INSIST UPON THIS POLICY OR PREVENTING
THIS POLICY FROM GOING INTO EFFECT OR MINIMIZING THE CHECK OUTS OR LISTS.
If an Ethics Officer or any person in HCO Dept 3 discovers this high
crime to exist he must report it at once to the HCO Area Secretary.
The HCO Area Secretary must at once order a thorough investigation
into any and all persons who might have instigated this high crime and
report the matter to the HCO Exec Sec.
The HCO Exec See must then convene a Committee of Evidence with the
persons accused as interested parties and must locate amongst them the
suppressive or suppressives by the "reasonableness" of their defence, state
of case and other signs.
The Committee of Evidence must declare the located S.P. suppressive by
HCO Ethics Order and dismiss.
If any Ethics Officer, Director of I & R or HCO Area Secretary fails
to obtain co-operation by superiors in carrying out this Policy Letter
quickly then he or she must inform the LRH Communicator.
The LRH Communicator must then cable full particulars to Worldwide.
The Worldwide AdCouncil must then carry out this policy letter
expeditiously and at any cost.
If the HCO personnel making this discovery cannot obtain action in any
other way he or she must go outside the org and cable LRH Comm WW and his
actions and costs in so cabling will be reimbursed on claim to WW and his
post will be fully protected.
86
If the AdCouncil WW suspects this policy not to be in full force in
any org despite assurances an HCO WW personnel must be sent to that org to
investigate and may be deputized to remove either or both Exec Secs of that
org by Comm Ev on the spot or at WW.
It has been discovered that failure to check out, Star Rated, the Tech
and Qual HCO Bs applying to levels being audited or taught or examined and
their processes and the data used in Review and relevant policy on those
using the material in orgs results in a crashed Division 4 completion
statistic, crashed income and low statistics throughout and a failing org
and was the reason through 1965 for struggling orgs-the public would not
pay more for service than it was worth to them and with this policy out,
the service was not worth very much.
It has been found that a suppressive person will discourage this check
out policy as one of his first actions.
This policy applies whether an auditor has been trained or not with
star-rated check outs. Staff and Review auditor and Supervisor are special
technical status grades and one cannot consider this double training.
"Star-Rated" means = 100 percent letter perfect in knowing and
understanding, demonstrating and being able to repeat back the material
with no comm lag,
Org Exec Sec Communicator. for Qual WW is the final authority for any
check sheets on this matter and is responsible for preparing and
standardizing them from time to. time. But the lack of a check sheet from
ES Comm Qual WW does not set aside any provision or penalty of this policy
letter.
This policy letter is issued in the complete knowledge that the
absence of this policy in full effect is the primary reason for orgs not
growing and is based on actual experience.
The only higher crime I could think of would be to pretend to have an
org but have no technical personnel on staff in Tech or Qual. That is
suppressive also and will crash an org. Handle it similarly to the above.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden
[Added to by HCO P/L 21, November 1971, Scientology Courses
Examination Policy, Volume 5-page 139, which made it firm policy that
anyone examining a student for certification on any Scientology Course,
including Admin, must have first star-rated related Policies, HCO Bs or
other issues before writing or grading exams. I
(Note: In the original issue of this Policy Letter the words "THE
ABSENCE OF" in the first line of the 3rd paragraph were omitted. However,
in a poster issued by Flag in 1971 quoting this Capitalized paragraph of
the "High Crime" P/L, these words were included, and accordingly have been
added in this printing. - Ed.)
87
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 JULY 1966
Remimeo
TECH vs QUAL
The general rule is laid down that, except for Declaration of Grade,
Certificate or Class, Tech shall attempt to handle all it can on all cases
and students and only when Tech personnel consider it hopeless (or the
student or pc is ready for Declare, Cert or Grade) shall the student or pc
be sent to Qual.
"Review flat" is not now to be considered mandatory. The pc previously
has been sent to the D of P and then to Qual to verify that a flat point
has been reached. This routing is ended. If the auditor or Case Supervisor,
either one, wants a check for the flatness of a process, only then is the
pc sent to the D of P (not to Qual also). If the flatness indicates a grade
has been attained the usual action is just send from auditor to examiner in
Qual.
To routinely and always send a pc for a flatness of process check is
actually a violation of the Fast Flow Management System. It checks things
which may be all right.
Review, when it finds a rehab incomplete, should quickly route the pe
back to Tech. As a general rule, only when Tech is utterly at a loss does
Review take over and audit the pc.
The Case Supervisor should keep and post HGC auditor "statistics"
announcing goofs and wins. The Case Supervisor must require a retrain of an
HGC auditor whenever a pc winds up being audited in Review. I always send
the auditor to Interne Training for retrain whenever I have to send a pe to
Review.
Processing today is very simple but very exact. The data is all there.
That's the only data. Don't add any. Just do what the HCOBs say. There are
no exceptional cases.
HGC auditors who over-run just don't know what a free needle is. They
should ask a Clear to hold the cans so they can see one.
When you check for flatness on a process gone to free needle you may
overr un it. For the auditor, the D of P and the Examiner and Review to
check, each one, for flatness, will goof up a flat point every time.
For the Case Supervisor to neglect ordering retraining of his auditors
when he finds pcs not doing well is a grave omission.
For Tech not to carry on trying and limply turn all bits and pieces
over to Qual is to train Tech into weakness.
Two rules:
In Tech, when all else fails, then hand it over to Review.
In any difficulty, when all else fails, do what Ron says.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:lb-r.cden Copyright (D 1966
89
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I AUGUST 1967
Remimeo
BPI SECOND DYNAMIC RULES
It has never been any part of my plans to regulate or attempt to
regulate the private lives of individuals.
Whenever this has occurred it has not resulted in any improved
condition.
All I have been interested in, so far as Scientology law was
concerned, was in removing retarding elements or practices from the path of
progress toward freedom.
Man is aberrated. Otherwise we would not be here. He is hard to rescue
as he has been carefully "trained" to do himself harm.
I have no concern about the second dynamic activities of
Scientologists save only where they bring suffering to others and so impede
our forward progress.
Therefore ALL FORMER RULES, REGULATIONS AND POLICIES RELATING TO THE
SECOND DYNAMIC ACTIVITIES OF STUDENTS, PRECLEARS, STAFF AND SCIENTOLOGISTS
ARE CANCELLED.
In their place, any husband, wife or individual whose processing or
training has been impeded or interrupted beyond any reasonable doubt by
second dynamic activities on the part of staff or associates or their
husband or wife may have recourse to the CHAPLAIN'S COURT, Division 6, of
any Scientology organization, and any case heard, if it be proven beyond
reasonable doubt that, without provocation, a person's training or
processing has been impeded by the irregular second dynamic actions of the
defendant, a fine of not less than E 1000 sterling or greater than L5000
sterling shall be awarded the plaintiff and until paid, the defendant shall
have no further training or processing.
This policy is not retroactive (occurrences before this date may not
be tried).
No Ethics order shall be issued by reason of second dynamic
activities. All Ethics orders now in force relating to the second dynamic
are cancelled.
No staff member may be punished, transferred or dismissed because of
second dynamic activities.
No student or preclear may be suspended or dismissed because of second
dynamic activities.
Nothing in this policy letter lays aside our actual knowledge of the
consequences of second dynamic overts against husbands and wives being
processed or the degree to which training or processing can be impeded for
someone because of another's acts.
We are also aware that those org staffs which are over active on the
second dynamic seldom prosper.
We also retain any and all technology relating to the second dynamic.
One of Man's primary areas of aberration is the second dynamic.
Processing, not discipline, is the only thing which eradicates
aberration of such
depth.
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:jp.cden
89
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 SEPTEMBER 1967
Remimeo All Tech & Qual Staff Ethics
CONFIDENTIAL DATA
I No Ethics Chit written by anyone should contain data which is
classified as confidential.
2- Such material so classified is contained in Power Processes,
Clearing Course and Advanced Courses.
Qual Sec - Helen Pollen
HCO Area See - Irene Dunleavy
Exec Council SH - J.J. Delance
- Joan McNocher
- Ken Urquhart
Exec Council WW - Tony Dunleavy
- Eunice Ford
- Ken Delderfield
Guardian Comm WW - Corrie Ellis
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.cden The Guardian WW
Copyright Q 1967 for
by L Ron Hubbard
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIO
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinst
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 N(
Remirneo
Info Int E/0 WW
Local E/Os
Info Int SPEOWW OUT TECH
ANY AND ALL published mimeoed out tech processes or "recommendations"
or "interpretations" not written or signed by myself must be sent to the
International Ethics Officer at WW with any information on their authorship
or origination so that Conditions may be assigned and broad cancellation
can be issued by the International Ethics Officer.
The reason for this is the discovery of a process on page one of the
Org Exec Course checksheet of 21 Sept 67 which would ruin any student's
case, his interest in admin and which would deter enrolment.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.eden Copyright (D 1967
90
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 MAY 1968
(Reissued from Flag Order 800)
Remimeo
SCIENTOLOGY TECHNOLOGY
There is one Tech and that is Standard Tech.
Unfortunately there is other Tech around. This other Tech is a
Liability. Other Tech is defined as any tech which is not-standard Tech.
Let's start punching this hard.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH-.sb.js.rd Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 AUGUST 1968
Remimeo All Franchise and Orgs Division 6 Hats
DISSEMINATION
A PC RARELY DISSEMINATES. ONLY AN AUDITOR DISSEMINATES.
We know this from experience.
Thus an Org which makes more pcs than auditors will tend to collapse.
Also an Org which makes only pcs will collapse.
So always make an equal number of auditors and pcs or more auditors
than pcs.
This will ensure dissemination to the field as the auditor will
understand what he is disseminating and will therefore be successful.
Public Aide
for
LRH:ei.Td
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
91
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 OCTOBER 1968
(Cancels HCO PL 20 March 1964)
Remimeo
TECHNICAL REPORTS
The Class VIII's have been assigned to Orgs to ensure that Standard
Tech goes in and stays in. They are responsible for ensuring that all cases
are properly supervised.
Orgs with Class VIII auditors do not send copies of auditing reports
to LRH or WW. Orgs without Class VIII's continue to send them to LRH via
Tech See WW.
Orgs with Class VIII's should send in a weekly report regarding Tech
results, and the Org LRH Comm should randomly select reports of one
preclear being audited in Tech and in Qual to send to Tech See WW for
inspection.
All Academy Student reports shall be addressed by the student to LRH
personally and sent via Tech See WW. Such reports shall be on a weekly
basis.
Tech See WW Mark Jones
Qual See WW Mark Jones
HCO Area See WW Edith Hoyseth
Ad Council WW Rodger Wright
Chairman
LRH Comm WW Rodger Wright
D/Guardian WW Jane Kember
Guardian WW Mary Sue Hubbard
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ei.rd Founder
Copyright 1968
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 NOVEMBER 1968
Remimeo
SENIOR POLICY
We always deliver what we promise.
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:ei.rd
92
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
UIV
EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVE FROM
L. RON HUBBARD
FO
LRH ED 81INT Date 20 January 1969
A VITAL TARGET
Trained Auditor Programme
It is vital that we step up auditor training in all orgs.
The VITAL target is
TO HAVE TRAINED AUDITORS IN PLENTY IN ORGS AND FIELD.
My data is that we must have specialized in preclears for quite a
while, that staff training as auditors went out and that we began to
develop backlogs of pcs.
Backlogs of pcs must be avoided.
Trained auditors by far make the better executives. Thus staff
auditors get promoted to execs and the staff auditor vacancies aren't
filled.
We used to allow for this. Many Academy graduates came on staff as
staff auditors routinely. HGC auditors then got promoted to executives.
Staff training programmes permitted staffs to get to be trained
auditors on a part time schedule.
In London we used to hire typists and clerks from employment agencies.
A large percentage of them, with no urging at all, saved up and took
advantage of their 50% staff discount and got their HPA, then came back on
as staff auditors and went on to other staff posts. Either training got too
long or too involved or the route got barriered.
In any event each org should take responsibility for getting the route
unplugged. People who came on staff came from the public as just-a-job or
from the Scientology field, got trained, became staff auditors, etc.
I know in orgs where I have worked I usually had to unblock hiring.
For some reason I had to do it. All sorts of barriers got put up to people
who wanted on staff. I used to hear of people and by pass and get them to
be put on.
Also, I used to order a sign in PE to get PE attendees to join staff
and a sign in the Academy to get graduates to join staff. This was SOP.
When an org is signing up more pcs than students it will go broke or
be poor.
The 50% scholarship offer (50% of fees) mailed out used to work well.
It could be mailed to FSMs to hand out to prospective students. If the
scholarship only applied from Dianetics to HPA and not to segments, it
would boom training.
Some orgs just plain try to be clinics. The public loves to take no
responsibility and be given it all as pes. When they get to Solo and above
they wish to hell they had become real auditors.
You can jam the training line by making an Academy Course long and as
heavy as anSHSBC.
The REAL design of training (if anybody would really do it this way)
is:
Dianetics: Fast Course on Technique. Slide by on philosophic data.
93
Academy: Fast Courses on Technique. Learn all the motions.
SHSBC: A course taking in ALL the data, philosophic, with polishing of
Technique.
Class VIII: Sharp rapid STANDARDIZATION of auditing and case
supervising with 100% gains.
When you try to standardize Class VIII style the Dianetic course, or
SHSBC, the Academy courses, you slow people down to nowhere.
Now that we have Ethics in and VIlls in every org WE CAN RESTORE
ATTESTATION. When we knocked it off we also knocked down our stats. Ron's
Journal 1968 will RESTORE ATTESTATION OF GRADES AND CLASSES. This will
speed up training again and raise stats. It works only if you keep Ethics
in.
This is my immediate contribution to MORE AUDITORS.
After all, early auditors weren't all that well trained. And training
parallels the progress time track of the subject!
BUT as we EXPAND we will CONTINUALLY FACE THE PROBLEM OF AUDITOR
SHORTAGE.
Therefore YOU make a contribution on your end of it by making the
lines open. Post staff procurement signs. Get staff trained up. Get the
public to get trained.
Executives who aren't trained auditors have the highest mortality rate
as executives. How can anyone really guide a Scientology org who doesn't
know the subject.
So let's keep this Target up there as a big Target:
TO HAVE TRAINED AUDITORS IN PLENTY IN ORGS AND FIELD.
Train staffs is part of the Target.
Sign up more students than pcs is part of it.
Push Training in Promotion is part of it.
We used to tell people that training as an auditor made one more able
to handle life and his fellows. It didn't mean one became a professional
auditor and hung out a shingle. We better hit this campaign again.
Anyway, it's a key Target, a big one. It is a Vital Target, what we
have to do to make things go at all.
13j,
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
4
94
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JANUARY 1969
Issue 11
Remimeo
MAINTAINING STANDARD TECH
Although by Ron's words Sea Org Missions will bepolicing the correct
exact application of standard technology, a safeguard against violation of
the standard of financial nature is hereby established.
This has been done to increase organisational awareness that standard
tech is not solely the responsibility of the auditor and case supervisor.
They need to be backed in their efforts by the full organisational
structure and the members this comprises.
STANDARD TECH IS CORRECT EXACT DUPLICATION OF SOURCE IN APPLICATION
AND IS ACCOMPLISHED BY COMPLETE ORGANISATIONAL ENDEAVOUR.
Each org member is to some extent responsible for the technology Ron
gave us.
As from the day of this policy letter every Org employing Class VIII
technical staff, is going to be fined the sum of S 1000.00 for every GROSS
goof which was found allowed to slide by unhandled. The keyword is
UNHANDLED. Goofs, although they shouldn't occur may sometimes happen, but
standard tech resolves all cases including goofs. However a case allowed to
leave the Org attested to as complete, with unharldled out tech on the case
is not merely a goof but a false report.
In such cases, were they ever to occur, a fine will be levied, payable
AT ONCE to the Sea Org. Arid this money is payable out of the Financial
Planning allocation. So it will really be in all members' interest that out
tech does not occur, and in the event of it ever happening to take strong
action against the sinning party.
Tech is veTy very simple, but also very very accurate since the advent
of VIII. Tech is tech, it is IN or it isn't.
RON'S TECH IS STANDARD TECH AND HAS No VARIA13LES OR ARBITRARIES. IT
IS RIGHT OR IT IS WRONG WITHOUT ANY SHADES OR GRADIENT IN BETWEEN. And that
is that.
As Standard Tech is IN and winning it is not expected that any fine
will ever have to be levied, and none will be retroactively. But they will
be in any case found in future where violation is found unhandled.
Ron gave us standard tech, you apply it and we will police it. And so
we'll all
grow stronger.
Lt. O.J. Roos
Flag C/S
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:OJR.Idm.ei.rd Founder
Copyright (D 1969
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 OCTOBER 1969
Remimeo
Tech & Qual Personnel
TECHNICAL DIVISIONS -
PROMOTION AND RESPONSIBILITY
(Originally issued as ED 318 INT)
1. All Personnel of Tech Divisions are reminded that it has long
been a function of this Division to promote itself.
2. Foremost and most obvious is the old dictum, that when Tech is
in, bodies will come flooding in. Happy, satisfied preclears and
students will not be quiet about Scientology wins. They will
disseminate. Keeping the Promotional Points for their Departments in
an alert and realistic way will do the rest.
3. Letters of Procurement by the Departments of Processing and
Training are very effective. Personnel of Tech do not sit back and
expect Dissem to bring in all the students and preclears. They get
busy themselves writing, telephoning, scheduling and Tech Services
always gets advanced bookings in earlier. And they demand that Dissem
get their enrolments up.
4. Directors of Processing get busy keeping Auditor Procurement
going and work with Qual to get Training Programmes in for already
Classified Auditors in the Org and in the area. And they demand that
Personnel Procurement bring in auditors and train and recruit auditors
in the Academy. No HGC should ever be short handed for auditors.
Policy clearly allows for any qualified auditor in the Org to be used
when necessary (P/L 28th April, 1965 "Technical Personnel"). But with
good Auditor promotion and training this need not become necessary.
5. Tech Personnel, including Supervisors and Auditors take full
responsibility to see that they themselves keep trained and checked
out on all necessary material for their departments. They don't wait
for Qual to remind them or for Ethics to take action first. They make
sure that Qual does train them and that there is no violation of High
Crimes Policy of star rated checkouts (P/L 8th March, 1966 "High
Crime").
6. Tech Services Personnel do not wait until Auditors or Students
complain about lack of material-or wait for Boards of Investigation to
do their job. They make certain that materials are provided and in
good condition. They keep materials supplied to Auditors and Students
and make certain that lines and routing is properly done. They are
there to give swift happy-making service to Technical.
7. Technical Personnel do not natter, complain or go into apathy
if their Pcs and Students are "held up too long in Qualifications".
They see to it that HCO and Ethics speeds routing.
8. Technical Personnel do not sit and hope that Public Divs will
arrange Public Lectures, HAS or other beginning Courses which will
feed people into the Technical Division. The Technical Secretary has
materials ready and personnel prepared to give these courses.
9. Technical Personnel realize that they are turning out the
Product of the Organization-completed students and preclears who will
bring about changed conditions on this planet, and that is what the
Organization is all about.
10. So Technical Division Personnel do not sit around and wait for
the rest of the organization to do the job. They keep busy doing their
own actions, keeping their Promotional Points in, and keeping
Technical in on themselves ... and demand that the rest of the
Organization help keep them supplied.
Hana Eltringham
Deputy Commodore Flotilla
Rosalie Vesper - HCO Area See WW
David Dunlop - Dep Qual See WW
Ad Council WW
Anne Tampion - HCO Exec See WW
Allan Ferguson - Org Exec See WW
Tom Morgan - Public Exec See
WW
Rodger Wright - LRH Comm WW
Leif Windle - Policy Review
Section WW
Jane Kember - The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:HE:ei.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 NOVEMBER 1969
Issue 11
Remimeo
Cl Vill Checksheet
Dianetics Checksheet
Qual See Hat
Tech See Hat
C/S Hat
RIGHTS AND DUTIES
The following Rights and Duties are to be posted in the staff area of
every Qual Division and Tech Division, where they will be frequently seen
by auditors and technical personnel.
They are to be printed green on white in letters at least I inch high,
each on a separate card (4 total).
AN AUDITOR HAS THE DUTY:
TO KNOW AND ABIDE BY THE AUDITOR'S CODE
TO APPLY TECH EXACTLY AS PER HCOBS AND LRH TAPES
TO BE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE FOLDER OF ANY PC HE AUDITS
TO FOLLOW C/S INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY IN SESSION
TO REFUSE TO AUDIT AN INCORRECT C/S
TO AUDIT ONLY THOSE MATERIALS ON WHICH HE HAS BEEN CHECKED OUTSTARRATE
TO BE FAMILIAR WITH AND APPLY ALL NEW TECHNICAL MATERIALS UP TO HIS
CLASS LEVEL
AN AUDITOR HAS THE RIGHT:
NOT TO AUDIT A PRECLEAR HE DOES NOT WISH TO AUDIT
NOT TO AUDIT MORE THAN 5 HOURS PER DAY, 6 DAYS PER WEEK
TO REFUSE A C/S HE KNOWS TO BE INCORRECT
TO ASK TO BE REFERRED TO THE HCOB COVERING A C/S HE IS UNCERTAIN OF OR
FEELS IS INCORRECT
NOT TO BE PUNISHED FOR QUERYING A C/S WHETHER CORRECT OR NOT
TO HAVE PCS, AUDITING ROOMS, AND MATERIALS MADE AVAILABLE TO HIM BY
TECH SERVICES
98
A CASE SUPERVISOR HAS THE DUTY:
TO REFUSE TO DISCUSS A CASE WITH EITHER THE AUDITOR OR THE PC
TO REFRAIN FROM DISCUSSING OR MENTIONING DATA FROM PC FOLDERS SOCIALLY
TO CORRECT HIS AUDITORS' APPLICATION OF TECH POSITIVELY, WITHOUT
INVALIDATION
TO ORDER THE AUDITOR TO CRAMMING OR RETRAINING FOR ANY FLUNKED SESSION
TO MAINTAIN A STANDARD OF PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
TO C/S ALL FOLDERS DELIVERED TO HIM DAILY
A CASE SUPERVISOR HAS THE RIGHT:
TO HAVE HIS OWN OFFICE
TO HOLD NO OTHER POST
NEVER TO RUSH HIS OWN C/S ACTIONS
TO ACCEPT NO TECHNICAL ORDERS OR ADVICES OTHER THAN FROM LRH
TO DEMAND A HIGH ADMINISTRATIVE STANDARD OF THOSE WHO WORK ON HIS
LINES
TO DEMAND THAT PCS DO NOT DISCUSS THEIR OWN CASES OR OTHERWISE VIOLATE
PC RULES
TO ISSUE AND GET COMPLIANCE ON ANY ORDERS NECESSARY TO THE PERFORMANCE
OF HIS DUTY AND TECHNICAL RESULTS
Lt. Nate Jessup, Chairman
Ens. Janet Guilford, Secretary W/O Bob Guilford, Member Qual Board of
Investigation for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:NJ:JG:BG:nt.rd Copyright (D 1969
99
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 FEBRUARY 1970
Remirneo
All Orgs
AOs
SHs
E/Os Hat
T/Sec Hat
PES Hat
Dir Success Hat
ARC Br Reg Hat
PRO Hat
PRO Crse checksheet ETHICS
QUALITY OF SERVICE
ARC Breaks bring about and restimulate a desire to get even.
An ARC broken person attacks.
Criminals, revolutionaries, great generals are simply dramatizing the
effects of an ARC Break of long duration.
Madmen seldom attack that which ARC broke them but choose wrong
targets.
Any and all attacks suffered by orgs are from ARC broken persons.
Even when such persons were really ARC broken with some other
activity, they instantaneously attack us.
Most ARC breaks are caused by by~passed charge. This charge is usually
the restimulation of some earlier ARC break not caused by us.
WITHHOLDS ARE ONE PRIMARY CAUSE OF BY-PASSED CHARGE.
When persons are poorly processed or poorly trained they can
restimulate a great deal of by-passed charge.
When persons are permitted to take higher grades without really
attaining lower grades, by-passed charge is inevitable; hence we see
refunds, attacks and upsets in orgs and the field.
The true cause of ARC Breaks of long duration which transfer to us is
when we permit technical goofs.
ETHICS exists primarily to see that people honestly make their grades
and are trained as they should be and that no-one is permitted to prevent
good auditing and good training or to enturbulate the org so that it cannot
occur and to make sure the org is there to give service in volume.
Ethics is not concerned with "acceptable social behaviour" only
insofar as it impedes the training or processing of others.
THEREFORE: Accepting for higher levels of processing persons who have
not made their lower levels shall be classified as a crime.
Processing persons at higher levels who have not made lower levels
shall be classified as a crime.
100
Training persons at higher levels who have not proven themselves as
competent Dianetic auditors shall be classified as a crime.
Admitting a famous person or notable writer to higher level processing
who has not fully attained lower level processing shall be classified as a
HIGH CRIME. This applies in particular to Power and Clearing Courses.
Administering Power to anyone who has not had Dianetic Triples,
Scientology Triples and adequate gains or who needs further auditing or
Review shall be deemed a crime.
Permitting an ARC broken person to leave an org unhandled shall be
deemed for the last auditor to audit him and for the PES and Director of
Success a crime.
Failure to strenuously act to clean up an "ARC broken field" shall be
deemed a high crime for the Executive Council.
ALL ETHICS OFFICERS are to regulate their conduct of duty so as to
safeguard good auditing and training in the organization and to create a
calm atmosphere where these can occur in volume.
This Policy Letter has first priority and claim on the duties and
attention of the Ethics Officer.
In interpreting the above in technical matters, the Ethics Officer
should consult the opinion of competent auditors not connected to any
charge in progress.
Nothing in this Policy Letter shall prevent Scientology grades before
Dianetic Grades,
Nothing in this Policy Letter shall limit the amount of auditing that
a person can be given at any one grade.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jz.ci.rd
101
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 MAY 1970
Remimeo
IMPORTANT
CUTATIVES
In the period up to 1966 we were plagued by an occasional
obsessiveness to ADD to any process or policy. Additives made things
unworkable.
After 1966 when I left the post of Executive Director WW, a new
condition set in. Checksheets, processes, intensives, grades began to be
CUT DOWN.
This we can dub a CUTATIVE impulse to coin a word.
So persuasive were its advocates that even I was persuaded to agree to
some points of it so you need not feel bad if you were gulled into buying
the idea of shortening things in order to produce a quicker result.
No one really saw where the trend was going.
In 1970 a survey I have just completed has shown that this effort was
so complete that the following had been broadly accomplished:
A. Training no longer included enough Scientology materials to make
an effective Scientology auditor in many places.
B. Grades had been shortened from 50 hours 0 to IV to 2Y2, minutes.
C. The End Phenomena of grades and processes were discarded.
The end result has been:
I . Few skilled auditors.
2. Shrunken and struggling Scn orgs.
3. A field that is disappointed in results-for they think they have
had grades and haven't,
4. People coming into Advanced Orgs to be cleared who have NO lower
grades actually run and so they can't make any upper grades.
In effect Scientology was thrown away. From total workability it was
cut down to occasional result.
I saw the first impulse of this in an executive long since dismissed
from Saint Hill as a constant overt no-case gain case who agitated
constantly to remove tapes from the Saint Hill Course. As 90% of the data
on the SHSBC is on tape I merely thought he had gone over to the enemy and
ignored him. Some others, however, had the same idea and started labeling
basic books and bulletins "Mere Background Data" or saying "We don't use
that now" or "That's old and you only look at it for interest". Thus the
laws of listing and other phenomena were thrown away.
Recently I found the reason Case Supervisors failed is that they just
don't know "The Original Thesis" and "Evolution of a Science" or "Scn 3-80"
or "Scn 8-8008". WHEN I DEMANDED THEY STUDY THESE BOOKS THEY BECAME CAPABLE
OF HANDLING CASES. They did not know what they were handling-the mind-and
so
102
how could they be sensible in ordering what was to be run on a case?
Back in 1950 we used to have a small bunch of goony birds, ex-
psychologists, ex-limatics. They were constantly demanding a 2 second
action that totally cleared someone. Behind this was an inability to
concentrate attention or even to work. These were people striving for total
effect instantly. Yet they couldn't run with reality on any process heavier
than "How are you?" and they never saw a wall-they saw a mock up of it!
So the impulse of DO IT ALL NOW NOW that destroyed any sanity of
psychiatry is always around.
A student with a one item checksheet who does it in one minute is the
ideal course to such.
A preclear run for 21/2 minutes to total top grades becomes an ideal
auditing session to such.
Such things just aren't real. And such unreality got into the lines
too hard and is being escorted right back out right now.
The following policies are in full force and are to be backed up
fully.
1 . Course checksheets may not be cut, edited or reduced after a
fully approved checksheet is issued for use on any course.
2. No grade may be awarded for which all processes of that grade
have not been run and where the end phenomena of that grade is not attested
to singly and fully by the preclear before an examiner.
3. Anyone found relegating basic materials to unimportance by
reason of age or volume is to lose his post and certificates.
4. Any statistic claimed which is achieved by downgrading materials
or grades or falsely pretending an end phenomena has been achieved for pcs
or skill by auditors shall result in the dismissal of the division head
presenting it.
5. No suppressive person with a fat ethics file and no case gain
may hold any executive position in a Scientology org.
If you in any org or franchise are having any field or financial
trouble you need not look further than errors pointed out in this Policy
Letter.
"Dianetic Triples" awarded after 11/2 hours of processing, "multiple
declares" after 10 minutes from 0 to IV, using checksheets from which all
basic material has been cut, the failure to realize gains and abilities and
success have to be worked for to be true, are at the bottom of any trouble
any org or franchise is having.
Beginning with the Pol Ltr of 10 May 1970 a more honest era has began.
Scramble around and put it right.
Deliver Scientology not a Cutative.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:dz.nt.ka.aap
103
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVE FROM
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH ED 107 INT [Excerpt] 3 June 1970
To: Class IV Orgs and Saint Hills for ACTION. AOs for Info.
From: Ron
Subject: ORDERS TO DIVISIONS FOR IMMEDIATE COMPLIANCE
[ORDERS TO DIVISION IV-Excerpted]
Reference: LRH ED 104 INT Auditing Sales and Delivery Pgm No. 1,
LRH ED 106 INT What Was Wrong
DIVISION IV
1. Assurne all technical actions in C/Sing, HGC and Dept of
Training.
2. When a pc goes to Review Qual is credited with the time taken
from the hours the pc bought.
3. Only send a pc to Review when the C/S gives up. Don't let Review
give the major actions that belong to the HGC.
4. Get your Supervisors (a) interested in the students' progress
and (b) using two way comm (listen style) to speed up the students'
progress; (c) get in Learning Drills on slow students.
5. Get blown students back in and using (a), (b) and (c) in 4 above
get them going again.
6. Come down hard on any SP giving out with Scn materials being
"old" or "not used now" or "background data" and any other mechanism to
impede its use. (Modern C/Ses are having to study "The Original Thesis" and
other basic books to find out about the subject. The data is not old. It is
basic.)
7. Completely throw out the idea that a fast result is a good
result in auditing. Deliver auditing in volume as per the 'Trocesses
Taught" Column of the Class Chart. Do not skip any gradient going up in
C/Sing. Get him on TRs and repair the pc's life before even beginning
serious auditing. Do ALL the processes. To full End Phenomena. End
completely this brush off that is currently passing for tech.
8. Get studied all current HCO Bs and data on this program. Be sure
you get HCO Bs now coming out that fill in these gaps to get Scientology
back into its own.
9. Determine that students know their business and pcs get full
gains and get this being worked at hard through the division.
10. Check this giddy impulse to do things so fast they're not done
at all. Validate auditors who do a thorough job, Supervisors who are
interested in and work with students to push them through. Preach attaining
honest lasting results, real lower grades, real understanding of the mind.
11. Courses should be fast, auditing drawn out. This is the exact
reverse to what has been happening. Slow courses and fast auditing destroy
the subjects of Dianetics and Scientology. Fast courses and long long hours
of auditing are the route to real gains and solvency.
12. Man up Division IV with competent auditors, supervisors, a good
C/S, an able Tech Services and plan how to man it up in the future as it
expands and carry on
104
an orderly program of providing technical manpower for the Division,
not depending on anyone else to do so.
13. See that students do a lot of mutual auditing. Don't get stumped
in finding things to audit on each other. Force them over onto the Class
Chart and every process known.
14, Get the division traffic lines flowing smoothly.
15, Handle backlogs by preaching training and getting more staff.
16. Whenever a pc goes Exterior (or any in your folders who have)
have him called in for an Interiorization Rundown. Don't end off his
auditing and don't audit past exterior without giving the Interiorization
Rundown. This can be done at any stage of Dn or grade processing AND DOES
NOT COUNT AS PART OF ANY GRADE.
17. Get out of any rut that goes contrary to this program.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
8,
It it
IFO
LRH:dz,rd
105
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1970
Remimeo
Applies to all URGENTAND
SHs and
Academies LWORTANT
HGCs
Franchises
TECHNICAL DEGRADES
(This PL and HCO PL Feb 7, 1965 must
be made part of every study pack as the
first items and must be listed on
checksheets.)
Any checksheet in use or in stock which carries on it any degrading
statement must be destroyed and issued without qualifying statements.
Example: Level 0 to IV Checksheets SH carry "A. Background Material-
This section is included as an historical background, but has much interest
and value to the student. Most of the processes are no longer used, having
been replaced by more modern technology. The student is only required to
read this material and ensure he leaves no misunderstood." This heading
covers such vital things as TRs, Op Pro by Dup! The statement is a
falsehood.
These checksheets were not approved by myself, all the material of the
Academy and SH courses IS in use.
Such actions as this gave us "Quickie Grades", ARC Broke the field and
downgraded the Academy and SH Courses.
A condition of TREASON or cancellation of certificates or dismissal
and a full investigation of the background of any person found guilty, will
be activated in the case of anyone committing the following HIGH CRIMES.
1. Abbreviating an official Course in Dianetics and Scientology so
as to lose the full theory processes and effectiveness of the subjects.
2. Adding comments to checksheets or instructions labelling any
material "background" or "not used now" or "old" or any similar action
which will result in the student not knowing, using, and applying the data
in which he is being trained.
3. Employing after I Sept 1970 any checksheet for any course not
authorized by myself and the SO Organizing Bureau Flag.
4. Failing to strike from any checksheet remaining in use meanwhile
any such comments as "historical", "background", "not used", "old", etc. or
VERBALLY STATING IT TO STUDENTS.
5. Permitting a pc to attest to more than one grade at a time on
the pe's own determinism without hint or evaluation.
6. Running only one process for a grade between 0 to IV.
7. Failing to use all processes for a level.
8. Boasting as to speed of delivery in a session, such as "I put in
Grade Zero in 3 minutes." Etc.
106
9. Shortening. time of application of auditing for financial or
labor saving considerations.
10. Acting in any way calculated to lose the technology of Dianetics
and Scientology to use or impede its use or shorten its materials or its
application.
REASON: The effort to get students through courses and get pcs
processed in orgs was considered best handled by reducing materials or
deleting processes from grades. The pressure exerted to speed up student
completions and auditing completions was mistakenly answered by just not
delivering.
The correct way to speed up a student's progress is by using 2 way
comm and applying the study materials to students.
The best way to really handle pcs is to ensure they make each level
fully before going on to the next and repairing them when they do not.
The puzzle of the decline of the entire Scientology network in the
late 60s is entirely answered by the actions taken to shorten time in study
and in processing by deleting materials and actions.
Reinstituting full use and delivery of Dianetics and Scientology is
the answer to any recovery.
The product of an org is well taught students and thoroughly audited
pcs. When the product vanishes, so does the org. The orgs must survive for
the sake of this planet.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:nt.rd
107
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1970
Remimeo
(This paper issued at the beginning of Dianetics
is of considerable historical interest
,,giving the basis of the Auditor's Code
and policy on psychotics)
INSTRUCTION PROTOCOL
OFFICIAL
L. Ron Hubbard
FOR STAFF ONLY - NOT FOR STUDENT OR GENERAL ISSUE
November 20, 1950
(This is the first instruction protocol issued over my signature. Any
earlier material circulated was for the purpose of gaining data in order to
prepare this protocol. LRH)
Any school of mental. healing in the past has been victimized by that
irrationality known as psychosis. Dianetics, no matter if it has the answer
to psychosis, is yet victimized by its existence in the society.
Psychotics, people with histories of known breaks, of suicide
attempts, of homocidal tendencies, can yet be expected to apply for
instruction in dianetics.
An adequate screen has been set up to inhibit the entrance of such
persons into training. A Minnesota Multiphasic, at least, must be given to
all applicants for certification course training. This very far from
guarantees insurance against enrolling a psychotic. Psychometry is not
accurate and varies from over-optimism to overpessimism about psychotics.
Therefore, all psychometry must be tempered by common sense. Also, it must
be modified by what we know dianetics can readily do for people.
A psychotic discovered by screening should either be routed into
processing (if the case is mild and non-suicidal) or rejected. At such time
as the Foundations possess adequate and lawful housing facilities for the
retention of psychotics, those who might have been turned away may be
routed to the unit which has such facilities in its charge. Efforts are
being made, and others should be made, to procure such sanitarium
facilities wherein psychotics may be dianetically processed.
Once enrolled, the applicant, any applicant, should be regarded to
some degree as a possible error in screening. A definite program of
allowance for possible screening errors must consistently be adhered to.
Experience has demonstrated that psychotics may be enrolled and
successfully released and trained. The strain on the school staffs,
however, has been great; and the cost of enrolling a psychotic definitely
exceeds the amount he has paid for his course. In Los Angeles, in August,
about thirty percent of those enrolled, it has been estimated, were
incipient psychotics. Turmoil was occasioned by this, training expense was
raised well above training income in each case. This does not argue,
however, that the enrolling and training of psychotics is without danger.
As an additional safeguard, the following observations should be taken
into account. Wherever any trouble has been had with a student in training,
one of the following factors has been present.
I . The student was run while tired or when lacking in proper food.
2. The auditing the student received was bad, extremely bad.
108
3. The student had in his environ, while in training, an individual
who definitely and demonstrably sought the mental failure of the student.
4. Too many auditors worked on the student.
5. Dianetics, in the hands of some students, was crossed with an
older therapy.
Directors of Training and Team Captains should do all possible to
obviate the occurrence in training of any of the above five factors.
All training programs should have as their end the turning out of
certifiable students. This means that the student's own case must be
running well and that he must have absorbed maximal dianetic information
and acquired maximal skill. Obviating the above five factors pays the
additional dividend of proofing the school against bogged-down cases, by
which is meant those cases, not psychotic, which cease to run well. The
above five factors not only threaten the psychotic but are responsible in
bogged-down cases. A bogged-down case does not find himself able to absorb
information or acquire skill and certainly cannot be said to be running
well.
To militate against the above five factors, to prevent any untoward
incident should any psychotic slip through screening unobserved and to
prevent bogged-down cases, the following program is the official school
program.
The student is enrolled on a four weeks course basis. At the end of
this course, if certifiable by all criteria, the student is granted a
limited certificate, printed in black and white, on which the words
LIMITED, EXPIRES SIX MONTHS FROM DATE, is printed boldly. In order to gain
an unlimited certificate, then, the student must, after graduation, release
two persons, one of a mental condition and the other of a serious chronic
somatic and must furnish to the Foundation incontrovertible evidence from a
medical doctor and psychometrist that this has been accomplished. When the
Foundation receives such information and such incofitrovertible evidence,
the Foundation then forwards an unlimited certificate to the student. The
student need not again appear at the Foundation. But on being given his
limited certificate, he is also given a written paper, stating exactly what
he has to do to get his permanent certificate. The research division will
furnish the protocol for this-as to what is acceptable evidence; and this
protocol is based on what the research division can use as a major proof
case.
The student, however, is given an alternative. He knows that it will
be expensive for him to get examinations of patients and psychometry on
them. He may submit as one of his cases his own intensive run of a
Foundation patient or applicant, the Foundation doing the medical
examination and the psychometry for him. The charge to the student is on
the basis of one week's additional experience and instruction for $75.00.
This is cheaper than a case would cost him. He can actually stay for two
weeks and get both his cases from Foundation applicants and patients at a
cost of 575,00 for the additiorial-second-week. The advantage to him is
additional tips and instruction as he runs his first independent case or
cases, that the Foundation handles all examinations and that his permanent
certification is thus speeded up. The Foundation advantage is that it has a
better chance to observe prospective employees.
By this means and others, the school then arranges for every
applicant, within reason, to have a tlfirty-six hour run during his first
week by a student auditor in his fourth or fifth week. This is no part of
the guarantee. It is simply done. Directors of Training can then assign one
fairly reliable auditor to one incoming case and so obviate some of the
above five factors.
The protocol of training for a student is then as follows:
1 . Entered after screening by psychometry and interview.
109
2. For the first week, a thirty-six hour intensive run and general
indoctrination.
3. For the second week. Training in theory.
4. For the third week-training in practice, strongly supervised by
team captain, given adequate examples of auditing.
5. For the fourth week~additional training in practice; or, if good
enough, given a new enrollee for a thirty-six hour intensive. (Does not
count for permanent certification.)
6. For the fifth week, if enrolled-a thirty-six hour intensive on a
chronic aberration case or any case.
7. For the sixth week, if enrolled-a thirty-six hour intensive on a
chronic somatic case or any case.
The student's own case may be more or less neglected after his first
week of intensive running immediately after enrollment. If the case
requires further processing before limited certification can be given, the
student can make his own arrangements. He is there to be trained,
basically, not to be processed. Special arrangements for processing to the
end of being certified can be made by the Registrar.
This protocol has been developed after consultation with the
Foundation Registrar at Elizabeth, the Director of Training at Elizabeth,
and upon observations made during the past five months. If followed
closely, it should adequately proof the schools against having psychotic
breaks occur in them and against cases bogging down. Further, it should
heighten the percentile of students certified.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:ddb.rr.rd Copyright (D 1970
110
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 OCTOBER 1968
Auditor 43 Class VIII All Auditors
THE AUDITOR'S CODE
AD 18
In celebration of the 100% gains attainable by Standard Tech.
I hereby promise as an auditor to follow the Auditor's Code.
1. 1 promise not to evaluate for the preclear or tell him what he
should think about his case in session.
2. 1 promise not to invalidate the preclear's case or gains in or
out of session.
3. 1 promise to administer only Standard Tech to a preclear in the
standard way.
4. 1 promise to keep all auditing appointments once made.
5. 1 promise not to process a preclear who has not had sufficient
rest and who is physically tired.
6. 1 promise not to process a preclear who is improperly fed or
hungry.
7. 1 promise not to permit a frequent change of auditors.
8. 1 promise not to sympathize with a preclear but to be effective.
9. 1 promise not to let the preclear end session on his own
determinism but to finish off those cycles I have begun.
10. 1 promise never to walk off from a preclear in session.
11. 1 promise never to get angry with a preclear in session.
12. 1 promise to run every major case action to a floating needle.
13. 1 promise never to run any one action beyond its floating
needle.
14. 1 promise to grant beingness to the preclear in session.
15. 1 promise not to mix the processes of Scientology with other
practices except when the preclear is physically ill and only medical means
will serve.
16. 1 promise to maintain Communication with the preclear and not to
cut his comm or permit him to overrun in session.
17. 1 promise not to enter comments, expressions or enturbulence
into a session that distract a preclear from his case.
18. 1 promise to continue to give the preclear the process or
auditing command when needed in the session.
19. 1 promise not to let a preclear run a wrongly understood
command.
20. 1 promise not to explain, justify or make excuses in session for
any auditor mistakes whether real or imagined.
21. 1 promise to estimate the current case state of a preclear only
by Standard Case Supervision data and not to diverge because of some
imagined difference in the case.
22. 1 promise never to use the secrets of a preclear divulged in
session for punishment or personal gain.
23. 1 promise to see that any fee received for processing is
refunded if the preclear is dissatisfied and demands it within three months
after the processing, the only condition being that he may not again be
processed or trained.
24. 1 promise not to advocate Scientology only to cure illness or
only to treat the insane, knowing well it was intended for spiritual gain.
25. 1 promise to cooperate fully with the legal organisations of
Dianetics and Scientology as developed in safeguarding the ethical use and
practice of the subject according to the basics of Standard Tech.
26. 1 promise to refuse to permit any being to be physically
injured, violently damaged operated on or killed in the name of "mental
treatment".
27. 1 promise not to permit sexual liberties or violation of the
mentally unsound.
28. 1 promise to refuse to admit to the ranks of practitioners any
being who is insane.
Auditor
Date
Witness Place
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:jp.ei.rd Copyright (c) 1968
Note: No& 26, 27 and 28 have been added per HCO PL 2 November 1968.
112
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 APRIL 1970
Issue Il
(Formerly issued as FO 2175, 8 Nov 1969)
Remimeo Tech Services Hat 4th Mate's Hat Tech Sec Qual Sec Hats AOsSHs
TECH SERVICES
THE PURPOSE OF TECH SERVICES IS TO GET AUDITORS, PCS AND MATERIALS
TOGETHER AND IN AN AUDITING ROOM ON SCHEDULE SO THAT AUDITING CAN OCCUR AND
WITH MINIMAL LOSS OF THE AUDITOR'S TIME.
How to get this done is modified by the situation of quarters.
Normally there is a board showing auditors pcs room assignments.
There is a layout of auditing and report forms, ball points,
paperclips, staplers, an in and out shelf area big enough to hold big
auditing folders.
The comm baskets of the auditors are usually also there.
There is a notice board for pcs for their letters or notices to them
or individual messages.
There is a room plot so those in use can be indicated.
There is a waiting room for the pcs.
There are desks or tables for auditors to complete their reports, when
the auditing day has ended.
There is a comm system handy.
There is a set of file cabinets where folders are kept.
There is administrative neatness and facilities to accomplish the
purposes.
There is a system for collecting the pcs for the auditors.
If Tech Services is done and arranged well Auditor waiting time is
zero. The pcs ARE COLLECTED UP BY TECH SERVICES never by Auditors.
Tech Services tries to prevent any long wait by pcs and gets them in
at the last moment, but not so late that the auditor waits.
AN AUDITOR'S TIME IS GOLD. He never has to chase up pcs or materials
or a newly charged meter. And he never should find his pc has not had
enough food or rest to be audited, thus wasting the auditor's time. This is
all up to Tech Services, however it is done.
113
In a big org Tech and Qual each have a competent Tech Services, the
Qual one being the smaller.
In Sen orgs Tech Services also arranges housing, has pcs met, and
generally operates as the pe host while in the org.
Also in a Scn org Tech Services does all the student housing,
handling, folders, records and admin such as logs and roll books. One tries
to keep students and pcs separated.
Tech Services is a busy place. As well as being efficient it is also
friendly.
The capability of Tech Services can make or break the reputation of an
org.
Undermanning Tech Services can be a very serious mistake. At a SH it
is also served by tech-qual pages and HCO Couriers. The routing to
Registrar after services from C&A to Registrar by a page can mean up to 50%
more income or re-sign ups and if omitted loses the org many customers.
Tech Services is an important post. Exactly how it is done is
qualified by how it is done best for that org and area but ALL its
functions must be done.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:nt.cden Copyright Q 1970
114
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO POLICY LETTER OF S SEPTEMBER 1957
TESTING
The department of Testing administers tests to precleaTs and, students
every Saturday at 12:4S p.m., sharp and every Monday at 9:00 a.m., and at
5:00 p.m. At these exact times, the door of the testing room is locked, and
timed tests are administered immediately. ,
The Registrar signs up preclears on Saturday and sends them for
testing that day at 12:4S p.m. New students are also tested at that time on
Saturday.
The Registrar signs up pre , clears and students before 9:00 a.m. on
Mondays.
Students are then directed to the Comm Course instructor, who sends
them for testing
at 5:00 p.m. Preclears registered before 9:00 a.m. are sent to the
testing room. After
testing the Examiner sends them to the Director of Processing.
Preclears not registered
by 9:00 a.m. are sent for testing. After testing the Examiner sends
them to the
Registrar. The Registrar then signs them up and directs them to the
Director of
Processing.
Any preclears who are late for the Monday morning testing period will
be tested at 5:00 p.m., that day.
HGC auditors are available every Saturday afternoon and Monday morning
to score the tests. The Examiner supplies scoring materials to the
auditors.
L. RON HUBBARD
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
SECRETARIAL OF THE EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
Assn Sec HASI-LONDON
cc: Hats
Dir Pro & Reg November 23, 1958
Dir of Processing
Dir Admin
Processing Admin
SCIENTOMETRIC TESTING
All testing comes under heading of Processing Administrator who
administers tests and keeps files. He is assisted by specifically assigned
staff auditors during peak loads.
All to~sts are to be separated out of CF and one copy of a profile
giving earliest and latest OCA and IQ results only are left in files. All
actual papers and original graphs are filed in test files where they can be
easily viewed by staff auditors processing pcs and by Director of
Processing doing clearing estimates on pcs who have been in before. All
report sheets on pcs, case analysis sheets, etc, are filed under pc's name
in test files. All record sheets showing what auditor processed what pc and
when are also kept so individual auditors' results can be read in the
files.
One copy of the original profiles on every staff member are kept in
the Business Personnel files but the original is kept in test files.
Test files are open to and used by the Executive Director, Association
Secretary, Director of Processing, Director of Training, Director of
Promotion and Registration, Training Administrator, Processing
Administrator and staff auditors and instructors. They are of great use in
bettering cases, instructing and registering pes. They are also of great
use to HCO Research, to whom they really belong. Therefore it is paramount
that they be complete and accurate. Money can be spent putting these files
in order and keeping them in order independent of the time of staff
auditors or the Processing Administrator.
The effective date of this project is the date of this order.
L. RON HUBBARD
Executive Director
LRH:mp.rd HASI
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 APRIL 1959
(CONVERT)
ADDITIONAL STAFF AUDITORS
In order to procure enough auditors for the HGC and to conserve unit
pay, the following system may be used:
All auditors on administrative posts excepting only department heads
shall be listed in order in such a way as to avoid consecutive listing from
one department.
Thereafter, this rotating list shall serve as an "on call" list for
staff auditor duty.
All short term pcs, so far as feasible, shall be assigned against list
and long term pcs shall be assigned to regular staff auditors.
Example: Smith, HPA CF Clerk
Jones, BScn Tr Admin
Brown, HCA Letter Registrar
Peters, HPA Address files,
etc, down through all Admin staff.
An extra staff auditor is needed one Monday. Smith is assigned to the
pe that week.
The following Monday a staff auditor is needed. Jones (whose name
comes next) is assigned.
A month later another extra staff auditor is needed, Brown is
assigned, since Smith and Jones have already done theirs.
When the end of the list is reached, it is started at the top again.
Then two or three extra auditors are needed, two or three are pulled at
once.
The Admin staff person doing extra auditing spends all the time left
in his working after auditing, at his own job, trying to keep it caught up.
I have seen so many staff posts stay vacant a week or three without
bringing the Org to harm that this plan seems feasible.
Town auditors should be used, when used, mainly on evening and weekend
pes.
This plan also has the virtue of keeping auditors on Admin from losing
out and getting rusty.
LRH:mp.gh.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JUNE 1959
CONVERT TO A
SEC ED
STUDENT FILES
All Student Files are kept at the HASI to which they belong.
A master list of certified Student Files from each individual HASI is
to be compiled and sent to HCO WW to hold. Any additions to this list
should be submitted monthly.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gh.rd
116
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 NOVEMBER 1960
All Cen Orgs
PC SCHEDULING
The time a pc can be audited is decided finally by HGC only.
Prom Reg has no force to commit HGC to any auditing schedule. Prom Reg
should be pleasant about it and "be sure that HGC can arrange it but that
it is up to the D of P".
HGC must arrange matters as well as possible to suit the pc and must
get the auditing done but may persuade, without creating an ARC break.
Prom Reg is not a scheduling agency, as this is a technical function.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:aec.is.bp.eden
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 JANUARY 1961
HCO Secs Ds of P
CASE FILES
It is vital that the HGC retain a case file for every case it ever
processes.
This specifically includes staff members.
All auditor's reports, assessments and notes and recommendations
concerning a case, including staff cases, must be part of this file.
This file must be available to staff auditors processing the preclear.
Anything an auditor knows about a case, as a general, summary, should
be put in the pc's file for future reference, especially at the end of an
intensive.
L~ RON HUBBARD
LRH.js.eden
117
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 MARCH 1961
Issue 11
Cen Orgs
FIC0 Sees
Assn Secs
D of P
HGC Admin
Staff Auditors
HGC ADMfN PARTIAL HAT
STAFF AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT
A regular staff auditor should deliver a minimum of 25 hours per week
of auditing.
Pc assignments must be such as to minimize auditor change from
intensive to intensive.
Auditor change must be minimized on staff member intensives.
HGC Admin is responsible for the economy of auditor auditing time and
minimum change of auditors on pc.
One or two staff auditors, depending on staff size, must be constantly
assigned to auditing staff. They may not be shifted to outside pcs "in an
emergency".
Staff auditing paid for by staff member units must be delivered during
business hours and may not be delivered at night. The only exception is
staff auditing for staff auditors (see Staff Intensive HCO Policy Letter).
Persons ordered to auditing, if remaining on staff, not paying for the
auditing, should be audited at night by part time staff auditors or for
extra pay for a staff auditor.
25 hour intensives should be delivered in one week. It is economically
poor for the pc if a 25 hour intensive is stretched over more than one week
due to PTP, etc.
The Interview section's Registrar or Consultant may not assign
auditing hours to a pc, agree to pc's hours proposals or suggest auditing
periods. This is only for HGC Admin to do.
All Auditor-pc-room-time assignments are done by HGC Admin. This is
often a neat problem. It must be consistently well solved. All such data
for all intensives should be posted on a blackboard.
Pes may not be postponed for lack of auditors.
Spare HGC auditors are employed by HGC and trained by HGC and given
Admin, preferably procurement, posts in the Org until needed. The posts of
ARC Break Registrar, Asst Letter Registrar, CF Assistant, Asst Assn See
Sec, HCO Files, HCO Asst Area See for hat assembly and redoing, Asst
Accounts to get files up or statements straight, are all spare jobs at
which a spare staff auditor may be employed to the benefit of all. This is
the way one takes up HGC ebb and flow of pcs. The person is still a full
time staff auditor and aside from training or conference period is left
entirely under the other dept heads for the Admin work. This is also an
excellent way to give a staff auditor who has been auditing many, many
weeks straight, a "breather".
A spare staff auditor may not be employed on key posts in other depts
where his or her sudden absence would disrupt lines.
118
Assignment of spare staff auditors is up to the Assn See.
It is easy to reduce units by having many staff auditors delivering
few auditing hours per week because of stupid scheduling. It is more
economical to have one or two spare staff auditors working in Admin as
above.
It is not economical on the pc or the Org to deliver auditing at the
rate of 3 or 5 hours a week to a pc. If the Org has several such pes, give
them all to one permanent auditor and fit them in as the pcs can handle,
but also as HGC can handle.
Classes of staff auditors break down as follows:
Regular Staff Auditor-Giving 25 hours per week every week to one pc a
week.
Staff Staff Auditors-Giving two 121/2 hour intensives per auditor to
staff members in working hours. If there are two, divide the staff in half
and schedule each half in rotation under one; auditor so there is no
auditor change.
Irregular Schedule Staff Auditor-Audits all irregularly scheduled pes.
Part time Staff Auditor-Audits for Org evenings or week ends.
Temporary Staff Auditor-Comes into Org once in a while to give full or
part time auditing for HGC.
Spare Staff Auditor-Works in non-key Org posts to help procure or get
the work up to date but is trained and conferenced.
A Regular Staff Auditor can be a spare staff auditor. But no other
type listed above can be combined by policy stated herein.
Every auditor in the HGC must be given classification as above. For
scheduling, the letters representing the above classes should be added to a
staff auditor's name in HGC Admin.
In reporting staff auditors in the weekly report, the above
classifications must be used.
Staff auditor assignment is important. It is done by HGC Admin. It can
be done so badly that 33 Auditors on HGC staff can deliver only f 170 worth
of auditing a week! It has just been done in an Org. Classify your auditors
and avoid such a mess.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH.jl.rd
119
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 AUGUST 1962
Central Orgs
BODY ROUTER HAT
This hat is in use in Washington DC, where it has been found useful.
It can be
used in other Orgs as a model hat.
PURPOSE: TO CREATE AND MAINTAIN GOOD 8-C BETWEEN TECHNICAL
AND PrR & R.
MondayDuties: Be in Reception at 8.OOA.M.
Preclear: (new)
I. Take preclear from Reg over to HGC Admin for case assessment.
2. Return pc to Reg for re-signup.
3. Take pc to Testing.
Students:
I Take Student from Reg to Testing.
2. Take Student from testing to D of T's office.
StaffApplicant:
I . Take person from Reception to Testing.
2. Take person from Testing back to Reception.
3. Take person to Area Sec for SEC Check.
4. Take person to Org Sec for interview. FridayDuties: Be in Reception
at 1.00 P.M.
Preclear:
1. Greet the preclear, have him or her wait in reception for the
Ruds Check.
2. Hand him or her over to D of P.
3. Take the preclear over to testing.
4. If ending take preclear to Reception for D of P end Interview.
Student: (Beginning)
1. Take student from Reg to Testing.
2. Take student from Testing to D of T's office.
Student: (Ending)
1. Take student to Testing.
2. Take student to HGC Admin's Office for Interview.
3. Take student to Reception and make appointment for him or her
with Reg.
Staff Application:
Same as Mondays.
THIS POST IS HELD BY TWO PERSONS-ONE IN RECEPTION AND ONE IN TESTING.
THEIR GENERAL PURPOSE IS TO 8-C ANYBODY FROM RECEPTION TO ANY DEPARTMENT
HEAD AND BACK WHILE ON POST. AT PRESENT IT IS DONE BY'1`WO STAFF AUDITORS
PART TIME.
LRH:jw.cden Issued by: Peter Hemery
Copyright Q 1962 HCO Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
120
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 APRIL 1963
Sthil
HAT OF COURSE ADMINISTRATOR
The Course Administrator for the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course
promotes interest in the Course, answers enquiries, books in students,
acquires accommodation for them and supervises their arrival.
Students may expect assistance over such matters as permits, renewal
of passports or any of the manifold problems attendant on arrival in a
strange country.
If students have time and wish to make any explorations of the UK the
Course Administrator will answer any enquiries regarding such matters but
will not make travelling arrangements of any kind.
The cycle of action for entrance and exit of students on the Saint
Hill Special Briefing Course begins and ends with the Course Administrator.
The Course Administrator is also available for help during the Course.
Put a note on the Comm lines for an appointment. There is a terminal here-
it's up to students to make use of this communication line.
The Course Administrator is the terminal for the outside world, so
make use of this communication line.
Thank you.
Issued by:. Mary Long
Course Administrator HCO WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.aap
[Note: Text of above is sarne as 25 April 1962 except for addition of
paragraphs 4 and 5.1
121
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remirneo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 MAY 1965
Registrar HAT TECHNICAL & QUA LIFICA TIONS
Tech See HAT DIVISIONS
Qual See HAT
Org See HAT DIVISION 4 - 5
Dir Accts HAT URGENT
Cashier's HAT
AUDITING FEES
PREFERENTIAL TREATMENT OF PRECLEARS
SCALE OF PREFERENCE
There is a definite and positive Scale of Preference for accepting and
scheduling preclears (including students sent to Review) for auditing in
the HGC and in the Case Cracking Section of the Department of Review.
Last on the list is any person who seeks auditing as a favour "to
demonstrate to others what it can do" or "because of importance as a
person". The auditing of someone just because the result would "prove"
something or other or because the person has money or power and might
donate, by firm policy since 1950, has been relegated to the "circular
file" (the.waste basket). Giving auditing away to such persons or their
friends or children or psychotic brother in the asylum is in fact
forbidden. Giving preference in scheduling to such persons is governed,
when for pay, entirely by the Scale of Preference. Such bids are a snare
and a delusion; it sounds good; it doesn't work out. Mr. Big takes his
place in line with Mr. Little, and the Scale of Preference alone applies.
The person who has to be audited AT ONCE for desperate reasons is also
governed only by the Scale of Preference.
The person who will only be audited by a certain or special auditor is
also governed entirely by the Scale of Preference (See A).
SCALE OF PREFERENCE
Assignment of Auditor and Preferential Scheduling is governed as
follows:
A. Best Available Auditors, earliest possible commencement;
Pcs Paying full rate Cash in Advance with the longest consecutive
auditing period purchased. Where two pcs have to be chosen between for the
best auditor, the one who has purchased the most auditing in consecutive
periods is given the best auditor at the earliest moment. (It is obvious
that to get a special auditor one should pay full public rate in cash even
when entitled to Professional Rate. Otherwise there may be no pc requested
auditor assignments. Buying additional auditing or offering a specified
donation in addition to the full rate as per A can also influence the
assignment of a requested auditor. The auditor does not have to accept.)
B. Skilled auditor (but not specially requested auditor), early
commencement;
Full rate pcs whose credit has proven excellent and prompt by past
experience.
C. Good auditor, early commencement;
Pcs paying cash in advance professional rate.
D. Auditor staff available scheduling;
Full public rate pcs with 50% deposit and unknown or not established
credit.
E. Interne Auditor and any scheduling convenient to org;
Full public rate pcs requiring up to 75% credit, credit unknown.
F. Any Interne Auditor, and any scheduling convenient to org;
Professional rate requiring credit.
G. Any student, any scheduling convenient to org;
Total credit at any rate, credit unknown.
H. Students who need practice, cases not supervised except for
student check sheet in Examinations, scheduled randomly or by waiting list,
charity or pcs on full credit of a pcs unknown nature.
122
In scheduling there is also the problem of matching Interne Auditors
in pairs so they can crack their own cases.
This is normally done by Case Parity. Cases more or less the same in
state of case should be matched up.
Auditors who goof seriously in handling specially assigned processes
in HGCs or Case Cracking Sections and are removed from active auditing
because of it as dangerous, are normally paired with the last one who
goofed and they are assigned as aco-audit team and they are permitted to
slug it out, getting a better reality on goofs and their cases in shape as
well. This is not disciplinary assignment. It is prevention of case damage
to others, both by giving them a reality and by advancing their cases.
Their folders are carefully watched by auditing supervisors for false
entries on auditing reports.
The whole theory of the above is not Cash. it will be found that those
who will pay were the most able to begin with and have the greatest value
to others. Their worth as persons is greater. Thus good, swift auditing
brings up even this value.
1 have never thanked myself for giving any concessions on fees or
scheduling not based on the above. I can say with complete case histories
that giving free service to those who demanded it or sought it has never
resulted in any useful gain for Scientology. On the contrary some of our
biggest headaches administrationally come from those who continually sought
free courses and free auditing.
In the case of award auditing or training it is a different matter.
Here it was worked for and deserved before the fact. The Registrar is never
faced with such persons as awards are given staff and staff has staff staff
auditors.
The "the world owes me a living" preclear (or student) is a candidate
for the Better Dead Club. There were two branches of this Club, by the way-
Better Dead for their own sakes and Better Dead for the sake of others.
Demands by individuals for free service on any pretext should be given a
light, airy laugh. It doesn't do anybody any good, often not even the
person who received it.
Real charity cases who never pay are actually hard to find. In Charity
Auditing one must always give them a chance to pay.
A Registrar's matter of fact attitude about paying for auditing or
training is a valuable asset. Giving the person a problem about how and
what they'll pay is poor Registraring. Don't make them choose about paying
in full or not paying in full. Just tell them "Go to the Accounts Cashier".
An evil laugh when they advance the idea of some tiny down payment on
auditing and a remark, 'Yell, that would put you on the waiting list and
give you a new student," might be very effective.
Printing up the above preference scale for presentation to falterers
on payment might be effective..
Accounts must always give Scheduling Personnel a copy of the invoice.
Accounts must mark the Invoice clearly as per the above preference
scale.
Scheduling may only be done by scheduling personnel and must be done
in accordance with the above Scale of Preference, and the prospective
preclear already in the office (not on promotion lines) should be informed
that the above scale exists.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.rd Copyright (D 1965
123
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE -
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 NOVEMBER 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo Tech See Qual See
PC SCHEDULING
When a low priority pe has reached the point of being scheduled and
has started his auditing, the HGC Admin cannot and must not then take that
pe's auditor away and put the pc back on the waiting list because a higher
priority pc comes in.
The low priority pcs are only subject to losing their place in line
pHor to their actually being started.
To take a pc off auditing once they've started and give their auditor
to someone else (sometimes, several times during that pc's power
processing) is a breach of the Auditor's Code and as such, creates upsets
and ARC Breaks, besides making a mess of
scheduling.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright (~) 1965
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JUNE 1966
Remirneo Tech See Qual Execs All Students
KEEP ACADEMY CHECK SHEETS UP-TO-DATE
Any new HCO Bulletins which are issued and which are needed on a
particular level must be added to the Check Sheets for that level, before
the student receives the check sheet.
The purpose of this policy letter is that of ensuring that students
are trained in the latest materials pertinent to that level.
It is the responsibility of the Technical Secretary and the Director
of Training to see that this is done.
The Qualifications Secretary and the Director of Examinations must
likewise see that examinations cover the new data as it is issued and
correctly examine students on the required material who have had such added
to their check sheet.
This Policy Letter does not modify existing policy that a student may
not have items added to a check sheet on which he has already started
working.
LRH:lb-r.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1966
124
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I MAY 1969
Remimeo
STANDARD ADMIN FOR TRAINING AND TECH SERVICES
Just as the Supervisor is there to communicate the course materials to
the student and to see that they are fully understood, the Administrator's
function of service to students is equally important.
The Administrator must see the data on the course being held is
available and in sufficient quantity and quality.
MASTER CHECKSHEETS
Master Checksheets with the relevant alterations and corrections where
necessary, and additions to the cheeksheet prior to reissue, should be kept
up to date and fully available for the new student to the course.
In this way the
1 . List of Data being studied is made known
2. Any typographical errors corrected and available
3. Any, data issued since the last checksheet printed is made
4. Any data issued since the last checksheet printed OK'd before
added to the checksheet.
Once a student has been issued a checksheet, that checksheet is not
added to. The cheeksheets in stock and the master checksheet are added to
and kept up to date.
Where stocks are down or much new data is issued the Administrator
originates a request for the course checksheets to be updated and so the
checksheet remains in PT.
LOGGING
The material of the courses especially Scientology Technical material
and even more so the Advanced Courses (CL VI and above) must be kept in a
safe place.
Each pack or book must be logged out. A record of this is kept. It is
always kept.
The actual method of recording can vary but a system of who has got
what MUST be made.
In the Sea Org a $10 deposit slip is signed. No money is handed over
and if the pack is mislaid or lost $10 is to be paid.
An example of a card in use,
PACK COURSE
STUDENT'S NAME OUT IN
TIME DATE TIME DATE
They can be printed or mimeoed or written up by hand.
The Pack No. and Course and Level can be entered.
So the following takes place:-
1. Student wants a pack
2. It is signed for on the correct card
3. Time OUT entered
4. Time IN entered
5. Dates entered.
,k track must be kept of the materials including Books and tapes.
LRH:SB:an.ei.rd Written by W/O James Byrne
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
125
HU13BARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 MAY 1969
Remimeo
Dian Checksheet
Div 1
DIANETIC CERTIFICATES
A sign must be posted near the Registrar area and on the Student
Bulletin Board in any org or groups teaching Dianetics.
ENROLLMENT ON A DIANETICS COURSE DOES NOT GUARANTEE A CERTIFICATE,
ONLY EXCELLENT MARKS AND WELL DONE SESSIONS QUALIFY THE STUDENT.
LRH:an.ei.kd.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO BULLETIN OF I I JUNE 1969
Dian Course
Super Checksheet
Dissern Sees
Tech Secs
Qual Secs
MATERIALS, SCARCITY OF
A hidden outness and training slower downer is materials, scarcity of.
A whole course can be wrecked by lack of study materials.
Speed of Training was a major 1969 breakthrough. It takes only 2 weeks
to a month to make a competent Dianetic auditor using Standard Dianetics.
This can be greatly retarded by study material scarcity.
The best way to handle this is to have plenty of study packs, books
and clay.
Another way to handle it is to break the checksheet down into parts A,
B, C and D and issue different sections of it to a broad new course. It
does not greatly matter which one the student does first.
Material scarcity tends to equalize itself when a course enrolls every
day. You gradually get a spread out of materials.
In past years study materials have been a continuing problem. All
possible is being done to make this easier. But as Dianetics expands it
will probably never cease to be a problem. It is a point which requires
thought and attention on the part of every group, org, Course Supervisors
and Administrators.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:Idm.ei.rd Copyright@ 1969
126
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 JULY AD 19
Remirneo
Dianetic
Checksheet
Class VIII
Checksheet
Case Supervisors
Dir Tech Services
Ds of P
Ds of T AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT
POLICIES
One used to hear auditors complain, "Scientologists are harder to
audit than new pcs". We know the answer to this now. It is Auditor Speed.
When an auditor complains of this, he is revealing that he is a slow
auditor.
Dianetics and Scientology (demonstrated by carefully Controlled tests)
greatly speed up reaction time. They also increase IQ rapidly and were the
reason colleges came off their "IQs never change".
As a person is audited he becomes quicker mentally. Also he becomes
less comm4aggy. Also he is more familiar with technology and his own case
and is less afraid of himself and his "bank".
In assigning auditors to pcs if you do not pay attention to comparable
grade levels between auditors and ocs you will have failed sessions.
Therefore it is policy not to assign an auditor whose grade and class
is less than that of the pc.
Further, a good auditor deserves a good auditor. To assign a new
student to audit a skilled and practised veteran auditor of excellent
auditing record is suppressive. The new student or now graduate would
probably be intimidated just at the thought of auditing someone who is far
more expert-this would magnify his flubs and comm-lags.
Therefore it is policy to assign only good proven auditors to good
auditors.
It is a suppressive act to assign a new or poor auditor to an auditor
who has proven he can attain uniformly good results.
Slow auditors will be found successful auditing slow auditors.
This does not excuse not drilling slow auditors up to becoming fast
precision auditors.
Good auditors are valuable. They should be safeguarded, given favours
and even pampered.
Slow auditors should be drilled and given slow (new) pcs only until
their own case gain brings them, with their drills, higher case gain and
thus higher speed.
LRH:cs.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
CopyrightQ 1969 Founder
127
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JULY 1969
Remimeo
Dian Supvr Course
All Supervisors' Courses
All Course S
and Course n Hats
COURSE ADMINISTRATION
ROLL BOOK
Every Dianetics and Scientology Course has a course ROLL BOOK.
The purpose of the ROLL BOOK is to provide a permanent record of all
who enrolled on the course and whether or not they graduated.
The Roll Book must be a thick hard cover foolscap size and well bound
book.
On the inside first page is printed clearly-
Course name Date book started Name of Org, Center or Group Date book
completed.
Inside, the double pages are divided into vertical columns of
appropriate widths as follows:
Student's full name Permanent address Local Address and Phone number
Date started on course Invoice number Date course completed and two columns
to note retraining
-dates started and completed.
In this book every student is logged, by the Course Administrator,
when he joins the course, and every student is logged off the course upon
completion.
This book is used for roll call but only in so much as to compile from
it the muster sheet, which is not a part of this book.
When the Roll Book is full, or at the end of the Course in the case of
a non-continuing course, it is sent immediately in an Org to Dir of
Inspections and Reports to be filed in VALUABLE DOCUMENTS files in Dept 3.
Thereafter it remains in the charge of VAL DOCS IN CHARGE. In a Center or
Group the completed Roll Book is securely kept by the Leader of the Center
or Group. If the group is disbanded or ceases to operate, their Roll Books
are forwarded to the nearest org.
Dir of I & R in an Org should from time to time inspect the Roll Books
in use on courses and ensure that they are being kept in accordance with
this Policy Letter, and that all completed ones have been turneq in.
The Course Roll Book is the ONLY record of course attendance an Org,
Center or Group has. The full application of this Policy Letter will ensure
that the record is
permanent.
Ens. Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD:cs.ei.rd Planning & Training Aide
Copyright (R) 19 69 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
128
FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 13 MAY 1957
cc: Registrar
Dir/Training
Dir/Processing
Org Secty
Treasurer
Accountant
File
I
FINANCIAL ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE
The Registrar enrolls the student or preclear, fills out proper forms
such as enrollment, release and note.
The Registrar accepts the money from the student or preclear and takes
it at once to the Accountant.
The Accountant invoices the payment.
The Accountant writes any additional note payment on the invoice but
not in the column of figures.
This entry says "Payments due so and so to such and such an amount
such and such dates."
The Accountant gives the Registrar the White and a yellow copy.
The Registrar takes the white and yellow copy back to her office. She
gives both to the student or preclear.
The Registrar enters the person in a running record of enrollment with
name, home address, local address and classification (student or pc).
The student or preclear keeps the white as his own receipt.
The student or preclear gives the Dir of Training or Dir of Processing
the yellow when he reports.
From these yellows only when received from the student or preclear,
the Dir of Training and Dir of Processing makes up his financial report.
No further information will be furnished Dir of Training or Dir of
Processing by accountant.
The Registrar makes up no report sheet.
The Founding Church invoices no books or materials. Therefore, only
student and preclear fees and note payments, donations, ordinations and
loans are invoiced by the Founding Church.
The Accountant invoices all note payments. The Registrar does not but
can receive these and take them at once to Accountant.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
May 13, 1957
129
. NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON GOLD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
ADMINISTRATIVE DIRECTIVE OF 6 MAY 1958
MODIFIED PROCEDURE FOR SIGNING UP
PROSPECTIVE STUDENTS & PCS
1. Student/pc applicant interviewed by Registrar first.
2. Student/pc applicant interviewed by Dir Training/Processing.
3. Director T/P indicate on acceptance form exact number of hours
processing/ training course for which they accept applicant. If
unacceptable (as per HASI Pol Ltr 8 February 1958) this must be specified.
4. Applicant returns to Registrar who then signs him up for
indicated number of hours processing/indicated course; takes cash, etc. If
applicant hasn't "time" he can sign up anyway even if he doesn't pay.
5. Applicant reports to auditor/classroom as per published
schedules.
Our criteria is not the amount of money or "time" the applicant has:
our criteria is: "Will this person become Clear in .... weeks?" or "Wgl
this person become a good auditor?" The amount of cash the applicant has on
hand is secondary in importance to these vital criteria. If he is cleared
or/and becomes a good auditor the financial problem will be solved by him
without great difficulty in due course.
Assoc Sec per LRH instructions
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH BLUE ON GOLD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 MAY 1958
WHO SHOULD TAKE WHICH CLASS
The Dir Training should never instruct the advanced Academy class,
because of the amount of administrative work he has to do. Director
Training preferably teaches Comm Course. The Academy Senior Instructor
should handle the advanced class and so no admin work. His job is making
sure the student is an auditor at course end. The Academy Administrator
should be the Upper Indoc Instructor.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH: rs.rd
130
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East drinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 AUGUST AD9
[Excerpt]
CenOCon
PROMOTIONAL FUNCTIONS OF THE ACADEMY
The first function of the Academy is to have a good Academy run with
tough 8C. For years it has been observed that a fine tautly scheduled
Academy that puts students over the jumps and makes them into
uncompromising zealots for the right way of doing things always attracts
new students. A bad Academy is always badly attended. The grapevine here is
so apparent that one only need look at Academy attendance to know Academy
quality. This is the first line of Academy promotion. The second line of
promotion in the Academy is using old students to get new students by
letters and programs. Amongst these programs is the Extension Course.
LRH:brb.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Excerpted from HCO P/L 26 August AD9, Promotional Functions of
Various Depts. A complete copy is in Volume 7, page 135.]
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
GREEN ON GOLD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 16 OCTOBER 1959
CenOCon
HANDLING STUDENTS' AND AUDITORS' REPORTS
(Cancels all previous directives on this subject)
Directors of Training are not to abbreviate their students' reports in
any way. They are to send the full reports by surface mail to Ron at Saint
Hill, and these will be returned.
Anything startling or dangerous that shows training improvement or
decay should be briefed by the HCO Area Secretary in the Training Digest,
so that it can be handled speedily.
All HCO Communicators are required to make sure that the students'
reports are sent by surface mail and not by airmail. They are further
requested to see that the students write legibly. If they do not, issue
them infraction theses. Also see that they use flimsy paper to save bulk.
All Directors of Processing are to see that their auditors use airmail
weight paper for their reports. Because of the weight, money is being
wasted on airmail goods.
LRH:NW:dd.rd
HCO Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
131
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 OCTOBER 1959
CenOCon
ACADEMY TRAINING
No student should ever be refused training. Processing can be
recommended, but not insisted upon as a pre-requisite to training.
If a student is in bad shape, he'll never get passed off the HPA Comm
Course and, of course, extra weeks cost more (E7.1 0.0 per week in Sterling
areas).
Students can always be recommended by the Director of Training to come
off course and get processing in the HGC. But, never put a STOP on the line
before a student has tried, that is, begun the course.
A potential student is reaching.
LRH.-js.eden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1959 Executive Director
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 JULY 1960
CenOCon
TRAINING APPLICANTS
It sometimes happens that an application for training is received from
a person who is known to have a criminal record, or who would not be able
to pass a security test, or who for some other reason would not be eligible
to receive a certificate.
In such cases, the person may be accepted for training, but he must be
warned beforehand that no certificate will be issued if a security check
cannot be passed. This, of course, is true of all Academy applicants.
Peter Hemery
HCO Secretary WW
LRH:j&cden for
L. RON HUBBARD
132
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 AUGUST 1960
Fran Hldrs Ds of T Registrars Assn Secs HCO Secs
TRAINING RESTRICTIONS
For the first time in our history, I am placing restrictions on the
acceptance of students for training in Dianetics and Scientology.
It is important that these restrictions be placed in effect and kept
in effect.
We are becoming too successful to take stupid risks as an
organization.
Several recent instances in various parts of the world showed that we
were accepting security risks for training. In most cases our people stood
around all sweetness and light and wouldn't believe as usual but in these
cases they suddenly alerted to the fantastic liability of standing by a
security risk.
Therefore, no student may be accepted for training by the Director of
Training until he has been given a solid security check by the D of T
personally. If the student fails to pass the test he is to be sent to the
HGC for processing using the money deposited for training. When entirely
cleared he may then be accepted for training and, only then. Thus he is not
refused training. But he may not be trained before he is cleared if he is a
security risk.
State of case shall be used for rejection only when it is such that he
or she is impossible to security check by reason of a stalled or wild
needle that will not register.
These three reasons only may be used for rejection in addition to the
above.
1. Has a criminal record;
2. Is studying Scientology to procure data or evidence for another
organization; and
3. Is a member of a subversive organization that might use
Scientology to overthrow a government by force.
See that we get careful about this now.
Validation seals may not be placed on existing certificates without
security checking for above.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:js.cden Copyright (D 1960
133
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 JANUARY 1961
Ds of T
HCO Secs
ACADEMY METERS
The Academy rates no meters for student issue.
As they can't possibly audit well after course without a meter they
should be encouraged to buy their own before course.
SALES POLICY
HASI sells all meters sold on HP terms (time payment). HCO makes all
full cash sales with discounts as allowable.
LRH:js.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1961
by L Ron Hubbard
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1961
Issue 11
Gen Non- (Reissued 3 March 1967)
Remimeo
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
Keeper of the
Seals and
Signature TRAINING QUALITY
It becomes fantastically, screamingly apparent that we must not ever
turn out or let go a bad auditor, poorly trained.
Accordingly put permanent signs where D of T and Dir of Exams can see
them in
their offices as follows:
EVERY TIME YOU TURN OUT A BAD AUDITOR YOU MAKE ENEMIES
FOR SCIENTOLOGY.
INCOMPETENT AUDITORS ARE A MAJOR SOURCE OF OUR
TROUBLES.
LRH:jp.eden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1967 Founder
134
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO Area Secs HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 DECEMBER 1961
Org Sees
Ds of T
CenOCon DIRECTOR OF TRAINING - WEEKLY REPORT FORM
Effective inimediately-Directors of Training are required to make a
weekly report on a form to be mimeoed in blue or black ink on flimsy quarto
white paper, as follows: (Use this form routinely)
ACADEMY OF SCIENTOLOGY
LONDON (or name of your Orga)
DIRECTOR OF TRAINING WEEKLY REPORT
WEEK ENDING-
NUMBER OF UNIT 1 STUDENTS ON COURSE DURING WEEK
NUMBER OF UNIT 2 STUDENTS ON COURSE DURING WEEK
NUMBER OF EVENING HPA/I-ICS STUDENTS ON COURSE DURING WEEK
NUMBER OF WEEKEND STUDENTS ON COURSE DURING WEEK
NUMBER OF I-ICSIB.Scri STUDENTS ON COURSE DURING WEEK
TOTAL NUMBER OF STUDENTS ON ALL COURSES DURING WEEK
NUMBER OF STUDENTS GRADUATED DURING WEEK: HPAiHCA-HCSJB.Sen
NAMES OFNEW STUDENTS:
DIRECTOR OF TRAININGS REPORT.- (On progress of classes)
COMMENT OR REPORT ON INSTRUCTORS AND ON ANY NEW REQUIRED MATERIAL
BEING TA UGHT
DATE: SIGNED: DofT
This form to be sent on Wednesday of each week together with
Instructors' and Students' reports for the same period, to HCO Technical
Secretary WW at Saint Hill. The D of T's report must be stapled I st in the
package, with Instructors' reports and finally Students' reports in that
order.
Students' auditing reports are to be kept by the Organisation and are
not to be sent to Saint Hill.
. Students' reports will be kept at Saint Hill for at least 6 months
and then returned to the Organisation concerned for filing in each
student's folder.
The Director of Training is responsible for seeing that all these
reports are done, collected together and forwarded correctly each week to
HCO WW at Saint Hill.
LRH:EW:esc.rd Issued by: HCO Technical Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
05
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 DECEMBER 1961
CenOCon
EXTENSION COURSE COMPLETION
Students who finish the Extension Course should be sent a letter or
document, signed by the Director of Training, stating that they have
graduated from the course.
This will give the students a more definite end of cycle and sense of
accomplishment.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:esc.rd Copyright (B 1961
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MAY 1962
Central Orgs
Academies
HPA/HCA TRAINING
HPA/HCA students, or auditors doing HPA/HCA retread, are expected to
graduate after a period of 16 weeks or 48 weekends (proportionately for
night HPA/HCA courses).
The Director of Training will frequently re-direct the student's
attention to the course requirements, and instruct him if necessary:
(a) To have auditing at the HGC.
(b) To brush up and/or study data or background in Scientology,
attend PE course, Anatomy of Human Mind course and the Co-audit, and read
books or listen to tapes before resuming course.
(c) To handle his problems if any need handling, before returning to
the course.
If the student cannot complete the course by graduating after the 16
weeks or 48 weekends, he will be allowed to complete it at the cost of f
10. 10.0 for each additional week, or three weekends (proportionately for
night HPA/HCA, proportionate cost in other currencies).
LRH:cw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
136
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 OCTOBER 1962
HCO Secs HCO Board of Review Central Orgs
PREPARATION OF HPA/HCA CERTIFICATES
No HPA/HCA graduate should be considered released from the Academy
until he has fully completed Course requirements and he has passed his Oral
and Written examinations and has satisfactorily completed his Certificate
Application Form. Delays in completing these last three items should be
minimal.
Providing his Course fees have been fully paid, or satisfactory
arrangements have been made for completing payment, on the day that he is
released from the Academy the new Graduate is to be handed his HPA/HCA
certificate.
Therefore, instead of waiting until Course completion for preparation
of certificates as previously, on date of commencement of HPA/HCA Course a
despatch is written by the Director of Training to the HCO Board of Review
giving the full names of the new students who have commenced on Course.
HCO Board of Review will then proceed immediately with the preparation
of
these certificates. This follows the normal procedure except that
after I have signed
them and sent them back, they are placed in the Valuable Documents
Safe and remain
there until date of issuance. They are NOT to be embosse ' d with the
HASI Seal until
the date on which the certificates are actually handed to the new
graduates.
Delays in certificate issuance are to be obviated completely.
LRH:gl.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinsfead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 APRIL 1963
CenOCon
DIRECTOR OF TRAINING WEEKLY STUDENT INTERVIEWS
The old policy of.the Director of Training having a brief end-of-week
interview with each student on Course in the Academy is herewith re-
introduced.
Progress in training that week should be the keynote of these
interviews (not case).
LRH:gl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1963
137
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 AUGUST 1963
HCO Sees
Assoc/Org Sea
Tech Dirs
D/T Hat
"PLANTS" IN ACADEMIES - INTRODUCTION OF "FORM" 5B
In times of expansion it is to be expected that occasionally a
government "plant" or active commie will endeavour to gain access into the
Org. The Academy is the easiest point of entry for a stay of a little time
for such undesirables. For example, a wave of suppositional reports of this
occurred after the recent FDA attack in Washington DC. If they were true
then it was an affront to Scientology, quite apart from anything else.
However, such an attempt can be regarded, comparatively, as a rarity.
Nevertheless, Directors of Training should have some easy foolproof method
to pick off such and satisfy themselves that no students are in their
Academies for anything other than what the students stated they were there
for, i.e. to receive training and graduate.
The D/T normally interviews all new students before they enter on
course in his Academy, and this stage would be a convenient point in which
to have a fast check.
Accordingly, during the brief duration of this interview, the D/T
should place the student on the E-Meter whidh is set, at high sensitivity,
and ask with ARC this question: "Are you here for any other purpose than
what you say/state?" This question may need clearing with student but it
should take only a very brief time to clear and clean. Variations of this
question may be used, but this type question designed as a fast check
question on new students will be referred to henceforth as a Form 5B.
The D/T is merely to be satisfied that the new student being
interviewed by him is not a "plant". Then, having cleared the question, and
the D/T is satisfied the student is bona fide, the D/T can then brief the
student crisply for starting course, etc, and bring the interview quickly
to a close.
Remember, the question is designed to pick up "plants" and such an
attempt will be very rare but nevertheless may occur from time to time. In
the event of the D/T having some doubt on the person being interviewed by
him, he should refer the person to the Technical Director immediately for a
further check.
The totality of the duration of the D/T inter-view need not be more
than 10 minutes in its entirety. Judgement is required by the D/T in
administering this "filter point" in that it is not intended to act as a
complete embargo on all and every student whether bona fide or otherwise.
The chances of the latter being attempted are slim but this Form 5B should
now handle such an attempt smoothly.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
HCO Sec WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd Copyright (D 1963
138
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 SEPTEMBER 1963
CenOCon
RIGHT TO REFUSE HPA/HCA STUDENT APPLICATION
The Director of Training has the right to refuse a Student's
application for HPA/HCA training in the Academy, if the Student:
I . Cannot pass the 5B check (see HCO Pol Ltr of August 8, 1963).
2. Cannot pass the 5A Security Check.
3. Has a chronic body condition for which he is under medical care
and/or taking drugs (see HCO Pol Ltr of May 4, 1960).
4. Will not agree to abide by all Course rules.
If criminal past, or blackmailable activities come to light on the 5A
check, the person may sometimes "pass", but dubious cases may be referred
to the Assoc Sec and HCO Sec, who may decide each case on its own merits.
If a prospective student obviously needs auditing or would be better
off for some auditing first, he should be advised to obtain auditing before
going on course.
LRH:dr.bp.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 DECEMBER 1964
General
Non-Remimeo
RE: OIC DATA
(In line with the Scientology boom as planned
in HCO Pol Ltr of December 3, 1964)
Even though the PE Course as such may cease in many Orgs, the vital
post of Dir PE is maintained. In line with the purpose of the PE Dept
("Producing new Scientologists") the Dir PE is still responsible for HAS
procurement-and for getting new bodies into the Org. This also means that
the number of students on the HAS Course will still be shown under PE
Column on OIC cables-and not under the Academy.
Total number of students on all the higher level Courses, HQS, HCA,
HPA and HCS, will, of course, still be given in the Academy Column.
In this way the Dir PE is responsible for'getting the students on to
the HAS Course, while the Dir of Training is responsible for running such
an excellent HAS Course that the students would want to go on to the HQS-
and then HCA and then ... etc, etc.
Since HAS will be a paid-for Course, it is okay to include all
interviews and sign-ups for HAS Course under the Reg-Interviews and Reg-
signups Columns.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
139
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo Dir Inspec & Rpts DofT Tech Sec Org Exec Sec HCO Area Sec
HCO Exec Sec
E-METERS AND BOOKS FOR
ACADEMY STUDENTS
There is a policy for Academies that each student own his own E-Meter.
This is true for any level Academy Course.
It's up to the D of T to make sure his students own their own meters
and are using E-Meters as per policy.
TEXTBOOKS
An Org Tech Div or any other part of the organization may not provide
a library as a substitute for students buying their own textbooks. In any
non-state supported grade school and in any college or university students
are expected to buy their own textbooks for their courses. They are told
what to buy before starting the course and do so. Don't violate this
custom.
Also, students will do better if they own their own textbooks as,
naturally, they will need them for reference.
Any Scientology book on a check sheet must be bought by the student
for that course. This is true of Foundation courses also.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright @ 1965
140
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 SEPTEMBER 1967
Remimeo Tech Div Qual Div
THE SUPERVISOR'S CODE
(extracted.from the ACC Manual published 1957)
Revised 15 September 1967
The Supervisor's Code has been developed over many years' experience
in training. It has been found that any time a Supervisor broke one of the
rules, to any degree, the course and training activities failed to function
properly.
Teaching Scientology is a very precise job, and a Supervisor must
maintain the precision at all times to render the services he should to the
students entrusted to his care.
A Supervisor cannot hope to gain the respect or willingness of the
student to be taught by him sitting there, spouting words and being an
"authority" on the subject. He must know his subject and follow the
Supervisor's Code to the letter. It isn't a hard code to follow, and it is
a very practical one. If you feel you cannot honestly follow all of it, you
should receive more training, and, maybe, more processing until you can
make the code your own before attempting to train students in Scientology.
We have had the rules of the game of Scientology a long time, and now
we have the rules of the game called training. Have fun!
I . The Supervisor must never neglect an opportunity to direct a
student to the actual source of Scientology data.
2. The Supervisor should invalidate a student's mistake ruthlessly
and use good ARC while doing it.
3. The Supervisor should remain in good ARC with his students at
all times while they are performing training activities.
4. The Supervisor at all times must have a high tolerance of
stupidity in his students, and must be willing to repeat any datum not
understood as many times as necessary for the student to understand and
acquire reality on the datum.
5. The Supervisor does not have a "case" in his relationship with
his students, nor discuss or talk about his personal problems to the
students.
6. The Supervisor will, at all times, be a source point of good
control and direction to his students.
7. The Supervisor will be able to correlate any part of Scientology
to any other part and to livingness over the 8 dynamics.
8. The Supervisor should be able to answer any questions concerning
Scientology by directing the student to the actual source of the data. If a
Supervisor cannot answer a particular question, he should always say so,
and the Supervisor should always find the answer to the question from the
source, and tell the student where the answer is to be found.
9. The Supervisor should never lie to, deceive, or misdirect a
student concerning Scientology. He shall be honest,at all times about it
with a student.
10. The Supervisor must bean accomplished auditor.
141
11. The Supervisor should always set a good example to his students:
such as giving good demonstrations, being on time, and dressing neatly.
12. The Supervisor should at all times be perfectly willing and able
to do anything he tells his students to do.
13. The Supervisor must not become emotionally involved with
students of either sex while they are under his or her training.
14. When a Supervisor makes any mistake, he is to inform the student
that he has made one, and rectify it immediately. This datum embraces all
phases in training demonstrations, lectures,, and processing, etc. He is
never to hide the fact that he made the mistake.
15. The Supervisor should never neglect to give praise to his
students when due.
16. The Supervisor to some degree should be pan-determined about the
Supervisorstudent relationship.
17, When a Supervisor lets a student control, give orders to, or
handle the Supervisor in any way, for the purpose of demonstration or other
training purposes, the Supervisor should always put the student back under
his control.
18. The Supervisor will at all times observe the Auditor's Code
during sessions, and the Code of a Scientologist at all times.
19. The Supervisor will never give a student opinions about
Scientology without labelling them thoroughly as such; otherwise, he is to
direct only to tested and proven data concerning Scientology.
20. The Supervisor shall never use a student for his own personal
gain.
21. The Supervisor will be a stable terminal, point the way to
stable data, be certain, but not dogmatic or dictatorial, toward his
students.
22. The Supervisor will keep himself at all times informed of the
most recent Scientology data and procedures, and communicate this
information to his students.
I agree to follow and obey the foregoing code.
Signed:
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.cden Copyright Q 1967
142
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 DECEMBER AD 12
Remimeo (Reissued as amended
Tech Sec Hat 7 September 1967)
D of T Hat
Supervisor Hat
SUPERVISOR'S STABLE DATA
In addition to the Supervisor's Code (old Instructor's Code), there is
a primary stable datum about all supervision:
Get the student to accomplish auditing the preclear and then get the
student to accomplish it with better form, speed and accuracy.
A Supervisor must never lo se sight of the PURPOSE of auditing.
Auditing is for the preclear, is intended to improve the preclear's case.
Auditing is not just a matter of good form.
The reason some students do not accomplish auditing is that they
become so oriented on form alone that they forget the purpose of the form.
Good auditing form and correct sessioning obtains many times the
result of bad form and incorrect sessioning. But total form and no effort
to do something for the pc results in no auditing.
The result comes before the form in importance. Because students may
use this idea to excuse lack of form, Q and A-ing, and to squirrel with
their processes, the stable datum becomes unpopular with supervisors.
A student should first be held responsible for the state of the pc
during and after sessions and made to know that as an auditor he is there
to get a fast, good result. The student should then be taught that he can
get a better, faster result with better form. After that the student should
be taught that Scientology results are only obtained by correct and exact
duplication of Scientology processes, not by off beat variations.
The student wants to know how to do this or that. Refer him to his
materials on how to do the most fundamental actions, but MAKE HIM OR HER DO
IT. And keep up a running refrain that you want results, results, results,
on his pc.
The student will be all thumbs and faint. The Supervisor may be
horrified by the goofs. But don't bother with the goofs. Just demand
results on the pc, results on the pc, results on the pc.
This action by the Supervisor will teach the student (a) that he or
she.is supposed to get results in auditing and (b) that results can be
obtained and (c) that he or she sure needs better skill.
So the first address in training is to teach those above three things
(a), (b) and (c).
You can't teach a student who doesn't realize that results in the pc
depend on the auditor and auditing and that results are expected from
auditing; who believes results can't be obtained from auditing or wants to
prove auditing doesn't work; arid who doesn't yet know that he or she
doesn't know. These are the barriers to training and a good auditor.
The gradient approach to the mind is vital. Clearing will not occur
without it. But the gradient approach to auditing can be overdone to a
point where the student completely loses sight of why he is auditing.
143
1 . First and foremost the auditor accomplishes something for the pc
and without that there is neither sense nor purpose to auditing;
2. Excellent form accomplishes more for the pc faster; and
3. Exact duplication of processes alone returns standard high level
results on all pcs.
The student thrown in over his head learns:
A. Results in the pc depend on the auditor and auditing and that
results are expected from auditing;
B. That results can be obtained in auditing and the better the form
and duplication, the better the results and
C. That the student has more to learn about auditing and that the
student doesn't yet know.
Therefore the Supervisor must teach the student:
(a) That he or she is supposed to get results in auditing;
(b) That Scientology can obtain results; and
(c) That better form and duplication obtain better faster results.
I dare say many students learn things just because they are told to
and find no relationship between form, duplication and the preclear. Let
them fall on their heads and yet obtain results and this attitude will
change-and you'll save us a lot of off beat nonsense and case failures in
orgs and the field.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:dr.jp.cden , 1967
144
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS
WASHINGTON
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 MARCH
HCO London
Steves
LRH, Jr
Sue
Barrett
Marcia
MarilYn
Julia
Leigh
Ken S. STUDENT REPORTS
The routing of Student Reports is as follows:
1. Student to Instructor
2. Instructor to Director of Training
3. Director of Training to Ron
4. Ron to Central Files.
This will be followed in Washington and London alike-so that the
Student's Report will ultimately find its way to his own folder in Central
Files. (HCO Washington will send London Student Reports back to London for
their Central Files.)
This will give everyone concerned a chance to see how the student is
progressing; such information can also be useful in auditing the student.
Ron likes to see these reports so that he can tell how the classes are
going. After he has seen them, they will be sent to Central Files.
Mildred Deen
HCO Secretary, Washington
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 17 MAY 1957
cc: Dir of Training
Dir of Processing
Comm Course Instructor
Night HCA Instructor
Org Secretary
HCO Board of Review
Registrar
PE Found Instructor
Bulletin Board
HCO London-for
distribution there
DEFINITIONS
A CONSULTANT is an instructor who is on duty sporadically or from time
to time but not routinely in any one place.
AN INSTRUCTOR is one who has regular classes and who is assigned to
places at specific times.
A COACH is a student who is standing in the role of "pc?'.
LRH:md.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
5-17-57
145
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 MAY 1957
STABLE DATA FOR INSTRUCTORS
I . Keep students busy at all times. Do not let them have unassigned
work while at the Academy.
2. The Director of Training is not the Director of Processing. If
after the student intensive and a week's Comm Course a student's case is
not in condition so the student can be trained, the Director of Training or
the Instructor should send the student to the Registrar and should not
attempt a patch-up by another student. When the Director of Training
constitutes himself the Director of Processing he not only denies the
organization income but most usually continues the agony of the student and
does not get training done.
3. Answer the student's questions.
4. The stability of the Director of Training and his Instructors
depends upon the apparency of their agreement with me on what should be
trained and how it should be trained. When they innovate in disagreement
with organized schedules they lower the appearance of stability and deprive
themselves usually of fhe cooperation of students.
5. It is not the place of the Director of Training or an Instructor to
defend the organization, LRH, or the past track of Dianetics and
Scientology. Any new subject combating vested interests develops some
randomity. Rather than defend against critical attacks by students it is
much more productive to look over the student's case with an eye to sending
him to the Registrar.
6. The Director of Training and his Instructors are there to give
service. Service is always harder to give on an individualized basis and
easier to give on a wide group basis. However, we are training individuals
and even though it is difficult, service must be given.
7. On the head of the Director of Training and his Instructors rests
any future failure the student may have in processing preclears. Quality of
training is to the level of Staff Auditor HGC.
IF A STUDENT CANNO T BE TR USTED UPON GRAD VA TION
WITH AN HGC PRECLEAR, HE SHO ULD NOT BE GRADVA TED
OR CERTIFIED.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd 5-24-57
146
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
~ WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 15 JULY 1957
Our first lesson in training from the 18th ACC is that the only error
a Scientology instructor can make is in the direction of softness.
The one unit in the 3 ACC units now going through that
I . Had a student leave,
2. Didn't gain or learn were handled by poor 8c on instructor's part.
Scientology training Stable Datum:
When in doubt, handle student with much stricter positive placement
and
direction.
LRH:md.rd
7-15-57
L. RON HUBBARD
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH BLUE ON GOLD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 SEPTEMBER 1957,
STABLE DATA FOR INSTRUCTORS
1. Instructors must know and use the Instructor's Code to the
letter. There must be no violation of this Code permitted by the Dir
Training.
2. Grant Beingness to the students at all times. An Instructor must
be willing for a coach to "instruct" without resenting a "valence theft".
3. Insist that coaches give the student auditors wins; have coaches
push the student auditor to a better willingness and ability, and chop
bank, not thetan.
4. Have coaches coach with precision, and have them tell the
student auditor when he has done something well. Instruct them to tell the
student auditor what he is doing right as well as what he is doing wrong.
5. See that the coaches coach with Purpose, Reality, Intention, and
to Win.
6. Instruct coach to maintain his control when student auditor gets
in "hot water", adding more ARC to help him through it, while at the same
time banging away at the same level. Make the coach who caused it retrieve
any student who blows.
7. An Instructor's sole purpose is not to make a student blow. The
main goal of an Instructor is to make a better auditor. This then must
apply to coaches.
8. Always answer your students' questions as per the Instructor's
Code. An Instructor should not withhold communication from students when
the student needs communication.
9. Run good 8-C on students with lots of ARC. Stress good 8-C more
than ARC.
10. The most important thing an Instructor should do is to make a
good auditor out of every student. This means making good coaches. This
means wins. This means beingness. As ye teach 'em, so shall they audit.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rs.rd
147
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
(Issued at Washington)
ORGANIZATION POLICY LETTER OF 25 JANUARY AD8
All Staff
Field Offices
INEPT STUDENTS
Datum: Tests of clearing through training have resulted in the
conclusion that there is no substitute for processing, even training.
When a student, after a week's comm course, shows clearly (a) he has
no reality on Scientology or (b) he has no wish to make people better, only
worse, the responsibility of the Comm Course Instructor and the Dir of
Training is to send the student to HGC at his own cost for processing.
Otherwise the student will enturbulate the class and impede the
instructors and come out wrong-way to, wasting seven weeks of inability to
learn. The faster route is auditing.
If such a thing is to be done, midway in the Comm Course it should be
known and the Comm Course Instructor should invest the remainder of the
week in convincing the student of the realities that could exist in
Scientology.
The student if he refuses processing is told he may continue training
but it is doubtful if he will ever be given his certificate.
A special student rate may be arranged by Registrar at her discretion.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rs.rd
148
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 APRIL 1958
Issued at Washington
All staff
Field Offices
ARC IN COMM COURSE
There are two types of Auditing. Both include control. They are called
"Formal Auditing" and "Tone 40 Auditing".
The first is control by ARC. The second is control by direct Tone 40
command.
The first, Control by ARC, is taught in Comm Course. The second,
Control by Tone 40, is taught in Upper Indoc.
The two are never mixed in teaching. Tone 40 is never taught in a Comm
Course and is noteven permitted. ARC is not taught in Upper Indoc.
The most widespread weakness in auditors prior to this date is an
inability to use step one of Clear Procedure (Participation by the pc).
This is only good ARC in the Training Drills of Comm Course. Auditors are
now too prone to let CCH Ob Help do the work. Auditors fail to make the pc
feel they are interested inthe pc when they handle him with poor ARC.
We care nothing about ARC in Upper Indoc. We want command, we want
Tone 40. We do not even handle pc origins in Upper Indoc.
Students must understand that there are two types of auditing. They
should realize that Tone 40 is for the unconscious, the psycho, the non-
communicative, the electric shock case pc. The student should realize that
ARC formal auditing is not chatty or yap-yap, but it is itself. It has
warmth, humanity, understanding and interest in it.
Academy Dir of Tr, Comm Course and Upper Indoc Instructors should keep
this in their hats as needful technical data, since we must turn out
auditors capable of handling pcs with ARC.
LRH:bt.rs.cden.rd LRH
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON (Issued at Washington)
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 APRIL 1958
To: All Staff for info
ALL Instructor Hats
B. Board
Field Offices
To: All Training Activities
VITAL TRAINING DATA FOR TRAINING HATS AND REGISTRAR
Students in the Academy are, auditors. They are not preclears.
Emphasis is on auditors, not pcs.
The goal of the Academy is to produce auditors of such quality that we
would be willing to hire them in the HGC. We don't graduate those we
wouldn't.
Training staff can refuse a student at any time on grounds of
inadequate financial arrangements. In which event the student applicant is
returned to Registrar.
The Academy is not a clinic and concerns about cases belong to the HGC
and are so referred.
LRH:bt.rs.rd LRH
149
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
London (Issued at Washington DC)
HCO 13ULLETIN OF 29 SEPTEMBER 1958
I ea. staff member
All Technical Hats
Field Offices
VITAL TRAINING DATA
(This Bulletin Changes the Character of Training)
No instructor can train a student unless he follows the Instructor's
Code. This code is learned by heart by an instructor, not read.
Wherever we are making poor auditors, we have confused the role of the
Academy with that of the HGC. The HGC processes, the Academy trains only.
Tell every student, tell every class of students, tell every
instructor many times,
THERE ARE ONLY AUDITORS AT THE ACADEMY. THERE ARE NO CASES.
Every time you as an instructor get interested in the student's case,
you make him put up his engrams for your inspection. Every time you get
interested in his auditing skill only you make him put up auditing skill
for your interest.
From this date:
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES MAY AN ACADEMY TAKE UP THE PERSONAL OR CASE
PROBLEMS OF A STUDENT.
We've got 2,500,000,000 preclears. We can somehow control ourselves
long enough to make a few auditors.
They are made by direct, blunt instruction, the tougher the better.
They are unmade by a lot of super saccharine sympathy about their poor,
hopeless little cases.
So let's go, training units. No more clinics where there should be
schools. You'll have nothing but cases forever if you don't make some
auditors!
The week's intensive formerly offered with courses is turned over
herewith to HGCs. No further clinics as such may be run by Academies.
Auditing may occur in Academies but there may not be preclear conferences,
general or private, about the students' own cases. This works a hardship on
HGCs to some degree but HGCs occasionally are victimized by having to train
late students who were not trained but only processed through to HCA/HPA.
Thus an HGC has an interest in training quality.
Hereinafter all processing for keeps will be done in the HGC and all
training will be done in the Academy.
There is a standard toward which a student is trained. It includes two
disciplines. Formal Auditing and Tone 40 Auditing. Formal is taught in Comm
Course, Tone 40 in Upper Indoc. Students must know their codes and must
know how to follow them-no evaluation no invalidation.
All of Dianetics, the Anatomy branch of Scientology must be taught.
The six simple types of processing are taught.
The axioms are taught.
Anatomy of the mind is taught, not just a lot of figure-figure theory.
The student gets there by finding he can confront in a preclear locks,
secondaries, engrams, chains, time track, circuits, machinery, valences,
the parts of livingness.
Manifestations of phenomena are taught, overt-act motivator sequences,
problems, computations, cognitions, comm lags, introversion, extroversion,
exteriorization, A-R-C.
Scales are taught-ARC Scale, Effect Scale. The Academies must now
undertake 3 separate courses and adhere to each.
If an instructor won't confront students he starts a big theory course
that avoids all anatomy, takes up the personal problems of the students,
excuses every failure to teach by saying it was student case. If case gets
in the road send the student to the HGC to pay for auditing or not. If
theory gets in the road of training auditors, teach anatomy only.
150
Let's go on this.
1 am instructing all HCO Boards of Review to examine completely on the
above outlined items only and to flunk hard any student who doesn't know
his subject. We care little for the synopses and the paper work. We want
auditors who know their business, not a lot of squirrels.
A pc gets well in direct ratio to his ability to confront the anatomy
of life, the anatomy of mind and the physical universe.
How do you suppose you'll ever get any auditing done if the student
can't confront, via a pc yet, life, the anatomy of the mind and the
physical universe. It's easier for a student to confront than a preclear to
confront.
I've got a big idea for training: to wit: Let's deliver the goods!
LRH:md.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
rs:3,10.58
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 MAY 1959
HOW TO WRITE A CURRICULUM
1. Establish personality of person present. (Create their beingness
on course.) Course creates a beingnessl not imparts data.
2. Demonstrate how to create this beingness.
3. Establish communication by teaching the language of the subject.
4. Exemplify the communication symbols with demonstrations of
ridiculous errors.
When established teach
1. Each word and its definition that is used in the practice.
Underline strange words.
2. Diagnosis. You must recognize ("Conditions we are seeking to
change") i.e. Obnosis.
3. System of classification.
4. Means of changing each class or type of child, and maintenance
of state. Subject matter: "Prevention of worsening".
Practice
Demonstration
Doingness
Note. Person who is willing to be the person who sees.
Person who sees.
Person who discusses.
Person who can do something.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mp.rd
151
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 NOVEMBER 1961
HCO Secs Assoc Secs Ds of T
TRAINING COURSE RULES AND REGULATIONS
All Scientology Academies and Courses are required, forthwith, to
adopt these rules and regulations:-
I . Do not consume any alcoholic beverage during Class days or on
the day before a Class day.
2. Do not consume, or have administered to yourself, or any other
student, any drugs, antibiotics, barbiturates, opiates, aspirin, sedatives,
hypnotics or medical stimulants, for the duration of the Course, without
the express approval of the Director of Training,
3. Do not give any processing to ANYONE without the express
permission of the Director of Training.
4. Do not receive ANY processing from ANYONE under any
circumstances without the express permission of the Director of Training.
S. Do not engage in any 'Self-Processing' under any circumstances
during the Course at any time.
6. Do not receive any 'treatment', 'guidance', or 'help' from
anyone in the 'healing arts', i.e., Physician, Dentist, etc., without the
consent of the Director of Training.
7. Follow exactly ALL instructions given by your Instructor and the
Director of Training.
8. Adhere completely to the Code of a Scientologist for the
duration of the Course.
9. Follow the Auditor's Code during all sessions when being the
Auditor.
10. Be on time, and follow all Schedules exactly.
11. Get sufficient food. Eat Breakfast BEFORE Class and morning
sessions. Get sufficient sleep.
12. When being a Preclear, be one, not a student or auditor. When
being an Auditor, be an auditor, not a student or preclear. When in class
or lectures, be a Student, not an auditor or preclear.
13. Get off all your known withholds. Know that you have definitely
and absolutely NO hope of case-advancement unless you get these known
withholds off to your auditor.
14. Follow ALL auditing directions given you on your auditing-report
forms for your preclear.
15. Follow technical procedure as outlined on the Course exactly and
precisely.
16. Be honest at all times on your auditing-report forms. Stating
every process run, Tone Arm changes and times, Sensitivity setting,
cognitions of your preclear and any changes of physical appearance,
reactions, communication level, or anything else that you observe in your
preclear.
17. Place all reports on your sessions as auditor in the folder of
your preclear after each session, and place the folder then in the basket
marked for such. Never place a folder after a session is over in an
inappropriate basket.
18. No student may read his/her own case-report folder or that of
another student, unless he/she is auditing that student.
19. If you don't know something or are confused about course-data,
ask an Instructor or send a despatch to the Director of Training. Do NOT
ask other students as this creates progressively worsening errors in data.
152
20. Do notleave any papers, food or personal articles in your
despatch baskets. These baskets are for preclear report folders or
despatches only.
21. The basket marked "Student In" is the basket where all
communications, bulletins or mail to students are placed. Always check this
basket daily to see if you have received any communications.
21 Study and work during your class-periods. You have a lot to get
checked out on in order to get a Course Completion. You can't afford to
waste time.
23. Auditors and preclears are not allowed to smoke during sessions,
at any time. Smoke only during a break.
24. Do not engage in any rite, ceremony, practice, exercise,
meditation, diet, food therapy, or any similar occult, mystical, religious,
naturopathic, homeopathic or chiropractic treatment or any other healing or
mental therapy while on Course without the express permission of the
Director of Training.
25. Do not discuss your case-or that of any other student-your
auditor, your Instructors, your classmates, L. Ron Hubbard, Organisation
personnel or the Organisation with anyone.
26. Do not engage in any sexual relationships of any nature or kind
with any classmate who is not your legal spouse. You are here to learn and
get as close to Clear as possible, not to run continual Present Time
Problems.
27. Weekly reports are required from each student; these reports
MUST be placed in the appropriate basket each Monday morning by full-time
students, on Monday evening by evening-course students and Saturday morning
(for previous weekend) by weekend-students. These weekly reports must be
written on WHITE QUARTO FLIMSY PAPER, and shall contain approximately 250
words written under the following headings: "What I have learned", "What I
have observed", "What I have liked most", lWhat I have disliked most",
"Comments and Suggestions",
"Number of weeks on Course" and "Instructor: Each heading to be
clearly indicated and underlined. The report must be headed with the
student's
full name-top left corner, title of Course (e.g., Evening HPA, Unit 2,
Retread) in
centre of page, and, in the top right corner, the location E.G.,
London,
with-below this-the date as "Week-Ended If it is not practicable
to type this report, it must be written very legibly-in block letters
if necessary,
and if the writing is not legible it will be given back to the student
to be
re-written.
28. The above rules and regulations are inflexible, and are to be
followed by all students during the Course. There will be no exceptions.
29. Any infraction against the above regulations will result in the
student being required to write a paper of 200 words getting off his overts
and withholds against any and all students, Instructors and personnel
connected with the Course.
N.B. Extra rules for local conditions may be added but NONE of the
above may be deleted.
Issued by: HCO Technical Secretary WW
for
MARY SUE HUBBARD
HCO Training Supervisor WW
LRH:jw.oden Copyright Q 1961
153
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 DECEMBER 1961
HCO Area Sea
Org Secs
Ds of T
Instructors
CenOCon
INSTRUCTORS' WEEKLY REPORT FORM
Effective immediately, ACADEMY Instructors are required to make a
weekly report on a form to be mimeoed in blue or black ink on white quarto
flimsy paper as follows:
ACADEMY OF SCIENTOLOGY
LONDON (or Name of your Org)
JjNSTR UCTORS WEEKL Y REPOR T
INSTRUCTOR FOR (e.g. UNIT I - WEEKEND HPA) WEEK ENDING
NUMBER OF NEW STUDENTS ON COURSE-
NUMBER OF OLD STUDENTS ON COURSE
TOTAL IN CLASS
NAMES OFSTUDENTS: (State which are new, retread, etc)
PROGRESS OF CLASS: (Individually -briefly -and collectively)
DATE SIGNED
INSTRUCTOR
This form to be sent on the Wednesday of each week (with D of T's and
Students' reports), to HCO Technical Secretary WW at Saint Hill.
LRH:EW:imj.rd
Copyright @) 1961 Issued by: HCO Technical Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
154
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 DECEMBER 1961
(Amended and Reissued on 23 October 1967)
Remimeo
STUDENTS'WEEKLY REPORTS TO RON
All Scientology students are to make a weekly report (monthly for
Foundation students) on the following form:
TO LRH ACADEMY OF SCIENTOLOGY
(Name of Org)
STUDENTS WEEKLY REPORT
STUDENT'S NAME WEEK ENDING
TITLE OF COURSE
WHATIRAVE LEARNED
WHA T I HA VE OBSER VED
WHA T I LIKED MOST
WHA T I DISLIKED MOST
SUGGESTIONS AND COMMENTS
LENGTH OF TIME ON COURSE
SUPERVISOR COMMENTS
These forms are to be forwarded to LRH via the International Technical
Officer WW. They should be done on airmail paper.. Any report illegibly
written should not be forwarded,but should be handled as a NO REPORT to
Ethics.
Org Exec See WW
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.rd The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Note: The original 8 Dec '61 issue contained a similar form and
differed only slightly in instructions for use and routing. A 23 Oct '63
issue was identical to the above. 8 Dec '61 was added to by HCO P/L 9 May
1962 on page 158, and was later amended and replaced by HCO P/L 18 March
1971, Students' Weekly Reports to Ron, in the 1971 Year Book.]
155
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 JANUARY 1962
(Reissued as amended on 21 June 1967)
Remimeo
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
HCO Hats
HCO STANDING ORDER NO. 5
STUDENTS
All students formally enrolled into any Academy of Scientology shall
be thoroughly trained.
The standard of the lowest professional certificate shall be such as
to permit immediate and unashamed use of the student on graduation in any
Hubbard Guidance Centre.
The only lasting overt that can be done with Scientology is to fail to
disseminate it well and accurately. This includes student training.
Students must be trained to expect and achieve spectaculai processing
results early in training.
Students must be oriented during training into caring for the cases of
their preclears.
In event of a poor or difficult student, it must be demanded by
Supervisors that the matter be remedied by Review or Ethics.
Students must be trained to resolve their problems with Scientology.
Students must be trained to audit regardless of their own
restimulation or cases. When auditing, auditors do not have cases.
Students must not be permitted to sag or slack or fall away in
attendance and this can be done because all such attitudes result from a
student's failure to obtain a reality early in training.
We must train new Scientologists so that we can have pride and
confidence in them as Scientologgists, not from an examination of their
record but from the sole fact that th6y have been Academy trained.
Students and Supervisors alike should fully understand that neither we
nor this universe can afford to waste even one potential auditor.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:sf.jp.cden , 1967
156
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 APRIL 1962
Sthil
Academies
TRAINING COURSE REGULATIONS
(ADDED)
In schoolrooms, lecture rooms or auditing rooms in any Scientology
Course neither cigars nor pipes may be smoked. Only cigarettes of a usual
tobacco may be smoked, and these with due regard for the possible
objections of other students.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 APRIL 1962
CenCCon Academies Courses
REGULATIONS, ACADEMIES AND COURSES
Add to training regulations for all Courses,
Academies and the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course.
If it be discovered, by whatever means, that a student is not studying
tapes and bulletins for examination but is studying instead only the
answers to examination questions, however procured, then the tape and
bulletin section of the check sheet of that student shall be destroyed and
the student shall be required to begin the entire tape and bulletin study
anew without credit for any he has done.
In comment, the responsibility of all instructors is to graduate
students who have accurate knowledge of the subject. Studying examination
questions only defeats this and will find the student some day completely
adrift in his handling of a preclear,
The first date after which this regulation shall be in effect shall be
20 April 1962 and only offences committed after that date shall cause this
regulation to go into effect against a student,
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
157
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 MAY 1962
Central Orgs D of Ts
ADDITION TO STUDENTS' WEEKLY REPORT
(Adds to HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 December 19 6 1, Students' Weekly Reports)
In order for HCO WW to see the actual progress of students, the
following is to be added to the Students' Weekly Report below the title of
INSTRUCTOR:
Check outs: Flunks: Passes:
LRH:jw.rd Issued by: Philip D. Quirino
Copyright g 1962 Acting Tech See WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 MAY 1962
Central Orgs
Academies
TAPE EXAMINATIONS
In examining students on tapes, do not demand actual wording. Demand
an answer that clearly shows that the student has heard and understood the
tape and can apply the knowledge.
If the student is in doubt about the answer, flunk. If the examiner is
in doubt make the student amplify.
Asking for verbatim wording drives students to copying Tapes verbatim
and causes them to scant understanding.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.eden
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 MAY 1962
Franchise
Central Orgs
Tech Depts IMPORTANT
Post Conspicuously
in Training 0 ce TRAINING DRILLS
and on Student Board MUST BE CORRECT
TRs which give an incorrect impression of how auditing is done may not
be taught.
All TRs must contain the correct data of auditing.
THIS IS VITAL. There. have been two broad instances where TRs gave an
impetus to improper auditing which all but crippled the forward advance of
Scientology.
These were:
Upper Indoc TRs which caused students to conceive that the CCHs were
run without 2 way comm and with a militant, even vicious attitude. (See HCO
Bulletins of April 5 and 12, 1962.)
E-Meter Needle drills which caused the student to believe that every
action of the needle was a read and prevented three-quarters of all
Scientologists from ever getting rudiments in or questions cleared, (see
HCO Bulletin of May 25, 1962 and 2 Saint Hill Lectures of May 24, 1962).
In the matter of the CCHs, we were deprived of their full use for 5
years and extended the time in processing 25 times more than should have
been consumed for any result. This came from TRs 6-9 which are hereby
scrapped.
In the matter of the E-Meter it is probable that all auditing failures
and widely extended false ideas that Scientology did not work stem from the
improper conception of what action of the needle one cleaned up. This came
from needle reading TRS where instructors had students calling off every
activity of the needle as a read, whereas only the needle action at the
exact end of the question was used by the auditor. Auditors have thought
all needle actions were reads and tried to clean off all needle actions
except, in some cases, the end actions. This defeated the meter completely
and upset every case on which it was practised. This accounts for all
auditing failures in the past two years.
CCHs must be taught exactly as they are used in session, complete with
two way comm-and no comm system added, please.
E-Meter drills must be used which stress only meaningful and
significant instant reads coming at the end of the full question.
Other actions of the needle may be shown to a student only if they are
properly called prior and latent reads, or meaningless action. From his
earliest training on meters the student must be trained to consider a read
only what he would take up in session and clear or use, and must be taught
that mere actions of the needle are neglected except in steering the pe,
fishing or compartmenting questions.
ONLY TEACH PROPER USE. ONLY USE TRS WHICH EXACTLY PARALLEL USE OF
SCIENTOLOGY IN SESSION AND DO NOT,GIVE AN IMPRESSION THAT SOMETHING ELSE IS
USED.
I have seen clearly that Scientology's effectiveness could be
destroyed by teaching via TRs which can be interpreted by a student as the
way to audit when in fact one does not audit that way or use the data in
auditing.
There are many valuable TRs. There will be many more valuable TRs. But
an invalid TR is one which gives a wrong impression of auditing. These must
be kept out of all training.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:gl.cden Copyright Q 1962
159
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 AUGUST 1962
CenOCon
Dir Mat
D of T
URGENT
TRAINING AIDS
Due to the great success and revelatory nature of the TV Demonstration
set up at Saint Hill, a smaller edition of this training aid is ordered
installed in every Central Organization.
The set up consists of one TV Camera, one TV set (21 or 23 inch), a
microphone, an amplifier and the required cable,
The TV camera (such as the Grundig) is equipt with a four inch lens.
It is mounted in a corner high and to the right behind the auditor (about
seven feet from the floor). An E-Meter, erected on its tipped back, is
placed firmly in a bed in the centre of a table. The face of the E-Meter is
then perpendicular to the camera.
The Auditor sits at the table, the camera "looking over his right
shoulder" at the E-Meter.
The preclear sits at the table across from the Auditor in the usual
position.
The microphone is placed under the "tent" made by the E-Meter.
There is no picture made of Auditor and preclear, only a picture of
the E-Meter.
The set up is placed in any oversize auditing room in the org and
usual auditing can go on in that room when the set up is not in use, or it
is placed at a separate table, otherwise unused, in the D of P's office.
The TV picture of the meter and the sound from the amplifier are led
by cables to the front of the usual assembly hall of the organization.
The TV set is placed on a very high stand so as to give everyone in
the room an unobstructed view of the screen.
The sound is connected to the speakers in the set itself, there is no
separate speaker.
This is used for demonstrations by Sthil graduates, and for student
demonstrations to reveal to all their skill in meter reading or lack of it
in an actual session.
No session before an audience is valid or natural and this arrangement
gives privacy for the,session but full display of the two important points
of a session-sound and meter. It will be a shock to both Ds of P and Ds of
T to see what is passing for meter reading, and a great help in training
HGC Auditors and students.
The TV picture of the meter crowds in only part of the TA and
sensitivity knob and all but a bit of the right side of the meter dial. The
meter must fill the screen.
The cost will be under E500 or $1200. The reward in technical cannot
be measured. A second camera and TV set which gives a side view of auditor
and pc is nice but is optional.
Use electronic friends of the org or commercial firms to install. But
make it a neat compact, trouble free installation with no loose wires
about.
An intercomm phone from assembly room to auditing room is nice to
have.
Do it sooner.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden
[Note: This Policy Letter was reissued on 27 October 1969 with the
added title RE-INTRODUCED FOR DIANETTCS BY ORDER OF LRH.]
160
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 DECEMBER AD 12
Sthil Instructors Only Central Orgs HCO See, Assoc Sec D of T and
Instructors
INSTRUCTORS' STABLE DATA
In addition to the Instructor's Code, there is a primary stable datum
about all instruction:
Get the Student to accomplish auditing the preclear and then get the
student to accomplish it with better form, speed and accuracy.
An Instructor must never lose sight of the PURPOSE of auditing.
Auditing is for the preclear, is intended to improve the preclear's case.
Auditing is not just a matter of good form.
The reason some students do not accomplish auditing is that they
become so oriented on form alone that they forget the purpose of the form.
Good auditing form and correct sessioning obtains many times the
result of bad form and incorrect sessioning. But total form and no effort
to do something for the pc results in no auditing.
The result comes before the form in importance. Because students may
use this idea to excuse lack of form, Q and A-ing, and to squirrel with
their processes, the stable datum becomes unpopular with instructors.
A student should first be held responsible for the state of the pc
during and after sessions and made to know that as an auditor he is there
to get a fast, good result. The student should then be taught that he can
get a better, faster result with better form. After that the student should
be taught that Scientology results are only obtained by correct and exact
duplication of Scientology processes, not by off beat variations.
This matter comes to the fore with Routines such as 2-12, a Problems
Intensive, Prepchecking, Routine 3-21, 3GAXX and other powerful processes.
All these are powerhouses when done for the benefit of the preclear and
with perfect form and duplication of data.
However, R2-12 has the peculiar ability to produce- results with the
crudest of auditing. If you find anything that reads on, a meter and
represent it the pc feels miles better. So here is a procedure that.can be
done by a very green auditor and yet will produce an increased reality on
Sclentology in the pc. Thus the Instructor's Stable Datum above can be used
with telling effect.
HOW TO GET THE BEST OUT OF 2-12
The student is just thrown into the snake-pit..He is told to get a
result on the pc, not look pretty. The student is only told to GET A
RESULT.
There are no cheek sheets, pre-training, briefing, anything. Give the
student a meter, the Bulletins, LIST ONE, a pen and paper and DEMAND A
RESULT.
A session is started by saying "Start of Session" and stopped by
saying "End of Session". Nothing else.
The student wants to know how to do this or that. Tell him or her
briefly and individually how to do the most fundamental actions, but MAKE
HIM OR HER DO IT. And keep up a running refrain that you want results,
results, results, on that pc.
The student will be all thumbs and faint. The Instructor may be
horrified by the
161
goofs. But don't bother with the goofs. Just demand results on the pc,
results on the pc, results on the pc.
This action by the Instructor will teach the student (a) that he or
she is supposed to get results in auditing and (b) that results can be
obtained and (c) that he or she sure needs better skill.
So the first address to 2-12 in training is to teach those above three
things (a), (b) and (c).
You can't teach a student who doesn't realize that results in the pc
depend on the auditor and auditing and that results are expected from
auditing; who believes results can't be obtained from auditing or
Rockslammerlike wants to prove auditing doesn't work; and who doesn't yet
know that he or she doesn't know. These are the barriers to training and a
good auditor.
The gradient approach to the mind is vital. Clearing will not occur
without it. But the gradient approach to auditing can be overdone to a
point where the student completely loses sight of why he is auditing.
The advent of R2-12 gives us a chance to break away from too gentle a
gradient and pound home the simple governing principles of auditing, and
enter into an era of training in which swift students are not retarded
unduly by slow students and all students learn at once the most fundamental
lessons of auditing:
1 . First and foremost the auditor accomplishes something for the pc
and without that there is neither sense, nor purpose to auditing;
2. Excellent form accomplishes more for the pc faster; and
3. Exact duplication of processes alone returns standard high level
results on all pes.
The student thrown in over his head learns:
A. Results in the pc depend on the auditor and auditing and that
results are expected from auditing;
B. That results can be obtained in auditing and the better the form
and duplication, the better the results; and
C. That the student has more to learn about auditing and that the
student does n't yet know,
Therefore the Instructor must teach the student:
(a) That he or she is supposed to get results in auditing;
(b) That Scientology can obtain results; and
(c) That better form and duplication obtain better faster results.
1 dare say many students learn things just because they are told to
and find no relationship between form, duplication and the preclear. Let
them fall on their heads and yet obtain results and this attitude will
change-and you'll save us a lot of off beat nonsense and case failures in
orgs and the field.
R2-12 done before it is trained makes the student aware of lots of
things and additionally puts the student in shape to learn. The cheek sheet
in 2-12 comes after doing it. It will be wanted then. And in all other
types of process it then will be possible to do the cheek sheet before the
student does the process-the student will have seen the vital facts
contained in (a), (b) and (c) for himself.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd Copyright Q 1962
162
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 FEBRUARY 1963
Academies
Sthil Students HOW TO EXAMINE
THEORY EXAMINATIONS
The two most serious causes of students or staff failing to pass or
being unwilling to take Bulletin Checks are:
1. RS-ing on List One; and
2. Capricious Examination
V Unit cares for the one. A study and practice of this Policy Letter
should care for the other.
The important points of a Bulletin, Tape or Policy Letter are:
1. The specific rules, axioms, maxims or stable data;
2. The doingness details, exactly how is it done; and
3. The theory of why it is done.
All else is unnecessary. All you have to demand is the above. They are
given in order of importance. (1) The rules, axioms, maxims or stable data
must be known exactly verbatim and the student must be able to show their
meaning is also known to him or her.
(2) The doingness must be, exactly known as to sequence and actions
but not verbatim (in the same words as the text).
(3) The theory must be known as a line of reasoning, reasons why or
historical background and with accuracy, but not verbatim.
The date of the lecture or bulletin or letter is relatively
unimportant and other details of like nature should never be asked for.
If a student or Staff Member is ever going to apply the data, then
above (1) must be down cold, (2) must be able to be experienced and (3)
must be appreciated.
Asking for anything else is to rebuff interest and give a feeling of
failure to the person being examined.
An examiner should examine with fiendish exactness on (1) alertness on
(2) and seeing if the student understands (3). An examiner should not go
beyond these points, asking for what person was mentioned, who did the
test, what is the copyright date, what are the first words, etc.
Graduation from courses must be speeded up. And at the same time, the
data, the important data must be known and understood. Good, sound
examination is the answer here. Irrelevant examination questions only slow
the student and extend the course.
Be as tough as you please, but only on (1), (2) and (3) above.
LRH:dr.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
tRevised and replaced by HCO PIL 4 March 1971 Issue 11, How to do
Theory Checkouts and
Examinations, in the 1971 Year Book.]
163
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 MARCH AD 13
Sthil
Students
Info Central Orgs
Academies
CHECK SHEET RATING SYSTEM
A system of rating of material will hereafter be employed in all
Theory and Practical Examinations in all Scientology training activities.
Bulletins, tapes and Drills will be assigned each one a rating as
follows:
1. STAR RATING. Passing Grade 100% on extensive verbal examination
and/or inspection.
2. 75 RATING. Passing Grade 75% on simple written examination of
which True and False questions can comprise 75% or more of the questions
asked.
3. ZERO RATING. Passed by proof of having read or listened to the
material (such as notes or a general verbal statement of the subject which
assures the Theory Examiner that the material has been covered).
STAR RATING MATERIAL
THEORY: Bulletins and tapes of material vitally necessary in making
the currently used processes work, Auditor's Code, Axioms, etc.
PRACTICAL: TRO, 1, 2, 3, 4, Anti Q and A, Meter Reading, Session
Script, etc.
75 RATING MATERIAL
THEORY: Basic Theory Bulletins and Tapes.
PRACTICAL: None.
ZERO RATING MATERIAL
THEORY: Texts of Scientology, background material, older processes not
now in use, etc.
PRACTICAL: All remaining drills (passed by student on the evidence of
another student).
It is hoped that this system will speed training and ease its burden
on students and
instructors.
LRH:dr.rd
Copyright (j) 1963
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF IS MAY 1963
CenOCon
INSTRUCTOR HATS
Theory Examiner - Purpose: To ensure students know their
theory.
Practical Examiner - Purpose: To ensure students can apply
their
theory in a practical manner.
Auditing Supervisor - Purpose: To ensure students can audit.
LRH:gl.rd
Copyright (~) 1963
L. RON HUBBARD
164
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 SEPTEMBER AD 13
Central Orgs
Academies SCIENTOLOGYFIVE
SCIENTOLOGY INSTRUCTORS
The following is a guide to Scientology Instructors:
1. Scientology is a heuristic science.
2. The data has been discovered and assembled .
3. The data has been amply covered and explained by L.R.H. in
lectures and bulletins and books.
4. Training Drills have been devised and/or approved by L.R.H. and
are more than adequate.
S. Auditing Routines, Processes and Procedures have also been
prepared by L.R.H. and they are fully comprehensive and up-to-date.
6. The curriculum for any course has been carefully designed and/or
approved by L.R.H.
It should therefore be apparent that it is unnecessary for an
instructor to explain data, training drills or procedures either in long
individual talks or in 'lectures' to groups of students.
The job of an instructor is restricted to and his efforts should be
concentrated on checking to see that a student knows his data, can do his
TRs and can follow auditing procedure. This is done by testing and
observation. If a student flunks a test he is directed to study and/or
practise the material some more. If instructor finds from observation that
student does not know his data or is not practising it correctly then the
student is directed to study and/or practise accordingly. An instructor is
not a coach.
Within the foregoing is the student who asks questions. This shows he
does not know his data or training drill. The answer to the student's
question is contained in the published data so all an instructor has to do
is to refer the student to the book chapter, bulletin or tape that contains
the data. Instructor should avoid giving direct answers for at least two
reasons.
I . To encourage student to find out for himself.
2. To obviate the possibility of an instructor giving his
interpretation of data which may be an alter-is of the correct data.
Instructors should set a good example to students by handling them
with good ARC. Emphasis should be put on the following. Tell student "You
can do it". Don't tell them they have done wrong but point out that they
haven't properly understood the data and direct them to the data they
haven't understood. When a student has done a good job or is making good
progress, tell him. Don't give a student continuous losses, try to find
something,, however small, that lie has done right and point this out to
him.
At all times an instructor should present an unruffled demeanour and a
clean and tidy appearance.
An instructor maintains 8C with ARC not with the overbearing
discipline of a sergeant-major. He calls the roll, directs students where
to go and arranges schedules. He infracts infringement of course rules and
students' failure to follow instructions.
Students who are constantly failing in their studies are missing out
somewhere in their basic data so they need to be directed to study basic
material.
Remember that you are training auditors, one day you may need one of
them to audit you so make sure they know their data and can use it.
LRH:dr.rd Written & Issued by: Reg Sharpe
Copyright@ 1963 Course Secretary, SHSBC
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 27 October 1970 Issue 11, ne Course Supervisor,
in the 1970 Year Book.]
165
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1963
Tech Dirs D of Ts Academy Instructors Academy Students SHSBC
Instructors SHSBC Students
URGENT
COURSE RULES AND REGULATIONS
Ron wants to re-write the Rules and Regulations applicable to Courses
throughout Scientology. The purpose of the rules and regulations is to
enable training in Scientology to be unhindered as far as possible by the
untoward behaviour of students and instructors and by the state of the
quarters where the instruction takes place. He therefore requires that
every Academy Staff Member and every student at present on Course (SHS13C
included) send in suggested rules under the headings below so that a code
of regulations can be drawn up.
Instructors please write:
1 . Rules they consider necessary for students to abide by in order
to make instruction and admin easier.
2. Rules they would like instructors to abide by.
3. Rules they would like to see in force regarding the quarters
(premises and contents) where the Course is run.
At least three suggestions are required under each of the three
headings.
Students please write:
1. Rules they would like their fellow students to abide by.
2. Rules they would like instructors to abide by.
3. Rules they would like to see in force regarding the quarters
(premises and contents) where the Course is run.
At least twelve suggestions required under each heading.
HCO Secs are to arrange for suggestions to be written on the reverse
of a copy of this letter by every staff member and student, and sent to me
in bulk within seven days of receipt of this letter by the HCO See.
Existing rules may be used as a guide.
Issued by: Reg Sharpe
Course Secretary SHSBC
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd Copyright Q 1963
166
COURSE RULES AND REGULATIONS
NAME: DATE:
State whether student or
Staff position held
ACADEMY:
List at least 12 (or 3 for Staff Members) suggested Rules for Students
on Course.
List at least 12 (or 3 for Staff Members) suggested Rules for
Instructors on Course.
List at least 12 (or 3 for Staff Members) suggested Rules for quarters
(premises and contents) of the Course.
Write legibly. If there is not enough room on this form use another
sheet of paper with your name on it and pin it securely to this form.
167
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 SEPTEMBER 1963
Sthil
HATS OF STUDENT INSTRUCTORS FOR SHSBC
Hat of Student Instructor Supervisor
1. To see that the Student Instructors know and carry out the
procedures in:
(a) Auditing Section
(b) Practical Section
(c) Theory Section
2. To act as terminal for the Student Instructors and should
necessity arise re-arrange the weekly schedule.
3. To see that the Student Instructors are on post on time.
4. To see that the Student Instructors keep up their own Theory and
Practical Cheek Sheets and weekly TR drills.
5. To arrange ARC break assessments and to supervise same.
Student Instructors
Auditing Section Duties
The purpose of student instructors in the Auditing Section is to
assist the Auditing Supervisor with direct personal observation and control
of individual auditing sessions.
In order to accomplish the above student instructors have the
following duties:
I Know in detail all the auditing activities permitted in the
section assigned.
2. Ensure that the sessions in the assigned unit are started and
ended on time, are properly located and all pcs and auditors are present.
Be sure that the auditing schedule is being followed.
3. Check all sessions to see if auditors are following the D of P
instructions in the folder and/or the correct auditing procedure of that
unit and reporting any digression to the instructor of that unit. The
evening student instructor may give a note to the student auditor pointing
out the error and must state the error on his report to the auditing
supervisor. No other action may be taken.
4. Report Gross Auditing Errors to the instructor in charge of the
unit. Evening instructors note them in their nightly report to the auditing
supervisor. Gross auditing errors are:
I . Can't read meter.
2. Don't know procedure.
3. Can't complete auditing cycle.
4. Can't complete auditing cycle repetitively.
5. Doesn't pull missed W/Hs.
6. Can't handle an ARC break.
7. Can't handle a PTP or put pe into session.
8. Chronic cutting of pe's itsa line.
5. Write up informative, helpful pink sheets covering the whole
unit. Each auditor should receive at least one pink sheet per week. Turn
completed pink sheets over to the instructor in charge of that unit for
issuing.
168
6. Write up infractions for lateness, rule breakage, refusal to
obey instructions, etc, and turn them over to the instructor in charge of
that unit for issue.
7. Morning student instructors report to the instructor in charge
of that unit immediately and evening student instructors send a daily
written report to the Auditing Supervisor on all of the following
conditions:
I . Failure to follow auditing directions.
2. Lack of TA action.
3. No auditing being done.
4. Any session not going smoothly. (Pc nattery and ARC breaky with
no resolution of the causes,)
5. Any suppression of data with regard to the session activity on
the auditing report.
6. Any case that looks like blowing.
7. Any excellent auditing.
S. All student auditing enquiries are handled by saying, "Do what
you are going to do", and write up an infraction for unauthorised break.
The auditing section gives the students the reality that they will get
results by first applying the basic fundamentals and then following exact
procedure. The student auditor can do it.
The student instructor helps them by getting them to do it. Get the
student to apply the basic fundamentals and exact procedure and they will
get results.
Auditing Supervisor
Procedure for Student Instructors
Theory Section
All the Theory Section student instructors are examiners. Their job is
to make sure the student knows and understands the correct data contained
in the theory material listed on the check sheet.
1. The first thing a new student instructor does in the Theory Section
is study and get checked out on HCO POLICY LETTER OF February 14, 1963-"How
to Examine, Theory Examinatione', and HCO POLICY LETTER OF March 15, AD 13-
"Check Sheet Rating System".
2. The student instructor then gets a sheet of goldenrod paper, a
master check sheet and a testing location from the Theory Supervisor. Put
your name and the date at the top of the goldenrod paper and use it to
record the flunks and passes for each student tested. During a lull period
in the testing and about 10 minutes before the end of the assigned period
stop your testing and record the flunks and passes on the Master Roster and
our copy of the student check sheet.
3. At the time of the check out record the results on the goldenrod
sheet, sign, date and record pass or flunk on the student's copy of the
bulletin. Sign your full surname on both check sheets. Never use your
initials.
4. Record in the master roster in the column designated Flunk or
Pass a slash mark for every pass or flunk a student has been given. The 5th
slash mark is made through the previous 4 making a definite group of 5, In
the Pass columns the I st 10 passes go in the Ist pass column, the 2nd 10
passes in the 2nd pass column, etc.
5. Never leave the Theory Section until all passes and flunks are
fully recorded on the master roster and our copies of the student's check
sheet, the master roster and check sheet binder is never to be touched
unless you are on duty as a student instructor. No check outs are to be
given except when you are on duty as a student instructor.
6. When a student passes a bulletin say "Pass". When a student
flunks a bulletin say "Flunk".
7. If you ask a general question, be willing to get a general
answer. If you want a specific answer, ask for it specifically.
169
8. Only ask enough questions to be certain that the student knows
the correct data contained on the bulletin. This may be as few as one
question or as many as 50.
9. An examiner's job is to determine whether the student knows the
data or not. If the student does, he passes. If the student doesn't, he
flunks.
10. Ask direct, straight-forward questions. and keep accurate up-to-
date records, and the students will work hard and continue winning with
their theory.
Theory Section Supervisor
Practical
A Student Instructor:-
1 Calls roll promptly at 1.0 pm and 3.0 pm each day and at 4.55 pm
on Mondays. A
"That's W' is given at 2.50 pm and 4.45 pm each day and at 6.0 pm on
Mondays.
2. Reports any student not present at roll call to the Training
Office if the Practical Supervisor is not present. The student must be
found.
3. Sees that students are paired up immediately after roll call. If
one student is left over it must be reported at once to the Practical
Supervisor or to the Training Office. Another student must then be sent
over from Theory or that student goes to Theory and comes over the next
period.
4. Infractions. See Auditing Section Infractions.
5. Files all new pink sheets in the green folders. Files all
completed pink sheets in green folders and puts an X through the carbon
duplicates already in the green folders. These are then put in the
Practical Supervisor~s top basket. This is done every day immediately after
No. 3 has been done.
6. On Monday, student instructor chooses two chair monitors, whose
duties are to place in Chapel at 4.45 pm on Tuesdays, Wednesdays and
Thursdays, approximately 9 chairs in 9 rows leaving a gangway down the
middle, 4 chairs on the left, 5 chairs on the right (looking downwards
towards the blackboard). If television, the chairs are placed accordingly.
7. At the beginning of each period, goes round to each couple and
marks in any check outs the student has completed since the last practical
period.
8. Knows exactly how each drill is run, and when not checking a
student out, is constantly moving from couple to couple seeing that the
drills are being run properly and correcting any errors.
Practical Supervisor
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright (D 1963
170
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor,East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 SEPTEMBER 1963
sthil
TRAINING TECHNOLOGY
PINK SHEETS
All the study in the world isn't going to make an auditor. Learning
the data and the theory of auditing is vitally important. Perfecting your
practical drills is essential. However, the final test lies with the
question, "Are you getting results with your Pc?" Whether you are getting
results or not is totally dependent on whether or not you are actually
applying the data and theory you have learned, and are utilizing the
practical skills you have developed.
The bridge between the learning of data and development of practical
skills and their actual application in the auditing session can be mightily
bolstered by the Pink Sheet system of Auditing Supervision.
HOW TO ISSUE PINK SHEETS
1. Put two sheets of pink foolscap size paper on a clipboard with a
carbon between.
2. At the top of the sheet write the name of the student auditor
being observed, the date and the name of the observer.
3. Head a wide column on the right hand side of the sheet with
"Observations", a narrow column to the left of centre with "Theory and
Practical Assignment" and two more narrow columns on the left hand side
with "Coach" and "Instructor".
4. Take the above with your ball point into the vicinity of the
auditing session to be observed, close enough to hear and see what is going
on without intruding in the session.
5. Write in the wide column labelled "Observations" exactly what is
happening in the session.
This is very difficult to do for most people, (especially for someone
at the case
level of "only able to confront own evaluations"). Do not look for
auditing
errors. Just look and record what is happening. Do not write in
evaluation. Do not
write in invalidation ' s. Do not attempt to correct or teach in the
"Observations"
columns. Simply observe the session and record what is happening.
6. After you have filled one or more pages of the "Observations"
column, now is the time to evaluate;. Study what you have observed taking
place in the session and see if anything actually diverges from the correct
theory and practice of auditing.
7. Write in the column headed "Theory and Practical Assignment" the
date and title of the exact bulletin or tape containing the correct data or
the title of the exact practical drill which will correct the error
recorded in the "Observations" column.
If the session observed was a complete shambles, it means that some
basic, basic fundamental of auditing is absent in the student auditor's
repertory. Don't overload the student with tons of drills and theory
assignments. Look over your "Observations" column carefully and it will
suddenly dawn on you that this student hasn't a clue about the auditing
cycle or doesn't note the difference between the needle and the TA on the
meter. If you still can't find the main difficulty, you can always sit the
student down and ask something like "What happens when you sit down in
front of a PCV', or "What's the meter for?" You'll be surprised with some
of the answers you'll get.
171
On the other hand you might find that you'll fill up a couple of pages
of pink sheet without recording any errors. The auditor didn't happen to
goof. That's fine-send it to him without any assignment. It will still help
him.
8. Send the top copy of the Pink Sheet to the student and file the
carbon copy in the student's Pink Sheet folder. When the completed top copy
is returned by the student, with all the necessary signatures, throw away
the carbon copy and replace it with the completed top copy.
PINK SHEET EXAMPLES
I The following would be a poor Pink Sheet:
Theory & Practical Assignments.- Observations:
TRO Poor TRO
Meter Reading Auditor can't read the meter
Tape of Sep 18 '62 Aud Cycle Lousy handling of auditing cycle
In the above example the observer has evaluated, invalidated, only
made general comments. The above may all be true but the student auditor is
not helped by them, and the assignments don't pinpoint his major
difficulty.
2. The following would be a helpful pink sheet:
Theory & Practical Assignments: Observations:
Auditor leaning on table toying with the
TA and pen. Running "Since the last
TR-3 time 1 audited you" + buttons. Called a
speeded rise on "Careful of" clean. On
Tape of Sep 18 '62 "F to W' pc said "I don't think that
Aud Cycle answered the question". Aud: "OK. I'll
check it on the meter". TA blew down
to clear read on "F to R". And went on
to clean "Invalidate".
In the above example the observer states exactly what is happening in
the auditing session. The majority of observations noted show an inability
to complete an Auditing Cycle. (Even the Missed Meter read was an
incomplete cycle.) The student is therefore assigned material that will
help him learn and apply the auditing cycle. There may be other things that
can help him like TR-0 or Meter Drills. However adding these to the Pink
Sheet will only disperse his attention which should be applied to learning
and using the Auditing Cycle.
COACHING PINK SHEETS
Pink Sheets should be coached in both Practical and Theory. The coach
first reviews the observations thoroughly with the student and goes over
and over the bulletin or drill with the student until the correct data is
completely learned and understood or until the student can perfectly
execute the drill.
Once this is done, the coach signs his name opposite the assignment
notation on the Pink Sheet in the coach's column. The student is then ready
to have a test on the assigned material.
CHECKING OUT PINK SHEETS
In checking out the assigned material on the student's Pink Sheet, the
instructor should carefully go over the "Observations" with the student and
have the student spot the specific errors he has made, then have the
student give the correct data from the assigned bulletin or tape or show by
doing the practical drill that he has now mastered the skill that was
poorly applied in the auditing session.
172
The whole bulletin or drill should be reviewed by the instructor but
specific attention should be paid to points that the student was observed
to be weak in applying to his auditing. Be doubly strict on these points to
be sure the student doesn't continue to make the same errors again and
again. If each Pink Sheet thoroughly corrects only one gross auditing
error, really knocks it out, the student's auditing ability will improve
markedly in a very short time.
CONCLUSIONS
Pink Sheets are never used as punishment or to make the student wrong.
They are used to improve the student's auditing ability by having him
thoroughly learn data and practical skills he is weak in.
A student's weakness in data and skills often will not show up under
the normal conditions of theory and practical testing but they will stick
out like a sore thumb when he has to apply them in an actual auditing
session. Therefore, a Pink Sheet Assignment does not mean that the student
hasn't learned the material if he has already passed it in Theory or
Practical. It does mean that he hasn't learned it WELL ENOUGH to utilize it
under the duress of an actual auditing session.
If a student has gone a whole week without receiving a Pink Sheet, he
should start screaming. If his auditing is not being observed and his weak
points picked lip, how does he expect to improve? So, make a fuss, Student,
if you are not receiving Pink Sheets. And, Instructors, keep a tabulation
of when a student is issued a Pink Sheet so that you are sure to observe
each student at least once a week.
Issued by: Fred Hare
LRH:jw.aap Auditing Supervisor SHSBC
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
[Amended by HCO P/L 26 December 1970 (reissued & corrected 26 January
1971), Pink Sheets, which was later cancelled by a 9 January 1973 revision
of the above policy, HCO P/L 27 September 1963R, Training Technology-Pink
Sheets, in the Year Books.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 OCTOBER 1963
Central Orgs
Academics
STUDENT ARC BREAKS
Just as a pe cannot be audited over a severe ARC break, so a student
cannot make good progress if he or she has an ARC break with the Course
and/or Instructors.
All students should be made aware of this and told that if they have
an ARC break they should take it up with the instructors in question or the
D of T or (in the case of SHSBC) the Course Secretary.
The Instructor, D of T or Course Secretary should try to clear the
break with straightforward two-way comm and if this does not work the
Student should be given an ARC break assessment by a senior student.
It is the responsibility of all Students and Instructors to see that
any Student who is nursing an ARC break and not doing anything about it, is
handled as above-quickly.
Issued by: Reg Sharpe
LRH:dr.rd Course Secretary SHSBC
Copyright 0 1963 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
173
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
All Course Staffs HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 APRIL 1964
Tech Sees Hats (Reissued as amended on 23 June 1967)
Qual Sees Hats
Ds of T Hats
Academy Staff Hats SCIENTOLOGY COURSES
There are three zones of responsibility in course management. These
are:
I . Providing valuable subject materials;
2. Organizing and rodifying those materials so that they are highly
effective and comprehensible; and
3. Supervising the student in those materials to a point of high
comprehension and competency.
In Scientology (1) has been done, fully and completely. There are now
no gaps or unanswered questions.
In (2) the very best of Scientology has been selected out for
supervision and is being written in such a way as to minimize any confusion
and maximize the communication and practice of the data.
In (3) we have our largest potential randomity. And it is this with
which this Policy Letter is concerned. The Supervision of the student is a
personalized matter. Students require answers to their own questions and
clarification of their own understandings. The burden of this falls on the
Supervisor.
In auditing it has taken us a long time to learn that there are no bad
preclears. There are only auditor errors.
We have now learned a similar thing about Supervising. There are no
slow students. There are only slow Supervisors.
The length of time a student is on a course is a direct index of the
quality of Supervision on that course.
A fast course is well supervised. A slow course is poorly supervised.
A bad course gets bad enrolments. A good course gets good enrolments.
If enrolment is down, the course is a poor course. That has been observed
continually in Academies for years and has no variations. If you want a
full course, provide a well-supervised course.
If course enrolments are down, don't ponder beyond this how to improve
the course. And you'll win if you improve the course.
This is a brick wall datum: a poor course will become an empty course.
The speed with which a student can go through a course depends only on
(1), (2) and particularly (3) above. It does not depend on the student.
Don't blame students. Look at (1), (2) and (3) above.
There are no slow students. There is only slow supervision.
The future of ScientologY courses depends on getting the student
rapidly through the course and graduating him or her at a good level of
competence.
174
Scientology course futures do not depend on lowered rates.
You are already selling pearls for pennies.
Just make sure you are selling pearls.
I have taken care of (1). (2) is very thoroughly in hand. (3) is up to
you.
A fast course is a well supervised course. A full course is a well
supervised, fast course.
That's all the mystery there is in it.
LRH:jwjp.rd
, 1967
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Note: 23 June 1967 differs from the original 10 April 1964 in that
"Instructing" has been changed to "Supervising" throughout.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 MAY 1964
Sthil Students
CenOCon
Academies THEORY TESTING
EXPIRATION DATES
(Applies to all Bulletin, tape exams
except zero rating)
In theory testing. the slow down comes in part from making the student
pass a test on the entire bulletin even though he or she did not flunk
until the last paragraph. Retesting the entire bulletin is both time-
wasting and exasperating.
Therefore bulletin and tape tests are given an Expiration Date. If
retaken in one week, the only part examined is from the area flunked
onward. If, however, the bulletin or tape is retaken after a period of one
week the entire material is retested.
The Examiner, when a student flunks, marks the student's bulletin or
tape notes with an initial and a date just above the area of the first
flunk. The Examiner may go a question or two above the question flunked to
enter the date and initial. No other record is made.
If the student is re-examined on a date before the date marked plus
seven (within one week) the Examiner only asks questions from the date mark
onward.
It does not matter how many flunks are given or how many weeks a
bulletin or tape exam is extended so long as no period of seven days
elapses between tests. If such a period does elapse (date written + 7 days)
only then does the whole material get examined.
The reason for this Expiration Date is this: students are often very
poor administrators. They take a bulletin or tape, study it and flunk it,
throw it aside and take up another one. Finally they have gone through all
the course materials in this fashion and have nothing on their check sheets
and nothing but failure in their studies. By introducing the Expiration
Date they are persuaded to complete that which they begin.
As students have to go to the end of the examination line, popping
back in for the next bit a minute later is unworkable. Further an Examiner
seeing that a student is trying to pass an examination with one question
passed at a time can always exercise his right to assure himself the
student knows the materials by a spot examination of
the whole bulletin or tape before granting a pass.
LRH:jw.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
175
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 SEPTEMBER 1964
(Reissued on 21 July 1967)
Remimeo
Franchise
All Students
Tech Divs
Dist Divs
UNDERSTANDING AND TAPE LECTURES
When tapes are played to students (either in groups or individually)
the students should be told to make notes of any word or phrase they do not
understand so that they can refer to the Scientology dictionary, a general
dictionary, or their technical materials for explanation.
The Supervisor should give a brief explanation if the word or phrase
is at a higher level of training than the student is learning or refer
student to the detailed definition to be found in publications if it is at
the same or lower level.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH.jw.jp.eden , 1967
[Note: In the 21 July 1967 reissue, "Instructor" has been changed to
"Supervisor". The original issue referred the student to the Instructor for
an explanation instead of to the materials.]
176
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1964
Remimeo
Sthil Instructors
HCO Hat Cheek on INSTRUCTION & EXAMINATION:
all Acad Instructors RAISING THE STANDARD OF
The basic reason students remain long on courses sterns from inept
criticism by instructors regarding what is required.
There is a technology of criticism of art, expressed beautifully in
the Encyclopaedia published by Focal Press.
In this article it stresses that a critic who is also an expert artist
tends to introduce unfairly his own perfectionism (and bias and
frustrations) into his criticism.
We suffer amazingly from this in all our courses. I had not previously
spotted it because I don't demand a student at lower levels produce results
found only in higher levels.
You can carelessly sum this up by "letting the student have wins" but
if you do you'll miss the whole point.
Example: A student up for a pass on his Itsa is flunked because he or
she couldn't acknowledge.
But a student at the Itsa level hasn't been taught to acknowledge.
This student hasn't even read the data on acknowledgement.
So the student can't pass Itsa level and so never does get to the
level where acknowledgement is taught-and if he does, really never passed,
in his own mind, Itsa and so hasn't advanced.
And we catch all our students this way and they don't therefore learn.
How is this done? How could this be?
The instructor is an expert auditor. That's as it should be. But as an
expert auditor, bad execution of a level above where the student is
studying, pains the instructor. So he flunks the student because the
auditing looks bad.
But look here. The student wasn't being checked out as an aultor. The
student was only being checked out on Itsa,
Further, the action of auditing as a whole is so easy to an instructor
who is an expert auditor that he fails to take it apart for instruction.
If 1 say the following, it will look ridiculous and you'll get the
point better: The student is up to pass TRO. The Instructor on check out
looks the student over and says "You flunked the test." The student says
"Why?" The Instructor says "You didn't take the Class VI actions to clear
the pc of all his GPMs." All right, we can all see that that would be
silly. But Instructors do just that daily, though on a narrower band.
The Instructor puts in additives. As an expert auditor it seems
natural to him to say "You flunked your test on Itsa because you never
acknowledged the pc." You get the point. This really is as crazy wide as
the ridiculous example above. What does Ack have to do with Itsa? Nothing!
Because the Instructor is an expert auditor, auditing has ceased to
have parts and is all one chunk. Okay. A good auditor regards it that way.
But the poor student can't grasp any of the pieces because the whole chunk
is being demanded.
What's Itsa? It's Listen. Can the student listen? Okay, he can listen
but the expert says, "He didn't get 15 divisions of TA per hour." On the
what? "On the meter of course." What meter? That's Level II and Itsa is
Level 0. "Yes," the expert protests, "but the pc didn't get any better!"
Okay, so what pc is supposed to get better at Level 0. If they do it's an
accident, usually. Now does this student pass? "No! He can't even look at
the pc!" Well, that's TRO of Level 1. "But he's got to look like an
auditor!" How can he? An auditor has to get through a comm course before
you can really call
177
him that. "Okay, I'll drop my standards the expert begins. Hell
no, expert.
You better pick up your standards for each Level and for each small
part of auditing.
What's it say at Level 0? 'It says 'Listen'." Okay, then, damn it,
when the student is able to sit and listen and not shut a pc down with yak,
the student passes. "And the meter?" You better not let me catch you
teaching meters at Level 0.
And so it goes right on up through the Levels and the bits within the
Levels.
By making Itsa mysterious and tough, by adding big new standards to it
like TA and Ack you only succeed in never teaching the student Itsa! So he
goes on up and at Level IV audits like a bum. Can't control a pc. Can't
meter, nothing.
So the expert tries to make a student do Class VI auditing the first
day and the student is never trained to do any auditing at Level 0.
This nonsense repeated at Level 1 (by adding a meter, by purist
flunking "because the pc couldn't handle an ARC Break") and repeated again
at Level 11 ("because the pc
couldn't assess") and at Level Ill etc. etc.
Well, if you add things all the time out of sequence and demand things
the student has not yet reached the student winds up in a ball of confusion
like the cat getting into the yarn.
So we're not instructing. We're preventing a clear view of the parts
of auditing by adding higher level standards and actions to lower level
activities.
This consumes time. It makes a mess.
The new HCA always tries to teach his group a whole HCA course his
first evening home. Well, that's no reason seasoned veterans have to do it
in our courses.
If you never let a student learn Level 0 because he's flunked unless
he does Level VI first, people will stay on courses forever and we'll have
no auditors.
Instructors must teach not out of their own expertise but out of the
text book expected actions in the Level the student is being trained in. To
go above that level like assessment in Level II or Ack and meters at Level
0 is to deny the student any clean view of what he's expected to do. And if
he never learns the parts, he'll never do the whole.
And that's all that's wrong with our instruction or our instructors.
As expert auditors they cease to view the part the student must know as
itself and do not train and pass the student upon it.
Instead they confuse the student by demanding more than the part being
learned.
Instruction is done on a gradient scale. Learn each part well by
itself. And only then can assembly of parts occur into what we want-a well
trained student.
This is not lowering any standards. It's raising them on all training.
Bulletin Check Outs
The other side of the picture, theory, suffers because of a habit. The
habit is all one's years of formal schooling where this mistake is the
whole way of life.
If the student knows the words, the theory instructor assumes he knows
the tune.
It will never do a student any good at all to know some facts. The
student is expected only to use facts.
It is so easy to confront thought and so hard to confront action that
the Instructor often complacently lets the student mouth words ideas that
mean nothing to the student.
ALL THEORY CHECK CUTS MUST CONSULT THE STUDENT'S UNDERSTANDING.
If they don't, they're useless and will ARC Break the student
eventually.
Course natter stems entirely from the students' non-comprehension of
words and data.
178
While this can be cured by auditing, why audit it all the time when
you can 1 1 1 prevent it in the first place by adequate theory check-out?
There are two phenomena here.
First Phenomenon
When a student misses understanding a word, the section right after
that word is a, blank in his memory. You can always trace back to the word
just before the blank, get it understood and find miraculously that the
former blank area is not now blank in the bulletin. The above is pure
magic.
Second Phenomenon
The second phenomenon is the overt cycle which follows a misunderstood
word. When a word is not grasped, the student then goes into a non-
comprehension (blankness) of things immediately after. This is followed by
the student's solution for the blank condition which is to individuate from
it-separate self from it. Now being something else than the blank area, the
student commits overts against the more general area. These overts, of
course, are followed by restraining himself from committing overts. This
pulls flows toward the person and makes the person crave motivators. This
is followed by various mental and physical conditions and by various
complaints, fault-finding and look-what-you-did-to-me. This justifies a
departure, a blow.
But the system of education, frowning on blows as it does, causes the
student to really withdraw self from the study subject (whatever he was
studying) and set up in its place a circuit which can receive and give back
sentences and phrases.
We now have "the quick student who somehow never applies what he
learns".
The specific phenomena then is that a student can study some words and
give them back and yet be no participant to the action. The student gets A+
on exams but can't apply the data.
The thoroughly dull student is just stuck in the non-comprehend
blankness following some misunderstood word.
The "very bright" student who yet can't use the data isn't there at
all. He has long since ceased to confront the subject matter or the
subject.
The cure for either of these conditions of "bright non-comprehension"
or "dull" is to find the missing word.
But these conditions can be prevented by not letting the student go
beyond the missed word without grasping its meaning. And that is the duty
of the Theory Instructor.
Demonstration
Giving a bulletin or tape check by seeing if it can be quoted or
paraphrased proves exactly nothing. This will not guarantee that the
student knows the data or can use or apply it nor even guarantees that the
student is there. Neither the "bright" student nor the "dull" student (both
suffering from the same malady) will benefit from such an examination.
So examining by seeing if somebody "knows" the text and can quote or
paraphrase it is completely false and must not be done.
Correct examination is done only by making the person being tested
answer
(a) The meanings of the words (re-defining the words used in his own
words and demonstrating their use. in his own made up sentences), and
(b) Demonstrating how the data is used.
The examiner need not do a Clay Table audit just to get a student to
pass. But the examiner can ask what the words mean. And the examiner can
ask for examples of action or application.
"What is this HCO Bulletin's first section?" is about as dull as one
can get. "What
are the rules given about V' is a question 1 would never bother to
ask. Neither of
179
these tell the examiner whether he has the bright non-applier or the
dull student before him. Such questions just beg for natter and course
blows.
I would go over the first paragraph of any material I was examining a
student on and pick out some uncommon words. I'd ask the student to define
each and demonstrate its use in a made up sentence and flunk the first
"Well .... er .... let me
see and that would be the end of that cheek out. 1 wouldn't pick out
only
Scientologese. I'd pick out words that weren't too ordinary such as
"benefit"
"permissive" "calculated" as well as "engram".
Students 1 was personally examining would begin to get a hunted look
and carry dictionaries-BUT THEY WOULDN'T BEGIN TO NATTER OR GET SICK OR
BLOW. AND THEY'D USE WHAT THEY LEARNED.
Above all, 1 myself would be sure I knew what the words meant before 1
started to examine.
Dealing with new technology and the necessity to have things named, we
especially need to be alert.
Before you curse our terms, remember that a lack of terms to describe
phenomena can be twice as incomprehensible as having involved terms that at
least can be understood eventually.
We do awfully well, really, better than any other science or subject.
We lack a dictionary but we can remedy that.
But to continue with how one should examine, when the student had the
words, I'd demand the music. What tune do these words play?
I'd say "All right, what use is this bulletin (or tape) to you?"
Questions like, "Now this rule here about not letting pcs cat candy while
being audited, how come there'd be such a rule?" And if the student
couldn't imagine why, I'd go back to the words just ahead of that rule and
find the one he hadn't grasped.
I'd ask "What are the commands of SCV'. And when the student gave
them, I'd still have the task of satisfying myself that the student
understood why those were the commands. I'd ask "How come?" after he'd
given me the commands. Or "What are you going to do with these?" "Audit a
pc with them" he might say. I'd say, "Well, why these commands?"
But if the student wasn't up to the point of study where knowing why
he used those commands was not part of his materials, 1 wouldn't ask. For
all the data about not examining above level applies very severely to
Theory Cheek out as well as to Practical and general Instruction.
I might also have a Clay Table beside my examiner's desk (and
certainly would have if 1 were an HCO hat checker, to which all this data
also applies) and use it to have students show me they knew the words and
ideas.
Theory often says "Well, they take care of all that in Practical." Oh
no they don't. When you have a Theory Section that believes that, Practical
can't function at all.
Practical goes through the simple motions. Theory covers why one goes
through the motions.
1 don't think 1 have to beat this to death for you.
You've got it.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.cden
[Modified by HCO PIL 4 October 1964 (reissued 21 May 1967), Theory
Check-out Data, page 181.1
180
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 OCTOBER 1964
Remimeo Reissued on 21 May 1967
All Staff
All Students
Tech Hats
Qual Hats THEORY CHECK-OUT DATA
(Modifies HCO Pol Ltr of Sept 24, '64)
In checking out technical materials on students or staff, it has been
found that the new system as per HCO Pol Ltr of Sept 24, '64 is too lengthy
if the whole bulletin is covered.
Therefore the system given in Sept 24,'64 Pol Ltr is to be used as
follows:
1 . Do not use the old method of covering each bit combined with the
new method.
2. Use only the new method.
3. Spot check the words and materials, do not try to cover it all.
This is done the same way a final examination is given in schools: only a
part of the material is covered by examination, assuming that if the
student has this right the student knows all of it.
4. Flunk on comm lag in attempts to answer. If the student "er ....
ah .... well. .. " flunk it as it certainly isn't known well enough to use.
(Doesn't include stammerers.)
5. Never keep on examining a bulletin after a student has missed.
6. Consider all materials star rated or not rated. Skip 75%'s. In
other words, the check-out must have been 100% right answers for a pass.
75% is not a pass. When you consider a bulletin or tape too unimportant for
a 100% pass, just require evidence that it has been read and don't examine
it at all. In other words, on those you check out, require 100% and on less
important material don't examine, merely require evidence of having read.
THE "BRIGHT" ONES
You will find that often you have very glib students you won't be able
to find any fault in who yet won't be able to apply or use the data they
are passing. This student is discussed as the "bright student" in the Sept
24, '64 Pol Ltr.
Demonstration is the key here. The moment you ask this type of student
to demonstrate a rule or theory with his hands or the paper clips on your
desk this glibness will shatter.
The reason for this is that in memorizing words or ideas, the student
can still hold the position that it has nothing to do with him or her. It
is a total circuit action. Therefore, very glib. The moment you say
"Demonstrate- that word or idea or principle, the student has to have
something to do with it. And shatters.
One student passed "Itsa" in theory with flying colours every time
even on cross-cheek type questions, yet had never been known to listen.
When the theory instructor said, "Demonstrate what a student would have to
do to pass Itsa," the whole subject blew up. "There's too many ways to do
Itsa auditing!" the student said. Yet on the bulletin it merely said
"Listen". That given as a glib answer was all right. But "demonstration"
brought to light that this student hadn't a clue about listening to a pc.
If he had to demonstrate it, the non-participation of the student in the
material he was studying came to light.
Don't get the idea that Demonstra tion is a Practical Section. action.
Practical gives the drills. These demonstrations in Theory aren't drills.
Clay Table isn~t used to any extent by a Theory Examiner. Hands, a
diagram, paper clips, these are usually quite enough!
181
COACHING IN THEORY
There is Theory Coaching as well as Practical Coaching.
Coaching Theory means getting a student to define all the words, give
all the rules, demonstrate things in the bulletin with his hands or bits of
things, and also may include doing Clay Table Definitions of Scientology
terms.
That's all Theory Coaching. It compares to coaching on drills in
Practical. But it is done on Bulletins, tapes and policy letters which are
to be examined in the future. Coaching is not examining. The examiner who
coaches instead of examining will stall the progress of the whole class.
The usual Supervisor action would be to have any student who is having
any trouble or is slow or glib team up with another student of comparable
difficulties and have them turn about with each other with Theory Coaching,
similar to Practical coaching in drills.
Then when they have a bulletin, tape or policy letter coached, they
have a check-out. The check-out is a spot check-out as above, a few
definitions or rules and some demonstration of them.
DICTIONARIES
Dictionaries should be available to students in Theory and should be
used in Theory Examination as well, preferably the same publication.
Dictionaries don't always agree with each other.
No Supervisor should try to define English language words out of his
own head when correcting a student as it leads to too many arguments. On
English words, open a dictionary.
A Scientology dictionary is available.
Remember that with Courses becoming briefer in duration, the number of
bulletins and tapes which the student must know on a Star-Rated basis is
also less.
General written examination for classification, however, remains on an
85% pass basis.
Be sure that students who get low marks constantly are also handled in
Review, preferably by definitions of words they haven't understood in some
former subject. Scientology is never the cause of consistent dullness or
glibness.
Processing of this nature can be on an Itsa basis. It does not have to
be Clay Table. Just finding the prior subject by discussion and discussing
its words usually blows the condition. I've seen it change the whole
attitude of a person in just 5 or 10 minutes of auditing on a "locate the
subject and word" basis.
Therefore, definitions exist at Levels 0 and I, but not with Clay
Table or assessment, only by Itsa. You'd be surprised how well it works and
how fast. "Subjects .you didn't like", "words you haven't grasped" are the
discussion question.
The subject of "wrong definitions cause stupidity or circuits,
followed by overts and motivators", is not easy to get across because it is
so general amongst Mankind. There is a possibility that past lives
themselves are wiped out by changing language, whether it is the same
language that changes through the years or shifting nationality. But
however that may be, don't be discouraged at the difficulties you may have
in getting this principle understood and used in Scientology departments-
the person you
are trying to convince has definitions out somewhere also!
LRH:jwjp.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
182
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 FEBRUARY 1965
Sthil instructors
Sthil Students
COURSE CHECK OUTS
TWIN-CHECKING
Hereafter the existing theory coaching policy of 1964 will be
amplified as follows~
Students, being formed into coaudit teams, turnabout, will also do
their theory check outs in pairs.
An Instructor, in doing a theory check out will have both students,
that are listed as Coauditors in the Auditing Assignment Sheet, appear
before him when either one requires a check out and will then check out
both students on the same bulletin.
The Instructor will ask the students alternately his questions and if
either student flunks, both flunk the test. This system is called Twin
Checking.
It is extremely important that the flunk be given quickly by the
Instructor after a short comm lag on the student's part. No coaxing by the
Instructor is permitted. Reason? If the Instructor lets one of the two
students flounder about, the other student will try to prompt and, at the
very least, the other student is put on a withhold of the data his twin
cannot answer and he can. Therefore the system will prove unworkable if the
flunk is not given quickly after the er-ah-hm of one student indicates he
doesn't know.
On being flunked, the students should then retire to their places in
the classroom and coach each other, as covered in 1964 Policy Letters,
until they feel they can pass,
They will be examined from just above the point of the flunk if done
within a week. However, in case the team has been split up, all such
partial pass notes on the materials of both expire. This is easy to detect
without any admin overload, as both their mimeos will have the Instructor's
initials at the same spot with the same date. When dates don't compare, it
is a matter for single examination.
Single student exam in theory takes place whenever one student already
has a pass (as from a former period or team) and the other doesn't.
However, single passing done because the student's twin is sick or has
blown will work the evil of paying a student to ARC break in auditing his
slower twin so as to get single passing going rather than be forced to
coach or audit the other to make the slower one quicker. Therefore,
students whose mate has blown or has become ill just aren't single checked.
Checkouts on Theory await the return of the other. Also one mustn't be
quick to re-assign a broken up coaudit team. And one changes teams only
when the student goes up to the next unit when it would be a good thing to
re-shuffle anyway.
Single student examination cannot be done when only one student has a
partial pass and the other doesn't.
In making partial passes, the Instructor always marks both the
students' mimeos. And in starting from a point again, checks both the
students' materials to see if the partial pass dates and initials agree. If
they don't, he dismisses one of the students back to study and examines the
other and gives both a pink sheet for making the error.
The Twin Checking system presupposes students coaudit in pairs.
Practical coaching should never be by the pair who are assigned
coauditors. Otherwise the check out system is the same as for theory.
Practical check outs will also be done in pairs and Twin Checking
used. This means practical coaching teams must remain stably assigned as
different from auditing
assignments.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright 0 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MARCH AD 15
(Reissued on 13 September 1967)
Remimeo
Academies Students
Saint Hill Courses
Tech Sec's Hat
Qual Sec's Hat
Dir of Exams' Hat
Student Examiner's Hat
Dir of Review Hat
Cramming Officer's Hat
Supervisor's Hat
TRAINING DEPT - DIV IV
DEPT OF EXAMS - DIV V
All student examiners are to be star checked on this.
Further Material On Study - Examinations
Progress in study can be inhibited through the usage of a poor system
of examination. By asking of questions irrelevant to the material covered
and by failing to ensure that the student is fully aware of exactly what
question is flunked, the student can be given sufficient losses to slow
down his rate of learning and to cause ARC breaks.
A misunderstanding comes about in the first instance purely on the
basis that the student understood that he was studying a given subject. An
irrelevant question asked by an examiner indicates to the student that such
an understanding was false or that no basic agreement existed on the
subject in the first place. An example of this would be to ask a student of
a French language course to give the main historic dates and their
significance to Eighteenth Century France. The original understanding was
that the student was learning to speak and read French, not to learn the
history of France.
In Scientology an example of an irrelevant question would be to ask
the student to give the distribution of a bulletin. The understanding of
the student is that he is there to learn Scientology, its theory and
application, not to learn the internal administration of organizational
communication lines. A further example would be to ask a Level II student a
question concerning data and material covered in Level IV.
Frequently enough a Supervisor has to cope with a student who has come
into Scientology to study the law of Karma or to study sociology or some
other previous misconception without adding to the difficulties by asking
irrelevant questions. Knowing what we now know about study we can handle
earlier misconceptions, but a Supervisor must never ask a question of a
student which is irrelevant to the subject or level. We must ourselves be
careful not to add to student confusion. Therefore, any Supervisor tendency
to ask irrelevant questions must be firmly restrained.
In the second instance of the unknown question, a student can be given
a verbal question on which he is flunked. In most cases the student will
not be able to remember the question asked as he would not have flunked it
in the first case if he had not already failed to understand the material
covered by the question. Failure to remember the question asked or a
Supervisor's refusal to give him the question asked reacts upon the student
as an unanswered question, and therefore an uncompleted communication
cycle, but also as an unknown question. The student will ARC break. You can
easily demonstrate this by mumbling a question which is not clear enough to
be understood and then insist upon an answer. You will soon enough have a
very upset person on your hands.
This is what happens when a student is asked a question, flunked, and
then not given to clearly understand the question asked. Therefore Ron now
requires that any examiner must always write down verbal questions asked
before asking them, and when a student flunks, hand him the written
question which he flunked. The student will then be able to know what he
didn't know and be able to look up the material and clear up what it was
that he had not understood. Further, this will enable him to complete the
communication cycle.
If tape examinations are addressed to a class as a whole, these
questions must be posted and the examination papers returned to the
student. The student can then see what it was that he missed and what
question was missed.
Many people have had experience of such poor systems of examination
which failed to follow the above. It is common practice in universities not
only not to give students the questions asked, but also never to return
examination papers. Most frequently all the university student is given is
a grade. If that grade is not 100%, then the student never knows what it
was he didn't know and so can not look it up to know it. This leaves him in
the uncertain condition of insecurity about his data on a particular
subject. And if the student flunks the subject and has to re-take it, he
cannot comfortably study the subject because the whole of the subject has
now become a complete mystery to him. Thus, the subject is set up as an ARC
Break.
Universities probably do this to be sure that their examinations do
not get out to students, but then one can only state that this is laziness
or lack of ability on the part of professors to think of different
questions, or perhaps even a professor's own lack of understanding of his
subject sufficient to enable him to be able to think of enough questions to
ask. It also could be that there is a complete lack of worthwhile material
in more primitive subjects than Scientology on which to ask questions, in
which case it should never have been part of the curriculum. (Freudians
mainly examine on the dates of Freud's papers for their qualification of
psychiatrists!)
The administration of a proper system of examination is quite simple:
1 . Tape examinations or examination questions given verbally to the
class as a whole must be written down before being asked and must be
posted on a bulletin board afterwards and all examination papers must
be returned to the students.
2. Verbal questions asked of individual students must be noted down in a
book like an invoice book with tear-out sheets and a piece of carbon
paper. Such books are easily procured from stationers as they are used
in most stores. The student is given the yellow copy of the questions
with the flunked question plainly marked. The white copy is placed in
the examiner's folder for the bulletin, tape or material.
In this fashion we will be able to collect good questions to be asked;
to notice fundamental areas of mis-understanding individual students have;
and to note any areas of mis-understanding which are broadly mis-
understood. We can, therefore, see where the individual student needs help
and see where it is necessary to elaborate more fully, on certain technical
data in order to make it more broadly comprehensible.
Supervisors and examiners doing this will then be contributing to the
more rapid progress of individual students and to students in general.
The same principles apply to the Department of Examinations and any
other student examinations given.
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:ml.jp.rd
[Note: In the original 1965 issue, the last two lines given here were
a footnote added by LRH and read "HCO BOARD OF REVIEW. The same principles
apply to HCO Board of Review Examinations and Examiners."
This 1967 issue changed "Instructor" to "Supervisor" throughout.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 APRIL AD 15
Remimeo
Sthil Students
Franchise
THE "HIDDEN DATA LINE'
Some students have believed there was a "hidden data line" of tech in
Scientology, a line on which Scientology tech was given out by me but not
made known to students.
This started me looking. For there is no such line.
I wondered if it was a "missed withhold of nothing". There can be one
of these, you know. There is nothing there, yet the auditor tries to get it
and the pc ARC Breaks. This is "cleaning a clean" with an E-Meter.
One pc I cleaned up very nicely had been harassed for years about "an
incident that happened when she was five". A lot of people had tried to
"get it". The pe was in a pitiful condition. I found there was nothing
there. No incident at all! The meter read came from the charge on previous
auditing. I think probably she must have sneezed or her finger slipped on
the cans when first asked about "an incident when you were five".
An auditor who "sees a read" when there is no charge makes a "missed
withhold of nothing".
This is the other side of the ARC Break-the gone something, the non-
existence of something. No food. No money. These things ARC Break people.
So it is with a "missed withhold of nothing".
Take Johannesburg. Some years ago the field there was upset by 3
rabble rousers who alleged all manner of r
,Jd things about the Scientology org there. They held wild field
meetings and all that. uth was these three people had done a vicious thing
and screamed to high heaven when I sought to query them.
They made a "missed withhold of nothing" in the field in that area!
There was exactly nothing wrong with Scientology there or us. There was
something wrong with those three people. They had been stealing from the
org.
The field kept looking for what was wrong with the org or us. Nothing
was. So it couldn't be cleaned up because there was nothing to clean. There
were three thieves who had run off with org property and defied orders to
give it back. How this made something wrong with us is quite a puzzle. They
are still "cleaning up this ARC Break" in Johannesburg! For it is not
cleanable, not being there to be cleaned! Unless you realize there was
nothing there at all! It's a missed withhold of nothing. The basic org and
staff and we at Saint Hill were just doing our jobs in ordinary routine!
Governments looking for evil in Scientology orgs will go mad (I trust)
as they are seeking a non-existent thing. They are easily defeated because
their statements are so crazy even their own legal systems can't help but
see it. So it's easily won.
The only person who goes mad on a missed withhold of nothing is the
person who thinks there is something there that isn't.
So it is with the "hidden data line" students sometimes feel must
exist on courses.
There is no line.
But in this case there is an apparency of a line.
When instructors or seniors give out alter-ised technology or unusual
solutions, the student feels they must have some inside track, some data
line the student doesn't have.
The student looks for it and starts alter-ising in his turn pretending
to have it when they become instructors.
186
It's a missed withhold of nothing.
The whole of technology is released in HCO Bulletins and HCO Policy
Letters and tapes I do and release.
I don't tell people anything in some private way, not even
instructors.
For instance, all the instructors I taught to handle R6 we taught by
my lecturing or writing bulletins for them. Every one of these tapes is
used to teach GPM data and handling to students on the Saint Hill Course.
Any new data I have given on it has been given to all these people.
The instructor then knows only to the degree he has studied and used
the very same HCOBs and HCO Pol Ltrs and tapes the student is now using.
There is no "hidden data line". To believe there is makes an ARC
Break.
The apparency is somebody's pretence to know from me more than is on
the tapes and in books and mimeos, or, brutally, somebody's alter-is of
materials. This looks like a "hidden data line". It surely isn't.
All the lower level materials are in the HCOBs, Pol Ltrs or on tapes.
All the GPM materials released are here waiting for the student when
he reaches that level.
One could say there was one if one was way off the main data line. But
it sure isn't hidden. It's on courses and in orgs.
I laughed one time at the top flight US Government White House
entrusted psychologist. He looked over some startling IQ changes, said such
a thing would revolutionize psychology overnight if known and added "no
wonder you keep your technology secret!"
That is very funny when you look at how hard you and I work to make it
known to all!
The data line isn't hidden. It's there for anyone to have. There's
lots of it is possibly a source of trouble in releasing it. But it's all on
courses in Academies or Saint Hill. You could have. a copy of everything in
the tape library if you wanted. It might cost a lot, but you could have it.
There is no hidden data line.
There's a lot of data I haven't had time to write down and put on a
line for sheer press of time. But I work hard to do it.
But even my closest staff and communicators when it hears of a new
process or plan from me verbally, sees it in an HCOB or HCO Pol Ltr a few
days later.
Don't for heaven's sake mistake alter-is by somebody as evidence of a
hidden line.
In Scientology we say "If it isn't written it isn't true". That
applies to orders. Somebody says "Ron said to . . ." and on a veteran staff
you hear the rejoinder "Let's see it". I've had raw meat walk into an org
and say "Ron said I was to have 25 hours of auditing". And in the raw meat
days of orgs, they sometimes were given it. So we have learned the hard way-
"If it isn't written it wasn't said".
And that applies to anybody's orders, not just mine.
And on tech and policy, it's equally true. If it isn't in an HCOB or
an HCO Pol Ltr or recorded on a tape in my voice, it isn't tech or policy.
Next time you hear a pretended order or a squirrel process attributed
to me, say "If it isn't written or recorded it isn't true".
And watch how tech results soar then in that area.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright (Z) 1965
187
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 APRIL AD 15
Sthil Students Issue 11
Franchise
Former Sthil Grads TECH & Q UAL DIVISION POLICY
Tech Sec HAT
. of T HAT DRILLS, ALLOWED
. of Exam HAT (Dir of Exams must check out this Pol Ltr
. of Review HAT on the above Hats and put on their Status
Check Sheet for Directors)
The only allowed Practical drills on any Scientology Course including
PE are:
1. Modified Comm Course for PE.
2. Original Comm Course TRs 0-4.
3. Original Upper Indoc TRs.
4. E-Meter Drills contained in Book of E-Meter Drills.
5. Dissemination Drills when I write and release them.
NO other practical drills of any kind will be permitted.
Other Practical Drills are abolished. Reasons: They consume time
uselessly, suppress actual processes and mess up data and cases. I did not
develop or authorize these drills and have now seen that they teach alter-
is of easy processes. They are not needed. They make poor auditors. I have
just reviewed this matter thoroughly and have traced several training
failures to these Wild cat Drills. Further, I traced several failed cases
on course to them.
Somewhere along the line somebody went mad inventing "drills" and
"TRs".
If this is permitted to continue, we will no longer turn out good
auditors.
The standard drills as listed above have proven sufficient for years.
LEGAL CHECK SHEETS
A check sheet is only legal if approved by the Office of LRH Technical
Section Saint Hill.
CHECK SHEET POLICY
A check sheet may not be changed once it is placed in a student's
hands for that course.
It may be changed before being handed to the next student who enters
that course but not changed on who has it.
The certificate and Classification are based on the materials in
existence at the time the certificate was studied for and granted,
If a student was never classed, a student must now be classed on the
lower classifications before obtaining a higher one.
To get over knotty classification exam problems where a student is
being classed for a class higher than studied for after training at that
higher level, a Summary Classification Exam may be given covering the
essentials of auditing as they have existed for many years. If passed, all
lower classes are granted.
However a student not holding non-honorary classification on entering
Saint Hill
188
must study for his lower classes as they currently exist before being
trained at an upper level. The reason for this is entirely sensible-such a
student would fail at the higher level if studied at once and only it were
studied. We don't want him to fail.
Grade Certificates obtained in Org HGCs are now honoured at Saint
Hill. In cases which have pined poorly, however, I exercise the right to
have run very low level (sub zero) processes that get the case moving well
before returning to upper grades. This again is sensible.
The adjustment of cases and classes is temporary and comes from
settling down new materials into place. Saint Hill is always considerably
ahead, in tech and when all lower levels are released in full and have been
practised and taught in orgs for a year or two, Saint Hill will no longer
have to "cope" in order to get maximum auditor skill from training or
maximum case gain in pes. After all, we started making Saint Hill auditors
for orgs only a few years ago!
Taking unlawful items off a student's check sheet is not illegal.
To mark out legal check outs on a check sheet (cross them off) when
not actually checked out is illegal.
Running a "course" with no check sheet is illegal. A Scientology
Courseis defined as "Progress through a check sheet".
Checking out any materials on anyone without giving a preserved credit
for eventual check sheet is illegal.
HAT CHECK SHEETS
Anyone HAT checked or bulletin or Pol Ltr checked on a staff MUST now
be given credit for anything checked out on them.
While STATUS CHECK SHEETS are still in process of formation and org
data and hat materials is still being released for orgs, a record of
anything checked out on a staff member must be kept.
There will be several of these STATUS CHECK SHEETS. They have numbers.
While the material is still being issued, the org hat checker must
have a file with staff members' names in it and must record on a sheet of
paper for that staff member each HCO Bulletin, Policy Letter or tape
checked out on that staff member.
Later when the STATUS CHECK SHEETS are released, the already checked
out items on that staff member's rough sheet are to be transferred to the
proper STATUS CHECK SHEET and sets of these new check sheets will replace
the original rough check sheet in the same file. "Status" is covered in a
HCO Pol Ltr of similar data, "PERSONNEL".
Still later there will be actual hat BOOKS for each Division and the
materials required for "status" will be in them. Until then we will use a
rough system. The same material with perhaps some number changes will be in
the HAT BOOKS.
The policy is: NO staff member in ANY org may be HAT CHECKED without
its being recorded on a rough sheet in a staff member file and credited to
that staff member!
NO REPORT
An illegible auditor's report is classed as a no-report and an
illegible case folder is classed as a "no case folder".
LRHJw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (B 1965
189
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 MAY 1965
Issue 11
Gen Non Remimeo
Tech See Hat
SUPERVISORS
The title Instructor is changed herewith to Supervisor.
"Instructor" is a MISNOMER in Scientology. They don't instruct anyone.
They actually should only supervise the student to make sure he is
instructed by HCO Bs, tapes and books, and be sure he does his drills.
The use of "instructor" gives a tendency to alter-is tech which alter-
is of tech is now the only thing that can prevent case gains.
An "Instructor" who thinks he is Instructing will be able to handle
only about 115 the number of students he could handle if he supervised.
Therefore it will cost you valuable personnel to use the term "Instructor"
or let training personnel even get the idea they are instructing.
Supervisors just call rolls and make sure the proper operation of the
course takes place and that the students are orderly and on schedule. They
even make better auditors out of the students than instructors would.
At Saint Hill we have for many years had Theory Supervisors, Practical
Supervisors, etc. The title Course Supervisor has been the title of the
Saint Hill Special Briefing Course head since it began.
Therefore all instructors or Chief Instructors in the world are
promoted to Supervisors, Theory Supervisors and Practical Supervisors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.kd Copyright (D 1965
[Amended by HCO P/L 27 October 1970 Issue II, The Course Supervisor,
in the 1970 Year Book.]
190
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 MAY 1965
Remirneo TECH DIV
QUAL DIV
URGENT
CCHs
(Cancels HCO Pol Ltr 15 May 62)
The CCHs are PROCESSES. They are not drills.
HCO Pol Ltr of 15 May 1962 (replacing 2 Nov 61 HCO Pol Ltr) was
written by staff. It is CANCELLED. Processes are not drills. Nobody may
convert hereafter a process to a drill.
The Upper Indoc TRs are the drills that teach the CCHs.
The CCHs are then run on pcs.
S-C-S processes may not be drills.
Processes are done on pcs.
Drills are done by students to accustom them to the actions that will
be necessary in doing processes.
Upper Indoc contains TRs 5 to 9. These are done as the ONLY practical
actions leading to the student being able to run the processes called the
CCHs.
To use a PROCESS as a DRILL leaves it unflat on students and is one of
the many reasons why auditing has been taken out of Academies,
During the past few years, unbeknownst to me, a whole sphere of action
built up which made students drill processes. I swear, there has been a
"practical drill" made out of half the processes we have.
These were all abolished as DRILLS in HCO Pol Ltr 16 April AD 15.
Drills are just actions the student has to become familiar with before
doing processes. The actual process is NEVER used as a drill. Because it is
left unflat. A drill takes the action the auditor will use when doing a
process and gets him familiar with it.
That's all.
LRH:mh.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 AUGUST 1965
Gen Non-Rernitneo Issue III
DELETION OF TR 5
As TR 5 is a process, it is to be dropped as a part of the TRs. This
Policy Letter cancels any reference to TR 5 in any former Policy Letter.
The Comm Course TRs are TRs 0 - 4. The Upper Indoc TRs are TRs 6 - 9.
Delete TR 5 from any Check Sheet.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright Q 1965
L. RON HUBBARD
191
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 AUGUST 1965
Sthil Foundation
Students
SCIENTOLOGY TRAINING
TWIN CHECKOUTS
(Excerpts from HCO Policy Letters of
4 October 1964 and 24 September 1964
rewritten)
In Scientology training we use a system called TWIN CHECKOUTS. Each
student is assigned a "twin" to work with. The student studies his assigned
material and is sometimes coached over the rough spots by his twin. When
the student knows the material, he is then given a checkout by his twin. If
he flunks, he returns to study and when ready gets a new checkout. When he
passes, the twin signs the assignment sheet certifying that he has grasped
it. The assignment sheet is turned in to the Course Supervisor at the end
of the period.
BAD STUDY HABITS
Earlier forms of education suffer because of a habit. The habit is all
one's years of formal schooling where this mistake is the whole way of
life.
If the student knows the words, the teacher assumes he knows the tune.
It will never do a student any good at all to know some facts. The
student is expected only to use facts.
It is so easy to confront thought and so hard to confront action that
the teacher often complacently lets the student mouth words and ideas that
mean nothing to the student.
ALL THEORY CHECKOUTS MUST CONSULT THE STUDENT'S UNDERSTANDING.
If they don't, they're useless and will upset the student eventually.
Course difficulties stem entirely from the students' non-comprehension
of words and data.
While this can be cured by auditing, why audit it all the time when
you can prevent it in the first place by adequate theory checkout?
There are two phenomena here.
FIRST PHENOMENON
When a student misses understanding a word, the section right after
that word is a blank in his memory. You can always trace back to the word
just before the blank, get it understood and find miraculously that the
former blank area is not now blank in the text. The above is pure magic.
SECONDPHENOMENON
The second phenomenon occurs after the student has gone by many
misunderstood words. He begins to dislike the subject being studied, more
and more. This is followed by various mental and physical conditions and by
various complaints, fault-finding and look-what-you-did-to-me. This
justifies a departure, a blow, from the subject being studied.
But the system of education, frowning on blows as it does, causes the
student to really withdraw self from the study subject (whatever he was
studying) and set up in its place a circuit which can receive and give back
sentences and phrases.
We now have "the quick student who somehow never applies what he
learns".
The specific phenomena then is that a student can study some words and
give them back and yet be no participant to the action. The student gets A+
on exams but can't apply the data.
192
Demonstration is the key here. The moment you ask this type of student
to demonstrate a rule or theory with his hands or the paper clips on your
desk this glibness will shatter.
The reason for this is that in memorizing words or ideas, the student
can still hold the position that it has nothing to do with him or her. It
is a total circuit action. Therefore, very glib. The moment you say
"Demonstrate" that word or idea or principle, the student has to have
something to do with it. And shatters.
The thoroughly dull student is just stuck in the non-comprehend
blankness following some misunderstood word.
The "very bright" student who yet can't use the data isn't there at
all. He has long since ceased to confront the subject matter or the
subject.
The cure for either of these conditions of "bright non-comprehension"
or "dull" is to find the missing word.
But these conditions can be prevented by not letting the student go
beyond the missed word without grasping its meaning. And that is the duty
of the twin.
COACHING IN THEORY
Coaching Theory means getting a student to define all the words, give
all the rules, demonstrate things in the text with his hands or bits of
things, and also may include doing Definitions of Scientology terms.
The usual Course Supervisor action would be to have any student who is
having any trouble or is slow or glib team up with a twin of comparable
difficulties and have them turn about with each other with Theory Coaching.
Then when they have a text assignment coached, they give their twin a
checkout. The checkout is a spot checkout, a few definitions or rules and
some demonstration of them.
DEMONSTRATION
Giving a text assignment check by seeing if it can be quoted or
paraphrased proves exactly nothing. This will not giiarantee that the
student knows the data or can use or apply it nor even guarantees that the
student is there. Neither the "bright" student nor the "dull" student (both
suffering from the same malady) will benefit from such an examination.
So examining by seeing if somebody "knows" the text and can quote or
paraphrase it is completely false and must not be done.
Correct examination is done only by making the person being tested
answer
(a) The meanings of the words (re-defining the words used in his own
words and demonstrating their use in his own made up sentences), and
(b) Demonstrating how the data is used.
The twin can ask what the words mean. And the twin can ask for
examples of action or application.
"What is the first paragraph?" is about as dull as one can get. "What
are the rules
given about ?" is a question I would never bother to ask. Neither
of these tell
the twin whether he has the bright non-applier or the dull student
before him. Such
questions just beg for natter and course blows.
I would go over the first paragraph of any material I was examining a
student on and pick out some uncommon words. I'd ask the student to define
each and demonstrate its use in a made up sentence and flunk the first
"Well .... er .... let me see. . . ." and that would be the end of that
checkout. I wouldn't pick out only Scientologese. I'd pick out words that
weren't too ordinary such as "benefit" "permissive" "calculated" as well as
"engram".
Students I was personally examining would begin to get a hunted look
and carry dictionaries-BUT THEY WOULDN'T BEGIN TO NATTER OR GET SICK OR
BLOW. AND THEY'D USE WHAT THEY LEARNED.
193
Above all, I myself would be sure I knew what the words meant before I
started to examine.
Dealing with new technology and the necessity to have things named, we
especially need to be alert.
Before you curse our terms, remember that a lack of terms to describe
phenomena can be twice as incomprehensible as having involved terms that at
least can be understood eventually.
We do awfully well, really, better than any other science or subject.
We lack a dictionary but we can remedy that.
But to continue with how one should examine, when the student had the
words, I'd demand the music. What tune do these words play?
I'd say "All right, what use is this text assignment to you?"
Questions like, "Now this rule here about not letting pcs eat candy while
being audited, how come there'd be such a rule?" And if the student
couldn't imagine why, I'd go back to the words just ahead of that rule and
find the one he hadn't grasped.
I'd ask "What are the 3 parts of the ARC triangle?" And when the
student gave them, I'd still have the task of satisfying myself that the
student understood why those were the 3 parts. I'd ask "How come?" after
he'd given them to me. Or "What are you going to do with these?"
But if the student wasn't up to the point of study where knowing why
he used the ARC triangle was not part of his materials, I wouldn't ask. For
all the data about not examining above level applies very severely to
Theory Checkout as well as to Practical and general Instruction.
I might also have a stack of paper clips and rubber bands and use them
to have students show me they knew the words and ideas.
Theory often says "Well, they take care of all that in Practical." Oh
no they don't. When you have a Theory Section that believes that, Practical
can't function at all.
Practical goes through the simple motions. Theory covers why one goes
through the motions.
I don't think I have to beat this to death for you.
You've got it.
DICTIONARIES
Dictionaries should be available to students in Theory and should be
used in Twin Checkouts as well, preferably the same publication.
Dictionaries don't always agree with each other.
No Twin should try to define English language words out of his own
head when correcting a student as it leads to too many arguments. On
English words, open a dictionary.
A Scientology dictionary will be available in a few months from the
date of this bulletin as one is being rushed into publication.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright @ 1965
194
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 SEPTEMBER 1965
Issue V
Remimeo
Tech Div
Sthil Students
E-METER DRILLS
Having the data that Out-technology is the result of a lack of study,
drill and familiarity, it is imperative that meter drills be done well.
As it is the Academy's purpose to train auditors, students must do the
required meter drills for each level and must not resort to the use of a
pen to represent the needle of an E-Meter.
Irrespective of whether a student is or is not a Release, th ese
drills must be done. If a student should have a coach whose needle only
floats, that student should request of the Supervisor another coach.
The state of Release can always be rehabilitated, so the Academy
should not be overly concerned with the protection of Releases. Studying
the mind and spirit of Man may be restimulative, but it is the only way
through and out.
A real Roller Coaster of processing results is never because of
restimulation caused by training, it is always the sole result of
association with a Suppressive Person.
Don't back off in the training of auditors. Only a well trained
auditor will eventually make it all the way to Clear.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.kd Copyright @ 1965
195
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 DECEMBER 1965
Remimeo Academy Students other than St Hill
Tech Division-Qual Division
STUDENTS GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOUR
GENERAL
I . Adhere completely to the Code of a Scientologist for the
duration of the course and behave in a manner becoming to a Scientologist
at all times.
2. Get sufficient food and sleep. Always eat breakfast before class
and morning sessions.
3. When being a preclear, be one, not a student or auditor. When
being an auditor, be an Auditor, not a student or preclear. When in class
and lectures, be a student not an auditor or a preclear.
4. Get off all your known withholds. Know definitely that you have
absolutely no hope for case advancement unless you get these known
withholds off to your auditor. Any violation of rules must be reported by
the auditor on the auditing report for the preclear so that they are no
longer withholds from L. Ron Hubbard, Mary Sue Hubbard or Supervisors.
S. If you don't know something or are confused about course data,
ask a Supervisor or send a despatch. Do not ask other students as this
creates progressively worsening errors in data. Also dispatches from you to
L. Ron Hubbard will be relayed if you place all such in the basket marked
"Students Out".
6. Students may only use the coin box telephone during non class
periods.
7. You must get the permission of the Office of L. Ron Hubbard to
leave course before you are allowed to leave. You won't be released if
there is any doubt that you are inadequate technically or your case is
considered in poor condition. Give an advanced warning as to when you are
leaving.
A VDITING
8. Do not consume any alcoholic beverage between 6 a.m. on Sundays
and after class on Fridays.
9. Do not consume or have administered to yourself or any other
student any drug, antibiotics, aspirin, barbiturates, opiates, sedatives,
hypnotics or medical stimulants for the duration of the course without the
approval of the D of T.
10. Do not give any processing to anyone under any circumstances
without direct permission of the D of T. (Emergency assists excepted.)
11. Do not receive any processing from anyone under any
circumstances without the express permission of the D of T.
12. Do not engage in any "self-processing" under any circumstances
during the course at any time.
13. Do not receive any treatment, guidance, or help from anyone in
the healing arts, i.e. physician, dentist, etc, without the consent of the
D of T/Ethics Officer. (Emergency treatment when the D of T is not
available is excepted.)
14. Do not engage in any rite, ceremony, practice, exercise,
meditation, diet, food therapy or any similar occult, mystical, religious,
naturopathic, homeopathic, chiropractic treatment or any other healing or
mental therapy while on course without the express permission of the D of
T/Ethics Officer.
196
15. Do not discuss your case, your Auditor, your Supervisors, your
classmates, L. Ron Hubbard, HCO WW personnel or HCO WW with anyone. Save
your unkind or critical thoughts for your processing sessions or take up
complaints with any supervisor.
16. Do not engage in any sexual relationships of any nature or kind
or get emotionally involved with any classmate who is not your legal
spouse.
17. Follow the Auditor's Code during all sessions when being the
Auditor.
18. Follow technical procedure as outlined on the course exactly and
precisely.
19. Be honest at all times on your auditing report forms. Stating
every process run, Tone Arm changes and times, sensitivity setting,
cognitions of your preclear and any changes of physical appearance,
reactions, communication level, or otherwise what you observe in your
preclear.
20. Place all reports in the folder of your preclear after each
session, turn into the Examiner for classification.
21. Students must not read their own report folder or that of
another student, unless he is auditing that student.
PREMISES
22. Do not make any undue noise either indoors, or when leaving
class.
23. Use the correct entrances for entering and leaving the premises.
QUARTERS
24. Do not put cigarettes out in plastic waste baskets or on the
floors.
25. Keep all your bulletins, supplies and personal possessions in
the space allotted to you and keep your space neat and orderly.
26. Students are allowed to smoke during breaks only and always
outside any study or auditing quarters.
27. The basket marked "Student In" is the basket where all
communications, bulletins or mail to students are placed. Always check this
basket daily to see if you have received any communications.
28. Report and turn in any damaged property or goods used on the
Course. Protect and keep the premises in good condition.
29. No food may be stored or eaten in the Classrooms at any time.
SCHEDULES
30. Be on time for class and all assignments.
31. Buy any books you need from the invoice clerk at appointed
times.
32. Follow all schedules exactly.
33. Study and work during your class periods and over weekends. You
have a lot to get checked out on in order to get a course completion. You
can't afford to waste time.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:emp.cden Copyright (g) 1965
197
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 OCTOBER 1966
Tech Hats Issue IV
Qual Hats
Students EYAMINATIONS
A student must not discuss any examination with anyone outside the
Qualifications Division. To give examination information to other students
in order to assist them shows a misguided understanding of help. A student
should pass an examination on the basis that he does know and can apply the
data, not on the basis that he knows and can pass the examination. Only by
being able to know and apply the data can a student be an accomplished
auditor at any Level.
Therefore, students are not to discuss examinations with other
students for whatever reason.
Further, students who fail examinations or any question thereon are
not to discuss such failure or reasons for such with anyone other than the
personnel of the Qualifications Division. This regulation includes not only
other students, but Course Supervisors. Data as to examination failures is
supplied from the Qualifications Division to the Technical Division, and a
student, not knowing the data sufficiently well, can cause Dev-T by
reporting false data to a Course Supervisor as to why the examination was
failed.
Any student who feels that he has been incorrectly failed on an
examination can report the matter to Ethics. This is the proper line for
any complaint the student may have concerning an examination, if such still
seems incorrect after taking it up with the
Qualifications Division.
LRH:rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor,1 East Grinstead, Sussex
St Hill Only HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 DECEMBER 1966
All Staff
Day and Fdn ROUTING AND HANDLING OF SHSBC, DIANETIC,
SOLO V1 AND ACADEMY STUDENTS
Any student on the Foundation SHSBC, Dianetic, Solo VI and Academy
Courses is first and foremost a student during the Foundation hours. This
rule is true regardless of what other activities they undertake on their
own time.
ORDERS AND ROUTING
Any orders or routings given to a student by another section of the
Org which will interfere with course hours must be done via the Tech
Director, Training Officer and the Course Supervisor of the student
concerned. The sole intention of the latter is to prevent students from
disappearing from course into the HGC, Review, or anywhere else, without
the supervisor having directly sent the student.
Haskell Cooke Org Sec F
Frank Freedman D/Qual F
Julia Galpin D/HCO F
Julia Galpin AC F
Julia Galpin~ LRH Comm F
Otto Roos Ad Council SH
Ken Delderfield LRH Comm SH
Pam Pearcy Ad Council WW
Philip Quirino LRH Comm WW
Sheena Fairchild Guardian Comm WW
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.rd The Guardian
Copyright@ 1966 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
198
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 SEPTEMBER 1967
Remirneo
Academies
SHSBC
STUDY
COMPLEXITY AND CONFRONTING
In some researches I have been doing recently on the field of study, I
have found what appears to be the basic law on complexity.
It is:
THE DEGREE OF COMPLEXITY IS PROPORTIONAL TO THE DEGREE OF NON
CONFRONT.
Reversing this:
THE DEGREE OF SIMPLICITY IS PROPORTIONAL TO THE DEGREE OF CONFRONT
and
THE BASIS OF ABERRATION IS A NON-CONFRONT.
To the degree that a being cannot confront lie enters substitutes
which, accumulating, bring about a complexity.
I found this while examining the subject of NAVIGATION in order to
teach it and clarify it.
I found that Man had based the subject on an incorrect primary
assumption. All subjects have as their basis a point of first assumption.
In Man's technology this is usually weak and non-factual which makes his
technology very frail and limited. To reform a subject one has to find this
primary assumption and improve it. This reforming of technical subjects is
of great interest to us because our subject Scientology is advanced even
beyond the space travel technologies of very high civilizations. Yet it is
flanked on all sides by Man's corny antique technology in the field of
physics, chemistry, "mathematics" and so on. This tends to hold us back
somewhat. We strained his tech forward to get the E-Meter, the one thing we
had to have.
In Navigation, man bases the whole subject on the assumption that one
can't confront where he came from or is going or where he is. It assumes he
is lost,
This is a basis assumption of non-confront. He can't directly see
where he has been or where he is going at sea-it is so large-so he takes
off from a point of no-confront in all his reasoning in the subject.
Therefore he goes into a series of symbols and begins to substitute
symbols for symbols. This winds him up in a mass of complexity. One spends
907o of his time in studying this subject trying to find out what symbols
the symbols are meant to represent. He says in his texts "G.H.A." On search
we find this means "Greenwich Hour Angle". On further search we find this
means what angle some heavenly body forms when related to Greenwich as
Zero. On further search we find the idiocy that the navigator's clock tells
angles in HOURS when all he needs is a clock face giving 360 degrees. This
is of course complete nonsense. Why hours, and two sets of 12 at that
(midnight to Noon and Noon to midnight) when what he is trying to find out
is how many degrees of time has passed. He refers his time to the Sun
which, because of the rotations of earth every 24 hours, appears at an
increasing number of degrees from Greenwich England as the day advances.
Because he starts from a no-confront of ship or plane position he then
carries no-confront through the whole subject. If a man isn't lost as he
begins to "navigate" he very often is when he finishes'
Actually no ship or plane is ever lost as to position. One knows he is
on Earth and
199
in what ocean and on what side of what ocean and the subject really
should be one which merely lets one CORRECT his position a bit.
Man in this subject of navigation even scorns direct observation
(confront) and calls it "jackass navigation!"
In actual fact real navigation is the science of recognition of
positions and objects and estimation of relative distances and angles
between them.
The subject is made complex because it has become, in Man's hands, the
substitution of symbols for symbols all based on the assumption that he
can't confront his departure, his current spot or his point of arrival.
Out of this, with further study in other fields, I found that any
complexity stemmed from an initial point of non-confront.
This is why looking at or recognizing the source of an aberration in
processing "blows" it, makes it vanish.
Mental mass accumulates in a vast complexity solely because one would
not confront something. To take apart a problem requires only to establish
what one could not or would not confront.
The basic thing man can't or won't confront is evil.
These people who always rationalize evil behavior-"He wasn't feeling
well which is why he murdered the policeman", etc., can be counted on to
voice some theetie-weetie (goodie-goodie) justification for somebody's
thoroughly evil conduct. Mr. X wrecks a house and you remark on it and Miss
Theetie Weetie will feel compelled to say, "Oh, Mr. X had a poor childhood
and he didn't mean any wrong . . . ." She can't confront the simple but
evil fact that Mr. X is a complete dog. One feels his hair stand on end
when Miss Theetie Weetie does this because one is observing a complete non-
confront on the part of Miss Theetie Weetie. She is too unreal to do other
than make one feel he has had an ARC Break.
One will also find that Miss Theetie Weetie leads a horribly complex
life-adjusting her thinking to agree with "air spirits" and leaving her
family because there might be mice in the basement.
When no-confront enters, a chain may be set up which leads to total
complexity and total unreality.
This, in a very complex form we call an "aberrated condition".
People like that can't solve even rudimentary problems and act in an
aimless and confused way.
To resolve their troubles requires more than education or discipline.
It requires processing.
Some people are so "complex" that their full aberration does fully not
resolve until they attain a high level of OT.
A large number of people de-aberrate just by the education contained
in Scientology as they find in our subject the natural laws of life and
seeing (confronting) them, "blow" huge holes in their complexities and
aberrations.
Therefore the above laws are very important ones as they explain what
aberration really is and why processing really works.
Aberration is a chain of vias based on a primary non-confront.
Processing is a series of methods arranged on an increasingly deep
scale of bringing the preclear to confront the no-confront sources of his
aberrations and leading them to a simple, powerful, effective being.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:'jp.rd
200
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 OCTOBER 1967
Issue VII
Remimeo
ACADEMY
ETHICS
ACADEMY CHECKSHEETS
SUPERVISOR CONDITIONS
Academy cheek sheets should be designed to be covered in one week for
Theory and one week for Practical for each level 0 to IV.
If a student is more than 2 weeks on one of these Theory or one of
these Practical Courses then the Supervisor for that level, theory or
practical, is placed in Non Existence Condition.
The secret in getting students through is keeping Ethics in in the
Academy. Time lost because the student is sent to Ethics or Review is not
counted and is added to the 2 weeks allowed.
The rest of the secret is to spot a slow student at once and get a
CORRECT Remedy A and Remedy B done on him, in Remedy B listing for and
finding the correct troublesome PT subject and then listing that for
similar past subjects being careful not to restrict the past question to
this life as it is almost always an earlier life. In Remedy B getting the
correct item off each of the 2 lists (the PT list and Past list) will
always dig any non-SP student out. In doing Remedy A one lists for the
misunderstood word and gets the correct one.
A Supervisor can chit a Review Auditor for job endangerment if Review
fails to straighten up the student or accumulates a backlog.
Seniors who fail to assign non-existence to such a Supervisor are in
turn up the line so assigned.
Academics tend to slow or stop students with SHSBC cheek lists or
unreal or altered training and so bar out Scientologists. We don't expect
that much from Academy grads.
On the Dianctics Course it should be 1 month of training. If a student
is in that course more than 2 months the Supervisor goes into lion-
existence as above.
In Evening Courses, one month for theory and one month for practical
should be the design. If a student is on more than 2 months then the
Supervisor goes into Non Existence.
Supervisors so assigned non-existence get out of it by applying the
formula and are upgraded when they have done so to Danger until they have
applied that formula and so on back to Normal Operation or above.
The Int Tech Officer WW is responsible for the shortness and adequacy
of these check sheets. Many have been done in the past and there is little
tabour involved in
reissuing them.
LRH:jp.rd
Copyright & 1967
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
201
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MARCH 1968
Remimeo
CHECKSHEETS
ALL CHECKSHEETS FOR DIANETIC COURSES, ACADEMY COURSES, SHSBC AND
INTERNES MUST BE ORIGINATED AND PASSED ON BY WW BEFORE USE AND MUST BE
STANDARD WW TO COMPILE, ORIGINATE AND REGULATE ALL CHECK-SHEETS UP TO VII.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jc.kd Copyright (D 1968
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 OCTOBER 1968
Remimeo
All staff
All students
COURSE COMPLETION
STUDENT INDICATORS
When a student has finished a course, he should want the next course
in training. If not, out Tech or out Ethics or both. Just as a PC's good
indicators should be in wanting next level of auditing, so should a
student's good indicators be in wanting next level of training. If this is
not the case something missed by the supervisor or student or both the
supervisor and the student.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:nf.ei.rd
202
I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OF
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Su
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 OCTOBE
Remimeo
Supe"isors
D of Ts
Supervisor Hat SUPERVISOR KNOW-HOW
Sy.e,rvisor
cksheet Running the Class
To be an effective Supervisor one must know that there is Standard
Tech and therefore that there is Standard Supervision,
Tech is contained ONLY in HCOBs, tapes and books written and issued by
LRH. So is Standard Supervision.
The Supervisor'sjob consists of
1. Noting that the class members are present on time.
2. Calling roll.
3. Introduction of new students or those returning from the
Examiner.
4. R. Factor for new comers.
5. Handling queries and/or questions regarding the course and its
running.
6. Ensuring that space and equipment are available.
7. Seeing that Tech Services personnel provide top service and no
sloppy "help yourself to what ever you want".
8. Seeing that breaks are started and completed promptly with
Rollcall.
9. Area must be neat and tidy at all times. Uniform chairs and
tables used and squared away, excess student gear stowed elsewhere.
10. A library containing all the books and pabs should be available
should the bookstore run out of literature.
11, Students do not arrive or leave on their own accord.
12. They are not to interrupt each other at work and all questions
should be directed to the Supervisor who will refer them to the material
which contains the information required.
13. NEVER NEVER allow anyone to walk in and interrupt or address any
student on course.
14. The Supervisor is there and there on time.
15. The schedule runs exactly on time, never varying.
As Supervisor it is your responsibility to eradicate any barriers or
hindrances presented which distract the student from studying. This
includes extra curricular
activities.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ew.ei.rd Founder
203
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 OCTOBER 1968
Remimeo Issue II
Supemisors
D of T's
Supervisor's Hat
Supervisor's Checksheet
SUPERVISOR KNOW-HOW
Handling the Student
To be an on-the-ball Supervisor, one should be oneself fully trained
on the level one is supervising. It is by far preferable to be a Class VIII
with a full grasp of Standard Tech.
As Tech once whittled away across the planet and finally went so badly
out it had to be urgently rescued, it follows that out-supervision must
have pioneered the route of out-tech. So it's no light matter not knowing
one's business as a Supervisor and the consequences of mis- or non-
application of study data.
These must be known. As the student is a student, it follows there is
some willingness to learn. This must be validated and encouraged including
by unmentioned wins as in TR 4.
As he or she is there to study attention must be channeled and kept on
that vector and any side tracks knocked out and eradicated during the
period set aside for study.
Any difficulties arising (and there will be in the course of study)
refer the student to materials just ahead. Locate, indicate and get defined
the misunderstood.
Handle any student having trouble with study by:
(a) Getting hold of the material he is studying.
(b) Getting hold of the material he was studying. (0) Finding what he
says he has trouble with.
(d) Take up the area or material PRIOR to it and find what is bugging
him. (e) Remedy A and B handles this also.
(f) Do not send a student to review unless he says he wants a review-
then send him to the examiner.
(g) If the student doesn't apply this data on dope off and
misunderstoods, then a pink sheet on the HCOBs will handle that. Clay Table
Training HCOB 11. 10.67 is most beneficial when applied exactly.
It sometimes appears that you have a different or difficult student on
your course.
The same rules apply. Standard Tech is applicable and works on all
cases.
What you are doing and using is straightening their heads out. So
don't desist. Keep at it until the guy gets the idea, does it himself and
starts cleaning up misunderstoods in the standard manner.
He'll do it on his own and then on others.
L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:ew.ldm.rw.rd
Copyright (D 1968
204
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 OCTOBER 1968
Issue III
Remirneo
Supervisors
D of Ts
Supervisor Hat
Supervisor Checksheet
SUPERVISOR KNOW-HOW
R Factor to Students
When a student has enrolled his last stop is at the supervisor's desk.
An R Factor as follows should be made:
Welcome the student to the course and tell him the name and level.
Give him the time it starts and ends with break periods.
Any business is to be conducted out of study hours and no random
breaks are allowed.
Inform him of the rules, setting up of chairs and tables, where clay
demo table is, notice board, master checksheet and additions or
subtractions, points system and checkout system and how it operates.
THEN send him off to tech services to get his materials; when he
returns say "Start".
This action immediately establishes 8C for the student and he now
knows who is in charge.
All his queries and questions are to be referred to the supervisor, as
he must know it is the supervisor's job to refer students to where data may
be found in the materials.
It is not anybody's job and certainly not another student's
responsibility to do so.
Students are introduced at the beginning or end of a study period, not
during.
Students returning from the examiner are announced-the only break. The
response is inevitably enthusiastic and the students get busily back to
work after such a success.
Those from cramming or who have flunked are returned unannounced,
On Friday nights the last half hour is spent on graduation when top
students and those who have certified or classified or graduated are
announced. The graduate is usually allowed to address the group and this
would consist of the knowledge obtained from Scientology, what a wonderful
group of people to work with the group was, what next course or study will
be done, etc.
End off with asking how they did. You might even be surprised at the
result of implementing a safe, stable study environment, well controlled
and done with Standard Supervision.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:Idm.rw.rd Founder
Copyright (D 1968
205
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 OCTOBER 1968
Issue IV
Remimeo
Supervisors
D of T's
Supmisor Hat
Supervisor Checksheet
SUPERVISOR KNOW-HOW
Tips in Handling Students
From time to time it will be found that when students enroll on a
course, the question of misunderstoods arises. This is best handled by
getting the student to hunt up and define with the source of the definition
(HCOB Date book name and page no.). This allows the student to grasp the
meaning of the words used in the study of Scientology. Words other than
Scientology or Dianetic words are also clarified.
A real stopper can be the words Scientology or Dianetics. Consult the
student's understanding and not just accept what sounds like a definition
of these two words.
Simple points like "why is level 0 level 0?" can produce astonishing
resurgences in study velocity.
Using the questions "where were you doing well" and "where did you
notice you ceased doing well" zeroes in on the point or word or principle
misunderstood and sometimes just the first question blows the lot.
On many occasions it's the first word on the material or the title of
the HCOB so even check these.
Sometimes tracing back where or when the student heard of Dianetics or
Scientology blows the trouble.
These points must be handled skillfully and rarely more than once on
any occasion. Take it lightly and let the student win.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:ew.rw.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MAY 1969
Issue I
Remimeo Supervisor's Course
HOW TO TEACH A COURSE
Note: We learned these exact data the hard way over the years. An
empty class with no enrollees is traced always to violation of these
points. People like it this way. It makes auditors. The moment you violate
this you have a clinic not a class and you wind up with no auditors
trained.
A Course should be taught very tough. The Supervisor's first premise
is that a Student doesn't have a case. There is an old training rule in
Dianetics and Scientology-if a mist forms on a mirror held up to,the
student's mouth, he can carry on. Never sympathise with a student, just
train him.
THREE VITAL DATA
There are three vital data which make the difference between a
successful course and one which fails utterly. They are-
I . EXACT SCHEDULING.
2. SUPERVISOR PRESENCE.
3. SUPERVISOR REFUSAL TO ANSWER TECH QUESTIONS BUT ONLY REFERS THE
STUDENT TO THE MATERIALS.
Exact scheduling means just that. The course has a daily schedule, it
is known to
each student, and it is adhered to exactly. The course commences e ,
ach day and after
each break exactly on time, with a brisk, snappy rolicall. It is ended
exactly on time by
the Supervisor.
The Supervisor must be present with the class at all times and ON
TIME. Continuous inspection of what is going on, correction by referral to
the right bulletin, and just being there as a Supervisor will bring about
trained students.
The Supervisor should know the materials of the Course so well that he
can refer students quickly and easily to the relevant material, when asked
questions. When a student asks a question about a TR, this is answered only
by reading the TR to the student from the Bulletin.
MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS
Misunderstood words MUST be handled. HCO Policy Letter 26 August 1965,
HCO Bulletin of March 10, 1965 and the Study Tapes give the phenomena and
its handling.
Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD:an.ei.rd CS-2 Training Aide
Copyright Oc 1969 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Amended by HCO P/L 27 October 1970 Issue 11, The Course Supervisor,
in the 1970 Year Book.]
207
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MAY 1969
Issue III
Remimeo Dianetic Supervisor's Course
ENTURBULATIVE STUDENTS
The Supervisor on a course should not try to handle enturbulative
students on a course. The vast majority of students are willing, eager to
learn and just get on with it. Normal student difficulties in a well run
course are easily handled by misunderstood word technology.
Send any enturbulative student either to Review (the Qual Examiner)
for correction (but only if he says he wants a review) or to the Ethics
Officer for ethics action. Note-the policy on Ethics handling of students
and gradient of Ethics will be on the checksheet.
They should be returned to you when properly straightened up.
Failure to do this will invariably cause a complete disruption of your
course and you to fail as a Supervisor. Don't neglect it. Get them off the
course fast. Not to do so is to penalize the good students without helping
the enturbulative ones either. Omission of this action betrays the whole
class.
Tony Dunleavy CS 2 - Training Aide for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:td.cs.an.ei.kd
208
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MAY 1969
Remimeo
Dn Checksheet
COURSE ADMINISTRATION
Usually, particularly with a large class-more than 18-the Course
Supervisor should have a COURSE ADMINISTRATOR.
The Course Administrator's purpose is TO HELP THE COURSE SUPERVISOR
KEEP ALL BODIES CORRECTLY ARRANGED PLACED OR ROUTED AND TO KEEP ALL COURSE
MATERIALS FOLDERS RECORDS CHECKSHEETS INVOICES AND DESPATCHES HANDLED,
FILLED OUT AND PROPERLY FILED.
The essence, whether we have an Administrator or not is to:
Have adequate materials, packs, books and checksheets.
Issue what is needed promptly.
Demand what must be filled in promptly.
File precisely.
Keep the course comm lines (In and Out baskets) flowing.
Don't tolerate lack of materials, books, forms or make the students
"make do" with less than needed.
Safeguard don't lose and keep neatly available all materials records
and admin items.
The Invoice system of a course is an item that has to be kept in. If
in an org you don't find it in, you force it in.
The Course Supervisor receives a copy of the invoice enrolling the
student. This is the student's "pass" to enter the course. It means he has
paid and financial arrangements are finalized.
Without this you don't let the applicant on the course.
This saves several things and prevents heavy upsets. You can actually
teach a whole course and then find suddenly it wasn't economical for the
org as the Registrative end of it which is not in the Course Supervisor's
view, fell down and no money or little money was taken in.
A student who isn't properly enrolled is a freeloader and has a
withhold that prevents gain. Also, you will find that those who don't
contribute don't value the course and you get eriturbulation.
The Course Supervisor works hard, he suddenly finds he can't have
materials or facilities or promotion because it isn't "economical". If he
has his invoices he KNOWS how much is being made and can demand some
portion of it to keep his course going or to get help for it.
The Course Supervisor can and should reject an N/C (No charge) Invoice
or a "courtesy" invoice.
If he gets an award invoice he must insist that the awarding org pay
for it even to himself.
The "withhold from salary" invoices are often not deducted in fact and
by keeping track of these, the Course Supervisor can demand evidence these
sums have been paid in.
Training makes the most profitable income of the org as it requires
the least expenditure. An org can almost go broke doing only auditing. It's
training that makes income for use. Auditing absorbs the income in
overhead. Yet training gets the least facilities and supplies and help
while being the most important income producer.
209
Money made in training students must also cover supplies, study packs,
books, sufficient help, quarters, uniforms for Course personnel, etc.
Course income should result in heavy expenditure on course promotion.
This is the way Dianetics and Scientology will spread-through
training.
A tightly scheduled, smartly run course is always full. It goes empty
the moment it goes slack. This is a startling fact. People detest (by years
of experience in orgs) a sloppy, permissive, badly disciplined Course run
with inadequate materials and supplies.
You can say with certainty loud and clear that an empty course has
been badly scheduled, the Supervisor not on deck on time, materials
lacking. The moment these points get IN, the course fills up.
Excellent, neat admin is all part of a well run course. Things filed,
marked up, issued smoothly and promptly. Students routed quickly, gotten in
action.
NOTHING BACKLOGGED
That is the motto of a good course. Handle everything that comes up
NOW and completely. Any backlog is death to smooth administration.
Be precise and definite, don't fumble around.
Absent students, late students, enturbulative students, you turn the
matter over to Ethics at once. If Ethics doesn't handle right now, hit the
Exec Council with "Where's Ethics?" You can't run a course and be the E/O
of the org also!
All this applies even to a Gung Ho group.
Running a course is a GROUP action performed with at least a
rudimentary org pattern backing it up.
A list of the current course materials papers and files should be
furnished every Course Supervisor.
LRH:cs.an.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JULY 1969
(Cancels HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 JAN 1969)
Remimeo
FAST FLOW TRAINING
Although Academy and Briefing Courses are taught on a fast flow basis
with no examinations, students must apply HCO P/L 26 Aug 65, "SCIENTOLOGY
TRAINING TWIN CHECKOUTS" on all star-rated materials of their level.
W/O Ira Chaleff
LRH:IC:nt.ei.cden.rd Chief Officer AO INT
Copyright (D 1969 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Note: HCO PIL 28 January 1969 referred to above is in Volume 5, page
94. HCO P/L 22 July 1969 has itself since been cancelled by HCO PIL 29 July
1972 Issue II, Fast Flow in Training, in the 1972 Year Book.]
210
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 JULY 1969
Remimeo
Dian Course
All Courses WHAT IS A CHECKSHEET
The "Cheeksheet" is a Scientology development in the field of study.
A CHECKSHEET is a form which sets out the exact sequence of items to
be studied or done by a student, in order, item by item, on a course. It
lists ALL the materials of the course in order to be studied with a place
for the student (or the person checking the student out in the case of a
Starrate Checkout) to put his initial and the date as each item on the
Checksheet is studied, performed or checked out.
The Checksheet is the programme that the student follows to complete
that course.
Every student is given a complete Checksheet at the start of a course.
It is not added to after he has started working on it. It is in its final
form when it is handed to him.
It may be added to for those who enroll later but is not added to
during the course.
The data of the course are studied and its drills performed in the
order on the checksheet. The student does not "jump around" or study the
material in some other order. The materials are set out in the Checksheet
in the best order for study by the student so that he covers all the
material in logical sequence.
Further, following the exact order of the Checksheet has a
disciplinary function which assists the student to study.
The student's initial beside an item is an attestation that he knows in
detail AND can apply the material contained in that bulletin, Policy Letter
or tape, or that he has done and can do that drill. The initial of the
supervisor or another student against a Starrated item is an attestation by
him that he has given the student a Starrate checkout on the item in
accordance with HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 May 1969 Issue 11 "How to do a
Starrate Checkout" and that the student has passed.
The Course Supervisor MUST inspect students' checksheets daily to
ensure that all students are following the Checksheet in its correct set
out order, and that the student is making good progress through it.
"Through a Checksheet" means through the entire checksheet-theory,
practical, all drills-and done in sequence.
When a course consists of three times through the Checksheet, the
student goes through three entire Checksheets once, theory, practical and
all drills in sequence, completing that, and then goes through the entire
next checksheet a second time, then goes through a third checksheet fully a
third time. There is no difference in what is studied and how it is studied
the second and third times through-or any subsequent times through the
Checksheet! It is done fully each time-theory, practical and all drills
(including all study drills).
RETRAINING
"Retraining" or "back to Course for retraining" or (per step [21 in
handling a student who fails to get a good result-HCOB 16 July 69, URGENT -
IMPORTANT) "Send student back to training" means that the student is sent
to Cramming to get straight exactly what is missed and then back to Course
and does THE ENTIRE COURSE AGAIN, three times through the cheeksheet if
that is the course (such as the Dianetics Course). No short cuts or
skimping is allowed on retraining, as a student who fails to apply one
aspect of the course had a misunderstood which would have prevented him
from fully grasping and understanding the other material on previous times
through the Checksheet. Also-NUMBER OF TIMES OVER THE MATERIAL EQUALS
CERTAINTY AND RESULTS (a major study datum which has been proven beyond any
question in Dianetics and Scientology).
It is illegal to run any Course on any subject without a checksheet in
Dianetics
and Scientology.
Ens. Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD.Idm.ei.rd Planning & Training Aide
for
211
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 JULY 1969
(Cancels HCO P/L 24 May 1969
Progress Board)
Remimeo
Dian Sup Crse
All Sup Crse
All Crse Sup &
Admin Hats
STUDENT PROGRESS BOARD
Every Dianetics and Scientology Course must have a Student Progress
Board.
The purpose of the board is to clearly indicate to Supervisor and
students the progress each student is making through the course, whether he
or she is making expected progress and any students which may need to be
sent to Qual for correction such as Remedy B.
The Board has a column for each major cycle of action of the course.
For the USDC this would be one for each time through theory and practical,
one for the pre-auditing exam, one for Auditing and one for final exam. See
sample Student Progress Board below.
Each student's name is written on a small card, stuck in the Board
with a thumb tack, and moved along to the next column as the student
progresses through the course.
If the student does not keep pace with expected completions, such as
he falls a week behind, a red slash mark is put on his card. If he falls
two weeks behind schedule a second slash mark is placed on his card.
The Course Administrator keeps the Student Progress Board and is
responsible for its existence and condition. The Board must be posted
conspicuously for all to see. THE BOARD MUST BE KEPT UP TO DATE AT ALL
TIMES.
When a new student joins the course the Course Administrator
immediately writes the student's name on small card and pins it up in the
first column. The Administrator moves the students' cards along as they
progress through the course and puts slashes on the cards as warranted. The
Administrator informs the Course Supervisor if the board is indicating a
student is not making expected progress, but the Supervisor himself must
also frequently check the Board and take any appropriate actions.
Students undergoing retraining are on the Board with their names on a
different coloured card, such as green for second time through the course,
blue for third time, red for fourth time, etc.
ADMIN BASKETS
As a double check on student progress, a stack of eight baskets is
used. They are marked as follows: -
I . One week.
2. Didn't complete materials in one week.
3. Two weeks.
4. Didn't complete materials in two weeks.
5. Three weeks.
212
STUDENT PROGRESS BOARD
(Name of Course)
FIRST TIME SECOND TIME THIRD TIME EXAMS AND AUDITING
Theory Practical Theory Practical Theory Practical
Pre-Exam AuditingFinal Exam
6. Didn't complete materials in three weeks.
7. Auditing and exams.
8. Didn't complete auditing or exam.
Again students' names on cards are used, different colours for
retrain. When a student has been on course for one week, the Administrator
places his card in the "one week" basket, or (if he didn't complete his
materials) in the "Didn't complete materials in one week" basket.
In the latter case, the student's card on the Progress Board is red
slashed and the Supervisor notified so he can take appropriate action.
The Course Administrator keeps these baskets always up to date.
RECORD OF SESSIONS GIVEN
The Course folder Administrator is also to keep a posted list of
sessions given by students. Each session is graded Well Done or Flunk as
indicated by the Case Supervisor. The student too should keep this form as
a record which indicates he has complied with the auditing requirements of
the course.
One sheet per auditor
STUDENT AUDITOR DATE
AUDITING COMPLETIONS
DATE PCS AUDITED ALLOTTED HRS GAINS OR WELL DONE FLUNK
SPACE AUDITED MIRACLES
Ens. Tony Dunleayy Planning and Training Aide for
LRH:TD:cs.ei.aap
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
214
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 NOVEMBER 1967
(Revised and Reissued 18 July 1970)
Student Hat
Remimeo
ALL STUDENTS
ALL COURSES
OUT TECH
If at any time a supervisor or other person in an org gives you
interpretations of HCOBs, Policy Letters or tells you, "That's old. Read it
but disregard it, that's just background data", or gives you a chit for
following HCOBs or tapes or alters tech on you or personally cancels HCOBs
or Policy Letters without being able to show you an HCOB or Policy Letter
that cancels it, YOU MUST REPORT THE MATTER COMPLETE WITH NAMES AND ANY
WITNESSES ON DIRECT LINES TO THE INTERNATIONAL ETHICS OFFICER AT WORLDWIDE.
IF THIS IS NOT IMMEDIATELY HANDLED, REPORT IN THE SAME WAY TO YOUR NEAREST
SEA ORG MAA.
The only ways you can fail to get results on a pc are:
1. Not study your HCOBs and my books and tapes.
2. Not apply what you studied.
3. Follow "advice" contrary to what you find on HCOBs and Tapes.
4. Fail to obtain the HCOBs, books and tapes needed.
There is no hidden data line.
All of Dianetics and S~ientology works. Some of it works faster.
The only real error auditors made over the years was to fail to stop a
process the moment they saw a floating needle.
Recently the felony has been compounded by disclosure of the facts
that data and tapes have been deleted from checksheets, data has been
"relegated to background" and grades have not been in use fully to complete
end phenomena as per the Process column on the Classification and Gradation
Chart. This caused an almost complete unMock of the subject and its use. I
am counting on you to see it is not allowed to happen EVER AGAIN.
Any supervisor or executive who interprets, alters or cancels tech is
liable to the assignment of a Condition of Enemy. All the data is in HCOBs
or Policy Letters or on tape.
Failure to make this mimeo known to every student carries a S 10 fine
for every
student from which it is withheld.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:sb.rd
, 1970
[Note; The original issue appears in Volume 1, page 472.]
215
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JULY 1970
Issue III
Remimeo
All Orgs' ECs
Franchises
2nd Mate
Tech Sec TECH RETREADS AND RETRAINING
Tech Trg I/C (Amends HCO P/L 6 Dee '69 Issue V "Tech Retreads
Course Sup and Retraining", which ordered a checksheet done three
times through after a flubbed session or flunked exam)
Retreading is different than retraining.
RETREAD is brushing up one's study and knowledge and application of
Tech on the course one is re-doing. It is a commendable action on one's own
determinism.
Any course already completed may be retreaded. The current checksheet of
that course is done once through starrates starrated. The remaining
training requirements as given in HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 July, 1970
"Training Requirements Eased" apply.
RETRAINING is quite different in that where the student has
continually flubbed sessions or Tech actions or flunked exams, it is
assumed he does not have a grasp of the data.
The student is sent to or kept in the Department of Technical
Correction where the situations of the student's knowledge of and
application of Tech are established and the student is corrected with
cramming and auditing as necessary.
It is then established whether or not the student is retrained on the
checksheet just completed and any earlier checksheets that may have been
incompletely studied.
A retrain is done in the Department of Training, Div IV, for Tech Div
Courses or in the Staff Training Unit which is in the Staff Training and
Auditing Section, Department of Personnel Enhancement, Div V, for
Correction Div Courses.
In retraining the student may be ordered to re-do the. full
requirements of the checksheets or the whole checksheet only once starrate
or only a section of the checksheet starrate, depending on the grossness of
the goofs.
The Tech C/S, Tech Sec, D of T or any Course Supervisor. may order a
student directly to retrain on the checksheet the student is currently
studying if the student is found to be flubbing auditing or Tech actions.
A Course Supervisor accepts a student for Retread or Retrain and
ensures that the student completes the checksheet in accordance with study
data.
D/CS-5 for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:JF:rr.rd Copyright@ 1970
216
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MARCH 1971
Course Super Cse Course Super Checksheets LRH,Comm to Enforce
WHAT IS A COURSE?
In Scientology a course consists of a checksheet with all the actions
and material listed on it and all the materials on the checksheet available
in the same order.
"Checksheet Material" means the policy letters, bulletins, tapes,
mimeo issues, any reference book or any books mentioned.
"Materials" also include clay, furniture, tape players, bulletin
boards, routing forms, supplies of pink sheets, roll book, student files,
file cabinets and any other items that will be needed.
If you look this over carefully, it does not say, "materials on order"
or "except for those we haven't got" or "in different order". It means what
it says exactly.
If a student is to have auditing or word clearing rundowns or must do
auditing those are under ACTIONS and appear on the checksheet.
A course must have a supervisor. He may or may not be a graduate and
experienced practitioner of the course he is supervising but HE MUST BE A
TRAINED COURSE SUPERVISOR.
He is not expected to teach. He is expected to get the students there,
rolls called,
checkouts properly done, misunderstoods handled by finding what the
student doesn't
dig and getting the student to dig it. The supervisor who tells
students answers is a
waste of time , and a course destroyer as he enters out data into the
scene even if trained
and actually especially if trained in the subject. The Supervisor is
NOT an "instructor"
that's why he's called a "supervisor".
A Supervisor's skill is in spotting dope-off, glee and other
manifestations of misunderstoods, and getting it cleaned up, not in knowing
the data so he can tell the student.
A Supervisor should have an idea of what questions he will be asked
and know where to direct the student for the answer.
Student blows follow misunderstoods. A Supervisor who is on the ball,
never has blows as he caught them before they happened by observing the
student's misunderstanding before the student does and getting it tracked
down by the student.
It is the Supervisor's job to get the student through the checksheet
fully and swiftly with minimum lost time.
The successful Supervisor is tough. He is not a kindly old fumbler. He
sets high point targets for each student for the day and forces it to be
met or else.
The Supervisor is spending Supervisor Minutes. He has just so many to
spend. He is spending student hours. He has just so many of these to spend
so he gets them spent wisely and saves any waste of them.
217
A Supervisor in a course of any size has a Course Administrator who
has very exact duties in keeping up Course Admin and handing out and
getting back materials and not losing any to damage or carelessness.
If Paragraphs One to Three above are violated it is the Course
Administrator who is at fault. He must have checksheets and the matching
material in adequate quantity to serve the Course. If he doesn't he has
telexes flying and mimeo sweating. The Course Admin is in charge of routing
lines and proper send off and return of students to Cramming or Auditing or
Ethics.
The final and essential part of a course is students.
If a course conforms with this P/L exactly with no quibbles, is tough,
precisely time scheduled and run hard, it will be a full expanding course
and very successful. If it varies from this P/L it will stack up bodies in
the shop, get blows and incompetent graduates.
The final valuable product of any course is graduates who can apply
the material they studied successfully and be successful in the subject.
This answers the question What is a Course? If any of these points are
opt it is NOT a Scientology Course and it will not be successful.
Thus, the order "Put a Course there!" means this PIL infullforce.
So here's the order, WHEN OFFERING TRAINING PUT A COURSE THERE.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:nt.rd Copyright@ 1971
[Note: The CONTENTS contain reference to a 26 January 1972 amendment of
this policy letter. This amendment was cancelled by LRH in HCO POLICY
LETTER OF 16 March 1972 Issue V, What is a Course - High Crime,---asnot
written by myself and is a false daturn---. While the reference has been
left in the CONTENTS, the above text IS the original as written by LRH.
218
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
copies to: HASI POLICY LETTER OF 10 APRIL 1957
Executives
Treasurer
Bulletin Board
HCO Washington STUDENT INTENSIVES
A student intensive and 8 weeks of training (two of which are
Indoctrination) are included in the course fee for HPA.
This intensive on the student is done by a graduating HPA and serves
as his final before full certification is granted.
The Director of Training, not the Director of Processing, is
responsible for the fact of and the efficacy of this student intensive.
Any further auditing desired by the student should be purchased from
the Registrar by the student possibly at the suggestion of the Director of
Processing or Indoctrination Instructor as indicated.
These student intensives included in the course are not done by the
processing department by paid staff auditors.
The Treasurer has stated, on discovering that staff auditors were
being used for this, that she will no longer pay staff auditors for such
intensives. When staff auditors are without pcs for the week they should be
sent to CF and Procurement for full time procurement letters for the week.
LRH: rs.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Also issued as FCDC P/L 9 May 1957, same title.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 OCTOBER 1959
Convert to
Sec ED
PROCESSING OF ACADEMY STUDENTS
Academy students may not receive outside auditing while enrolled in
the Academy to the level of HPA or higher.
Academy students directed by the Director of Training to receive
processing while enrolled under his instruction during any period of the
time while so enrolled, even when taking Academy training a few weeks at a
time, must receive their processing either in class from fellow students or
from students under the direct supervision of Academy personnel or from an
HGC Auditor working only for the WC. Such students may not be given
auditing off hours or on their own, time by staff auditors nor instructors,
nor the Director of Training, but only as an assigned and duly enrolled
intensive in the WC.
The purpose of this Sec ED is to protect the student, the Academy, and
the HGC from various mishaps which have occurred in the past rendering
students liable to loss of training time because of poor and unsupervised
auditing.
Violation of this Sec ED by a student can bringabout at the most
dismissal from the Academy, and at the least a delay of certification of
one year, and for an instructor or other staff member for auditing such a
student without proper registration, a loss of fifty percent of his units
for six consecutive weeks.
LRH:js.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Executive Director
219
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF IS NOVEMBER 1960
Re-issued from Sthil
STAFF CERTIFICATE REQUIREMENTS
Any Staff Member who is not an HGC Auditor and who has case histories
to complete for certificate requirements, may do auditing in the HGC on a
part-time basis.
If their results are good they may submit these to HCO Board of Review
as Case Histories.
This eliminates the necessity of taking on an outside preclear for
certificate requirements.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:js.gh.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JANUARY 1962
Sthil
AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT
It is course policy that students of comparable time length on course
shall audit one another and that students of incomparable time length shall
not.
This permits progressive training skill to manifest and blunders to be
less apparent to the pc and more educational when made.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:sf.rd
(Note: For further data on the assignment of auditors see HCO B 22
July 1969 Auditing Speed.]
220
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MAY 1965
Gen Non Remimeo
D of T Hat
IMPORTANT EXPLANATION
AUDITING RESTRICTIONS
The secret back of the No-Auditing Rule in Academies is that 1 have
found the way to improve the average case quite well by study alone.
In the Scale of Awareness Levels, it is AWARENESS that determines the
level, NOT Conduct. Conduct is dramatization and above the awareness of the
person.
What can the person be aware of is the level determiner.
Thus by study matched to levels (the scale up from -34) you can
improve a case just by making the person study the materials of the next
level above where he is.
Cases that don't so improve by study alone up to Grade IV would have
to be processed and are too far down to be in an Academy anyway and so
should be processed up to Grade 0.
The natterer and rumour monger is not up to RECOGNITION as he or she
hasn't a clue why we're here, much less what we're doing. They just haven't
found the org or the auditor. So even Academy processing won't help-it
takes a pro.
That's the riddle of why some students progress and some don't
answered.
Once a person has found the org and the auditor, study improves cases
(level by level) more than Academy auditing would. Naturally HGC or Review
Auditing could do it easily by processing. But not student auditing student-
they are too aware the other one is a student, too critical, too immersed
in the idea "it's all practice anyway," in Academy auditing.
So if the student is quite batty (as per TA tests) he won't make it
without expert pro auditing and if he isn't he will usually make it up to
IV by study alone. So why audit in an Academy.
Make future auditors instead.
The Academy is no substitute for an HGC for processing. And the HGC is
no substitute for training. Get it?
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:wme.rd Copyright a 1965
221
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 MAY AD IS
Remimeo
Academy Students
Sthil Students URGENT
TECHNICAL DIVISION
DISTRIBUTION DIVISION
FREE SCIENTOLOGY CENTRE
Effective when ordered by the HCO Secretary in each org, depending on
when the org is ready for it.
FREE SCIENTOLOGY CENTRE
Organize a Free Scientology Centre in your Dept of Processing. This is
not the HGC. It is the student clinic. It is a section of the Dept of
Processing.
It is open evenings and weekends. It is run by students under org
guidance.
No fee may be charged.
The org pays for and has on deck evenings and week ends the Free
Scientology Centre Registrar.
A sign is plainly displayed where every Free Centre pc can see it.
THE FREE SCIENTOL OG Y CENTRE
All auditing is done by student auditors.
It is unsupervised.
We only take responsibility for auditing done in our HGC by
professional auditors.
The applicant for free auditing does so on his own responsibility.
The results may be good but we cannot guarantee them. If you want safe
auditing or are a rough case, buy your auditing in the HGC.
Place an ad in your local paper or display signs near your public
phone box if papers won't take the ad:
FREE SCIENTOLOGY CENTRE
Free services offered the Community for Problems, increases in Health
and IQ and Scientology Assists. Conducted as a Free Public Service by (org
name). Call Free Scientology Centre Registrar (phone) or come to (address)
evenings or week ends only.
The pilot project on this was 1/3 of the applicants signed up for
courses and intensives after Free Service where the auditing was good,
without being urged to do
SO.
Every student with a certificate of any kind down to HBA can be a
Field Staff Member. Remind the students they can select these applicants to
training or processing.
222
Students doing their Provisional Classification Course are compelled
to attend the Free Clinic each evening of their Classification Course and
only leave if no applicants show up. They must be told to keep exact
auditor reports of all they do as the Examiner will want them.
The Free Scientology Centre Registrar doubles in brass for all evening
and week end services-Coaudits, BS (PE), HAS as well as paid service for
the HGC and Academy evenings and week ends. If she becomes very busy give
her reception service. Students can help her if they volunteer. They may
not be assigned without volunteering as it cuts into their processing time.
She must get the name and address of every Applicant and the Auditor who
picks him up and turn these into Address the next business day.
She need not assign student auditors. They should be on their own and
should bring the applicant in to get him registered.
Auditing can be done in rooms as available.
There is no real effort here to do more than have students pick up
people in the waiting room and get them registered and take them off to
audit them. It is up to the student to make continued appointment. The
student may not accept any gratuity of any kind. But the student if a field
staff member, may select the person but only after at least an assist and a
case gain.
Only standard processes of the student's study level or below are run.
No effort need be made to follow the grade system on free pes. Just get a
result with standard processes.
There is no D of P work on free pc folders. There is only Examiner
work and it is without advice.
A course (instructor) supervisor may use the free folders as examples
of what to do and what not to do if so minded.
The Free Folders are picked up by the Examiner and sent to the Dept of
Estimations on org lines for filing under the student's name, cross-filed
with a card under the pc's name.
The legal attitude is 'Yell, you knew it was a student auditor".
Courts uphold this.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.rd Copyright @ 1965
(Cancelled by HCO P/L 8 June 1970 issue II, Student Auditing, page
227.1
223
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 MAY AD IS
Issue 11
General Non Remimeo
Not, for Public Release Technical Division
ACADEMY PROCESSING
Applic. to: All Academies and Saint Hill
You are out of the Processing Business effective as soon as the
current students have completed the requirements of the level each is now
on.
Academies don't process.
HGCs do.
Students up to 1952 never did auditing in their courses. They audited
raw meat.
There is a firm basic policy about training. The student is trained
with the tools he will use as an auditor.
This means even at Level Zero they have E-Meters in their laps whether
they know how to use them or not.
This also means their practice auditing is a raw meat pc.
Where are students to get auditing experience? See Free Scientology
Centre above.
Where do they get their own cases cracked? Students can audit other
students but only on their own initiative. Course Supervisors can see if
their TAS and needles are awful and make them get auditing.
In Dianetics auditors didn't have cases. We audited an awful lot of
people well. Since, Academy and course emphasis on cases is ruining your
training.
In the Classification Course (Practical) a student must show he can
audit a pe so he can be pink sheeted. And that can be on another student.
But just for show.
The Examiner, for final Classification Exams for every level must
require Legible properly kept Auditor's Reports showing success with pcs on
the processes of the level. Non-standard application or a false report must
be reported by the Examiner at once to the Ethics Officer. This auditing
can be done in the evenings of the (Practical) Classification Course and on
week-ends on the Academy evening courses.
The best auditors we ever had were taught before students auditing
students became a part of training.
The Dept of Training Trains. Coaudits, clinics, processing belong to
the Department of Processing.
There is no more Course Auditing for the sake of another student's
case.
Auditors audit.
If a student's case gets in his way as an auditor (until you have a
full Qualifications Division as is now formed at Saint Hill) he goes to the
HGC.
If he wants to coaudit, he can join the evening Coaudit at no charge.
I have found out that a student's delay on course is usually not for
theory and practical but because of auditing-auditing required because of
student cases, not for student learning.
So that finishes Academies and courses as a place to go to get
audited. It's where you go to get trained.
Let's turn out some eager beaver auditors! That audit!
LRH:wmc.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1965
(Cancelled by HCO P/L 8 June 1970 Issue 11,
Student Auditing, page 227.1
224
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 OCTOBER 1965
Remimeo
Qual Div
Tech Div
Sthil Students
REQUIREMENTS FOR STUDENT CLASSIFICATION
HCO B of 27 September 1965 "Release Gradation" states "It is obvious
then that GRADE CERTIFICATES FOR PRECLEARS lapse and are no longer issued
and are replaced by Release awards, awarding 'Grade - Release' when
attained".
HCO Policy Letter 31 July 1965 "Purposes of the Qualifications
Division" states that the prime purpose of the Dept of Examinations and all
its sections and units is:
"TO HELP RON ENSURE THAT THE TECHNICAL RESULTS OF THE ORGANIZATION ARE
EXCELLENT AND CONSISTENT, THAT STUDENTS AND PRECLEARS ARE WITHOUT FLAW FOR
THEIR SKILL OR STATE WHEN PASSED AND THAT ANY TECHNICAL DEFICIENCY OF ORG
PERSONNEL IS REPORTED AND HANDLED SO THAT THE TECHNICAL RESULTS OF THE
ORGANIZATION CONTINUE TO BE EXCELLENT AND CONSISTENT."
"The integrity of Scientology and its hope for beings in this Universe
are entrusted to the Department of Examinations."
Because of the above it becomes necessary that students in training
present their preclears to the Examiner to be declared at the grade of
Release attained if a floating needle is attested by the student auditor.
Even if a floating needle is not obtained students should still present
their preclear to the Examiner for her to observe that good indicators are
in on the pc.
Provision for this is made on the Night Foundation and in cases where
the preclear works at night and cannot be presented to the Examiner,
special representation may be made to the Examiner and the matter will be
individually handled.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.kd Copyright @ 1965
225
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 OCTOBER 1965
Rernimec,
Students
Tech staff
STUDENT AUDITING OF PRECLEARS
Students may not audit any public preclear who is a preclear of any
organization.
A student when looking for a preclear to audit for their
classification on a level must first check with the preclear if they have
been audited by an organization and if they have, they are not to be
audited by the student without express permission from the organization
concerned.
As the purpose of having students get preclears to audit on their own
initiative is to teach them how to disseminate and reach into the broad
public, it is hardly acceptable for them to reach Scientologists and will
be an automatic disqualification for classification if this is found to be
the case.
LRH: ml.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I FEBRUARY 1967
Rernimec, (Replaces HCO Policy Letter of
Students 29 October 1965 of same name)
Tech Staff
Qual Staff
STUDENT AUDITING OF PRECLEARS
Students may not audit for their Classification any current preclear
of any organization or any preclear who has been audited in any
organization within the past two years.
A student's preclear who does not fall into the above two categories,
but who has had to have either an assist, a Review session, or a
Stabilization Intensive done in any organization due to the student
classification lines is still considered the student's preclear and is not
considered an organizational preclear.
A student may not audit another student's preclear without getting a
written attestation from the other student that permission is granted for
the preclear to be audited.
A student is held responsible for abiding by this policy. Further the
technology, Ethics, and Policies as regards auditing of preclears applies
fully to a student's auditing of his or her preclear.
Written by a Board of Investigation:
Marilynn Routsong
Joan Thomas
Mary Sue Hubbard The Guardian WW for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jp.bp.rd Founder
226
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint kill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Ecs
Tech See HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 JUNE 1970
DTS Issue II
DofT
All Courses
Supervisors and
Students
(CANCELS HCO PL 29 Oct 65 Student Auditing of Preelears, HCO PL
23 May 69 Issue II Dianetics Course Student Auditing, HCO Pl, 17 May
65 Free
Scientology Center, and HCO PL 17 May 65 Issue 11 Academy Processing.)
STUDENT AUDITING
The following policies regarding student auditingare made with
reference to LRH ED 104 INT 2 Jun 70 "Only training gives low cost auditing
from fellow students" and LRH ED 107 INT 3 Jun 70 "See that students do a
lot of mutual auditing".
Students may not audit any public preclear. (Unfinished but promised
pcs existing at this date of issue may be assigned to the student as a
Charity pe by the Chaplain.)
Students may audit students who have been enrolled and who have paid
in full for a Scientology level 0 or above or Dianetic Course. They may
also audit contracted staff members and may be required to audit
organization preclears under the D of P who are not enrolled on a course in
order to complete their auditing requirements.
The course supervisor is to ensure that each student preclear's folder
is C/Sed for each session to be given and that any needed folder error
summaries are done.
The course supervisor must make the auditing requirements of students
and preclears known on a scheduling board so that student auditors can be
assigned to preclears and sessions scheduled. Regular sessions may be
scheduled during course hours besides any other mutually agreed upon time.
The Classification requirement for each level is that the student
surcessfully audits several preclears to the attainment of the grade of
release of the same level by auditing each of the many processes of the
grade to its end phenomenon.
The auditor must produce consistent well done or very well done
sessions on at least three preclears in which all standard tech for that
grade has been exactly applied. Every effort must be made to see that the
student audits each process of the grade.
Scientology course students may audit Dianetic Course students on any
needed Scientology actions.
Any student auditing successfully for the Director of Processing may
be given an honors class for the level.
A student who has honors for every level may be awarded an honors
final certificate and the certificate clearly marked and permanent. He also
may be awarded an Interneship for his highest class qualifying him as a C/S
for that Class providing he also does the C/S checksheet well for that
class Interne.
Students not permitted to audit for the D of P and who otherwise
qualify as students are awarded PROVISIONAL certificates made permanent
only after a year.
Students may NOT audit local residents for classification and the Free
Scientology Centre is not now permitted. They may of course audit anyone
after graduation and if for fee, must charge at least as much as the full
org price. They may of course, if qualified, audit friends and family free
of charge.
This does not prevent the Chaplain or D of' P from assigning charity
cases to
students at the discretion of the org.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dz.rd Founder
[Modified by HCO P/L 4 November 1971 Issue 11, Academy Pre-requisite,
in the 1971 Year Book.]
227
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo
Org Exec Sec WW HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 APRIL 1966
ES Comm Tech WW
ES Comm Qual WW
Org Exec Sec Hat
Tech Sec Hat DIANETIC AUDITORS COURSE
Qual Sec Hat
Org Sec Hat The Org Exec See WW has
Dir Reg Hat the authority to arrange
and order and issue check
sheets for Dianetic Auditing
Training
For any arranging or establishment of a Dianetic Course as per HCOB 3
April 1966 "Student Auditing Dianetic Auditing" the following must be
observed:
I - The course must be not less than one month.
2. It must not be extended endlessly for the student.
3. It is not the same as grade courses in that it does not contain
grade material
or even the gradation chart but contains Dianetic; data.
4. It must remain precisely within the limits set by HCOB 3 April
1966 so far
as its auditing is concerned.
5. It may not be sold as a course for less than $500 in the US or f
125 sterling in the UK or other continental areas.
6. Scholarship up to 50% may be issued.
7. Only cash may be accepted and no credit allowed.
8. Healing laws must be given heed by not selling such auditing or
promising to heal by reason of Dianetic auditing.
9. The course may be advertised as, paraphrase, the way up to a
capable human being is the realm of Dianetics-Scientology reaches from a
capable human being upward. Success in Scientology is assured by a thorough
grounding in Man's most advanced school of psychology (or the mind)-
Dianetics. Dianetics was the ultimate development of the mind of human
beings. Scientology is the road from there to total Freedom. This is a
study and practice course which is a prelude to becoming a Scientology
auditor and brings one a complete understanding of the mind so that one is
then prepared to understand the spirit in Scientology, etc.
10. Academies and especially Saint Hill may teach and practice HCOB 3
April 1966 as part of Level 0 providing it is studied along with the other
materials and forms the practical of Level 0.
At this writing there is no pattern of how to include this material
and one must be developed by experience. But it is pointed out that
Academies have never failed to do well so long as a one-piece Dianetic type
course was available.
It could be that experience, cautiously won, will show that the public
will buy the Dianetic course in droves.
It could be we should drop the Dianetic word from Dianetic techniques
as refined in HCOB 3 April 1966, as they are really pretty awfully advanced
from where we were in 1950 and call it the Basic Auditor's Course or the
Basic Academy of Scientology Course and call the technique Basic
Scientology. If so, texts will have to be edited and Scientology
substituted everywhere for Dianetics.
These problems are left to the Org Exec See WW as they will gradually
evolve into a new success.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:lb-r.cden
228
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 AUGUST 1966
Issue II
Remimeo
Impmant
DIANETIC AUDITING
Dianetic Auditing is being re-introduced for TRAINING ONLY.
In all publications or announcements this fact must be included.
Dianetics is known as a healing mental science and as such,
announcement of its. use could be interpreted as an entry into healing by
Scientology organizations.
Dianctic Auditing may NOT be offered for sale in Hubbard Guidance
Centres or by Centres. It may be offered as a training course in auditing
by Franchise Holders, Centres and Orgs but ONLY by making the statement in
every announcement that it is to train auditors and is not part of
Scientology practice.
Dianetic auditing demonstrates mental anatomy to students and improves
their auditing skill. Scientology practice is today too fast to permit
training as an auditor to be sufficient to qualify them.
Its re-introduction in no way enters orgs into the field of healing
despite the fact that healing does occur in Dianetic auditing.
The insane belong to the psychiatrist and we as a reform group only
wish he would clean up his practice and get his practitioners to act
ethically, and actually help his patients.
The sick belong to the medical doctor and as a social group we only
wish he would advance his science to include workable psychosomatic
medicine.
We are not interested in the insane or the sick and refuse to take
them in Centres and orgs. We are only interested in freeing the human
spirit from materialism and making the able more able.
Dianetic auditing is not for sale or use by centres or orgs. Use of it
is instructional only. Any benefit is incidental even if sometimes
considerable.
Dianetics was and is the answer to psychosomatic illness but we in
Scientology are not in the field of healing.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:lb-r-cden
229
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 SEPTEMBER 1967
Remimeo
All Students
Tech Sec Hat
D of T Hat
Dia Course Supervisor Hat
Qual Sec Hat
Dir Exams Hat
Dir Rev Hat
DIANFrIC AUDITOR'S COURSE
AUDITING POLICY
Queries have been received as regards what Grades of preclears can be
allowed to have secondaries and engrams run on them in relationship to the
Dianetic Auditor's Course.
Preclears with no Grade or Grades 0 to III can be run on secondaries
and engrams.
Preclears with a Grade IV can be run on engrams.
Preclears with Grades V, VA and VI are not to be run on secondaries or
engrams. The only exception is when a Dianctic Release state is found to be
missed at a later date, but this is not normally handled by course
students.
Org Exec Sec WW - Fred Hare
D.O. Tech WW - J.J. Delance
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.rd
230
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO, POLICY LETTER OF 23 FEBRUARY 1968
Remimeo
Dianetic Course Students
DIANETIC AUDITOR'S COURSE
AUDITING POLICY
The following Grades of preclears can be allowed to have secondaries
and engrams run on them by Dianetic Auditor's Course students.
Preclears with no Grade or Grades 0 to III can be run on ARC S/W,
secondaries and engrams.
Grade IV Preclears can only be run on engrams.
Preclears with Grades V, VA and VI are not to be run on ARC S/W,
secondaries or engrams, other than by Internes or above, when a Dianetic
Release state is found to be missed at a later date. This is never handled
by course students as they have not been trained on the Technology of Power
and Power Plus.
Proposed by a Board of Investigation
Mo Budlong
James Hare
Mary Sleight
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jc.rd The Guardian WW
Copyright (~) 1968 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 JANUARY 1969
Remimeo
Dianetic Course Students
DIANETIC AUDITOR'S COURSE
AUDITING POLICY
HCO Policy Letter, "DIANETIC AUDITOR'S COURSE-AUDITING POLICY", 23 FEB
1968 is hereby cancelled as it introduces an arbitrary into Standard Tech.
Proposed by: R.C. Ash
D/Tech See SH
Approved by~ Sane Kember
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ei.rd Founder
231
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 APRIL 1969
Remimec,
DIANETICS,
The policy on Dianetics is that it was and is intended to make a
happy, well human being and that it can now be used in conjunction with
purely medical (not political psychiatric) treatment.
Any person not recovering his health and sense of well being by use of
Dianetic auditing should be given by competent medical and clinical doctors
or technicians a thorough physical examination to locate the illness,
structural or pathological (disease), which is troubling him and
introverting him.
Scientology healing and mental treatment policies apply to
Scientology.
Dianetics is fully excepted from these policies.
This is in view of the strong and increasing interest and cooperation
of individual medical doctors over the world which should be continued and
promoted.
This policy does NOT include turning any person over to institutions
or practitioners engaged in political treatment and expressly does not
allow the use of such political treatment as electric shock, lobotomies,
brain "operation" or drugs producing convulsions.
This policy does permit surgical and structural operations including
the alleviation of concussion or skull fractures or the removal of brain
tumors but only after they are proven to exist beyond any doubt by
competent clinical examination. It does not include exploratory operation.
The severance of nerves to "end psychosis" is expressly condemned and
the use of produced convulsion by any means to "alleviate psychosis" and
the practice of euthanasia (mercy killing) or any barbaric torturous or
murderous or terrifying treatment or approach are not only not condoned but
should be actively fought due to the non-therapeutic results, the immediate
or early demise of the "patient" and to the efforts to use these
"treatments" to effect political ends. The persons using these means
actively financed and fought Dianetics and Scientology over the world and
were the sole source of repression of a valuable sincere and vital
breakthrough in the field of healing as consistently demonstrated.
This HCO Pol Ltr amplifies as policy HCOB 6 April 1969 and HCOB 12
March 1969.
Dianetics is a healing practice supplementing medical treatment.
Scientology is a religious practice applying to Man's spirit and his
spiritual freedom.
In areas, mainly America, where the freedom to heal is subject to
attempted monopoly, all Dianetic auditing of physically ill persons (not as
student practice) must be in conjunction with competent medical
practitioners who must be informed why a medical examination is requested
for the preclear. "This is a member of the Church of Scientology. As he may
be physically ill we wish a full medical examination and diagnosis and any
medical treatment which will resolve the illness found. With the leave of
the medical doctor and with the patient under his care we will employ
Dianetic auditing as well to assist his recovery. Until healed this person
is not eligible for Scientology auditing. We cooperate fully with the
medical profession and expect in our turn that our trust in it will not be
betrayed. Under no circumstances will we permit this person to be
brutalized with psychiatric political treatments."
In other countries any variation of this statement or its lack may be
employed, depending on the legal position of healing.
LRH:cp.ei.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1969 Founder
232
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 MAY 1969
Issue 11
Remimeo Dianctic
Course
Qual Secs
Tech Sees
DIANETIC COURSE EXAMINATIONS
There are two examinations on the Dianctics Course.
I . PRE-AUDITING EXAMINATION.
This is done after the student has completed the theory and practical
drill sections of the course. The examination is standard and has been
written up and issued to all Qualifications Divisions in Orgs. It must be
passed 100% before the student is permitted to audit.
As Diaretics is now a very standard routine it will be found that the
student either understands it or he doesn't. There are no shades of grey.
If the student flunks the examination he goes to Cramming to review
the materials of the course.
2. FINAL EXAMINATION.
This is done after the student has completed his auditing
requirements. When the 25 hours of auditing are complete (or more if
required to obtain the required result), the student presents all his
auditing folders to the Examiner with an attestation that he was the
auditor, and that all the sessions he audited have been recorded in the
folders presented to the Examiner.
The Examiner inspects the folders to see if the auditor has
demonstrated the practice of Standard Dianetics, and to see if the PC has
attained the expected gains. (If the sessions look standard but the PC has
not attained the expected gains the examiner knows the session reports are
incomplete or false.)
If the Examiner is satisfied the student is auditing 100% Standard
Dianetics the student is passed and graduated.
If the auditing is non-standard and the results have not been obtained
the student mbst continue auditing until the Examiner is satisfied.
The student auditor's sessions are case supervised. If the PC is in
trouble the auditor ends the session and sends the PC to the examiner. The
case supervisor orders the student to cramming if he has goofed.
The PC may be ordered to a Scientology Review such as a Green Form.
Review and cramming are at normal Org rates. There is no charge for
case
supervision.
Brian Livingston
CS-5
LRH:BL:cs.ei.rd
for
L, RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 29 July 1972 Issue 11, Fast Flow in Training, in
the 1972 Year Book.]
233
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 MAY 1969
Issue III
Remimeo Dianetic Course
AUDITORS CODE AND DIANETICS
The Auditors Code (HCO Policy Letter 14 October 1968) applies to
Dianetic auditing as well as Scientology.
Clauses I and 2 (Evaluation and Invalidation) especially must be
thoroughly understood. The Dianetic student must be able to demonstrate
these with many different examples of each and should even write an essay
on all the ways he can possibly think of evaluating for and invalidating a
PC.
Clauses 12, 13, 15 and 24, are sometimes misinterpreted by improperly
trained Dianetic auditors who are not too familiar with what they are
handling. The clauses do apply but the following notes are made:
12. 1 PROMISE TO RUN EVERY MAJOR CASE ACTION TO A FLOATING NEEDLE.
In Dianetics you are auditing chains to ERASURE. Erasure of a complete
chain is normally accompanied by a FIN. The handling of a lock is not in
itself a major case action and may or may not produce an FIN.
13. 1 PROMISE NEVER TO RUN ANY ONE ACTION BEYOND ITS FLOATING
NEEDLE.
In Dianetics you do cease an action on an FIN. But, if the FIN is on
one incident and the chain is not erased you just cease to run that
incident but continue on down the chain to erasure.
15. 1 PROMISE NOT TO MIX THE PROCESSES OF SCIENTOLOGY WITH OTHER
PRACTICES EXCEPT WHEN THE PRECLEAR IS PHYSICALLY ILL AND ONLY MEDICAL.
MEANS WILL SERVE.
As Dianetics concerns the body, Medical and Dianetic practices may
proceed together. Whenever possible you would cease medical treatment
during auditing but sometimes the medical treatment can only be eased off
gradually. With accidents and acute illness medical treatment must be given
immediately and the engram can only be audited when the PC has somewhat
recovered. In some instances the PC will only respond to correct medical
treatment after a Dianetic assist has been given.
You never mix Dianetics; or Scientology with any psychiatric, occult,
mystical, hypnotic, or other practices.
24. 1 PROMISE NOT TO ADVOCATE SCIENTOLOGY ONLY TO CURE ILLNESS OR
ONLY TO TREAT THE INSANE KNOWING WELL IT WAS INTENDED FOR SPIRITUAL GAIN.
The improvement and freedom of man as a spiritual being is the vital
realm of Scientology. Dianetics erases those things (Locks, Secondaries,
and Engrams) which make a person susceptible to, and hold in place,
physical illness. Hence Dianetics, while not treating illness or insanity
directly, does enter those fields. When a person is no longer troubled by
unwanted physical conditions he can then advance on the much wider field of
spiritual gain and freedom covered by Scientology.
The use of F/Ns in Dianetics and the relation between a Dianeticist
and the medical practitioner is fully covered in other materials of the
Dianetics course.
Brian Livingston
CS-5
LRH:bl.an.ei.rd
Copyright (c) 1969 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
234
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 MAY 1969
Issue II
Remimeo
Dianetics
Course
Tech Division - Qual Division
STUDENTS GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOUR
(Edited for the Hubbard Standard Dianetic Course)
GENERAL
1. Get sufficient food and sleep. Always eat breakfast before class
and morning sessions.
2. When being a preclear, be one, not a student or auditor. When
being an auditor, be an auditor, not a student or preclear. When in class
and lectures, be a student not an auditor or a preclear.
3. If you don't know something or are confused about course data,
ask a Supervisor or send a despatch. DO NOT ASK OTHER STUDENTS AS THIS
CREATES PROGRESSIVELY WORSENING ERRORS INDATA. Also despatches from you to
L. Ron Hubbard will be relayed if you place all such in the basket marked
"Students Out".
AUDITING
4. Do not consume any alcoholic beverage between 6 a.m. on Sundays
and after class on Fridays.
S. Do not consume or have administered to yourself or any other
student any drug, antibiotics, aspirin, barbiturates, opiates, sedatives,
hypnoties or medical stimulants for the duration of the course without the
approval of the D of T.
6. Do not give any processing to anyone under any circumstances
without direct permission of the D of T. (Emergency assists excepted.)
7. Do not receive any processing from anyone under any
circumstances without the express permission of the D of T.
8. Do not engage in any "self-processing" under any circumstances
during the course at any time.
9. Do not receive any treatment, guidance, or help from anyone in
the healing arts, i.e. physician, dentist, etc., without the consent of the
D of T / Ethics Officer. (Emergency treatment when the D of T is not
available is excepted.)
10. Do. not engage in any rite, ceremony, practice, exercise,
meditation, diet, food therapy or any similar occult, mysti~41, religious,
naturopathic, homeopathic, chiropractic treatment or any other healing or
mental therapy while on course without the express permission of the D of T
/ Ethics Officer.
11. Do not discuss your case, your Auditor, your. Supervisors, your
classmates, L. Ron Hubbard, ORG personnel or the ORG with anyone. Take up
any complaints with your supervisor.
12. Do not engage in any sexual relationships of any nature or kind
or get emotionally involved with any classmate who is not your legal
spouse.
13. Follow the Auditor's Code during all sessions when being the
Auditor.
235
14. Follow technical procedure as outlined on the course exactly and
precisely.
15. Be honest at all times on your auditing report form. Stating
every process run, Tone Arm changes and times, sensitivity setting,
cognitions of your preclear and any changes of physical appearance,
reactions, communication level, or otherwise what you observe in your
preclear.
16. Place all reports in the folder of your preclear after each
session, turn it into the Examiner for examination.
17. Students must not read their own report folder or that of
another student, unless he is auditing that student.
PREMISES
18. Do not make any undue noise either indoors, or when leaving
class.
19. Use the correct entrances for entering and leaving the premises.
QUARTERS
20. Do not put cigarettes out in plastic waste baskets or on the
floors.
21. Keep all your bulletins, supplies and personal possessions in
the space allotted to you and keep your space neat and orderly.
22. Students are allowed to smoke during breaks only and always
outside any study or auditing quarters.
23. The basket marked "Student In" is the basket where all
communications, bulletins or mail to students are placed. Always check this
basket daily to see if you have received any communications.
24. Report and turn in any damaged property or goods used on the
Course. Protect and keep the premises in good condition.
25. No food may be stored or eaten in the Classrooms at any time.
SCHEDULES
26. Be on time for class and all assignments.
27. Buy any books you need from the bookstore at appointed times.
28. Follow all schedules exactly.
29. Study and. work during your class periods and over weekends. You
have a lot to get checked out on in order to get a course completion. You
can't afford to waste time.
L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:emp.cs.ei.rd
Copyright (c) 1969
236
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 MAY 1969
Issue 11
Dianetic Course
- HUBBARD STANDARD DIANETICS COURSE POLICY
I The checksheet of the Hubbard Standard Dianetic Course as contained
in HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 May 1969 Issue I may not be altered without the
authorization of L. Ron Hubbard.
2. The course time should not exceed one month.
3. The price of the course is $500 in the US or ~C125 sterling in
the UK or other
Continental areas. This includes the Supervisor's Section.
4. Only cash may be accepted and no credit allowed.
5. The Standard Dianetic Course may only be taught by Standard
Dianetic Supervisors. Qualification is graduation from the HSDC and the
Supervisor's Course.
6. The HSDC may be taught in any official Scientology Organization,
Franchise Center, or Gung Ho Group by a QUALIFIED PERSON.
7. In order to maintain the standard, students may only be examined
in an official Scientology Organization, the Qualifications Division of
which is authorized to issue the Standard Dianetic Certificate.
8. This course may not be taught as part of any other course.
Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD:cs.rd CS-2
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 19 May 1969, Hubbard Standard Dianetics Course
Policy, page 241.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MAY 1969
Issue II
Remimeo
FAST FLOW BY ATTESTATION
The Standard Dianetics Course is taught by the Fast Flow System. This
means that Students are not required to be checked out by another person,
the exceptions being only those bulletins which have drills especially
designed for their study, as contained in HCO Bulletins.
The student does however have to attest that he knows each bulletin or
policy letter on the Checksheet in detail and that he is able to apply it.
This is done by signing each item on his own Checksheet when he has studied
it.
Further, a student may work with another student to be sure he knows it. In
this case, HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 August 1965, "Scientology Training-Twin
Checkouts", should be followed, except that the student still attests on
his own Checksheet for each item.
There is a Pre-auditing Examination as well as a Final Examination.
Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD:cs.an.rd CS2-Training Aide
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
ICancelled by HCO P/L 29 July 1972 Issue 11, Fast Flow in Training, in
the 1972 Year Book.1
237
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 MAY 1969
Issue 11
Remimeo Dianetics Course
TEACHING THE DIANETICS COURSE
As the teaching of basic data restimulates confusions which are then
dramatized by throwing the course off line, the teaching of the Dianetics
Course as follows is hugely vital.
The teaching of Dianetics Auditors is laid down on these simple
principles.
1. The data on tapes and Bulletins is studied without alter-is,
interpretation or addition by the student, fellow student, instructor or
supervisor.
2. Well done and other folders are studied by the individual
student.
3. No lecturing or additional interpretation or evaluation by
Supervisors.
4. The student audits only when he has completely passed on I and 2
above. He
must not audit before he has completed his checksheet three times
through.
5. Things the student is weak on are done in clay.
6. The student is sent to cramming at his own expense for bad
auditing goofs. He may also be taken off auditing and made to do his
checksheet again.
7. Any student question is answered by referring to the HCOB,
folder or tape or by explaining it is beyond the scope of Dianetic
auditing.
8. A rigid invariable schedule is precisely adhered to.
9. Checksheets and tapes and folders are gone through in the
sequence laid down by the checksheet and not randomly out of sequence.
If this is made difficult then the programme must be cut back to the
bare bones of the original above.
The teaching of standard tech must also be standard. Therefore the
above MUST be adhered to completely.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.an.ei.rd
238
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MAY 1969
Issue IV
(Revision for Standard Dianetics
Course of HCO PL of 22 Nov 67)
Remimeo
Student Hat
All Students
All Courses
OUT TECH
If at any time a supervisor or other person in an org gives you
interpretations of HCOBs, Policy Letters or tells you, "That's old. Read it
but disregard it" or gives you a chit for following HCOBs or tapes or
alters tech on you or personally cancels HCOBs or Policy Letters without
being able to show you an HCOB or Policy Letter that cancels it, YOU MUST
REPORT THE MATTER COMPLETE WITH NAMES AND ANY WITNESSES ON DIRECT LINES TO
THE INTERNATIONAL ETHICS OFFICER AT WORLD WIDE.
The only ways you can fail to get results on a pe are:
I . Not study your HCOBs and my books and tapes.
2. Not apply what you studied.
3. Follow "advice" contrary to what you find on HCOBs and Tapes.
4. Fail to obtain the HCOBs, books and tapes needed.
There is no hidden data line.
All of Dianeties and Scientology works. Some of it works faster.
Any supervisor or executive who interprets, alters or cancels tech is
liable to the assignment of a Condition of Enemy. All the data is in HCOBs
or Policy Letters or on tape.
Failure to make this mimeo known to every student carries a 8 10 fine
for every student from which it is withheld.
L RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.an.ei.rd
239
I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 MAY 1969
Dianetics Course Issue 11
Sup. Section HOW TO DO A STARRATE CHECKOUT
Earlier forms of education suffer because of a habit. The habit was
contracted in one's years of formal schooling where this mistake is the
whole way of life.
If the student knows the words, the teacher assumes he knows the tune.
It never does a student much good to know a few data. In life one
succeeds only if he can USE facts.
It is so easy to confront thought and so hard to confront action that
the teacher often complacently lets the student mouth words and ideas that
mean nothing to the student.
ALL THEORY CHECKOUTS MUST CONSULT THE STUDENT'S UNDERSTANDING.
If they don't, they're useless and will upset the student eventually.
Course difficulties stem entirely from the student's non-comprehension
of words and data.
So examining by seeing if somebody "knows" the text and can quote or
paraphrase it is completely false and must not be done.
Correct examination is done only by making the person being tested
answer
(a) The meanings of the words (re-defining the words used in his own
words and demonstrating their use in his own made up sentences), and
(b) Demonstrating how the data is used.
The Supervisor can ask what the words mean. And the Supervisor can ask
for examples of action or application.
A Starrate Checkout must have been 100% right answers for a pass.
However the following rules apply-
I . Spot check the words and materials, do not try to cover it all.
This is done the same way a final examination is given in schools; only a
part of the material is covered by examination, assuming that if the
student has this right the student knows all of it.
2. Flunk on comm lag in attempts to answer. If the student "er ah
well flunk it as it certainly isn't known well enough to use.
(Doesn't
include stammerers.)
3. Never keep on examining a bulletin on the same exam after a
student has missed.
THE GLIB STUDENT
You will find that often you have very glib students you won't be able
to find any fault in who yet won't be able to apply or use the data they
are passing.
Demonstration is the key here. The moment you ask this type of student
to demonstrate a rule or theory with his hands or the paper clips on your
desk this glibness will shatter.
The reason for this is that in memorizing words or ideas, the student
can still hold the position that it has nothing to do with him or her. It
is a total circuit action. Therefore, very glib. The moment you say
"Demonstrate" that word or idea or principle, the student has to have
something to do with it. And shatters or passes.
Clay Table isn't used by a Theory Examiner. Hands, a diagram, paper
clips, these
are usually quite enough!
Compiled from earlier policy letters by
Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD:an.ei.rd CS2-Training Aide
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/Ls 20 January 1971, Checkout Mini Course, and 5
March 1971 of same title (which cancelled and replaced 20 January 1971), in
the 1971 Year Book.)
240
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 MAY 1969
(Cancels HCO PL 7 May 1969
Issue II Same Title)
Remimeo Dianetic Course
HUBBARD STANDARD DIANETICS
COURSE POLICY
1. The checksheet of the, Hubbard Standard Diarietic: Course as
contained in HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 May 1969 Issue I may not be; altered
without the authorization of L. Ron Hubbard.
2. The course time should not exceed one month.
3. The price of the course is $500 in the US or f 125 Sterling or
equ ivalent in the UK
and South Africa and the equivalent of f 150 Sterling in ANZO. This
includes the
Supervisor's Section.
4. Only cash may be accepted and no credit allowed.
5. The Standard Dianetic Course may only be taught by Standard Di
anetic Supervisors with a Hubbard Dianetic Graduate Certificate.
Qualification is graduation from the HSDC including the Supervisor's
Section.
6. The HSDC may be taught in any official Scientology Organization,
Franchise Center, or Gung Ho Group by a QUALIFIED PERSON.
7. Students may take their Pre-auditing examination at the
Franchise Center or Gung Ho Group at which they do the course. Org Qual
Divisions are to supply copies of the examination to Franchises and Gung
Ho's who run the HSDC, which are confidential. However, in order to
maintain the standard, the students' requirements for certification must be
examined by the Qual Examiner of an official Scientology Org..This may be
done by mail, by the Franchise or Gung Ho sending to the Org Examiner the
full Auditing Reports, Worksheets, Pc Examiner forms, etc (Le. the
students' preclears' folders) of the students' auditing on the course
showing that the auditing requirements of HCO Bulletin of 6 April 1969
Issue 11 have been met by the student, as well as his checksheet attested
by the student as completed. The pc folders will be returned to the
Franchise or Gung Ho Group after examination.
Only the Qual Div of an official Scientology Org is authorized to
issue a Hubbard Dianetic Graduate certificate. It must be promptly sent to
the student upon his passing the Final Examination.
8. This course may not be taught as part of any other course.
Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD:an.ei.rd CS-2
for
L. RON HUBBARD
ALL\RIGHTS RESERVED Founder
[Note. This issue of Hubbard Standard Dianetics Course Policy differs
from the 7 May 1969 issue in its inclusion of more detailed data
(especially in points 3, 5 and 7).]
241
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 MAY 1969
Remimeo
HUBBARD STANDARD DIANETICS COURSE
COURSE MATERIALS PAPERS AND FILES
(referred to on HCO P/L 16 May 69)
STUDENT REQUIREMENTS
Each student enrolling on the HSDC is required to have the following:
BOOKS Original Thesis
Dianetics, the Modern Science of Mental Health
Evolution of a Science
The Book Introducing the E-Meter
The Book of E-Meter Drills
MATERIALS E-Meter
2 Soup Cans for electrodes
E-Meter lead with jack plug and crocodile clips
1 eraser
1 pencil
blank paper
2 black or blue pens
1 good dictionary
1 timepiece
Worksheets
Auditor Report Forms
Stapler
Paper clips
Clay (various colours)
Demonstration kit (box of assorted bits and pieces for use in
"demonstrating")
Good picture frame for his certificate
ORG REQUIREMENTS
The following is a checklist of materials, files and papers needed for
the HSDC.
Check them off and make sure you have adequate quantities of every
item. Always reorder in sufficient time those materials which are used up,
such as student packs of materials, so that you never run out.
ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIALS
1 Thick hard cover foolscap size book for roll book
1 Thick hard cover foolscap size book for student auditing record
1 Master Checksheet kept up to date
1 Pack of materials kept up to date
1 Schedule made up and posted clearly
1 HSDC students' notice board
Thumb tacks
1 Student progress board (described separately)
1 Student statistic board
242
File cabinet Pens Stapler Staples Paper clips Ruler Felt tip pens
Stock of orange coloured PC folders (or other different colour to that
regularly used in the Org for PC folders) Routing forms: New students
Student to examiner Student to ethics 1 IN basket for each student 1 OUT
basket for whole course 1 Basket TO I-RH
COURSE MATERIALS
Adequate supplies of checksheets
Adequate packs of course materials (for issue one to every student)
Adequate copies of LRH Case Supervised Sessions
Weekly Student report forms to LRH
PC Assessment forms 24/4/69 (HCOB)
Pastoral Counselling form 24/4/69
Summary Report forms 17/3/69 (HCOB)
Parent and Guardian Assent Forms
Sufficient copies of "Alice in Wonderland" books
Pink sheets
TAPES
21 July 1966 Dianetic Auditing
28 July 1966 Dianetic Auditing and the Mind
18 June 1964 Study, Introduction
9 July 1964 Study, Data Assimilation
4 Aug 1964 Study, Summary of
6 Aug 1964 Study, Gradients & Nomenclature
I I Aug 1964 Study, Evaluation of Information
13 Aug 1964 Study and Education
22 Sept 1964 Study, A Review of
18 Aug 1966 Study and Intention
SUPERVISOR MATERIALS
I Desk (in the training room)
I Chair
I IN-OUT basket
I Stapler
Paper
Pens
Ruler
Clipboard and carbon paper
Very large dictionary
Demonstration kit
GENERAL COURSE REQUIREMENTS
Large photo of LRH in course room
Sufficient space for class at all times (large quiet well lighted
room)
243
Folding chairs (one for each student)
Folding card tables (one for each student pair)
Adequate number of good quality tape recorders
Tape head cleaning fluid (alcohol) and cotton buds (for regular
cleaning of tape heads)
HiFl headphones (the type with miniature speakers as the earpiece
not the telephone type)
Supervisor's certificate posted very visibly
CERTS AND AWARDS
Hubbard Graduate Auditor certificates
Dianetic PC lapel pins
BOOKSTORE
The bookstore should get in adequate quantities of books listed above
under student requirements. Blazer badges Lapel pins
W/O Ken Delderfield LRH Public Aide CS-6
for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:KD:an.ei.aap
[Note: The titles of the tapes listed have been corrected per HCO P/L
23 Oct '70.]
244
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 MAY 1969
Remimeo
Dian Checksheet
KEEPING DIANETICS WORKING IN AN AREA
In that any Dianetics Course, starting out, has only its Course
Supervisor trained, the problems of what is used for Case Supervision and
Cramming Supervisor in Qual will arise.
Here more than any other points, alteration can enter.
Altering, doing something else, is a sufficiently serious problem to
destroy a Course and all the benefits of Dianetics in a whole area.
Early on, during the development of the Standard Dianetics Course, we
were suddenly getting case failures. These were traced by Case Supervision
to wild variations from Standard Dianetic procedure. These variations were
traced to an examiner who during student checkouts was giving "advice". As
soon as this was handled, case gains immediately resumed.
Over the many years of Dianetic use, I think we must have seen all
possible variations of auditing. "New" phenomena were often discovered and
used and eventually the whole subject wandered off into never-never land
and ceased to produce uniform results.
What has happened here in Standard Dianetics is that the exact actions
that produce results on all cases have been isolated and used as THE
procedure.
The procedure is a thin narrow walk way through a huge field of
potential alterations.
THERE ARE NO DIFFERENT CASES.
Built in to the Standard Dianetic procedure are the remedies.
For instance early Dianetics was plagued by several problems:
I . Lack of visio-an inability to see pictures. This was solved by
getting date and duration.
2. Perception shut off. Not required in total now to produce
results. Sonic, ability to hear the sound in pictures, is not needed at
all. Impression is sufficient.
3. Somatic shut off. Not now required to be solved but its source
(drugs and alcohol) have been discovered.
4. Rough sessions. Solved by TRs.
5. Lack of auditor judgement in diagnosis. Solved by the E-Meter.
In these years of research I have been able to wrap up these and other
things.
There have been more cases run on Dianetics than could easily be
counted. So the research data is very broad. This is no new subject. It has
been close to 39 years under research.
Thus what you are told on the Standard Dianetics Course is the essence
of all this
245
work and experience. There are no unsolved problems, there is only
varied application where there should not be.
The whole object of the course is to train people to get good RESULTS,
and train people to give a course that results in GOOD AUDITORS. That's the
whole thing.
We could also teach over 50,000,000 words about things that don't get
results or train auditors.
The essence of a brilliant subject is a simple subject.
Therefore anything that varies the data of a Standard Dianetics Course
can send it out into unworkability.
I've seen auditors also use "peyote" (a drug), C02 and drugs "to help
auditing". I've seen many different meter types used. I've looked over a
thousand different ways to run a session. And I've seen all these things
fail.
The four points of greatest potential failure are
I . A Course Supervisor who interprets data and alters it in order
to satisfy some student's offbeat quest.
2. An Examiner who throws curves into data by means of invalidating
the right data.
3. A Case Supervisor who does not simply and only put the auditor
back onto the main line and who seeks to "solve" cases by altering data.
4. An Auditor who, not knowing his data in the first place, alters
the data and, because in an altered form he fails, starts off on a wilder
alteration of data and fails harder.
Under Supervisor comes the course and cramming supervisor both.
So you see, that to get real Standard Dianetic results going in an
area you have to be very alert to hold the exact data line as contained in
the HCOBs.
Where you begin to find case failures, look to I to 4 above and to
student failure to just simply study and drill.
For the first time you have an exact subject in the field of the
"humanities". These "humanities" for all man's history have been a mass of
superstition, bad logic, propaganda, authority and brutality. An exact
humanity is so new that it has a bit of a hard time. All the errors and
prejudices start to "blow off" when truth enters in.
Just be sure you don't lose the subject with the confusion.
Cope, make do, hold the line and you'll have a successful Dianetic
area. It's worth working toward, worth achieving.
You have only one big stable datum.
IF IT ISN'T WORKING IT IS BEING VARIED.
To get ~t working again, find who and what is varying it and get back
on the main line.
LRH:an.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1969 Founder
246
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 MAY 1969
Remirneo
Dianetics
Checksheet DIANETIC CONTRACT
Div 6
This form is a standard offering and promotion form for preclears for
Dianetic
Auditing.
DIANETICS
FULL REFUND IF YOU DO NOT GET WELL THROUGH AUDITING.
Anyone accepting this offer must also agree to receive if required a
medical examination and any effective treatment for any entirely medical
illness he may have
both before and after auditing.
The extent of the refund will consist of the exact fee paid.
The claim for refund must be made within three months of the
conclusion of the auditing.
If the fee is refunded no more Dianetic or Scientology auditing or
training may be given to the person.
Medical illnesses which beforehand could not be cured medically
usually respond to medical treatment after some auditing.
Auditing after such medical treatment tends to stabilize the medical
cure and
prevent relapse.
A standard release form covering these points must be signed by the
applicant.
Some large percentage of Man's physical ills are psychosomatic and
respond
directly to auditing, I
Only auditing done by Hubbard Dianetic graduates in official
organizations are covered by this offer.
WHY BE TIRED?
WHY BEIN PAIN?
WHY FEEL BAD?
AUDITING CAN MAKE YOU FEEL WELL AND HAPPY WITH LIFE.
OUR ORGANIZATIONS ARE FRIENDLY. THEY ARE ONLY HERE TO HELP YOU.
These points above are to be included as additional clauses in our
release forms.
IF ANYONE EVER DEMANDS A REFUND UNDER THIS OFFER make him or her sign
an undertaking never again to purchase training or processing and A RECEIPT
IN FULL and GIVE THEM THEIR MONEY BACK ON A MINUS INVOICE AT ONCE. Do not
make a long argument out of it or a long drawn out Admin action.
By paying these claims quickly, getting the promise not to have more
auditing or any training and getting a receipt YOU ACTUALLY BUILD
CONFIDENCE.
It is fully understood that this campaign applies to DIANETICS.
Trying to sell Scientology to make physical health has been a betrayal
of Scientology. The subject that made bodies well was and always has been
Dianetics. Scientology increases ability and gives one immortality. Refunds
for Scientology services are governed by the older policies which remain in
force.
The first line, FULL REFUND IF YOU DO NOT GET WELL THROUGH AUDITING,
can be posted in any display space. If so, a small printed complete leaflet
as written above should also be displayed so they can get all the facts.
Persons asking about this should be handed the leaflet.
New additional leaflet should also be available and handed out at the
same time:
DIANETICS
Dianetics (Dia-through, noos-mind) has been 39 years in development.
It is the first fully precision science of the mind.
247
Physical illness, aches, pains, continual exhaustion, body
malfunctions are created or held in an unchanging state by the mind. This
is called psychosomatic (psycho-spirit, somatic-body) illness. It has been
known about for a century but there has never been a positive remedy before
Dianetics.
Auditing (it means to listen) is a term given to the application of
Dianetics.
No drugs, no hypnotism, no mechanical treatment is used.
The actual source of psychosomatic illness has been isolated in
Dianetics.
Processing is the action of an auditor letting the preclear (person
not yet cleared) find the actual source of his physical illness.
Processing requires usually 25 hours or less.
Various forms of mental therapy were in existence before Dianetics.
These were psychology, psychiatry and psycho-analysis.
Psychology and psychiatry were developed chiefly by a Russian
veterinarian named Ivan Petrovich Pavlov (1849-1936). His basic principle
was that men were only animals and could be conditioned and trained much
like dancing bears or dogs. This work was only intended to CONTROL people
and so has found great favor with certain rulers and upper classes. None of
the activities of psychology or psychiatry were designed to help or cure,
only to Control the masses.
Psycho-analysis was developed by an Austrian Jew Sigmund Freud (1856-
1939). His occasional successes served to point out that there was a
possibility of solving psychosomatic illness through addressing the mind.
His concentration on sex gave the subject considerable popularity.
Dianetics was first released in 1950 and has been increasingly
successful since that time. Unlike earlier studies, the interest of
Dianetics was the relief of physical suffering.
The results of psychiatry are physically damaging, consisting of
various brutalities and often injure the patient for life or kill him
outright. There have never been any cures listed or claimed for psychiatric
treatment as its interest lies only in control. The cost is about $2000 a
month often for years in America and 160 a week for as long as a decade in
England.
Psychology is mainly used for testing aptitude or intelligence. It has
counseling as part of its activities but it is more concerned with and
financed for warfare.
These two subjects have bitterly contested any healing subject and use
public media governments and even rumor to forward population Control. This
action has often made it difficult to bring bonafide mental health to the
people.
Psycho-analysis requires up to five years for an uncertain result and
costs about E9000.
Dianetics requires only a matter of hours, only helps and does not
physically injure anyone. It costs about $25 an hour in the US and about
E50 total processing cost in the UK.
There is no quarrel between Dianetics and general practitioners of'the
medical profession. They both have the same purpose (to make people well)
and are not political. It is freely admitted in Dianetics that physical
illness that can be effectively treated medically should be so treated.
Auditing will not set a broken leg or deliver a baby. But it can help get
the leg healed in two weeks instead of the usual six and after effects of
childbirth do not exist when Dianetic auditing is also used.
Many people who cannot work, who cannot enjoy life, are physically ill
without realizing it.
Aches, pains, colds, even malfunctions of the body are symptoms of
illness.
See the Registrar.
(address)
Variations of the central ideas of these themes may be used.
But remember, Dianetics is pastoral Counseling and all HDGs must be
ministers. Psycho-somatic means spirit-body. Look up "psyche" in the
dictionary and you'll see.
LRH:an.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1969 Founder
248
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 MAY 1969
Remimeo Dianetics Course
PROGRESS BOARD
The purpose of this board is as follows:-
1. It shows the names of the students on the course. It's a
vertical column on course list.
2. It shows their progress according to their checksheet
completions-horizontal column.
It must be kept up to date. The Supervisor or the course
Administrator, where the class is large enough to warrant one, enters the
names of new students.
Upon completion of each section the student makes the checks (ticks)
on the Progress Board.
Upon completion of the course each section has three checks in its
columnbooks one check.
Keynotes of the Progress Board are:
I . It is drawn up according to the checksheet sections.
2. It is kept in order by the Administrator.
3. Each section is checked by the student upon immediate
completion.
4. It must be kept up to date and replaced, periodically. Send to
be filed when taken down.
Students returning from cramming take up where they left off having
been corrected on the specific outness for which they were sent to Cramming
Div V.
The Supervisor regularly observes this board as it is a valuable
indicator of fast students and those students who should be routed to
cramming.
Supervisor's Section follows this layout.
The Progress Board is posted conspicuously and open to view for anyone
to see.
249
Supervisor's nam - ( ) qualification HDG
Administrator's name- ( ) Date
PROGRESS BOARD
HSDC
(taken from the rough draft of the first HSDC checksheet)
NAME DATE INTRODUCTION DEFINITIONS AUDITOR'S PROCESS AND ASSISTS
POLICY DEFINITIONS AUDITOR
STARTED CODE APPLICATION AGAIN REPORTS
LRH C/S E-METER PRE-AUDITING AUDITING FINAL SUP.
FOLDERS AND EXAM EXAM SECTION
DRILLS
Record of Sessions Given
The Administrator is to keep a posted list of sessions given by
students. Each session is graded Well Done or Flunk as indicated by the
Case Supervisor. The student too should keep this form indicating he has
complied with HCOB 6.4.69 Issue II-Dianetics Auditing Course Requirements.
One sheet per auditor
STUDENT AUDITOR DATE
AUDITING COMPLETIONS
I DATE C JALLOCATEDI HRS I GAINS OR I HRS IWELLDONE"
I AUP)ISTED SPACE AUDITED AUDITED
LRH:JB:an.ei.rd W/O James Byrne
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 30 July 1969, Student Progress Board, page 212.
]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 MAY 1969
Issue 11
Remimeo
Dn Course
DIANETICS COURSE STUDENT AUDITING
Policy on the Dianetics Course is that students may audit other
students on the same course, but only upon assignment to audit that student
by the Course Administrator. It is expected that all Dianctics Course
students will complete the course after having significant gains on
Standard Dianetic auditing.
This modifies the policy for the Dianetics Course ONLY that students
may not audit other students.
The policy that students may not audit any public preclear who is a
preclear of any organization is also modified for the Dianetics Course ONLY
as far as other students on the Course are concerned.
Dianetics Course Students will of course have to also audit pcs who
are not on the course to complete their requirements, in which case the
above policy DOES apply in that such preclears may not previously have been
pcs of any Scientology Organization.
NO DIANETIC PROMOTION MAY PROMISE OR INFER BECOMING CLEAR BY DIANETIC
AUDITING. THE END PRODUCT OF DIANETICS IS A WELL BODY AND A CHEERFUL
ATTITUDE TO LIFE.
Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD:an.ei.rd CS-2
Copyright'oc 1969 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
(Cancelled by HCO P/L 8 June 1970 issue 11, Student Auditing, page
227.1
251
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 MAY 1969
Dian Course
Sup. section
DIANETICS COURSE SUPERVISION AND ADMINISTRATION
SUPERVISOR CHECKOUTS
CLAYDEMOS
Clay demos are done by the student at his own table or at the Clay
Table. The student raises his hand when he is ready for a checkout. The
supervisor comes over and gives a checkout as per HCOB I I Oct 1967 "CLAY
TABLE TRAINING". All demos must be checked out in accordance with this
HCOB.
TRAINING DRILLS
The training drills are checked out, with the Supervisor being "the
coach".
If student flunks Supervisor has the student coach drill him on the TR
some more telling the student coach what the student flunked on.
E-METER DRILLS
The Supervisor is to closely supervise E-Meter drills, making sure
they are done correctly.
(On Dianetics Course E-M Drills 23 & 26 are *checked out.)
SELECTION OF TWINS
One of the duties of the Supervisor is the selection of twins.
The main object in selection of twins is to team up students of
comparable ability. SLOW students of course are sent to the Examiner for
Review or Cramming. Poor case gain students are sent to the Examiner
suggesting "GF to F/N and no 40GF and handle". (One cannot order Qual but
one can suggest.)
You just have to work it on trial and error for the first couple of
days until you get an idea of how fast the students are.
Twins should remain twins for the duration of the course in so far as
possible and are responsible for each other's progress.
COURSE AUDITING ADMINISTRATION
Part of the duties of the Course Administrator are:
1. KEEPING A FULL RECORD OF WHO'S AUDITING WHO.
(a) No. of sessions
(b) Auditor's name
(c) PC (or pre OT's) name
(d) Dates of each session
(See HCO Pol Ltr 24 May 69 "Progress Board", Record of Sessions
Given.)
2. Scheduling preclears to auditors.
3. Making sure all auditing reports, work sheets and Summary
Reports are written legibly or written over neatly by the auditor using a
different colored pen.
4. Making sure all folders are intact ready to go to Case
Supervisor.
5. Having folders easily accessible and in alphabetical order so
they can be quickly obtained.
The Course Administrator must make available any folder the Case
Supervisor or Student Auditor requests.
Michael Mauerer
Dianetics Course Supervisor
LRH:MM.an.ei.rd Sea Organization
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
252
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I JUNE 1969
Issue II
Remimeo, Dn Supervisor's Course
DIANETICS TRAINING
A datum has emerged which is vital to Dianetics training and to the
whole forward advance of Dianetics and Scientology.
A COURSE SUPERVISOR WHO DOES NOT KNOW HIS COURSE MATERIALS TO THE
POINT OF BEING ABLE TO INDICATE WHERE IN THE MATERIALS ANY DATUM CAN BE
FOUND WILL EVALUATE FOR AND GIVE DATA TO THE STUDENTS.
Further students will have extreme confidence in the Supervisor who
can and does direct them to the exact Bulletin section or paragraph where
they will find the answer to their tech questions, or which they need to
study further.
Therefore on any Supervisor's Course, the student must be drilled and
is expected to know his materials by Bulletin and paragraph. He must know
his materials backwards as well as Study Materials and supervision
technology.
The Text Book for any course must be compiled by subject, and
paragraphs numbered. There must be an Index by Terms, giving all the page
numbers these terms are used, with any page on which they are defined in
heavy print.
There are two Dianetics Courses.
HUBBARD STANDARD DIANETICS COURSE.
On this course the student is trained to be a highly competent
Standard Dianetics auditor. It is a thorough course, taught tough, and to
graduate the Student must have gotten excellent case gains himself and on
his preclears. He graduates by reason of excellent examination marks and
well done sessions.
The certificate for this course is the HUBBARD DIANETIC COUNSELOR
CERTIFICATE. The Graduate of this course is NOT qualified to teach an HSDC.
The second course is the
HUBBARD DIANETIC SUPERVISOR COURSE.
This course requires that the student knows his Dianetics Course
materials so well that he can point to anything in the materials.
He must also know thoroughly the Study Material and Supervision
Technology.
The Hubbard Dianetic Supervisor Course is taught only in Official
Scientology Organizations, and, is very tough with lots of drilling. The
student graduates as a HUBBARD DIANETICS GRADUATE and he, and only he, is
authorized to teach a Hubbard Standard Dianetics Course or a Hubbard
Dianetics Supervisor Course.
A Dianetics Counseling Group should have a Hubbard Dianetics Graduate
as only then may it conduct and run a Hubbard Standard Dianetics Course.
And it must hold a Franchise to do so.
It should send in to an official Scientology Organization its best
Standard Dianetics auditors to be trained on the Hubbard Dianetics
Supervisor Course.
Tony Dunleavy
Planning & Training Aide
LRH:TD:cs.ei.rd for
Copyright (~) 1969
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
253
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 JUNE 1969
Issue 11
Remimeo Dianetics Course Checksheet
LEGAL STATEMENT CONCERNING DIANETICS AND
MEDICAL PRACTICE LAWS
Dianetics is a science. It is not Scientology. In the hands of a
medical practitioner who is also a trained Dianeticist, Dianctics may
achieve remarkable results in the handling of many of the problems and
ailments which make up a large part of ordinary practice. It does not
infringe upon orthodox curative medicine for known physical ailments. In
this context Dianetics may be called 'treatmenVand be said to 'cure'.
In the hands of a priest or minister who is also a trained
Dianeticist, the same tool has a different use and function. It is used as
a technology of pastoral counselling. It is then not used to treat and to
cure in the medical sense, but to handle the effect of the spirit on the
body. Dianetics, after examination, treatment, cure and a clean bill of
health, as necessary, by a medical doctor, is used as a tool by the
minister to free a person's attentions from his body so that he is ready
for Scientology. It is thus true pastoral counselling and has a religious
function.
Dianetics as a subject taught on the Hubbard Standard Dianetics Course
can be promoted in any authorized way. The teaching of Dianetics cannot be
excepted to. But promotion of the practice of Dianetics as a treatment for
the sick or afflicted or as a treatment for blemishes, deformities,
diseases, disfigurements, disorders, injuries or other mental or physical
conditions, by other than medical doctors, will violate the medical
practice laws where they exist and lead to trouble.
Hence the importance of controlled promotion, of sending sick pcs to a
medical clinic for examination, for emphasizing that pastoral counselling
is a use of Dianetics and is a religious use with the purpose of handling
the effect of the spirit on the body and not a use which conflicts with the
proper sphere of the medical doctor as laid down in medical practice laws.
That is not to say that Dianetics is a religion. It is not. It is a
science, but it has a religious use-to free the spirit from bodily
considerations. Such problems of the spirit are not the function of the
medical doctor, nor the concern of the medical practice laws.
A proper adherence to the distinction between promoting Dianetics the
science taught on the Dianetics Course, and Dianetics the pastoral
counselling technology practised by Ministers of religion, will resolve any
problems posed by medical practice
laws.
Proposed by Charles Parselle
Legal Chief W/W
Approved by Jane Kember
The Guardian W/W
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ei.rd Founder
Copyright (D 1969
254
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 JUNE 1969
Remimeo
Dianetic
Supervisor's
Course
DIANETICS
POINTS WHICH GO OUT AND WRECK PCS
These are the points which regularly go out on a course and wreck it.
They are vital points which must be; policed and kept in. You can almost
take it on the basis that if student auditors wreck any pcs these points
are out and MUST be put in fast to save the repute of Dianetics, the
Course, org and area.
I . A student must not be permitted to audit until he has passed a
tough written examination with a grade of 1001vo.
2. When a student flunks his auditing or examination he or she re-
does the whole checksheet fully (three times through). If a Qual Cramming
section is available with a trained Dianetic Cramming Supervisor the
student, after flunking, goes to Cramming, gets his misunderstoods, etc.
handled and then does the checksheet through three times.
3. When the student re-does his checksheet he must be checked out
again on the bulletins and drills as though he had never done the Course
before. Do not check him out, on only those bulletins he flunked on or
misapplied.
4. The person who says "it is all an overrun" (when made to restudy
the materials) usually hasn't studied his materials in the first place.
5. LRH case supervised folders must be available and properly
studied on course and on any retraining.
6. All materials must be available to the student. The course is
compact and meaty. The student cannot graduate (or audit) without having
checked out on all bulletins at least three times. Crossing an item off the
checksheet as 'not available' is not permitted. The Course Administrator
must ensure all materials are available.
7. A student must be shown and must study all the C/Ses of his
sessions before auditing another session. He must be checked out for
understanding of the C/S instructions of each before auditing another
session. If this is not done he will repeat errors already corrected by the
C/S but not known to him.
8. Any new bulletins issued and designated for the Dianetic Course
must be issued to the students and checked out and must be added to
checksheets for new students. New bulletins are issued because (a) an
important new aspect of the technology has been developed by Ron or (b) the
bulletin is required to correct an outness persisting in the application of
the technology. In either case it is vital for students to have the data
and to be able to apply it.
9. The Supervisor must not give Tech data to the student-even if he
does know it verbatim. He must only refer the student to the materials. If
your students are auditing satisfactorily for a period and then the
sessions go on the rocks, auditors who were previously doing alright start
doing goofy things, you can be certain somebody is giving Tech data. That
is the time to call in Inspections and Reports or the Ethics Officer to do
an Investigation and find out WHO. The most likely person is the Course
Supervisor, the Examiner, the Cramming Officer, or some
255
other 'technically knowledgeable' person. It may be one of the
students or it may be that the students are permitted to get their Tech
data from other students.
10. The Course must be tightly scheduled, starts, breaks and end of
day being very precise.
11. The course must be closely supervised, the supervisor there on
time and there during the course, with no other org duties, and an adequate
number of supervisors and administrators must be on staff when the course
gets too large to be handled easily. Large courses are broken down into sub-
units.
These are the points which, if permitted to fall out, will wreck your
course and your pes. We have already seen these points go out several times
on a closely watched course. It is quite insidious and is immediately
reflected in goofball auditing that drives a Case Supervisor nuts.
Tech Secs, Qual Sees, and Case Supervisors must be alert to see that
the Course Supervisor gets these points in and keeps them in before all
your Dianetic pcs wind up in Review.
Brian Livingston CS-5 for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:BL:fas.ei.rd
256
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 JUNE 1969
Remimeo
DIANETIC REGISTRATION
(Revises HCO POLICY LETTER OF April 6, 1969 Issue 11
Mainly in reference to Paragraphs two, seven and ten)
A sign should be prominently displayed in all orgs servicing the
general public as follows:
"if you have come here to be cured of a physical illness, SEE THE
REGISTRAR and so inform her so that she can arrange for a competent medical
examination and treatment and for Dianetic auditing while under the care of
a doctor. When you are physically well, you can begin Scientology training
and processing on your road to total freedom."
And another sign,
"This organization will not recommend or condone political mental
treatment such as electric shocks or brain operations or convulsive drugs
and condemns utterly this Fascist approach to 'mental health' by
extermination of the insane. Because we will not agree to brutality and
murder under the guise of mental healing or to the easy and lawless seizure
of persons in the name of 'mental health' for political reasons, we are
fought ceaselessly by those who seek domination of this country through
'mental treatment'. You are safe so long as we live."
The registrar is to sign the person up as he or she would any
preclear.
The org must make a liaison with a medical clinic which has diagnostic
equipment and obtain a flat rat., charge.
Legally and ethically it is all right to send a person to a doctor for
a physical examination, but it will cause an ARC break with the doctor to
specify what he is to do in that examination.
It is best to say merely: "Would you please do a complete medical
examination to include any acute or chronic illness and any effects from
past injury or illness."
It should be made clear to the medical doctor who pays his fee. "Your
fee for this examination and for any special investigation will be paid by
the bearer."
It should end by saying, "Would you please give a note of your
findings to the bearer."
Note that it would be unethical for the medical doctor to treat any
curable disease found unless the person examined specifically asked him to
treat it. otherwise he would refer the person to his own doctor.
A doctor cannot be asked to supervise a person while he is having
auditing because he cannot professionally be asked to join in a non-medical
attempt to cure some illness, for if he did he would be subject to
discipline, charged with "covering", and if found guilty, struck off the
Medical Register.
The org should make their position very clear to the clinic-that they
are trying to co-operate with the medical profession and that Scientology
is a religion. However, after or in the absence of medical treatment if
none is needed, the persons sent will be given Dianetic auditing after such
medical examination and treatment, if given, or under medical
[supervision]. A clean cut difference should be made between Dianctics as
an assist done under a physician's care or after his treatment and
Dianetics as a religious function of pastoral counselling or Scientology as
a religious practice.
; If contempt or hostility is met, write a letter of complaint to the
medical
257
association and try another doctor or clinic. In such a letter of
complaint make it very plain that you are not engaged in physical healing,
that you have always tried to co-operate with medicine and that your only
quarrel is with psychiatric casualties and their perversion of the medical
profession.
If the clinic shows clear cut evidence of the need of an operation,
the D of Processing should give the preclear the verdict. If the preclear
will not have it, arrange a meeting between the preclear and the doctor and
discuss it.
It is possible to engage in Dianetic processing even when a medical
verdict is for an operation, but if the preclear will not have it, then
undertake Dianetic processing only under the doctor's care and with his
consent, and insist upon the preclear being re-examined during processing.
The cost of the examination and any operation is in addition to
processing fees and any such charges are paid directly to the clinic by the
preclear, the org not taking responsibility for the costs of these.
After any medical treatment, the entire treatment is run as an engram
or chain as the first action. Lingering symptoms are also run down to their
basics as per Dianetic Auditing Assists given in the Dianetic Course.
Policy is not to engage on auditing sick pcs without medical advice or
treatment as required.
Insane pcs are handled in this same fashion as they are mainly
physically ill, need rest and no harassment. Insane pcs are a lot of
trouble unless one has an institution to hand, but institutions cannot be
trusted. Until an org has some means or connection by which the insane
preclear will not be brutalized, shocked or operated on with brain
"operations", it is better to refuse them.
By insane pe is meant one who is subject to highly irrational and
destructive behavior. If not, they are regarded as physically ill.
The senile and mentally retarded are also handled as per physically
ill pcs as above.
Waivers in all cases are required.
A new clause, "Will not hold the organization or its principals
responsible for medical costs or errors", must be included in signing
persons up for Dianetics.
Complete files of all such should be kept in Division 6 to show in
case of need
(a) that the org does not engage in physical healing and
(b) success stories with full records, X-rays, etc for Dianetics.
Where this policy letter is fully in force, earlier policies on
healing and the insane are cancelled.
This change of policy is due to (1) our wish to cease to individuate
from the other social groups of the society and (2) our refusal to leave
the field of mental healing in the hands of public enemies.
This is also part of our campaign to Revitalize Western Society. "A
well society is a sane society."
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:fas.ei.cden Founder
Copyright 1969
by L. RonWubbard
[Note: The word "principlee' has been corrected to "principals" in the
fifth last paragraph, per HCO PL 2 September 1969, Issue III, Correction to
HCO PL 12 June 1969.1
258
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 JUNE 1969
Remimeo
Examiners
DIANETICS
PRE-AUDITING EXAMINATION
Confidential HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 May 1969 Pre-Auditing Examination is
cancelled.
The pre-auditing examination consists only of a tough written
examination which must be passed 100% before the student is permitted to
audit.
After a period the current written examinations will become too well
known, also some students may flunk the exam several times before
eventually passing with 100%, hence more examinations will need to be
written from time to time. These should be originated as necessary by the
Qual See WW or, under his direction, by some competent person who is a
Dianetic Graduate.
All examinations must consult the student's understanding and ability
to relate the materials to a session.
Sometimes a student will get high marks in the nineties and only lost
marks for an incomplete answer rather than incorrect answers. In such cases
the examiner after marking the paper can verbally ask the student the
questions on which he lost marks. If the student then gives the missing
data, without having referred to the materials or discussed the examination
with somebody in the mean time, he passes.
This opportunity is not given if the student answered any question
incorrectly or had less than about 94% on first marking.
The purpose of the examination is., to find out if the student knows
and understands the materials cold. If he doesn't he will mess up cases.
The student who flunks the examination or auditing goes to Cramming
and then back to course. to re-do the full course.
THE ENTIRE PURPOSE OF THIS EXAM IS TO PREVENT THE MESSED UP PCS WE
FIND OCCURRING WHEN THIS QUALIFICATION TO AUDIT EXAM IS OMITTED.
Brian Livingston CS-5 for
LRH:BL:eky.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
I Cancelled by HCOP/L 29 July 1972 Issue 11, Fast Flow in Training, in
the 1972 Year Book.]
259
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 JULY 1969
Remimeo Dianetics Supervisor's Course
SUPERVISION
A Course Supervisor can give himself, and his students, losses by
becoming too careful. The Supervisor being over anxious and harassing all
his students to graduate without flunks can unwittingly bring about slow
cautious students. This extends course time and the mode is carried over
into auditing. The students then become slow cautious auditors. An auditor
who, in session, is being careful not to flub, not to violate any tech
datum or policy will not have his TRs in, will not have the PC in session
and will flunk his auditing.
Dianetics is a fast simple course. It is not complicated.
The majority of students will fly through the course in two to three
weeks of full time study. If they don't the supervisor has probably gotten
too cautious and inadvertently slowed the course down.
It happens several ways. For example: A student goes into auditing and
then flunks. The supervisor feels responsible for not having trained the
student adequately. He then takes up the student auditor's flunks with the
whole class and has them all star rate check out on the bulletin so they
won't make the same mistake. Another example is the super-visor who goes
anxious about the few slow students on course. He feels he is failing as a
supervisor to have any slow students so starts spending much of his time
coaching, checking out, and handling the few. It awards a down stat. This
is done to the detriment of the majority of fast students. The supervisor
should simply twin the slow students, have them work together using a
dictionary and checking each other out on the materials. When they really
know the data the supervisor checks them out on their star rate materials.
He doesn't spend a lot of time with them. If they just can't make the grade
he routes them off to Qual for Cramming and Review to handle.
There are two types of students:
(a) The student who has had good case gain and studies easily, or
the student who may not have had much auditing but studies and audits well
in spite of his case.
(b) The student whose case continuously gets in the way and requires
auditing before he will make much progress.
The fast students are permitted to fly right along, no harassment or
interruptions, quick concise checkouts. They go fast. They are encouraged
to go fast. They get the idea that Dianetics is simple and they want to
audit. The supervisor doesn't introduce complications or unusual
assignments or 'special drills' not on the checksheet. The student then
gets into auditing. He knows the course was simple and uncomplicated. He
carries this attitude into auditing and produces simple standard sessions
with good results.
The slow student is twinned with another slow student (not with the
supervisor) and if he doesn't make the grade at all he is sent to Cramming
after a period and auditing may be required. The system of senior students
auditing the newer students, together with any needed Reviews, will handle
the (b) type student (particularly if a Class VIII Case Supervisor and
Review Auditor are available). The supervisor must
260
avoid being led into giving the slow student special attention and
additional time at the expense of the majority fast students.
Supervisors are normally very hard working and conscientious. They do
an excellent job but can, in their own well intentioned desire to have all
students doing well, be misled into adding to the course, becoming
instructors instead of Supervisors, getting too involved with slow students
and thus slowing down the course as a whole and producing slow cautious
students who carry this attitude into auditing and so flunk sessions. A
supervisor doing this can make students too frightened to audit.
If the supervisor validates the fast students by quick pertinent
checkouts, keeps the. course simple and avoids all additives (like
assigning additional checkouts to the whole class, or group question and
answer periods, etc), pairs up any slow students and uses standard course
policy, Ethics and Review, he will have a fast course and will produce
competent uncomplicated. auditors who know and apply their data, like to
audit, and give good standard sessions.
Brian Livingston CS-5 for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:BL:ei.aap
261
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 AUGUST 1969
(Corrects & replaces HCO P/L of
14 May 1969-Same Title)
Dianetics Course
STARRATE CHECKOUTS
ON STANDARD DIANETICS COURSE
The following are starrate checked out on the Standard Dianetics
Course.
HCO Bulletin of 6 May 1969 "Routine 3-R Revised
(Issue 11) Engram Running by Chains"
HCO Bulletin of 23 April 1969 "Dianetics-BASIC DEFINITIONS"
HCO Bulletin of 29 April 1969 "Assessment and Interest"
HCO Bulletin of 19 May 1969 "Health Form, Use of"
HCO Bulletin of 9 May 1969 "Case Supervising Dianetics Folders"
HCO Bulletin of 28 June 1969 "How to Case Supervise Dianetics Folders"
TRs 0-4 (Practical)
TRs 10 1 - 104 (Practical)
E-Meter Drill 23 "Assessment by Tone Arm"
E-Meter Drill 26 "Differentiation between Sizes of Reads"
The balance of the checksheet is done Fast Flow by Attestation.
STARRATE CHECKOUTS
It is not required that Starrate Checkouts be done by the Course
Supervisor or Asst Supervisors. This becomes impractical as course.numbers
increase.
Students should be Starrate Checked out by students other than their
twin. The usual way this is done is for two pairs of twins to "Cross
Checkout", that is, two pairs working side by side checkout members of the
other pair. But any student other than the person's twin may give the
student a Starrate Checkout. The person giving the checkout initials and
dates the checksheet, thus attesting that he has given a proper Starrate
Checkout and that the Student has passed.
The Course Supervisor and Assistant Supervisors must constantly
observe Starrate Checkouts being given, and ensure that the standard
remains high, in full accordance with HCO P/L 14 May 69 Issue 11 (How to do
a Starrate Checkout) and HCOB I I October 1967 (Clay Table Training).
Tony Dunleavy
LRH:TD:Idm.ei.rd Plans & Training Aide
Copyright Q 1969 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
[Note: This revision corrected the date of "Health Form, Use of" from
16 April 1969, added HCO B 28 June 1969, TRs 101-104 and the last three
paragraphs. It was later cancelled by HCO P/L 31 December 1970, Standard
Twin Checkouts, in the 1970 Year Book; and 14 May 1969 was cancelled by HCO
P/L 29 July 1972 Issue II, Fast Flow in Training (which also cancelled 31
December 1970), in the 1972 Year Book.]
262
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 OCTOBER 1969
Revised and Reissued
Remimeo 10 DECEMBER 1969
BM
Franchise
The Auditor DIANETIC COURSES,
WILDCAT
Unauthorized and incompetent Dianetic courses are bound to spring up
and have already.
Policy on this is to insist they have a competent HDG to teach them.
They can send one of their number to an Sen. org. We will do an ything
possible to make it easy to train their instructor.
We will grant their students an HDC certificate of a special type on
the sworn attestation of their HDG Supervisor (who must have been
officially trained) that his student has passed an exacting examination
with a grade of 100%, has sworn to follow the Auditor's Code and has done
25 hours of auditing all well done or very well done in results according
to the pc at certificate cost.
We will make full study texts available to thern and their students.
On the other hand we control absolutely the copyrights and materials
and can enforce them.
As we are only insisting they get the straight data, it should be easy
to make such arrangements as we are very reasonable and only wish to help.
Scientology auditors are trained only by our orgs.
"Wildcat" (meaning springing up anywhere) Dianetic students will soon
realize the value of being backed up by a Scientology auditor, thus sending
students to our orgs.
Action should be taken to handle this situation wherever it occurs. We
are only seeking to protect results and the repute of Dianetics. We want
people to win and stand ready to help.
No one has to covertly teach Dianetics. We will let them do it quite
openly so long as they have their supervisor trained and use the actual
texts.
Authorized Franchises and officially registered groups teach HDC
Courses on an official basis and receive validated official certificates.
All certificates are provisional until re-examined by the Director of
Certificates and Awards of an Official org, at which. time they are stamped
"Professional". The examination charge is $15.00.
Any certificate may be withdrawn if falsely procured, for abuse or
failure to follow the Auditor's Code.
LRH:rs.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1969 Founder
[Note: This revision added the last three paragraphs and changed the
fourth paragraph from "We will grant their students HDC certs on their
attest at certificate cost (S2.50)" to the above.]
263
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
20 Buckingham Street, London W.C.2, England
Executives in Washington and London:
Mary Sue; Dick Steves, Julia Lewis; Don Breeding, Jack Parkhouse.
THE SUMMARY OF A BULLETIN FROM THE ACADEMY IN WASHINGTON D.C.
CONCERNING TRAINING
Scientology organizations have recently surveyed and re-studied
training and its results in the light of the best benefits for the student,
the public and the organizations themselves, therefore the following
programs are being instigated, as they prove feasible. Training is
classified and is being enfranchised along the following lines:
FIRSTLEVEL: FREE COURSE
This level of training is performed by Auditors throughout the world
and even by the organizations themselves. It consists of a one or two-week
free course (depending on whether or not it's given five times a week or
three times a week) covering the most elementary principles which general
groups can agree with in Scientology. The total aim of this course is to
get people who are working in and are interested in Scientology to carry
forward more of Scientology programs. This is a very important course both
for individuals and the organization, but it's mainly important to the
general public. It is not the purpose of this course to teach even a tenth
of what appears in "Scientology: The Fundamentals of Thought". The purpose
is to take people who have or have not heard of Scientology and give them
their first real reality on the subject by taking some of the most
elementary but far-reaching principles and getting them to examine the
principles and finally come to an agreement concerning them. No certificate
is awarded on this course.
SECOND COURSE: ADVANCED COURSE
This course is given for a fee and consists of twenty hours or more
instruction, advancing even further into Scientology and teaching in
particular two subjects, ten hours of instruction at least being devoted to
each. These instructions cover exactly the first ten hour period of the
Advanced Course: the communication formula and its use; and the second
period of at least ten hours: the tone scale. These two subjects are taught-
each an equal number of hours so that people can be admitted to an Advanced
Course at its mid point. Here again there's no effort to teach auditing but
only the use and application of the communication formula and the tone
scale. Two books exist for this subject. One is "Dianetics 1955!" which
covers the communication formula, and "Science of Survival" which covers at
least the elementary tone scale and what can be expected from it. These are
the two text books of this particular course. Care must be taken in this
course that the student is not overwhelmed and confused but is actually
given a few more key stable data with which he can work in line. This
course does not intend to make an auditor, there is no certificate granted
for this course.
THIRD CO UR SE: ELEMENTARY SCIENTOLOGIST
This course teaches auditing of individuals and groups and is in
actuality a very complete course on the subject of Scientology. It takes up
1956 HCA tapes, it takes up the various text books and it teaches
individual and group processing and teaches as well the handling of
organizations and personnel in them. It is probable that this course would
cost about $125 or at least f 35. This course requires a right to train
from the Founding Church or the HASI. It ends with a certificate from the
Central Organizations, the exact title of this auditor has not been
established, but the title would mean Elementary Scientologist. The
certificate is signed by the Training Auditor who did the actual training
and by the secretary of the organization issuing the certificate. The title
of this course would not be an HCA Course even though HCA tapes are used
and the certificate given would not be Hubbard Certified Auditor or Hubbard
Professional Auditor. As it is to this level that most rights to train are
directing themselves and as they are cramped by having to charge so much
money and as the examination has occasioned so much difficulty, it is
thought to be helpful to Auditors "training in the field" to have this
course to teach.
FOURTH COURSE: HUBBARD CERTIFIED AUDITOR
This course will be taught by the Central Organizations only. The
British
264
equivalent would be Hubbard Professional Auditor. According to present
planning this course would require as its fundamental the requisite
certification by a field training auditor either in day or night school,
probably most effectively the latter and would apply some of what had been
paid on an elementary course to the fee in the Central Organization as a
reduction. In other words it would not only be a requisite in having
training elsewhere but also the training elsewhere would carry with it a
reduction. That this is only taught by the Central Organizations does not
mean the Central Organizations would not also teach an Elementary
Scientologist Course. A considerable rigor of training would be entered in
to the Central Organizations and the certificate of HCA or HPA would be
awarded by examination only.
FIFTH CO UR SE: HUBBARD ADVANCED AUDITOR (B.SCN. ABROAD) ,
This course would be an extended Advanced Course which would more
closely take up the entire body of theory and information of Scientology
and which would improve' the Auditor's case level and operational ability.
The certificate of Hubbard Advanced Auditor (Bachelor of Scientology
abroad) would be awarded at course completion by reason of successful
examination.
SIXTH COURSE: HUBBARD GRADUATE AUDITOR (D.SCN. ABROAD)
This course would be taught as an Advanced Clinical Unit, preferably
by L.R.H. only. It would consists of the equivalent of a three-week
intensive, two weeks of high school indoctrination so as to be able to cope
with any kind of a case and a week of coaching on processes. This is
actually a new type of Advanced Clinical Course only so far as its actual
pattern is concerned. It would be instructed by L.R.H. At the end of course
by examination the certificate of Hubbard Graduate Auditor or Doctor of
Scientology abroad, would be issued.
SEVENTHCOURSE: ORGANIZATIONAL INTERNSHIP
This course would be actually an internship and would be available in
the several ways as follows:
(a) TYPE A INTERNSHIP
The Central Organization chooses amongst the HPAs or HCAs graduating,
extremely likely students and offers them a year's internship to be
performed in the various organizational units, auditing, instructing and
administrating so as to completely familiarize the student with the various
workings of the organization (which are sufficiently complex and are a
sufficiently large study at this time that very few people understand them
who are not working with the organizations themselves). The student would
sign a contract paying a certain sum of money by the contract to the
organization for the year's internship. A Type A Internship would however
give the student several weeks, of probationary employment at a rather low
wage and the remainder of the year employment at a reasonably good wage,
only less than that of an equivalent staff member. At the end of his year's
training he is given a certificate as a Staff Auditor and with that title,
which attests the fact that he has served for a year within the
organization in the capacity of a Professional Auditor. The Type A
Internship and no other internship would influence earlier training fees
contracted. By issuing such internships the organization would be sure that
the individual then released into the field would be able to carry on
independently and would be able to do extremely well as his auditing would
be excellent. The reason of being entered on an internship would not bring
about any other degree and these would have to be studied for as in an ACC,
deducting only such time of study from the year, but the fees for any
additional courses would have to be paid.
(b) TYPE B INTERNSHIP
A Type B Internship would be solicited by students, not offered by the
organization. It would consist of the payment of a fee to the organization
for a year's additional training in the organization itself and would
follow more or less the same pattern as a Type A Internship, with the
exception that the Type B Intern would not be on the pay roll, All of his
activities would be conducted on a purely self-supporting basis. He would
pay the fee to the organization for this work and training. At the end of
that time he too would be issued a certificate as Staff Auditor of the
organization. Both* the Type A Internship and the Type B Internship
certificates would be signed by the Director of Training and Director of
Processing and by L.R.H.
265
(c) TYPECINTERNSHIP
This Internship would be available to HCAs determining to work with
Staff Auditors in the field. In addition to his HCA training he would then
have a year's training working in the offices of other auditors. The
initiation of a Type C Internship would be totally in the hands of field
auditors and the arrangements they would make would be completely
independent of the Central Organization. The only certificate authorized
for a Type C Internship would be an endorsement on the HCA or HPA
certificate by the Central Organization that this auditor had worked for
one year with a field auditor under internship.
Concerning all Internships, credit for the Internship fee would be no
great liability to the organization since people who will get around the
organizations for a year actively engaged in handling the fundamental
problems of the organizations of Scientology are usually in their later
personal practices quite well off. No shorter period than one year should
be tolerated. The Intern in leaving the organization or in committing
sufficient breaches of the Code of a Scientologist to occasion his
dismissal from the organization would not be absolved from his Internship
contract and the contract should be so written. When he has passed his
probationary period of the first few weeks and has actually been accepted
on a full internship basis he is fully committed to his Internship
contract. Up until that time his dismissal or relief from Internship would
absolve him of the contract. The grade of permanent staff would therefore
have to be designated. This exists in fact at this time. There are auditors
who prefer the companionship and team-work of the organizations to
individual practice and these as Instructors and Staff Auditors are the
backbone of the organization. They would therefore have to be specially
designated as permanent staff and would receive a higher salary than other
auditors in the organization-by which is meant permanent interns Type A.
This training plan is built out of experience and although some fault
may be found with it in various places it is discovered that a high fee
long duration HCA course works a considerable hardship on a field auditor.
He does not actually profit from it. He could however profit from a low fee
evening or even day-course without the added complexities of Central
Organization examination, checking states of case and the randomity which
has occasionally arisen. It is thought that a person with the right to
train would be able to support himself much better financially at the lower
fee he would rather charge and without having the duress put upon him to do
the same amount of work with the student as would be required in an HCA.
Furthermore this type of training could be made available in other parts of
the world than the United States. The Central Organization could actively
support these rights to train by demanding that training be done to some
degree in the field as a requisite to Central Organization courses. This
would permit the Central Organization to turn out a better grade of HCA in
the long run and would actually put a lot of auditors into action
throughout the country who would not then, if their work was not of the
highest possible calibre, bring embarrassment to auditors in the field who
are very busy in numerous directions and do not complete training to the
degree that the Central Organization insists on. One of the reasons this
third course is instigated is to permit the auditor with the right to train
to swell his numbers of students and to relieve hirn of the rather heavy
expense connected with an arduous complete auditor course and permitting
him to exist without putting into rivalry with himself a number of people
who have more or less the same degree he has, a point which has lately been
found quite important in large cities. A new training contract could be
entered into with the Central Organizations which obviated the irksome
"Bond-note" and the duress which has occurred because of the anxiety of the
Central Organization to keep up the quality or raise the quality as high as
possible of the HCA or HPA certificate. This arrangement would not
influence certificates issued ex post facto, but would influence all future
certificates. Areas of training could be assigned to people with the right
to train. It has been discovered that people who take the Free Course and
-the Advanced Course then get ready for a third course, and unless this
course is available they are dead-ended since these are business people who
must take their training at night and it is not usually possible for them
to take a local course of the vigor of HCA, nevertheless they want to
become auditors and professional Scientologists and every effort should be
made to encourage them. At the same time, since every auditor who has a
right to train has been trained by the Central Organizations, his own
dominance in his area to some degree depends upon his own level of
certification by the Central Organization and he should not be permitted to
destroy his dominance in his own area by creating equal grades, or grades
which even come within the scope of Central Organization certificates since
the public itself is liable to consider this an equal grade. This is
actually antipathetic to the general customs of man, which is why it has
not worked. The basic error in all these rights to train was the people
were being given the right by the Central
266
Organization to create at the same level of operation as themselves
and a considerable hardship resulted since their own superiority in their
own areas then became rivalled and randomity ensued.
It is my recommendation to various staff and executives that this be
taken up both in Washington and London, looked over very carefully, and a
thorough paper be prepared and issued on the subject giving in addition the
exact cost, except in the case of the Elementary Scientologist where the
fee should be arranged in the area by the individual auditor doing the
training. He should not be limited in his charges or made to charge
excessively.
Completely aside from the actual studies which have been made of the
subject utilizing the data accumulated during the last six years, we have
at this time another paralleling program of some interest in the Central
Organizations. This, just amongst ourselves, consists of processing people
up to a point of where they can handle other people. We have accomplished
this now. It is a fact, and as we ourselves advance in the organization in
this capability we then of course then extend this capability outwards,
therefore we will have to be thinking in terms of seniorities of
certificates and training in order to back up this basic program. The basic
program of course consists of demanding that everybody that we keep in good
circulation and that we help along, have enough processing on the current
processes to permit him to control rather easily individuals and groups.
This of course going out as the waves in a pool into which a stone is
dropped would mean that our organizations would become dominant on earth.
It might not even take very long to accomplish this program. In working
with this program we of course must have an equivalent series of training
staffs.
One further note on Elementary Scientologist. We would require this
certificate and successful completion of a further course above as a pre-
requisite to Ministerial ordination by the field churches. They are going
to ordain people anyway sooner or later and we prefer of course that they
ordain at HCA or HPA level, but they can ordain at the Elementary
Scientologist level, but we require an HCA ordination and therefore we
have. a much higher grade of ordination and it makes the ministers which we
train dominant in the field.
It is my suggestion that for their own good, people with rights to
train and other people who'd like to have rights to train, particularly in
the British Isles and in places in America where there is very little
training, that this third Elementary Scientologist Course be sold. 1 do not
think it would be wise to undertake in the future HCA training in any
branch office of the organization, such as New York or Dublin. 1 think it
should be adequate that those offices simply run a third level course. They
would find many more candidates since they would not have to charge as much
money and these offices are not equipped to train at HCA the way we're
training now.
One of the primary factors which makes this an urgency and gives us a
priority in putting it in through the works is the use of a double-type of
training which we're doing now in the Central Organization where we
indoctrinate for two or three weeks and even process before we train.
Nobody can afford to do this in the field. The cost of it is very high,
consequently nobody will do it in the field. Therefore an HCA course and an
HPA course will become something entirely different.
There is no reason under this why British auditors in good repute with
the organization could not undertake evening courses for people in their
area in order to fit students of theirs for using Scientology in industry
and personnel posts and so forth. The title of the grade is important since
it must be good enough to make the field auditor capable of selling it and
it must not be so good that it devaluates a Central Organization
certificate-must hang in that middle-ground.
Another factor which occasions this release to executive staff and
interested persons is that I am not willing that auditors who are poorly
trained and in terrible condition longer use Hubbard Certified Auditor when
I have not even seen them or checked them. We're getting sufficiently big
that I realize with a shock that I have Central Organization HCAs around
that 1 have not even met and this is a peculiar state of affairs. We have
to have some way of identifying the arduous training which our people
receive because we are about to make it about ten times as arduous as
anybody in the field would oven dream of.
Lot's put this one into operation.
LRH:re.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Dict'd 12.9,S6
Typed 19.9.S6
267
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 MAY 1957
(Issued at Washington)
To All Staff
TRAINING-WHAT IT IS TODAY
HOW WE TELL PEOPLE ABOUT IT
In London I made up a chart of training for the Comm Course (former
Indoc) and HPA/HCA.
This course is plotted exactly on eight weeks including an intensive
by a graduating student upon an incoming student.
The stable datum of all training now is:
"A student is graduated when his training level is such that he could
be entrusted with an HGC preclear."
Thus examination is rendered much easier and stable.
HPA/HCA Training requisites stress:
I . Synopsis of A important Dianetic and Scientology Books and a
synopsis of tapes heard.
2. Profile student achieved when auditing an incomer.
3. Memorized Axioms.
4. Five levels of Indoe.
5. Long form CCH.
6. Good attendance record.
7. Ability to Group Audit.
8. The Codes down pat.
That is more or less it. The Chart is intensely specific.
Paramount in all our training are:
I . To get our graduating students in good shape; and
2. To make sure our incoming students are given a good week
intensive by the graduating student before the newcomer enters Comm Course.
Why? Because Comm Course can reduce havingness and we want our new Comm
Course student to learn, not agonize.
Training today can be pretty smooth.
But be alert here. We've changed type of training from emphasis on
Classroom to emphasis on Student. "Academy" means coaching.
In Public representation of Washington and London schools stress that
eight weeks of personal individual attention can make a Scientologist and a
good one and that this is why the cost is what it is. This training is the
best on Earth for living in general as well as doing Scientology. "It's
personal. It's for you. It's good. Only those who have it can Survive."
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:md.cden
268
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
(Issued at Washington DC)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I OCTOBER 1958
Full Distribution
Not Confidential
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
We must now recognize that we are training Earth's mental-spiritual
practitioners of tomorrow. Therefore:
Hereinafter, all examinations for certificates will be conducted by
HCO Boards of Review only.
General Qualifications and prerequisites for all certificates and
degrees worldwide: No candidate for enrollment or examination may be
disbarred by reason of race, colour, creed, nationality, ideology, age,
mental condition, language, former training or social condition.
Qualifications for HPA/HCA
One year minimum in training before certificate may be issued,
although examination may be within that period.
At least 8 weeks spent iri an Academy of Scientology with creditable
grades.
Actual evidence of skill in handling Formal Auditing (TRs 0 to 5).
Actual evidence of skill in handling Tone 40 Auditing (TRs 6 to 9).
Verbatim knowledge and understanding of: The Auditor's Code The Pre-
Logics The Logics of Dianetics The Axioms of Dianetics
Mental Anatomy: Definitions and examples of each of the following:
LOCKS, SECONDARY, ENGRAM, CHAIN, TIME TRACK, CIRCUIT, MACHINERY, VALENCE,
OCCLUSIONS, MOCK UP, THE PARTS OF LIVINGNESS.
Manifestations: Definitions and examples of each of the following:
Overt-Act-Motivator Sequence, DED-DEDEX, Problems, computations, past
lives, cognitions, oc~mm lags, and when they are over, introversion,
extroversion, ARC, remedy of ARC breaks.
The candidate must demonstrate Ids ability to:
(No E-Meter work of any kind is done or required in an HPA/HCA
course.) Run Factual Havingness
Run an engram
Find and run a past death Find and run a secondary Run ARC Straight
Wire
Handle difficulties with old style straight wire Run Remedy of
Havingness
269
Handle an Assist
Locational Processing
8-C
Op Pro by Dup, Old Style
No other processes are required or taught as these are quite adequate.
Texts:
Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, Science of Survival,
Self Analysis and Advanced Procedure and Axioms.
The following Scales must be known and examples must be provided:
ARC Tone Scale
Effect Scale
Know to Mystery Scale
Evidence of having read and understood Dianetics: The Modern Science
of Mental Health, Science of Survival, Self Analysis and Advanced Procedure
and Axioms must be given.
After a set date of enrollment (October 15, 1958) no examination
exceptions will be made. Students whose enrollment date is prior to October
15, 1958 will be the same as before.
Three Formal case history forms giving evidence of having helped three
persons with Dianetics and Scientology.
An HPA/HCA student must present evidence of having had 5 hours of Op
Pro by Dup Old Style run on him without interruption.
Qualifications for HCS/BScn
(which are equivalent levels)
Certificate to be issued no earlier than one year from date of
enrollment in HCS/BScn course (Effective after October 15, 1958).
Successful attendance of at least 5 weeks of courses at an Academy of
Scientology.
A review examination guaranteeing ability in TRs 0 to 9.
Verbatim knowledge of: The Axioms of Scientology
Demonstration and Evidence of complete conversance with:
The Handbook for Preclears Scientology 8-80 Scientology 8-8008 The
Creation of Human Ability
Demonstration of excellent knowledge of CCH 0 to CCH 4.
Demonstration of good knowledge of and handling of an E-Meter.
Demonstration of knowledge of the six types of processes: I . Starting-
Ending Session 2. Control Processes 3. Duplication Processes 4. Subjective
Processes 5. Objective Processes 6. Straight Wire Processes
Some knowledge of all the R-I and R-2 processes of The Creation of
Human Ability.
270
Demonstration and knowledge of Creative Processing.
Demonstration and knowledge of the basic clearing processes given in
Clear Procedure, Issue One, and a concentration on this clear procedure and
no other later procedure as this clears 50% of the preclears easily so long
as one uses simple geometric forms, particularly simple spheres, in Step 6.
Three Formal case history forms giving evidence of having helped three
persons with Scientology (in addition to HCA/HPA required cases).
Qualifications for 1ICS/DScn
(effective October 15, 1958)
Certificate may not be issued for one year after date of application
for an ACC.
A review examination of TRs 0 to 9 requiring excellence in handling
them.
Demonstrate how to produce the 5 manifestations of an E-Meter and
handle an E-Meter in auditing.
A review examination of the whole of the above requirements for
HCA/HPA and HCS/BScn. (A passing grade on this section will be 50% until
October 15, 1961 when a grade of 75% will be required.)
The knowledge and ability to do group auditing.
Demonstration of a full and complete knowledge of ACC Procedure of the
Sth London ACC.
Knowledge of the basic buttons taught in the 20th ACC US and their
use.
Attendance at an Academy ACC with a course completion and a passing
grade. One or more ACCs may be attended, only one need to have been
completed and passed.
A knowledge of hypnotism.
A knowledge of the history of religion and psychotherapy.
Evidence of having cleared one person and the full case history
submitted as well as the Formal Case Report.
Evidence of having greatly helped two persons with auditing with
Formal Case History.
A thesis covering an application of Scientology to a field of
endeavour.
Membership in the HASI.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rs.rd
(Note: Per HCOB 9 October 1958, in Qualifications for HPAIHCA,
Advanced Procedure and Axioms was added to the list of texts, and also
replaced Handbook for Preclears two paragraphs later.]
271
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
(Issued at Washington D.C.)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 OCTOBER 195 52
Worldwide Distribution and Application
SALE AND CONDUCT OF ACADEMY COURSES
(Refer to HCO POLICY LETTER OF I October 1958)
As of October 15, 1958, effective date, the circumstances and
enrollment procedures of courses are changed worldwide.
While the administration must yet be set up the fact and
advertisements exist as of October 15, 1958. Even if it isn't done don't
put anybody on wait while we scramble. Sign them up and somehow deliver.
Basically: A student may enroll for a course as before but he must
understand it will require a year from enrollment date to get his
certificate because of Extension Work. We then have two phases of training:
Extension Work done at home, and Class work done at the Academy. His course
in the Academy is still 8 weeks for HCA/HPA, London, 5 weeks for HCS/BScn,
London, 6 weeks for HGS/DScn, London. He may do these weeks at once but he
has other work to do as well. He is enrolled for'a one-year course in each
certificate status. He should not be discouraged by confronting him with
this. It does not matter when he takes his time in the Academy so long as
he does it. There are written work, exercises and reports on cases to be
done before his final exam. It has always taken a year, you can say, to get
any actual certificate. We are just now making a reality of it. He can
audit people or do anything else he wants, but the time is one year from
enrollment to certificate in any grade. He could take all Academy work for
all three grades in 5 months all jammed up but he'll still have to complete
his first year to get his first certificate. This is no gyp school. It
takes three years to get the top rating and more time is spent on the mind
and thetan in those three years than in 15 years of psychology or
psychiatry. We're taking over the fields of the mind and spirit on Earth.
Our people have to be good. Any applicant will agree to that.
EXTENSION COURSES
Anyone may enroll in an Academy course to HCA/HPA for f 2.0.0 or
$5.00. He has to buy his texts (we give away no more texts after October
15, 1958 and allow only membership discount if he is a member). The
enrollment is for one year. Any answer to his enrollment is to send him
C.O.D. (permission to do so must be on the blank he sends in-blank to be in
Certainty) a "Dianetics: Modern Science of Mental Health", hard cover.
(Blank must also be able to say he already has it if he does.) He is sent
directly by first-class mail his first lessons. Even if he has been in
Academy he does these. They are printed lessons he has to fill out. He
furnishes the envelopes and stamps. The lessons are uniformly simple. One
is due back each week. The page is perforated at the bottom so a lower
strip may be torn off by the Extension Course Director, written on and
returned by first-class mail in an envelope. The student gets a nudging
card if he fails to send in a lesson. These lessons are a chapter by
chapter coverage of Dianetics: Modern Science of Mental Health only. They
require mainly agreement. The student can go no further than Dianetics:
Modern Science of Mental Health data (no practice) when we find it
necessary to bring him in for his 8 weeks (preferable) or at least a Comm
Course. Given his Comm Course, his next lessons still apply to Dianetics:
Modern Science of Mental Health but now they are auditing practice lessons.
We make him find locks, secondaries, engrams in several people. Then we
bring him back for more training or (if he took his 8 weeks) we have him
audit things out of people-locks, engrams, secondaries. We have additional
lessons covering the remaining texts. The Addressograph Section takes these
students' names and addresses and keeps the list up to date. Sets of
envelopes, cards for file for lessons (that can be used as postal cards but
are not stamped) for each week are run off and refiled as lessons appear
from student (leaving the delinquents to be reminded by simply mailing the
card).
The whole of this or any extension course is crisp comm line and
accurate
272
administration. It is simple if it is prompt and neat. The whole
project can be nicely ruined by poor administration on this. The quality of
lessons should be good but are secondary to good thorough administration.
People would always rather get a new theory or a dizzy plan rather than
face these vital pieces of Mest and a systematic handling of them. Cards
and file drawers are obviously vicious.
A plan of the course and how to do it is sent with the enrollment
reply, plus an enrollment card he can show his friends to explain why he
wants to practice on them.
Similar texts and enrollment measures are taken for the HCS/BScn
course, and the HGS/DScn.
The texts for each of these courses are listed in HCO POLICY LETTER OF
October 1, 1958. No other textual or factual material is to be used and no
further course booklets or pamphlets are necessary.
What is necessary:
Lesson tablets, in glued-together sheets like a writing tablet, 25
lessons to a tablet, each sheet being its own lesson. The sheet is
perforated across the last 5th of the page. The student's name, current
address, course, and answers, are all written by the student. The Extension
Course Director writes any comment or grade on the bottom slip, tears it
off and sends it back to the student. If no lesson came, a card goes to
student reminding him. When it comes time for the student to come in for
his course he comes in, pays for the week or weeks he takes, goes home,
gets more work to do, is finally examined (either at home or at Academy
[two different exams]) and when he passes he promptly gets his certificate.
This is true for all three courses.
Certainty must at once carry ads and continue to carry ads for
"Academy Enrollment-one year, do work at Academy and at home-Enroll now, f
2.0.0, receive your first lessons." An enrollment blank, that with f 2.0.0
enrolls him must always be part of the ad.
The idea of field training plus Academy training for a certificate and
the fact of 3 years of training to the top will appeal.
Academy courses must be carefully geared to HCO POLICY LETTER OF October 1,
1958. This scramble to "get the newest learned first" is giving us training
disasters. Of course, the student would prefer facing a thought or theory
or a quick think process to facing real live engrams, secondaries, and
banks. So we don't train them well. They're not like 1950 Dianetic auditors-
they're flinching these days.
And who said you couldn't clear people by running engrams? You
couldn't if you had no TRs and therefore ragged auditing and ARC breaks.
Any time you write or say Dianetics; today, define it-"Dianetics, that
part of Scientology which stresses mental anatomy." That swings people into
Scientology before they think about it. They are not then surprised to hear
from the Academy of Scientology about Dianetics.
"A minister has to know mental anatomy before he can know the spirit
... .. The brain forms no part of the study of Dianetics," are two more
lines that must be gotten about even if only as bottom lines on a Certainty
or Ability page.
This programme of 3 years training by I year stages is now begun.
We'll just have to commit ourselves to it and cope with it and have it
wheeling before the paper-back Dianetics: Modern Science of Mental Health
gets in the drugstores next spring. So here we go.
Who activates all this? Why,.you do, of course.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:md.rs.rd
273
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
Issued at Washington
Distribution: HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 DECEMBER 1958
AllActivities
ACADEMY TRAINING CURRICULUM & EXAMINATION
Supersedes all earlier Theory & Practice Releases
The training of HPAs and HCAs must include the following skills. HCO
Bds of Review, by this directive will examine only on these skills and
texts:
Comm Course, TR 0 to 4 Old Style (as given in TR Manuals and
bulletins), with TR SN substituted for all earlier TR 5 drills.
Upper Indoc TR 6-9 Old Style (original, as given in TR Manuals and
bulletins).
The above must be done thoroughly and well and will be examined
rigorously by HCO Bds of Review. If flunked in any case no further exam is
given or will be given for 120 days for any certificate (HAS being exempt
from examination except by instructor or field auditor).
Theory & Practice Basic theory is more or less covered by Extension
Course but may be examined on these texts:
Dianetics: Modern Science of Mental Health
Science of Survival
Advanced Procedure & Axioms
Scientology- Fundamentals of Thought
TECHNIQUES
The HCA/HPA must know two types of auditing:
Tone 40 Style Formal Auditing Style.
He must know the difference and not cross them. (T-40 is taught in
Upper Indoc, Formal is taught in Comm Course.)
He must know these processes:
Tone40 CCH I
CCH 2
CCH 3
CCH 4
and Formal Straight Wire
S-C-S
Factual Havingness (3 questions)
What can you confront?
You make a picture for which you can be wholly responsible.
Help
Step 6 (and its dangers)
BScn/HCS training and examination includes all materials on Clear
Procedure and ACC Clear Procedure Fall 1958, plus Scientology 8-8008 and
Creation of Human Ability and E-Meters, and must be able to audit all
processes in ACC Clear Procedure Fall 1958, including CCH 0. He must be
able to do a full track Scout.
DScn/HGS: Engram Auditing and other materials as will be prescribed.
Note HCO Secretaries everywhere, please assist Academies to hold to
standard Technology as above and assist where possible with publications.
Note: HCO Bds of Review: Examine only on the above henceforth. This is
a finalized version since Clears can be made by HPAs/HCAs now as well as
BScns and DScns with these processes.
[See also HCO B 6 January 1959, page
277.1
L. RON HUBBARD
274
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington, D.C.
DofT HCO BULLETIN OF 16 DECEMBER 1958
Acad Admin
Ext Course Dir
Acad Insts
D of P
Processing Admin
HCO Bd of Review
ACC Worldwide Inst
HCO
EXTENSION COURSE CURRICULUM
The Extension Course for HCAIHPA is outlined as follows:
Section A - I tablet
Lessons IA to 20A, eight questions each lesson: Dianetics, Modern
Science of Mental Health, entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section B - 1 tablet
Lessons I B to 20B, eight questions each lesson, Science of Survival,
entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section C - I tablet
Lessons I C to 20C, eight questions each lesson. Advanced Procedure
and Axioms, entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section D - I tablet
Lessons ID to 20D, eight questions each lesson. Scientology:
Fundamentals of Thought, entire book covered in 160 questions.
The Extension Course for HCSIBScn is outlined as follows:
Section E - I tablet
Lessons I E to 20E, eight questions each lesson. The Hubbard
Electrometer and Electropsychometric Auditing, entire subject covered in
160 questions, theory and practice.
Section F - I tablet
Lessons IF to 20F, eight questions each lesson, Scientology: 8-8008,
entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section G - I tablet
Lessons I G to 20G, eight questions each lesson, The Creation of Human
Ability, entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section H - I tablet
Lessons IH to 20H, eight questions each lesson. Various Clear
Procedures from various texts, entire subject covered in 160 questions.
The Extension Course for DScnlHGS is outlined as follows:
Section J - 1 tablet
Lessons I J to 20J, eight questions per lesson. All TR Drills, entire
subject covered in 160 lessons (text not yet published).
Section K - I tablet
Lessons I K to 20K, eight questions per lesson, Track Scouting (text
not yet published). Entire subject covered in 160 questions.
Section L - I tablet
Lessons I L to 20L, eight questions per lesson, Scientology
Organizations, entire subject covered in 160 questions.
Section M - I tablet
Not outlined.
The following activities are responsible for submitting questions to
be made into printed lessons:
275
Section A Academy DC
Section B - Academy London
Section C - HCO Bd of Review DC
Section D - HCO Bd of Review London
Section E - HGC Washington DC
Section F - HGC London
Section G - Academy London
Section H - HCO Washington DC
Section J - ACC Worldwide Instructor
Section K - ACC Worldwide Instructor
When you have completed your section, please send the questions
complete to HCO for forwarding to me.
This is the fastest way I know to get the Extension Course completed.
I have only its format and a DMSMH outline at this moment. Would you do
this for me?
HOW TO WRITE AN EXTENSION COURSE SECTION
An Extension Course Section consists of a textbook and a series of
lessons done on a glued-top tablet, one sheet per lesson, eight questions
or exercises per lesson. The questions are consecutively numbered from 1 to
160 with the Identifying letter on each number. Example: Section B, third
question, is 3B. The name of the textbook but not its page numbers, is
carried on every lesson page, not each question.
We only want the questions for the section, not the printed complete
product.
The questions concern only vital definitions needed for a knowledge of
the subject and examples of the use and meaning.
To do a course, use the following:
I . Make a list of all vital definitions used in the text specified on
the subject. These should number around eighty so pare or expand the list
until it is composed of eighty vital words or phrases or objects:
Use the definition for odd numbered question&
Demand an explanation, an example, a discovery from real life, a
consequence, etc, of the definition as the following even-numbered
question.
The Extension Course should give the taker a passing knowledge of
Dianetics and Scientology terminology phenomena and parts. This is its goal
and purpose. The reasoning or examples in a text are considered secondary,
for the purposes of the course, to precision definitions.
The Extension Course Student should finish the course with the feeling
he is dealing with a precision science, composed of identifiable parts.
Example (not necessary to use):
Question 5A: What is a reactive mind?
Question 6A: Give something out of your own experience that would
illustrate a reactive mind at work.
The main tasks imposed here are (1) To summarize the important
definitions and parts of Dianetics and Scientology from a text and (2) Ask
interestingly for an application to life.
Now you see why I want your swift help in writingit. It would take one
person months. Your contribution, as assigned in this bulletin, will speed
it up by months.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRI1:md.rd
Distribution:
Not to be stencilled in London (their copies being sent direct from
DC).
Info copies rig to Melbourne, SA, and all field offices, via HCos;
3 copies-1 E0i HCO, 1 to D of T, 1 to D of P.
276
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C,
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 JANUARY 1959
Full Distribution
(CHANGE OF HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 DECEMBER 1958)
Step 6 is deleted from HCA/HPA Curriculum and added to HCS/BScn
section.
No E-Meter is used or taught in HCA/HPA courses. Comm lag is taught
instead.
L RON HUBBARD
LRH:gn.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HASI POLICY LETTER OF 19 JANUARY 1959
EXTRA WEEKS ON HPA COURSE
The following is policy in relation to students who could not make the
grade in the eight weeks HPA Course:
If the course was paid in whole, in advance, the student is entitled
to free weeks to finish his training.
If he has not paid in advance he is only permitted eight weeks.
Extra weeks will cost f.7.1 0. 0 per week.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mp.vmm.cden
277
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I MAY 1959
(Convert into a Sec'l ED)
, HPA/BSCN "RETREADS"
There is no such thing as an HPA/BScn retread fee.
If an HPA wants to retread to new HPA course, he can pay the usual
price per week for training (about 15 gns).
I know there is now a mish-mash in training because of a new course
more basic than old courses. We'll just have to cope.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:cden Copyright Q 1959
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 AUGUST 1959
CenO
STUDENTS ATTENDING COURSES
Students are allowed to do Extension Courses and attend another
Central Organisation for their actual training if this be more convenient.
Normally students would get their Extension Course material from the
nearest Central Organisation, and would attend the course there.
HCO Secretary WW
NW:brb.gh.rd
278
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 AUGUST 1959
CenOCon
CERTIFICATIONS
In order to get an HPA/HCA or BScn/HCS Certificate, it is not
necessary to wait
one year.
It is necessary, however, that the student be fully trained and have
all Extension
Course work completed and corrected.
NW:brb.rd HCO Secretary WW
by L Ron Hubbard
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 'Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCOTOLICY LETTER OF 22 FEBRUARY 1960
(Reissued from Sthil)
CenOCon
HCO Board of Review
HPA QUALIFICATIONS
Policy states that an HPA/HCA certificate may not be awarded until all
requirements including Extension Course, are completed.
However, students who have completed the academy course and have
graduated successfully andhave passed the HCO Board of Review examination
are in fact entitled to start practising professionally even though they
may not have completed the Extension Course work.
Sometimes also a student may have passed all the requirements and yet
may not be in possession of a certificate because he has not completed
paying for the course.
In all such cases, provided that the HCO Board of Review is satisfied
that the student is fully competent to start practising professionally, the
student should be given a letter of Certificate, Pending by the HCO Board
of Review. This letter would give the student a grace period to complete
his qualifications, say 6 or 8 months, and would state that he is entitled
to audit professionally during this period. Each letter would be dated and
would state the limit of the grace period, set according to the
individual's circumstances.
This procedure would regularize the position of the new auditor who is
waiting for his certificate, and will also. encourage the individual
concerned to complete his
requirements, including paying off his account.
Peter Hemery
LRH:js.mm.eden HCO Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
279
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF I APRIL 1960
BPI
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
HUBBARD APPRENTICE SCIENTOLOGIST
Have all present lifetime overts and withholds cleared and taken
responsibility for. Have done the same with one other person. Account paid
in full for HAS course. Any infraction theses completed. HCO Board of
Review will be the authority on the overt/withholds requirement and this
must be cleared through HCO Board of Review. This applied only to Academy
HAS.
HPA/HCA
HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR/HUBBARD CERTIFIED -AUDITOR
8 weeks of training, all passed. 8 weekly reports submitted. Synopsis
of Dianetics '55. Account paid in full for HCA course. International
Membership in force. HCA Extension Course completed, Any infraction theses
completed. The HCA examination passed-this consists of examination of the
following: Verbatim knowledge and understanding of the Codes, (Auditor's
and Scientologist's), Axioms of Scientology, Pre-Logics and Logics (this
includes footnotes), Scales and definitions. Ability to open and close
sessions; to handle ARC breaks and pe originations; usage of CCH processes
1-4 smoothly and well; usage of the Hubbard Electrometer (E-Meter).
Your case level must be high enough to be entrusted with a pc (this is
as per the APA and IQ test as well as personal inspection by HCO Board of
Review).
Three case histories of pcs audited to state of release, after
training at the Academy. Release: a case on which all the charge of current
lifetime overts and withholds has been audited off and taken responsibility
for.
Ability to run PE and HAS Co-audit Course.
Ability to recognize and produce'four basic needle reactions on E-
Meter. Ability to assess a case with an E-Meter (this is very important).
HCO Board of Review is the certifying authority.
B.SCN/HCS
BACHELOR OF SCIENTOLOGY/HUBBARD CLEARING SCIENTOLOGIST
6 weeks of training, all passed. 6 weeks' reports submitted. B.Son/HCS
Extension Course requirements completed. Account for B.Scn/HCS Course paid
in full. B.Scn1HCS Examination passed. Have an HPA/HCA certificate
International Membership in force. Any infraction theses completed.
The student must be a good enough auditor that he is employable at the
Hubbard Guidance Center (this includes own case level, as in HPA/HCA
requirements). The student must be able to clear individual pcs. The
students must be able to use the E-Meter excellently.
A time limit for completion of HCA/HPA and B.Scn/HCS certificates has
been set. It is twelve months from the end of Academy training to HCA/HPA
HCS/B.Scn standard.
This is effective on all HCA/HPA B.Sen students finishing their
Academy training after 5th March 1960.
280
Those students who have completed their HCA/HPA or B.Scn/HCS training
on or before the Sth March, 1960, to be given a twelve month grace period
in which to complete all requirements; this is to end on 4th March, 1961,
with the financial requirement -to be as other requirements, or the date
due of the note, whichever is the later. It is also proposed that a student
shall not be penalized for enthusiasm and desire to advance in Scientology
and that with this in mind, if the student completes Academy training to
HCS standard within six (6) months of completion of the HCA training, he
will have a maximum time limit for completion of both certificate
requirements of 24 months, dated from the completion of the HCA course
Academy training. In the event of the student completing HCS training
before having completed the HCA, as has occurred, the time limit shall be
eighteen (18) months, dated from the end of the HCS, for the completion of
both certificate requirements.
It is proposed that failureto. complete Academy requirements within
twelve (12) months (or as amended above) of the completion of Academy
training will bring about the transfer of the candidate's files from the
"student incomplete" category to be classified as "student incomplete,
disqualified HCA (or HCS)" in the Academy files and Addressograph plates.
RECEIPT OF A CERTIFICATE , SEALED AND NUMBERED IS THE FIRST TIME THE
AUDITOR HAS PROFESSIONAL STATUS AS SUCH (THIS APPLIES TO HPA/HCA AND
B.SCN/HCS ONLY-HAS IS NOT A PROFESSIONAL SCIENTOLOGIST'S CERTIFICATE).
LRH:js.rd Rosamond Harper
HCO Technical Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 MAY 1960
CenOCon
ACCEPTANCE FOR ACC AND ACADEMY COURSES
It is now Policy that no students be accepted for an ACC or any other
training course conducted by a Scientology Organization who have a chronic
bodily condition for which they are under medical care and/or taking drugs.
These students should be encouraged to take an Intensive at H.G.C.
until their condition is resolved and they are off drugs.
The reason for this ruling is that, for example, on a recent ACC, the
only two blow-offs have been (1) a student who was on 30 grains a night of
Sodium Bromide, Chloral Hydrate and gentian and who sometimes took as much
as 90 grains and (2) another student under drugs from her physician for a
dropsical condition. This student was given only five months to live, five
years ago, and was taking the ACC on her own risk.
Cases such as the above need intensive auditing before attempting a
course such as an ACC. A smoother gradient is indicated, and this could be
done by getting the condition resolved through auditing first, before
allowing the student on to the course.
LRH-.js.rd Rosamond Harper
HCO Technical Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
281
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint HUI Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I OCTOBER 1960
CenOCon
CASE ASSESSMENTS FOR STUDENTS
It sometimes happens that a student can graduate from an HPA/HCA
course and pass the exam, and yet fail in the field on account of a low
case level or poor subjective reality on Scientology.
To prevent this, it is now policy that after an HPA/HCA student has
passed the HCO Board of Review examination, and before 4 certificate is
issued, he shall be required to have from the HCO Board of Review a case
assessment. If it is found that their case is in poor shape, or that they
have little subjective reality on Scientology, they must be ordered to
processing before their certificate can be issued.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
HCO Secretary WW
for
LRH:js.rd L RON HUBBARD
by L Ron Hubbard
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1960
HCOs
Central Orgs
HPA/HCA COURSE
To avoid any confusion that may exist, it is~ emphasized that the
Academy HPA/HCA Course is basically an eight week course, and is sold as
such. The student pays for any extra weeks he may take.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
HCO Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH.js.eden
282
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex.
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 NOVEMBER 1960
All Central Orgs
NEW ORG PROGRAMMES
1 have been extremely busy designing new programmes for Central Orgs
and getting all their bits and pieces together here in Johannesburg for use
in other Orgs.
Testing as a service is pulling well on very flimsy advertising here
in Johannesburg. A classified ad is pulling better than any such ad has
pulled here before.
Testing, open from 1:30 to 9:00 or thereabouts does all testing
including PE, and is now steadily rising. It was 17 people a day as of
yesterday.
To handle this flow I have reorganised PE Course to Monday, Wednesday
and Fridays, put an Anatomy of the Human Mind Basic Course (HAS) for 1Ogns
running 10 weeks, enrolling before any lecture (not every 10 weeks). I have
put in Group Auditing, old Vol 1 and 2 Group Auditing style, 5 nights a
week, 6:00 to 7:00 pm, 5 shillings a night. HAS Co-audit is suspended for
lack of space but may go back in in addition to above.
Also I've designed a night HCA/HPA to enroll every week (mostly every
week) 16 weeks long with a Basic Course added to it (but not ahead of it).
It runs Monday, Wednesday and Friday.
I've converted day HCA/HPA to enrolling every Monday using 2
instructors each in both night and day course.
I have found that an Org that doesn't have service like PE above will
lose people brought in by testing.
Also, more importaut, an Org that does not enroll a day and a night
HCA/HPA every week quickly begins to depend on processing alone with its
expensive overheads and so over-burdens the HGC and runs the Academy at a
loss or nearly so. To keep the unit up they can only sell processing!
HCA/HPA courses that enroll every few weeks or months make an Org into a
clinic which does not disseminate Scientology. Trained auditors
disseminate. Pcs rarely do to any extent.
I told you that I was going to shape up Central Org depts with
Johannesburg as the model, and this is getting busy and successful and I'm
very happy the way it's going.
I'll be sending more definite data soon.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:js.aap
283
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 NOVEMBER 1960
All Cen Orgs for info
For SA only
ANATOMY OF THE HUMAN MIND COURSE.
AS A PRE-REQUISITE FOR HPA TRAINING
The Anatomy of the Human Mind Course will become a pre-requisite for
HPA Training, effective immediately.
Should a student sign up for and pay for an HPA Course (effective
immediately) he shall be entitled to attend the Anatomy of the Human Mind
Course free of any further charge.
Should a student sign up for the Anatomy of the Human Mind Course and
while still on that course decide to follow up with an HPA Course, the fee
he has paid for the Anatomy of the Human Mind Course shall be deductible
from the gross HPA fee.
If a potential student makes use of a grant given to him by a field
auditor it should be made quite clear that the fee of 75 guineas (125
guineas less grant of 50 guineas) is net. There are no further discounts or
allowances and after April 1, 1961 the Anatomy of the Human Mind Course
will be a pre-requisite and the student must take this Course and pay for
it.
LRH:js.rd Jack Parkhouse
Copyright@ 1960 Assoen Sec-HASI SA
for
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 FEBRUARY 1961
Cen Orgs [Excerptl
Copy for each
Staff Hat
Not for Franchise THE ACADEMY OF SCIENTOLOGY
Headed by the Director of Training, the Academy is responsible for the
technical excellence of Sciintology practice tomorrow.
Teaching two different courses in the same classes, the Academy trains
Hubbard Practical Scientologists and Hubbard Professional (HPA/HCA)
Auditors.
The Academy also teaches an upper level course once or more a year
known as the B.Scn (Hubbard Clearing Scientologist) Course.
Precise scheduling, crisp training and true, direct answers to the
students' questions makes an Academy.
The HPA/HCA Course enrolls more or less every Monday unless the total
average unit is to be gained expensively through individual processing
only.
The Practical course is the saine as the old professional course
except that it is for people "Who don't want to practice Scientology
professionally". The professional course is a tougher version with more
requirements.
A bad Academy results in a bad HGC tomorrow as many graduates become
staff auditors.
A good Academy is known by its snappy scheduling and the degree of
basic data
and action the student actually absorbs.
LRH: aecjs.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Note: A full copy of this Policy Letter, The Pattern of a Central
Organization, appears in Volume 7, page 147.1
284
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 APRIL 1961
Academies
HCA/HPA RUNDOWN
OR PRACTICAL COURSE RUNDOWN
FOR ACADEMIES
The following rundown (attached) was designed by myself and Peter
Slabbert, Director of Training in Johannesburg.
It will be seen that a student can enter the day course any week and
the evening course every two weeks.
There are only two units, thus requiring only two instructors.
Comm Course will soon be getting taught again for HAS in the PE
Foundation, so this should give enough romm course.
If in doubt about any of this, write Director of Training, HASI
Johannesburg, PO Box 10795, Johannesburg, South Africa, who should reply
via HCO Tech Sec, Saint Hill,
This is the official HPA/HCA Academy Training Schedule and forms the
basis of future examination. HPA/HCA has additional requirements. This is
the totality of training for Hubbard Practical Scientologist.
Directors of Training should shift to this schedule as soon as
possible in all Central
Organizations.
LRH:ph.rd
Copyright@ 1961
L. RON HUBBARD
HPA LECTURE SCHEDULE
1. Pre-Logics 14. Definitionsof: FormalAuditing,
2. Logics Tone 40 Auditing, Muzzled Auditing
3. Scientology Axioms 15. Group Processing
4. Code of a Scientologist 16. Running PE Courses
5. Code of Honour 17. Running HAS Co-Audit Courses
6. The Factors 18. Knowingness Control Responsibility
7. Scales 19. ARC
8. Definitions 20. Victims
9. Native State and first four postulate 21. Franchise
chain 22. Parts of Man
10. Assists 23. Havingness and Duplication
11. The 8 Dynamics 24. SAPA Interpretation
12. The 4 Universes 25. How help became betrayal
13. Obsessive and Unknowing Games 26. Flat point
Condition
285
WEEK 1 (Unit 1)
SECTION MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY FRIDAY TIME
8.30
Briefing on Course
8C, Requirements,
Tape Weekly Reports, Ext Tape 14S/HPA Tape 15S/HPA
Tape 16S/HPA Tape 17S/HPA
Course, Synopsis, etc
Coach - Auditor - Pc
-Student- HATs
9.30
Comm Formula&TR I Duplication and
Auditor's Code
Lecture/Briefing ConfrontingTR 0 Axiom 28 TR2
Comm bridges and Handling
Communication TR 3 Originations
Mechanicsof Control
10.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
1 10.15
TR Session "A" TRO TR I TR2 TR3 TR4
TR Session "B" TRO TR I TR2 TR3 TR4
12.15
Lecture/Briefing TRO Comm Formula TR 2
Duplication and Handling
Havingness Originations 12.30
LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH
1.30
TR Session "A" TRO TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4
. 2.15
T R Session "B" TR 0 TR I TR2 TR3 TR4
3.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
I . I __ - 3.10
TRSession"A" TRO TRI TR2 T13 3
T84
I - 3.50
TR Session "B" TR 0 TR 1 TR2 I TR3 TR4
4.30
Tape Lecture No. 6 Lecture No. 7 Lecture No 8
Lecture No. 10 Lecture No. 17
!5q Sth London ACC 5th London ACC 5th London ~CC I 5th London
ACC 5th London ACC 5.30
WEEK 2 (Unit 1)
SECTION MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY
TIME
8.30 Briefing on Course 8C, Requirements,
Tape Weekly Reports, Ext Tape 18S/HPA Tape 19 S/HPA Tape 20
S/H PA Tape 21 S/HPA
Course, Synopsis,ete
Coach - Auditor - Pc
- Student - HATs
E-Meter Reactions 9.30
lecture/Briefing Setting Calibration Tone Arm Positions Dating
Using Arm Dating Using Meter Dynamic Assessment
ate
10.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 10.15
See Lecture above
10.30 E-Meter Reactions Dating Using Arm Dating Using
MeterDynamic Assessment
T R Session "A" E-Meter Reactions 11.15
11.30 E-Meter Reactions Dating UsingArm Dating Using
MeterDynamic Assessment
T R Session 'V' E-Meter Reactions 12.15
Lecture/Briefing E-Meter Reactions Dating Using Arm
Dating Using Meter Dynamic Assessment
12.30
LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH 1.30
TR Session "A" E-Meter Reactions E-Meter Reactions Dating
Using Arm Dating Using Meter Dynamic Assessment
2.15
- TR Session "B" E-Meter Reactions E-Meter Reactions Dating
Using Arm Dating Using Meter Dynamic Assessment 3.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
3.10
TI1Session"A*' E-Meter Reactions E-Meter Reactions Dating
Using Arm Dating Using Meter Dynamic Assessment 3.50
TRSession'V' E-Meter Reactions E-Meter Reactions Dating
Using Arm Dating Using Meter Dynamic Assessment
1 - - 4.30
Tape Lecture No. 1 Lecture No. 2 lecture No. 7 lecture
No. 8 Lecture No. 14
6th London ACC 1 61blondonACC Sth London ACC 6th London ACC ,
6thLondonACC 5.30
286
WEEK3 (Unit 1)
SECTION MONDAY TUESDAY TIME
8.30
Briefing on Course
8C, Requirements,
Tape Weekly Reports, Ext Tape 22 S/H PA Tape 23 S/HPA Tape 24
S/H PA Tape25S/HPA
Course, Synopsis, ate
Coach - Auditor - Pc
Student - HATs 9.30
Lecture/Briefing Upper 1 ndoe & T R 6 TR7 Tone 40 Auditing
Chart of Attitudes Spotting Buttons &
TR 9 Coaching
10,00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 10.15
TR 6 Steering bodies
T R Session "A" Blind steering; TR 7 TR8 TR 8 TR9
non-verbal 8C 11.15
TR 6Stearing bodies
TB Session "B" Blind steering; TR 7 TR 8 TR8 TR9
nCR-Verbat 8G 12.15
7hg- Course
BrLe ing , n Cou "0
r of n
8C' R 'qu irements
' ram
Wly Re
eek eports, Ex
PO, S
Coutir se S v S, ate
no $1 ate
Coach ~Ayudiptor' Pc
nt HATS
Student no HAR 7 s
r PC
Lecture/Briefing Control in Auditing TR7 TR8 TR9
Coaching 12.30
LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH
TR Session "A' TR7 TR 8 TR9 TR9
TR Session "S" TR6 TR7 TR8 TR9 TR9 2.15
3.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
3.10
T R Session "A" TR 6 TR7 TR 8 TR9 TR9
3.50
TRSession"W' TR 6 TR 7 TR8 TR9 TR9
4.30
Tape Lecture No. 1 Lecture No. 5 Lee ).9 Lecture
No. 25
TR6
TR
BREAK
T
TR60 1
Lecture ' N 5.30
1stgMelbourneACC 1StLNelbourneACC 1stme oACClstMelbourneACC
WEEK 4 (Unit 11
SECTION MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY -7 FRIDAY
TIME
Briefing on Course 8.30
SC, Requirements,
Tape Weekly Reports, Ext Tape 26 Part 1 Tape 26 Part 2 & 3
lecture No. 1 State Lecture No. 3State
Course, Synopsis, ate S/HPA S/HPA of Man Congress of Man
Congress
Coach - Auditor - PC
.Student - HATs
9.30
PTP Cause of R i~ing Goals In Rudiments
lecture/Briefing Anti (1 & A ModelSession ModelSession 7
A between sessions
10.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
10.15
T R Sessio n "A" AntiO&A ModelSession Mode[Session
ModelSession Model Session
1 11.15
TR Session 'V' Anti G & A 1 ModelSession Model Session
ModelSession ModelSession
12.15
Lecture/Briefing Relevant, ModelSession Model Session
Mode[Session ModelSession
Irrelevant Guestion
LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH 12.30
1.30
TR Session "A Relevant ModelSession ModelSession
ModelSession ModelSession
1 rrelevan~ Question
Relevant ModelSession Model Session ModelSession
Model Session
TR Session "B Irrelevan~ Question
3.00
BREAK - BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
3.10
TR Session "A" Relevant, ModelSession ModelSession
Model Session ModelSession
- Irrelevant Question 1 1 3.50
TR Session "B" Relevant, ModelSession ModelSession
Model Session ModelSession
- Irrelevant Question 4.30
Tape lecture No, 26 Lecture No. 27 Lecture No. 29 Lecture
No. 30 Lecture No. 1
lst Melbourne ACC lstMelbourneACC ist Melbourne ACC
1st Melbourne ACC HCS Course
1 - 5.30
287
WEEK I (Unit 2)
SECTION MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY T FRIDAY
TIME
8.30
Lecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SEE
LECTURESCHEDULE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Tape Tape 1 S/HPA Tape 2 S/HPA 1 Tape 3 S/HPA 1 Tape4S/HPA
9.15
BREAK XK BREAK BREAK
Lecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SEE LECTURESCHEDU 1 LE -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.30
- 11.15
Briefing ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 TYPES 0 F PR OCESSES
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
11.30
Auditing Team "A" - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 TYPES OF PRO
CESSES - - - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - 12.30
LUNCH
LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH 1 - 1.30
Lecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SEELECTURESCHEDULE - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - -
2.15
Auditing Team 'V' 6 TYPES 0 F PR OCESSES - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - -
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 3.15
1 1 3.30
Lecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- SEE LECTURESCHEDULE - -
4.30
Tape Granting of Route 1 (4,5, 6, 7) Route 1 (8,9,
10,11) Route 1 (12,13,14, ARCTr nole
Beingness State of Man Cong. State of Man Cong. 15) State of
Me 15thACC
1 Congress 5.30
WEEK 2 (Unit 2)
SECTION 1 MONDAY 1 TUESDAY 1 WEDNESDAY 1
THURSDAY -F FRIDAY TIME
8.30
Lecture[Tape Purpose & Running Purpose& Running
Tape 6S/HPA Tape7 8/HPA Tape8S/HPA
Op. hy Oup. Op. by Dup. 1 1 - 9.30
Lecture Definition, Description & Demonstration
of "THING"
BREAK BREAK 1 BREAK
Team"A" Finding, Handling & becoming cause 10.15
overTHING on other students
11.15
Team'V' Finding, Handling & becoming cause
overTHING on other students
lecture 12.15
Definition, Description & Demonstration of "THING"
12.30
LUNCH
LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH
1.30
Team "A" Finding, Handling& becoming cause
overTH 1 N G on other students
2.15
Finding, Handling & becoming cause
Team "B"
over TH 1 N G o n other slude nts
.2 .2 3.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK
BREAK 1 1
3.10
Team "A" Finding, Handling & becoming cause
over TH 1 N 6 on other students
3.50
Team "B" Finding, Handling & becoming cause
overTH 1 N G on other students
4.30
Tape Communication& ExactControl Uses of Control
Isness 17thACC 17th ACC 1 17thACC 5.10j
288
WEEK 3 (Unit 2)
SECTION MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY
TIME
- 8.30
Tape Tape9S1HPA, Tape 10S/HPA Tape 11 S/HPA
Tapel2S/HPA Tape 13S/HPA 9.30
Lecture/Briefing Lecture on CCH's lecture on CCH's Control
in Sessions
1 and 2 2 and 3 RealityScale SCS Howto Run
Auditing S C S 10.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 10.1 5
Team "A" CCH 1 CCH2 CCH 3 SCS SCS 11,15
Team 'V' CCH 1 1 CCH 2 CCH 3 SCS SCS
12.15
Lecture/Briefing CCH 1 CCI-12am13 CCH 4 SCS SCS
12.30
LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH 1.30
Team "A" CCH 1 CCH 3 CCH4 SCS SCS 2.15
Team,V, GCH 1 CCH 3 CCH4 SCS SCS 3.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 3.10
Team "A" C CCH 3 CCH 4 SCS SCS 3.50
Team 'V' GCH 1 CCH 3 1 CCH 4 SCS SCS
4.30
Restpointsand Extroversionand lecture No. 1 Lecture
No. 3 Lecture No. 4
Tape Confusions Introversio 5th London ACC Sth
London ACC 5th London ACC
17th ACC 17th AC 1 - 5.30
SECTION MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY
TIME
8.30
Tape Lecture No. 5 State Tape N o. 1 S/HPA Tape No. 2
S/HPA Tape N o. 3S/HPA Tape No. 4 S/HPA
of Man Congress 1 1 9.30
Lecture/Briefing - - - - - - - - - FORMULA 15 AUDITING RUNDOWN AND
PROCEDURE - - - - - - - - 10.00
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 10.15
Auditing Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15
12.15
lecture/Briefing - - - - - - - - - FORMULA 15 AUDITING RUNDOWN AND
PROCEDURE - - - - - - - --
LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH LUNCH 12.30
1.30
Auditing Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15
Formula 15
2.55
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
Auditing Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 1 15
Formula 15 3.05
Lecture No. 2 Lecture No. 3 Granting of 1 Routel(4~5,6,7)
Routel(8,9,10,11)
S teofM
Tape H CS Course H CS Course Beingne,, 2m1ACC ta A n
Cong.State of Man Cong.
5.30
FORMULA15: Cleanup terminals in Scientology, Instructors, etc and also
people who object to Scientology..
289
WEEK 1 UNIT 1 WEEK2 UNIT 1
MONDAY WEDNES-D-T TIME
SECTION AY FRIDAY SECTION MONDAY WEDNESDAY-T-
FRIDAY TIME
7.00 7.00
Tape Tape Tape Tape 8.00 lecture/ Briefing
TR2 TR3 TR4
Comm Formula
7.30
Lecture/Briefing TRO Axiom 28 TR1 Team A
TR2 TR3 TR4
Mech. of Control
8.25
8.30 BREAK BREAK BREAK
BREAK
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
~ -1
.0.
Team A R 0 TRO TR 1 .40 Team B TR2
TR3 TR4
9.35
9.30
Team B TRO TR 0 TR 1 Tape Tape
Tape Tape
1 10.30
10.30
WEEK 3 UNIT 1 WEEK 4 UNIT 1
SECTION MONDAY WEDNES-DAY FRIDAY TIME SECTION MONDAY
WEDNESDAY FRIDA-Y -~TIME
7.00 7.00
Tape Tape (Clear BC) Tape Tape Lecture/Briefing TR8 TR9
Spotting Buttons
8.00 TR and Coaching
lecture/Briefing TR6 TR7 TR8 8.30 Team "A-
TR8 TR9 TR9 7.30
,8.25
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 8.40 BREAK BREAK
BREAK BREAK 5
.3
TeamA 1 TR6 TR7 1 TR8 Team "B" TR8
TR9 TR9
9.35 - 1
9.30
Team 8 TR6 TB 7 TR8 10.30 Tape Tape
Tape Tape 10.30
WEEKS UNIT 1 WEEK 6 UNIT 1
SECTION MONDAY WEDNESDAY FRIDAY TIME SECTION MONDAY
WEDNESDAY FRIDAY
7.00 7.00
Tape Tape (Clear 80 Tape Tape Lecture/Briefing
Dating with meter Dynamic Assessment Dynamic Assessment
- 8.00 - 7.30
lecture/Briefing E-Meter Reactions TA positions
Dating using arms Team "A" Dating with meter Dynamic
Assessment Dynamic Assessment
- 8.30
8.25
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
BREAK BREAK
1 1 . 8.40
Team "A" E-Meter reactions E-Meter reactions 1
Q -~r, Team "B- Dating with meter Dynamic Assessment
Dynamic Assessment 9.30
Team "B" E-Meter reactions E-Meter reactions
Dating using s Tape Tape Tape Tape
1 !1-1 10.30 1 ~ 10.30
WEEK 7 UNIT 1 WEEK 8 UNIT 1
SECTION MONDAY WEDNESDAY FRIDAY TIME SECTION
AIEDNESDAY FRIDAY TIME
7.00 7.00
Tape Tape (Clear 8C) Tape Tape Cause of Rising
Goalsin
8.00 lecture/Briefing Model Session TA between
Rudiments
lecture/Briefing Anti (1 & A Relevant/ Model Session
sessions
Irrelevant Question 7.15
8.30 Team "A" Model Session Model Session
ModelSession
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 8.15
Team "A" Anti (1 & A Relevant/ 8.40 BREAK BREAK
BREAK BREAK
Irrelevant Question Model Session
8.30
9.35 Team "B" ModelSession Model Session
Model Session
9.30
Team "B" Anti (1 & A Model Session
Irrelevant Question Tape Tape Tape Tape
10.30 10.30
WEEK l UNIT2 WEEK 3 UNIT 2
SECTION MONDAY WEDNESDAY FRIDAY TIME SECTION
MONDAY WED N E 5:1D:A::Y::::E F W D A Y TIME
7.00
7.00
lecture - - - - - - SEE LECTURE SCHEDULE - - 7.15
Lecture/Briefing -Definition, Description and Demonstration of "Thing" -
Briefing - - - - - - 6 TYPES OF PROCESSES-
7.30
7.30 Team "A" Finding,
Handling and Becoming Cause over "Thing"- -
Team "A" - - - - - - 6 TYPES OF PROCESSES - - - - - -
8.15
Tearn'V' - - - - - - - 6 TYPES OF PROCESSES- 8.15 BREAK
BREAK BREAK - 8.30
BREAK BREAK 1 BREAK 1 BREAK 9.00 Team 'V'
- - - Finding, Handling and Becoming Cause over "Thing` - - 9.15
lecture SEE LECTURE SCHEDULE--- - - - .15 Lecture
--- ---SEE LECTURE SCHEDULE- - - -- -
9.30
9.30
10.30 7- Tape Tape 10.30
0 -1 Tape Tape Tape
c U~
T~,,p,r
WEEK2 UNIT2 WEEK4 UNIT2
SECTION MONDAY WEDNESDAY FRIDAY TIME SECTION
MONDAY 1 WEDNESDAY F R 1 D-A-Y--- T71 M E
Lecture SEE LECTURE SCHEDULE - - - - - - 7.00
Leciure/Briefing - - ~Definition, Description and Demonstration of "Thing"-
- - 7.00
Briefing - - - - - - 6 TYPES OF PROCESSES - - - - - -- 7.15
Team "A" - - - Finding, Handling and Becoming Cause over "Thing"- - -
7.30
7.30 BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 8.15
Team "A" ---- ---6TYPES OF PROCESSES---- --- 1 - 8.30
Team "B" - - - - - - - 6 TYPES OF PROCESSES - - - - - - - 8.15
Team "B" - - - Finding, Handling and Becoming Cause over"Thing"- - -
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK - 9.00 Lecture -SEE LECTURE
SCHEDULE - - - - - - 9.15
Lecture - - - - - -- SE 1 E LECTURE SCHEDU LE- - - - - 9.15
Tape Tape 9.30
9.30 10.30
Tape Tape Tape Tape SUNDAY 8.30-9.00 Purpose of Op-by-Dup
0.30 9.00-5.30 Running of Op-by-Dup
WEEK 5 UNIT 2 WEEK6UNIT2
FR SECTION
SECTION MONDAY WEDNESDAY FRIDAY TIME I l!'
Ill, 1 ~~i l Ell: I P TIME
7.00 7,00
Lecture/Briefing CCH1 CCH 2 CCH3 7.15 Lecture/Briefing CCH 4
ses SCS
CCH1 CCH2 CCH 3 7.15
8.15 Team "A" CCH 4 SCS SCS
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 8,15
8.30 BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
Team "B" CCH 1 CCH 2 CCH 3 9.30
8.30
- Tape Tape Tape Tape 10.30 Team "B" CCH 4 SCS SCS
9.30
10,30
SUNDAY 8.30-9.00 purpose of OP-by-Dup Tape Tape Tape
9.00-5.30 Running of Op-by-Dup
WEEK l UNIT 3 WEEK2 UNIT3
SECTION MONDAY WEDIDAY FRIDAY TIME SECTION MONDAY
TIME
7.00 7.00
lecture/Briefing AuditingRundown AuditingRundown Auditing Rundown
lecture/Brief ing AuditingRundown Auditing Rundown AuditiniRundown
Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15 7.15
7.15 Tearl Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15
Team "A" Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15
8.15
8.15 BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK
BREAK BREAK BREAK BREAK 8.30
Tearll Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula ~5 :1 8.30 Tearll
Formula 15 Formula 15 Formula 15 9.30
1 9.30
Tape Tape Tape Tape _i Tape Tape Tape Tape 10.30
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 APRIL 1961
CenOCon
HCO LTD HPA/HCA CERTIFICATE CONDITIONS
The following are the current requirements and conditions for
obtaining an HPA/HCA certificate:
Complete Practical Course.
Complete Anatomy Course.
Pay E131.5.0 total (which includes the f 100 fee for the Practical
Scientology
Course).
Receive any required auditing to case level standard (set by HCO Board
of
Review).
Pass Practical (Academy) Course (Repeat necessary weeks at no extra
cost).
Pass HCO Board of Review Oral.
Pass Written Examination 85%.
Complete HGC Training (which includes 50 hours of auditing for the
Organiza
tion).
International Professional Membership held.
For validation, it is necessary also to complete an HPA/HCA Extension
Course and certain other requirements, as stipulated by the HCO Board of
Review.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jl.cden
294
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HOD POLICY LETTER OF 17 APRIL 1961
CenOCon
TRAINING, PROFESSIONAL
NEW POLICY
(Cancels any policy that may contradict it)
The Purpose of the Academy (or an HGC when training staff) is to make
the student letter perfect technically before going on to any other
training.
Theories and processes can be picked up in books and from tapes as
well as in classes. Technical skill cannot be picked up anywhere but in an
Academy or HGC training unit, a fact proven by years of observation.
Therefore the 1000 to I stress of an Academy (or HGC training unit)
must be Technical Perfection.
The following comprise at this writing what is meant by technical
skill:
1. Command of the TRs, revised 196 1.
2. Command of Model Session.
3. Command of the E-Meter.
4. Command of rudiments detection and process.
All these are covered in unit I of present schedule. Therefore it
follows that a student can't get out of Unit I until he or she is perfect,
if it takes a year.
Don't necessarily keep a professional student in the week he flunked.
You can let him go on through Unit I (but not to Unit 2). But put on an
evening coaching class, paying an evening instructor to teach additional
technical subject time.
No student enrolling after the date of receipt of this HCO Pol Ltr may
be given a course completion as a professional auditor until he has been
given and has passed an examination as follows.
I . Perfect performance on the TRs 0 to 9.
2. Perfect command of a Model Session.
3. Perfect control and knowledge of an E-Meter.
4. Perfect handling of rudiments and rudiments processes.
The student must get 100% on the above.
A written examination on the subjects of Unit 2 in HPAJHPSJHCS
Training or in the theory taught on a higher course should also be given
and must be passed with a grade of 80%.
The Unit One examination may be given when the student completes Unit
One.
In examining on Technical (Unit One) the student must be unshakably
confident of his or her skill.
Lack of this skill rather than lack of theory and/or processes has
nullified the results of those auditors who have not been successfully
taught on 1-4 above (Unit One) technical skills.
SOP Goals application has searchlighted the necessities outlined in
this bulletin.
Letting an auditor out of the Academy without the basic skills down
perfectly is opening the door to failure.
Be tough!
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH.jl.cden
295
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MAY 1961
HCO Bd Rev
Academy
Ext Course
EXTENSION COURSE
The requirement that Extension Course students who begin the HPA/HCA
or the BScn/HCS Courses turn in to the Academy all their completed
Extension Course lessons is no longer required, as in student files
completed lesson slips are kept, and the addition of keeping all their
written or typed lessons would jam Academy files.
LRH:jl.rd Mary Sue Hubbard
Copyright (E) 1961 HCO Treasurer WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 MAY 1961
CenCCon
MODIFICATION OF HPA/HCA, BScn/HCS
SCHEDULE
The following modifications of the HPA/HCA and BScn/HCS Training
Schedules are to be put into immediate use by all Academies,
HPA/HCA UNIT 1 consists of:-
I . Command of the TRs, I to 9 Revised.
2. Command of the Model Session. (See Note 1)
3. Command of the E-Meter.
4. Command of rudiments detection and processes.
Note 1. Model Session to be run against the TRs. (Student flunked
for poor TR 0,
TR 1, TR 2, TR 3, TR 4 and TR 5/0.)
UNIT 2 consists of:-
1. The 36 Pre-sessions.
2. The Havingness and Confront process for the pc,
3. General Assessment and running pcs on Pre-havingness scale and
for assessment on
Pre-Hav of terminals (not SOP Goals).
4. Joburg Security Check, How to do one.
Tapes are to be listened to after Academy hours.
Axioms to be learned in student's own time.
Goal: To make a Release.
BScn/HCS
Establishes full technical perfection on E-Meter, Model Session and
TRs. Teaches SOP Goals fully.
Goal: To make a Stable Mest Clear.
LRH:jl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (~) 1961
296
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECTCOLOUR FLASH
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE RED ONWHITE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 JUNE 1961
Central Orgs
ACADEMY SCHEDULE, CLAREFICATION OF
There is apparently a considerable confusion going on as to what
should be taught in an Academy. Some schedules and advices from various
people have been handed about that didn't really duplicate the intention
well, and I have not before clarified since the issue of the Pre Hav.
A review of Academies and auditors and their skills at the time of
examination, and in application for and early service in HGCs, shows that
Academies have for some time been in violation of one of the stable data
about new auditors. A new auditor should be trained up to a point where he
or she can be employed at once as a staff auditor and put on a pc without
the D of P giving them endless hours of additional training.
This does not mean that all auditors graduating should be employed by
the HGC. It means all graduating should be capable of being employed. Why?
Well, these auditors are going out to audit and haven't got a D of P to
further train them, so they are being handed a career failure if they
cannot audit people without further training.
The attention of all Assn Secs and Ds of T is vigorously called to the
technical calibre desired from an academy student and the necessary
training reality.
You are not training auditors if when they graduate they cannot audit.
Now whatever schedules, classes and other fancy ways of dodging the
necessity to confront students have been employed, just tear them all up.
They are not a good substitute for training. Because we have all been
trained in the educational system circa midtwentieth century we are liable
to think that forming people up into classes and getting them to jump over
books on schedule will educate them. Well it won't. We are here to train
auditors not to educate them. Sojust train them.
How?
Well you do it by check sheet. You make up a check sheet of all the
items this person must actually know in order to practise auditing
effectively. Then each time the person passes a level he is examined and
chocked off on the check sheet, and goes on.
Here is the leader in all this data: You can dawdle around with theory
outside an academy, read books and so on. But in an academy only can you
LEARN certain things and not all the books in the world will teach them.
These things are as follows: the TRs 0 to 9, the Model Session while
obeying the TRs, the E-Meter, the CCHs, the Pre Hav Scale and its use in
assessment. The running of general Pre Hav levels, how to do a Security
Check.
Those are the things they can't learn anywhere else. Therefore all
training should not be of a class, for this terminal called a class will
-never audit anybody. All training should be of student individuals who
will audit people, for only an individual student, not a class, will do any
auditing.
Now you will also find that if the student doesn't listen to at least
fifty taped lectures of mine he won't know the mood or flavor of all this,
and so will develop rather weird ideas of what we're all about and charge
around making nothing out of people, so a daily hour of tape is quite
important for the whole eight weeks the student is there.
297
All right, he also has to know the Auditor's Code. And he should know
the Code of a Scientologist. And he should know his axioms.
What else? Not another blistering cotton picking thing, that's what.
NOTHING else. If you try to teach anything else you've had it.
So your cheek list should be composed of the various parts of just
those things. Now all this frantic motion of getting the student into
classes and regimented doesn't fit in with what we're doing. So it is pure
silliness to say "How can we enter a student in a comm course when we only
run one every few weeks and er what gee can't well er
can't dogs alter-is let's see Actually the first and last part of
the sentence
makes the same sense. NEITHER make any sense of course.
So you have two UNITS. These two units are called unit one and unit
two. They are not so called because of weeks present or cats on the belfry
or diabums on the scollery. They are called units one and two because the
students in unit one are studying techniques and the students in unit two
are studying processes or applications.
Thus we know a unit one student not by the colour of his glasses or
his voucher of payment. We know him because he has a check sheet in his paw
which says unit one on the top of it and which has under it Code of an
Auditor, the listed TRs, the Model Session, the E-Meter and the CCHs. Then
we have a unit two student and he is obvious not because he has a time
clock in his hand but because we can clearly see that he has in his paw a
sheet which has on it Code of a Scientologist, the Pre Hav Scale,
Assessments how to do, commands how to make up, Security Checking, and
character of auditing review and the axioms, and then follows a list of
fifty or sixty tapes.
All these items have little tails after them four times so he can be
examined four times by instructors and flunked the first three.
Now when he gets out he can take an extension course and complete his
theory, but he can also do a creditable job of Routine one and Routine two
as covered in HCO Bulletin of June 5, 196 1.
No classes. He reports. He works with other students. He sweats it
out. He gets no auditing, but may be security checked and security cheek
other students. He may assess people, but as long as he is in unit one he
only concentrates on mechanics, and in unit two before he is perfect
perfect perfect perfect perfect perfect perfect in unit one. He can only
leave unit two until he is safe safe safe safe safe safe to employ at once
in the HGC. A student may not be examined by HCO until those cheek sheets
are all initialled as perfect by instructors.
What's this do to training? It demands that our instructors are all
letter perfect on the above material and that they impart the personal
touch to every student, and not in big masses but with hammers on
individual heads.
1 herewith forbid classes and authorise only one daily seminar. 1
forbid more than the above to be taught in the Academy. 1 forbid as well
length of time present to operate as any criteria of the skill of an
auditor.
Now that's an academy. Write down your questions and mail them to me
fast.
Then read this again for it's all I will say.
LRH:jl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Note: This HCO B has been corrected per HCO P/L 9 October 1961,
HPAIHCA Rundown Change, which moved the Auditor's Code from unit two to
unit one.1
298
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 AUGUST 1961
CenOCon
HPA/HCA POLICY
No HCA/HPA course may be offered or run outside a Central
Organization.
In event of a City Office conducting such a course, arrangements must
be made with HCO Continental Exec Sec in any given area.
All former permissions to conduct HCA/HPA courses are cancelled
herewith save only in Central Organizations.
SPECIAL COURSES
The conduct of Special courses of professional quality may be
undertaken only after arrangement with HCO Continental Exec See, and all
literature to be released about them and the curriculum to be taught must
be passed upon, in writing, by HCO Cent Exec Sec.
LRH.jl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1961
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 SEPTEMBER 1961
CenOCon
Franchise
TRAINING POLICY
On and after January I st, 1962, only students who have successfully
completed an Academy course on or after July I st, 1961 shall be examined
and certificated by the HCO Board of Review.
In order to emphasize the value of improved training in Academies and
to encourage students to qualify for certificates without delay, the
following policies are instituted.
Any students who have completed their Academy training before July
Ist, 1961 should be notified of this. The HCO Board of Review should also
inform them of the latest date on which they can be examined. If they do
not attend and pass their examination and complete their certificate
requirements by 3 1 st December, 196 1, they will be required to take
further training in the Academy at their own expense before being allowed
to be examined or certificated by the HCO Board of Review.
Also, students who complete (or have completed) the Academy course on
or after July Ist, 1961, shall be required to pass the HCO Board of Review
exam, and to complete their certificate requirements, within 12 months. If
after 12 months they have not done so, they will not be allowed to be
examined or certificated by the HCO Board of Review until they have taken
further training in the Academy, at their own expense.
LRH:jl.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
299
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 OCTOBER 1961
Cen Orgs
DofT
Training STANDARDIZED E-METER BOOK EXAM
The attached exam is a standardized verbal test.on E-Meter Essentials
to be given to all course students using this book. Answers to this exam
must be 100% correct to pass.
Any additional questions could (and should) be added from the book by
the examiner. The student is only examined until he misses a question. The
student has failed and the exam is over and the whole examination must be
taken again.
Examiners should not ask these questions consecutively, but should
select questions at random.
Philip D. Quirinc, HCO Technical
Secretary WW for
L. RON HUBBARD
E-Meter Book Exam
1. Define a Hubbard Electrometer.
2. Can a person be cleared without the use of an E-Meter?
3. Will the use of non-standard Meters produce a clear?
4. Is the E-Meter a precision instrument?
5. Does the E-Meter know what is what before the preclear does?
6. What causes the various needle reactions?
7. Which Tone Arm reading indicates greater density of masses, 1.5
or 5.5?
8. A low toned male preclear who can not influence his mind or body
at all reads at what position of the Tone Arm?
9. Where would a dead body female read on the Tone Arm?
10. Where does a female Clear read on the Tone Arm and what needle
manifestation would she have?
11. A low toned person has what kind of needle response?
12. What reading will a dead body male pass through before becoming
a high Tone Arm case?
13. What are the two most important things that the Tone Arm tells
the Auditor?
14. How can you tell a case is not movine.
15. Can you change a process if the Tone Arm is moving?
16. At what Tone Arm motion would you leave a level of the Pre Hav
Scale?
17. Is the following good Tone Arm action: 3.5 to 3.3 to 3.6 to 3.4
in twenty minutes of auditing?
18. What two things do you know when the Tone Arm is not moving
under processing?
19. What are the mechanics of what happens when the Tone Arm is not
moving under a process?
20. What do you do if you have run a terminal on a level too long
and have stuck the Tone Arm?
21. How is the Sensitivity knob set for any preclear?
22. While doing a goals assessment, would you change the Sensitivity
knob?
23. Can you change the Sensitivity knob during rudiments?
300
24. Can you change the Sensitivity knob during a process?
25. What three things monitor the needle action?
26. What are the ten main needle actions and describe the direction
of action as seen by an Auditor looking at the meter or the movement of
each.
27. What does a fall tell the auditor?
28. How can you check to see if the E-Meter is working?
29. Can a case be assessed on a change of needle characteristic?
30. What does a rising needle mean?
31. What is the only use of a rising needle at present?
32. Is the needle returning to position after a fall considered to
be a rising needle?
33. What does a Theta-Bop mean?
34. Which takes precedence in an assessment, a fall, a Theta-Bop or
a Rock Slain?
35. If a Rock Slam turns on while running a process, but the Tone
Arm is not moving, would you continue or change the process?
36. What does a free needle indicate as regards state of case?
37. How can you tell whether a preclear is really eating during
processing?.
38. What kind of processes need to be run on Stage Four cases?
39. Havingness is read where on the E-Meter?
40. How can the Auditor tell whether the havingness process is
working or not?
41. Confront processes are run where on the E-Meter?
42. How does an Auditor know when a Confront process is working?.
43. What is the only reason you use a Havingness process?
44. What is the only reason you use a Confront process?
45. When and why are Havingness and Confront processes done in SOP
Goals?
46. On a Security Check, if the needle still falls on a question
what two things can you conclude?
47. What must you do about the two things above?
48. Do you turn up the sensitivity knob on each question of the
Security check to make sure you have all on any particular question?
49. What do you do if on a Security check, on a particular question
when you get a fall, then a no fall for two repeats, then a fall?
50. Will a preclear who has withholds progress?
51. On a Security check do you follow up a change of needle
characteristic?
52. What does a rise on a can squeeze tell us about a case?
53. Would a person who Rock-Slammed or Theta-Bopped on all questions
of a Security check pass the check?
54. What is the only significance with regard to a different Tone
Arm reading if both cans are held in either the left hand or the right
hand?
55. What is the most important thing about a lie reaction test?
56. Will a regular EMeter be of use in auditing a person from Clear
up to OT?
57. What is the main use of the needle in Auditine.
58. What is the main use of the Tone Arm in Auditing?
LRH.jl.vmm.cden
Copyright Q 1961
301
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 OCTOBER 1961
CenOCon
ACADEMY TRAINING
(Revises existing Schedules)
Due to new discoveries on what can be done with a Security Check, and
the difficulties entered by hidden standards in getting a case trained, it
is important that the HCA/HPA Student become familiar and able with meters
and security checks and hidden standards early in his training.
Therefore, without otherwise altering the intensity of current
training or curricula of Units I or 2, the following becomes policy
effective at once on receipt of this Policy Letter:
ALL STUDENTS, FROM THEIR EARLIEST ENTRANCE INTO THE ACADEMY, SHALL
HAVE TRAINING ON SECURITY CHECKING AND A PART OF EACH TRAINING DAY (OR WEEK
IN THE CASE OF WEEKEND OR EVENING STUDENTS) SHALL BE DEVOTED TO GIVING OR
RECEIVING PROCESSING (SECURITY) CHECKS.
This is in keeping with the oldest of Academy policies: To turn out
auditors capable of being employed in the HGC without further training. It
has not been possible to follow this policy for a very long time. But now
with the advent of auditor classification, if security checking is well
learned by end of training, the new graduate will be instantly employable.
This means greater field results.
The teaching of Security Checking from the outset introduces other
items which must therefore become policy.
A STUDENT ENTERING AN ACADEMY MUST PROVIDE HIMSELF OR HERSELF WITH AN
E-METER OF APPROVED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE.
This may be arranged as the organization finds most practical and as
may be feasible for the student.
The Academy may not loan, use or own Meters. The organization may not
furnish E-Meters for use or instruction to an Academy.
It should be broadly published that meters not approved by HCO cannot
be used in an Academy for training. A whole programme of training could
break down through the use of meters that work with too sensitive or too
insensitive or freak reactions. Meters that are not standard cannot be
described or taught.
STUDENTS FOUND TO BE USING THE WITHHOLDS OF OTHER STUDENTS FOR JOKES,
HORSE PLAY OR MAKING ANOTHER STUDENT GUILTY SHALL BE SUBJECT TO SEVERE
DISCIPLINARY ACTION.
The types of processing (security) checks for student practice at the
outset should be very specific and easily cleared and should contain no
general questions.
Example of general question: Have you ever been angry about anything?
302
Examples of specific question:
Have you ever withheld anything from your mother? Have you ever lied
to Joe? (an Instructor)
The difference between a general question and a specific question is a
matter of general or specific terminal. If the question has a general
terminal such as "anyone", "men", "people", it is harder to clear than a
question with a specific terminal such as "your father", "Miss Smith", etc,
etc.
It is dangerous to a case (since the person may blow) to leave a
question with charge on it. General questions are much more likely to be
charged or to produce blows.
It is intended by this Policy Letter that about an hour of each
instruct ' ion day be
devoted to giving or receiving a Processing Check whether the student
can do it or not.
Familiarity alone will gradually promote confidence. Training coupled
to this will make a good auditor, However, no training at all need
accompany this exercise in the first couple of weeks. Just give the student
a mimcoed special Processing Cheek form, have him hold an E-Meter and cheek
another student for an hour. They'll bumble through and finally be ready to
know they don't know about it. This can go in on the student's first day.
And it can continue, right on through to the last day on course, whether
the student is using simple cheeks or standard forms depending on his
progress.
Warning: The main danger in doing this is turning an HPA/HCA into a
specialized security checker, not an auditor. So steps must be taken to
make sure the skills of the auditor are not lost and that the student does
not get a highly over developed idea of himself as an Inquisitor.
Thus processing periods as such, using old processes such as ARC
Straight Wire, must also be employed as the student goes on.
We expect a student to emerge from an HPA/HCA Course able to pass with
a 70% or better grade, a general examination on Scientology Auditing and a
perfect examination on the Model Session, Rudiments, the E-Meter and
Security Checking. His TRs and auditing deportment must be good. And he
must be able to handle a routine auditing process.
Training time has been demonstrated to be lengthened when actual
processing is deleted from an Academy Schedule. The introduction of
Security Checking over the whole training period and continuing actual
auditing on old basic processes during Unit Two will give us a training
speed up and good field results.
Note: Hidden Standards are taught only on Unit Two and are found and
relieved on beginning students only by Advanced (Unit Two) Students. Unit
One Students may only do simple checking.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd Copyright (D 1961
303
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 OCTOBER 1961
Academies
NEW RUNDOWN FOR BSCN/HCS COURSE
The present situation of the BScn/HCS course is as follows:
I SOP Goals is being taught by instructors who have not graduated
from the
Saint Hill Briefing Course.
2. No one has ever been reported to have found their goal, terminal
and pre-hav level.
3. Too much time is being spent on the basics of auditing which
should have been learned on an HPA/HCA course.
Therefore, the BScn/HCS course will be revised as follows and is to be
put into effect immediately.
SOP Goals is to be taught in the BSenfflCS; course, but only by a
Class Four auditor who has graduated from the Saint Hill Briefing Course
with honours. This instructor must at all times keep in direct
communication with HCO WW and will only be under Ron's direction.
The goals of this course are:
1 . To make Class Three auditors.
2. To emphasize SOP Goals training.
3. To pull in old BSen/HCS auditors for an "SOP GoaW' Validation
Seal.
There is a prerequisite to this course, which is that the applicant
must be up to the HPA/HCA standards on E-Meter, See Checks, Model Session
and TRs. If the applicant is not up to these standards he must take an
HPA/HCA Retread course to raise him up to current standards at which time
he may reapply for the BSen/HCS course.
No student may qualify for the BScn/HCS Certificate with "SOP Goals"
Validation Seal until he has:
1 . Had sections "C" and "P" of Problems Intensive (HCO Bulletin of
October 17, 196 1, Problems Intensive) flattened, i.e. no hidden standards.
2. Had his own goal, terminal and pre-hav level found.
3. Successfully found a preclear's goal, terminal and pre-hav
level.
4. Been checked out on all data on SOP Goals.
Issued by: Philip Quirino
HCO Technical Secretary WW
for
LRH:iet.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1961
304
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1961
BPI
ALLOWED PROCESSES FROM COURSES
As it is taking three months or more at Saint Hill to make a qualified
Class III auditor, and as all field courses are only six weeks, my
experience and data on progress of these courses demands, in fairness to
the public, that:
No Course not taught at Saint Hill may qualify a field auditor for
Class III processes, and no field auditor or HGC auditor not qualified as
Class III may use Routine 3.
See Safety Table HCO Bulletin of October 26, 196 1.
It is too dangerous running the wrong goal and terminal to permit
auditors not qualified to find and run them on pes.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:iinj.rd
305
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 NOVEMBER 1961
HCO Sees Assn Sees Ds of T BPI
TRAINING COURSE REQUIREMENTS
As from this date, certificates will only be issued when the full
requirements for any Scientology training Course have been met.
These requirements will now include the Extension Course which must be
completed within one year of enrolment, and which must now appear as an
item on the Check-sheets for ALL current and subsequent Courses.
Application Forms for all levels of Professional Training Courses
should, from now on, include a clause to the effect that the Course shall
not be deemed to have been completed, and the Certificate will not be
awarded until ALL the course-requirements have been met.
Also, all HPA/HCA Courses, including current ones, shall include the
Anatomy of the Human Mind Course as a Check-sheet requirement.
This policy is instituted so that no-one will receive a professional
qualification without having an adequate knowledge of the most basic
material of the subject. ,
Issued by: HCO Technical Secretary WW
LRH:jw.eden.rd for
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 NOVEMBER 1961
HCO Sees Org Sees Ds of T
SAINT HILL TAPES FOR HPA/HCA COURSES
Any Saint Hill Special Briefing Course tapes on E-Metering, CCHs, Sec
Checking or Problems Intensives may be played to HPA/HCA Courses, providing
the usual basic tapes are also played.
Saint Hill tapes on Clearing may NOT be played to HPA/HCA Courses.
Issued by: HCO Technical Secretary WW
LRH:esc.rd for
Copyright@ 19 61
L. RON HUBBARD
306
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 DECEMBER 1961
CenOCon
STUDENT &METERING
All Academy students must be trained on E-Meters from the start even
if they only hold one in their lap whenever they are 'auditor' or 'student'
(not coach) in a Comm Course TR
A student must have studied and passed E-Meter Essentials with a 70%
grade and have received instruction on E-Meters before being permitted to
See Check any other student.
A student may only use innocuous See Cheek Forms such as some of those
that have been released in HCO Info Letters and may not use HCO Pol Ltr
type Sec Checks while being trained to Sec Check.
All auditing on any process must be don c with a Meter in the
'Auditor's' hands whether Sec Checking is being done or not. Only
exception: the CCHs and Upper Indoc TRs. Where there's an Academy 'Auditing
session' in progress the auditor (never the coach) is holding an E-Meter.
Where there's an Academy session there's an E-Meter.
A second examination on E-Meter Essentials must be passed 100% and the
student must pass E-Meter demonstration training 100% and must feel easy
and familiar with the E-Meter before he or she can run a HCO Policy Letter
See Cheek Form such as Form 3 (the Joburg) and Form 6, etc. on any fellow
student.
SUMMARY
This divides student E-Meter training into four stages:
1. Holding a Meter and nothing else. Prerequisite: Being an Academy
enrollee.
2. Observing their Meter while auditing basic Class I processes.
Prerequisite: Having held a Meter through Comm Course.
3. Using the Meter on HCO Infe, Ltr type See Cheeks. Prerequisite:
1 & 2 above, passing E-Meter Essentials with a grade of 70%, having had E-
Meter demonstrated and explained in class.
4. Class II type Sec Checking using HCO Pol Ltr forms.
Prerequisite: 1, 2 and 3 above, and having passed E-Meter Essentials with a
grade of 100%, having. received demonstrations, tapes and coaching on the E-
Meter and passed an examination on them. (This step is equivalent to Class
II auditor requirenients but does not award Class II by havingg been
reached in the Academy.)
REASON
Academy Ds of T and Instructors will be getting blows, entheta and
upset cases by reason of missed withholds unless the above is vigorously
applied and required without exception.
(It is expected that an Academy Graduate at HPA level will be able to
easily pass a Classification Examination as well as his HPA exam when going
to work for a Central Org. The Classification exam is not to be given as a
matter due because of course completion. It cannot be so awarded. A Class
11 examination can only be given if the student goes to work, on
graduation, at the Central Organization or City Office.)
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:esc.rd by L Ron Hubbard
307
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 JANUARY 1962
CenOCon
UPGRADING OF AUDITORS
Now that a definite standard has been established in training and
classifying auditors from HPA upward, everything should be done by
Academies and HCO Boards of Review to make the diplomas, certificates and
classifications really valuable and meaningful.
Current requirements for any certificate, classification or validation
must be rigidly enforced, without exception.
A gradient scale of proficiency should be aimed at, for a new HPA off
the Academy, via the HGC or field, enabling him to participate by
graduating to higher levels. A candidate for a higher level course should
not be accepted unless he has completed all the necessary requirements of
his current lower level, and unless he has taken responsibility for his own
case level and subjective reality by obtaining adequate auditing.
Instructors should not be allowed to instruct in Academies or on PEs
unless they are fully qualified and certificated. Practice in running PE
Courses, PE Comm Courses, HAS Co-audits and Group Auditing should be part
of the requirements for a basic HPA certificate.
Current requirements for a validation seal should be enforced, and old
graduates encouraged to take training retreads to qualify for new
validation and classification.
When sufficient numbers have been through the Saint Hill Briefing
Course, a list of Clearing Scientologists can be made up, which may be made
available to the public.
If these basic rules are followed, a standard of professional auditing
can be established which will be respected everywhere.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
HCO Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:sf.cden by L. Ron Hubbdrd
308
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 MAY 1962
CenOCon
Franchise
PRACTICAL AUDITING SKILLS
How to Use this Policy Letter
Issue the following form to all auditors, students, etc for their own
insight, and issue it routinely.
Practical Auditing Skills
A Self Appreciation
These are the total doingness skills of "the Perfect Auditor".
Any auditor would do well to check himself or herself out on his or
her doingness of an auditing session as an auditor. Theory is easier to
confront than doingliess. Therefore, mark yourself honestly on these points
and then practise doing what you need until you are satisfied. Then do
another sheet and practise those. BE HONEST WITH YOURSELF. Auditing is a
precise doingness of the following items:
TRs CALM FA IR UNSURE
TR 0:
TR 1:
TR 2:
TR 3:
TR 4:
CCH.s
CCH 1:
CCH 2:
CCH 3:
CCH 4:
SCS:
Op Pro by Dup:
Two Way Comm in CCHs:
E-METER
Trimming:
On-Off Switch:
Sensitivity Knob:
Tone Arm Handling:
Needle Pattern Reading:
Nul Needle:
Theta Bops:
Rock Slams:
Falls:
Rises:
Speeded Rise:
Speeded Fall:
Slowed Rise:
Slowed Fall:
Ticks:
309
Free Needle: Stuck Needle: Body Motion: Tiny Reads: Testing for a
Clean Needle:
MODEL SESSION
Beginning Ruds: Body of Session: End Ruds: Two Way Comm:
HANDLING PC
Detecting Missed W/Ms: ARC Breaky Pcs: Getting Off Missed W/Hs:
Getting off Invalidations: Q & A-ing with Pc:
PRACTICAL PROCESSES
PTP Process: ARC Break Action: Finding Overts: Forming What Questions:
When All Appear Who System: Finding Bottom of Chain: Finding Hav Process:
Pre-Hav Assessment: Listing: Testing Completeness: Nulling: Checking:
Getting Missed W/Hs Off: Getting Item Invalidations Off: Getting
Suppressions Off: Cleaning a Needle Reaction: Cleaning a Dirty Needle:
Getting More Goals or Items: Getting Pc into Session: Getting Pc Out of
Session: Controlling Pc's attention: Creating R factor: Holding up against
Pc's Suggestions: Holding Constant against Adversity: --
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ph.rd Copyright (E) 1962
310
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 MAY 1962
Sthil Students Academies
TRAINING SECTIONS
Effective on the first Monday
after Receipt in Academies
and on 14 May 1962 at Saint Hill
Training Courses are hereby divided into three, and only three,
Sections. These are:
The Theory Section
The Practical Section
The Auditing Section
The sections run concurrently with each other, not consecutively.
Tables will be issued giving the requirements by sections and their check
sheets from time to time.
THE THEORY SECTION
In this division is taken up all applicable theory in Training.
The student is given a check sheet on which all theory items are
named.
The student studies HCO Bulletins, Tapes and Texts as given in his
check sheet. These are studied independently by the student, not in a group
of students.
When the individual student believes he can pass an examination on the
item studied, he goes to the examiner, who gives him an oral examination.
The examination sheet has twenty or more questions for tapes. There is no
examination sheet for HCO Bulletins. The examiner asks five random
questions of the student from the sheet or text. The student must answer
all five perfectly without hints or coaching from the examiner. If a re-
examination occurs, different questions are asked. If the student passes,
the examiner initials the student's check sheet and the student goes back
to a study room to study additional HCO Bulletins, texts and tapes.
The examiner is in charge of the Theory Section and hands out the
items of study for the course and keeps all records and materials for the
course as well as his or her section and all files for the students. The
examiner is available during normal hours for examinations. Examinations
may not be scheduled for certain days of the week only, and no appreciable
time should elapse between completion of study of all item and examination
on it.
The book "E-Meter Essentials," the Axioms and possibly other special
texts are not included in the five question rule, for many more questions
than five should be asked on such vital items.
There is a final course examination, written, which may review any
item passed already in the Theory Section.
The Examiner must remember that to be easy on future auditors is to
invite disaster to some future preclear. The only overt one can really do
in Scientology is poor or inaccurate dissemination.
THE PRACTICAL SECTION
As it has recently been found that theory is more easily confronted
than doingness, the Practical Section is created to care for this fact and
to make the student confront and do accurate doingness. This section may
not then become a second theory section where one studies texts. In the
Practical Section the student only does.
311
Drills and practical auditing presence are the whole concentration of
this section. Any study for it is instantly translated into doingness.
The drills of the Practical Section are basically outlined in HCO POLICY
LETTER OF May 3, 1962, to be supplemented.
The student may have a Comm Course in the Practical Section but one
should not hang a student long on TRs 1 to 4. For there are many more
practical steps to be done.
Demonstrations may be done before groups of students but only if the
demonstration is translated under supervised student doingness.
The person in charge of the Practical Section is called the Practical
Supervisor. This person supervises all drills being done by teams of
students and gives examinations in another capacity as a Practical
Examiner.
The beginning student is furnished with a Practical Check Sheet. As
each drill is examined for accuracy of performance, the Practical Examiner
checks the drill as passed on the student's check sheet.
Until an indicated number of these drills are passed, the student may
not audit.
A final examination may be given at Course end on the student's
practical.
The whole concentration of the Practical Section is based on the fact
that for any auditing situation there is an exact auditor response. The by-
word of the Practical Section is "When faced with the unusual, do the
usual." Random, wild auditor responses and extraordinary solutions are
ground out of the student in the Practical Section. The whole goal is to
achieve a dependable auditor who will give standard responses. This alone
will make his auditing effective as our records show.
THE AUDITING SECTION
The student, when he has passed minimal theory and practical for an
auditing class, is then also assigned to the Auditing Section. While
working in the Auditing Section, the student completes the requirements of
the level he or she is auditing in.
The Auditing Section is headed by the Auditing Supervisor (usually the
D of T).
The Auditing Supervisor does most of his or her inspection by studying
Auditing Reports written by the auditor. In the event of no gain or worse,
the Auditing Supervisor investigates the auditor's auditing in terms of
GROSS AUDITING ERRORS and finds and corrects these by close inspection of
the next session.
The Auditing Section is there to instil the fact that standard
auditing gets results, that only results are acceptable and that extra-
ordinary solutions get bad results.
The Auditing Supervisor is not there to crack cases. The Auditing
Supervisor is there only to get good auditing done. His or her attention is
on the auditor not the pc, an important fact which, if overlooked, will
stagnate auditing results.
The D of T may resolve personal problems amongst students by ordering
them to the HGC. The Auditing Section is there to get good, standard
auditing done. It is not the HGC where attention is all on the preclear.
SUMMARY
It is intended that the emphasis of all course training shall be a
flawless ability to do auditing, and a command of the theory and goals of
Scientology. A student on leaving course should be able to do Scientology
and achieve excellent auditing results.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.cden Copyright Q 1962
312
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 MAY 1962
Issue 2
Sthil Students
Academies
TRAINING
Classes of Auditors
The following outline of materials is to be used for compiling check
sheets and gives the fundamental skills and understandings by class for
Academy and Saint Hill Courses.
An Academy teaches up to Class Ila which is the equivalent of HPA/HCA
and results in the award of that certificate. The highest level of skill of
an HPA/HCA is expected to be repetitive processes, assists, and the CCHs
combined with Prepchecking.
Anyone retreading at an Academy should be considered to need all check
sheets up to HCA/HPA.
While this material will be set out in full in future lectures and HCO
Bulletins, Academies should begin by using what they have to hand.
Class lIla & Illb material is to be taught at Saint Hill in addition
to the lower classes.
This outline is released so that instructors can proceed with what
materials they have, converting to this outline at once and using new
materials being released to keep their check sheets up to date.
It will be noted that all sections of a class are concurrent with each
other and are not taught consecutively. The auditing section lags only a
bit behind the other two.
Class 1a:
Theory Section: Auditor's Code, E-Meter Essentials, Basic Scales,
Dynamics.
Practical Section: Complete CCH Section of HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3,
1962.
TR 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. Model session. The complete E-Meter check Iternson HCO
POLICY LETTER OF May 3, 1962.
Auditing Section., Op Pro by Dup and SCS. Assists.
Cass 1b:
Theory Section: Communication Formula.
E-Meter Tapes, tapes on the theory and attitudes of an auditor, Code
of a Scientologist. Basic materials on ARC and ARC straight wire.
Havingness.
Practical Section: Model session section of HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3,
1962.
Auditing Section: ARC straight wire done in Model session. Havingness.
313
Class Ila:
Theory Section:
HCO Bulletins and Tapes on Prepchecking. Tapes on CCHs. Axioms.
Practical Section:
Handling PC part of HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3, 1962. Pertinent items of
the Practical Processes Section of HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3, 1962.
Auditing Section:
Prepchecking by HCO Policy Letter forms and HCO Bulletin of May 10,
1962 and CCHs. (The Prepchecking is done in conjunction with CCHs,
some
of one, some of the other alternately.)
The above completes the modem level of HPA/HCA; or if completed at
Saint Hill gives Class 2. An old HCA/HPA is prerequisite for entering Saint
Hill training.
The following is carried on only at Saint Hill in addition to the
earlier classes.
Class Ilk:
Theory Section:
Various tapes and bulletins on Assessments. Problems Intensive.
Advanced
HCO Bulletins and tapes on Rudiments.
Practical Section:
Practical Processes section of HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3, 1962 in full and
any weakness remedied in any phase of practical.
Auditing Section:
Havingness. Getting Rudiments in. Dynamic Assessment, Pre-Hav
Assessment. Problems Intensive.
Class III&
Theory Section: Routine 3 processes, various HCO Bulletins and tapes
on auditing and auditing attitudes.
Practical: Review of any weakness in Practical.
Auditing: Current Routine 3 process.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:cw.rd
314
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 MAY 1962
Sthil Students
Academies
TRAINING
CLASSES OF AUDITORS
(Revised from HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 May 1962)
The following outline of materials is to be used for compiling check
sheets and gives the fundamental skills and understandings by class for
Academy HPA/HCA, Class 11, and Saint Hill Courses.
An Academy HPA/HCA teaches up to Class Ila which is the equivalent of
HPA/HCA and results in the award of that certificate. The highest level of
skill of an HPA/HCA is expected to be repetitive processes, assists, and
the CCHs combined with Prepchecking.
Anyone retreading at an Academy should be considered to need all check
sheets for Class 11 skills. This is the Academy Class 11 Course.
While this material will be set out in full in future lectures and HCO
Bulletins, Academies should begin by using what they have to hand.
Class Illa and Illb, material is to be taught at Saint Hill in
addition to Class 11 skills.
This outline is released so that instructors can proceed with what
materials they have, converting to this outline at once and using new
materials being released to keep their check sheets up to date.
It will be noted that all sections of a class are concurrent with each
other and are not taught consecutively. The auditing section lags only a
bit behind the other two.
Class 1a: It is expected that the student know the basics of
Scientology and be able to do duplicative processes.
Theory Section: Auditor's Code, E-Meter Essentials, Basic Scales,
Dynamics.
Practical Section: Complete CCH Section of HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3,
1962. TR 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. Model session. The complete E-Meter check Items on
HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3, 1962.
Auditing Section: Op Pro by Dup and SCS. Assists.
Class 1b: It is expected that the student be able to do a good session
with an E-Meter and repetitive formal processes.
Theory Section: Communication Formula. E-Meter Tapes, tapes on the
theory and attitudes of an auditor, Code of a Scientologist. Basic
materials on ARC and ARC straight wire. Havingness.
Practical Section: Model session section of HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3,
1962,
Auditing Section: ARC straight wire done in Model session. Havingness.
Repetitive formal processes.
315
Class Ila: It is expected that a student be able to get good results
with Prepchecking and CCHs.
Theory Section: HCO Bulletins and Tapes on Prepchecking. Tapes on
CCHs. Axioms.
Practical Section: Handling pc part of HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 3, 1962.
Pertinent items of the Practical Processes Section of HCO POLICY LETTER OF
May 3, 1962.
Auditing Section: Prepchecking by HCO Policy Letter forms and HCO
Bulletin of May 19, 1962 and CCHs. (The Prepchecking is done in conjunction
with CCHs, some of one, some of the other alternately.)
Class Ilb: It is expected that the student have a complete command of
the fundamentals of sessions and E-Meters at an advanced level.
Theory Section: Auditor's Code, E-Meter Essentials, Havingness, E-
Meter Tapes.
Practical Section:
TRs: TR 0, TR 1, TR 2, TR 3, TR 4.
E-Meter: Trimming, On-Off Switch, Sensitivity Knob, Tone Arm Handling,
Needle Pattern Reading, Nul Needle, Theta Bops, Rock Slams, Falls, Rises,
Speeded Rise, Speeded Fall, Slowed Rise, Slowed Fall, Ticks, Free Needle,
Stuck Needle. Body Motion, Tiny Reads, Testing for a Clean Needle, Finding
Hav Process.
Model Session: Script; Beginning Rudiments; End Rudiments; Rudiment
Doingness: Room, Auditor, W/H, PTP, Untruth, etc, Influence, Commands,
Session W/Hs, Auditor, Room.
And other drills as required.
Auditing Section., None.
Class Ile: It is expected that the student have a theoretical and
practical level command of processes for this lifetime and be able to audit
a skilled Model Session with havingness and be able to keep all rudiments
in.
Theory Section: Basic HCO Bulletins and Tapes on Prepchecking and the
CCHs, Axioms, Basic Rudiment Processes, Tapes and Bulletins.
Practical Section:
CCHs: CCH 1, CCH 2, CCH 3, CCH 4.'
Two-Way Comm: Drill.
Handling Pc: Detecting Missed W/Hs, ARC Breaking pos, Getting Off
Missed W/Hs, Getting Off Invalidations, Q and A-ing with pc.
Practical Processes: ARC break action by goals, Finding Overts,
Forming What Questions: When, All, Appear Who System, Finding Bottom of
Chain, Cleaning a Needle Reaction, Cleaning a Dirty Needle.
Auditing Section: Beginning Ruds, Locating Havingness process and
running it, and End Rudiments (I hour sessions only) Short Sessioning.
Class 11d: It is expected that the student acquire a high level skill
in handling the CCHs and Prepchecking and administer these perfectly in an
auditing session.
316
Theory Section: Completion of CCH and Prepchecking Bulletins and
Tapes.
Practical Section: Getting pc into Session, Getting pc Out of Session,
Controlling pc's attention, Holding up against pc's suggestions, Creating R
Factor, Holding Constant Against Adversity. And other drills as required.
Auditing Section: Prepchecking and CCHs. Form 3 and Form 6A completed.
Class Wa: It is expected of a student to have a theoretical and
practical command of the basics of assessment.
Theory Section: Basic bulletins and tapes on Assessments. Problems
Intensive, Advanced HCO Bulletins and Tapes on Rudiments.
Practical Section: Pre~Hav Assessment, Listing, Testing Completeness,
Nulling, Checking, Getting Missed W/Hs Off, Getting Item Invalidations Off,
Room End Rud, Getting Suppressions Off, Cleaning Needle Reaction, Cleaning
Dirty Needle, Getting more goals or items. And other drills as required.
Auditing Section: None.
Class IIIb: It is expected of a student to have a high level command
of the theory and practical aspects of Class Ill skills and be able to
audit by assessment.
Theory Section: Further Bulletins and Tapes on Assessments, Basic
Routine 3 process bulletins and tapes.
Practical Section: Getting pc into Session, Getting pc out of Session,
Controlling pc's attention, Creating R Factor, Holding up against pc's
suggestion, Holding Constant against adversity. And other drills as
required.
Auditing Section: Dynamic assessment, Pre-Hav Assessment, Problems
Intensive.
Class Illc: It is expected of a student to have a high level command
of Routine 3 processes and to audit them with skill.
Theory Section: Routine 3 processes as given in Tapes and Bulletins.
Auditing and auditing attitudes.
Practical Section: Review of any weakness in Practical and other
drills as required.
Auditing Section: Current Routine 3 process.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH.jw.eden
317
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 MAY 1962
Sthil CenOCon All Academy Hats
TRAINING
SESSION CANCELLATION
AUDITING SECTION
Today auditing results depend on the exact performance, by the
auditor, of the simple steps of auditing.
The exact and expert use of a proper E-Meter, the exact use of the
steps of the session, the exact use of procedure and techniques alone give
the expected results.
Extraordinary solutions, departure from the precise material lead to
auditing failures. And only improper usage of modern technology can give
auditing failures.
In training the student auditor must get a good reality on these
facts. Scientology properly used gives wins, improperly used gives loses.
Instructors too must realize that where a pc is not winning the fault
does not lie in the peculiar or unusual nature of the case but with gross
auditing errors by the auditor.
Session Cancellation, rather than other discipline, is a workable and
better policy than scoldings or infraction sheets, as by session
cancellation as a system in training the pc is saved further abuse and the
auditor goes back to discover that lie or she was making a gross error, a
thing students often contest or disbelieve.
Students usually believe the pc is "different" or that there are
variables in procedure rather than that their own application is wrong;
this is a motivator aspect-the student auditor believes he or she has been
wronged by "unworkable
0
processes" or "bad pes" rather than realizing that he or she has
committed gross auditing errors.
If a student's errors are not corrected, the student continues to lose
on pes, pcs lose and the student eventually ceases to audit.
The student must be taught to meet the unusual with the usual and if
this is done, everybody will win.
With this end in view, Session Cancellation as a system is introduced
as the only training rebuttal by an instructor in the Auditing Section for
a gross auditing error.
The system, briefly, is this. When a student auditor commits a gross
auditing error in the auditing section, the student's sessions as an
auditor are cancelled, the student is put back through the Theory and
Practical Sections on those points involved in the gross auditing error and
is then permitted to audit again. All former passes in Theory or Practical
on the subject of the gross auditing error are cancelled and the items must
be passed again as though they had never been taken before.
We have hitherto considered that an auditing session, scheduled, was
inexorable, and we sought to patch up errors while permitting auditing to
continue. This is too hard on pcs and gives entirely a wrong idea of what
is expected.
All auditing sessions given in the Auditing Section are for gain, not
for practice. The auditor is to audit to produce a case improvement in the
pc, not to practice auditing.
When a student is assigned to the auditing section, he is expected to
be conversant with the skills to be employed in the session. He attains
this by high quality passes in the Theory and Practical Sections. He
employs this learned skill in the Auditing Section to the benefit of the
preclear.
While in the auditing section, if the student commits a gross auditing
error violating what he learned in Theory and Practical for the type of
session the student is giving, the penalty is Session Cancellation.
318
This is posted only after the session given has been completed. The
auditing supervisor does not break up the session in progress, although he
may direct that certain steps are taken. That certain steps were ordered
taken and the taking of those steps by the student auditor does not
influence Cancellation of future sessions either way. That the Auditing
Supervisor gave the student directions on what to do with the pc does not
mean that the student is thereafter cancelled.
The exact procedure is as follows:
An auditor's report is turned in by every auditor in the auditing
section at the end of the auditing day. These reports are written during
the session by the auditor.
Every preclear in the auditing section has a Preelear's Folder, of
distinctive colour, in which all lists, comments and auditor's reports are
always kept.
The Auditing Supervisor goes over these folders before the next
session and comments on the report, or gives directions. The Auditing
Supervisor's data may be taken from actual observation of the session or
from the report or from an interview with the pc. The written comment may
be amplified by personal interview with the student auditor. The common
means to obtain information for auditing directions is by studying the
report and looking at the preclear after the session.
If the Auditing Supervisor or Instructor sees that a gross auditing
error (as per list below) is occurring before the next scheduled session
the Auditing Supervisor posts on the Student Board the "Cancellation List".
This list gives the date of the list, the name of the auditor and the items
in theory and practical that must be done before sessions are resumed.
Theory and Practical Supervisors take their data from this sheet after
it is posted and re-correct their students' class check sheets from it.
When the student has redone the Theory and Practical work required,
the Practical Supervisor posts the student on a "Session Restored List"
which advises both the Auditing Supervisor and the student that the student
can continue in the auditing section in addition to other work.
As a student has to do a minimum number of hours of auditing in a
class it is in his or her interest to re-do the Theory and Practical work
as quickly as possible. A session resulting in a cancellation is not
counted into these minimum hours.
That the required Theory and Practical work has been done is easily
ascertained as more than one passing initial will be found on the student's
cheek sheet by the Practical Supervisor and he also can see the
Cancellation Lists of previous days.
The auditing supervisor also makes up his auditing assignments before
Monday morning and should review check sheets and his previous cancellation
lists in order to do this to keep from missing a student who has done the
required work.
A student may be restored to auditing at any time, providing only that
he or she has had the required work done.
Cancellation of Session may occur only in the presence of a gross
auditing error. These are listed as follows:
1. Failure to give a session.
2. Failure to handle an E-Meter at the level of class for the
session.
3. Disobedience of auditing directions given by the Auditing
Supervisor.
4. Use of unusual means to handle the pc or the pc's case.
5. Failure to apply items already passed in Theory and Practical in
giving the session.
6. Nattering about the pc out of session or derogatorily spreading
the pc's withholds.
7. Being late for session.
8. Concluding a session early.
319
9. Cheek of pc with a meter by the Auditing Supervisor discloses gross
errors.
10. Check of pc with a meter by the Auditing Supervisor after a
Class II or Class Ill type session discloses rudiments to have been
flagrantly out during the session or Sec check or Prepcheck questions
unflat or goal or lists in error.
11. Misemotion by the student auditor during session resulting in a
termination of session.
12. A pc blowing.
13. In a Class II or Class Ill type of session, pc throwing down
cans.
14. Disobedience of the Auditor's Code.
15. A pc looking worse after the session, or sessions, determined by
the Auditing Supervisor's personal observation (not examination).
ALL AUDITING ERRORS LEADING TO NON IMPROVEMENT ARE NOT MINOR. THEY ARE
GROSS.
Some tolerance must of course be employed. Cancelling Sessions because
'7R3 is out" is insufficient reason. However, a student auditor just plain
not answering his pc or failing to give further commands comes under No. 1
above. But at all times, the Auditing Supervisor must be alert and must
cancel sessions where one or more of the items above are occurring. Usually
several will be found to be out if one is.
The Auditing Section is not a practice section and may not be treated
as such. No matter how minor is the process being run, it will be found,
because of the processes selected for the auditing section for each class,
that the pc will gain and come up shining if the auditing is done right. If
there is any practising it is done in the Practical Section but no pc may
be put into session in the Practical Section.
In Academies the Auditing Supervisor is ordinarily the D of T even
when assisted, in very large classes, by an Instructor. In any argument as
to the validity of cancellation the Auditing Supervisor is right.
Apparently this also might seem to punish the preclear. But it will be
found that less casualties and more overall gain for the preclear will
result from this system.
If the student auditor is cancelled and is not re-learning his or her
Theory and Practical on a Monday posting, the Auditing Supervisor on his
own judgment should give the pc another auditor.
Do not make the other students carry dead weight. It is expected that
a student will give as many hours as he or she receives.
In case of flagrant and continual no-audit by a student, cancel the
student also as a pc. This can be used as a booster on the student to get
his Theory and Practical passed.
Handling of the student follows, approximately, these courses:
1. Giving Auditing.
2. Commits small error and is warned.
3. Audits better.
or
1 . Giving Auditing.
2. Commits small error and is warned.
3. Commits same or bigger error and is Cancelled.
320
4. Re-passes Theory and Practical and is restored to Auditing
Section.
or
1 . Giving Auditing.
2. Commits small error and is warned.
3. Commits same or bigger error and is Cancelled.
4. Fails to be industrious in re-passing Theory and Practical and
is Cancelled as a pc.
5. Passes and is restored to Auditing as an auditor and then as a
pc (to equalize give-receive auditing balance).
6. Continues to malinger and is passed to HGC.
A STUDENT MAY BE ORDERED TO THE HGC IN NO OTHER WAY AND FOR NO OTHER
REASON.
There is no process to be used in the Auditing Section except those
laid down by Policy Letters.
There is no process specified for the Auditing Section that, correctly
used, will not produce good gains for pcs.
If this system is well carried out and diligently employed the student
will graduate from each class and from the Academy knowing that exact
Scientology works and inexact doesn't.
Scientology will spread as far as it works and no farther. Student
auditors who know it works and can make it work will spread it far. Student
auditors permitted to commit any or all of the gross errors listed above
will do us all a great disservice.
So be tough. And be accurate. Use this system in training.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.cden Copyright Q 1962
321
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 MAY 1962
Issue 11
All D of Ts
Do not Remimeo
URGENT
QUESTIONNAIRE
Please fill out and return airmail to me. I WANT THIS BACK SOON. Take
only one week to complete it. I need your data badly.
HASI Location Date
Director of Training
You now have in your hands recent HCO Pol Ltrs including HCO Pol Ltr
of May 24, 1962, Issue 1.
This gives you a three section Academy based on pilot work done for a
year at Saint Hill.
I want and need your comments and suggestions on these matters. You
are to put the new Academy plan into effect at once as contained in the
policy letters. Having done that you should fill out this questionnaire:
1. Does the system seem adequate to the training of students?
2. What part of the system is hard to understand?
3. Aside from the usual complaints about change, what student
response is there?
4. What do you now need to help you with this system?
322
5. What processes do you feel are lacking in the Classes?
6. What basic theory is missing in the Classes just issued for
Academies?
7. What Instructor difficulties do you forecast?
8. What student difficulties do you forecast?
9. What Changes or Improvements do you advise?
10. What especially do you need from me?
Fill this in and return to me as fast as possible. All class
requirements for Class I are conditional. As soon as I have heard from you,
I will finalize these classes, possibly add a Class Ic or even Class Id and
le.
Then I can give you final check sheets.
Meanwhile make do. Whatever the students pass now can be transferred
to new sheets in a month or two.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd
323
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JUNE 1962
Central Orgs Franchise Field BPI
CLASS II TRAINING
ONLY BY ACADEMIES AND SAINT HILL
Because of the upgrading of Class 11 Training and skills, and the
length of time and staff needed to teach such a course, all rights to teach
Class II Courses are hereby rescinded except for Academies and the Saint
Hill Briefing Course.
No Saint Hill Briefing Course tape lectures are available outside
Central Orgs, and Saint Hill.
Saint Hill graduates may, however, listen to these tapes at a Central
Org, for their
own information, by arrangement with the HCO of their area.
LRH:dr.rd
Copyright (j) 1962
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 JUNE 1962
CenOCon Franchise BPI
PROFESSIONAL TRAINING TO BE DONE
IN ACADEMY AND SAINT HILL ONLY
As all previous experience has shown that professional training is
only effective when done in an Academy at a Central Org, the following
basic policy is to be adhered to without exception.
No professional course (HPA/HCA and above) or retread of any such
course may be offered or run outside a Central Organization Academy. This
includes the HPS (Hubbard Practical Scientologist) course, as this is run
concurrently with the HCA/HPA course in an Academy. Saint Hill graduates
are not permitted to run professional courses or Class 11 or other special
courses in the field.
This policy is instituted and reaffirmed in the interest of students,
who are entitled to the most excellent training possible. The Academy is
the only place where this is continuously obtainable.
Professional auditors in the field are requested to co-operate by
encouraging the promising members of their groups to go to the Central Org
for professional training, and meanwhile continue.giving basic training in
the form of PE-type and HAS-type courses (including Comm Course) up to non-
professional standard. This type of training has great value in teaching
the basics of Scientology, and improving the student's case and reality
level.
The pattern of training is:
PE, HAS and other basic courses up to non-professional standard,
conducted in the field or in the Central Org.
Professional courses to HPA/HCA and above, conducted in the Central
Org Academy only.
Saint Hill Special Briefing Course-to ensure the final professional
excellence and
to learn clearing techniques.
LRH:dr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
324
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 JUNE 1962
CenOCon
CERTEFICATION REQUIREMENTS
In order to expedite the issue of certificates, the Extension Course
Director must always inform Certifications immediately, whenever an
Extension Course Student completes an Extension Course.
A completed Extension Course is still a requirement for a professional
certificate.
The Extension Course Director must send this information to
Certifications in every case, whether the student is in the Academy or not
at the time of completing his Extension Course.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 JULY 1962
Franchise
ACADEMY
EXTRA WEEKS
Any extra week payment being required of Academy students in any
Organization is abolished herewith effective on receipt of this Policy
Letter.
The mission of an Academy is to make Auditors who can audit, and issue
them their certificates.
Should a student leave the Course and return after two weeks a retread
fee of 301yo without further grant or discount of the original HPA/HCA full
course fee shall apply.
The Academy course has no finite duration but every effort should be
made to graduate the student at the end of twelve weeks.
LRH.jw.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
325
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 JULY 1962
CenOCon
Post Public B. Board
CERTIFICATION AND VALIDATION REQUIREMENTS
(Cancels previous policies)
Effective immediately, completion of the HPA/HCA Extension Course is
no longer regarded as a requirement for HPA/HCA certification. It is,
however, required as a qualification for validation.
This policy is re-instituted so as to speed up the issue of
certificates. It is emphasized that it assumes that the basic policy is
being implemented in the Academy-namely that no auditor is released from
the Academy unless he/she can be trusted to audit HGC preclears-this also
implies that the graduate does know his basic data.
As there have been some changes lately in certification requirements,
current requirements are now summarized here again:
I - Graduated successfully from Academy, all Academy requirements
completed according to current rundown.
2. HCO Board of Review Oral and written examinations passed 100%.
3. Anatomy of Human Mind Course completed.
4. Course fees fully paid up, or satisfactory arrangements made for
payment.
5. International membership with HASI in force.
HPA/HCA Certificates can now be issued without delay to any persons
who have completed these requirements.
In order to obtain a red seal validation on an HPA/HCA certificate,
the requirements are now as follows:
1. Serve one year in the Org, in the HGC or a similar post.
2. Complete the HPA/HCA Extension Course.
In addition, no higher level certificate (higher than HPA/HCA) will be
issued to any auditor until the HPA/HCA Extension Course is completed.
L RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden Copyright Q 1962
326
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 SEPTEMBER 1962
(Reissued from See ED No. 404 of Washington DC)
CenOCon
AN ARRANGEMENT OF THE ACADEMY
The closer you adhere to the exact training pattern of an Academy as
it has been worked out at Saint Hill, the better off you're going to be and
the easier it's going to be.
I've been working this thing over left, right and center and it's a
very workable plan. The plan exactly consists of this:-
There are certain classes of auditors, there's Class I a, I b, I c and
2a. These Classes each connote certain types of auditing. Class la has no
auditing; Class lb has some type of auditing. The administration of the
Academy depends upon the auditing requirements more than the classes. You
get auditing something on this basis, you have a class of auditor and that
requires certain checkshects, and you also have a unit and the auditor
belongs to that unit. But if the auditor is changed-the student rather is
changed-from one unit to another until, such as, you GAE him and this
throws him into Unit W, this doesn't cost him his intervening class. He's
still maybe a Class lb, but he's no longer in X unit. He can be downgraded
then in his unit number without being downgraded in his class. It'd break
his heart to cost him his class. He's just pulled an awful GAE and he's up
there at 2a-he's in Class 2a, he's very proud and happy, and he's managed
to prepcheck a whole list alive, clean nothing and leave all the rudiments
smoking. He promptly becomes a W right in there with the new students, if
he's GAWd, until he covers the checksheet or the GAE things that have been
assigned to him to cover before he is restored to auditing. Then he's
restored back to his Z unit. So you see you can shift them in unit, which
is designated by letter, without costing them their class. So an individual
auditor is actually designated by his class, which would be Class 1 a,
Class 1 b, 1 c or 2a.
That's his classification. What unit he appears in is determined by
the current auditing he is doing and these units are Unit W, X, Y & Z. The
unit in which he finds himself is doing certain auditing actions and you
will sometimes GAE somebody down from one auditing activity to another
auditing activity, and although he still retains the classes he has he's
doing another type of auditing.
Your student body is divided up into A and B, and that's compared to
the first letters. The W's are brand new students. They're brand new and
they don't do any auditing, nobody'd trust them near an E-Meter, and a W is
involved basically in just studying the fundamentals, just as undoubtedly
you have it now. The number of W's you have are divided into A and B, and
you get the WA then and the W13 unit.
The X's are the most fundamental and the tiny bit of auditing they do-
they do something without any Model Session or something of this sort. They
go through some auditing motions, and they are divided into the XA and XB,
and that gives you your teams-A audits B and B audits A. So this gives you
your auditing assignments.
Now you get your next line, which is your Y, and your Y is doing
something on the order of a Model Session, pocketa, pocketa, pocketa.
They're doing something terribly fundamental like finding a Havingness
process and doing a Model Session. This is rather elementary type auditing
but nevertheless gives them practice in this line. Then you get your Z and
that is doing the kingpin or the top activity that is done in the Academy,
which is in this particular case, as we are dealing with HCA/HPA, a
Problems Intensive, and when they can do a Problems Intensive from one end
to the other of course that's your Class 2a Auditor, but they're auditing
in Unit ZA and ZB.
This makes very easy administration and scatters your students around
and puts them under certain control at certain times of the day and puts
them in certain situations at certain times of the day. You get this kind
of thing going then. You get
327
class-anytime an auditor gains his class of course he graduates up to
a new unit and you have to keep your numbers balanced in these units; you
have to keep the same number in both sides. It's very hard to re-arrange
two in a unit because they will become a co-audit and you don't want that,
so you actually have a minimum number in a unit of four and that permits
them to criss-cross so that the auditor doesn't get audited by his own pc.
Now, let's take a look at the time scheduling in an Academy. You got a
time schedule that goes from 9:30 to 12:30 and goes from 1:30 to 4:30 and
4:30 to 5:30 and 5:30 to 6:30, and that's an Academy day, and that goes
Monday through Friday inclusive. Now, if you divide up your times like
this, you will see that this is very easy to move these units around and
within that frame-work you have three sections. Your sections consist of
the Theory Section, the Practical Section and the Auditing Section, and
there are only three sections.
In actual fact (depending on numbers of course, that has a lot to do
with it) there are three basic instructors. There is your Theory
Instructor, there is your Practical Instructor, and there is your Auditing
Instructor, so the minimum number of instructors in an Academy is three. If
you had a great number of students these fellows would be supervisors and
they would have instructors under them. Your Director of Training would
ordinarily double in brass as your Auditing Instructor since this is the
most knowledgeable post offhand. Your toughest instructor-the guy who won't
stand for no nonsense no-place-is ordinarily your Practical Instructor, and
your reassuring instructor is ordinarily your Theory Instructor, and that's
about the way that divides up as to who to appoint to what post.
Now these fellows are located on the ground that they are located on,
in other words-these fellows are located in such a way as to make a split
up of space. Now your Director of Training would normally sit in his office
and you use your scattery rooms, your odds and ends of rooms that you have
around, as auditing rooms. This is a fairly practical plan if you don't
have a perfectly designed building for your Academy. Practical would take
up the biggest piece of space and your Theory the next biggest piece of
space.
The characteristics of these classes are that certain different types
of auditing are going to take place, but they are not all at the same time.
So, frankly, it doesn't really require the tremendous amounts of space that
you think to handle the auditing section.
The Theory on the other hand is rather specialized as to quarters,
because that's got to consist of first and foremost a room in which to
study-tape recorder outlets and so forth are put into that room and
everything that goes on about studying occurs in that room. Tape recorder
listening is done by earphones, not by speakers. The Theory room is usually
the quiet room and quiet is maintained. There should be a little booth over
to the side of it or a little adjoining ante-room of some kind, in which
the Theory Instructor lurks, so that he can give his examinations across a
desk and in quiet so that other students in Theory do not hear the
questions he is asking and do not disturb and are not disturbed by the
activity of examination. That's an ideal Theory set-up. It doesn't matter
how many students you try to pack into it or how stamped up they are or
anything. Those are not considerations. You've got to have some outlets for
tape recorders. You've got to have some earphones, and you've got to have
some seats for them to sit in. And then you've got to have a little ante-
room of some kind or another for them to be examined in so they don't get
disturbed by each one being examined. That usually carries with it a
blackboard, and the rotation by which they are examined is determined by
how they enter their name on the blackboard. Soon as they come in they put
their name on the blackboard. When the instructor is ready, he just calls
their name off the blackboard.
The Practical Supervisor or Instructor is not in an ante-room, he is
right in amongst them. But he has a desk in that room. If he has any desk
anywhere in the Org at all, just like the Theory Instructor, he has his
desk on the premises of his activity. He doesn't have another desk
someplace, and no longer in the Academy do we have walking off from the
class. See there's no more walking off from the class, that's the guy's
room. So it disturbs them to have other staff members come in and ask him
questions and other things go on, but he uses that just as his office
space. It's not a specialized instruction space, it is his office space.
And there he sits. And he can keep an eye on training practice. In
Practical you've got to have a widespread eye across Training.
328
Ideally in the Auditing section you simply have a very big room. The
teams are well spread. apart. You get this other activity here-the Auditing
Supervisor would sit in the same room and be able to keep his eye on all
the teams and go on ahead and carry on his business of the day too. In view
of the fact that you don't have that kind of space, Auditing Section
Students will have to be split up into other quarters and other rooms. That
isn't quite so good, but you can make that up with some kind of speaker
system going into these auditing rooms on this basis:
A system like this has already been developed, and it is pretty hard
to install and is a little bit complicated, but you hang a microphone
around the auditor's neck and you connect the pc's cans up to a central
meter and the meter is in the Auditing Supervisor's desk. It's the
connected meter and it has a switchboard. Just by throwing this switchboard
you get the meter reading and you get the auditing activity of the auditor
at the same time. Now in view of the auditor never knows when this is on, a
great deal of supervision can be done. Oddly enough this isn't for a
scattered series of rooms, this is for a wide, large room. That thing is
just internally wired, the Instructor sits over in the corner. Therefore he
never gets up and stands back of the pe or stands back of the auditor. He
never has to approach the session, to know what's going on. Now this thing
in its most complicated activity uses the microphone as a small speaker,
and if you get too outraged this microphone being very close to the
auditor's mouth it all of a sudden can talk back. ThaVs a fairly ideal
auditing activity. You could of course give him an earphone, a little plug-
in earphone, that will be more satisfactory, but frankly any microphone
acts as a speaker. So you could make these things talk back.
That is the type of circuit which is most ideally suited to a bunch of
auditing sessions. It doesn't make the instructor have to approach sessions
to give his advice, to find out what's going on, to find out how the meter
is reading or anything else. You can use a booster on these circuits so
that the meters are able to put out the current over the line to the
auditing meter and the current to the other meter. There is a little bit of
electronic difficulty as they wire them up, but those things will all be
overcome.
Now, there's your Auditing Section. How do these things operate? How
does all this operate on scheduling? Your schedule goes something on this
order-in the morning your W's, X's & Y's, that's the A units, all appear at
9:30 in the Theory Section. And in the morning all of the B's-W, X, Y's
appear over in the Practical Section. Then after lunch your B Unit of the
first three letters appears in Theory, and your A Units appear in
Practical, so they get three hours of Practical a day and three hours of
Theory a day. And everything is done by checksheet. Individual checksheet.
There is no class activity, you get the idea. There isn't getting all the
students together and teaching them how to thread a needle when half of
them know how and the other half can't be taught anyhow. There is this
individualization, but you can have this tight scheduling along with
individualization, the checksheet gives you the individual attention to the
student and the compartmentation of time gives him a scheduled activity. He
knows where he's supposed to be.
That same morning, the A section of the Z group reports to their
auditing room and they spend three hours auditing. In other words, this is
the most important auditing so therefore we give it the most time. And
there's your three hours of auditing, and your B Group is receiving the
auditing during that time. Then in the afternoon the ZB's are doing the
auditing and the ZA's are receiving auditing in the Auditing Section.
On alternate days Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, your ZA's
spend two hours in Practical on Monday from 4:30 to 6:30. On Wednesday your
ZA's spend two hours in Practical and ZB's their two hours in Theory. They
spend two hours twice a week in Theory and two hours twice a week in
Practical from 4:30 to 6:30. Don't try to make that class cliange-the 4:30
to 5:30 and then a shift 5:30 to 6:30 because it uses too much time and
commotion on a break. You just might as well use it that way.
You've got quite a bit of auditing space in proportion to the number
of people that are using it, so your X Group doing its first auditing
occupies one little piece of auditing space and they are weak, so they do
do a shift. You've got your 4:301o 5:30 session and you've got your 5:30 to
6:30 session. That's just sort of a lick and a ,promise. It would actually
be about a 50 minute session. They flip, flop, during that afternoon, and
they flip, flop daily on this. And then when you get up to your Y, you're
doing a little more serious activity on this thing. It takes a little more
time to do it; to get in the Model Session, to find the Havingness process
and so forth, so you flip
329
flop them days so it's 2 hours on Monday and they receive 2 hours on
Tuesday and so on, you don't give them that 5:30 to 6:30. The student
starts in with his X Group with an hour auditing session less ten minutes.
When he gets to his Y group, he's doing a two hour stint. When he gets to
his Z group, it's a three hour session. This graduates him up into the
stamina and stick-to-ivity of it.
That's your scheduling activity for auditing. You find all this runs
off smooth as butter. Now, if you have limited toilet facilities and so
forth there is another gimmick you can pull and this gimmick is a simple
one. That you simply stagger the lunch hour 15 minutes ahead and 15 minutes
behind in your Theory and Practical. In other words you can increase
Practical 15 minutes and decrease Theory 15 minutes, therefore they let out
slightly different times with a 15 minute difference. This is in
consideration of limited toilet facilities, you got other little dodges of
this particular character but actually you mustn't upset the progress of
these units through the various stints, you find out this balances out
pretty well.
You've got to have checksheets for each one of these classes, these
checksheets are carried out on this basis. The student has a copy and the
instructor has a master copy and if a checksheet gets lost the signups are
on the student's checksheet and that's just his hard luck, he has to take
the check all over again. That's a simple penalty. In other words he
mustn't lose his checksheet. You record this on the instructor's checksheet
and so forth-do any recording you want to, but put the burden of keeping
the record with the student and you'll find out you'll get into much less
trouble by doing t1iis. You don't have to have mounds of administration to
carry this forward. Mounds of administration tend to accumulate around it
and the instructors all of a sudden are doing nothing but shuffle paper.
We're not interested in their shuffling paper, we're interested in them
setting students right. That's our basic interest. We're interested in
their instructing. We're interested in getting people checked out. We're
interested in all these other factors involved in the situation. We want to
turn out good auditors. This system I've worked out very carefully, this
system has been in the works at Saint Hill for some time. I've refined it
and grooved it and found things wrong with it and I've been planning this
up for an Academy shift. I gave warning a little while ago that Academies
were going to follow a pattern along this line, but I hadn't perfected the
pattern until now. It seems to me that this is quite feasible. I thought it
over with regard to quarters and numbers of instructors available and I
think it will make a very successful Academy.
The role of the Academy of course is to turn out auditors that can be
employed in the HGC. They have to be good enough to be used on the HGC at
once. Certification requirements recently have been reduced to the fact
that if the fellow goes through the school he gets his certificate. There's
been nothing else hanging up on this. To get his certificate in hand, of
course, he must have paid his training fee and other people hang things on
this in other departments. But my basic intention is that a certificate is
put in his hot paw the moment he finishes up and gets examined. HCO should
have its Board of Review capable and ready to examine the papers of this
person. In spite of the checksheets there is another general examination at
the end of his Academy training period. And the results on his pcs also
count on this, if he has audited a pc through a Problems Intensive where he
can point out certain definite results. That, however, sometimes gets
balled up, people get transferred on pcs and he can't point to a single
result. So that's not paramount, but his auditing skill must be taken into
account.
The point that must be driven home with a student is that the Auditing
Section is not a training section. I just kill 'em on sight if they start
developing this idea. They are not in the Auditing Section to learn how to
audit. They are in the Auditing Section to DO AUDITING. If you get any
instructor who regards the Auditing Section of any of these training units
as a place where they learn how to do it kick them in the head, Mac, and
send him someplace else-send him down to Central Files or something, but
don't keep him on training. When they're in there, that auditing has got to
look good. And if that auditing being done isn't looking good and isn't
producing results, there's only one thing that the auditing supervisor
does. He shows the auditor which direction the cases are taking, that has
nothing to do with auditing you see. He shows him which direction these
cases are taking and the logical course to pursue.
Now if there's anything wrong with this fellow's Model Session, if
there's anything wrong with his finding Havingness Processes, if there's
anything wrong with
330
his approach to Prepchecking-he doesn't learn it in the Auditing
Section! He is simply GAE'd-that means Gross Auditing Error-his name is
posted on the board, and if this person during the week he is given the GAE
fails to make it up and get his cheekshect (it'll be a little special
checksheet he's got to make up now)-if he fails to make it up and hasn't
got it totally caught up, then he is GAE'd as a pc in the following week.
That is the penalty of not making up a GAE in the same week that it is
given. That's a God-help-us proposition.
How does a person get a GAE? There's several ways: 1. By observation
of the auditing he's doing. The Auditing Instructor is not supposed to hang
up over the back of his neck and say no, no, no, you ask about a Present
Time Problem as the 3rd rudiment, you see. He hasn't got any business doing
that at all. It's just observation. Is this guy functional? Is he working
as an auditor? Does he look like an auditor? How are his TRs and so forth?
That's all. He looks like an auditor. Okay. Now, the next one is the
condition of the pc when inspected. That starts with, simply, you see a pc,
he's drifting around and he looks in a horrible fog and he doesn't know if
he's coming or going. That is enough for a GAE. Auditing is supposed to
make people feel better. We don't care how much trouble this person's had.
We don't care how mean the instructors are to him. An hour session should
have straightened him out. You get this very tough look at the situation.
The third method, of course, is by graphs, progress and so forth as
represented by the various papers of auditing which are auditing report
forms. Auditing report forms are done by students on all sessions every
day. They are handed in to the auditing supervisor who is supposed to look
at these things and hand them back. In the following day's session. He puts
them out there in baskets, where the auditor can pick them up.
An Academy has a number of things that it has to cope with and amongst
these things is students getting entangled in their personal lives and
getting so messed up in a personal relation and this kind of thing that he
can't study. It's very much in our interest to prevent that sort of thing.
So you have a very tough set of regulations. The penalty for breaking these
regulations or any one of these regulations is an infraction thesis which
you all know well. You make the student turn it in, saying in so many
hundred words he's got to give you all the hot dope on this and that. Now
there's terrific injustice in this and there's a lot of danger in this
infranction system because you're liable to miss withholds. And then the
student winds up angry as hell about it all and that sort of thing. If any
better system to keep the rules and regulations in force could be devised,
why that would be fine. That would be very acceptable to me. In the
meantime, the only one we have that has worked at all is the infraction
thesis. That's pretty gruesome, has a lot of things wrong with it. Alright,
that's the discipline.
An Academy is as full as its snap and pop, and don't make any mistakes
about this. Academy enrolment has very little to do with the Registrar. It
has everything to do with the quality of the Academy. Sounds awfully funny.
A bad Academy empties almost at once. There's no new enrolments in a badly
run Academy. A good Academy mysteriously picks up a lot of enrolments.
We've learned this over the years. It's the funniest darn thing you ever
wanted to see. You never figure out how anybody found out. You hardly have
time for them to find out. If the HGC drops in quality it takes 6 or 7
months to go down the drain as far as income and pcs are concerned, and it
takes another 6 or 7 months to pick up again. This is not true about the
Academy. It will do it in a week. It's just one of the most sudden things
you'd want to see happen.
What looks like a good Academy is having instructors know their
business, and Schedules that are kept. A precise scheduling and instructors
that know their business. And nobody puts up with anything but excellent
auditing. Now that is a good Academy in the estimation of students. A bad
Academy is one that is kind, is nice, that helps them out. The Theory
Instructor is just, not pleasant, but kind. A person comes in and there is
a bulletin to be examined "What are the buttons used in Prepchecking?. "
The fellow says, 'Vell, 1 didn't quite get that far," and the Instructor
says, "Oh, come on now, does careful, careful, mean anything to you?" This
type of examination, man, is cutting the poor student's throat. They'll
turn a student out of there who will one day be sitting in an auditing
chair who won't know which direction is up or down or South! In other
words, they've done the guy a rotten dirty trick.
So it's precision of information, the demands put on the student
concerning the information, the precision of the scheduling, and the fact
you don't put up with anything less than perfection. That's what makes a
good Academy in the public estimation, not necessarily my estimation, but
in public estimation.
331
As far as the length of time in an Academy is concerned we do care how
long a student stays in the Academy. We do care, because he's using up
usable quarters, and the slower he learns the more of a liability he is to
us.
You have this difficulty in an Academy; the one thing that can snap
somebody around and completely change his life is finding his goal. And
you're not finding Academy students' goals. This is a tough rap, so you
just have to climb the hill without that assist, because I have now found
out that those people who do worst can only really be remedied by having
their goal found. You get somebody who is really stumbling, there is simply
nothing you can do short of finding that person's goal; that will snap them
out of it just like that. There isn't any remedy short of that. That's what
you got to put up with. But you have a terrific process in this Problems
Intensive. This is a terrific package. It'll do some marvellous things one
way or the other and therefore (and this is going to be incorporated at
Saint Hill) 1 wouldn't have a slow student hang on and on and on and on and
on and on month after month after month after month in an Academy.
When it became very obvious to me that this student was going to be
terribly, terribly slow and learning impossible to him, instead of cutting
the student's throat for him, 1 would send him to the HGC. But the only
thing 1 would permit him to buy would be the thing that finds his goal. Now
that is very difficult because HGCs are not necessarily rigged for this.
But 1 am telling you though, that this is what we must do. We can't send
him over there to get him some Prepchecking, or some Sec Checking, or
something like that, because it's not going to do him any good. We've got
to find this fellow's Dynamic and his Item and his Goal. We don't care
about getting it listed, but we got to find that far-and you all of a
sudden will find this fellow straightening out. We're going to start doing
that at Saint Hill very shortly. The economics of it are very difficult to
handle at Saint Hill, because a person comes there for Training and there
is no HGC at Saint Hill.
NOTE: Up to here this See ED has been a transcription of a tape L. Ron
Hubbard made during a Technical Conference with the Technical Staff of the
FC-DC on Sept 7, AD 12.
The following are notes taken by Eleanore Turner at the same
conference after LRH had ceased to record on tape.
How to handle a new student ARC broke with life and everything: Give
him a reality on Scientology. The solution is too simple. Give him a simple
tenet of Scientology and tell him to find things about it he can agree with-
keep him at it. Four students at Saint Hill were set up in two teams of
two, and in turn wrote up on a blackboard 12 things they could agree with
about a pe (and about an E-Meter). Three of these four were phenomenally
better thereafter. I could talk to the other, have a long talk with him,
and possibly square him around.
A relatively unteachable person is one whose goal is an overt against
Scientology.
The chief use of the TV in the Academy is for rudiments checkouts by
the instructor on Friday afternoons. Students are GAE'd on this-so they are
alert during a demonstration. Missed withhold check should be added to the
Friday rudiments check, "Do you have a withhold that hasn't been cleared up
on you?" The other Academy use is occasionally an Instructor demonstrates
how a session should be done. And the TV in the Central Org is used in
Staff Auditor Training Programme.
If you follow too closely any rules, it becomes a Simple Simon idiocy.
You have a well trained D of T, Tech Director, etc. Too many rules
invalidates these people. These people introducing too many innovations
defeats the purpose of the training activity. You need to strike a happy
medium in carrying out the rules. Don't take the datum that students don't
have cases to mean that you can't occasionally pull missed withholds, when
that action is called for. Rule that D of P must not audit is simply that
he must not sign himself up to give intensives. To say that an auditor
can't audit is idiocy.
There's no gradient from simply acknowledging what someone says and
putting
332
him on the E-Meter to find out. You can't straighten out by
administration what needs to be handled on an E-Meter. You say to the
natterer-"Yes, we know it's all wrong, we know there isn't a toilet for the
women, we're doing something about that-now take these cans, has a withhold
been missed on you?"
The "Idiot meter" has been in the works since 1952-an E-Meter which
shows a red fight on a read and stays lit until the read is cleared. Maybe
we'll have it this year or 1975 or 2000. Working on one in London now-may
be it.
The Mark V is not as good as the Mark IV-but is a gorgeous goal-
finding E-Meter. Only a well trained auditor can use a Mark V. It will be
available, it will not replace the Mark IV.
Use E-Meter drills 1, 11 and 111, as follows, over and over-not
flattening one at a time, but in rotation. Eventually the student can read
the meter.
E-Meter I - Reach and withdraw from E-Meter.
E-Meter II - Student A sitting in any posture with E-Meter held in any
way he wants to hold it. Looking at meter. Student B sitting reading a
bulletin that he needs to study anyway (no need to waste time). He's not
reading it aloud. (This drill gets more screwed up-more alteration to it
than any other.) When the meter ticks, the student A says to himself
"read". (He doesn't say it to student B, or to an instructor, and NOT to a
coach.) Having called a dozen or so reads he now calls clean every time he
sees the meter not doing anything. Then he calls reads. Student gets dopey
and funny things happen, he wants to tell the instructor about strange
reads he has seen-we're NOT INTERESTED. All this drill is supposed to teach
is when it reads it reads and when it's clean it's clean-gets rid of
significances on it. PLEASE KEEP IT SIMPLE.
E-Meter III - Student reading bulletin goes along reading (NOT aloud)-
when the student reading the meter sees a tick, he asks "what did you just
read", having student B read it again, out loud now. The essence of this
drill is the recovery of that read and finding out what that fellow didn't
agree with. Getting him to take it up with you a little-the student finds
out about two-way comm. The majority of auditors think the meter reads on
their own voices, that it doesn't have a thing to do with pcs. On E-Meter
III they find out that when a guy thinks sometliing the meter reads. Now he
finds out that the E-Meter reads on disagreements. The student finally
cognites that student B doesn't understand the bulletin. He gets missionary
about it. Don't stop the student, it's not an auditing session-it is all
right for him to help the other fellow.
Instructors can let students in on ARC break read-show them by
cleaning up the ARC break.
The drill has got to be loose-otherwise the student doesn't learn a
thing.
Many are called but few are chosen. Most of the students go through
the course, they only have to pass their regular requirements and get their
certificates. But sometimes the instructor picks a student near graduation
and says, "You get Joe Blitz and straighten him out." If this auditor can't
do this he's about 1000 hours short of being a good Scientologist. You
might have the six students about to graduate straighten up the six
beginning who are having difficulties. Got your students to take care of
their fellow Scientologists.
There are a lot of ways of handling these things that don't come under
routine action.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright Q 1962
333
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 SEPTEMBER 1962
CenCCon Franchise Field BPI Magazine
CLEARS MUST BE TRAI1*4ED
It is standard knowledge that a one-goal Clear is a very capable
person.
A two-goal Clear is a human dynamo.
It should also be recognised that though they have these capabilities
they are not, unless trained as an HPA/HCA, educated and are therefore
incapable of utilising this released action and ability to the greatest
good of the greatest number of dynamics.
An untrained Clear can, through non-education, become a severe
embarrassment not through bad intention but solely because he wants to get
something done. He wants to help but doesn't know how.
It therefore becomes mandatory that as soon as the first goal has gone
to a free needle and been checked out fully by a Class IV Auditor as a Ist-
goal Clear, the individual must receive and complete training of HPA/HCA
level BEFORE proceeding any further with auditing on his own case.
LRH:dr.oden
L. RON HUBBARD
(Cancelled by HCO P/L 31 May 1963, Trainingof Clears, page 341.)
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 OCTOBER 1962
CenOCon
HPA/HCA WRITTEN EXAMINATION
Because HPA/HCA students have a chance to not confront taking their
written examinations and thus postpone until sometimes they eventually
never take this exam, thus causing an incipient ARC Break with the
Organization, no HPA/HCA student should be released from the Academy until
he/she has fully completed all the requirements for his/her certificate.
LRH:jw.eden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1962
334
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 OCTOBER 1962
sthil
Academies
AUDITING SUPERVISOR AND AUDITING INSTRUCTORS,
DUTIES OF
On the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course and in Academies,
Supervision of the Auditing Section is done by the Auditing Supervisor, and
Auditing Instructor or Instructors.
The Auditing Supervisor and Instructors are not there to audit cases.
This can be a most serious error-using the Auditor only as a robot. This is
done in a Co-Audit. It is not done in an auditing section. The auditors
being taught in the auditing section are under a heavy discipline-the
discipline that they must follow procedure and obtain results. A bad
auditing presence, a squirrelly approach, a failure to use what they are
taught, can cause two things to happen:
(a) A Pink Sheet on what they must re-do in Theory and Practical or:
(b) A GAE to the next lowest classification for retraining.
The Auditing Section is that section of a training course where
auditing occurs. It is not where auditing is taught. It is that section
where auditing is experienced, as an auditor, as a preclear. Auditing is
taught in theory and practical. It is only guided in the Auditing Section.
AUDITING ASSIGNMENTS
The Auditing Supervisor (or in some cases the Course Supervisor as at
Saint Hill) assigns all sessions and teams. The following rules are
observed in this assignment of auditors:
(a) No auditor may be assigned to an upper Auditing level until he
or she has passed the Theory and Practical Check Sheets of the lower
auditing levels. In other words, only when an auditor is prepared in Theory
and Practical is he or she assigned to auditing in the next classification.
(b) No Co-Audit is to occur, by which is meant there is no auditor
auditing his own auditor. This makes a minimum of four in a class.
(c) Rock Slammers (as by Sec Check) are assigned to audit Rock
Slammers and be audited by Rock Slammers as this tends to protect other
students from bad auditing and yet lets the Rock Slammers progress.
(d) Change of auditors is avoided as may be found practical.
Auditing Assignments are posted by class time on a Monday and are
seldom changed through the week.
AUDITING ATMOSPHERE
Students are heavily indoctrinated into two major maxims about being
an auditor:
(a) If the auditor is warm and breath can be detected, he or she is
in condition to audit. An Academy or course takes no interest in the case
of the auditor. Courses where attention is dominantly on the case of the
student and not his ability to audit are always bad courses. It is true
that people, while they cannot postulate themselves clear, don't have to
act aberrated. A thetan can rise superior to his aberrations. Thus, the
less worry about how a student has to be audited before he or she can
audit, the better. Scientology is a bootstrap operation. If this idea of
"not in case shape to audit" or "not in condition to audit" is let creep
in, then we'll never make it. So, if they're warm and breath can be
detected, they can audit.
(b) Auditing in a common room is noisy and hard on preclears and
auditors. But auditing can be done under such conditions. It makes a much
better auditor. Preclears soon get used to it. So no attention is given as
to how quiet it must be "because of the preclear".
Admittedly these two factors (a and b) contain unrealities. This is a
case of that's the way it is.
335
SCHEDULING TIME
Sharp Scheduling, on the dot, is the mark of a successful Academy.
Sessions must begin and end on schedule.
It's part of instruction that the Auditor never be late for a session
and to end sessions on the dot.
Time of Session must be tightly adhered to and enforced.
INFRACTION SHEETS
The disciplinary weapon is the Infraction Sheet.
An auditing Supervisor does not give these out for bad auditing,
however. He gives these out only for Infractions of the Rules of the
Academy, including a refusal to follow his auditing directions. Bad
technical is handled by Pink Sheet and GAEs.
OBSERVATION OF AUDITING
There are three sources of observing auditing used by the Auditing
Supervisor and Instructors. These are
(a) Direct observation of the session;
(b) Study of the Auditor's Report;
(c) Observation of the Preclear.
The Auditing Supervisor combines all three, giving the most time to
(a) Direct observation of the session.
THE PINK SHEET
Fasten a packet of long (legal) pink paper, about 16 substance, to a
clip board. Put three piec" of long carbon paper in place to use the first
four sheets. Use a black ball point pen. Put a student's name at the top of
the sheet. Put in the date.
Sit down near the session or use other inspection devices.
Note what the auditor is making mistakes with.
On the left hand side of the paper, in column, write down the exact
HCO Bulletins and Drills this Auditor must do in Theory and Practical.
Keep the sheets together. Look over the Auditor's report later. Re-
insert the carbons and put down any further things the auditor must do.
Keep one sheet in a basket. Give the Theory Instructor one, give the
Practical InWuctor one. Give one to the student.
If by the week ending nearest after two weeks from date, the student
has not completed this Pink Sheet, he or she is GAE'd to the next lowest
class to complete it and any others before being raised again.
This is wholly independent of and in addition to the regular check
sheets for classes.
Thus a thorough inspection of an individual student's auditing need be
made only once every two weeks.
Nothing in the Pink Sheet System prevents comments on the Auditor's
reports or personal discussion with him or her on emergency remedies by
note during a session.
GAE
Gross Auditing Error (GAE) is the action of the Auditing Supervisor
when the Pink Sheet is not completed by the Student or when, in the opinion
of the Auditing Supervisor, the errors being made are so gross that a
preclear is being heavily damaged (such as Auditor's Code breaches).
A "GAW may consist of relegating the Auditor to the next lowest class
or, if violent and flagrant, and directly against an Instructor's
instructions, to the lowest unit of the Academy.
336
Only in two cases may a GAE be substituted for an Infraction Sheet,
and in both cases the student is sent to the lowest unit. First is the
flagrant and dogged refusal to follow an order relating to technical
matters and the second is breaking Rule 28. These two may not be permitted
to come in conflict.
A student's check sheets are not torn up by any GAE, but one that
places the student back in the lowest unit causes the student to re-do all
his auditing and re-pass it.
FORMS
A form for each pc undergoing clearing, giving the steps, must be part
of the pc's folder and kept up by the auditor. This is based on the above
data.
If a pc has had a recent Problems Intensive and now signs a Clearing
Contract this is made part of the Clearing rundown. If done, however, by an
outside auditor, the pc must be given another Problems Intensive.
A Special Form showing all steps and evidence of a clear must be sent
to me.
The idea is to get results, to turn out clears and to keep HPAsIl-ICAs
well occupied and at a high technical level.
ACCIDENTAL GOAL FINDING
It will happen that in cleaning up old goals found or even by sudden
disclosure, the HPA/HCA staff auditor may find a goal that fires and is the
goal. If so, it is checked out by the Goals Finder and listed unless other
orders are given regarding the pc (such as unburdening the goal).
HPAs/HCAs are not, however, to attempt to find goals at this time and
it is highly illegal for an HGC to employ non Saint Hill Graduates to find
goals no matter what the public pressure. It could be very destructive to
Scientology to have a lot of wrong goals about or getting listed.
In due course this last injunction will be released so far as Tiger
Drilling the 850 list by HPAs/HCAs is concerned. But wait until technology
is better. This will apply only to experienced staff auditors.
METERS
Only the latest Mark Meters are to be used by Goal Finders. Mark IV
and onwards may be used by HPAs/HCAs.
It would be dishonest to use less.
SUMMARY
HGCs must afford public Clearing of individuals. Clearing Co-Audits of
the public are a special role and are to be relegated to District Offices
as soon as possible. It is nb part of my plans to retain them in a Central
Org or City Office.
Only the highest technology and most exact adherence to policy can
keep us afloat at this time. These are not ordinary policies. These are
survival itself for Scientology.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden
337
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Gfinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 NOVEMBER 1962
CenOCon
URGENT
OBJECTIVE ONE
I HAVE KICKED THE DOOR OPEN.
FOR THE FIRST TIME SINCE 1950 ALL WRAPS ARE OFF.
THIS IS IT.
OUR FIRST OBJECTIVE IS:
GET ALL PERSONS EVER ENROLLED IN AN ACADEMY
AUDITED ON AND TRAINED TO USE ROUTINE 2-12,
THE UNDERCUT FOR ALL CASES.
This marks the beginning of a heavy rapid advance toward our
objectives of a cleared Earth and is Objective One in that advance.
Use all means at your disposal to effect the accomplishment of this
objective.
Routine 2-12 is a safe, powerful primary clearing action and will
produce rapid case gains.
The objective is to be attained by the following actions:
I . Get all staff HPAs/HCAs and all auditors checked out on a Class
Ilb check sheet as per HCO Bulletin of November 23, AD 12.
2. Get all staff HPAs/HCAs rapidly using R2-12 in staff clearing.
3. Get all Academy students checked out on Class flb perfunctorily
at once and run on R2-12.
4. Get all HGC pcs run on R2-12, particularly HPAs/HCAs or former
Academy enrollees.
5. Contact all persons ever enrolled in an Academy, whether
graduated or not, and get them in to be run on and to learn Routine 2-12.
6. Contact all Scientologists who are being run on goals or who
have been cleared and get them run on Routine 2-12.
The amounts to be charged for auditing and retreading are entirely up
to the Association/Organization Secretary, with only the injunction that
the organization remain solvent or become so.
Do not underplay the fact that Routine 2-12 is actually a vital
clearing step. And do not hold it back because it is a precise skill.
THE HCO SEC AND THE ASSOCIATION SEC SHOULD REPORT TO ME
REGULARLY ON ALL SUCCESSES AND FORWARD PROGRESS WITH
OBJECTIVE ONE.
OBJECTIVE TWO
Objective Two consists of forming District Offices wherever there are
centres or field offices. This objective is in a pilot stage but is
progressing. It does not conflict with Objective One.
LRH:gl.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
by L Ron Hubbard
338
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS, OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead~ Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 FEBRUARY 1963
Issue II
Academies
Sthil Students
ACADEMY TAUGHT PROCESSES
The following processes must be taught in all Academies:
I . The CCHs.
2. Assists.
3. ARC Straightwire.
4. General O/W.
5. Pulling Missed Withholds.
6. Assist type Prepchecking using Suppress and Invalidate buttons
only using a time period.
7. General Repetitive Prepchecking against a specific time period,
big Mid Ruds and 18 button prepchecks.
8. Specific Repetitive Prepchecking against a subject, (auditing,
listing, Item or Goal).
9. A Problems Intensive.
10. Routine 2-12A.
11. Routine 3-M.
It is recommended that all these are not taught in one course.
An HPA/HCA certificate should include up to 9 above (Problems
Intensive).
A higher level course should take in Routines 2 and 3 (BScn or Hubbard
Clearing Scientologist).
The higher course need not be a completely separate course but run
along with the usual Academy Course on different check sheets.
A Saint Hill Graduate must be in close supervision of a course
teaching Routines 2-12A and 3. 2-10 and 2-12 are now included as 2-12A.
HPA/HCAs of earlier years, certificate in hand, may be entered as
trying for BSCn or HCS (US) even though passing the Prepcheck materials as
well as Routines 2 and 3.
No Classification may be assigned by reason of course attendance and
examination only. Time on Staff or Saint Hill training are required for a
Valid Classification even though "Valid for 2-12" is stamped on a
certificate.
With processes settling down we can get our house in order.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden Copyright g 1963
339
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill,Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 MARCH AD 13
CenOCon Franchise
CLASSIFICATION OF AUDITORS
CLASS R & GOALS
(Modifies all HCO Policy Letters on Classes of Auditors)
Goals finding is declared herewith to be a Class 11 activity.
Using Class If goal finding skills as released, any Class 11 Auditor
may employ them to find goals.
Running the goal found on Routine 3 processes is not authorized for
Class If Auditors,
This authorization is based on the.following technical discoveries:
I It is highly beneficial to a case to have goals finding
processes run on it, regardless of whether a goal is found or not;
2. The only danger in finding a wrong goal lies in running it;
3. The public at large can understand and respond to the finding of
a basic purpose;
4. 1 have made a breakthrough in expediting the finding of goals.
5. The longest period in clearing is now Goal Finding.
Any goal found may be Prepchecked by a Class 11 Auditor using standard
prepchecking.
No goal found may be run on Routine 3 processes by a Class If auditor.
Any goal found must be checked out by a Class IV Auditor.
A correct goal may be run on Routine 3 processes by a Class III
Auditor under the supervision of a Class IV Auditor.
CLASS If AWARD
Class If may be awarded by reason of attendance and satisfactory
completion of an Academy Course specifically designated for Class 11 or
satisfactory work in an HGC.
CLASS III AWARD
A Class III may be awarded to auditors satisfactorily completing an
advanced Academy Course and satisfactory work under staff contract in an
HGC.
SAINT HILL AWARDS
Class III and IV awards are given to Saint Hill graduates who
satisfactorily complete their training for these classes.
LRH:dr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
340
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 MAY 1963
CenOCon
Franchise
Field
BPI
Magazine
TRAINING OF CLEARS
(Cancels HCO POLICY LETTER OF Sept 27, 1962,
Clears Must Be Trained.)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF September 27, 1962 Clears Must Be Trained, is hereby
cancelled.
However, it should be borne in mind that education in Scientology is
highly desirable for all who obtain Scientology processing. Continual
efforts should be made to get all such to read Scientology books, to take
PE courses, Extension courses and HPA courses, even if they do not intend
to become professional auditors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden
341
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 JUNE AD] 3
Central Orgs Academies
SCIENTOLOGY TRAINING
TECHNICAL STUDIES
All Academy Students will be expected as an early activity in training
to acquire a knowledge of the Time Track and engram running..
Modernized material on this subject is now being released.
A Revised Curriculum for Academies places in the hands of the HCA/HPA
the fundamental skills of auditing as follows:
1. The CCHs
2. Self Analysis version of ARC Processes (for training auditing
practice)
3. The Time Track
4. ARC Straight Wire Modern Version
5. Withholds
6. Dating by meter
7. Locating and Indicating By-Passed Charge
8. Engram running by Chains
9. Routine 3N
10. Programming Cases
In addition it is expected that the common academic subjects be
retained such as Model Session, Scales, Axioms, the E-Meter, etc.
However, it is clearly visible that no auditor would be worthy of the
name if he or she did not have the above listed skills at his or her
command. All other types of processing may be dropped.
LRH:gl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1963
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JULY 1963
CenOCon
HPA/HCA CERTIFICATE CHECK SHEET
The attached check-sheet is to be put into effect for all new HPA/HCA
students and for all those students presently attending Academies.
I do not want to have any more certification delays.
An HPA/HCA student should not be regarded as graduated and should not
be released from the Academy until his check sheet as attached is fully
completed.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright (~) 1963
342
HPAIHCA CERTIFICATE CHECK SHEET
ROUTE IN ORDER:
1. DIRECTOR OF TRAINING ORIGINATES ON DAY STUDENT ENTERS
CLASS WORK.
PRINT NAME AS STUDENT WANTS IT ON CERTIFICATE
Signature of Director of Training (date)--
2. HCO BOARD OFREVIEWICERTIFICATIONS
A. Certificate sent to be made up-(date). Number
B. Recorded in log book and sent to WW for LRH to sign. --(date) C.
Received back and filed in Val Doc_-----'-(date).
Signature
3. ACCOUNTS
Is course paid for or other satisfactory arrangement made for payment?
Yes___No_ qignature Accts_ -(date)-
4. MEMBERSHIPS
Does student have International Membership in force? Yes------No
Expiration Date- ignature Memberships-- (date)
5. DIRECTOR OF TRAINING
Student has completed class work (date)-
Signature Director of Training
6.DIRECTOR OFPROCESSING
Oral Exam given--(date), Written Exam given date)
Signature Director of Processing-
(Attach Oral Exam Check Sheet, Auditor Reports and student's Answer
Sheets)
7. HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
A. Oral and Written Exams reviewed and graded (date)
Flunked Oral--(date) Flunked Written____(date)
Passed Oral date) Passed Written-(date)
If either or both flunked, Check Sheet is returned to Director of
Training and exam papers sent to Academy Admin to file in Student's Folder.
If both exams passed, student may then make certificate application,
and exam papers are sent to Academy Admin to file in Student's Folder.
B. Certificate Application:completed- Not completed-- (date)-
If Certificate Application is not completed, Check Sheet is returned
to Director of Training and Certificate Application form sent to Academy
Admin to file in Student's Folder.
If Certificate Application form completed, it is attached to Check
Sheet and:-
8. HCO BOARD OFREVIEWICERTIFICATIONS
A. Memberships rechecked if past expiration date in 4 above. If no
present membership graduate is told to get one immediately.
B. Certificate dated ( ), sealed and issued to graduate--(date)
C. Recorded in log book- Address/CF informed- HCO WW
informed-
Signature of HCO Bd Review/Certifications
9. ACADEMY ADMINISTRATOR files Check Sheet and Certificate Application
form in Student's Folder and transfers folder to Auditor's file.
10. If graduate not going on staff, HCO FRANCHISE SECRETARY WW
notified of
name and address of graduate for inclusion of HCO WW Field mailings.
Alternatively graduate applies for HCO Franchise immediately on graduation,
if situated outside a promulgated Central Ora, Control Area. If situated
within a Central Org Control Area, graduate placed on Interim DO
arrangements.
343
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 JULY 1963
CenOCon
Franchise
Students Sthil
Not for M.A.
CURRENT PLANNING
(Staff Meeting Material)
It may help you to know the immediate future planning in Scientology.
Research-wise O.T. is wrapped up. It's just a matter of getting the
data out, getting it applied. The Track is complicated. The length of time
in processing is long. But this is offset by the fact that if you get
consistent TA action the case will eventually make O.T.
ORGANIZATION OF SUBJECT
I am dividing Scientology data into five levels and 1 think you will
see the usefulness of this.
First Level: Scientolopy One
Useable data about living and life, applicable without training,
presented in Continental Magazines and booklets. This is for anyone. It
contains assists as its auditing level. You have much of this already
around. It is a complete unit in itself. "Be Right With Scientology."
Second Level: Scientology Two
Academy HPA/HCA accomplishment level. Scientology for use in spiritual
healing. This is a healing strata, using the wealth of past processes which
produced results on various illnesses. I am shortly sending out
questionnaires to get all Healing process results as a research project.
The auditing level is Reach and Withdraw and Repetitive Processes. The
target is human illness. We have never entered this field but as we are not
thanked for staying out of it, we might as well dominate it. It is a good
procurement area.
Third Level: Scientology Three
Clearing and O.T. preparatory levels including advanced auditing above
HPA/HCA Level. The work on this was more or less suspended when it became
obvious that O.T. had to be attained. Includes key out clearing and other
sub O.T. states. However, much technology exists on it. This is the level
of the better human being.
Fourth Level: Scientology Four
Processes to O.T., Saint Hill Special Briefing Course 1963 type
technology and targets.
Fifth Level: Scientology Five
Scientology applied at a high echelon to social, political and
scientific problems. This requires the earlier levels and a high state of
training on theoretical and wide application levels.
Data for levels one to four is mostly already researched, most of it
is in your hands and many publications already exist. Level Three needs a
lot of codifying but is not difficult to assemble. You'll see a lot of
Level One now from me for magazines and a lot of new booklets using older
materials. Level Four is more or less complete, more so now than three.
This brings a lot of order to our technical and gets us past the "past
lives" scramble and other points which slow dissemination by relegating
these to upper levels. Lord knows we, have enough fascinating data at Level
One without feeding the public Level Four.
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
We are neating up the corporate structures of Scientology, using each
org as a company whose majority shares are owned by a central company. This
makes the structure easier to handle and better off for tax purposes. The
instructions on this will soon be released. Shares and Life Memberships
will all be properly adjusted.
ORGANIZATIONAL ATTITUDE
Finding exactly who we're up against on Earth (the A.M.A.) helped. But
finding exactly what each one of us faces and how in the Between Lives Area
bids for a change of mood.
We're not now in this for play. Our personal futures depend on keeping
going and making no major flubs. It isn't a question of is there something
else. There isn't. Nobody can be half in and half out of Scientology.
Scientologists are Scientologists no matter what they do for a living.
If we're going to make this we have to work at it personally,
administratively and as a group and work well.
The prize is regaining self and going free. The penalty for our
failure is condemnation to an eternity of pain and amnesia for ourselves
and for our friends and for this planet.
If we fail we've had it. It's not just a matter of getting killed.
It's a matter of getting killed and killed and killed life after life
forever more. Even if you have no great reality on this now you will soon
enough. But probably you already understand it.
Those guys up there mean business. We've got to match or better their
energy level and dedication or we lose.
We've been given this priceless chance.
We must make good.
The hour lost on natter, the slow down time because of some petty ARC
Break have to be salvaged.
We haven't any time for doubts and maunderings.
We're the elite of Planet Earth, but that's only saying we're the not
quite gone in the graveyard of the long gone.
Somehow, despite our condition and the degraded environment we're in,
we've got to keep the dedication and the guts to carry through no matter
what comes. And carry through.
And that's our future.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd
(See also HCO Policy Letter 21 August 1963,
Change of Organization Targets, Volume 2, Page 95.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 APRIL 1965
Remimeo
TECH
LEVEL 0 COMM COURSE
All Level 0 courses wherever taught must begin with the Dublin type PE
Comm Course.
It will be called the Zero Comm Course.
This consists of the same TRs as the real Comm Course but run without
the coaching flunking.
The TRs were released in London after 1956.
Naturally this may not be put in on students already in the 0 course
at the time this is received but may be begun on the next students to enrol
on that course the first Monday after this is received.
Itsa, with its premature acknowledgements has not been successful in
making good auditors. What is needed is auditors who will run processes
without dawdling or changing the commands or changing the process because
the pc had a somatic. Auditing worked better when we didn't train pcs to
itsa for hours on one command. We used to do much better on repetitive
commands. It was how many commands were answered per unit of auditing time
that made cases gain.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:wmc.rd Copyright (D 1965
346
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MAY 1965
Issue III
Remirneo
Students
TECH DIVISION
ACADEMY COURSES
GENERAL REMARKS
ZERO COURSES
HUBBARD RECOGNIZED SCIENTOLOGIST
On all new cheek sheets of Zero Courses, include the following on both
the (Theory) Certificate Course and the (Practical) Classification Course:
1 . E-Meter Tone Arm.
2. Analysis of Case Condition by Tone Arm.
3. HCO Policy Letter of Apr 2, 1965 and (on Classification Course)
drills for same.
TRs WITH METER
All Academy TRs will now be done with an E-Meter before the student
and his coach holding the cans, whether the Meter is being used or not.
AUDITOR'S REPORT
All Academy TRs and auditing for supervisor inspection must have an
Auditor's Report form close to the student's hand, whether kept or not.
Materials on how to keep an Auditor's Report must be included on both
Zero Courses (Certificate and Classification).
If a report is actually written during the drill or session the
student must be made to put it carefully in a folder and file it.
This is all part of his training.
FIRM POLICY
A student must be trained only with the tools of his trade to hand.
Therefore in an Academy the Supervisor must not omit what an auditor
actually uses in sessions whether it is covered in the levels training or
not.
This therefore includes a card table, a ball point, as well as a Meter
and a preelear" and an Auditor's Report.
Do not let a student be trained with the tools absent. In upper levels
the unfamiliarity of the tools causes them to stumble.
Academies may not supply Meters or give away Auditor's Report pads,
work sheets or ball points. If no Meter is available use a similarly
coloured and shaped box with a dial painted on it and cards and cans
attached and urge the student to get a Meter. The Academy furnishes card
tables and chairs. An Academy must not use solid desks or solid tables in
training as they are too hard to move about and too expensive.
ZERO VOCABULARY
The 13 word Vocabulary belongs in the Beginning Scientology Course.
A Zero student is expected to learn all common Scientology words in
current use up to the number of 200.
ZERO CERTIFICATE COURSE
A student is supposed to study evenings and week-ends during the day-
Zero Certificate Course-and any day-Certificate Course. The evening student
is supposed to study on week-ends during the Evening Certificate Course and
evenings on the Week-End Certificate Course. Those not so studying must be
reported to Ethics. Supervisors must assign what is to be studied off
course.
This is true of all Certificate Courses.
Classification Course students must frequent the Free Scientology
Centre when not in class in those periods assigned to study in the
Certificate Course. If not in action at the Free Scientology Centre, the
student is expected to be gathering his Auditor's Reports elsewhere for
presentation to the Examiner as Examination is to occur at the exact end of
the Classification Course completed check sheet, no matter when that
occurs.
EXAMINATIONS
Zero Certificate Exams and all other Certificate Exams consist of
verifying that the data was actually studied.
ZERO CLASSIFICATION
Exams are by written Exam and by inspection of the submitted auditing
reports.
Where there is not yet a Department of Review, the student who fails
is returned to Course. It will be found however that this is a very
catastrophic procedure and a Review Cramming Section should be instituted
as soon as possible. When it is there, an Examiner never returns the
student to Course but sends to Review.
TWIN CHECKING
Twin Checking proceeds with the slight change that the twins are not
co-auditors, but may assist each other by auditing if they wish but not
with regular sessions on Course time.
Twins are for Theory Checking on the Certification Course and for
Practical Drills on the Classification Course.
Until all check sheets and materials are to hand the D of T must cope.
Additions to a check sheet may be written in on old check sheets but not
while the student is on it, and only for the next student to be given it.
ZERO COURSE
The basic point of Zero today is Find the Auditor. "Look at me who am
IT' "Who would I have to be to audit you?" is the type of process that best
defines the Level- Recognition.
LRH:mh.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
[Note: The 13 word Vocabulary referred to above can be found in Volume 2,
Pages 95 & 96.)
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT
GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JANUARY 1958
ACCs
HPA/HCA
An ACC is a special activity. It may modify HCA/HPA but not
necessarily. What is good in an ACC is generally taught in HPA/HCA
sometime. HPA/HCA is a tougher course by far and must prepare a student for
all eventualities. Thus HCA/HPA must cover all types of processing and
theory. Clearing a student is riot the province of HCAjHPA. Teaching how to
clear is the emphasis. If they get clear it's incidental. They're all
auditors in HCA/HPA.
LRH
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 NOVEMBER 195 8
ACC RECORDS
HCO now owns ACC records.
ACC files worldwide all go to London when fairly complete locally.
HCO Board of Review completes ACC files, does all correspondence, etc.
LRH:mp.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 JANUARY 1959
(Issued at Washington)
(HCO PERSONNEL ONLY)
INSTRUCTORS OR HCO STAFF
PROCESSING PAST ACC STUDENTS
Instructors or HCO staff processing as preclears students who have
appeared on an ACC course during the past two years, or forthcoming two
years, for money are required to refund HCO 75% of all monies so received.
LRH:mp.cdon
L. RON HUBBARD
349
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 FEBRUARY 1960
CenOCon
HCO Board of Review
ACC Personnel
ACC FILES
Immediately an ACC is completed, ACC files become the responsibility
of the HCO Board of Review at the place where the ACC was conducted. The
procedure for dealing with ACC files is as follows:-
Immediately at the end of the course, ACC Administrator turns over ACC
Log and student's. profiles to the local HCO Communicator, who forwards
them immediately to ACC Conductor. When ACC Conductor has seen them they
are filed permanently at HCO WW, Saint Hill. All other files and records
are handed to the local HCO Board of Review.
A definite date by which DScn/HGS requirements must be met in order to
qualify for the degree from that particular ACC should be set by the ACC
Conductor Chief Instructor and HCO Board of Review. It is the
responsibility of the Chief Instructor to see that a date is set and
approved by the ACC Conductor, and that the HCO Board of Review is
informed.
The local HCO Board of Review holds all ACC student folders and other
ACC papers necessary to his job, doing whatever communicating, testing,
correspondence, etc, that is necemry to the issuance of degrees and
qualifications from that ACC until the final date set is reached. At this
point, he completes his records and forwards all the files, materials and
records from that ACC to HCO WW at Saint Hill. He may still receive some
communications and correspondence from time to time. If so, he handles it
if possible, or refers the matter to HCO WWI.
Peter Hemery HCO Secretary WW for L, RON HUBBARD
LRH:js.vmm.cden Copyright (D 1960
350
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 FEBRUARY 1960
CenOCon
ACC HATS
The following hat write ups have been approved by LRH:
ACC Supervisor
PURPOSE: To ensure for HCO that the administration of an Advanced
Clinical Course runs smoothly from beginning to end. That proper quarters
are secured in accordance with HCO Policy. That all required supplies and
materials are acquired and on hand as scheduled.
ACCs are L. Ron Hubbard's special courses, personally taught by him,
scheduled by him and are sponsored for him by an HCO Office.
An HCO ACC Supervisor's primary duty is to see that adequate quarters
are secured and that all needed materials and supplies are obtained.
HCO Sponsors an ACC, and Central Organization staff assist in carrying
out the requirements for an ACC-i.e., the Organization Secretary is
furnished a copy of the Master List of requirements for an ACC; he normally
secures a proper building, has it thoroughly checked over per requirements,
sees that Material Department acquires and places proper supplies and
materials in the ACC building, and that everything is on hand before an ACC
begins. (A copy of the Master List is furnished Material also.) ,
ACC Supervisor maintains a checklist to ensure that everything
required gets done. Sample Checklist:
1. ACC building obtained
2. Mailings sent announcing ACC
3. Announced in Org Magazine
4. All ACC posts filled -
5. ACC hat folders given ACC personnel by HCO See
6. All ACC personnel checked out on their hats by HCO See
7. All items on Master List completed
8. All mimeoing completed by HCO & delivered
9. (Other as needed.)
ACC Supervisor keeps LRH posted on status of affairs-e.g., readiness
of building, number of ACC applications on hand, number expected, number
paid, etc, and any other data as he may request.
(Note: "Master List of Materials Required for an ACC" will be found in
an ACC Supervisor's hat folder.)
ACC Chief Instructor's Hat
PURPOSE: To turn out auditors who are responsible for clearing their
pcs and who know and can use the best methods of doing so. To make an ACC
the greatest real education on this planet.
ORDERS: Directly under ACC Conductor. It is an HCO post.
POST: During ACCs, ACC Classroom, secondarily, ACC Instructor's
office. Between ACCs at home address or as otherwise arranged with HCO WW.
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES:
1. Trains students.
2. Sees that data communicated to students is real, clear, and is
understood and can
be supplied by them as their own.
3. Sees to it that results of course are such that ACCs have a growing
and continuing
reputation of excellence among Srientologists and public.
351
4. Sees that stable data and instructions of ACC Conductor are
carried out and observed.
5. Keeps ACC Conductor informed.
6. Sees that ACC Administrator functions.
7. Determines conduct and teaching procedure of ACC Instructors.
Arranges for lectures by Instructors.
8. Stays in 2-way comm with ACC Instructors, personnel, students
and course Conductor.
9. Arranges course scheduling in consultation with ACC Conductor.
Builds schedule around ACC Conductor's lectures.
10. Sees that course comm-lines with HCO WW and local HCO/HASI are
kept free and open. Establishes lines as necessary.
11. May be required to take charge of pilot, experimental, or model
courses other
1 than ACCs as specified by LRH at HCS/BScii or HCA/HPA or other
levels.
12. Is answerable for anything that happens or doesn't happen on
course.
13. Is answerable for the quality of auditing demonstrated by former
students after their departure from course.
ACC Instructor Hat
PURPOSE: To train the best auditors on earth.
Works directly under ACC Chief Instructor, who is under ACC Conductor.
POST: ACC Classroom; secondarily, ACC Instructor's office.
DUTIES:
1. Makes auditors.
2. Owns and puts into effect instructions from ACC Chief and ACC
Conductor.
3. Runs tight 8C with understandable ARC on students; includes
keeping their hats straight.
4. Keeps alert for ways and means of improving training.
5. Is fully responsible for students' degree of auditing skill, or
lack of it, for their behavior as,students, and for their beingness as
preclears.
6. Is responsible not only for putting out clear, correct data and
instructions, but for getting it owned, understood and used by students.
7. Teaches pilot courses at HCA/HPA or HCS/BScn level as required
by HCO.
8. Keeps Chief Instructor informed about any unusual procedures or
instructions. If very non-routine, checks with Chief before employing them.
9. Maintains 2-way comm with ACC Conductor, Chief Instructor, other
instructors, Administrator, Clerk and students.
ACC Clerk Hat
PURPOSE: To create an orderly ACC by performing efficiently the
routine work of
ACC Administration.
The ACC Clerk works directly under the ACC administrator, who is under
the
ACC Chief Instructor, who is under the ACC Conductor. It is an HCO
post.
POST: The ACC Instructor's office for paper work, filing, etc, the ACC
Classroom for picking up auditors' reports and infraction sheets,
distributing students' mail, delivering
messages to instructors, etc; the door to the ACC lecture room during
LRH lectures, to
handle any bodies coming or going. (He/She is entitled to hear LRH's
lectures.)
Note: The ACC Clerk will be instructed in any unfamiliar duties by the
ACC Administrator.
REGULARDUTIES-
I . Answering phone and taking messages.
2. Handling visitors.
3. Handling course paper work-includes collecting, checking, filing
auditors' reports, Infraction sheets, homework, etc. Routine issuance of
infraction theses.
4. Keeping ACC supplies in order, and notifying ACC Administrator
when anything needful to course is running out.
5. Course typing and stencil cutting.
6. Pick up and delivery of mail and messages between local HCO/HASI
and the ACC.
352
7. Assists at Registration of students.
8. Prepares ACC roll book.
9. Administers and scores APAJOCAs and IQ to late-entering
students. (The course before-and-after tests are normally scored by the
students.)
10. Grading any written tests that may be given during the course.
11. Seeing that coffee or tea is ready for instructors at certain
breaks.
12. Referring students to Instructors if they ask questions about
Scientology data; referring them to their auditor, if they start asking
about their cases.
The ACC Clerk is required throughout the final Saturday of the course.
ACC Schedules
PURPOSE: To set a time for Congresses & ACCs.
POST: Wherever found, or c/o HCO WW.
DUTIES:
1 . To establish starting and ending dates for Congresses and ACCs
and to obtain agreement on these between LRH and all other interested
parties.
2. To make sure these dates are known to all concerned.
ACC Administrator Hat
PURPOSE: To ensure a smooth-running ACC as regards material.
Works under ACC Chief Instructor and ACC Conductor. Supervises ACC
Clerk.
POST: ACC Instructor's Office.
DUTIES
I . To furnish ACC Supervisor, wherever an ACC is given, with a list
of material needed for ACC and to make certain that these are on hand in
the quantities needed and at the time required.
2. To keep the ACC Master List (of such materials) up to date and
adapted to the current course.
3. To predict what will be needed, where and when, for an ACC, and
make sure it arrives.
4. Stays in comm with ACC Chief Instructor and ACC Conductor so
that material requirements are known and fulfilled on schedule.
5. Keeps ACC Log.
6. Instructs ACC Clerk and makes certain his/her work is being done
in an orderly way. (See ACC Clerk's Hat for duties.)
7. Is responsible for all ACC Material during course, and for
turning over ACC Files to local HCO Board of Review (for eventual shipment
to St Hilt), at course conclusion.
8. Carries on person to ACCs:
(a) Logs of prior ACCs.
(b) Copies of standard ACC issue mimeoed (roneoed) material.
(c) Standard issue booklets.
(d) Copy of ACC Master List and spare copies of ACC personnel hats.
9. Keeps memoranda and exchanges dispatches concerning ACC as
required by Chief Instructor.
10. Obtains ACC material direct from local HCO or HASI Material
Administrator, with whatever amount of 8C and ARC is effective. The correct
line is through ACC Supervisor to HASI Material Administrator with direct
liaison between ACC Administrator and HASI Material Administrator. Should
this line break down, be effective.
11. At end of course, hands ACC log and student profiles to HCO
Communicator to send to LRH (and then direct to ACC file to HCO WW). Hands
all other ACC files
to local HCO Board of Review.
Peter Hemery
HCO Secretary WW
LRH:js.bp.rd for
Copyright Q 1960
L. RON HUBBARD
353
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 MARCH 1960
(Reissued from Sthil)
CenOCon
HATADDITION
ACC SUPERVISOR HAT
The following hat addition to the ACC Supervisor hat is approved:
The ACC Supervisor is responsible for seeing that two "stand-by"
students are provided for the ACC, in case an odd number of students
appears for the course, or in case the number of students becomes odd at
some point.
The most likely prospects for "stand-by" students are those who are
qualified for the course and waiting to take it, but are unable to pay for
it. They attend all the lectures and hold themselves in readiness to fill
in at a moment's notice. Unless they eventually pay for the course, they do
not get the complete course.
The Association Secretary (Org See) is usually the person best
qualified to know what people are available and suitable to act as "stand-
by" students.
LRH:js.mm.rd Peter Hemery
Copyright (j) 1960 HCO Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 MAY 1960
CenOCon
ACCEPTANCE FOR ACC AND ACADEMY COURSES
It is now Policy that no students be accepted for an ACC or any other
training course conducted by a Scientology Organization who have a chronic
bodily condition for which they are under medical care and/or taking drugs.
These students should be encouraged to take an Intensive at HGC until
their condition is resolved and they are off drugs.
The reason for this ruling is that, for example, on a recent ACC, the
only two blow-offs have been (1) a student who was on 30 grains a night of
Sodium Bromide, Chloral Hydrate and gentian and who sometimes took as much
as 90 grains and (2) another student under drugs from her physician for a
dropsical condition. This student was given only five months to live, five
years ago, and was taking the ACC on her own risk.
Cases such as the above need intensive auditing before attempting a
course such as an ACC. A smoother gradient is indicated, and this could be
done by getting the condition resolved through auditing first, before
allowing the student on to the course.
LRH:js.rd Rosamond Harper
Copyright (j) 1960 HCO Technical Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
354
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OF
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Su
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 DECEMB
Franchise Hldrs
Central Orgs
ACC Instructors
Australia: Mail to all Australian Auditors
London: Mail to all UK Auditors
CURRICULUM FOR ACCS
January 1961
Dick and Jan Halpern are giving the majority of the US ACC starting
after the Congress in January, 196 1. 1 am giving the I st week of this
course.
Mary Sue Hubbard and Peter Williams will assist me on the 2nd South
African ACC starting on January 23, 1961 in Johannesburg, after a Congress
on 21st and 22nd January. Peter (Association Secretary, Australia) is
flying in from Melbourne for this purpose and to study the Johannesburg
test lines. On his return to Australia Peter will teach an Australian ACC
based on the Johannesburg ACC.
These ACCs will specialise in the following processes and data and all
students will run on them.
Presessions I to 37. All variations. Formulas 15, 13, 14 and 16.
Regimen 3 using all the data contained in presessions 2 to 36.
S-C-S and Connectedness will be used on all persons who had a hard run
on the Formulas after these are flat and before sessions are run on Regimen
3.
Assessment will be taught heavily to locate proper terminals for help
before Regimen 3 is scheduled.
Model Session and precise auditing will be stressed,
I can guarantee that all cases will be stably started, some for the
first time, due to our experience on the I st Saint Hill and my research,
and the application of Mary Sue as D of P, and the staff auditors of
Johannesburg who for the first time in South Africa are moving all cases in
the HGC.
Tapes will be made of all my lectures. The South African tapes will be
professionally recorded. The US tapes will be done on an Ampex. All copying
will be done in Washington on Ampex pro machines.
We have had a great technical win, first on the I st Saint Hill and
now on field and off-the-street pcs in South Africa (the roughest cases in
the world according to our data).
Most of this data has been released. The technology of its use has not
been entirely released and there is much to know aside from the bare data.
There will be an early summer ACC in England taught at Saint Hill by
Dick, Jan and myself.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:des,js.rd
355
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1961
All HGCs All Academies
CURRICULUM FOR CLEARING COURSES
(Note: LA and Melbourne are to begin Special Clearing Courses at the
end of this month. This gives data to be stressed.)
(This data may be used in HGCs.)
In the last DC and Melbourne courses, goals assessments were reported
to be taking so long that very few goals were found in Melbourne and none
in the DC course.
This condition also existed elsewhere and on my very careful research,
in all cases where goals assessment exceeded 150 goals, the actual goal was
to be found in the first 150 goals given by the pc. Out rudiments had
buried it. As soon as rudiments were put in, the goal reappeared, the
terminal was found and all went off routinely.
On all long, arduous runs on the goals terminal rudiments were out, a
chronic PTP or heavy withhold had stopped clearing.
Plainly, auditors are in a games condition on goals and prevent the pc
from having one or attaining one. This and unreality on track is the
probable source of all long or bad auditing.
The general remedy for this is to flatten Routine IA on all auditors,
flatten the games condition process where the auditor won't let the pc win
and get every auditor to have a reality on own track.
Several cases have been found stalled on "treatment", the pc being
wildly allergic to any and all "treatment" and thus taking forever to run.
All bad auditing is done by auditors who have no reality on the track,
and the then-ness of pictures. These are seeking to escape and thus pull
the pc into escaping, whereas clearing lies in confronting. Auditors whose
pictures flick in and out and who never linger are "out of valence" on the
track or are otherwise seeking to escape. The remedy is to make such, as
pes, run pictures with unknown when found, not escape from them. Several
lectures cover this.
Q and A with the pc is entirely taking what the pc suggests or taking
orders from the pc. One order taken from the pc by the auditor and bang,
ARC breaks. This is the source of ARC breaks.
All this and more is covered in the Saint Hill lectures of the last
half of August and early September.
The exact lectures are being listed and examinations prepared for
them. This list and the examinations will be sent for these two courses.
It is suggested that the students get at least two of these lectures
per day.
To make your students into auditors, skip the TRs in these advanced
courses, relegating TRs to the Academy and Saint Hill. Instead, start the
course cases as follows:
Find if the pc has ever been "in himself' or herself in a picture.
Unbury and run that picture with Unknown with this command:
"What was unknown about that incident?" Keep the pc in the incident.
356
If the pc has never had a picture 3D in his own valence, run either or
both of the following:
"What was unknown?" and another process,
"What unknown should you escape from?" "What unknown should you
attack?"
"What unknown should another escape from?" "What unknown should
another
attackT'
These last two processes also handle problems, treatment and the other
factors mentioned above and class as I A processes.
Omit Routine 2 out of all instruction.
Rewrite your Pre-Hay Primary Scale to include all emotions from
"serenity" to "hide". Include on the scale in the place of "No Motion",
PROBLEMS. Include also UNKNOWN, FORGET, NOT KNOW. Add also DISLOCATE. Omit
anything that is a brother to "No Motion". Include DENY.
Get assessment going only when IA is flat. IA can be considered flat
when Escape-Attack on Unknown produces no TA motion after this or other IA
processes have been run.
Get ordinary security checking going at once on HCO WW Sec Form 6.
When students do this well, shift to the Not Know version of Security
Checking on Form 3. Do the last two pages of Form 3 before the rest.
In all auditing done on course (or in HGCs) get daily cross-cheeks on
rudiments. Let a student (or in HGCs another auditor) check (but not run)
the rudiments on every pc and point out to the pc's auditor those that are
OUT.
Let students see check each other evenings, independent of days
auditing, but make sure they know how it is done. Don't let them assess
evenings. Do all assessment in class auditing time.
Stamp ruthlessly on Q and A (auditor doing whatever the pc says).
Arrange two 21/2, hour auditing periods a day.
Instructors check out any goal and any terminal found before letting
it be run.
A course completion depends on a student:
1 Doing a good Not Know version of Security Checking.
2. Finding the goal and terminal of a pc.
3. Doing a proper Pre-Hay Assessment.
4. Having Form 3 and a Form 6 Sec Cheek completed on self.
5. Passing a perfect exam on the book E-Meter Essentials plus
Instant and Latent Read.
6. Getting a decent graph change on his pc or clearing.
Any student clearing his pc on either course will instantly be awarded
a D.Sen.
Clear status must be checked out by HCO.
Routine 1A consists of flattening problems (or unknowns) on the TA and
completing a Not Know Sec Check, HCO WW Form 3.
Routine 3 consists of finding the goals and terminals of the pcs and
doing any
available See Cheeks.
These two routines are the only routines to be used or taught on
Special Courses
at this time.
357
The processes to be used to clear rudiments are as follows (supposing
the difficulty has been finally stated by pc):
ROOM: TR 10 or pc's havingness process, run only until question about
room produces no needle reaction.
AUDITOR: What would you be willing to be? What would you rather not
be? (Run TA motion out.)
PT PROBLEM: (When pc has stated it and who) What is unknown about that
problem with -? (Run until needle no longer reacts on terminal, check any
other PTP and run it as necessary.)
WITHHOLDS: To whom wasn't that known? To whom shouldn't that be known?
(Run until needle no longer reacts.)
ARC BREAK: What didn't an auditor do? When? What weren't you able to
tell an auditor? When?
Alter Model Session Script to include the above.
Limit two-way comm to asking what, where, when questions.
SUMMARY
Spend no course time trying to make auditors. Criticise blunders. But
give no long lectures of any kind to the class. Just tell them what to do
individually, exactly as above, and see that it gets done on an individual
basis.
In instructing, confront each student, one at a time. Don't worry
about general confronts of the class, not even a seminar period.
Tell the student to do so and so as above with his pc. Show him or her
how to do it. Skip all extra ordinary solutions. Just use the above. Get a
maximum of solid auditing done.
Spread your teams as far apart as possible.
Dispense with cheek sheet examination except on Saint Hill tapes.
Make auditors by making them audit. If they goof, assume they have no
reality on the track and get the student to confront his bank as above.
Subjective reality alone can make an auditor. Routines I A and 3 alone can
make clears.
All auditor goofs stem from unreality. Reality is found
a. By auditing and
b. By familiarity with own bank and track.
If an auditor on your course has already received HPA/HCA and any
further training and still has no hang of it, you won't educate them to
victory. They just don't have reality on the mind yet. See that they get it
subjectively. And so teach them to make clears.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jl.rd by L~ Ron Hubbard
358
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 DECEMBER 1961
Assoc Secs
HCO Cont Sees
CLEARING COURSES
I will not approve any clearing courses anywhere in the world until
there are a majority of Class II auditors in Orgs and field.
Teach Class 11 special courses. Advertise. them as special as you
want.
All clearing courses fail where no Class 11 auditors exist.
LRH:ph.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1969
Remimeo
BPI
Auditor
OLD ACC STUDENTS
Any and all persons who have ever enrolled in an ACC (Advanced
Clinical Course) providing only that a fee was paid in full, is entitled to
the following:
I Full training as an HDG in the DAC of his nearest org or an SH
or an AO.
2. Student Auditing in Dianetics and org reviews to resolve any
possible case difficulties.
3. Assistance in obtaining any medical treatment indicated as
necessary by competent medical examination.
4. A retread to Class VI in a modern SH Course.
No fees, except for any medical treatment indicated, may be charged
for any of the services above.
All orgs, AOs and SHes are ordered to deliver the above services.
The Public Executive Secretary is to cause his division to unearth all
past ACC records for names and addresses and to have his divisions send
copies of this Policy Letter to all such former ACC students.
Those ACC students who have recently paid for the new S tandard
Dianetic Course may have the amount credited to AO levels or AO reviews on
presentation of invoice to AOs.
It is the full intention of this Pol Ltr to ensure that old ACC
students receive full benefit of modern technical developments. These
students were once promised they would not have to pay for further training
and this favour is offered to redeem that promise at least in part if not
in full. I want them to be well and happy beings wherever they may not have
fully achieved that goal.
LRH:Idm.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
359
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 NOVEMBER 1963
General
Release
BPI
MA
CERTIFICATE AND CLASSIFICATION CHANGES
EVERYONE CLASSIFIED
(Subject to last paragraph this Policy Letter
changes all earlier Certificate Classification
HCO Policy Letters, as of February 15, 1964.)
Acceptance, requested change or objection to this plan should be
airmailed to me at Saint Hill so that any necessary amendments can be
issued before the effective date. If objections are minimal and acceptance
general, this plan goes into full effect February 15, 1964, without further
announcement and will remain the stable gauge of all training, processing,
certifying and classification in the future. It is only possible to
formulate this now that technology to OT is complete.
Signalizing the discovery and refinement of all levels of processing
up to and including the highest targets set in Scientology research, the
following classification schedule has been developed.
It is evident that 13 years of research developed many processes and
styles of auditing and that these are all useful and necessary to the
successful progress of cases.
To open the road to everyone, it is necessary to have a precisely
mapped course of progress. Experience shows that preclears entering too
high into processes without adequate processing and training background at
lower levels will fail.
Technical data now makes it evident that a person not trained to run
high level OT processes cannot receive successful case improvement on them
and that it is dangerous to run an uneducated pe at high levels. This alone
makes classification of preclears as well as auditors necessary. Even at
lower levels it will be found that preclears, lacking training, do not
advance well.
Further it is economical to co-audit to higher levels.
Therefore, without disturbing private or HGC processing commitments
and yet placing these as well into these classifications for the protection
of the preclear and auditor alike, the following rules are adopted and have
the full force of policy. Effective February 15, 1964, auditors and
preclears violating these policies will be subject to Committees of
Evidence.
I . NO PRECLEAR MAY BE AUDITED ABOVE HIS OR HER CLASS.
2. NO AUDITOR MAY USE PROCESSES ON ANYONE ABOVE HIS OR HER CLASS.
3. A PRECLEAR. MAY BE PROCESSED WITH THE PROCESSES OF HIS OR HER
CLASS OR WITH THE PROCESSES OF ANY LESSER CLASS.
4. AN AUDITOR MAY USE THE PROCESSES OF HIS OR HER CLASS OR ANY
LESSER CLASS, BUT MAY NOT USE ON ANY PARTICULAR PRECLEAR ANY PROCESS ABOVE
THAT PRECLEAR'S CLASS REGARDLESS OF THE AUDITOR'S CLASSIFICATION.
Any HUBBARD CERTIFIED AUDITOR or HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR who
holds the actual certificate may train any person to the level of HUB13ARD
APPRENTICE SCIENTOLOGIST and may further train to Class I and by
Application to the nearest Central Organization may have the person he has
trained
360
certified or classified, for which application forms and certificates
will be furnished by Central Organizations.
A full Classification Chart will be published from time Jo time giving
the requirements and processes of every level and concise text books and
answer sheets are in preparation for every class. But absence of texts
shall not preclude training or classifying so long as the materials are
communicated, at least until such time as texts are complete and available.
It readily will be seen that stress is being placed on co-audit at
every class level. While no objection will be made to private pcs or HGC
pcs, the above rules apply as to what the pc may be run on and a pe who
fails to study for and attain his next classification levels will not be
able to be processed at higher levels. Technical surveys demand these
measures for the safety of preclears. Furthermore, training is far cheaper
than processing in the long run.
It will be found that auditing skill varies even within a class. It is
true that an auditor receives no better processing than he gives if only
for the reason that no one wants to co-audit with him or her when the skill
is low. Therefore there is an incentive to be a very good auditor if only
to receive good processing at any class level.
These measures are dictated by a desire to have everyone make it and
to leave a precisely marked roadway from the lowest to highest levels.
It will also be found that auditors disseminate and purely preclears
seldom do.
A great many recent instances are to hand which not only demonstrate
the impossibility of attaining the highest levels without training but also
demonstrate the way cases are barred out at the lower levels through lack
of training and orderly forward programming up through the levels. The only
case barriers now are failures to have experienced certain processes at
lower levels which reduced the confusion of the environment, hidden
standards, etc. For instance you cannot pull missed withholds on a preclear
who has no concept of communication much less the definition of missed
withholds.
Unless we take this step and adopt classification for preclears as
well as auditors, we will find ourselves continuously losing people off the
road and halting our forward advance.
The general Classification Chart Issue One is as follows:
Cws Process Types Certificate
0 Listen Style HAS
I Listen Style, HAS Classed
Assists
R-1-C
Principles of ARC, Dynamics
Il Repetitive Processes, HCA
CCHs, Straight Wire,
Tone 40 and Formal Auditing
Axioms O1W
III Prepchecking, Metered Processes, HPA
Assessing
Old "R2" and "R2H"
IV Service Facsimiles, HCS
ARC Break Assessments,
Programming,
Missed W/Hs
V Implants, Engrams, Whole Track, HAA
Whole Track Case Analysis
VI OT Processes HSS
Own GPMs
Old R3 and R4 Processes
Vil Old Route One and Other HGA
Drills
361
The certificate schedule HCO POLICY LETTER OF August 12, 1963, is
cancelled. The certificate Hubbard Book Auditor is withdrawn. The
certificates Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist, Hubbard Clearing
Scientologist and Hubbard Advanced Auditor are reinstated. HCA and HPA are
both given international standing but now are different classes,
The rules of processing apply to CLASS not to certificate. A
certificate may have almost any lower class stamped on it. It is the
classification not the certificate that permits use of processes or being
run on processes.
While under actual training for the next class a preclear may be run
on those processes. But to be under training for the next class one must
have been classified for the immediately preceding class. One cannot enter
training for the next class, regardless of the certificate held, unless
classed for the earlier class.
Each class has its theory, practical and auditing section. Each
process has its Basic Auditing, Technique and Case analysis for that class.
It is envisioned that training courses be brief and precise and
require exact levels of attainment as to theory, practical and auditing
requirements. Every effort is being made to handily assemble this data for
each class, although all of it already exists in various forms such as
books, bulletins and tapes.
A more expansive Classification Chart is nearing completion.
Stress in any course is 50% on auditing, 50% on case gain. It is not
expected that a person will be allowed into the next class until the
processes of the previous class have been flattened on him or her.
Maximal attention will be paid in the enforcement of this policy to
circumstances surrounding persons who have long been in Dianetics and
Scientology. For these a special class is being created saluting their long
presence in Dianctics and Scientology and permitting the use of processing
as auditors and preclears up to a reasonable class level in keeping with
their experience, successes and case advance, the only proviso being that
actual case advance has been obtained and that their cases are not impeded
by having failed to benefit from a certain lower level.
Classification changes and upgrades will not, however, be attempted
above the Class IV of the above chart and any Class IV now awarded may be
upgraded in special cases only to Class V. No classification for Class VI
is now obtainable except by training and no actual GPMs may be run by any
auditor until the full technology is released and re-classification is
earned. This is due to the numerous upsets at this level (V1).
Classes V, VI and VII may only be awarded at Saint Bill. Classes 0 to
IV inclusive may be awarded by Central Organizations. Classes 0 to 1 may be
awarded by HCAs or above by application for, not of rights to award, but
for certificate and class to HCOs of Central Organizations. The right to
award HAS and Classes 0 and 1 are inherent in holding a valid HCA or HPA
certificate.
Note: If any pre- 1960 auditor feels confused about his class, he or
she need only honestly answer the question, "What processes do 1 do very
successfully and get good results with and do 1 succeed on myself as a
case?" and that will serve as a good gauge of what class that auditor
should have in order to go forward on the charted course to OT with maximum
gain and minimal upset.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd
[Amended by HCO P/L 11 December 1963, Classification for Everyone,
page 364.1
362
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 DECEMBER 1963
HCO Secs Assoc Secs
URGENT
ORG PROGRAMMING
HCO Pol Ltr of 26th November 1963 and the tape of 3 December 1963
outline a new departure and if handled well prosperity for Central Orgs.
The remaining two tapes of this week, that of 4 December 1963 and 5
December 1963 are illuminative of technical.
The Association or Organization Secretary should play these three
tapes and take up the Pol Ltr of 26 November 1963 with all staff, using
more than one period, and discuss and examine these points. until certain
they are understood.
Doing this should give the necessary promotional and technical data
and programming necessary to carry organizations forward with higher
impetus.
It is possible that course costs will be changed. Any suggestions for
this will be appreciated.
Reports of the conduct and results of the staff meetings above should
be reported to me directly.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd Copyright Q 1963
363
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I DECEMBER 1963
CenOCon
General Release
URGENT
CLASSIFICATION FOR EVERYONE
(Amends HCO Pol Ltr of Nov. 26, 1963)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF November 26, 1963 should be corrected and amended
before magazine or general release where this is possible.
HCA is restored to Level III in the table and HCA is ranked as the
U.S. version of Commonwealth HPA. HCA/HPA is the Certificate at Level III.
At Level II HCA is replaced by "Hubbard Qualified Scientologist"
initials HQS. Mark it so in table.
Change the rights to train to HAS and to give Class I to "All auditors
including and above Hubbard Qualified Scientologist".
The Academy course envisioned for the HQS is the old one month Comm
Course Upper Indoc HCA/HPA course. Both Comm Course and Upper Indoc are
however taught in one week. At the end of this course the student will be
given his or her certificate. At the end of this course however, the
student is not given Class IL The student is now qualified to train to HAS
and Class I and to use and be audited on Class II materials since he or she
is in training for Class II. When the student feels ready, he or she may
take their Classification examination for Class 11. No additional training
may be sold this student by an Academy until the student is Class 11, and
no additional Class 11 course may be given this student.
The cost of the original HQS course is envisioned as f 35. It may not
be priced above this figure anywhere. The cost of an HAS course is
envisioned as not more than f 5 where it is charged for and the Class I
course for HAS Class I is envisioned as an additional course costing no
more than f 10. Any auditor from HQS up may teach and charge for HAS
courses and HAS Class I courses. There is no restriction on auditing fees
charged by auditors or HGCs. Charges for co-audit unit attendance are at
discretion.
In short it is envisioned that a person may receive his HAS from any
auditor HQS or above, or from any Scientology Organization, and similarly
may receive his HAS Class 1. These HAS and HAS Class I courses are
envisioned as evening or weekend courses. The only restriction is that
failure to train well before awarding can result in a Committee of Evidence
for the trainer.
Any HAS Class I may take his or her HQS course at any Academy, will be
certified on completion and will be given Classification Examination for
Class Il at a future date without further formal training.
It is necessary to have been classed as Class Il before being
permitted to take an HCA/HPA course at Level 111.
Academies will teach the HCA/HPA course with Level III materials. The
course is envisioned as 2 months in length and its cost about f 7 8.
Classification arrangement is similar to HCA/HPA.
It is not envisioned that people taking HAS or HQS or even HCA/HPA
courses are making a career out of Scientology. They are expected to keep
on working at their
364
jobs. This must be stressed. There is no effort to follow medical-
psychiatric practitioner patterns and have offices, There is an effort to
work evening and weekends running small organizations of co-audits. The
effort is to make Scientologists, not have "patiente'. This dictates the
length of the HQS course as people can seldom get off work for more than a
month.
This does not interfere, however, with someone working full time in
Scientology.
Cost and length of courses rise somewhat as they increase in Class as
the increased ability of the student, if well processed. on classification
level processes, commonly brings him or her more income and leisure.
The intent of this programme is to (1) Open the road for everyone (2)
Provide wider dissemination (3) Guarantee an increase of knowledge to keep
pace with increase of ability (4) Provide the cheapest possible processing
(5) Regulate processes by Class Level to guarantee a more real advance (6)
Steer around rough spots found in the past in technical, administrative and
personal areas.
There is no effort to decrease the income or present activity of any
auditor or organization but only to widen the sphere of action.
LRH:dr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 FEBRUARY 1964
Central Orgs
BPI
CLASSIFICATION
There has been a very wide response to my request for your opinions and
suggestions on the HCO POLICY LETTER OF November 26, 1963, Certificate and
Classification Changes.
I am glad to say that the basic principle of classification of
auditors and preclears has been almost universally accepted, and mostly
with enthusiasm. The scheme will therefore go into operation as outlined.
Some objections have been made on the grounds that certain auditors,
or certain preclears, might be prevented from progressing further in
Scientology. Such individual problems can be ironed out. The purpose of the
policy is to enable everyone to progress through the levels in an orderly
fashion and to ensure that many more individuals have the opportunity to
reach OT.
I hope that most of your immediate objections will be removed by HCO POLICY
LETTER OF February 5, 1964, Founding Scientologist Certificate. This
implements the "Old Timers Clause" which appeared in the original Policy
Letter. By sending in your application you will have the right to
processing (or auditing if you are qualified) up to Class IV.
Thank you for your help in the past. You can help in the future, too.
LRH:dr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
365
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE.
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 FEBRUARY 1964
Central Orgs Franchise Field
CLASSIFICATION
The final shape of Classification Policy, now that opinions are in,
some of them belated, is as follows:
Auditors will be Classified from I to VI as in the original issue.
In response to numerous field requests, the original issue is changed
as follows:
Preclears will be separately Classified, Levels I to VI.
Classification will be on the basis of processes flattened. Each level will
have certain basic processes to be accomplished. Preclear Classification
will not be by certificate but by a specific log book issued to the
preclear and signed by his auditor as each process is flattened and a level
completed. Technology now permits this to be effective and it will prevent
case failures.
The same log book will be issued to auditors and they too must attain
their own preclear level to compare with certificate. Certificates and
current classes to be valid until 1 July 1965.
Classification of auditors and preclears effective date is extended to
15 April 1965. The processing log books will be issued before that date.
The log book also applies to Co-Audits.
Founding Scientologists' Certificate issues are going forward,
allowing up to Class IV for trained auditors and Class IV for preclears.
The actual Certificate must be possessed by the individual to be in effect.
Fact of having been a Scientologist or Dianeticist for years gives no
dispensation unless the Founding Scientology Certificate is in hand.
HGCs and Saint Hill trained auditors may issue special dispensation to
HGC preclears and their own personal preclears to temporarily raise their
preclear class during certain phases of processing.
Effective 1 June 1968 field centres duly established with Saint Hill
Graduates may train to levels as high as IV and are permitted effective 15
April 1964 to train to HAS Class 1 and HQS Class 11. On 1 June 1968 Central
Orgs will be permitted to train to Classes V & VI, which until that date
will only be taught at Saint Hill.
Otherwise the basic policy letter is unchanged. A summary issue will
be prepared and released.
This policy has been formulated with the consultation and majority
agreement of organizations and field auditors all over the world and is
final.
The effective date is now 15 April 1965.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd
Copyright (D 1964
JNote: Policy on Founding Scientologist Certificates is given
in Volume 2, pages 264-265.]
366
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 FEBRUARY 1964
All Orgs
URGENT
ORG PROGRAMMING
With the change to the Classification Policy there are various
possible danger points to Org volume,
Before the public understands Classification they may feel the HGC has
gone out of business or various other ideas may get afloat.
At once all comm lines must be utilized to emphasize that
Classification means better case gains in the HGC as well as in the field.
One gets processed out of a level by the HGC or field auditors as well as
trained up from it. The HGC is there to get peopl&s processing at the lower
levels caught up in the quickest possible period of time. It can be done
best at an HGC which can issue a processing clearance of lower levels and
speed the person to higher classification levels.
The Continental Mag should be issued to stress this at once.
HQS as a course should be boomed.
HAS should be stressed for the newcomer.
Get bodies moving through the shop fast. Publicize the HGC well.
Technically in the HGC stress to auditors processes that take care of
In-Sessionness. What isn't the pc able to do to be completely auditable?
Permit questions to be asked by the auditor? Accept the environment? Etc.
Assess by session parts and use processes to remedy these things. Stress
basic type repetitive processes and grant a right to be run on them to HGC
pcs, to handle Level I, and clean up all Level 11 pc requirements. Get
these flat on the pc. And you'll have wins, wins, wins.
Inform the public of the new Case Supervisor and set him or her on
duty.
I designed classification to get maximum case gains for the pc and
prevent pcs being given loses. Stress that in HGC propaganda.
GPMs
Issue publicly pcs do have their own goals and GPMs. The best way to
get them run is to get graduated up through the levels.
The Invalidation of the idea that a pc had his own goals was a severe
blow. Invalidation of a pc's own GPMs, calling them implants, produces an
instant ARC Break and physical repercussions.
So correct this quick on Broad Public Interest (BPI), regardless of
classification.
SOLVE IT WITH SCIENTOLOGY
If the Org slumps during this transition period, don't engage in "fund
raising" or "selling postcards" or borrowing money.
367
Just make more income with Scientology.
It's a sign of very poor mangement to seek extraordinary solutions for
finance outside Scientology. It has always failed.
For Orgs as for pcs "Solve It With Scientology".
Every time I myself have sought to solve finance or personnel in other
ways than Scientology I have lost out. So I can tell you from experience
that Org solvency lies in More Scientology, not patented combs or fund
raising Barbecues.
FUTURE
This Policy Letter though urgent should be no cause for alarm. Orgs
are not going broke. They are however in a transition period to huge volume
of action and it is costly to bridge.
These immediate steps will prevent any slump, if swiftly taken.
So take them.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd Copyright@ 1964
368
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 APRIL 1964
Central Orgs
Franchise
SUMMARY OF POLICIES
ON CLASSIFICATION AND GRADATION, CERTIFICATION,
FRANCHISE AND MEMBERSHIPS, AND THE
AUDITORS DIWSION
This Policy Letter is a general summary of all current policies
regarding:
I Classification and Gradation
2. Certification
3. Franchise and Memberships
4. The Auditors Division of Saint Hill
Certain parts of these policies have only just been formulated (such
as Gradation) and will be more fully described in later issues. However,
all the above affect each other, and this summary will show how they all
dovetail into each other, providing a basis for an orderly, progressive
framework for Scientology in its expansion all over the world.
All these policies have only one basic purpose in mind-to enable all
to follow a
clearly marked road to freedom and OT. Three distinct routes are
provided, one of which should suit the capabilities of any individual.
These three routes are described in greater detail below.
1. CLASSIFICATION AND GRADATION
The general outline of classification is now well enough known, and,
with various
modifications, has been generally accepted by all as a logical system
of orderly progress in the knowledge and application of Scientology.
There are now three ways to progress along the road:
I . The Preclear
2. The Co-Auditor
3. The Auditor (i.e. the Professional Auditor).
Definitions:
1. The Preclear has achieved the gains, knows the why and parts of
the processes and
the underlying basics. No auditor performance or ability required.
2. The Co-Auditor is trained, can perform the process under
supervision and has
passed a non-professional examination on it.
3. The Auditor is professionally qualified in all respects in
theory, practical and
auditing at his particular level.
Scientology is categorized into various Levels, numbered at present
from 0 to
VII-Le. from the completely untutored public to OT (higher levels may
be added later). Anybody who has progressed at all in Scientology can be
said to have reached a certain level. The processes of Scientology fall
into these levels also. And so on.
To distinguish and differentiate between the attainments and
attributes of the
individuals who are following the three different ways, the following
terminology is introduced:
The Preclear Route
Grade is the word now used to denote the level of attainment of a
Preclear or
Co-Auditor.
369
Class or classification is the word used to denote the level of
attainment of a Professional Auditor. The words class and classification
are reserved entirely for the Professional Auditor.
Hence the revised nomenclature-Classification-Gradation Programme.
Certificates may be awarded to Co-Auditors or Auditors-but
classifications are awarded only to Auditors.
The Preclear's progress is recorded in a logbook, which is filled in
by his auditor (or auditors) as he progresses through the various levels
and attains higher grades. His training is limited to just enough basics
and education to enable him to obtain the maximum benefit from the
procedures and processes of each level. This training is not done formally
or in an Academy but may be imparted to him by a qualified auditor. It is
emphasized that no certificates or awards are given to the preclear.
The Co-Auditor Route
A Co-Auditor progresses in a pair with another auditor of similar
level, or in a group which is supervised by a qualified Professional
Auditor.
The level of attainment of a Co-Auditor is denoted by his Certificate.
There is a certificate appropriate to each level, as below:
I - HAS
II - HQS
ill - HCA (not HPA)
IV - HCS
v - HAA
VI - HSS
VII - HGA
Note that, for Co-Auditors, there is no HPA (Hubbard Professional
Auditor) certificate, only an HCA (Hubbard Certified or Certificated
Auditor).
A Co-Auditor is not permitted to charge fees for auditing. His
certificate has no classification seal.
In order to obtain the certificates, Academy training is necessary
(except for HAS and HQS) but it is limited to definite periods. Successful
completion of the course results in a certificate without further
examination.
. group co-audit may not be run by a Co-Auditor, only by a Classified
Auditor.
. Co-Auditor may transfer to the Professional Auditor level, but must
then obtain all the necessary classifications of each level in turn.
Professional Auditors may also co-audit-the group would then be called
a Professional Co-Audit.
The Auditor Route
Professional Auditors qualify for the same certificates as the CO-
Auditor (except at Level Ill the certificate is HPA, not HCA).
They qualify for classification by further training and examination at
each level.
,~;'~:Their level of attainment is denoted by the appropriate
certificate, and by a classification seal which is affixed to the
certificate. The classification seal is a gold seal stamped with a Roman
numeral to denote the level.
Everybody has a preclear logbook and a preclear grade.
The preclear has a logbook and grade.
The Co-Auditor has a logbook and certificate.
The Auditor has a logbook, certificate and classification.
In token of appreciation of their support during the early days, any
Dianeticist or Scientologist who was in the movement before 1964 will be
awarded a Class IV honorary Classification or Grade IV upon sending an
application to the Auditors
370
Division of Saint Hill, 'giving him or her the right to use all
processes up to and including Level IV if they were trained before 1964,
and the right to be audited on all processes up to and including Level IV
if they were not trained.
A comprehensive booklet on the Classification-Gradation programme is
being printed and will soon be available for wide distribution.
2. CERTIFICATION
It is intended that all certificates will be issued in effect by the
Auditors Division of Saint Hill.
This is a new idea but one which was probably inevitable.
However, HCO Boards of Review must continue their present system of
issuing certificates until otherwise instructed. Full details of the
changeover will be issued shortly, together with a date on which it takes
effect.
3. FRANCHISE AND MEMBERSHIPS
A new look at Memberships has resulted in a new look at Franchise
also. No radical change is contemplated in the basic idea of Franchise-i.e.
the Franchise Holders will still be the most active and important
professional auditors working in the field. However, instead of
contributing 10% of his gross income to HCO WW, the Franchise Holder will
now take out a special category of membership. Two different memberships
for Franchised Auditors will be available:
I . Professional Membership 2. Consulting Membership.
The Professional Member will pay an annual subscription of 15 guineas
sterling (S45.00), in return for which he receives a certificate, a weekly
mailing of bulletins by surface mail, "The Auditor" magazine monthly, and
advice and information personally from the Franchise Secretary at HCO WW.
The Consulting Member will pay an annual subscription of 45 guineas
sterling (S135.00), in return for which he receives a Consulting Member
certificate, a weekly mailing of bulletins by air mail, "The Auditor"
magazine monthly, and also participates in a two-way consultation service
with Saint Hill. He will receive fast attention and advice from Saint Hill
on his preclears and other activities, and Saint Hill will consult with him
on how he achieves his results and success.
The whole Structure of membership is altered, the categories being as
follows:
I . Associate Member. This is given, free of charge, to anyone, but
if the recipient wishes he may pay 51- for a card and ScientologY pin. It
is valid for life. Issued by all Scientology Orgs including the Auditors
Division of Saint Hill.
2. Participating Member. This membership is available to anyone, on
payment of 3 gns, (SIO) per annum. It is sold by the Central Org, and
entitles the person to participate in its services, and receive the
Continental magazine.
3. International Member. This is available from the Auditors
Division of Saint Hill only. It costs 5 gns ($15.00) per annum. It entitles
the holder to the same privileges and discounts as now, including the PAB
magazine monthly. He also receives "The Auditor". The holder of a
certificate of Level III and above must also hold an International
Membership in order to keep his certificate in force.
4. Professional Member-available to Franchise Holders only, as
stated above. Available from the Auditors Division of Saint Hill only. 15
gns ($45.00) per annum.
5. Consulting Member. The higher grade of Franchise Holder, as
stated above. Available from the Auditors Division of Saint Hill only. 45
gns ($135.00) per annum.
371
All existing memberships will carry on until they expire. Existing
Life Memberships (or Shares in HASI Ltd) will be honoured, but no more of
these are to be issued now or in the future.
A separate Policy Letter will be issued shortly summarizing
memberships and Franchise in more detail, and giving a date on which the
changeover will take place. Until that date, the existing membership system
will continue unchanged.
4. THE AUDITORS DIVISION OF SAINT HILL
The Auditors Division of Saint Hill is being set up, as its name
implies, to look after auditors and co-auditors and to give them certain
services.
The purpose of the Auditors Division is: To make all the auditors in
the world well-trained, properly accredited, successful and ethical.
The Auditors Division will do the following:
I . See that auditors and co-auditors obtain good training and give
good processing.
2. Issue "The Auditor", the Saint Hill Journal for Auditors.
3. Set up Central Files at Saint Hill to keep records and
correspondence of auditors throughout the world.
4. Encourage the orderly progress of auditors through the training
levels, including their final enrolment on the Saint Hill Special Briefing
Course.
5. Encourage good training generally by advices and information to
and from the Enrolment Divisions of Central Orgs.
6. Undertake the necessary administrative actions to ensure the
efficient and speedy issuance of certificates and classifications of all
levels throughout the world, and keep accurate records of all certificates
and classifications.
7. Issue and administer all memberships of Saint Hill, and keep
accurate records thereof.
8. Maintain excellent Franchise services, via the Franchise
Secretary WW.
The Auditors Division of Saint Hill is interested primarily in
Professional Auditors and Co-Auditors.
Well, there it is. The new look at Scientology 1964.
1 hope you'll like it.
Written and Issued by: Peter Hemery
Org Supervisor WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, Fast Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 MAY 1964
Central Orgs
SUMMARY OF CLASSIFICATION AND
GRADATION AND CERTIFICATION
(Amends earlier Policy Letters)
This Policy Letter is a summary of current policy on Classification
and Gradation and Certification, incorporating changes as mentioned in HCO
Policy Ltr of April 22, 1964.
The purpose of Classification and Gradation is to ensure that everyone
is given the best possible chance to progress along a well-mapped road
towards OT.
To achieve this, three well-defined routes have been established-the
Preclear Route, the Co-Auditor Route, and the Professional Route.
The data and processes of Scientology have been categorized into seven
Levels.
Corresponding to these Levels, Preclears have a Grade, Co-Auditors
have an appropriate certificate, and Professional Auditors have a
certificate and a Classification.
The rules of Classification and Gradation can therefore now be stated
as follows:
1 . No Preclear may be audited above his or her Grade.
2. No professional auditor or co-auditor may use processes on anyone
above his or her Grade.
3. A preclear may be processed with the processes of his or her Grade or
with the processes of any lesser Grade.
4. A professional auditor or co-auditor may use the processes of his or
her certificate or class, but may not use on any particular preclear
any processes above that preclear's grade regardless of the
professional auditor's or co-auditor's certificate or class.
Without disturbing private or HGC processing commitments, and yet
placing these as well into these Levels and Grades for the protection of
the preclear and auditor alike, these rules are adopted and have the full
force of policy. Effective April 15, 1965, auditors and preclears violating
these policies will be subject to Committee of Evidence.
The word "Auditor" is used loosely to designate any person who is
auditing a preclear, whether professionally or in a co-audit under expert
supervision. However, it is understood that only a Classified Auditor is
truly a professional auditor. Only a Classified Auditor is allowed to
charge fees for professional auditing, either privately or in an HGC.
Consequent upon this, Class I and Class II are abolished, since HAS
and HQS are not professional auditor certificates. Level I has only a HAS
(Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist) certificate. There is no Class I. Level
II has only a HQS (Hubbard Qualified Scientologist) Certificate. There is
no Class II.
When a person holds a HAS and a HQS, he then takes the next course,
which is now an HCA course, and confers a HCA (Hubbard Certified Auditor)
certificate.
At this point, the person may then decide to become a Professional
Auditor. He or she then takes further training and then undergoes an
examination for Class III. If successful, he exchanges his HCA certificate
for a HPA (Hubbard Professional Auditor) certificate, sealed with a Class
III seal.
On the other hand, the holder of a HCA (Level III) certificate may
decide to proceed along the Co-Auditor Route. In this case, he would omit
the classification training and examination, retain his HCA certificate,
and train only for higher certificates, without Classification.
Thus, progress along the three routes is as follows:-
1. The Preclear Route: The Preclear progresses up the Levels, from Grade
I to Grade VI or above. He has no formal training, only enough
specified education from his auditor to enable him to receive and
benefit from the processes of any particular level. This training is
brief and free of charge. A continuous record of the pc's progress is
kept in a Log Book. Every individual, including Co-Auditors and
Classified Auditors, has one of these Log Books and has a Grade as a
Preclear.
2. The Co-Auditor Route: Preclear progress as in 1. above. Auditor
progress is by training for Certificates only, not Classification.
There is a Certificate for every level, as follows:
Level I - Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist (HAS)
Level II - Hubbard Qualified Scientologist (HQS)
Level III - Hubbard Certified Auditor (HCA)
Level IV - Hubbard Clearing Scientologist (HCS)
Level V - Hubbard Advanced Auditor (HAA)
Level VI - Hubbard Senior Scientologist (HSS)
Level VII - Hubbard Graduate Auditor (HGA)
3. The Professional Route: Preclear progress as in 1. above. Auditor
progress is by training for Certificates, and also by training and
examination for Classification, at Level III and above.
Professional Auditors have to proceed through all the Levels in turn,
but at Level III and above they take further training followed by an
examination. The Professional Auditor's progress therefore is as
follows:
Level I - HAS
Level II - HQS
Level III - HCA (then takes Classification)
- BPA Class III
Level IV - HCS then
HCS Class IV
Level V - HAA then
- HAA Class V
Level VI - HSS then
- HSS Class VI
Level VII - HGA then
- HGA Class VII
At each Level, he retains the Classification of the previous Level
until he passes the next Classification examination.
___________________
All auditors including and above HQS who hold the actual certificate
may train any person to the level of HAS, and by application to the
Auditors Division of Saint Hill may have the person he has trained
certified. Application forms for this will be supplied by the Auditors
Division. In Central Orgs, training for HAS is done by the PE Foundation;
training for HQS and above by the Academy.
Any Saint Hill graduate with a Class IV or above, by application for
permission to the Saint Hill Auditors Division, may train any person to the
level of HQS, and by application to the Auditors Division of Saint Hill may
have the person he has trained certified.
A simple examination or test may be part of the HAS or HQS course, but
confers no classification. There is no Class I or Class II.
Correcting previous advices, it is not now intended that all
certificates should be issued by the Auditors Division of HCO WW. Until
further notice, therefore, HCO Boards of Review should continue their
present system of certification exactly as before. Supplies of the new
certificates are being printed, and will be available from the Book Dept of
HCO WW in the usual way.
___________________
A full Classification-Gradation Chart will be published from time to
time giving the requirements and processes of every level, and concise text
books and answer sheets are in preparation. But absence of tests shall not
preclude training or classifying so long as the materials are communicated,
at least until such time as texts are complete and available.
Sample check sheets will also be issued from time to time for all
courses to ensure a consistency of training material throughout
Scientology.
___________________
Preclears include every individual Preclears are separately graded.
The grade is obtained by flattening the processes of that Level - i.e. a
preclear who has had all the required processes of Level I flattened, would
become Grade I and would then proceed to the processes of Level II. And so
on. Each level has certain basic processes to be accomplished.
Preclear Gradation is not by certification but by specific log book
issued to the preclear and signed by his auditor as each process is
flattened and a level completed. The grade is issued to the Preclear by his
Auditor when requirements are met in the log book.
Classification of Auditors and Gradation of Preclears effective date
is extended to 15 April 1965. Preclear log books will be issued shortly.
The Director of Processing is in charge of all log books for the Org's
area.
The log book also applies to Co-Audits, in which case it is signed by
the Classified Auditor in charge of the Co-Audit.
Founding Scientologist Certificates are now being issued, allowing up
to Class IV for trained auditors, and Grade IV for Preclears. The actual
certificate must be possessed by the individual to be in effect. The fact
of having been a Scientologist or Dianeticist for years gives no
dispensation unless the Founding Scientologist Certificate is in hand.
Founding Scientologist Certificates may not be applied for after January 1,
1965.
Effective June 1, 1968, Field centres duly established with Saint Hill
graduates Class VI and VII may train to levels as high as IV, and Saint
Hill graduate$ Class IV and above are permitted, effective April 15, 1964,
to train to HAS and HQS. On June 1, 1968, Central Orgs will be permitted to
train to Classes V and VI, which until that date will be taught only at
Saint Hill.
___________________
The General Classification-Gradation Chart Issue One is as follows:
Class (or Level) Process Types Certificate
0 Dangerous environment, ARC, education in basics of life. Case
Improvement by education in Scientology and orientation in
environment. None
I R1C for PTPs, R1CM (fishing with TA), Assists, R2C (discussion
by lists), Listen Style and Itsa. Case Improvement by
communication on closely interested subjects and problems, using
TA Blowdowns. HAS
II Repetitive processes, Model Session, Op-Pro-By-Dup, 8-C, CCHs,
Havingness, General O/W, ARC '63, Auditing Cycle, Case
Improvement by disciplined comm cycle, awareness of mind and
environment, using TA of meter and cumulative TA divisions.
HQS
III Auditing by List, See Checking by List, Prepcheeking, Problems
Intensive, Mid Ruds, and Model Session. (Auditing by List is SOM-
3L.) Case Improvement by removing psychosomatics, cleaning
needle of all reads on given questions, any assessments done by
upper level auditor. HCA/HPA
IV R4SC, ARC Break Assessments, R4H (R2H), and Case Analysis. Case
Improvement by Service Facsimile, life ARC Breaks and Case
Analysis, using the listing and assessment potentials of the
meter, which is not done in lower levels. (Clearing this
lifetime.) HCS
V Omitted HAA
VI Locating the truncation, checking goals, running the Line Plot
and Track Analysis. Case Improvement by running pc's own goals
all the way to operating thetan. HSS
VII Old Route One and Other Drills. HGA
The certificate schedule HCO Policy Letter of August 12, 1963, is
cancelled. The certificate Hubbard Book Auditor is withdrawn. The
certificates Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist, Hubbard Clearing
Scientologist and Hubbard Advanced Auditor are reinstated.
The rules of processing apply to CLASS not to certificate. A
certificate may have almost any lower class stamped on it. It is the
classification not the certificate that permits use of processes or being
run on processes. In a Co-Audit, the Classification of the supervising
Auditor in charge decides the level of process which can be run.
It is envisioned that training courses be brief and precise and
require exact levels of attainment as to theory, practical and auditing
requirements.
Stress in any course is 50% on auditing, 50% on case gain. A person
will not be allowed Classification until the processes of that Level have
been flattened on him or her and have been accurately recorded in the log
book.
Outlines of courses, with suggested prices, have been issued, and
further information and more detailed instructions will be issued from time
to time.
A rigid requirement of the Classification-Gradation programme is that
the requirements of one level must be met before the individual is allowed
to proceed to the next. This applies appropriately to each category of
person, whether proceeding along the Preclear, Co-Auditor or Professional
route.
Thus, a preclear may not be audited on a Level IV process until he has
completed the processes of Level III and below. An auditor may not audit
the processes of a certain level until he has the certificate or class of
the preceding levels. And so on.
There may be occasional exceptions to this-for instance, HGCs and
Saint Hill trained auditors may issue special dispensation to HGC preclears
or their own personal preclears to temporarily raise their preclear grade
during certain phases of processing. But any abuse of the rules of the
Classification-Gradation system which results in harm to preclears or
complaints by them may make offenders subject to Committees of Evidence.
___________________
It is not envisioned that people taking HAS or HQS or even HCA courses
are making a career out of Scientology. They are expected to keep on
working at their jobs. This must be stressed. There is no effort to follow
medical-psychiatric practitioner patterns and have offices. There is an
effort to work evening and weekends running small organizations of co-
audits. The effort is to make Scientologists, not have "patients". This
dictates the length of the HQS course as people can seldom get off work for
more than a month.
This does not interfere, however, with someone working full time in
Scientology, or with auditors who do want to set up offices along
traditional practitioner lines.
Cost and length of courses rise somewhat as they increase in Class as
the increased ability of the student, if well processed on classification
level processes, commonly brings him or her more income and leisure.
Therefore the HCS Course would take at least 3 months and would cost in the
neighbourhood of �150, if the HCA course was lasting 2 months and costing
�78.
___________________
As stated in previous issues, holders of a Founding Scientologist
Certificate may have the right to use all processes up to and including
Class IV if they were trained before 1964, and have the right to be audited
on everything up to and including Class IV if they were not.
It is reiterated that no classification for Class VI is now obtainable
except by training, and no actual GM may be run by any auditor until the
full technology is released and the classification is earned.
At present, Classes V, VI and VII may be earned only at Saint Hill.
___________________
The intent of this programme is to
1 Open the road for everyone
2. Provide wider dissemination
3. Guarantee an increase of knowledge to keep pace with increase of
ability
4. Provide the cheapest possible processing
5. Regulate processes by Class Level to guarantee a more real advance
6. Steer around rough spots found in the past in technical,
administrative and personal areas.
There is no effort to decrease the income or present activity of any
auditor or organization but only to widen the sphere of action.
This policy has been formulated with the consultation and majority
agreement of organizations and field auditors all over the. world and is
final.
The effective date is now 15 April 1965.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd
[Added to by HCO P/L 18 June 1964, Professional Route Classification
Requirements, page 378.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 JUNE 1964
CenOCon
PROFESSIONAL ROUTE CLASSIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
(Addenda to HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 May 1964)
The requirements for Classification under the Professional Route are
as follows:
On completion of a Level up to Certification the student is required
to work as an interne in the HGC-auditing those processes on which he has
been trained. When he/she has completed one month satisfactory service in
the HGC he/she does a retread of the level in the academy. This should
occupy half the time of the original course and the fee is half of the fee
for the original course. At the end of this retread he/she must pass an
examination on the whole of the material taught. This examination should be
of about 25 questions. Many of the questions (say about a third) can be of
the 'True or False' type. The remainder designed to bring out specific
pieces of data. Over 90% correct answers is a pass subject to the student
going and finding the correct answers to the questions he had wrong. Over
80% but below 90% is a flunk but entitles the student to take the exam
again after a lapse of one day. Under 80% is a flunk and the student should
be returned to study for at least one week before taking the exam again.
The questions on the examination should be varied frequently to avoid
students swotting up on just the questions on the examination.
During the student's period as an interne his progress should be
carefully supervised by the D of P and a report submitted as to his
competence or otherwise to the Examiners. Until a report of competence is
received the student may not enter the Retread Course.
If at any time during his internship he is continuing to make GAE's he
must be returned to Course for further study and practice. The student is
not eligible for pay during his internship.
Issued by: Reg Sharpe, D.Scn.
Dissemination Secretary
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH.jw.rd
378
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 JULY AD 14
Remimeo Franchise Saint Hill
GRADATION PROGRAMME, REVISED
The Gradation Programme directives violated a broad, longstanding
policy of mine: That all Dianetic and Scientology materials were for the
use of all Dianeticists and Scientologists.
Although I have received no complaints from anyone about this, I
nevertheless do not feel right about telling Scientologists that there are
certain materials they cannot use or be audited on.
I would rather leave this matter wholly to personal experience of
others and make the Gradation Programme only a recommendation not a
directive.
Accordingly, therefore the following policy is issued:
I . Any and all materials of Dianetics and Scientology may be used
or received by auditors and preclears regardless of any assigned level or
grade;
2. That classification and certificate issue remain based on these
levels to indicate relative skills and state of training of auditors, and
give them the most case wins for their auditing training level;
3. That all preclears only be advised that they will make best
progress through following these levels in upward progress;
4. That the Gradation Programme remain as it is but without any
enforcement or discipline for failing to follow it;
5. That the Gradation Programme. is only a recommended route for
best results.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:nb.cden Copyright@ 1964
379
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I DECEMBER 1964
Remimeo
BPI
Franchise
FULL TABLE OF COURSES AND CLASSIFICATION
Classification Correction
Due to various recommendations of National Committees it has become
necessary to maintain a sliding scale of fees for training and for more
vital reasons, to make HAS a fully accredited Academy Course.
This alters recently released Classification data.
There is a Class Zero. Examination for Classification will take place
on the same basis as for any other class.
This makes the following complete training certificate and
Classification Schedule. This changes conflicting policy earlier released
and finalizes certification and classification.
Course Calculation All Courses
An "Academy day course" shall be four weeks long, five days per week,
8 hours of on course time per day minimum.. (Excludes lunches and breaks.)
An evening course must contain 160 hours of actual course time, (no breaks
included). This means 52 evenings of three hours each or any other means of
getting 160 hours of instruction in evenings.
A weekend course must contain 160 hours of course time. (No breaks or
lunch or dinner time included.) This can be 16 weekends of 10 hours per
weekend or any other multiple that gives 160 hours on weekends.
An organization may not have both an evening and a weekend course
unless they have 300 students routinely in their Academy. They have to
choose one or the other by local choice. Weekend courses are usually more
successful than evening courses in terms of student ability as the student
is fresher and has more consecutive class hours. A day course is usually
far more productive of student skill.
Course Defined
An Academy Course then hereafter means 160 hours of Class Instruction
to Certificate for all Levels Zero to IV.
Certification and Classification Table
The PE Course is not an Academy Course. It however may continue to be
taught.
First enrolment, Level Zero. No prior examination. 160 course hours
duration. Certificate Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist. Awarded without
examination.
First Classification: Prior to entering the next course (hours or
weeks or months before) the student must take a written and practical
examination for CLASS ZERO. If the student passes he is at once awarded his
Classification by HCO and it is sealed on his HAS Certificate or given by
letter and then sealed.
Second Course. Level I. Hubbard Qualified Scieritologist. Pre-
requisite, HAS course and certificate. No prior classification required.
160 course hours duration.
380
Certificate awarded without examination: Hubbard Qualified
Scientologist.
Second Classification: Prior to entering the Level 11 course, hours or
months, the student must take his written and practical Classification
examination for Level 1. On passing he is at once awarded his Class I
Classification and it is certified by HCO letter or stamped and sealed on
his certificate. If the student has not passed a prior classification exam
and is not Class 0 yet, this second examination is the Class 0 examination
and on passing it he has Class 0 awarded by HCO by letter or stamped and
sealed on his highest certificate. He may also take his Class I examination
as soon afterwards as he sees fit.
Third Course Level 11. 160 Academy hours. At course end, regardless of
class as usual, he is awarded his certificate without examination as
Hubbard Certified Auditor.
Third Classification, Class 11. Prior to entering his fourth course,
hours or months, the student may take his Classification examination for
Class IL If passed it is signified as usual by HCO. If the student has no
classification up to this point, this examination is for Class 0. If he has
no Class I yet, it is for Class 1. He may take the other higher
classification examinations as soon as he wishes.
Fourth Course, Level 111. 160 Academy hours. On completion, awarded
certificate without examination as Hubbard Professional Auditor.
Fourth Classification, Class III. Prior to entering his fifth course,
Level IV, hours or months, the student may take his classification
examination for Class 111. If he has no classification to this time, the
same procedure as earlier is followed.
Fifth Course, Level IV. This like all other courses may be entered
whether the student has passed his examinations or not. After 160 Academy
Course hours, the student, without examination, is given his Hubbard
Clearing Scientologist Certificate.
Fifth Classification, Class IV. Prior to his entering an R6 course a
student, after January 1, 1968, must bring all I-Lis classifications up to
Class IV before entering an R6 course, whether this is done at an
organization or at Saint Hill, and no matter where the R6 course is taught.
Sixth Course, Level VI. Without training hours limit, but with a
minimum of 400 course hours, the student completes the course by a
completion of all check sheets or additional work assigned, and results in
an award of Hubbard Senior Scientologist.
Sixth Classification, Class VI. Examination given before the end of
the Sixth Course and if passed, an award of Provisional Class VI is given
by notification permitting the student to audit Class VI materials. When a
successful period of observed auditing ensues, the Classification is
confirmed as Class VI and the fact is attested by letter or by sealing and
stamping the certificate. If the auditing period is not successful or for
any other detrimental reason, the provisional classification may be
retained. If the reasons are very detrimental, the provisional
classification may be withdrawn. This however cancels no earlier
classification.
Table of Authorized Courses
Field Auditor: PE Course. Curriculum as taught in Central Orgs over
the years, based on the Dublin Personal Efficiency Course.
Franchise Holder: PE Course. Already granted permissions to teach HAS
and HQS expire on January 1, 1966. Curriculum until then must exactly
follow recent HCO Bulletins outlining these two courses. HCO must give all
Classification examinations to Franchise Holder students.
City Office: PE Course permitted but not required. HAS, HQS and HCA.
Permission to teach HCA expires January 1, 1966, at wl-dch time City
Offices will teach only HAS and HQS.
381
Central Organizations: PE Course may be taught but is not recommended
for Central Orgs. Must teach HAS, HQS, HCA and HCS Courses. A Central
Organization will be reviewed on its student record on January 1, 1968 to
establish the possibility of its teaching an HSS Course but permission not
guaranteed and only one will be granted in a national area, if granted.
Obvious Conclusion
From the above it will be obvious that active Field Auditors are
expected to become Franchise Holders in the future, that Franchise Holders
will become City Offices, that City Offices will become Central
Organizations and the national headquarters will become, eventually, a
university. Aside from an expectancy that Field Auditors will continue to
become Franchise Holders, no drastic upgrade is expected until after
January 1, 1966.
Auditors equipped to do so, on becoming Franchise Holders may still
apply for permissions to teach HAS and HQS but these permissions all expire
for Franchise Holders on January 1, 1966. On or before that date a new type
of PE Course will be released for Franchise Holders to teach. And there is
a possibility that Franchise Holders may be newly granted permission to
teach HAS on January 1, 1966 depending entirely upon their teaching record
with HCO WW.
As Field Auditors were teaching only a PE Course as an HAS Course,
this is more a change of name than a refusal to permit them to teach. They
may go on teaching the same course, but must call it a PE Course and must
not call it an HAS Cours~;.
Whether or not a City Office goes on teaching the HCA Course after
January 1, 1966 depends entirely upon its activity. This matter also is
subject to review on January 1, 1966.
Franchise Holders who are behind-hand in their contributions to HCO WW
are, as always, subject to franchise suspension or cancellation. If a
franchise is suspended, teaching in progress may go on but no further
students may be enrolled. If a franchise is cancelled, the existing
students may be graduated, but will be very vigorously examined as low
teaching quality or a poorly scheduled and careless course can be a grounds
for cancellation if not mended when called to the Franchise Holder's
attention.
A Central Organization or City Office, until January 1, 1968, may
teach any course they are allowed to anyone enrolling, regardless of former
certification. This is to the end of improving auditing skill. They may
not, after January 1, 1965, teach any special or data courses other than
their regular Academy Courses at the specified rates.
Until January 1, 1968, then, the policy of not retraining auditors is
waived. Until January 1, 1968 any student enrolling for any course in the
period from January 1, 1965 to January 1, 1968, regardless of training
prior to January 1, 1965, may be directed into any lower course being
taught at the Academy wholly and only at the discretion of the Director of
Training. This is to resolve the impossibility of teaching someone at
current Level IV who has not been well grounded, for instance, in Level
111. Adjustment of training will have to be done until January 1, 1968
certainly, until the bulk of training activities have cared for gaps in an
auditor's education prior to January 1, 1965.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.cden Copyright (D 1964 by L Ron Hubbard
382
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 MARCH 1965
Gen Non Remimeo
Sthil Students
BPI
CLEARING AND TRAINING
In the not too distant future, certainly within a couple years, being
clear will be a requisite to being accepted for any training.
The book auditor will be back with us in full swing. Auditing will be
done of a kind. An HAS Course might be given.
But I feel that from there on up processing comes before training.
It would go this way. A person is processed up through the Grades, 0
to IV, getting his preclear grade certificate at each level. Then the
person is accepted for training from Class I to Class VII, class by class.
People are already causing "problems" (joke) today in Academies and
HGCs. They are also going clear before they have finished all their grades
as pcs and in Academies before "they can be audited on the upper levels
(such as III and IV)".
We're too good suddenly. An auditor might feel his practice would go
to pieces if preclears only took a few intensives to go through all the
Grades from 0 to IV. The tendency to slow anyone down must be handled
before it begins.
We ought to operate only organizations and have large numbers of
groups like we used to. Quantities of people is the answer.
Then as we clear them in HGCs we transfer them over to the Academy to
go on up to Class IV and then to Saint Hill for all the way to OT.
It's quite a feasible route. Actually very easy if the tech is
applied.
It would be an interesting Academy with the students not being able to
audit each other on lower grades, but having to scrounge pcs off the street
to get their auditing check sheet complete. But with the majority of them
clear they'd whizz through their check sheets in less than the allotted
month now allowed for each course between 0 and IV.
It is surely, surely true that nobody will make OT without training.
Some auditors (Horner, Berner) are reported to have been trying to put "raw
meat pcs" on Class VI processes on the sly with what is reported as rather
awful results and spins. I hadn't heard about it, being away a bit, and the
auditors were saved by the recent amnesty, but what a foolish and cruel
thing to do when the route Grade 0 to IV is wide open for pcs, with wins
all the way. Why throw the poor fellow in a ditch? The pcs of course
stupidly demand to be OT yesterday, but what's a few weeks processing on
the grades? Nobody will make OT without training. That's a technical fact.
The Level VI processes just don't bite on lower level pes!
There'd be no tendency to slow up or speed up a pc's progress if clear
were required before people were trained.
They had a crisis on the Saint Hill Course just Monday. Student that
was cleared in Washington DC couldn't be put through her preclearing for
Class III and IV as the state of IV had been attained at II! So we have to
"solve" how to train clears anyway. We'll have to get a source of pcs for
them to audit as nobody can get a meter to work on a clear, so they can't
be preclears anymore. They're ready for OT as case but can't go on because
that requires a full knowledge of auditing from 0 to IV for OT to be
successfully attained.
What a nice job instructing would be teaching only clears!
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 MAY 1965
Reissued 4 July 1970
Remimeo
CLASSIFICATION, GRADATION AND AWARENESS CHART
You will find a chart enclosed in the Auditor Issue 8. It covers many
things.
There are about 52 levels of awareness from Unexistence up to the
state of Clear.
By "Level of Awareness" is meant that of which a being is aware.
A being who is at a level on this scale is aware only of that level
and the others below it.
To get a case gain such a person must become aware of the level next
above him. And so on up in orderly sequence, level by level.
If you skip a person on one level several levels up, he or she will
experience only an unreality and will not react. This is expressed as "no-
case-gain". On the E-Meter it registers as "No Tone Arm Action" meaning
there is no meter registry of change on the meter control lever (tone arm).
A person audited a bit below or at his level of awareness gets "Tone
Arm Action", Case Gain and has cognitions (new concepts of life).
A principal contribution of Scientology is the technology necessary to
change people so that they progress into higher states of ability when
processed on the exact processes required by an auditor qualified by
training to apply the processes expertly.
It is not only general ability that increases, but IQ, renewed
livingness and the skill and ability to better self and conditions.
The state of homo sapiens runs from around -4 down to the bottom.
Normal is probably much lower.
As you study the chart you will see it is a road map upward.
On the left we see the Class of the Auditor necessary to take the
person up as well as the Grade the preclear reaches.
In the next column we see his certificate name, obtained through his
training at an Academy and, later, Saint Hill.
Then we see a very general description of the processes used on that
grade.
The next column shows what pcs a classified auditor can audit. He can
audit anyone at his Class numeral or below. He cannot audit pcs higher
because of course he has not been trained to do so and is likely to have
upset pcs.
The final column shows where the certificate and class is obtained.
THE BRIDGE
This is the famous bridge mentioned at the end of Dianetics the Modern
Science of Mental Health.
It is now complete and is functioning. The being enters it from
somewhere in the minus regions as a Beginning Scientologist and moves on
up. At about Grade II he has definitely reached Homo Novis. He becomes a
Release somewhere between II and V. And he becomes Clear at the top of VI.
The state of Operating Thetan is attained above VI and is a Grade VII.
For Man to have this at all is quite remarkable. He never had it
before since we find him improving but still, on the average well below -4.
By following this chart one can make Release and then Clear.
Up to Grade V one of course has help. But above that technical
limitations bar completely the idea of CO-auditing. Some auditors will
attempt it, themselves very far from there case-wise, and some have tried
to show untrained pcs how to "solo audit" with a meter. The common result
is that the pcs eventually collapse in a total overwhelm as they are not
trained to handle such forces and so it is a cruel thing to do.
The preclear moves safely on the proper bridge and somewhere along the
line must be trained in the classifications that match his Grade. Then (and
only then) can he make it all the way.
One can be audited quite a ways. Then he had better get trained from
zero on up.
You see here some new certificates. These were made necessary by the
gap which existed between the higher toned public person (-5) and the
beginning of the span. We had to have a longer approach to the bridge. And
so we put a certificate ladder there.
Beginning Scientologist is given for a PE and so on up as the chart
shows.
The Class material has not been changed. If anyone has a Class Zero he
is still a Class Zero but we will give him a new certificate to replace his
old one. And so on. There is no change in Grades and Certificates from
Class II up. Class V has been blank for years. Thus there is a proper
certificate there, the Hubbard Validated Auditor. It says this auditor has
been through a review of all his lower skills plus new ones and can jump
off now for Solo and Clear.
Previously we not only did not reach into the average homo sapien's
awareness but we also had no means of touching cases much below -4.
You are probably intrigued by Class VII. These Power Processes are
what the Clear (or Auditor almost there) audits on low level pcs. Auditors
below that case level can of course run them a bit but the processes
shortly cave him in. These processes are only available at Saint Hill as
they have just recently been perfected and an auditor to do them without
danger to himself or the pc has to have interned at Saint Hill as a Saint
Hill HGC staff auditor, not the same as a Class VI Saint Hiller.
The thing to do is start in your local Academy at zero on the chart
and move on up.
Today that is faster and less expensive than you would think.
There are two courses to one class. First one does the Certificate
Course (Theory) and gets his certificate. This takes the average student
about two weeks. Then one takes the Classification Course (Practical) for
that class and gets his Provisional Classification. Every auditor must be
classified now. This again takes the average student about two weeks. All
the courses from Class 0 up to IV are arranged that way.
The material has been streamlined. Class V, obtained at Saint Hill, is
longer (and remains the same price as always) as it reviews all the classes
and retrains where necessary and awards permanent classification for all
the lower certificates as well as Class V.
Some auditing occurs in the classification course and group auditing
occurs daily.
An unclassed auditor cannot charge a fee for auditing a grade he is
not classed for and if he is turned in to HCO because of it the pc can
regain all the fee from him. We must make it a safe bridge. Our entire
Ethics system is formed just to make it a safe passage for the pc and to
hold the bridge together so it can be crossed by Man.
Auditors routinely make Releases with Academy courses today.
Auditors graduated from the Saint Hill course can then take the final
steps to make themselves clear and Saint Hill Interns are trained to make
Releases of the lowest cases.
Training fees are uniform in the US now at $100 for each course. In
all commonwealth countries the cost is �28 a course sterling (convert to
local currency). There is one course for Certificate, followed by another
for Classification.
Field auditors can charge anything they like for HAS and Beginning
Scientologist courses. And Hubbard Book Auditors can become HQS through
extension courses. Your org may possibly give the lowest course free and
charge very little for the HAS.
My job is to give you the materials to make Releases and the skill to
make Clear. I have done and will do everything I can to help anyone attain
these hitherto unreachable heights of life and ability.
The bridge is not only in, it is functioning every hour right now.
Book early. The traffic is heavy already. And auditors are the scarcest and
most valued beings on this planet.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:nt.aap
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 MAY 1965
(Revised and reissued on 19 S
Remirneo
Issue.a.copy
to every Person
attaining Release
Qual Pets Hats
Tech Pets Hats
Students RELEASES
VITAL DATA
Persons who have attained Grade V and VA Release may not be audited on
any processes except assists, By Passed Charge, Assessments, Present Time
Problems, and missed withholds until they are trained up to Level VI and
started on R6 processes unless a lower level including Dianetic Release was
later found to be missed.
Although the training of the Release is necessary, and auditing
knowledge of lower level process is vital, the Release's case as a case
must be left alone except as above.
The only thing left is the R6 bank itself and low level auditing
becomes unworkable on a person already Released up to Grade V.
When we called a Release a "Keyed out Clear" we erred in giving any
further casual auditing. It was this which made the state of Release look
unstable when it seemed so-the person was further audited to relieve him or
her of locks, secondaries and engrams which had ceased to exist.
Withholds may be pulled, present time problems may be lightly handled,
even By Passed Charge Assessments may be run, touch assists and ordinary
brief repair processes may be used on a Release.
The Release can audit lower level processes than V with complete
safety.
Auditing a Release on repetitive Comm processes, etc., etc., or doing
any continued sessioning will only key in the only thing left-the R6 bank.
A Release is stable as long as he or she is not pushed into the R6
bank.
The next step for a Grade VA Release in auditing is R6 EW. However the
Release may not begin this until auditing skill is acquired by coming up
the levels.
It will now become quite common for a student to be Released by a
Clear and then study and audit his way up the grades to VII.
Nobody can do the VII clearing job for him but himself, and
fragmentary auditing training will only lead him to mess up his case when
he comes to Grade VI and VII auditing.
On the other hand a Release with his high IQ and ability can scoot up
the Classes at considerable speed if not stopped by having to be audited as
part of his training.
There is no special concession made to a Release by way of check
sheets or a different kind of Course. The Release must move on up through
the Classes course by course like any other student.
There are two saving graces to being a Release as far as training is
concerned:
387
1. The Release ordinarily experiences a heightened ability to put
his life to rights economically; and
2. The heightened IQ and ability reflects in speed of study and
comprehension.
A person does not have more Scientology data just because he or she is
a Release. The Release simply acquires it much faster and exhibits more
skill doing it.
For example, a student able before Release, to get only one or two
passes a week on a Course should be able, when Released, to get ten times
that.
The Release is cautioned not to fool about with the R6 materials until
fully trained and to pay no attention to suppressive persons who "seek to
show him in an hour or two how to audit and run R6 and be clear."
The safe way is the correct way. Leave the Reactive mind alone until
one is fully trained as an auditor. Then go on to Clear.
A Release is also warned that he becomes a particular target for
suppressive persons who seek to invalidate his auditing and gains and to
report them promptly to the nearest HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE. Such
people become afraid when they see another get better and are usually
psychotic.
The next action for a person who has attained Release is to take the
next Course in Scientology and move on through to Clear properly. This is
shown on the Gradation Chart issued in May 1965, and later issues. There is
no other way to Clear.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:mh.jp.rd Copyright @ 1965, 1967
[Note: This 19 Sept 1967 issue contains the following changes: (1) in
paragraph 1, addition of "unless a lower level including Dianctic Release
was later found to be missed-, (2) in paragraph 3, addition of phrase "up
to Grade W', (3) in paragraph 10, word "grades" used instead of "Classes",
(4) in paragraph 11, "Grade VI and VII auditing" instead of "Class W'. 1
388
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
BPI HCO BULLETIN OF 28 JUNE AD 15
Franchise
Sthil Students
Sthil Staff
Remirneo
RELEASES, DIFFERENT KINDS
There are different kinds of Releases.
They all have the similar meter phenomena; floating needle and on or
near clear read on a calibrated Mark IV or Mark V.
There is the plain First Stage Release. This occurs in auditing up to
Grade IV. It is not very stable. The person is very well off and definitely
a Release. But he or she can now postulate and in postulating sometimes
gets into the R6 Bank. The First Stage Release is eased out of the bank but
subject to call back.
Then there is the Power Process Release. This is very stable and
should be called a Second Stage Release or a Power Release to be
technically exact. You can run only Power Processes on a First Stage
Release. These knock out all factors of the track that force a person back
into the R6 Bank and leave the person able to go into or get out of the R6
Bank easily. This Second Stage Release is definitely Homo Novis. The person
ceases to respond like a homo sapiens and has fantastic capability to learn
and act.
The Third Stage Release (called for a few days a Second Stage before
terminology was firm) is an improved Second Stage Release in that selective
areas of learning are handled to return special skills to the person. The
case state does not necessarily improve but certain zones of knowledge have
been polished up.
There is another state near that of Release. This is a Keyed-Out-
Operating Thetan. At this time it occurs sometimes by accident in Power
Processing, but I think I will be able to process a Second Stage Release to
it directly some day. The pc is still a pre clear though a Keyed-Out-OT.
This really isn't a Thetan Exterior. The Thetan Exterior is quite unstable
and can be attained below an ordinary First Stage Release.
A real Clear is of course on the other side of the Reactive Bank and
above all these states. It is completely stable. One needs to know how to
audit to get there.
A real Operating Thetan is of course a Clear who has been familiarized
with his environment to a point of total cause over Matter, Energy, Space,
Time and Thought.
This accounts for all states of being discussed in Dianetics or
Scientology. They are all attainable and only one, Keyed-Out-OT is not done
by routine auditing, being an offshoot of it that happens sometimes. The
First Stage Release is as high as we got in Dianetics, so you can see we
are five states of being above where we first arrived.
We are doing these today on a routine assembly line basis on all
cases. Orgs do a lot of First Stage Releases. Saint Hill is doing Power
Releases and moving people up to Clear through Academy and Saint Hill
training.
A lot of cases would have to spend a lot more time in Power Processing
if they weren't already successfully processed in Grades 0 to IV.
The majority of cases even when trained, will not be able to go Clear
without being Released.
And of course nobody is going to go OT before they have been Audited,
Released, trained and cleared, all of which are currently standard actions
in Scientology today.
We are definitely on our way.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.cden Copyright @ 1965
389
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo
BPI HCO BULLETIN OF 5 AUGUST 1965
Certs & Awards
issue to all new
Releases
RELEASE STAGES
Once a pe has begun to come out of his bank, he either continues to
come out or goes back in a bit.
He (or she) does not remain in status quo (unchanging state) while a
Release.
A First Stage Release often pulls further out to First Stage Released
OT after processing.
Similarly a Second Stage Release may become a Second Stage Released
OT.
In their understandable enthusiasm-they feel so much better and bigger
and stronger-a release sometimes seeks additional acknowledgment by
requesting a further release check.
A pc who has attained a First Stage can go First Stage Released OT but
cannot possibly go Second Stage without Power Processing. In short, one
can't upgrade stages 1 to 2, etc without the actual processing.
Why? Because a key out is just that, a key out. Just because one no
longer has a tiger in his lap does not. mean the tiger has vanished. He's
merely stepped out into the hall. In the course of life somebody is going
to leave the door open. The tiger won't come back into one's lap but he'll
sure sit on the rug and sneer. Key out means there's still a tiger. Release
means he's away. One First Stage can be more released than another First
Stage. The tiger is further off.
But when you start upgrading numbers (I st, 2nd, 3rd, etc) you are
talking about less tiger.
There's less bank.
First Stage removes a few tiger whiskers and the sneer. That's the
locks going. The tiger is near or far-that means more or less I st Stage,
it doesn't mean there's less tiger.
Second Stage removes the tiger's misemotion and his front claws. The
tiger can now be near or far but he is that much tiger. He can be so far
away one is sure he has vanished. But he's just far. He remains that much
tiger (minus whiskers, sneer, temper and front claws), he just isn't
evident.
Third Stage pulls the tiger's ability to paralyze one's wits. In
effect Third Stage removes impediments to one's ability to know. The tiger,
though now minus whiskers, sneer, temper, front claws, and the ability to
paralyze is still about. He may at this stage walk off so far that one is
positive there is no more tiger. But it's early to break out the champagne.
Maybe he won't be back for years, even centuries, but he still exists.
Fourth Stage Release removes the tiger's claws all about and blunts
his teeth. And causes him to hide in closets. But though he hasn't
whiskers, sneer, claws, or his frightening effect, or the old sharpness, he
is still a tiger. One can gambol about in the sun cheerily, feeling quite
sure there is no tiger at all. Only the locks on the R6 bank are gone. That
R6 bank is still there.
At this stage the pc feels he can move mountains single handed and is
given to chest thumping. That he still depends upon a body gets overlooked.
But ahead of him is the BIG job. There is still a tiger. This tiger if
not vanished utterly will sooner or later creep up and eat up the goodies.
So one has to handle Mr. Tiger once and for all, run the total R6 bank
and become a 5th Stage Release.
Now, and only now, with a bit of reorientation can one be CLEAR. No
more tiger. He is not near or far. He doesn't exist. And one can go on for
the trillions.
Early on my pcs went keyed out clear and went away. They stayed that
way a long time.
They were sure they had attained the zenith.
390
Today we are going to have the same problem.
A Release is going to feel sure he has gone up in number of Release
when it's only the tiger out for lunch.
I am the last one to throw cool water over anyone's head about
Release. But I have a passion for stating truth as I know it when I know
it. You can always depend on that. It's not always popular but it's honest.
Therefore these are the only ways to go up in number as a Release.
To obtain FIRST STAGE RELEASE, one must have had lower grade auditing
of some sort. This removes the locks (the distressful moments of life) off
the Reactive Mind. As these pinned one to it, one can now get out of it.
To obtain SECOND STAGE RELEASE one must have been run on the highest
of the Power Processes. This gets rid of the secondaries (misemotions and
upsets) and the engrams (moments of pain and unconsciousness). And as these
pinned one to the Reactive Mind one can now move out of it and isn't so
likely to go back into it as he has no secondaries and engrams to call him
back.
To obtain THIRD STAGE RELEASE one has to tackle the beings, places and
subjects one has long detested. And when these are gone one isn't likely to
be called back into the Reactive Mind very soon as bits of his daily life
don't remind him of beings, places and subjects he once detested.
To obtain POURTH STAGE RELEASE one has to take the lock end words off
the R6 bank. He has to be an R6 Auditor himself to do this properly. With
these gone, the R6 bank is left on its naked basics and one can be very
free of it for quite a while.
But now we are down to the concrete and bedrock.
To obtain a FIFTH STAGE RELEASE, one has to have run out the whole
remaining Reactive Mind. We are awfully lucky to have the combination to
the vault as it's been shut thoroughly for the trillions. That's done by a
process known as R6-GPMI-or GPMs by Items. And I assure you
I . It can be done and
2. It was pure hell going it blind when I was trying to find it. It
took several years and thousands of hours of research auditing to just find
the pattern of it. This is the longest job (R6-GPMI) and requires now at
least 14 months of daily solo auditing. And then one is 5th Stage and ready
for a polish and Clear.
Now understand, at each of these stages one has to go unrelease to
make it to the next stage of release. This requires guts-and faith. One is
feeling GRAND. The world is beautiful. The unbrave get nervous at the
thought of diving back into the asphalt or, to keep our metaphor, about
deliberately whistling up the Tiger-"Here Tiger! Here Tiger! Come out
wherever you are!" So a way that is cooked up to avoid this further combat
is to pretend an upgrade in number of release without the hard work and
scratches necessary to honestly achieve it.
Add to all this that one has a present time, and a body to receive the
slings and arrows and one sees that it is a complex picture.
But we have the way. It is the way.
Many will come along selling the frightened the idea one can leap up
through the numbers without pain or toil or auditing by flexing one's chest
or eating wheaties or praying. But that isn't the WAY. There's no bridge
there.
The main point that will be stumbled on is. this: Nobody has any real
reality on how high up these states are or how utterly tall Clear really
is.
Well, that's the score. Does it help?
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright @ 1965
391
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 AUGUST AD 15
Remimeo
CLASSIFICATION AT UPPER LEVELS
TEMPORARY MEASURE
Classification for Levels 11, 111 and IV may be obtained by presenting
evidence of skillfully applying one of the processes below rather than
grade processing to the Examiner.
The Examiner must be satisfied as to the general skill of the auditor.
Auditing By List, R2-12, R4H can be run on a person who went Ist Stage
Release on Comm Processes. (Warning-R2-12 is too fast and got us into
trouble by releasing too quickly and was grossly overrun by all. It was
withdrawn but now its fault has been found. Of all processes it releases
most quickly.)
The following can be run on any pc:
1. ARC Breaks
2. PTPs
3. Withholds
4. Any Continuing Overts
5. Release Rehabilitation.
In fact these must be covered in reviewing cases.
1. No-one must be audited while ARC Broken but the ARC Break ran be
found, located and indicated.
2. A PTP drives the pc into back track in an effort to avoid it.
3. TA ceases to increase or declines in the presence of a missed
withhold (particularly one missed when the TA ceased to increase or
declined).
4. A pc continually committing hidden overts in PT won't advance at
all.
5. You can always rehabilitate a moment of former release.
Therefore any of the above 1 to 5 can be run on any release of any
stage.
Thus an Examiner can require one of the above processes demonstrated
for the level they match in lieu of grade processing for the classification
requirement.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.pp.rd Copyright Q 1965
392
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 AUGUST 1965
RELEASE STAGES
There are five stages of Release. When one of these is attained the
next one up can be run.
A preclear who has attained a stage of Release may not be run further
on the processes of that stage or below or he will go back into his
Reactive Mind.
All Releases however can have their problems handled, their withholds
pulled, their ARC Breaks repaired and any Release at any stage can be
audited on the exact processes of Release Rehabilitation.
The states of Release differ in that one is more stable than another.
The Reactive Mind (known also as the R6 Bank) can only be audited out
by someone who is trained up to Class VI. When the Reactive Mind is fully
audited out (erased completely), one has a Clear.
When.a Clear has been refamiliarized with his capabilities, you have
an Operating Thetan (an OT).
A Release, then, is pulled OUT of his Reactive Mind.
A Clear has fully erased his Reactive Mind.
An Operating Thetan is one who is Cause over Matter, Energy, Space and
Time and is not in a body.
The degree and relative permanence of being pulled out of the Reactive
Mind determines the state of Release.
There are numerous things that can pull one back into the Reactive
Mind.
These are (1) Locks (2) Secondaries (3) Engrams (4) The Whole Time
Track.
LOCKS
By reducing looks as in Levels 0 to IV, we then remove the ability of
locks to pull the being back into his R6 Bank.
Locks are mental image pictures of non-painful, but disturbing
experiences, the person has experienced. They depend for their force on
secondaries and engrams.
Thus, one who has had his locks reduced is a FIRST STAGE RELEASE.
SECONDARIES and ENGRAMS
When a being has had the secondaries and engrams reduced, he is far
less likely to be pulled into the Reactive Mind than if he has just had
their locks reduced.
Secondaries are mental image pictures containing misemotion (grief,
anger, apathy, etc). They contain no pain. They are moments of shock and
stress and depend for their force on underlying engrams.
393
Engrams are mental image pictures of pain and unconsciousness the
person has experienced.
When these are reduced, one has a SECOND STAGE RELEASE.
THE WHOLE TRACK
Bits and pieces of the whole track remain after the locks, secondaries
and engrams are reduced. These bits inhibit the being from recovering
knowledge.
The Whole Track is the moment to moment record of a person's existence
in this universe in picture and impression form.
When these bits are cleaned up, a being is a THIRD STAGE RELEASE.
THE REACTIVE MIND
When the pc has taken the locks off the Reactive Mind itself, using
R6EW, he attains Fourth Stage Release.
THE REACTIVE MIND
When the entire Reactive Mind has been erased and the person is again
wholly himself, one could call it a Fifth Stage Release.
But that is really CLEAR.
OPERATING THETAN
When a being once more has recovered his full abilities and freedom, a
state much higher than Man ever before envisioned is attained. This state
is called OPERATING THETAN.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright @ 1965
394
NO
cc
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 SEPTEMBER 1965
Remimeo
All Scientology
Staff URGENT URGENT URGENT
RELEASE GRADATION
NEW LEVELS OF RELEASE
Further research has revealed additional data concerning Releases
which makes it necessary to re-name the types of Release, or else deny
preclears all the benefits available from states of Release.
As mentioned in earlier lectures there are several intermediate stages
of Release between Level Zero and Level Five. I have finally isolated these
and they agree with the Gradation Chart of Levels.
This changes also in some degree the upper levels of Academy training
materials without actually adding any but only reassigning the same
materials to different levels.
This discovery came out of a survey of the only things that could balk
a case. These also are the main things an auditor has to be careful about
in pcs. Further study revealed the state of Release to be available on each
of these points and that therefore, both to make Releases and better
trained auditors, these were fitted in to the Gradation Chart in natural
sequence as the dominant points stressed on each level.
The points are the same as those covered in the current "Out Tech"
Bulletins and lecture.
They are:
Communication
ARC Breaks
PTPs
O/Ws
Continuous Overts
So as to minimize any upset in introducing these additional levels of
Release we will cease to call Release by stages and call them by Grades. In
earlier material and lectures the terms "Ist Stage Release" indicated a
person released anywhere between Level Zero and Level IV, a "Second Stage
Release" indicated a Power Process Release, a "Third Stage Release" was one
made by orientation processes and a "Fourth Stage Release" meant one made
by R6 EW. This was before I found that the additional levels were important
or obtainable. Without wiping out the meaning of these "stages", we will
simply cease to use them to designate Releases and designate by GRADES. We
will then use the exact processes of the grades that obtain the state of
Release for the preclear and thus keep things straight.
This then is the new Grading:
Type of Release Type of Process
Grade VII - CLEAR
Grade VI Release - R6 EW
Grade V Release - Power Processes
Grade IV Release - Service Facsimiles
Grade III Release - ARC Break Processes (old R-4-H renamed R-3-H)
Grade Il Release - O/W Processes (including the "Joburg")
Grade I Release - Problems Processes (such as Probs Intensive or CCHs)
Grade 0 Release - Communication Processes
395
Any one of the above group of processes can (and should be) run to a
Floating Needle (and not one command beyond it).
With auditors warned of the consequences of running beyond the state
of Release and people easily rehabilitated to the state even if it is
overrun, it will be found that the state is attainable at each level with
smooth auditing.
This ties smoothly into training as a class of auditor is capable of
making a class of Release.
Knowing why people Roller Coaster (Potential Trouble Source) and what
an SP (Suppressive Person) is and by carefully handling training of
auditors in accordance with the "Out Tech" materials we can easily attain
these states for preclears.
The discovery is actually contained in the first material issued that
calls attention to not further auditing Releases. They could have their ARC
Breaks, PTPs and Overts handled. This when I followed it up showed that
additional Release states existed for these types of phenomena.
There are some additional processes that can be run at certain levels
and as these are proven out they will be added as alternate processes to
the level. However, it will be found that when a preclear goes Release at a
Grade, it will not be advisable to further audit him or her in that grade
on an additional process once the phenomena of Release has been attained
for that grade. It may be that if a pe fails to go Release on the
recommended process for that grade, another processfor thatgrade included
under the type of process for that grade may be used. For instance, on
Problems, the pc does not go Grade I Release in the regular buttons of a
Problems Intensive. Other buttons may be found and used. Or the preclear
may be run on "Rising Scale Processes" or another process listed for that
grade, all toward the goal of making the pe a Release from P~vblems. You
don't run a pe on the next grade just because you couldn't Release him on
the lower grade. You run the additional processes of a grade until he
releases at that grade.
At Grade Zero you run Comm Processes of whatever kind until you have a
Grade 0 Release. That means a "Communication Release". Then you do the same
at Grade I and run any version of problems, that affects the person's
problems until you have a Grade I Release, a "Problems Release".
Therefore you are releasing the person on certain subjects at each
grade. The scale can then be written like this.
Grade VII CLEAR - Bank Erased
Grade VI Release - Whole Track Release
Grade V Release - Power Release
Grade IV Release - HABIT Release
Grade III Release - ARC Release
Grade 11 Release - Overt Release
Grade I Release - Problems Release
Grade 0 Release - Communication Release
You can readily spot that under each of these headings we have several
effective processes in addition to a principal process.
The most indicated processes for these levels are listed in the first
list of grades above.
If a former Release went Release on, let us say Problems, he can be
rehabilitated on the Problems Release and then audited on any of the other
grades from IV down. In short, anyone who went Release on one of these
Grades from IV down may not be audited further on that grade but can be
released on any one of the other grades 0 to IV omitting only Grade I
Release, Problems.
396
Of course from V (Power Processes) on up it becomes improbable to run
a lower grade but it possibly could be done on some cases. However, a Grade
VI Release (R6 EW) can't possibly be run below Grade VI. And on a Clear,
there's no bank at all, only freedom.
It's also noteworthy that it's all but impossible to do Grade V, Power
Processes, on a former release that has not been fully rehabilitated on the
lower grade.
In training it is therefore necessary to put a Meter in the hands of a
student at Zero and have him able to clean Tone Arm action well at Level I,
be able to detect and clean reads at II and not clean cleans, be able to
assess at III and find Service Facs at IV.
This means also that at Zero you teach the student all about
Communication, its formula and the Comm Cycle and TRs. At I you teach
repetitive commands, problems intensives (assessed by an upper class
auditor as we used to do) and the CCHs (which pull the person out of
problems and into PT). At II you teach a student all about STUDY (the genus
of overts is the misunderstood) and O/Ws. At III you teach the student all
about ARC and ARC Breaks and assessment and how to do old R-4-H in full and
expertly. And at IV you teach the student all about "Deds" and "Dedexes"
(History of Man) and justified O/Ws and Suppressives and PTSs and how to
find and run Service Facs. And at V you review the student and classify
fully all lower grades. And at VI you teach the student all about R6 and
how to do R6 EW and as the student moves to VII you teach Power Processing
and give the student the final materials to go on to Clear himself.
As I promised to do some time ago, that neats up all training into a
form that can be firm, finally published in eventual book form, and which
puts the stress on the most important data in auditing.
Parts of the mind, Codes, scales, other background data can be woven
into the proper levels without overloading any.
Obviously then, you teach the student the theory in the Certification
course and the drills and key processes for the grade in the Classification
course of the proper level.
This neats up both training and processing, releasing and clearing.
This does not prohibit one from handling ARC Breaks or PTPs or overts
in rudiments at any level, really. Handling a rudiment is just getting the
pc going. It puts the heavy processes that handle ARC Breaks in life and
the past, the problems, etc each in its proper level.
The rule applies that you must not overrun one of these heavy grade
processes and must halt it the moment a free needle appears on it. Or if
the TA goes out of it and it hasn't released the pc and hasn't been overrun
another process can be run for that grade to handle the subject of that
grade.
But I think you will find that the primary process of the grade will
do it uniformly if well audited,
Here then is the additional data that belongs on your Gradation Chart
and modernizes it.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright @ 1965
397
NO
co
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 27 SEPTEMBER 1965
Remimeo
All Scientology
staff
All Students RELEASE GRADATION
ADDITIONAL DATA
(Supplements HCOB 22 Sept 65)
The Grades of Release as covered in HCOB 22 Sept 65 have been named
and will be found, with auditor classes, in the ROUTING CHART of 26 Sept 65
being issued with "Auditor 10" in October 65.
These Grades and names are final, and they designate what is to be run
on the pc to obtain the various states of Release.
A table follows:
Grade Name Materials FormerName Where Done
Grade VIII Operating Thetan RI Drills Operating Thetan Saint Hill
Grade VII CLEAR Clearing Course Clear Saint Hill
Solo
Grade VI Whole Track R6 EW Stage 4 Release Saint Hill
Release Release Solo
Grade VA Power Plus Added Power Stage 3 Release Saint Hill by
Release Release Process Class
VII
Auditor
Grade V Power Release Power Processes 2nd Stage Saint Hill by
Release Release Class
VIIs
Grade IV Ability Release Service None Saint Hill or
Release Facsimiles HGCs-Any
Class IV or
above
Grade III Freedom Release R3H None SH or HGCs
ARC Breaks Any Class III
or above
Grade 11 Relief Release O/W Processes None SH or HGCs
Release Missed w/hs Any
Class 11
Joburg or above
Grade I Problems Release Probs Intensive None SH or HGCs
Release Any Problems Any
Class I
Process or above
Hidden Standard~
Book of Case
Remedies
Grade 0 Communications Level 0 Processes Keyed-Out Clear SH
or HGCs
Release Release (0-0, O-A, etc) Book I Clear
Any Class 0
or above
Ungraded Scientologist Assists of all None Anywhere-any
types Qualified
auditor or
Scientologist
It is obvious then that GRADE CERTIFICATES FOR PRECLEARS lapse and are
no longer issued and are replaced by Release awards, awarding "Grade-
Release" when attained.
398
It is also obvious that as these states all existed before they were
discovered then REHABILITATION OF FORMER RELEASE is addressed to
rehabilitating these grades. When rehabilitation is done and the state
recovered for the pc a "GradeRelease" for the Grade actually recovered is
issued.
The SAME rehabilitation processes as issued are used for every type of
Release.
Preclears were sometimes released in more than one grade and Former
Release is rehabilitated (and sold) for each grade the pc was formerly
released on.
All grades formerly attained must each one in turn be found and
rehabilitated and each one is separately declared by Certs & Awards.
Therefore a pc going release on a simple Qual. Division cheek out must be
urged to get a rehabilitation as there may be other former release states
there and for anyone rehabilitated as a former release many other grades
(as per chart above) are available to be audited up to.
REHABILITATION OF FORMER RELEASE
Technically you will find just these phenomena as given in the Routing
Chart of Auditor 10 and the 22 Sept HCOB were the subjects of release.
Sometimes a pc was according to him released formerly on some other
process or subject than those given on the Chart. You will however find
that it relates to one of the Grade Subjects (Comm, Problems, O/W, ARC
Brks, Service Facs, as the total of the Grades up to IV).
Example: Pc reads as Released on CCHs. OK, that was a Problems or a
Comm Release. Why? It was because pc came to PT away from his problems of
the past or because pc got into comm with the universe. Just decide which.
Example: Pc checks as Released on the button "Importance", run in
brackets or concepts. This wasn't any Grade VI Release! It was probably
Problems that were cleaned up or even O/Ws; therefore it was a Grade I or
Il.
You have to see which Release Grade it was and that's easy since the
pe will tell you even without your asking that he "got over his ARC Breaks"
or "His problems didn't worry him".
On old time processes, R2-12, Rising Scale, even Engram Running, the
point where Release was attained was because a Comm block, a Problem, an
O1W, an ARC Break cleaned up. It wasn't the old process that determines the
Grade the pc was formerly released at so much as which of the Grade
subjects were relieved at the time.
ERROR
The biggest error you can make in rehabilitation of a former release
is to grade him too high and by-pass available charge for further
releasing.
In the earlier grades you can go from Grade IV Release to Grade 0
Release to Grade 11, etc.
They are not entirely consecutive from 0 to IV. They are from V up.
For instance you rehabilitate a pc as Grade 11 Release (overts and
withholds) by standard rehab approach. He is then declared a Grade 11
Release of course. However he can be run on Comm Processes to obtain Grade
0 Release or on Problems to obtain Grade I Release and better had be.
As we have formerly released so many on so many different processes
the background for rehabilitation is ragged at this time.
New people can be moved up smoothly from Zero to IV. Older
Scientologists will go up and down from Zero to IV.
You will find at times that somebody you are trying to audit to a
certain Grade suddenly recalls being released at that Grade. The proper
action then is rehabilitation of the Grade, not continuing to run the
Grade.
399
All this is really quite simple.
The BIGGEST error is and will continue to be not noticing a state of
Release occurring while running a process and then overrunning it and
engulfing it. You don't always see the free, floating needle-it is at times
brief.
NERVES
For a while auditors will be very nervy and err by under-running
processes and failing to flatten them. Some auditors will see a floating
needle everywhere. Some will remain blind to them and grind on and on.
The thing to do is eventually find the happy medium. Don't under-run
or overrun. Just notice when the process has produced a floating needle and
carry on when it has not. And listen for those big pc upsurges in tone and
halt there. And watch for the rising Tone Arm that goes to 5. Mostly it's
an overrun. But some pcs who always were at 5 weren't ever formerly
released and will need Power Processes to get them started. Power
Processing also combines a lot of lower grade results also. But it is hard
to Power Process pcs who have never had lower grade releasing. The Power
Processing becomes very lengthy. However, real tough cases can't attain
lower grade release states and so have to be Power Processed at once
instead of after properly attaining the lower grades. These "at once" Power
Process cases, who have had no former release grade are pretty Suppressive.
However, some pcs' Tone Arms can be at 5 and the pc can act Suppressive if
it all stems from unnoticed lower Grade releasing that was never observed
or rehabilitated.
It is interesting that a Grade V Release (Power Process) cannot
thereafter be processed below his Grade. But this is a new set of
processes. You won't find any Former Release Grade Vs. They just never made
Grade V before, even by accident.
Grade VI Releases (R6 EW) don't easily respond thereafter to Power
Processes. But remember, that's a Grade VI Release, not somebody who came
up with a few bits of R6 EW.
You can't run a Grade VII (Clear) on anything but he can be drilled on
getting about the universe and getting familiar with himself and what he
can do.
Grades VI and VII really cannot be successfully audited except by
oneself-solo. If somebody else did audit them on a pc, the pc would not
prosper. He'd be a fool and quite confused. These Grades (VI and VII)
require knowledge. Without it it's pitiful. Auditors who have tried to
audit raw meat pcs on these Grades have gotten into serious messes not with
us but in their own activities-all stemming from trying to make a baby be
vice president in six easy lessons. Two such auditors blew Scientology-they
themselves had no real data or release grade or even case gain yet they
tried to use VI materials on raw meat and it all went wrong and the pcs
today mostly snarl and natter. Their way is barred by their antagonism.
It takes a real thetan to stand up to VI and VII. Ask somebody who has
been there.
I trust these new Grades I found will help straighten out a lot of
things.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden
Copyright@ 1965
400
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 NOVEMBER 1969
Remimeo Tech Secs Qual Secs Registrars Fraruchises
GET THIS REMIMEOED AND ISSUED TO YO UR STAFF A T ONCE
URGENT-IMPORTANT
DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY SERVICES
This Policy Letter cancels:
HCO Policy Letter 5 May 1969 "Sub Zero Grades"
HCO Policy Letter 17 May 1969 "Dianetic Auditing of Scientology Pcs"
HCO Policy Letter 26 Oct 1969 "Class VIII and HDG"
Dianetics is not a prerequisite for pcs to be audited on Scientology
grades.
On the contrary. PCs CAN BE STARTED ON SCIENTOLOGY GRADES.
LRH ED 13 June 1969 states, "But mainly don't abandon any Scientology
actions. Keep on doing these. Put somebody in charge of the Dianetics
Programme and keep Scn going."
It is TRUE that pcs who are trying to handle psychosomatic illnesses
with grades, wind up at "OT" still trying to cure a headache. But what is a
psychosomatic illness? What does that mean? Migraine headaches and chronic
pains. How many pcs are like that? Only a small percentage,
It is TRUE that pcs who need medical treatment should get it and then
be audited on Dianetics.
It is TRUE Dianetics handles aches and pains, accidents and illness
and is a vital auditing tool.
BUT IT IS ALSO TRUE THAT A LARGE PERCENTAGE OF PCs CAN GO STRAIGHT TO
SCIENTOLOGY GRADES.
Every test case of the original Dianetic programme was already a Grade
IV or even VA release. This means Dianetics was done after Scientology
grades.
It is TRUE that a Class VI auditor also has to be an HDC. This has
been policy for the last five or six years.
An HDC is not really a prerequisite for a Class Zero. It looks that
way on the chart. It is true he'll be a better zero (or 1, 11, 111, IV) if
he's first an HDC. BUT IT ISN'T REQUIRED.
Many pcs find Dianetic auditing too steep a gradient and start better
on level zero. When they are Grade IV they run fine on Dianetics and
Dianetic Triples.
One way to do it is Scientology single grades, Dianetic triples,
Scientology triples.
An HAS or the lower level Scn basic courses start people off great.
Now because you are being told you shouldn't drop any Scientology
actions DON'T now drop all your Dianetic actions.
401
Follow LRD ED 16 INT 13 June 1969. Put your Dianetic actions in as a
Dianetic Programme under an appointed person and get on with the
Scientology actions that never should have been dropped.
Sign up new people on this basis.
I . "If you have psychosomatic illnesses sign up for Dianetics.
We'll get you examined by an MD and handle it."
2. "If you are not physically ill, sign up for Scientology."
. sick pc is channeled by the registrar and Tech See into Dianetics.
. fairly healthy pc is channeled by the registrar and Tech See direct
into Scientology grades.
On a pc who is signing up for Power, if earlier Sen results were poor,
put the pe onto Dianetics as this is a hidden psychosomatic illness.
. healthy pe can go from Sen grades to Dianetics to Power.
. student can start on level zero. Or if the centre doesn't teach
levels then he can go onto the Dianetics course.
If the Dianetics course is widely taught by groups and Franchises most
students will already have had it when they get to an Academy or a Saint
Hill.
Really good auditors are good on Dianetics. If they can audit
Dianetics they will be good Sen auditors. So it is a good point. The
techniques of Dianetics are very simple and show up the auditor as good or
poor. But this doesn't stop you from entering an applicant in an org
straight onto Academy Sen courses.
Without creating any confusions or difficulties each and every Org,
Centre, Franchise and group must get this implemented fast.
YOU CAN SIGN PEOPLE UP DIRECTLY FOR SCIENTOLOGY AUDITING OR TRAINING-
Allowed Services Policy still applies,
Dianetics is designed to care for psychosomatically ill people or to
get charge off a case before or during upper level actions.
The intention of the whole Dianetic programme was to reach out,
putting a type of training in the field and to handle cases of
psychosomatic illness.
You can put a pc on Dianetic singles or triples anytime during his
auditing career. It will have to be sometime but his physical condition
says when. There is no other policy on this.
An, auditor can be trained on Standard Dianetics anytime in his
career. The only policy on this is that an auditor must be an HDG before
Class VI and every VIII must be also an HDG. Dianetics training to HDC can
be done in the field if the Supervisor is an Sen org HDG. Only official
orgs can train to HDG. Just like it said on the Dn
Graduation tape.
Don't now drop Dianetics. Get Scientology back IN.
Brian Livingston
CS-1
LRH:BL:rs.hw.rd From notes by
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
402
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 MAY 1970
Remimeo
ALL TECH
AND QUAL URGENT
HATS IMPORTANT
SINGLE DECLARE
Multiple Declare
Cancelled
(This cancels HCO PL 6 Aug 1966, Declare,
Multiple, which permitted a pc to be run from
Grade 0 to IV and declare them all at once.)
Policy: Only one grade of auditing may be declared or attested to at
one time.
Many pcs have been found not to have attained the End Phenomena of
each lower grade as per both the 1966 and 1968 Classification Charts.
Unless a pc directly attests the end phenomena to an Examiner the
Grade cannot be awarded and the pe may not proceed.
The examiner is permitted to ask the end phenomena question for that
grade. If the pe cannot attest he has attained it, he must be returned to
session to have the process completed, additional processes of that grade
run.
The Triple Grade and its havingness is run.
There are many other processes for each grade which help attain that
End Phenomena.
The condition has arisen where the lower grades have become slighted
in orgs and the pc is not being set up well for a stable gain.
For instance Grade III can be repeated a dozen times.
The CCHs and others listed on the "Process Taught" Training Column of
the 1966 and 1968 Classifications Chart have become neglected YET ARE ALL
VALID FOR THAT GRADE AND SHOULD ALL BE RUN, FOR A GRADE.
The Abilities Attained Column, Processing section of the 1966 and 1968
Classification Chart give the question that must be answered positively
before the pe is let have the Grade or to have further grades.
The huge version of the Classification Chart should be republished in
a huge format modified in text only as it extends upwards into OT grades.
These Classification Charts, particularly the Column under Training
"Processes Taught" and under Processing "Abilities Attained" are valid.
"Processes Taught" should also appear as "Processes Used" under the
Processing side. Other Class VI Processes may also be used to attain these
abilities.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO HAVE SEVERAL F/Ns PER GRADE.
It is Policy NOT to downgrade Scientology lower grades just for the
sake of speed and Admin flows.
TRs (0 to 9) are curing some drug addicts. They belong before
Dianetics.
Probably the main trouble orgs have had recently has come from tossing
aside all Lower Grades. Thus the route to Total Freedom became impeded.
. The Multiple Declare PL and any other advice from anyone permitting
pcs to escape direct attestation of lower grades and Power are NOT VALID
AND ARE CANCELLED.
You will note that even the Multiple Declare Pl, (6 Aug 66) was SH
Only and was intended only for rehabilitation of already run grades so
Power could be run.
DON'T DOWNGRADE LOWER GRADES.
LRH:nt.rw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
403
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JULY 1962
Sthil
Student SPECIAL BRIEFING COURSE
The Saint Hill Special Briefing Course has certain distinct purposes.
The course was begun to do two things:
1. To study and resolve training and education;
2. To assist people who wanted to perfect their Scientology.
There has been no change in these purposes.
The first is succeeding very well. The second is achieving world wide
recognition through people who have been here.
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
The Scientologists studying here are supposed to concentrate on only
three things:
(a) The acquisition of the ability to achieve a rapid and accurate
understanding of data given to them for study and to put that material into
effect;
(b) To achieve auditing results;
(c) To get a reality on the achieving of auditing results by exact
duplication of current methodology and not by additives or extraordinary
solutions.
If a course attendee can achieve these things Classification is
inevitable. If all three things are not achieved, I refuse Classification
on these grounds alone.
If an Instructor ever wants to know what he should be doing, examine
(a), (b) and (c) above, regardless of any other policy or sheet. This is so
thoroughly the case that an Instructor should not feel called upon to solve
any student's problem by any other action than referring the student to the
exact bulletin, tape or policy letter or advices covering the question's
data, and by checking out the student's data, drill or action in the three
course sections. To do more is to defeat the course purposes for the
students.
All student difficulties and even depressions and threatened
departures stem not from failure to handle the student, but failure to get
(a), (b) and (c) into exact and forceful effect.
- The student who wants to know how to complete this course easily
need only understand and perform (a), (b) and (c) above.
Every time a student violates one of the three requisites above, I
take special note of it and even if the student's check sheets were crowded
with passes, given enough violation of (a), (b) and (c) I will not finally
classify that student, for to classify such a student would be an overt.
A student who never misses on the E-Meter, can do the standard
requirements of a session, gets fine results. Thus every time I see (c)
violated I know that (a) has also been violated and act accordingly.
If I see a pc looking bad, I know that (a) has been violated and (c)
as well and always find this to be the case every time I look into it.
The student should realize there is no "getting by" and no "fair"
grade on this course. The Instructor who accepts less than perfect in all
Theory and Drills and Auditing is setting up personal problems and blows.
And the student who protests against perfect performance required is
committing his own subtle suicide.
This is a tough course. Only become upset if it is anything less than
tough. A lot of future depends on it.
LRH:dr.oden
L. RON HUBBARD
404
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 NOVEMBER AD 12
Sthil
CenOCon
PURPOSE OF THE SAINT HILL SPECIAL
BRIEFING COURSE
The purpose of the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course is first,
foremost and only to make Clearing Auditors.
Clearing the student is incidental to teaching the student.
This to some degree is a shift of emphasis. It is made to reduce time
spent on course.
It is impractical to treat this course as an HGC as clearing can be
done more easily off the course under less hurried conditions.
Were we to turn Saint Hill into an HGC Scientology would bog down
everywhere.
I agree it is desirable to have a cleared auditor. It is also true
that auditors' cases get in the way of auditing. It is also true that
clearing can happen, is happening and will continue to happen without
cleared auditors.
At Saint Hill our responsibility is to train auditors.
It is the students' responsibility during and after Saint Hill to get
clear.
By treating Saint Hill as an HGC, we could clear every student
present. But also, by treating Saint Hill as an HGC we would bog down
Scientology everywhere.
Training is hereafter limited to 16 weeks with one month's extension
in special cases. Students are now arriving better prepared and the
clearing technology being taught at Saint Hill is now standardized.
LRH:gl.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I MAY 1961
Sthil
STUDENT TRAINING
AUDITING HAS PRIORITY
Auditing the student in the Saint Hill briefing takes priority over
all other activities.
No auditing period assigned may be postponed or altered for any reason
such as training, giving assessments to others, etc.
LRH:jl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
405
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 OCTOBER 1961
Sthil Briefing Course only
EXAMINATIONS
(Effective until further notice)
Beginning October 23rd, 196 1, all students are expected to pass five
examinations per week.
In the event that a student does not pass five examinations in a week
his or her daytime processing (but not evening) will be omitted the
following week.
There is no limit on the number of examinations a student can have and
fail or pass. However, a student seeking to learn the examination by
continually taking it will, on such finding, be given a special examination
at the discretion of the examiner.
The whole effort of this proceeding is to raise auditing skill by
raising auditing knowledge. And if a person cannot keep up with his
studies, his or her processing is omitted to give him or her more time to
study, as it is obviously lacking.
It may not be a sin to audit to a lose. But it's surely one not to
know and be able to communicate the data of how to do it correctly,
particularly after being at Saint Hill.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:imj.cden
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 OCTOBER 1961
Sthil
NEW STUDENTS SEC CHECK
All new students arriving at Saint Hill shall be given an appropriate
Form 7 before final acceptance on course.
An Instructor is to administer it.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ph.rd
406
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 DECEMBER 1961
Assn Secs HCO Secs
SAINT HILL TRAINING
CANDIDATES FROM ORGANIZATIONS
Persons being sent by organizations (Central Orgs, City Offices) to
Saint Hill for training should be selected on the basis of:
1 . Past Training. The more the better.
2. Seniority. Must have been with the org a long time.
3. Contract. Must be under long term contract to work with the org
on return-2 years.
4. Executive status. Must have had and successfully held executive
status.
5. Auditing Record. Must have had a good record as an auditor.
It takes a lot of hard work at Saint Hill on my part, Mary Sue's and
the Instructors to make auditors out of those sent.
In four cases, the student sent felt he wanted no training really,
only the Importance of it.
In all persons sent, no visible signs of any prior sec checking could
be found. Their Joburgs (Form 3), Form 6 and Childhood Form had no signs of
ever having been done.
To get an organization person to Saint Hill and home again with any
despatch, the organization should, on that person before leaving for Saint
Hill:
1. Get a Joburg (Form 3) FLAT.
2. Get a Form 6 FLAT.
3. Get a Childhood See Cheek FLAT.
4. Get E-Meter Essentials 100% perfect.
5. Get the TRs FLAT.
These items are taking the most time. Then we can get the person back
sooner.
Without these and a Problems Intensive, general O/W and ARC Process 61
all flat, a student cannot be assessed accurately or easily.
1 must pass on, well in advance, any application to send a person to
Saint Hill and 1 must have:
1. Evidence of the above.
2. The person's auditing record.
3. The person's folder (synopsis of) as a pc.
Any reason for a City Office's or a Central Org's difficulty in making
it, if any, is howlingly evident in the Joburg and Form 6 Sec Cheeks we do
on them, and in their general low level of skill in handling meters, TRs
and Model Session. It's pretty wild. It's a 'How on earth can you walk?'
attitude here. It's that bad as seen in their see cheeks and basic skills.
You can improve this by stressing Class II and you should.
And before you send anyone to Saint Hill, cover essentials, please.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:esc.bp.cden Copyright Cc) 1961
407
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 DECEMBER 1961
Sthil
TRAINING ACTIVITIES
(Effective at once)
Students: A student on arrival will be assisted in finding quarters,
will be given a See Check and will be assigned to auditing in Class 11
skills in a common room.
As soon as proficient at Sec Checking and other Class 11 skills and
has been classified, the student will be permitted to assess a 31) under
supervision.
Regardless of classification when a student has received in the common
room all preparatory steps as a case to be assessed, the student will
receive a 31) assessment and run.
Conditions of departure: When the student has passed examinations for
Class II and has received a 31) assessment and has been run on it
sufficiently to secure his case from relapse, he or she may be considered
course completed. The student may or may not classify for Class Ill award
on departure.
Instructors: There will be an instructor in charge of the common room
who will supervise all basic auditing.
There will be an instructor in charge of all bulletin and tape studies
and examinations.
There will be a case supervision instructor for 31) assessments and
runs. This instructor does 31) item checks and incoming See Cheeks.
Administrator: There will be an administrator who will answer all
correspondence, see to all room bookings, preparation of student packets
and inimeos, care of auditing room assignments, case folders, student
messages and related matters.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:esc.rd
408
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 FEBRUARY 1962
CenOCon
RESTRICTION ON SAINT HILL AREA
(Amends HCO Pol Ltr of 20 December 1960, same title)
It is laid down as a general policy that no professional auditor shall
set up a full time Scientology practice, or remain in active full time
practice, within a radius of 20 miles of Saint Hill.
This is now specifically intended to apply to auditing of whatever
kind within this area.
If any auditor has a good and valid reason for auditing within this
geographical area, he or she should seek prior permission and approval from
me in writing, informing me fully of the circumstances which make it
necessary.
No such auditing may be done without my prior permission and approval.
Permission will not be unreasonably denied to bona fide auditors who
are in good standing with HCO.
This also applies to Saint Hill Briefing Course Students on other than
fellow students.
LRH.jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Note: The amendment was the addition of the last five
paragraphs.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 FEBRUARY 1962
Sthil
3D CRISS CROSS ITEMS
All items found by 3D Criss Cross must be checked out for consistent
read by an Instructor before being placed on a pc's Line Plot.
The item must be checked out by the pe's auditor first as usual before
being checked out by an Instructor.
An Instructor is only to see if Item reads consistently on meter and
to instruct student appropriately if it does not. The Instructor is not to
find the correct item but direct that it be found.
Completeness of list is not to be otherwise checked or checked
separately.
LRH:sf.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
409
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 FEBRUARY 1962
Sthil
HCO Secs
Assoc Secs
SAINT HILL RETREADS
(Amends HCO Pol Ltr of December 19, 1961)
If a student has exceeded eight weeks initially on the Saint Hill
Special Briefing Course, he or she must pay for weeks of retread, if
returning to Course for further training, at the rate of S50.00 or f 18.0.0
per week, which is half the weekly cost of the original course,
When a student has been terminated he or she has the right to extend
by paying the weekly retread fee from the date of termination.
LRH:sf.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Note: The amendment is the addition of the last paragraph. -Ed.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 MARCH 1962
Sthil
STAFF TRAINING
HCO WW qualified Scientologists will be rotated through the Special
Briefing Course, one month at a time unless individual protests are made.
It is my aim to get all qualified personnel a full Class 11 at this
time.
This can only be done by actual course attendance. Pay is not
affected.
This also gives me an opportunity to give course instruction personnel
a break and get them their classifications as well as administrative
experience.
An Income Division personnel should be acquired to give us the extra
person needed.
LRH:jw.rd L, RON HUBBARD
410
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JULY 1962
Sthil
COURSE ROTATION
Saint Hill staff will not now be rotated through the course.
Instead, Reg Sharpe has signified he will check them out on HCO
Bulletins, Tapes and Practical.
Further, we are looking for a Class III Auditor to clear Saint Hill
staff.
LRH:dr.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1962
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Sthil HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JULY 1962
Sthil Staff instructors
MIMEO AND MAGAZINE DISTRIBUTION, STHIL
COURSE
All HCO Bulletins and Information Letters issued, and any Policy
Letter marked Sthil, Student, go to instructors and students, one copy to
each. There are no excepted HCO Bulletins or Information Letters in this
regard.
A supply of HCO Bulletins but not Information Letters are given to the
Theory Supervisor in the training office.
The Theory Supervisor should inform Mimeo routinely each week of the
number of students on course and instructors and the extra bulletins
needed.
This order back dates to the last six HCO Bulletins issued.
OFFICE, DOMESTIC AND GROUNDS STAFF
Office, Domestic Staff and Grounds Staff receive one copy each into
their baskets of all Policy Letters marked "Sthil" but no others, and one
copy each of every Information Letter issued, and one copy each of every
Certainty to be mailed.
SCIENTOLOGY STAFF
Scientologists on staff receive, into their baskets, one copy each of
every Policy Letter and every HCO Bulletin, every PAB and every Certainty.
LRH BASKETS
I receive one copy of everything issued by mimeo or mailed by
reception.
There are no exceptions or further issues than the above.
LRH:dr.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
411
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
(Re-issued from Washington DC)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1962
Issue 11
CenOCon
SAINT HILL GRADUATES
This is repeated policy on the subject of Saint Hill Graduates and
Administration and an extension of that Policy.
No Saint Hill Graduate may be used in an Administrative position.
Amongst administrative positions are included those of Director of Training
and Director of Processing.
A Saint Hill Graduate may be a Technical Director to an Organisation
only until such time as the individual skill of the various auditors in the
Organisation is improved to a point of high effectiveness. After that point
is reached it will require special permission from me personally before
Saint Hill Graduates may be continued on the post of Technical Director.
I will not grant permission for a Saint Hill Graduate to be used as
Director of Processing or Director of Training at this time.
If a Saint Hill Graduate is occupying the post of Organisation
Secretary or Association Secretary this post must be combined with a
certain amount of auditing, namely goals checkouts.
The auditing of a Saint Hill Graduate may not be sold as such for the
entirety of an auditing course.
The activity of a Saint Hill Graduate at this time in any Central
Organisation shall be related entirely and strictly to the finding of
goals, either as Staff Goal Finder or HGC Goal Finders. There will be no
relaxation of this policy.
At once if above policy is being violated in any way, reorganise your
staff to comply.
A Saint Hill Graduate may not be used to list goals on someone aside
from the few goals listed in the term of a Dynamic Assessment. Nor may a
Saint Hill Graduate be used to list items on a preclear after goals are
found. These actions must be undertaken (the listing of the first 850 goals
and the listing of items on multiple lines to the state of clear) by
qualified HCAs only,
For the time being until further notice no Saint Hill Graduate is
considered other than a Goals Finder and a Class III auditor is qualified
to find goals on a temporary status of Class IV until such time as he or
she has proved himself or herself as a goals finder and the class is
confirmed or has not proven himself or herself as a goals finder.
These policies are the result of numerous conditions and omissions
that have come to my attention in recent weeks wherein Saint Hill Graduates
are being used wastefully and where clearing is not being made to progress
and where Organisations are not giving any attention at all to clearing in
its furthest finest sense for HGC preclears and Staff Members.
Other Policies of similar date or near date cover Staff Clearing
Programmes and will cover HGC Clearing.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:jw.rd
412
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 SEPTEMBER 1962
sthil Students
CO-AUDIT UNIT
Those terminated from the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course may join
the Co-audit Unit, listing their goals to clear.
They keep usual class schedule in auditing but attend no other
classes.
One of themselves is to be in charge of the Unit and will be known as
the Auditor-in-Charge of Co-audit. This carries no pay.
Reg has volunteered to pass them on bulletins if they will study
evenings.
They may be admitted to lectures and TV demonstrations.
They are not otherwise enrolled, are no longer bound by course
regulations, and may depart when they like or when terminated from the Co-
audit.
From the state of those in the field whose goals were not listed to
clear before departure, I would say this action, done here, is very
desirable.
Once having departed from the Co-audit, after an absence of one week,
the student may not return to course or Co-audit without enrolling on a
retread basis.
A member of the Co-audit may find goals on pcs outside Co-audit hours
for classification.
There is no folder supervision on the Co-audit except by the Auditor-
in-Charge.
CLASSIFICATION
Those who have found a goal on another, have their own goal and have
completed check sheets on departure from course or the Co-audit will be
classified as Class IV.
Those who have had their own goal found and have completed the check
sheets designed by HCO Board of Review will be awarded Class III.
There are no other designations now except in special cases at my
discretion. All students not classified are otherwise given a Course
Incomplete. Those who left without my permission are designated as
Departure Unauthorized.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.oden
[See also HCOPfI, 2 October 1962, Temination &Classification, page
415.1
413
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 SEPTEMBER 1962
Issue 11
Stbil Students
PAY FOR GOALS FINDING
If a Co-audit ex-student is finding goals for classification, any
received pay for the auditing renders the finding invalid so far as
Classification is concerned.
In short, paid-for auditing does not count toward the goals necessary
for Classification.
LRH:dr.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (Z 1962
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 SEPTEMBER 1962
Central Orgs Franchise
SAINT HILL BRIEFING COURSE
TERMINATIONS
When a student is terminated from Course he or she comes under the HCO
Board of Review for classification. Then follows a provisional period
whilst the student's progress and results on Course are reviewed.
The following is pertinent to classification: state of Check Sheet,
student's own case, results of student as an auditor.
Further, during the provisional period students will go into the Co-
audit group where their auditing ability and case advancement will be
further reviewed.
No student will be classified until his/her case is in good shape.
Issued by: Reg Sharpe
HCO Board of Review
for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.cden
414
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 OCTOBER 1962
CenOCon Sthil
TERMINATION & CLASSIFICATION
(Clarifies but does not change HCO Policy Letters of
Sept 20 and Sept 28, 1962 and changes all previous
Policy Letters on Classification including Policy Ltr
of Sept 20 AD 12.)
Classifications and designations given at Saint Hill are as follows:-
Class IV with Honours-check sheets complete, student clear, three
goals found on others (including refound goals).
Class IV-check sheets complete, new first goal found on another by
Dynamic Assessment, goal found on self and proven by listing.
Class 111-check sheets complete, goal found on self and proven by
listing, good case condition.
Course Completion-complete check sheets.
Course Incomplete-incomplete check sheets or too many infractions on
record.
Departure Unauthorized-incomplete check sheets, case in poor
condition, permission to leave not granted by myself personally.
Complete Check Sheets
A student must have complete check sheets for any classification.
Goal Found on Self
The goal found on self must be proven by listing to be the goal.
In some cases this may be extended, for political, auditing or case
reasons, to the second or even the third goal.
It is almost certain, in a matter of too many infractions and
especially infraction of Rule 28, to refuse classification on the basis of
only one goal found on self.
Goals Found on Others
A fresh first goal must have been found on the pc, not refound, to
award a Class IV in addition to the other requirements above.
This goal (or goals) must prove out by listing. If a goal fails to
prove out, it does not count and, if Classification has been granted on the
basis of it, the Classification may be reduced.
Judgment
Certain leeway may be granted by the HCO Board of Review and myself in
the requirements of Classification. As turning out a bad auditor will be an
overt on many pcs this leeway is more likely to be advanced than relented.
More requirements may be asked than the above for Classification or Course
Completion to assure us of actual skill or case condition.
415
Co-Audit Status
Termination means in fact that the student has passed out of the
course but under HCO for the purposes of completion of requirements, excess
requirements or examination. As no further meeting of requirements may now
be undertaken after the student has left this vicinity, it is very
advisable to complete all classification requirements before departure, as
the classification, dictated by the above policies and judgment, will be
that student's classification until retreaded at Saint Hill.
Termination
Termination does not mean Classification.
A student may be terminated from the Course and transferred to the Co-
Audit Unit (see HCO Policy Letters of 20 Sept and 28 Sept 1962) at any time
after he or she has completed 16 weeks on course. Any additional weeks are
granted by special permission.
Extension of time after sixteen weeks is by opinion of Mary Sue
Hubbard and Instructors and must be finally granted by myself, but only if
requested by Mary Sue and/or Instructors.
There are two conditions of continuation:
(a) continuation at additional fee per week and,
(b) continuation without charge.
Students who are doing badly, and especially those who have many
infractions, should fall under (a) above. Those who have been doing well
and are without many infractions are ordinarily considered, if continued by
request of Mary Sue andlor Instructors, under (b) above.
Termination is not otherwise governed by rules, but is influenced by
the state of the Course, the state of the student's skill, the state of the
student's case, and other factors.
The fact of Termination does not determine Classification.
Classification is a matter of the HCO Board of Review and my own
determination.
That Termination has occurred guarantees no award or Classification.
A period after termination is necessary to establish the student's
status by consolidation of records and a review or examination.
All records relating to the student, upon Termination, must be
forwarded to the HCO Board of Review by Instructors, with a recommendation
from the Supervisor of each Section and from Mary Sue. No Classification
may now be awarded unless these recommendations exist and are in the hands
of the HCO Board of Review.
It is the responsibility of the student that his or her records are
complete and in the hands of the HCO Board of Review, including
recommendations.
Mary Sue's or Instructor's Recommendations exist only if it is felt
the student should be classified. Absence of recommendation can me-an that
no-classification will be awarded.
LRH:jw.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
416
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 OCTOBER 1962
Sthil
ROOMS, EMPTYING FOR CLEANING
Study rooms, the Pavilion, Chapel and Basement, must be emptied of all
students by the respective Supervisors in person at the exact end of period
at the end of the day.
Cleaning cannot be accomplished unless this is done.
Students are expected to be out of these rooms at 6.30 on the dot.
Earlier periods get no extension time, why the last period of the day?
Provision for students eating supper in may be made but may not
include the Theory Room, Pavilion or Chapel or areas that must be cleaned.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 OCTOBER 1962
Sthil
Z UNIT
CASE REVIEW
In view of the fact that auditors leaving here will be auditing
without supervision, it is necessary that their judgment on clearing cases
be increased.
Therefore, there will be no more daily supervision of Z Unit folders.
Instead, there will be a weekly or bi-weekly interview of the preclear
and his or her auditor at which time the folder will also be reviewed.
In the meanwhile the auditor in Z Unit should be guided by the needs
of the case and applicable bulletins and lectures.
This also serves to provide me with better data on the progress of
each case as the interview will result in a written summary.
The auditor is responsible for the case in front of him or her in the
session. In the Z Unit this will be the primary point of adjudication in
classification. Did the auditor handle the case according to its needs in
clearing?
LRH:gl.cderi
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1962
417
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 OCTOBER 1962
Issue 11
sthil
CO-AUDIT SUSPENDED
The HCO Policy Letter creating the Co-audit of the Saint Hill Special
Briefing Course is cancelled herewith.
Those auditors now on the Co-audit will be returned to course.
The auditing quarters used by the Co-audit will become part of the Z
Unit.
Auditors who were on the Co-audit should return to regular class
schedule.
Future terminations will end the student's time at Saint Hill.
The reason for this change is the slump in auditing formality by some
auditors and the lack of progress of some cases.
LRH:gl.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (~) 19 62
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 NOVEMBER AD 12
Sthil Course Only
DEPARTURE FORM
(HCO WW Form Dep/1)
Instructions: This form must be completed by a student before Any
Departure from the Course. To fail to fill it out is to risk being
published as Departure Unauthorized, and could mean as well certificate
suspension in extreme cases. Route in the order below by ordinary despatch
lines. Do not bring a body with it. Mark out the first line if it is being
requested by the student.
Where a student is to be terminated without request, this form is
circulated by the course supervisor. In which case the Course Supervisor
marks out the request permission line.
LRH:dr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
418
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
FORM Dep/I
SAINT HILL SPECIAL BRIEFING COURSE
This student is being terminated.
I herewith request permission to leave course on (date)
because
Name Date Requested
THEORY SUPERVISOR I do (do not) advise the classification of
this student because
Theory Classification
Completed
initial
PRACTICAL SUPERVISOR I do (do not) advise the
classification of
this student because
Practical Classification
Completed
Initial
AUDITING SUPERVISOR I do (do not) advise the
classification of
this student because
Auditing Classification
Completed
Initial
COURSE SUPERVISOR I do (do not) advise the classification of
this student because
Classification Completed -
Initial
HCO, BOARD OF REVIEW I do (do not) advise the classification of
this student because
Initial
L. RON HUBBARD I hereby authorize the
following classifica
tion Class - and termination.
I do not authorize departure
STUDENT I accept the above classification or lack of
it because
I withdraw notice of departure
Form must be sent to:
COURSE ADMINISTRATOR I have issued (have not issued) Classifica
tions to this student.
FILE Initial
419
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Sthil HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 NOVEMBER 1962
CenO
TERMINATIONS FROM THE SHSBC
To Saint Hill Instructors: I
Terminations will now be done on a time basis with classification
matched to check sheets and accomplishment.
The essence here is-don't try to make an OT all in one course.
The criteria of an extra month beyond 16 weeks is established by
whether the student has a chance to go clear in that month and by no other
consideration. The slow student has had it at the end of sixteen weeks.
In this way we will make more progress. The slow student can return
home, use what he or she knows, make some case progress and then return for
a retread. The bulk of students leaving here get large case improvements at
home. Therefore their next retread period will count. The fast student will
probably go clear and more instruction will be available to help him or her
do so.
These changes are dictated by increased effectiveness of terminology,
minimal check sheet changes and by our limited space. I feel we can
accomplish our job with a student now in 16 weeks if we really bear down.
Students are arriving well briefed in most cases. Our job gets easier as we
ship students out and technology accordingly rises in orgs and the field.
I am also about to condense most of their study tapes into bulletins
which will save them time.
Your job is to bear down hard to get them looking good by the end of
sixteen weeks and getting good results.
LRH:gl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
CenOCon HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 NOVEMBER 1962
Franchise
Field ,
SAINT HILL RETREAD FEE
fee. The retread fee for Saint Hill Special Briefing Course is 50% of
the regular course
A retread is sixteen weeks long.
Weekly retread fees are discontinued.
Once terminated, a student may only retread.
There are no special arrangements for retread or less time offered.
There is no time interval specified before a retread can be had.
Acceptance of retread on the course follows routine channels just as
in original enrollment.
LRH:dr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HOD POLICY LETTER OF I DECEMBER 1962
Sthil
V UNIT
NEW STUDENTS
SAINT HILL SPECIAL BRIEFING COURSE
(Effective December 3, 1962)
The V Unit is hereby created. It is also called the "2-12 Co-Audit".
The new students' time is more or less wasted up to the moment they
have had a case gain on R2-12.
In times past, when we didn't have 2-12, we found they couldn't learn
very much in their first many weeks.
If they can't learn well until they've had some 2-12, why are we
trying to teach them 2-12? Our only salvation on this is just make them do
2-12.
1 can take any group even raw meat and make them audit the most
esoteric processes. Just put their hands on the controls and tell them to
fly. And they will, so long as an Instructor is there to take
responsibility for the mass sessions.
Therefore, with this policy letter, we abolish all pre-2-12 training
including training on 2-12. There is no pre-auditing check sheet for
running 2-12.
Under the supervision of the Unit Supervisors the new (or students who
have not had 2-12 here excepting the Z Unit) students are put on full time
auditing on 2-12. Hand them the bulletins referring to it but don't attempt
any check out. No practical drills. No lectures or group briefing.
Just put them into teams and crowd them into doing it. When they don't
know what to do next, they contact the unit supervisor and he tells them.
And make them get 2-12 done.
Of course Saint Hill Instructors' confidence in a new enrollee is low.
But this mustn't stand in the road of getting 2-12 done.
We are up against this proposition: before being run on 2-12 the
student's learning rate is shockingly low. Training the student to run 2-12
is therefore a waste of time. However, the student must be run on 2-12. The
saving grace ties in the virtue of 2-12 itself which gets valuable gains
even when run clumsily, so long as it is run more or less muzzled. The
solution therefore is to get 2-12 run without preliminary training but
under the heavy supervision of theUnit Supervisors.
What space is used? Any space that can be pressed into service, (Town
and Country Planning disallows use of the top floor.) The far end of the
Pavilion could be used until the new building is built as Practical will
get smaller for a while.
What time periods should be used? Two periods of 3 hours each every
day.
The idea is this: the student is enrolled with the usual steps and is
at once put to 2-12 full time. No further preliminaries, no check sheet,
just a handful of bulletins, a meter, ballpoint, paper, a pc and a place to
audit.
As soon as List 1 and List I A are checked out clean of reaction, the
student is placed in W Unit and his training proceeds exactly according to
existing pattern. The bulletins, tapes and drills of 2-12 are passed as
part of the usual classes before Z Unit is entered.
Do not place one examination or requirement prior to doing 2-12 in the
V Unit except enrolment.
Do not be diffident in making new students get this auditing done. And
let nothing stand in the way of actual accomplishment of Clean List One and
One A.
The Tiger Drill is a luxury. Ordinary Elimination works if the student
can't T.D.
Supervisors are to check out Rls before they are opposed and lists
when they are pronounced clean by the student. Any list which is found not
to be clean is greeted with a 200 word infraction.
We can do this. Anything else puts us into the old merry-go-round of
slow students and slow-gains, no-gains.
LRH:dr.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
421
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 DECEMBER 1962
Org Secs HCO Secs Franchise for Info
SAINT HILL SPECIAL BRIEFING COURSE
The number of students on this course in January AD 13 will be about a
score.
In November 25 students were released to Orgs and areas to help get
clearing going in the field. These are excellent auditors. One of them his
first week in London cleaned up a hang-fire case and found two goals. The
field and Orgs needed these people.
On the 21st of December we are releasing almost another score, fully
versed in Routine 2-12, 3GAXX and R3-2 1.
We have begun to turn out auditors more rapidly. As we start them off
their first day now on R2-12 and abolish their chronic PTPs, they then
learn much faster and graduate sooner.
We will teach -students now in from 16 to 20 weeks so you can send us
people and get them back as experts.
Our Instructors are seven in number plus the Course Administrator.
Clearing anywhere is held up only for lack of Saint Hill graduates.
The HGC doing the most clearing has the most Saint Hill graduates.
The time to enroll a student is January and February. The surnmer rush
starts in after that.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.cden Copyright Q 1962
422 1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 DECEMBER AD 12
Sthil Students
Academies
TRAINING
SAINT HILL SPECIAL BRIEFING COURSE
SUMMARY OF SUBJECTS
BY UNITS
Please delete on Check Sheets any and all Tapes, HCO Bulletins and
drills that lie outside these outlined subjects. This is a streamlining for
the 16 week course. We assume now that the student can do old Model Session
and a Problems Intensive of sorts when he or she enrolls. If not we will
still omit.
V UNIT
Nothing but Co-auditing. No Check Sheets beyond Course Regulations.
Heavily supervised R2-10 or R2-12 directed toward Results.
Basis for promotion to next unit-Clean List One on the student and has
gotten startling results on a pe. No other basis for promotion. No time
limit in unit. Any study time is spent on W Unit Check Sheets in Theory and
Practical.
W UNIT
Theory-Usual beginning course fundamentals, but only GF Model Session.
Lots of B's on Mid Ruds, Big Mid Ruds and Meter, TRs, havingness, CCHs,
also HCO Bulletin December 8, AD 12. Assists.
Practical-TRs, Meter, GF MS only, CCHs. Assists.
The student must not be dragged out forever in this unit and be made
to study very hard in it as it is without auditing. This is a sweat it
through in a hurry unit. If student fails to get 5 passes each in Theory
and Practical per week, is dropped to V Unit as low passes would clearly
indicate more gains were indicated in the V Unit.
When Cheek Sheets for this Unit complete, goes to X Unit.
X UNIT
Theory-Everything relative to R2-12. More data on Mid Ruds. Tiger
Drilling and Big Tiger.
Practical-All R2-12 Practical. Any drills omitted in W Unit. Tiger
Drilling and Big Tiger.
Auditing- Rudiments, Missed Withholds and havingness. See HCO Bulletin
December 8, AD12.
Basis for promotion to Y Unit-Check Sheets complete plus auditing
requirement of being able to clean a pc's needle, get missed W/Hs and get a
pc's havingness process.
Y UNIT
Theory-Everything relative to finding goals and clearing.
3GAXX, Routine 3-21, etc. HCO Bulletins on Wrong Goals, etc.
423
Practical-All Clearing practical, free needle, etc.
Auditing- Routine 2-12 and CCHs. Assists. Prepchecking.
Requirements for promotion to next unit, to srnooth out a pc's line
plot and pilot a pc through R2-12 with no difficulties because of dirty
needle, incomplete lists, overlooking RSing Items, etc.
Line plot of pc must contain no by-passed Items, needle must be -clean
and specified lists wholly nul.
Z UNIT
Theory-Additional clearing data. Form of the course. Scientology
plans.
Practical- Review of drills, TRs.
Auditing Requirements-Goal found on self, goal found on pc with all
Check Sheets complete, gives Class IV. If successfully up to date with all
Y Unit Cheek Sheets and requirements passed, Class Ill.
If successful in auditing requirements of Y Unit but only up to X
Cheek Sheets complete, Class Il.
LRH:gl.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 FEBRUARY 1963
Sthil
Info D of Ts
CURRICULUM CHANGE
The following change in auditing for Units will go into effect Monday
February 1 lth, 1963.
Y UNIT
Y Unit will revert to Missed Withholds and Prepchecking and will
complete a Goals Prepcheek. All Y Unit auditing will be meterless,
specializing in the observation of the pc, particularly coloration and
apparent age.
Theory and practical for this Unit will specialize on R3-MX.
Any 2-12A cycle now in progress in Y may be completed by the current
class.
R2-12A will be struck from all check sheets as fast as replaced by R3-
M.X data.
R2-12A will be done in V Unit only.
Routine 3-MX only will be done in Z Unit.
LRH:gl.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1963
424
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 FEBRUARY 1963
BPI
SAINT HILL COURSE GOALS
Students attending the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course will
hereafter be terminated and returned only when clear.
As this action, by current technology, is not a lengthy process, (only
very exact), it is not anticipated that the course length forecast of 16-20
weeks will suffer any great change.
Current students are being held to complete this desirable goal. New
students are some of them even now being cleared in the V unit before
actually beginning course.
Any retread student is acceptable on course and can be promised now to
begin getting clear the first week on course. Retread is forecast as eight
weeks where the student has his goal already.
The Practical Section has been strengthened to ensure accuracy and
fast passage. The Theory Section is being simplified as all materials are
being converted rapidly to the "act needs of auditing and clearing.
Saint Hill is gearing up for a busy spring and summer. We now have
around sixty students and seven supervisors and instructors. Most of these
students will have graduated, cleared, in March or April. We have only two
"hung up" students who have not been able to pass course requirements over
a long period, and these are both of them now being cleared and should be
first goal clears by March.
Morale level on the course has never been higher. Saint Hill staff is
clearing itself on a co-audit basis and all should be first goal clears by
mid spring.
You may have been waiting for Saint Hill to start producing clears on
an everyone basis.
This is now successfully in progress amongst students and instructors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden Copyright (D 1963
425
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I FEBRUARY 1963
Sthil Students
AUDITING REGULATIONS
In auditing done on the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course, no matter
what unit,
the following regulations must be observed:
1. Ignorance of the student auditor of the rules of the process he
is doing shall not
be taken into account in any or all instances where a case is
mishandled, gotten into difficulty or audited over a long period with no
gain, and disciplinary measures will be taken without any attention to the
student's lack of information. 2. Any student auditor, whether or riot
examined and passed on a technique, but
doing that technique on a fellow student, and failing to achieve a
result with that technique in a reasonable time, shall be transferred to W
Unit, and shall have no auditing for two weeks.
3. Case responsibility shall be exclusively with the auditor and no
plea that contrary
data was given by an instructor or other person shall act as a defence
in the event of case worsening or case difficulty.
4. If a student blows session it is wholly his or her current
auditor's responsibility to
retrieve that student.
5. A student receives auditing only so long as he or she gives good
auditing.
6. A breach of the Auditor's Code by a student auditor just before
or in session shall
be deemed a misdemeanor.
7. Infractions for breach of auditing regulations may be
recommended by instructors
but may be given only by the Course Supervisor; the procedure being
for the Instructor to pass the Infraction Sheet to the Course Supervisor
for decrease, increase, cancellation or delivery to the student for the
student's compliance.
8. Penalties are as follows:
(a) Failure to comply with instructions which failure might have
resulted in slowing or worsening a case: 200 to 500 word Infraction Sheet.
(b) Departure from standard operating procedure SHSBC in any unit:
200 word Infraction Sheet to 2 weeks in Unit W.
(c) Worsening or drawing out the auditing on a case: 2 weeks in Unit
W to Being Sent Down.
(d) Accumulation of 5,000 words in Infraction Sheets, in which 2
weeks re-assignment to Unit W shall constitute 1,500 words: No
Classification during current course.
These Regulations for Auditing are issued at a time when 2-12A,
Rudiments and Havingness, a Prepcheck, and 3-MX are all of them highly
specialized and standardized
with precise rules which if exactly followed, give excellent case
gains. Only departure
from the standard methods of these processes can fail to achieve case
gains.
As the data is easily available, departures from the rules of
procedure shall be interpreted as an attempted overt against the course and
the pc and will be dealt with
assuch.
Such strenuous regulations and their strenuous application are
necessary if
students-and you-are to leave here clear.
LRH:gl.rd
Copyright (D 1963
L. RON HUBBARD
426
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 FEBRUARY 1963
Sthil Amdemies
V UNIT
(Modifies earlier Policy Letters)
The purpose of V Unit is to:
1. Get the student into some kind of shape to finish the course.
2. Give the student a win as an auditor.
3. Establish an auditing reality on Scientology.
NEW STUDENT'S CASE
If a new student has been badly audited previously it is up to V Unit
to smooth
the case out. An Elementary Prepcheck "In auditing can be used.
If the new student is a Rockslarnmer great care must be taken to get a
2-12A 4 RI Package on the Rockslamming Item. List One Issue 3 is used. The
new student is not made to complete the list. The biggest RS is found,
determined as Term or Oppterm, and used. No RSes less than 1/3 of a dial
wide are used in 2-12A.
If the new student has been run on a wrong goal, an "On Goals
..............
Prepcheck or "On the goal (wrong goal) should be applied.
These are the only processes used in V Unit. The Instructor must not
get inventive or embark upon R3 or start opposing RR Rls:
1. The Assist Type Repetitive Prepcheck using Suppress and
Invalidate buttons only for a specific period of time contained in the
command "Since ..............
2. Missed withholds. The elementary "What have we failed to find
out about you". "Auditors". "I".
3. A broad prepcheck aimed at remedying messed up auditing. "On
Auditing
.............. or "In Auditing followed by the buttons of Big
Mid Ruds or the 18 buttons.
4. ARC Straight Wire (never accepting "Yee' only for an answer,
please). Used on a pc who is spinny or neurotic or feels bad.
5. General O/W.
6. 2-12A using List One Issue 3,4 RI Pkg. Or a case repair on 2-12
or 2-12A that has
been done incorrectly elsewhere.
7. Wrong goal on a pc who has had a wrong goal run. 18 button
Repetitive
Prepcheck "On the goal or appropriate wording.
The V Unit new student must emerge from V Unit in better case
condition than when entering it, and not a Rockslammer. These are the only
criteria for the new student leaving V Unit. They are demonstrated by.
(a) Tone Arm Reading now around clear reads.
(b) Not RSing on List One Issue 3.
STUDENT WIN
The new student probably has no firm reality on auditing wins, even if
an older auditor wins may have been scarce.
427
In V Unit the student auditor must obtain a win. The seven processes
given above will obtain a win. one of them or any of them on any pc,
providing nobody gets fancy. Just use one, or two of the minor ones on any
new student. Not all of them. And flatten what you start always.
On pcs who are not Rockslammers and arrive on course in good
condition, do not run 2-12A. Instead, choose one of the other processes for
such a student pc, the milder the better. And flatten it to no TA action.
Make the student auditor just audit. Totally muzzled. No rudiments, no
havingness. Just "Start of Session" and "End of Session". Use a meter.
Thus, intelligently supervised, the new student will get a nice win.
ESTABLISH A REALITY
The new student, tightly supervised, doing plain Scientology with no
frills, will obtain a reality that exact Scientology works. This
discourages squirrelling on course and gives the student an incentive to
study Scientology as it is, not as altered.
With a case gain, a win and a new reality, the student is ready for
upper units and can be counted on to get fast passes and an early
graduation.
All failures to pass HCO Bs and upper classes are traceable to Case
(RSing on List One), lack of wins and low Reality on Scientology. Thus,
these remedied, you get students graduating, not stagnating on course.
It is the purpose of the V Unit Instructor to achieve these gains and
pass the new student on.
The V Unit is a Co-audit, one or two weeks long, three hours of
auditing given and three received daily, 5 days a week.
In the remainder of the day, the unit is part of the W Unit,
specializing in TRs 0-4 in Practical. The Instructor in the balance of the
day fits into other units to assist instruction there, usually Practical,
to supervise the TRs of V Unit students and others, or as assigned.
SUMMARY
We are trying to cure long periods on course. They are best cured by
the use of a good V Unit.
Students with a Case gain, a win and a good reality on auditing will
study harder, graduate faster, be better Scientologists.
All randomity on a course (bad pass-flunk ratios, enturbulation, etc.)
comes from Rockslammers. Weed them out at course beginning and all gets
very smooth on the main course.
If a student on arrival is in good shape and not a Rockslammer, a week
in V Unit is all he or she should spend.
The whole plan falls to pieces if a V Unit Instructor fails to make
good the purposes of the unit for any reason.
The original plan for the first training of an Academy student is many
years old and had the above purposes as goals. This became the Comm Course
because the purposes were not realized in actual practice and TRs only were
substituted. New processes, muzzled auditing, and a new understanding in
general should now realize this earliest goal I had for a new student-a
case gain, a win, a reality on Scientology.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.cden Copyright Q 1963
428
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint HUI Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 MARCH 1963
Sthil Students
CLEAR REQUIREMENT
Regarding getting clear, as a student on the Saint Hill Special
Briefing Course, the following should be noted:
There is no obligation on the part of the course to clear a student
before termination. While everything will be done to assist clearing the
student and while it is my desire to clear the student, this is a favor
extended, not a student's right.
Some students will not industriously apply themselves in their course
periods and cannot therefore be graduated up through units fast enough to
get them clear before termination.
The better students are matched in so far as possible in auditing
teams. This leaves the unwilling student auditor teamed with auditors of
less skill. This reduces chances of getting clear on those who do not apply
themselves or will not audit well.
The Course is not an HGC and those who attend it only in the hope of
receiving auditing are therefore disappointed as they will receive only as
much auditing as they give and only of the quality they seem to deserve.
The rule of "Help to be. helped" is adhered to in so far as possible.
While almost all students are people we are proud of, some few waste
their case by running up overts against the course and causing
administrative upsets.
There are then three general categories of upset:
I . The student who won't study;
2. The student who won't audit; and
3. The student who causes heavy administrative upsets by spreading
rumors, writing untrue tales home, constantly nagging instructors, etc.
Among these we do not include students ARC Broken in session, as this
is a fairly routine occurrence and passes away. But included are students
who claim they are so ARC Broken in session they cannot study or work. We
know this doesn't hold true as others can study and work and audit after
session ARC Breaks.
Therefore, the course instructors reserve the right, when authorized
by the Course Supervisor, to suspend or cancel the "clearing requirement"
of any student consistently falling into categories (1), (2) or (3) above,
regardless of explanations given by the student.
This may or may not affect classification. It certainly does affect
the amount of time and effort spent by instructors on getting a student
clear.
"Suspension or cancellation of the clearing requirement" means that
the course resigns any further responsibility for getting the student clear
and is at liberty to terminate the student at the end of the course period
with or without classification.
A student who spends three weeks with minimal study effort, a student
who consistently fails to follow directions in auditing his pc or who does
not produce results, and the student who consistently runs up overts
against the course, is liable to suspension or cancellation of the clearing
requirement.
In short, if a student by studying and auditing won't help us get
other students clear, or if a student seeks to damage our course and its
efforts to clear others, through graduating students, we cannot honestly
endeavor to clear that student.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
429
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 APRIL 1963
sthil Students
FOOD AND CLEANING REGULATIONS FOR STUDENTS
EFFECTIVE ON RECEIPT BUT NOT LATER THAN
APRIL 3,1963
The Grounds Manager is in charge of cleaning in the outside buildings.
Cancelling all earlier directives, the following regulations now apply
due to changes in lecture hours.
NO FOOD IN CHAPEL OR PAVILION
I No food may be stored or eaten in the Chapel or Pavilion at any
time. This
includes tea and coffee and instructors' tea or coffee.
VACATING FOR CLEANING
2. None may remain in or be in the Chapel or Pavilion during the
hours 6. 15 p.m. to 7.30 p.m., or on Saturdays or Sundays. All study on
Saturday is to be in the basement Theory room or its adjacent rooms.
3. Food may be stored or eaten in the outside Boiler Room, the
cloakroom and the basement hall.
4. The Grounds Manager may turn in names to the Course Secretary
for Infractions of the above rules.
Without these regulations we cannot maintain the Pavilion or Chapel
for instruction and auditing or get them cleaned.
When violations of the above are flagrant, the Grounds.Manager should
carefully note the identity of the violators and later have an Instructor
identify the students and issue the infractions.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright (D 1963
430
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 APRIL 1963
Central Orgs
Sthil Students
ORGANIZATION STUDENTS ON SAINT HILL COURSE
As the staff of the Org is paying the salary of an organizational
student, it is entitled to know the progress and status of that student.
Accordingly, a weekly report will be sent to the student's Org.
This report is to be posted on receipt on the Staff Bulletin Board of
the Org by the HCO Secretary.
Any dissatisfaction with the student's progress should be sent
directly to the student,
A student whose progress is unsatisfactory may be recalled by the
Organization or
Association Secretary.
LRH:gl.rd
Copyright Q 1963
L. RON HUBBARD
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
BLUE ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
OR GANIZA TIONA L STUDENT REPOR T
TO HCO
From: Saint Hill Special Briefing Course
Post this on your staff (not public) Bulletin Board on Receipt
Course Progress Report on
for week ending
Student -week on course
Theory passes (5 minimum requirement)
Practical passes (5 minimum requirement)
Auditing Unit (should be
Class Attained
Course Secretary
Comment
Note: Any dissatisfaction felt by org members with this student's
progress should be addressed to the student.
431
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 JUNE 1963
Sthil
Students
STUDENTS BLOWING
It is the general responsibility of all students to prevent other
students from blowing and to bring back on Course any student who has
"blown". It is the particular responsibility of the student's auditor.
In future if a student "blows" it is up to his or her auditor to get
him or her back and to take the student into the Chapel and pull the missed
withholds.
Infractions will be awarded to the blowing pc's auditor on the
following basis:
Student blowing from a study period but not leaving the premises and
grounds-500 words minimum.
Student blowing and leaving premises and grounds during course time or
failing to return to Course in the morning, after lunch or after dinner-
1,000 words minimum.
If auditor fails to get student back within 4 hours (course time) an
additional 2,000 words minimum.
Issued by: Reg Sharpe
Course Secretary SHSBC
LRH:dr.aap for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 JULY 1963
Orgs
Sthil
Franchise
RETREADS ON SAINT HILL
SPECIAL BRIEFING COURSE
Students on the Special Briefing Course who require leave of absence
for emergencies may do so under the following conditions, otherwise they
will be charged a retread fee irrespective of the length of time they have
already been on Course.
2 weeks absence (with permission only)
3 months (by very special arrangements beforehand).
Other than that, any student leaving Course for any reason whatsoever
will be charged a retread fee on returning. No part of the original fee is
returnable.
LRH:jw.eden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1963
432
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 AUGUST 1963
Students
Central Orgs
SAINT HILL COURSE CHANGES
The following changes in the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course are
made effective 6 August AD 13.
THEORY SECTION - Jenny Edmonds, HSG, D.Scn. Will specialize in the 5th
Basic (Ability to Study and Apply Scientology Data), and will handle any
non-progressing student without regard to case reasons for inability to
achieve this basic. Instead the student will be undercut in data in
accordance with the new levels of Scientology (HCO Pol Ltr of July 30, AD
13), omitting Level Two and using Glossary only at Level Three, but
treating students that do progress at Level Four with only a brief review
of Levels One and Three.
PRACTICAL SECTION - H. Parkhouse, HSG, D.Scn. To work out and. use the
new Auditing Cycle Data as eight new TRs, one for each Comm Cycle and the
last for consecutive use of all the Comm Cycles contained in the Auditing
Cycle.
AUDITING SECTION - F. Hare, HSG, D.Scn. W Unit to specialize in
definition of an Auditor "To Listen", To use only the TA of the meter. And
to use all former auditing as potential charge to be taken off pc's case
using mainly only the pe to auditor comm line. X Unit to be divided into
three parts, X one using MS, ruds, hav and Comm Cycle, X two using MS,
ruds, hav, Comm Cycle and meter, X three using R2H. Z Unit to use R3N, R3R
and R3T (dating and comm, 3N and 3R where necessary, the Case Level 2
process).
No other changes are made. All former check sheets and materials to
continue as before. The above changes of post are a reversion to earlier
posts held. The auditing change is due to new discoveries about the
Auditing Cycle and making cases move by TA action. Reach and Withdraw
processes where used in W will specialize in the pe to auditor Comm Cycle.
Considerable speed up of length of time on course is expected by
reason of these improvements.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.aap
433
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 OCTOBER AD 13
Central Orgs
Franchise
Field
NEW SAINT HILL CERTIFICATES AND COURSE CHANGES
Without changing the curriculum, units or instructors, on I st
December AD 13 the Saint Hill Course will be divided into two certificate
levels and the cost will be reduced.
Many Auditors have not been able to take the course because of fear
they will be held over beyond the time they can afford.
As clearing has returned as a reality at Class III and as this was the
basic purpose of the course, two certificates will now be issued.
HUBBARD SENIOR SCIENTOLOGIST (ST. HILL). This certificate will be
issued to any student attending the course 16 weeks. If all course
requirements are also met a Class III will be awarded. An additional four
weeks only will be allowed for completion of check sheets, but no student
enrolled will be held beyond sixteen weeks or extended on course more than
an additional four weeks. The cost of the course has been dropped to f 250
Sterling (8700). The student so enrolled is then assured of being able to
return home after 16 weeks of intensive training and is assured of
receiving the certificate of HUBBARD SENIOR SCIENTOLOGIST (ST. HILL). HPA
or HCA is prerequisite to enrollment. Our experience has been that nobody
can go through the Saint Hill Course, whatever he or she did with grades,
without becoming a remarkably superior auditor.
The second course begins with the completion of the HSS (ST. HILL)
Course, an HSS (ST. HILL) being prerequisite to it. This course is
scheduled as a 20 week course. It awards the certificate HUBBARD GRADUATE
AUDITOR and, if all check sheets are completed, Class IV is also awarded.
Class III may also be awarded on this certificate. This course takes the
student from clearing to auditing to OT. Its subject materials are those
now existing as Level Four. The cost of this course is additional to the
HSS Course. The cost is;E250 Sterling (S700) with a f 50 grant available
from Mary Sue to those she especially wants on this course.
During the past year the original 20 week SHSBC has been extended in
subject materials to cover all levels of auditing and as such has exceeded
the original requirements.
Students enrolled before Ist December, 1963 will receive the original
course at the original cost and may extend into the second course at option
without further cost.
Retread students will be honoured as having completed the first course
regardless of units they are assigned to and their cost will be that of the
second course.
Course materials have been stable for some time.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd
434
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 JANUARY 1964
Sthil
HCO (Sthil) LTD
CASE SUPERVISOR
The post of Auditing Supervisor is abolished since all instructors are
doing auditing supervision as a training measure.
The missing action is that of Case Supervisor.
The Auditing Supervision done by all instructors quite rightly
concentrates on student skill in auditing.
A Case Supervisor is needed, therefore, whose sole interest and
concern is the advance of cases on the Saint Hill Briefing Course by any
and various means.
The Case Supervisor will be instructed and supervised by the Course
Supervisor in the marking of folders and handling various cases and will
take over the full handling of case folders as soon as feasible.
All problems having to do with the individual cases of students, any
and all auditing assignments and all individual case problems are to be
routed to the Case Supervisor.
In all questions of what is to be run on a student, regardless of his
situation in training, the word of the Case Supervisor, under the
Supervision of the Course Supervisor, is final.
ENROLLMENT DIVISION
The extreme importance of increasing enrollment and organizing the
facilities to accomplish it have been a matter of some concern to me for
the past many weeks.
The Director of Enrollment is to organize the Administration and
Promotion necessary to accomplish the desired results.
A full Central Files and Address System comparable to that of a
Central Organization, means of filling it with lists and providing address
plates must be provided whether space exists or not.
A full comprehensive and carefully cross-checked system of contacting
and handling applicants must be devised and carried forward.
Effective Procurement activities must be designed, executed and
carried out oil a continuing basis.
Good files, lists and addresses, good and intelligent communication
and a very large increase in enrollment are expected from the Enrollment
Division.
The Director of Enrollment is under the supervision of the Saint Hill
Administrator and The Enrollment Division is part of HCO (Sthil) Ltd.
Mary Long will continue as Course Registrar, personally handling
applicants and the registration and graduation procedures and to that
extent only is in the Enrollment Division, her duties beginning with the
scheduling of a student to arrive and the arrival and registration of that
student and ending with his or her departure.
The Director of Enrollment has the full responsibility of filling up
the course and keeping it full. His materiel and personnel requirements
have first priority.
LRH:dr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Executive Director
HCO (Saint Hill) Ltd
435
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 FEBRUARY 1964
[Excerpt]
sthil Instructors Students
REGULATIONS
COURSE
1. No Course student may be used for giving assists to any Saint
Hill staff of any corporation or members of the public.
2. No student may be used to give ARC Break Assessments or assists
on another student who is not his or her assigned preclear. Any auditing
received by a student must be from that student's assigned auditor.
Exception,, instructors or qualified Saint Hill staff members may audit
students.
3. No student may be audited above his classification level.
Classification Policies are in full force on course. The only persons who
may be audited above their formally assigned Class level are Founding
Scientologists and these may only be audited up to Class IV With the
reservation that the processes must fit the case.
4. Two levels of processing may not be combined, i.e., Class 0
process run with Class 111 commands.
5. Students are to be moved forward through units in accordance
with their check sheets only and no opinion is to be interjected to prevent
such progress that is contrary to check sheet evidence. In short, if a
student's cheek sheets call for his progressing forward no instructor may
by opinion only restrain his being moved up.
6. A student may not be retrogressed in units. If a student has
attained X2, for example, he or she may not be returned to W or Xl.
Additional special check sheets may however be given a student in any unit
which must be completed before progressing to the next unit or division
thereof.
7. No student may be instructed contrary to existing technology or
advised to do anything except standard technology.
8. No student may be accepted on course unless they personally
desired to be here.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd Copyright@ 1964
[Note: A complete copy of this Policy Letter appears in Volume 7, page
31.1
436
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East.Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 APRIL 1964
CenOCon Field Auditors Sthil Students
TO THE SAINT HILL STUDENT:
INSTRUCTION TARGETS
I have only a very few training targets for the Saint Hill student.
These are:
1. How to perform flawlessly as an auditor;
2. How to run certain exact processes; and
3. Obtaining results with those processes by auditing well and
exactly.
Your new check sheets for Class IV are now designed entirely around
these principles.
Course conduct is organized entirely to forward them.
Materials exist for them and are being condensed even further.
If you wish to know what is expected of y I ou as a student, see the
above.
INFRACTIONS
All course infractions henceforward will be given solely upon
technical matters. and results.
Example: The student has "passed" an HCO B and does not seem to be
able to apply it in a session. The cause of the infraction will be because
the student is supposed to know it and doesn't and because the student
could not make it work. The subject of the infraction will be that material
required, and various allied matters.
DURATION OF COURSE
A student applying himself or herself in the future should be able to
get through to Class IV within 16 weeks.
On Class VI the student already up on Class IV material should be able
to get through the Theory and Practical of Class VI in a month of hard
work.
Transferred to the Class VI Co-Audit the student should be able to
make OT in well under 500 hours, barring unusual setbacks caused by wild
auditing errors.
A student exceeding these times in the future is not working hard
enough. There were various other reasons the times were being exceeded in
the past and I have sought to eliminate them.
CLASS VI CO-AUDIT
As the student will be depending on the skill of one auditor it is up
to him or her to make a sufficiently attractive showing as an auditor to be
able to team up with another well-trained auditor.
At lower levels of auditing a weekly turn about and non-team (3 or
more way) auditing rules assignment.
But at Class VI this is too hard on the auditor. Therefore the Class
VI co-auditing is co-auditing in truth with a turn about on alternate days,
5 hours auditing, 5 hours being audited. And the same pair audit each
other.
437
Therefore, early on in the Class VI course the student who has not
come with a Co-Auditor should be considering who he or she will be teamed
up with in the Class VI Co-audit and take an interest in the other fellow's
progress too. The student should choose out his or her co-auditor unless of
course a pair came from one area for that purpose and will be returning
after the Class VI course, It is not required to stay for the Class VI Co-
audit unless it is obvious that the student will have no auditing partner
when he or she goes home. In such an event termination will be refused for
every one's sake.
SUMMARY
The Saint Hill Course is not designed to be a starting auditors'
course but only to fill in gaps and polish up to Class VI, to teach people
to run GPMs in Class VI course and to audit toward OT in the Class VI Co-
Audit. These are the 3 stages of Saint Hill training and auditing. No other
stages are planned.
Therefore the course cannot help but be a flat out high pressure
course.
You can remain in any course at Saint Hill as long as you like. We
haven't booted anybody out for ages who didn't want to go. It is not the
Saint Hill staff who holds people on and on except in a few cases where it
would have been an overt not to persuade continuance, it is the student who
continues himself or herself.
But the pressure is there to got you through-for the benefit of those
waiting for you, for your own economics and for all our sakes. We need able
people. We can make the able so far more able this spring that all our
concentration is upon getting you moving along and doing well.
We are on the verge of great social progress for this planet. Nothing
we have done before-and it is greater than others have done-compares with
what we are doing now.
By being here, you become part of a great team.
We need you.
So do well.
LRH:dr.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 APRIL 1964
Sthil Only
USE OF RECREATION FACILITIES, 1964
Saint Hill students and staff may:
I . Use tennis courts;
2, Use croquet green by tennis court;
3. Fish in the lake;
4. Walk in grounds.
Specifically withdrawn from use by staff and students this season is
the swimming pool, which is being reserved for the children.
LRH:gl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
438
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 APRIL 1964
Issue 11
CenOCon
Field Auditors
Saint Hill Students
SAINT HILL ENROLMENT
MATERIALS, COURSES, AND USE OF
CLASS VI PROCESSES
Anyone enrolling in the Class VI Course at Saint Hill should be
accompanied by a co-auditor from his or her immediate home area.
Two requirements should be made of this person:
I . That they are not enrolling against their will and
2. That they have some comparable auditing skill to the person they
accompany.
A person not already trained at Saint Hill can expect to be enrolled
firstin the Class IV course for everyone's sake. We have never had an
auditor enrol yet who could match Saint Hill standards by prior training
and don't expect to.
But this need not restrain a Saint Hill graduate from bringing on
course a non-Saint Hill graduate as it merely means a few weeks delay in
beginning to audit at home.
A person formerly trained at Saint Hill is enrolled directly on the
Class VI course.
If a person cannot possibly bring a co-auditor, then he or she should
be prepared to stay on for the Class VI Co-audit.
Particulars concerning schedules and the current course are contained in
HCO POLICY LETTER OF April 2, 1964.
A person enrolling without a partner to be trained with should be
prepared to stay on in the Class VI co-audit for 500 auditing hours at 25
hours per week as he or she won't be accepted solo in Class VI unless they
can stay on or get somebody to come on.
Expectancy on course:
1. HPA/HCA and other training or certificates but no training at
Saint Hill and no ro-auditor brought to course:
To Class IV, 16 to 20 weeks. To Class VI, 4 to 12 weeks. To Class VI
Co-audit completion, 12 to 20 weeks. Minimum 32 weeks, Maximum 52 weeks.
The more ACCs and Retreads attended before Saint Hill shortens weeks
toward minimum.
2. HPA/HCA and other training or certificates but no training at
Saint Hill but ACCOMPANIED BY A CO-AUDITOR of comparable background:
To Class IV, 16 to 20 weeks. To Class VI, 8 to 12 weeks.
439
No Class VI Co-audit. Minimum 24 weeks, Maximum 32 weeks.
3. Saint Hill graduate unaccompanied by co-auditor:
To Class VI, 8 to 12 weeks. To Class VI Co-audit, 12 to 20 weeks.
Minimum 20 weeks, Maximum 32 weeks.
4. Saint Hill graduate ACCOMPANIED BY A CO-AUDITOR:
To Class VI, 8 to 12 weeks. Minimum 8 weeks, Maximum 12 weeks.
If co-auditor is not a Saint Hill graduate the co-auditor only will
have a minimum of 24 weeks and a maximum of 32 weeks (see above No. 2), but
meanwhile the former Saint Hill graduate may return home, the co-auditing
beginning on the return of the co-auditor.
The materials of Class VI will not be released for local training for
several years (1968) in the interest of minimal upsets.
The cost of any one continuous period of training is the same, whether
1, 2, 3 or 4. Discount and retread periods have now expired to all
practical purposes.
The cost is Z275 sterling payable on arrival without credit or
discounts. There are now no grants for Saint Hill Courses.
Over the years we have found that in practice we gave all the training
available to any student enrolled. Therefore the cost was in actual fact
the same to any student. So 1, 2, 3 or 4 above costs Z275 sterling.
Retread fees not previously paid are thus the same as any enrollment.
If a student leaves course for any reason the training period is
deemed to have expired. Leaves of absence will no longer be granted for
periods exceeding two weeks. At the end of that time if the student has not
returned he or she is automatically terminated. All previous leaves of
absence have expired.
After using Class VI materials for co-auditing purposes, the materials
are the student's to use on individual preclears providing the student
trains each preclear individually for auditing purposes only, not for
classification, up to Class V1 level as a preclear. This is in accordance
with new classification policies adopted after a majority vote of
Scientologists around the world.
Central Organizations, therefore, may also train preclears as
individual preclears for only receiving Class VI auditing, not for use as
an auditor. The Central Organization must have on its staff two Class VI
auditors in order to deliver this auditing in the HGC to outside preclears.
Auditing rates for Class VI preclears must realistically include
training time and must be well in advance of standard rates. Rates must be
uniform in the field and the organization of an area.
An organization has no responsibility for casualties resulting from
unauthorized use of Class VI materials beyond calling a Committee of
Evidence on offenders. Class V1 trained auditors should make this
strenuously plain in their areas and organizations.
Class VI Preclear training must include:
1. The ethics and basics of Scientology.
440
2. Membership in Scientology official organizations.
3, Clay table work and nomenclature.
4. Freedom of insanity history.
5. Non-membership, under sworn signed oath before a notary, in
hostile organizations or employment by or devotion to anti-Scientology
groups.
6. Copies of line plots and goals and auditor's reports must not be
given any Class VI preclear and no access may be permitted to them by a
Class VI auditor doing preclear training.
7. No copies of line plots or goals plots may be mimeoed, printed,
typed by anyone or copied by Class VI preclears or any other person not a
Class V1 auditor.
8. All Line Plots, goals plots and related materials must be kept
in a safe to which only a Class VI auditor has the combination, whether in
a field auditor's home or office or a Central Organization.
9. Staff membership in any office does not entitle anyone not a
Class VI auditor to access to Class VI Line Plots, goals plots or auditor's
reports.
10. All Preclears being trained for Class VI shall be trained only
on synthetic and non-factual line and goals plots. When auditing begins the
preclear may be given the line plot sheet but must return it at session
end. The auditor alone may possess the goals plot and it may not be handed
to the preclear.
11. While, some escapement of materials of Class VI is inevitable,
continuous vigilance must be exerted to keep it reduced to a minimum. In
the hands of non-Class VI auditors it could be disastrous to preclears, and
in the hands of political or psychiatric groups the materials could be used
to produce widespread insanity, as they would not be used for auditing but
only restimulation.
12. Any person being audited by a Class VI auditor must pledge the
auditor to co-ordinate his actions with us for the greatest good of the
greatest number of beings.
Simplifications and advances in Class VI materials which I have
recently made make it possible for the use of Class VI processes on
preclears trained only to be audited without danger to them so long as they
are in the hands of a Class VI auditor.
Further improvements or short cuts beyond what has already been done
cannot be expected or hoped for due to the nature of the GPM and the bank.
Thousands of auditing hours and many lucky breaks have simplified matters
already down to the bare bones, a fact observable in the shortness of the
Class VI course itself. But there's still quite enough in Class VI to make
it highly dangerous for the non-classified auditor to use. We can safely
and easily handle this gun. But it is a gun.
SUMMARY
The above is a summary of training and data, concerning Saint Hill
Training as of April 1964. No changes in it are to be expected for years.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd
441
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 APRIL 1964
Sthil Students
FOOD AND CLEANING REGULATIONS FOR STUDENTS
EFFECTIVE ON RECEIPT BUTNOTLA TER THAN
APRIL 20,1964
(Cancels previous directives)
The Grounds Manager is in charge of cleaning in the outside buildings.
Cancelling all earlier directives, the following regulations now
apply.
NO FOOD IN CHAPEL OR HALL
I No food may be stored or eaten in the Chapel or Hall at any
time. This includes tea and coffee and instructors' tea or coffee.
VACATING FOR CLEANING
Z. None may remain in or be in the Chapel or Hall during the hours
6.15 p.m. to 7.30 pan. All study on Saturday and Sunday is to be in the
Hall, but the Hall is to be vacated at 5.0 p.m. on Saturday. Any student
using the Hall at 5.0 p.m. on Saturdays. is expected to co-operate with the
Grounds Manager so that the Hall may be cleaned; such students may take a
tape recorder into the Pavilion at that time, but in that case, should see
that it is returned to the Hall before class begins on the following Monday
morning or earlier. The Hall is closed on Saturday evenings from 5.0 p.m.
onwards.
3. Food may be stored during the daytime in the Cloakroom adjoining
the 'Ladies Shower Room' only. Food may be consumed in the Pavilion during
the lunch break and dinner break. All waste wrappings and waste food must
be taken to and deposited in the outside dustbins before the end of the
break. No food may be kept anywhere on the premises overnight.
4. The Grounds Manager may turn in names to the Course Secretary
for Infractions of the above rules.
Without these regulations we cannot maintain the Hall, Pavilion or
Chapel for instruction and auditing or get them cleaned.
When violations of the above are flagrant, the Grounds Manager should
carefully note the identity of the violators and report them to the Course
Secretary.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd by, L. Ron Hubbard
442
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POILICY LETTER OF 8 MAY 1964
Sthil
Students
TRANSPORT
Students desiring noon transport week days from Saint Hill to East
Grinstead at noon and return at 12.50 may have it by procuring an invoice
from the Income Section costing 5 shillings per week.
The invoice should be plainly dated and displayed to the driver on
departure from Saint Hill.
The reason for the charge is the limited transport space available.
There is no charge for staff members.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 MAY 1964
Sthil
TRANSPORT
(Adds to HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 8, 1964)
Regarding HCO POLICY LETTER OF May 8, 1964, it should be clearly understood
that there is no contract to carry passengers on the staff bus for fares.
The 5/- payment by students should be invoiced by Accounts as a
contribution to the upkeep of the bus. The student is then privileged to
ride on the bus as and when available for one week.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd Copyright Q~ 1964 by L. Ach Hi~bbard
443
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 MAY 1964
Sthfl
INSTRUCTOWS CONFERENCE REPORT FORM
WEEK ENDING:
SUPERVISORS: Complete your own section below before Conference on
Friday and read and hand to Conference Chairman. Leave other sections
blank.
THEOR Y AND PRA CTICAL REPOR T.(Cross out one) Total Checkouts: Total
Passes: Total Flunks: Number of students with less than 10 passes:Names of
Students with less than 5 passes:
Number of Pink sheets given: -Names of Auditors giving poor quality
auditing:
Sign.
CASE SUPERVISOR REPOR T.-
Total T.A. Course Unit: Total T.A. Co-Audit Unit: Names of Students
personally audited:
Names of Preclears; with less than 15 T.A. Average:
Sign.
CO URSE SECRETAR Y.Names of Students leaving Course:
Names of new Students for next week:
TN. Demo results:
Number of Students on Course: -Number of Applications on hand:
LRH:dr.rd Sign.
Copyright Q 1964
L. RON HUBBARD
444
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I JUNE 1964
Sthil Students
NEW STUDENTS DATA
STAR RATED FOR NEW STUDENTS
Tape Passes
On those live lectures you hear, when you take the Friday tape
examination and keep your exam paper when it is handed back, and present it
to Theory as evidence, any live lecture you have so heard is credited on
your cheek sheet by Theory where the lecture appears on the check sheet.
Not all the lectures 1 give appear later on cheek sheets but many do
and you should get credit for those you have heard.
If you have a Friday exam paper on any lecture you have heard live and
the grade is above 90% for star rated and above 75% for a 75, any grade for
a zero rate, if the lecture appears as a tape on your check sheets it will
be marked off as passed and initialled by a Theory Instructor.
Auditing Assignments
In auditing before the Level V1 Co-audit, it is customary to split up
teams that will eventually co-audit to OT.
The reasons for this are
1 . Auditing skill tends to become adapted to one pc and
deteriorate. This does not make a good pro, it makes only a co-auditor. I'm
making you into a pro, not a co-auditor regardless of classification
status. I can't do that by giving you just the pc you are already educated
to run. You'd be a one pc auditor.
2. Mutual withholds develop in teams and restrain auditing results.
3. Your auditing skill tends to look better or worse than it is.
We don't even wholly guarantee you and your co-auditor that you will
co-audit in the Level VI Co-audit for one team member rnay be Case type A
and the other B. A Case type A can run through anything. A Case type B
stops at a comma. Thus one gets too far out of pace with the other and it's
just too hard on one member of the team who would be, of course, the Type B
and already in trouble. It would be selfish indeed of a Type A to force a
Type B to run GPMs far beyond where he or she has had them run. We will try
to put the team together in the Level VI Co-audit and mostly do but this AB
factor is a technical one and we can't do anything about it short of good
auditing.
Student Rules
A lot of students come a cropper on the rules and try to carry on
without concurrence.
You are only here for a few months. In your hands is your next multi-
trillion years.
The rules are there to get you through. Breaking them, in my opinion,
is too pricey.
Rapidity of Progress
A few new students arrive here in a high state of "know it all, just
want a few new gimmicks".
Students who have this state of mind just don't learn or progress. And
they really get stuck in. We're not doing it to them. They are trying to
learn over the top of their own postulate that they already know it (when
they don't) and so get into a ridge. They're not stuck in the course.
They're stuck in this conflict.
445
In the first place, no new student at Saint Hill has ever been known
to give a standard session on arrival, despite all the data being
available. But they don't know enough about auditing to know whether
they're, doing well or not, much less know how to audit. Factually they
usually look pretty pitiful. There they are making Gross Auditing Errors in
an avalanche, missing comm cycles, feet in the pc's face with their meter
upside down, telling the Class VI auditor who is his Instructor "I know all
about it. We had a course in Slobovia much better than this one. The pcs
audited the auditor and it ........
Well you can't blame the instructor if he seems to be having a hard
time to keep from laughing in the new student's face. It's only their
courtesy that keeps them from reaching over and connecting the unconnected
cans this new genius has failed to plug into the meter as a fitting touche.
Some auditors trained elsewhere with great ARC but precious little "do
it", don't have enough training to know they aren't trained. And it's
always the very worst trained auditors who howl the loudest about how they
don't need to know. The majority relaxedly study and improve their skill,
get results and there it is.
I myself periodically study auditing and put a polish on my own skill.
I don't have to say "I don't know", but I'm not so arrogant as to believe
I'm above knowing how to do things. So if every year or two I can study how
to audit without going into a long rigmarole about how I'm above all that,
I can reasonably expect others to have a sane view of their own skill too.
Any skill can be improved-one can know more about any subject-unless one
has already decided he or she already knows all about it.
The successful progress of a student is inversely proportional to the
student's preconception of knowing it already. An arrogant assumption of
total knowing without inspection is the surest way to make no progress.
One does or does not know the data before him. That's elementary. Why
should it become involved with emotionalism?
The fast student is not concerned with necessities to maintain status
by asserting how much he or she already knows. The fast student is only
interested in knowing what he does not know, studying it and then knowing
that he knows it.
The slow student is so busy putting on that he knows that he never
finds out he doesn't in fact know. To do this before a lot of experts such
as Saint Hill Instructors seems pretty pointless.
Results today are by the text book. Lack of results are always
attended by departures. One can or cannot get results with auditing. This
means that one is or is not doing a text book job,
In our case the text book has 14 years of hard won experience behind
it. So text book auditing gets the best results. It's that simple.
The statement "I know all about Scientology but I don't get very good
results" is a pretty silly statement today. It's saying in fact "I pretend
to more than I know and the flubs show up in my results".
Well, that's getting right down to the reasons for slow progress and
calling a spade a spade, but it's awful true. It's really the o,nly reason
back of slow progress on course.
The speed with which you complete your course and get to OT is
entirely regulated by the speed with which you discover there's something
here to learn.
Most students handle this very early. I'm sure you will.
I give you my good wishes for a fast progress.
L RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.eden
446
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 SEPTEMBER 1964
Sthil Only
Sthil Students
Post Student Board TERMINATIONS
EFFECTIVE A T ONCE
Final Classification is not automatic with Termination.
The student may be terminated with a Provisional Classification.
On terminations student classifications are confirmed as permanent or
withdrawn.
A review of a student's work before termination must be undertaken
before classification is given. This is in addition to the Provisional
Examination and is in addition to Instructor or Supervisor recommendations
and is the responsibility of the HCO Board of Review which may not now be
part of the Course.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (R) 1964
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 SEPTEMBER 1964
Franchise
Sthil Students
FINAL CLASSIFICATION
ON TERMINATION FROM SAINT HILL
(Effective at once)
As of now, when a student has passed the Prov. Class VI exam he will
officially be "In Training for Class VI".
This means only that he is thereby permitted to run R6 under
supervision while on the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course. It has no
other significance and does not guarantee a Class VI classification on
termination.
Since there will be no "provisional" certificates awarded in future, a
student who has not earned a Class VI certificate will be awarded a Class
IV or any lower level certificate-depending on the state of completion of
his check sheets and his level of auditing ability.
In future no student will be awarded a higher certificate after he has
left Saint Hill than that received on termination unless he/she retreads at
Saint Hill for higher classification.
Any student who has already left the Saint Hill Special Briefing
Course with a Prov. Classification should apply to HCO Board of Review for
a full classification before the 31st of December 1964-submitting evidence
of their claims. This should include a dispatch from their nearest
Organization.
If no such evidence has been submitted by the 31st of December 1964,
the student will automatically be granted a Class IV.
LRH:jw.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
(Cancelled by HCO P/L 13 November 1964, Provisional Class V1
Classification, page 448.1
447
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 NOVEMBER 1964
Remimeo
Franchise
Sthil Students
PROVISIONAL CLASS VI CLASSIFICATION
(Cancels HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 September 1964.)
(Confirms HCO Bulletin of I November AD 14 by stating it as Policy.)
(Effective at once.)
1.Re: HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 September 1964
Provisional Class VI Classification will again be awarded.
In future no student will be awarded a higher certificate or
classification after he has left Saint HID than that received on
termination unless he/she retreads at Saint Hill for higher classification.
This does not cancel the clause that "any student who has already left the
Saint Hill Special Briefing Course with a -Prov Classification should apply
to HCO Board of Review for a full classification before the 3 1 st of
December 1964."
2. Re: HCO Bulletin of 1 November AD14
THE MOMENT A STUDENT PASSES HIS PROVISIONAL CLASS VI CLASSIFICATION
AND GOES ON TO ROUTINE 6, HE OR SHE MUST ONLY SOLO AUDIT.
The Term Provisional Class VI means hereafter only "HAS THE RIGHT TO
SOLO AUDIT ON CLASS VI MATERIALS AND MAY NOT CO-AUDIT ON R66R AUDIT PCS
ONR6."
The only exception to this is the use of L6 Auditing-by-List and ARC
Break Assessments. These may be co-audited. But no administrative system
may be set up which automatically assigns students to do L6 work on each
other at regular intervals such as "Every Friday"; as it is needed when it
is needed and never when it isn't needed.
This HCO Policy Letter applies also to any student who has already
left the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course with a Provisional Class VI
Classification.
Violation of this Policy may result in the Provisional Class VI
Classification being revoked.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd
448
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 FEBRUARY 1965
Gen Non
Remimeo
Sthil Scientology Staff
Sthil Students
Franchise
COURSEPATTERN
(Effective March 6, 1965)
The Saint Hill Special Briefing Course is to be organized as follows:
It will be divided into four units. These units are:
Unit A covering Level 0. Unit B covering Levels I and II. Unit C
covering Levels 111 and IV. Unit D covering Level VI.
One Chief Instructor is in charge of each unit. He or she is
responsible for the theory, practical and auditing supervision and folder
marking and all other training and case and discipline matters relating to
that student for the duration of his progress up through the levels covered
by that Unit.
When the student's theory, practical and auditing check sheets are
complete for a level, he or she is examined by the HCO Board of Review.
This will consist of one or more examiners for Levels 0 to IV inclusive and
a special examiner for Level VI. Classes for the auditor are awarded on the
successful completion of each level up to IV and Provisional Class VI is
granted so that the student can then begin auditing at that level while
still on course. Those students auditing at Level IV while waiting to be
Provisionally Classified to VI so that they can audit at Level VI will
audit and be audited in the same classroom as in other lower units. When
Provisionally Classed and are auditing on Class VI they report to their
unit half days for study only and do their auditing off premises in the
balance of the day, submitting their reports to their instructor.
Therefore there is no Class VI audited on premises, but final
classification depends on their folders being accurate and showing gain.
When it is seen by periodic checks that their tone arm is high or they look
bad when looked over, a co-audit patch up is assigned to work in the D Unit
classroom with the D students and the full day is spent on premises.
In all units A to C a student must be provisionally classed before
being permitted to audit in that unit. Until so classed all time is spent
on study or in occasional patch up sessions as assigned using assist type
processes. Provisional Classification is awarded by the HCO Board of Review
after making sure that key materials, vital to the processes to be run at
that level, have been checked out. Auditing on the level processes is then
begun. However, all students on entering a unit are assigned as Co-audit
for assists and Twin Check-out. A D unit provisional is of course more
thorough.
A student in a unit is classed for the level he or she has completed
but the student in a unit is designated for the classes being studied for
as follows:
A 0 Class Zero Unit A Chapel
449
B I Class I Unit B Chapel
B 11 Class 11 Unit B Chapel
C III Class III Unit C Pavilion
C IV Class IV Unit C Pavilion
D VI Class VI Hall
E VI Class VI Study Hall
Class VI Auditing. Off premises.
A Chief Instructor is assigned to each of A, B, C and D, four Chief
Instructors in all. The course is headed by the Course Supervisor and the
title "Supervisor" is no longer otherwise used.
While progressing toward his Classification for each level the student
is under only one instructor.
On enrolling the student is not given an examination for placement but
is checked for valid enrolment pro-requisites (which remains HCA) and is
entered into Unit A which consists of a cheek sheet for theory, practical
and auditing. He is assigned to a Co-audit team for assists and Twin
checking and a Practical team. Materials include orientation at Saint Hill,
vocabulary materials, etc., to safeguard against previously misunderstood
words.
When the student has passed his cheek sheet in Theory and Practical on
key materials vital to permit auditing at that level, he goes to HCO Board
of Review for his Provisional Classification. Looking over his cheek sheet
and making sure he knows what he has passed by random cross checking on
twin check basis, HCO Board of Review decides on his qualification for a
Provisional Classification. HCO Board of Review examinations occur daily
and are not scheduled for a certain day of the week. Promotions to
Provisional or to Classification can occur on any day of the week and the
students can pass to the next unit on any day. When Provisional is awarded
only then the student is audited or audits on the Zero processes, all this
under one instructor and then is examined by an HCO Board of Review Officer
and classed finally for that level if passed. He and his Instructor are
informed of his classing and it is posted at once.
This same procedure is followed t~rough all the levels on upward
provisionally classed, then classed at each level.
A Grade Certificate is also furnished to show he has been audited
through the Level.
The Grade Certificate states that the student has received all
processes in the level just gone through and is ready for his next grade.
It reads "This will certify that
.......... has received all required processes of Grade and,
having completed
Grade as a preclear is ready for the processes of the next
grade." It is signed by
the HCO Board of Review after inspection of the case folder of the
student.
Saint Hill is a briefing and review course and the cheek sheets are
not the check sheets of an Academy for the same class and grade, containing
only vital materials.
A student can have a classification examination for IV or below any
time he or she wishes, regardless of course status or unit.
Any existing classification is laid aside for course duration at this
time (but is reinstated at course end, even though the student will
probably be well above it) as the final materials now in existence are new
and quite stable and students need the briefing.
450
On termination the highest classification obtained on the course will
be actually made up in full and signed. This is usually Class VI. However
the student is owed only the highest certificate attained as classing is
entirely optional with the HCO Board of Review always.
Examination by HCO Board of Review Officers consists of checking the
auditing folder and rechecking randomly on the check sheets of Theory and
Practical.
A student may go as high as he likes on this course but must be a
valid HCA to enroll. However, our oldest rule holds. Anyone can have an HCA
who can pass the HCA examination, which today is the examination for Class
11. But it would be a good idea for anyone trying for an HCA by examination
only to be examined for it by his nearest HCO first.
It is the full intention of the course to round out all those small
bits missed in former study and to get comfortably flat all the required
processes of a level the student, as a preclear, might have had left unflat
up to Level IV and thereby launch the student comfortably into Level VI
materials.
Time on course largely depends on excellence of former study,
processes amongst those required already flat and the length of time the
student wants to spend. A large number of those who remain at Saint Hill do
so out of their own wish to be at Saint Hill, course or no course, not
because they don~t progress. The glittering goal of OT, attainable
demonstrably as it is, the atmosphere and people here, the excitement, are
far more the cause of long stays. Well grounded auditors have completed in
under 12 weeks. But some well grounded auditors are still finding reasons
to stay after eight months even when they could have graduated months
before.
Previous estimates of time on course may have to be revised. Amount of
materials from Zero to IV have reduced and the length of time to finish off
a reactive mind has dropped from several years to a potential hammer and
tongs few months due to recent developments. Level VII is in sight and may
be a contributing factor in the future, but is not part of the present
course and will not be, constituting another course since it will have to
be taught under entirely different conditions.
Academies will probably be following this same pattern up to IV except
that each level will be separately enrolled for and delivered in the longer
period of one month. Therefore the Saint Hill Course, originally designed
to improve auditing over the world, having done so has to be taught now in
this fashion to give old auditors a look in at each level so they can audit
and teach it and newer ones a chance to be thorough and catch up on any
bits skimped.
Training is otherwise unchanged, consisting of three check sheets,
theory, practical and auditing. And the materials of VI have been
relatively stable for nearly a year and IV and below complete and stable
for many months. Therefore, shifting technology is no longer a student
problem, for there is no reason to shift it when it's the shortest proven
way. Printed texts will take a long time to prepare and issue. But
meanwhile, it's all here at Saint Hill.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:j,,V.cden Copyright @ 1965
[modified by HOD P/L 2 April 1965, Star-rate Checkouts for Process,
page 453, and amended by HCO P/L 14 October 1965, Course Pattem, page 464.
)
451
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 MARCH 1965
Sthl
FACULTY MEETING REPORT
Week Ending
Chief Instructors: Complete your reports below before the Faculty
Meeting on Friday, read and hand to Faculty Chairman. Leave other sections
Blank. This is a weekly report.
Level New Total No Prov CL Full CL THEORY PRACTICAL No. of T.A. . No.
Students Of of
Students Grads Grads Passes/Flunks Passes/Flunks Auditors Average
Bl(ws
0
1
2
3
4
6
Signed
Act. Chief Inst.
Course SuPervisor
Total
Definite Students booked
Indefinite Students booked
Total
Course Income Sterling
Dollars
Disbursement �
Graduates CL VI
T.V. Demo Results:-
Names of New Students for next week
Number of Students on Course
Signed Course Sup.
LRH:wmc.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1965
ALL, RIGHTS RESERVED
452
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 APRIL 1965
Gen Non Remirneo
Sthl Scientology Div III
staff
SthlStudents
Board of Review STAR-RATE CHECKOUTS FOR PROCESS
(Modification of HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 February 1965
"Course Pattern")
It has been found that permission to audit at a level on the processes
of that level when granted only after a provisional certification has
resulted in students having to spend all their time in auditing, in order
to get their auditing checksheet completed prior to classification for that
level, thereby resulting in no further theory or practical periods for the
student and a disruption of course scheduling.
To remedy this and therefore assist in more rapid student advancement,
the student may audit on a process of a certain level when he has passed
all theory and practical checkouts for that process. While the student is
getting his auditing checksheet complete for that process, he can be
studying and getting theory and practical checkouts on the next process
requirement for that level and can begin auditing with that process when he
has flattened the earlier process and has passed all checkouts for the next
process on his theory and practical checksheets.
This, therefore, means that the Board of Review need no longer give
provisional classification examinations, but need only ascertain that the
student has passed all theory and practical checkouts for the next process
to be run for a particular level.
We will call this a STAR-RATED Board of Review Checkout. We will have
to star-rate, therefore, each and every HCOB and tape that is required to
run an exact process. As this is not done on your bulletins, instructors
must comb out the HCOBs and tapes relating to the processes in the levels
and Star-Rate them.
The system then consists of the student doing the theory and practical
for a process, getting a Star-Rated PASS from the Board of Review on that
process. The student can then audit on that process on his course while
getting remaining theory and practical for that course and getting ready to
get STAR-RATED for the next process he is to run on his pc in that level.
Future HCOBs and tapes will adhere to this design.
POLICY is that a student may not audit a process he has not passed
theory and practical for in the HCO Board of Review.
POLICY is changed in that there is no provisional classification
required for a student on course in order to run the processes of the level
he is being trained on.
This POLICY applies also to R6 where R6EW is the first process, but
requires knowing quite a lot about the bank to be given a Star-Rated R6EW.
R6EWS and R6EWP would require two more STAR-RATED PASSES from the Board of
Review.
POLICY is that a Star-Rated Board of Review Pass is not a
classification and permits no rights as a Classification and applies only
to the student while on course.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mb.rd Copyright @ 1965
453
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Sthil HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 APRIL 1965
Sthil Students
COURSE R6 AUDITING
Outside, off premises 'auditing is cancelled herewith and all students
on R6 will do their auditing on premises.
LRH.jw.kd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 APRIL AD 15
Gen Non Remimeo Issue 11
Post Staff Board
Post Student Board
CLASSIFICATION ON GPMs
Effective June 1 1965
All Saint Hill Classification for running GPMs will be granted as
PROVISIONAL on termination and will become permanent only when the holder
is checked out as a total Clear at Saint Hill.
This of course does not affect earlier classifications.
Classification is an award and is not owed anyone, It is for
proficiency only.
Permanent Classification in the level below GPMs may be obtained and
used to audit for a fee, an entirely practical matter as one is not
supposed to use GPM materials on the public anyway and auditing another GPM
Provisional would be a turn-about Coaudit just to Audit by List any charge
accumulated during solo.
In any re-numbering of levels the Classification for the Level which
has changed number is also changed. Example: Level I becomes by
rearrangement of levels Level II. If this occurs, the Auditor Classified as
I may, by application to his training org, have his class changed to 11
without further examination.
Such a change is about to occur as I have found two lower levels than
those already numbered and V has been left empty.
Similarly, pcs may be regraded up providing they have the lower level
processes completed, a brief action for the most part.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jw.rd Copyright @ 1965
454
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 APRIL AD 15
Gen Non Remimeo
Sthil Execs Tech Division - TR
Sthil Students
Tech Sec HAT GPM UNIT
D of T HAT
GPM Unit Instructor HAT Examiners: Check out
All GPM Unit Students all Hats marked on this
Ist Issue to all new HCO Pol Ltr.
GPM Unit Students
ORGANIZATION GPM UNIT
(Effective Monday 19 Apr 65)
The organization and conduct of Unit D will now be similar to the
other lower Units.
The same auditing, theory and practical times will be kept as in other
units.
Processes Star-Checked may be run as soon as checked out on the
student.
The Twin Checking and coaudit teams will be used.
Due to the powerful nature of the materials no departures from
schedule, procedure or policy will be tolerated.
Any "advices" required by the student from the GPM Unit Instructor
must be answered entirely and only by directing the student to the study
materials themselves to find the answer there. In this the twin can work
with the other on (preferably) misunderstood words in the text, getting
them fully understood, or (secondarily) finding the past subject-Remedy B-
which has the other hung up or (thirdly) working it out on clay table, in
addition to the assigned CT exercises.
The GPM Unit Instructor similarly is expressly forbidden to seek
advice from "superiors" or unusual solutions or variations, and is bound in
general by the same rules that bind every other instructor-no alter-is, no
unusual solutions, no toleration of non-compliance in auditing by students
and no toleration of alter-is by student auditors. The reply to "It didn't
work" is always "What did you do?" To afford unusual solutions to students
or to the GPM Unit or any other instructor, or to vary or negate technology
or policy is a serious offence.
In the GPM Unit the materials misused and altered can be very
damaging. Therefore in this Unit above all others the observance of this
policy has no leeway of any kind. Any Instructor or Student or superior
negating or interpreting or "advising" on GPM policy or materials of study
will be promptly charged.
Any Instructor receiving into the GPM Unit students not generally
qualified in the ,lower levels, who commit the Gross Auditing Errors or
whose cases have not shown marked improvement on lower levels may likewise
be charged if failing to report it within one week of the student's
entrance into Unit D.
Skimped check sheets, incomplete check sheets or careless passes are
also chargeable.
It must be thoroughly understood that the student is there to be
instructed on the exact materials furnished and that the Unit is to be
conducted exactly in accordance with policies governing the handling of its
materials.
Any senior advising the Instructor of the GPM Unit differently than
policy is endangering the job and reputation of the Instructor. The
Instructor may therefore ask for a Comm Ev on that senior up to the level
of Secretary. Any student given "interpretations" of the material or policy
by an Instructor has his repute and future endangered by the Instructor and
may therefore request a Comm Ev of that Instructor. While this is true of
all course units whether at Saint Hill or an Academy it is to be entirely
energetically followed up on the GPM Unit of the Special Briefing Course.
Because of its very strict and exact demands in following technology
and policy the GPM Unit Instructor will receive a small bonus for every
student who successfully qualifies for Provisional at Class VI. But
conversely, for every student disqualified for
455
good and distinct cause by the Director of Examinations after
recommendation of the student by the GPM Unit Instructor for Provisional
Classification, the Director of Examinations will receive a small bonus.
The bonuses are payable monthly. It is the responsibility of the parties
claiming the bonuses to submit the Purchase Order themselves.
Further, students disqualified by the Director of Examinations from
the GPM Unit pass directly into the Department of Review or the HGC at the
student's own cost before leaving Saint Hill or being classified. Both the
HGC and the Department of Review make charges as the service is costly to
give and the student must not have taken advantage of the course facilities
or must have failed to report "interpretations" of technology or policy or
their negation or must have sought unusual solutions from others instead of
doing what is given on bulletins and tapes.
Every effort is being made by myself to give~ the material to the
student and get it safely and beneficially applied. On my part all I ask is
adherence to the technology and policy of the GPM Unit and their correct
application. Any variations or new materials or new texts will be written
by myself when found necessary after thorough Review of existing materials.
Suggested corrections or expansions should be reported in writing with full
details and references and accompanied by copies of the material in
question to the Department of Review but the person reporting and that
Department may not relieve anyone from compliance with the material on
which the change is requested until it is changed by HCOB or HCO Pol Ltrs
or is placed on tape by myself.
No other issue or "interpretation" has any validity and the course,
the seniors, the instructors and the students are entirely responsible for
holding firmly to the policy officially released by HCO Policy Letter and
following exactly the technology released by HCOBs and on my tapes.
The material is powerful. It will make a real Clear for the first time
in,the history of Man, and thus opens the further way to OT.
All I want is good auditors and cleared people.
I fully intend to have them, if necessary at any cost.
In accepting the GPM Unit Instruction post on the Course the
Instructor agrees to these terms.
In entering that Unit, the student agrees to these terms.
If not agreed with, then there are other posts and there is the HGC.
Here is where we separate the men from the boys, the ladies from the
children.
Up to now it was maybe an unserious affair.
It takes guts to go through the bank, it takes steady good instruction
and earnest bright study and exact text book auditing. The tolerance of
sloppy auditing in this level is nil. One mistake is too many.
This is the Road out that must be followed. I didn't build the bridge
to have people knocked off of it.
So that's policy on the GPM Unit.
I rather think it will be followed.
For if it isn't the way is barred for the next eternity.
We aren't playing now.
That's the way it is.
Let's get the show on the road.
LRH:ml.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (a) 1965
[Note: Paragraph regarding bonus has been corrected per HCO PL 23
April 1965, Issue 11, adding specific of who gets bonus.
456
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 MAY 1965
Gen Non Remimeo
Sthil Staff
Sthil Students URGENT
SHSBC UNIT
GRADUATION
(Effective 17 May, 1965)
The Instructors of Units C & D need not accept on their units any
student from a lower unit who does not have an adequate. meter and needle.
Students whose meter responses and TA position are non-optimum have
been demonstrated by recent survey to be incapable of absorbing the
material of the Levels Orientation, Understanding and Enlightenment and
stack up in Classes III and IV with increasing frequency.
This is therefore a matter forced upon us by the states of case of
people. At the same time we are fortunate to have the technology which
handles all this.
A student whose meter is non-optimum (high TA, very low TA sluggish or
pulsing or RSing needle, or "dead thetan") just wastes time when he moves
above the level of his case.
Classes 0, 1 and Il are perfectly capable of improving meter
conditions on the average pe when processing is properly applied and the
Case Cracking Section can do the job quickly for those whose cases are in
rougher shape, and more cheaply than a student's living costs for the
period he would lag on course.
Instructors who do not graduate students from their units into the
next unit are of course subject to down statistics and therefore Emergency.
This discovery of how and why some students took so much time on
course makes it necessary to lay down the policy contained herein:
Units C & D may not accept students whose meters show poor case
condition.
The Director of Examinations may not pass for graduation or
termination students whose meters show non-optimum case condition.
Getting his case in shape is a responsibility of the student. When the
student fails to take responsibility for it, course personnel may act to
get it done.
The Saint Hill Course is a Course, not a clinic. It is the business of
the course to produce auditors who can audit. Little attention need be paid
to cases or auditing schedules or auditing check sheets except as above and
to give the student a chance to demonstrate his skill as an auditor.
Case is no excuse for not auditing. It can however prevent
classification if not cared for by the student. No one is owed
classification. It is an award.
The Director of Examinations or any examiner may demand Auditor's
Reports of the student to prove his or her ability as an auditor, and may
demand a session be given
so that it can be observed.
LRH:wme.rd
Copyright (D 1965
L. RON HUBBARD
4.57
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 MAY 19 65
Sthil Staff Sthil Students
HCO SPECIAL BRIEFING COURSE
STUDENT GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOUR
GENERAL
I Adhere completely to the Code,of a Scientologist for the
duration of the course
and behave in a manner becoming to a Scientologist at all times.
2. Get sufficient food and sleep. Always eat breakfast before class
and morning sessions.
3. When being a preclear, be one, not a student or auditor. When
being an auditor, be an Auditor, not a student or preclear. When in class
and lectures, be a student not an auditor or a preclear.
4. Get off all your known withholds. Know definitely that you have
absolutely no hope for case advancement unless you get these known
withholds off to your auditor. Any violation of Course rules must be
reported by the auditor on the auditing report for that preclear so that
they are no longer withholds from L. Ron Hubbard, Mary Sue Hubbard or
Supervisors.
5. . Students are seated during lectures according to units, the
highest unit in the front, the lowest unit in the back.
6. When you are requested to ask questions during a lecture, raise
your hand and receive permission first before stating your question. Never
speak out unless permission has been granted.
7. Be as quiet as possible during lectures. Laughter or applause is
perfectly all right. The sounds not desired are rustling of paper, scraping
of chairs, coughing, clicking of ball point pens in and out, or any other
such noises. If you can't prevent yourself from coughing, please leave the
lecture as quietly as possible. You can hear the lecture later from the
tape. If you do have a tendency to cough or clear your throat, please sit
to the back of the lecture room as it is farthest from the microphone.
8. If you don't know something or are confused about course data,
ask a Supervisor or send a despatch. Do not ask other students as this
creates progressively worsening errors in data. Also dispatches from you to
L. Ron Hubbard will be relayed if you place all such in the basket marked
"Students Out".
9. Students may only use the coin box telephone during non class
periods.
10. Be polite and courteous to the children.
11. You must get the permission of L. Ron Hubbard to leave course
before you are allowed to leave. You won't be released if there is any
doubt that you are inadequate technically or your case is considered in
poor condition. Give a three week advanced warning as to when you are
leaving.
12. All these rules and regulations are inflexible, and are to be
followed by all students during the course unless permission has been
previously received from a Supervisor.
458
A VDITING ,
13. Do not consume any alcoholic beverage between 6 a.m. on Sundays
and after class on Fridays.
14. Do not consume or have administered to yourself or any other
student any drug, antibiotics, aspirin, barbiturates, opiates, sedatives,
hypnotics or medical stimulants for the duration of the course without the
approval of the Course Supervisor.
15. Do not give any processing to anyone under any circumstances
without direct permission of the Course Supervisor. (Emergency assists
excepted.)
16. Do not receive any processing from anyone under any
circumstances without the express permission of the Course Supervisor.
17. Do not engage in any "self-processing" under any circumstances
during the course at any time.
18. Do not receive any treatment, guidance, or help from anyone in
the healing arts, i.e. physician, dentist, etc., without the consent of the
Course Supervisor. (Emergency treatment when the Course Supervisor is not
available is excepted.)
19. Do not engage in any rite, ceremony, practice, exercise,
meditation, diet, food therapy or any similar occult, mystical, religious,
naturopathic, homeopathic, chiropractic treatment or any other healing or
mental therapy while on course without the express permission of the Course
Supervisor.
20. Do not discuss your case, your Auditor, your Supervisors, your
classmates, L Ron Hubbard, HCO WW personnel or HCO WW with anyone. Save
your unkind or critical thoughts for your processing sessions or take up
complaints with any Supervisor.
21. Do not engage in any sexual relationships of any nature or kind
or get emotionally involved with any classmate who is not your legal
spouse.
22. Follow the Auditor's Code during all sessions when being the
Auditor.
23. Follow all auditing directions given you on report forms for
your preclear.
24. Follow technical procedure as outlined on the course exactly and
precisely.
25. Be honest at all times on your auditing report forms. Stating
every process run, Tone Ann changes and times, Sensitivity setting,
cognitions of your preclear and any changes of physical appearance,
reactions, communication level, or otherwise what you observe in your
preclear.
26. Place all reports in the folder of your preclear after each
session, and place all folders in the basket marked for such.
27. Students must not read their own report folder or that of
another student, unless he is auditing that student.
GROUNDS AND PREMISES
28. Do not make any undue noise in the evenings either indoors, in
the grounds, or when leaving class.
29. Use the correct entrances for entering and leaving the premises.
30. The Hall and only the Hall is open on Saturdays and Sundays and
students may
come to study and listen to tapes on those days from 8.00 a.m. to 5.00
p.m.
459
31. The Manor is out of bounds to students without permission of a
Supervisor.
32. Look over the grounds, by all means, but do not pick the
flowers. You may use tennis courts and croquet green by tennis courts and
you may fish in the lake. The use of the swimming pool is not allowed as it
is reserved for the children.
33. During the week all class buildings are closed at 6.30 p.m.
unless otherwise assigned.
QUARTERS
34. Do not put cigarettes out in the plastic waste baskets or on the
floors.
35. Keep all your bulletins, supplies and personal possessions in
the space allotted to you and keep your space neat and orderly.
36. Do not use lecture platform in the Chapel to work on or to put
things on.
37. Auditors and preclears are not allowed to smoke during sessions.
Students are allowed to smoke during breaks only and always outside any
study or auditing quarters.
38. The basket marked "Student In" is the basket where all
communications, bulletins or mail to students are placed. Always check this
basket daily to see if you have received any communications.
39. Report and turn in any damaged property or goods used on the
Course. Protect and keep the premises in good condition.
40. No food may be stored or eaten in the Chapel or Hall at any
time.
41. Food may be stored during the daytime in the Cloakroom adjoining
the 'Ladies Shower Room' only. Food may be consumed in the Pavilion during
the lunch break and dinner break. All waste wrappings and waste food must
be taken to and deposited in the outside dustbins, adjacent to the garages,
before the end of the break. No food may be kept anywhere on the premises
overnight.
SCHEDULES
42. Be on time for class and all assignments.
43. Buy any books you need from the invoice clerk from 12.00 - 1.00
and 2.50 -3.00 and at no other time.
44. Follow all schedules exactly.
45. Study and work during your class periods and over weekends. You
have a lot to get checked out on in order to get a course completion. You
can't afford to waste time.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.rd
Copyright @ 1965
460
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO, POLICY LETTER OF 3 JUNE 1965
Saint Hill
Grads after
Jan 64
ALL GRADS SINCE JAN 64
Tech Div
R6 EW
The R6 EW materials and L4 & L6 ARC Break Lists have been sent to all
SHSBC grads since Jan 1964.
These materials are issued to them for use on their own cases.
They may have the Solo Audit HCOBs as well.
They may not use these materials on the public. Serious damage has
been done by two US Auditors defying policy on using R6 on raw meat with
resultant spins and illnesses.
Do not print or publish or give it to others.
Read the material carefully and follow it exactly.
Those SHSBC grads who have used it report remarkable success with it
and I am happy to have trained them well enough to make it possible to use
it on themselves.
There is not and never will be a public application to pe by auditor
use of clearing. The nature of the process forbids it. Releasing is for the
untrained. Clearing can be attained only through training as the pcs don't
know enough about life to know how to handle their bank in any way.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:wmc.rd Copyright Q 1965
461
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 JULY 1965
Issue III
Sthil
Sthil Students
COURSE R6 AUDITING
The HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 April 1965 which restricts the auditing of R6
to training premises is cancelled.
R6 auditing may be conducted either on the premises or off the
premises.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.kd Copyright @ 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 AUGUST 1965
Saint Hill Executive Staff only
TECHNICAL QUERIES FROM R6 GRADUATES
Letters from R6 Grads concerning technical reports on their auditing
and technical queries concerning R6 EW should be routed to the Technical
Secretary for answering. These letters may be typed in typing pool if Tech
Division has no typist of their own.
In answering these letters, the Technical Secretary should follow
Policy on the answering of Technical queries. The Technical Secretary must
take care never to ignore any expressed want in the letter and to refer the
graduate wherever possible to the Advanced Scheduling Registrar for
scheduling for HGC Saint Hill, retread or interneship.
If there is an expressed want to set up a City Office or forming Org
this should be referred to HCO for handling.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright@ 1965
462
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 SEPTEMBER 1965
Saint Hill only
SHSBC Students
CLASSIFICATION REQUIRED BEFORE MOVING
TO NEXT LEVEL
The Saint Hill Special Briefing Course Levels 0 through IV is a Review
Course at a high professional level.
Although Classification is an award, because of the degree of
excellence of auditing required at Level VI, Saint. Hill students are
required to get classification at the lower levels.
Students are required to complete the Theory Checksheet at each level
and attain certification before going into the Practical Section for that
level. Students MUST complete the full Practical requirements including the
auditing requirement and attain Classification for that level before moving
on to the Theory Section of the next level up. This makes for an orderly
progression through the course and will be found to be to the students'
advantage to not be tied up in incomplete cycles of action while trying to
study for higher levels.
If a student flunks his classification written exam or the examination
of his auditing via his auditing reports, the student is to review his
theory, then his practical, as well as submit further auditing evidence
(auditor's reports) before re-examination,
In the Practical Section of each level, the student is to do his
auditing requirement on his own responsibility during the evenings or
weekends and have the auditing requirement completed by the time he has
completed his practical checksheet. If the student has failed to do this,
he will have to review the Theory for that level, as well as the Practical,
as it will be conceived that the student's confidence in his material for
the level is lacking to the extent that he has not reached for, found and
audited a preclear.
The student is expected to complete the theory checksheet for each
level in two weeks. He is expected to complete the Practical checksheet for
each level in two weeks. Any student failing to do this has a down
statistic and is to be sent to Cramming. Any student who flunks an
axamination is sent to Cramming. Any student who fails to have the auditing
requirement done by the time his practical checksheet is done (and thus
must review the entire level) is sent to Cramming.
Any student, who, at the date of this Policy Letter has been working at a
level that he or she is not Classified up to the next level below, is given
a grace period of two weeks exactly to 'catch up' on Classification.
Student attention is called to HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 August AD 15
-Classification at Upper Levels-Temporary Measure.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden Copyright @ 1965
463
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 OCTOBER 1965
Gen Non-Renrimeo (Amends HCO Policy Letter of
Sthil Scientology Staff 27 February 1965)
Sthil Students
Franchise
COURSE PATTERN
The Saint Hill Special Briefing Course is to be organized as follows:
It will be divided into four units. These units are:
Unit A covering Level 0 Unit B covering Levels I and 11 Unit C
covering Levels III and IV Unit D covering Level VI.
One Supervisor is in charge of each unit. He or she is responsible for
the theory and practical supervision and all other training and discipline
matters relating to that student for the duration of his progress up
through the levels covered by that Unit.
A student in a unit is classed for the level he or she has completed
but the student in a unit is designated for the classes being studied for
as follows:
A 0 Class Zero Unit A Pavilion
B I Class I Unit B Chapel
B 11 Class II Unit B Chapel
C III Class III Unit C Pavilion
C IV Class IV Unit C Pavilion
D VI Class VI Hall
A Supervisor is assigned to each of A, B, C and D, four Supervisors in
all. The course is headed by the Director of Training.
While progressing toward his Classification for each level the student
is under only one supervisor.
On enrolling the student is not given an examination for placement but
is checked for valid enrollment prerequisites (which remains HCA) and is
entered into Unit A which consists of a check sheet for theory and
practical. Materials include orientation at Saint Hill, vocabulary
materials, etc, to safeguard against previously misunderstood words.
When the student has completed his theory check sheet, he is routed to
the Director of Examinations, Qualifications Division, to attest that he
has done so. He then receives his Certification for the level and is
promoted to the Practical work of the Level. Once he has received
Certification for a Level, he is permitted to audit an outside pc to
Release on that Level.
When he has completed his Practical check sheet and achieved the
Release of his pc, lie presents his auditor's report to Dir Exams. When
this report has been accepted as satisfactory by Dir Exams, the student may
sit for written examinations on the Level.
If the examination is not passed, the student remains in the
Qualifications Division in the Cramming Section at a charge of f.2 per day
until he is able to pass an Exam on the Level.
464
When the Examination is passed, the student receives Classification
for the Level just completed and moves into the next level.
This same procedure is followed through all the levels on upward,
Certified, then Classed at each level.
Saint Hill is a briefing and review course and the check sheets are
not the check sheets of an Academy for the same class and grade, containing
only vital materials.
A student can have a classification examination for IV or below any
time he or she wishes, regardless of course status or unit.
Any existing classification is laid aside for course duration at this
time (but is reinstated at course end, even though the student will
probably be well above it) as the final materials now in existence are new
and quite stable and students need the briefing.
On termination the highest classification obtained on the course will
be actually made up in full and signed. This is usually Prov Class VI.
However the student is owed only the highest certificate attained as
classing is entirely optional with the Dir Exams always.
A student may go as high as he likes on this course but must be a
valid HCA to enroll. However our oldest rule holds. Anyone can have an HCA
who can pass the HCA examination, which today is the examination for Class
Il. But it would be a good idea for anyone trying for an HCA by examination
only to be examined for it by his nearest HCO first.
It is the full intention of the course to round out all those small
bits missed in former study.
Previous estimates of time on course may have to be revised. Amount of
materials from Zero to IV have reduced and the length of time spent on R6
materials and solo auditing is only a few weeks. Level VII is not part of
the present course and will not be. It constitutes another course, since it
is taught under entirely different conditions.
Academies will probably be following this same pattern up to IV except
that each level will be separately enrolled for and delivered in the longer
period of one month. Therefore the Saint Hill Course, originally designed
to improve auditing over the world, having done so has to be taught now in
this fashion to give old auditors a look in at each level so they can audit
and teach it and newer ones a chance to be thorough and catch up on any
bits skimped.
Training is otherwise unchanged. And the materials of VI have been
relatively stable for over a year and IV and below complete and stable.
Therefore, shifting technology is no longer a student problem, for there is
no reason to shift it when it's the shortest proven way. Printed texts will
take a long time to prepare and issue. But meanwhile, it's all here at
Saint Hill.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright @ 1965
465
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 FEBRUARY 1966
Applies to
Sthil only
Exec Sees Qual and Tech Divs
Tech See
D of T
Course Supervisors
Mimeo SH
Qual See & Qual Staff CHECK SHEETS, COURSE
THEORY COURSES
The check sheets of the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course Theory
Courses will be changed as fast as is feasible to The Library Lists HCOB 30
November 1965.
These will be on a Zero rate.
Only the vital points like Axioms, Scales and key processes and Model
Session are Star-Rated and these must be picked out and pointed up on the
Check Sheets by the Tech Sec.
The Tech Sec is responsible for making up check sheets from the
Library List omitting only any totally irrelevant HCOBs or books or
pamphlets but keeping the amount of material as large as possible.
Obviously a student cannot have a copy of each bulletin or pamphlet so
they are made up into sections of the level in a folder and the student
hands it in when he has read it and it is reused. Students may buy copies
of bulletins they want at the usual price and must pay for any they lose.
Tape check sheets will remain as they are at this time but will be
added to when the Tape Library List is completed.
PRACTICAL COURSES
The Practical Courses will include the use of a doll. All auditing
actions must be letter perfect using the doll before the Auditor is
permitted a live pe.
A Grade Released pc for the level is required for the Classification
to be assigned.
LEVEL VI
Level VI must include the entirety of the Whole Track materials
assembled by M. Routsong and boxed.
These are Zero rated.
Practical for the Level consists of finding and running late implants
on another pc for which the plot is known and given.
Solo Auditing Theory materials are then studied.
Practical is completed by Solo Auditing to Grade VI Release.
Persons taking this course with no earlier training must be given an E-
Meter Cheek Sheet, rudimentary TRs and some Model Session before doing any
of the above.
WARNING
There are two kinds of theory training. One is to go over a little
material but very thoroughly. We have lately been doing this. The other
method which 1 favour and have the best success with, is to go over LOTS of
material lightly and swiftly and then go over a very small amount of very
important material thoroughly.
466
Thus this is a shift in gears for Course Supervisors and they must not
get in the students' way in going over lots of material beyond being sure
it is actually covered and no misunderstood words exist in it. And they
must be plain murder on the small bits that are Star rated. Axioms by heart
mean Axioms by Heart and no "Ah -- er -".
Remember that anyone enrolling in the SHSBC has been through the
featherweight, small cheek sheet Academy Courses. These people lack a broad
command of the subject. So we will give it to them.
EXAMINERS
STUDENTS
The method of student examination is changed herewith.
THEORY
The Certificate Exam shall consist of:
I . Assurance the student has covered the broad body of data;
2. Assurance the student can parrot the Star Rated bits quickly,
and
3. The student is not all at sea about the principles of the level
and why it is a level.
4. The student can demonstrate the principles.
PRACTICAL
The student examiner on a Classification Exam must be sure the student
can
1 . Go through the motions of an auditor for that level;
2. Answer up to some practical questions about what to do;
3. Show evidence of having released a pc at that level and in a
very proper, uncopied report.
The 5 GAEs if they appear at any time at any level constitute a flunk
of the examination.
Examinations should only be carried on to a point where the Examiner
knows whether the student doesn't know or knows but examination should be
quite pitiless.
An Examiner finding a student is obviously too bad should always send
the student to Review for an Assist before sending to Cramming.
The Assist should handle ARC Breaks and misunderstoods before anything
else.
Only flunking incorrectly or passing incorrectly upsets students. The
truth leaves them cheerful. Whatever else happens.
These changes are not so much changes as you think. The original
method of teaching the SHSBC is being resumed.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden Copyright & 1966
467
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 AUGUST 1966
Sthill only
All Staff
ROUTING AND HANDLING OF SHSBC STUDENTS
ANY STUDENT ON THE DAY SHSBC IS FIRST AND FOREMOST A STUDENT.
This rule is true regardless of what other activities they undertake
on their own time.
No student may hold a post on the Foundation, if, in the opinion of
the Supervisor, it interferes with the student's progress on course.
Any student holding a Foundation post must be immediately replaced if
course progress is being impeded.
ORDERS AND ROUTING
Any orders or routings given to a student by another section of the
Org which will interfere with course hours must be done via the Tech Sec, D
of T, and the Course Supervisor of the student concerned.
The sole intention of the latter is to prevent students from
"disappearing" from course into the HGC, Review, or anywhere else, without
the Supervisor having directly sent the Student.
LRH:ec.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (~) 1966
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 SEPTEMBER 1966
Ramimeo All Staff and Students
REQUIREMENT FOR TERMINATION ON THE SHSBC
AND ENROLMENT ON SOLO COURSE
It has been observed that among the early Clears Grade VA Release was
an important gradient toward the achievement of Clear.
This Grade is no longer to be omitted by those who wish to enrol on
the Clearing Course.
It is now required that all students achieve Grade VA Release as well
as Grade V before they may terminate from the Saint Hill Special Briefing
Course.
It is also a requisite that all students enrolling on the Solo Course
be Grade V and Grade VA Release.
The gradient from Grade V to Solo Auditing and then the Clearing
Course will
then be much smoother and easier.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:lb-r.cden.rd Founder
468
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 OCTOBER 1966
Unit Supers
students
SH Only
Ad Council
Qual Sec
Tech Sec STUDENTS TERMINATING
LEAVE OF ABSENCE
BLOWN STUDENTS
L Students Terminating
Any student terminating the SHSBC, the Solo Audit Course, or the
Ministers Course is to get an end of course clean-up by a qualified fellow
student on a June 26 Form run as Auditing by List.
The D of T is responsible for seeing that this policy letter is put
into effect.
Any student routing form now in use should be modified to include this
step. The Unit Supervisor is to sign in the proper place.
In case of difficulty in the cleaning up of the form, the student
should be routed to the Dept of Review for a formal review session.
Ethics cannot OK the termination without the form signed by the Unit
Supervisor, whether a review session occurred or not in the Dept of Review.
11. LeaveofAbsence
(a) Any student wanting to leave course should be treated as a kind of
blow and sent to Review. Only after a review can any leave of absence be
granted by the Tech Sec, on D of T's advice and after an Ethics clearance.
Valid evidence of the necessity for a leave must be presented by the
student. In no case can it exceed two weeksexceptional leave of absence
exceeding a two week period can only be granted by the Ad Council upon
presentation of strong evidence of the necessity for such and afterthe
above routine has been gone through.
(b) A short leave of absence of a day or so can be granted by the Unit
Supervisor without any further okay than by the Dir of Training.
Iff. Blown Students
Blown students are handled as per HCO Pol Ltr of April 5, 1965, HCO
Justice Data re Academy & HGC-Handling the Suppressive Person, Volume 1,
page 381 -"The Blown Student", and any other policy letters dealing with
suppressive acts.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:lb-r.rd Copyright@ 1966
469
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 OCTOBER 1966
Issue V
Remirneo SHSBC Students SOLO Students Franchise FSMs BPI
DURATION OF SHSBC AND SOLO COURSE REQUIREMENTS
The following requirements will assure a fast flow through the SHSBC
and Solo Course, and will result in well grounded auditors and solo
auditors who can really handle the materials covered.
SHSBC REQUIREMENTS
Certification for Level 0, including the Dianetic Course and Dissem
Drill, to be completed in 7 weeks and Classification in 2 weeks.
The other Levels up to Level VI are to be completed within 3 weeks for
each Certification and 2 weeks for each Classification.
Both the Certification and Classification requirements for Level VI
must be completed in a period not exceeding 5 (five) weeks for each.
SOLO COURSE REQUIREMENTS
Solo Course Students, by the nature of their course, are to complete a
minimum number of actions within a specific time, to wit:
Zero checkouts 25 daily
Star-rated checkouts 2 daily
Tapes to be listened to 2 daily.
These are minimum requirements only and a fast student will discover
that he can complete much faster. This is the road to freedom and OT, and
the faster we move, the sooner we'll have a clear planet.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:rd.cden
470
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 DECEMBER 1966
Students Foundation Training
WHAT THE SHSBC STUDENT NEEDS TO KNOW ABOUT FOUNDATION
As part of your requirements as a student is auditing the general
public, you need to know the following:
I . Having disseminated and found your pc, before you audit him on
any process, put in a good Reality Factor on the Gradation Chart, the
various levels he will be audited through, and the fact that he will have
to come to the Organization for a Release check. Also you must tell him
that it might be necessary for him to have Review auditing, and this costs
money; so bridge him in on this point.
2. After auditing your pc to Release, you bring him into the
Reception in the Foundation either in the weekdays between 7:30 p.m. to
10:00 p.m., or weekends from 9:30 a.m. to 6:30 p.m. It is necessary that
you accompany him into Reception and take his folder in with you. You also
wait in Reception until he has had his declare. If all goes well, that is
the end of that cycle. If not, he will not be too surprised at the Review
action as you have explained it to him in the beginning.
3. The best dissemination is books. If your pc has read something,
he will have more reality on the auditing and the Organization. Get him to
buy a book.
4. Take or send your pc to a PE Course. This is a free service and
will not lose you your pe. You may continue auditing him up to Level IV.
5. When your pc has come up through the grades and has become
interested in going further in Scientology Training or Processing, you
select him for the rest of the Services he requires.
Dalene Regenass D/Qual F
Julia Galpin D/HCO F
Julia Galpin Ad Council F
Julia Galpin LRH Comm F
Jill van Staden Ad Council SH
Otto Roos
Ken Delderfield LRH Comm SH
Leon Steinberg)
J.J. Delance Ad Council WW
Philip Quirino LRH Comm WW
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH.jp.rd
Copyright (E) 1966
471
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 FEBRUARY 1968
Gen Non-Rernfinco SHSBC Students SH Tech & Qual Staff SH Foundation
FAST FLOW FOR SHSBC STUDENTS'PRECLEARS
Amends HCO Pol. Letter 30 Dec. 1966
1. The supreme policy being: RAPIDITY OF PARTICLE FLOW ALONE
DETERMINES POWER, it is imperative that the preclear, once the completion
is reached, immediately continues the routing on lines and finishes the
cycle he is on.
2. Therefore, any stops put forward by the insistence that a SHSBC
Student's preclear should wait until the evening or even the week-end for
the Declaration of his grade or grades on foundation lines, instead of day
lines is a violation of the Fast Flow System and constitutes use of policy
to stop a flow.
3. Therefore in future preclears are to be put on lines for
declaration of a grade or grades without any delay on lines whatsoever.
Blanka Annakin - Public Exec See SH
Edie Hoyseth - Qual See SH
Bene Neal - HCO Area See SH
Monica Quirino - HCO Exec See SH
Herbie Parkhouse - Org Exec See SH
Ken Urquhart - LRH Comm SH
Anne Tampion - D/HCO Exec See WW
Allan Ferguson - Org Exec See WW
Tony Dunleavy - Public Exec See WW
Ken Delderfield - LRH Comm WW
Joan McNocher - Dep Guardian WW
LRH:jc.rd Mary Sue Hubbard - The
Guardian WW
Copyright 1968 for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
472
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 OCTOBER 1965
Remimeo
Tech Div
Qual Div
Dissem Div
SAINT HILL SOLO AUDIT COURSE
(Effective 1 November 1965)
OF PARTICULAR INTEREST TO POWER PROCESSING
PRECLEARS
Solo Audit Course is inaugurated at Saint Hill for those non-
professional preclears who, obtaining Grade V Release, wish to go on to
Grade VI and Grade VII.
It is to be fully understood that this course applies only to solo
audit and gives no auditor certificate but only a grade of Release
certificate when complete. A person taking this course is not to audit
others above any auditor class the student actually holds.
It is further to be fully understood that any trouble the solo auditor
gets into must be resolved by a proper Class VI auditor in an organization
and that such assistance is at the student's own expense and is not part of
the offered courses. Such help is called A SOLO AUDITOR ASSIST and is
charged at existing auditor rates by the whole hour for all hours and any
part of an hour. Such SOLO AUDITOR ASSISTS are normally given by the
QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION. They consist of by-passed charge assessments using
standard lists, track analysis to find where the solo auditor has gotten to
and case analysis to discover what is wrong. They also include
rehabilitation of a release state overrun. They do not consist of auditing
the.materials for the grade.
SOLO AUDIT COURSE
GRADE VI
Prerequisite: Grade V Release. Full and unqualified Ethics Clearance.
This course consists of the following:
The parts of life-thetan, body, mind, physical universe, engrams.
Vocabulary for parts of the E-Meter.
Elementary E-Metering.
Elementary Solo Auditing on PTPs, etc. Keeping an Auditor's Report.
The history of Dianetics and, Scientology.
Vocabulary for the bank as used in the film The Pattern of the Bank.
The film The Pattern of the Bank and any other pertinent film with
full checkouts (in its data (not just viewed).
Whole track data.
R6 EW technology. Solo Auditing to Grade VI Release. Release
Certification when attained.
When this course is completed, the Grade VI Release is eligible to
enroll on the Saint Hill Clearing Course on a solo audit basis for Grade
VII Clear. No other certificate will be given than a grade certificate. And
the person is given no right to audit others. But the person may attain
Clear by this route.
(Note: This is the non-professional route specified in the earlier
Gradation programmes.)
473
ARRANGEMENTS
The Solo Audit Course Grade VI will be taught in the Technical
Division Department of Training Saint Hill. It will be called Unit E-One
and will be handled by the E-Unit Course Supervisor who, in case of
numbers, may have an E-One Supervisor under him to handle this course.
This course absorbs the R6 EW Short Course taught to org executives
who were not properly classed for the Saint Hill Course. All students of
the R6 EW Short Course are transferred to the Solo Audit Course, the
materials being similar.
The course has already been piloted and was found to be successful.
This course in no way supplants the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course
or Academy Courses O-IV and the student is warned that the course is
designed to make him or her only a solo auditor and in no way prepares one
to audit others or handle others with Scientology and that if any
certification or Classification or full understanding of technology is
required the student of the Solo Audit Course will have to begin with lower
classification training. It is however admitted that a Grade VI Release
would have little trouble with the lower levels of training and that a
Clear would have no trouble at all.
SPECIAL ARRANGEMENTS
Where a person has gone Grade VI Release by reason of earlier auditing
on goals as happened occasionally prior to 1965 (they had gone up through
all grades unknowingly and these were rehabilitated after the fact) the
student yet must successfully complete the Solo Audit Course in order to
qualify for the Clearing Course and in no case will anyone be enrolled on
the Clearing Course unless the Solo Audit Course has been passed,
Persons enrolled on the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course take a
longer professional version of the Solo Audit Course as part of their
training and as covered by their enrollment fee at this time.
The price of the Solo Audit Course is f 275.
An additional fee of f 275 is required for the Clearing Course.
An HCA certificate from an Academy is required to enroll on the Saint
Hill Special Briefing Course.
LRH:ml.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright @ 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 NOVEMBER 1965
St Hill only
TRANSFERS FROM SHSBC TO SOLO AUDIT COURSE
Students wishing to transfer from the SHSBC to the Solo Audit Course
may do so only with permission of LRH.
Full credit is allowed for any sums not consumed by the Saint Hill
Special Briefing Course.
Compute as follows-Number of weeks on SHSBC times f 11.9.2 subtracted
from ~C275 equals amount to be credited toward the Solo Audit Course.
LRH:ml.kd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright @ 1965
474
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 SEPTEMBER 1967
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
SOLO AUDITING FOLDERS
After completion of the student's solo auditing requirements his
auditing folder is not to be given to the student to take away or keep as
it is the record of a student's Grade VI auditing and as such must remain
at Saint Hill. The folder must be filed safely at Saint Hill by Technical
Services as the folder contains confidential data and also could at some
later date be needed for reason of review of the Grade.
A student's solo audit course examinations may not be given to the
student to take home but must be kept in the Qualifications Division Dept
of Examinations. The examination is handed back to the student after the
examination has taken place for reference but must always be promptly
returned. It is the responsibility of the examiner to see that Level VI
exam sheets are returned by the student.
Written by a Board of Investigation:
Chairman - Monica Quirino
Secretary - Dalene Regenass
Member - David Ziff
LRHjp.rd Mary Sue Hubbard
Copyright (D 1967 The Guardian
WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 NOVEMBER 1967
Solo Course Students Level VI Students
R 6 MATERIALS
THE MATERIALS OF R 6 ARE TOTALLY CONFIDENTIAL. THEY ARE TO BE KEPT
SECURE AT ALL TIMES
This means that the only people who may talk about or be talked to
about, or may see these materials are those people who are on the Solo
Course or Level VI and those people who are already Grade VI or Class VI or
above. No one else may see these materials. If left at home, they are to be
kept under lock and key.
Responsibility for these materials lies completely with the students
they belong to. Violation of this policy in any way, such as losing any of
these materials or leaving them lying around, will incur severe Ethics
action.
Chief Solo Course Sup Malcolm Cheminais
Director of Training Dalene Regenass
Tech See SH Allan Ferguson
Qual See SH Helen Pollen
HCO Area See SH Bene Neal
Chairman, Ad Council SH Helen Pollen
Exec Council SH J.J. Delance
Barbara Gentry
Pub Exec See SH Rosalie Vesper
LRH Comm SH Irene Dunleavy
Chairman, Ad Council WW: Mike Davidson
Exec Council WW Leaks Marinko
Tony Dunleavy
LRH Comm WW Ken Delderfield
D/Guardian WW Joan McNocher
LRH:jp.rd Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
475
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 DECEMBER 1965
Saint Hill only
STAFF ON SAINT HILL CLEARING COURSE
In accordance with long standing solo audit policy:
At least 5 hours of auditing must be done a week by the Saint Hill
Staff on the Clearing Course. The reports and materials of these sessions
must be handed to the Clearing Course Supervisor each week.
Failure to comply with this will result in being sent to review at own
expense.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:emp.kd Copyright @ 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1966
Remimeo
Dist Staff
Students
REGULATIONS FOR AUDITING OF STAFF
AND STUDENTS
In HCO Pol Ltr of 24 May 1965 Student Guide to Acceptable Behaviour,
it states under # 15, "Do not give any processing to anyone under any
circumstances without direct permission of the Course Supervisor (Emergency
Assists excepted)", and :# 16, "Do not receive any processing from anyone
under any circumstances without the express permission of the Course
Supervisor" (now D of T).
In HCO Pol Ltr of I April 1960 Regulations for Staff Members and Ex-
Staff Members, # 2, "Any Staff Member of the organization may not audit any
current preclear or student unless that preclear or student has been signed
up for processing in the Hubbard Guidance Centre by the Registrar and has
been assigned the auditor by the Director of Processing" (now HGC Admin).
These policies are still in effect. Any Staff Member, student or
Interne requiring an assist or Review (unless an Emergency) must notify
their Dept Head who arranges with Qualifications Div, Dept of Review for an
assist to be given if the Dept Head deems it necessary.
The only exception is the Clearing Course Student who is handled
entirely by the Clearing Course Supervisor and may not be audited, sent to
Review, or given an assist (except in an Emergency like an Injury) by
anyone. The Clearing Course Supervisor is notified if a Clearing Course
student is having difficulty with their case at home, at work, etc and the
Clearing Course Supervisor handles it.
LRH:ml.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1966
476
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 FEBRUARY 1966
Clearing Course
Students
CLEARING COURSE
SUBMISSION OF FOLDERS
Every Clearing Course Student away from Saint Hill must send their
folder, or a written report about their auditing, to the Clearing Course
Supervisor, Saint Hill. This information must be received once a month.
Non-compliance will result in the Student being classed as a blown
Student and he or she will be handled as such.
LRH:ml.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1966
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 FEBRUARY 1966
Issue Il
Clearing Course Students
CLEARING COURSE
WEEKLY AUDITING HOURS
All non-Saint Hill Staff Clearing Course Students who are working at
Saint Hill as Internes, or in any other post, before returning to their
countries, must complete 5 hours of auditing a week.
Non-compliance will result in the Student being sent to Review at his
or her own expense.
The folders must be given to the Clearing Course Supervisor every
Thursday.
LRH:ml.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Cancelled by HCO P/L 14 October 1966, Clearing Course Folders, page
481.1
477
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 MARCH 1966
Remimeo
Franchise
Auditor 14
BPI AMNESTY
Celebrating the First real Clear made on the Saint Hill Clearing
Course, a general amnesty is ordered.
Any and all persons who have been dead filed or declared suppressive
are included in this amnesty providing they report to the HCO Area
Secretary in their nearest organization and obtain a clearance from her and
an auditing check in the Department of Review.
I have no wish to have any organization stand in anyone's way on the
Road to Clear. The complete route is available and proven. It is time to
settle all differences for the day of total freedom is here.
With this amnesty I wish to thank from the bottom of my heart those
who helped, and I wish to hold no rancor for those who in ignorance of what
we sought, may have hindered us-the time is long over when we could be
stopped.
All actions or intentions before this date are freely forgiven.
LRH:ml.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright(~j) 1966
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1966
Gen Non-Remimeo
St Hill
Clearing Course
Students
ETHICS: CLEARING COURSE
Whenever a Clearing Course Student is found guilty by Ethics of
serious non compliance of Clearing Course instructions, blowing from
Course, Misuse of Clearing Course material, communicating about the
Clearing Course to anyone (which includes Clearing Course students) other
than the Clearing Course Supervisor or a Review auditor properly assigned
to the case or of any action resulting in action having to be taken by
Ethics, an Ethics investigation is to be ordered immediately by the HCO
Exec Sec, St Hill to find who was responsible for allowing such a security
risk on to the Clearing Course and make recommendations.
The Clearing Course Supervisor may demand of the HCO Exec Sec that a
Committee of Evidence be called if he/she is of the opinion that the
security of the Clearing Course is threatened and no action is being taken.
L RON HUBBARD LRH:lb-r.cden by L Ron Hubbard
[Revised to include Advanced Courses by HCO P/L 12 August 1971 issue V
(corrected & reissued 24 October 1971), Ethics: Advanced Courses, in the
1971 Year Book.]
478
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS. OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 AUGUST 1966
Rernhneo
ETHICS
CLEARS, INVALIDATION OF
Spreading false tales to invalidate Clears is a High Crime.
Anyone found spreading libelous and slanderous statements about the
alleged behavior of Clears shall be declared Suppressive at once by the
first Ethics Officer so hearing of the matter. Investigation should take
the form of looking for a criminal background on the person spreading such
rumours.
For sixteen years I have been subjected to this type of attack. Now it
is being transferred to Clears by Suppressive Persons.
Such attacks are born out of terror of having anyone better or
stronger. This is the basic motivation of any SP.
It has been a hard task to bring the shreds of civilization to a
scientific barbarism known as "Western Culture".
Quite obviously it will require a long time to get Ethics in on this
society. We have not been tough enough.
So get tough.
L RON HUBBARD LRH: lb-r. cden
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 AUGUST 1966
Gen -Non Remimeo
OT COLOUR FLASH
COLOUR FLASH ADDITION
Clear is a green flash mark or green envelope, confidential to keep
people from looking at the contents and getting sick or worse.
OT (Operating Thetan) Course materials AND COMMUNICATIONS shall be
gold striped on white or manila or gold envelopes. The clue is GOLD.
Clear-Dark green stripe or envelope.
OT-Gold stripe or envelope.
Communications so marked MUST NOT BE OPENED by any but Clearing
Course, OT Course or OT Base Personnel.
LRH:lb-r.bh
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1966
479
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Gen Non- HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 AUGUST AD 16
Remimeo
OT Course Students Issue 11
Clearing Course Students
All Staff
Post Public Bull. Board THE OPERATING THETAN COURSE
in Each Org
The OT Course has started. It is available by invitation by Part only.
Once a person has attained the State of Clear, he does not immediately
become eligible to enrol on the OT Course. He or she may be invited to
enrol in Part 1.
The OT Course is divided into levels. Each level is called a Part.
Enrolment in each Part will be by invitation only.
The reason for this is that for the first time in this universe we are
making real cleared (not keyed out) OTs. The power of these beings will be
unlimited. This whole operation must be done in an organised manner, and it
is expected of the beings on the OT Course that Scientology Ethics Codes
will be always applied and followed. For example, an OT or OT Course
Student would be expected never to attack another being or group unless
that being or group had been formally declared suppressive by our Ethics
Section. Also it is intended that there will be no leakage of upper level
confidential materials which could be used destructively by suppressive
persons or groups.
If a person has shown by his past actions that he cannot be trusted to
follow the Ethics Codes of Scientology, he will not thereafter be invited
to enrol on Part I of the OT Course, for it would be to invite disaster to
do so.
We intend to "Bring Order" to this universe. And we shall do so.
LRH:lb-r.bh
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remirneo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 AUGUST 1966
Ethics Hats Issue II
Clearing Course
Super
Clearing Course CLEARING COURSE SECURITY
Students
If any Ethics Officer receives a report that a Clearing Course Student
is engaging in activities such as to indicate that he or she is a potential
security risk with regard to Clearing Course materials, the Ethics Officer
must immediately cable the Clearing Course Supervisor at Saint Hill giving
brief details, and airmail full details immediately.
Any sort of squirrel activity, contact with declared SPs: or
Suppressive Groups, entheta about or enturbulation of Scientology Orgs, or
failure to report or communicate promptly to the local Ethics Officer when
so requested, would be grounds for suspicion. Unsolicited receipt of
mailings from a Suppressive Group would not, particularly if turned in
unread to the Ethics Officer.
The Clearing Course Supervisor, on receipt of such a report,
immediately cables the Ethics Officer to collect the student's materials
and forward them to Saint Hill. The Ethics Officer may deputize any person
qualified to handle such materials, but must comply immediately.
Meanwhile a full investigation into the allegations against the
Clearing Course student is done and speedily completed. The findings are
reported by airmail to the Clearing Course Supervisor.
If the allegations are found to be totally untrue, then the person
making them is subject to severe Ethics action, since he has wasted a
Clearing Course student's auditing time and slowed him down on the road to
Clear.
LRH:ec.bh
L. RON HUBBARD
480
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 OCTOBER 1966
Clearing
Course
Students
CLEARING COURSE FOLDERS
(This Pol Ltr cancels the Pol Ltr
of 3 February 1966, "Clearing Cour.-,
Weekly Auditing Hours")
All Saint Hill Staff and Internes for Saint Hill and all other
organisations who are on the Clearing Course, must bring their folders in
on Tuesday to Reception at 9.30 AM. Their folders will be returned to them
later that same day.
All other Clearing Course students who are living in the East
Grinstead area and who are not staff members must bring in their folders
every Thursday to Reception at 9.30 AM. Their folders will be returned to
them at 2.30 PM in Reception.
A student may, of course, bring in his folder for the Clearing Course
Supervisor, to the Reception at 9.30 AM any day when he needs more
materials or is in trouble.
All students must complete 5 hours of auditing a week.
Non-compliance will result in the student being sent to Review at his
or her own cost.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:lb-r.aaP by L.Ron Hubbard
481
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 NOVEMBER 1966
Remimeo
Clearing Course
Students
Clearing Course
Personnel
Clear Checkers
Div Organizer
Qual WW
CLEAR CHECK-OUTS IN CONTINENTAL ORGS
The Clearing Course is available ONLY at Saint Hill. However, a
student who comes to Saint Hill to enrol in and start the Clearing Course
may then return to his home and continue it by correspondence. He may then,
when Clear, obtain a Clear Check at his appointed Continental Organization.
In order to speed up the checking out of Clears residing in other
countries and to handle the tremendous flow of Clears that is occurring,
and in the interest of economy for students, personnel have been appointed
in certain Continental Orgs to perform this duty.
When an overseas student sends in his folder to the Clearing Course
Supervisor WW requesting a Clear Check the Clearing Course Supervisor
examines the folder, and if satisfied that the student is ready for a Clear
Check, initiates a Routing Form for a Continental Clear Check, This routing
form then goes airmail immediately with the student's complete folder to
the Continental Clear Checker concerned and the Clearing Course Supervisor
at the same time writes to the student informing him that he will be
contacted by the Continental Clear Checker.
The Continental Clear Checker, upon receipt of the routing form and
folder, telegraphs the student to come in for a Clear Check.
Upon arrival at the Continental Org an amount of E27.0.0 (or the
equivalent in local currency) must be paid in to the Area Cashier by the
student. f 12.0.0 must be transferred IMMEDIATELY to Saint Hill to cover
the postage and handling costs that have been incurred in airmailing the
student's complete folder to the Continental Organization and f 12.0.0 is
retained to cover the Continental Org's expenses in returning the folder to
Saint Hill. Balance of Z3.0.0 comprises the Continental Organization's
Clear Check fee.
When the Checkout has been completed and the student has been
announced Clear, a cable is sent to the Clearing Course Supervisor WW
announcing the following facts:
. 1. Name of Clear.
2. TA position.
3. Where the Clear received his early training.
The Continental Clear Check routing form is then completed and sent to
the Clearing Course Supervisor WW complete with the student's complete
folder and all reports and materials used in the Checkout.
Every Continental Clear Checker must have completed the following
steps before being allowed to check out a Clear:
1. Checked out thoroughly on all Clearing Course Tech Materials.
2. Checked out on the Clearing Course remedies.
3. Checked out on the Clear Check Hat.
Training of a Clear Checker is done under the Supervision of the
Divisional Organizer, Qual WW.
Having been checked out Clear, if the person is invited on the OT
Course Part One, enrollment can be handled by mail from Saint Hill.
LRH.jd.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
482
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 NOVEMBER AD 16
(Replaces HCO Policy, Letter of 12 August AD 16)
Rernitneo
OT COURSE
The OT Course has been inaugurated as of 10 August AD 16.
This Course is by invitation only and by invitation to each separate
part of the Course.
It is only open to Clears who must have been checked out Clear by the
Saint Hill Qualifications Division or at the appointed Continental
Organization authorized to give Clear Checks.
The invitation to the Course or to any succeeding part depends on
several factors:
I . Security of R6EW, Class VII and Clearing materials in the
student's hands.
2. Degree of participation the being has engaged in in Scientology.
3. The general character of the being as a Scientologist, based on
his Ethics record.
4. The ScientologY technical proficiency of the being.
If an invitation is not received a petition may be submitted to the
Office of LRH, setting forth evidence as to why one should be invited.
LRH:jp.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1966 Founder
[Note; The 14 Nov '66 revision was inclusion in third paragraph of
Clear Checks given at authorized Continental Organizations. This PIL was
later revised and reissued as HCO P/L 12 August 1971 Issue IV, OT Courses,
in the 1971 Year Book.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 DECEMBER 1966
Sthil only WW and SH Execs Ethics Cent Clear Checkers Cl Cse Personnel
Cl Cse Students
CLEARING COURSE REGULATION
A Clearing Course student is not officially Clear before being
pronounced so by a qualified checker and Qual and may not announce the fact
as a fact until so checked by an authorized Clear Checker who has actually
officially checked him out and until he/she has been declared Clear by
Qualifications Division SH.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jp.rd Founder
Copyright Oc 1966
483
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER~OF 17 JANUARY 1967
Remimeo
Franchise
FSMs
AllStudents
All Preclears
BPI
AN OPEN LETTER TO ALL CLEARS
You are a Clear. Well done and congratulations.
This state has not previously been attained in this universe and we
must all work towards getting more people-many more people-up to this
level. Essentially, you are clear on the Ist Dynamic and still have a lot
of work in front of you to attain OT, which is to say the remaining
dynamics, but nevertheless you will find you have many abilities hitherto
undreamed of. An ethical code already exists for OTS so at the state of
Clear one should not assume that one has a license to do just whatever one
will. You still have the remaining dynamics to go so don't use the
abilities you have attained already to enslave others, or indeed, yourself.
With freedom comes responsibility and with responsibility comes the
need to assess one's actions and to take only such actions as will do the
greatest good over the greatest number of dynamics. So, the Policies of
Scientology which have enabled you to reach the state of Clear still apply
to all Clears. In fact they apply more because you have the reality of
their value and the necessity of seeing that they are followed.
Those who have not yet attained Clear will be watching you with some
awe, so you have the duty of setting an example of exemplary behaviour in
all aspects of your life. As a Clear you have no privileges beyond being
declared Clear.
As a result, bigger responsibilities will be given and expected of you
so you must be prepared to responsibly educate yourself where necessary so
that you can do whatever is assigned to you in a proper manner in keeping
with the main goals and aims of Scientology.
So for you there is no sitting down and resting upon your laurels, no
waiving of policy, no promiscuous 2nd Dynamic activities, no improper
assumption of power, control or influence or assuming that you
automatically know best in every situation. It is a crime to invalidate the
state of Clear-see to it that you don't do this in your conduct as a Clear,
particularly as regards yourself. You still have the rest of the dynamics
to go.
You have now become more than ever a part of a team. Obsessive
individualism and a failure to organise were responsible for our getting
into the state we got into.
As soon as you have gone the rest of the way this will become
abundantly plain.
1 expect and need your help to carry out the broad mission of de-
contaminating this area of the universe. If you wish to help, your first
duty is to protect the repute of the state of Clear by exemplary conduct.
Your second duty is to attain OT as soon as possible. Your third, if you
still wish to help, is to become part of the endeavour to clean up this
sector of the universe and make it safe not only for ourselves but the
billions of others who have been harmed.
As a Clear you are welcomed and honoured. Don't do anything that will
wear out your welcome or bring dishonour on yourself or upon other Clears.
Thank you for what you have done so far.
Thank you for what you will do in the future.
1 know I can count on you.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.eden
484
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I APRIL 1967
All Adv Cse Students
Registrars all Orgs
SECTION III OT PREREQUISITE
It is required that by the time of completion of Section 11 OT Course
or before Section III OT Course the student must have completed the Saint
Hill Special Briefing Course.
The reason for this is that the skill and general command of
Scientology required to get through Section III is well in advance of lower
grade demands upon the student. He or she must be a thoroughly good auditor
to be able to handle Section III.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jp.rd Founder
Copyright (D 1967
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 APRIL 1967
Saint Hill
Only
STAFF ON SAINT HILL ADVANCED COURSES
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 December 1965, "Staff on Saint Hill Clearing
Course", which states that "at least 5 hours of auditing must be done a
week by the Saint Hill staff on the Clearing Course" is hereby cancelled as
an arbitrary.
Students who have ceased to audit on the OT Course are in trouble case-
wise and shall be sent to Review.
Executive Council WW
Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
LRH.jp.rd for
Copyright Oc 1967
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
485
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I MAY 1967
Limited Non-Remimeo SH Staff WW Staff Advanced Courses
students ADVANCED COURSES ADMINISTRATION
, Advanced Courses, including the Clearing Course and OT Course, are
under the regulation of the Executive Council WW, just as any other WW
activity. They remain in the Office of LRH WW.
ISSUE OF MATERIALS
Only course materials and matters of regulation of Course or students
may be mailed out by the Course. All other matters proceed on Org channels
and are forwarded to LRH on channels for approval. In being forwarded to
LRH, they may be stopped or handled at any point upward.
Executive Council WW
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.bh The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 JULY 1967
Limited Non-Remimeo
SH Staff
WW Staff
ADVANCED COURSES SUPERVISORS' STATISTIC
In accordance with an order of the
Founder that the Advanced Courses'
statistic is Number of Hours Audited by
Students, the following policies shall
apply to the Advanced Courses.
Each ADVANCED COURSES Supervisor is now allotted his own Clearing or
OT Course students whose auditing he/she supervises.
Students on the OT Course are divided equally between the OT Course
Supervisor and Assistant Supervisorls.
Students on the Clearing Course are divided equally between the
Clearing Course Supervisor and Assistant Supervisor/s.
When new Assistant Supervisors are added, re-adjustment is to be made
so that the new Supervisor has his own students.
The Statistic for each Supervisor and Assistant Supervisor shall be
the "Number of Hours Audited" by his/her students.
The main Advanced Courses' overall Statistic, and therefore the
Statistic of Chief Supervisor of Advanced Courses, is total number of hours
audited by all students.
Executive Council WW: Fred Hare
Joan McNocher
LRH:jp.bh Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
486
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1967
(Replaces HCO Pol Ltr of 30 Sept 1966 and
combines it with HCO Pol Ltr of 28 Sept 1966)
Sthil Only WW & SH Execs Ethics Cl Cse Personnel Cl Cse Students OT
Cse Students
CLEARING AND O.T. COURSE REGULATIONS
CLEARING AND O.T. COURSE SUPERVISION
The answers to all contingencies are contained in the Clearing Course
materials. Therefore the following regulations apply: -
1 . No off-line advice may be sought in cases of students on the
Clearing or O.T. Course.
2. All problems arising with cases, if the case does not resolve,
must be reported to ES Comm Qual WW who may then only order check-outs on
the Clearing and O.T. Course Supervisors.
3. Any "unusual solution" sought must be answered on ly by check-
outs of the Supervisors of the Clearing and O.T. Courses.
4. Check-out of states of case by Qual must be done by a Clear
member of Qual staff and the student's complete folder must be submitted to
such an examiner at the time of examination for his inspection.
5. Any person examining in Qual for attained states of case must
have been checked out on all technical materials of the Clearing and O.T.
Courses and especially any remedies.
6. Any examiner checking out states of case in Qual must be Clear.
7. All Clearing and O.T. Course personnel must be Clear to be
Clearing Course personnel or to help on the Clearing or O.T. Course.
8. No person may be admitted on the Clearing Course who has a bad
Ethics history or a this lifetime suppressive order or a criminal record
without a special Board of Investigation convened by the Exec Council WW.
9. No person with a record of using Clearing Course materials
suppressively may be admitted on the O.T. Course.
10. Persons who have been careless or insecure in their handling of
Clearing Course materials or who have made them available to another may
not be admitted on the O.T. Course regardless of action taken at the time
or Clearing Course restoration.
11. All Clearing Course Auditors and O.T. Course Auditors who have
materials to be exchanged bring their folders to Reception 9.30 a.m. Non-
staff members will have folders returned at 2.30 p.m. in Reception. Staff
members folders will be brought to them during the day.
12. When a Clearing Course or O.T. Course Student wishes to
communicate in any way with the Supervisors, he must do this through
Reception, either by sending his folder or by a letter.
487
13. If a student needs any advice he must always send his folder to
the Course Supervisors. If in emergency, a cable may be sent also.
14. No alcohol may be consumed within 24 hours before a session.
15. Auditing must be done every day.
16. Clearing Course and O.T. Course students are not to discuss
Clearing or the O.T. Course or their case with ANYONE except with the
Clearing or O.T. Course Supervisors and then only through their folders or
by written report, unless they are called in specifically by the
Supervisors.
When a student is in Review he may discuss his case with a properly
assigned Review Auditor only.
17. Students who have ceased to audit on the Clearing Course or O.T.
Course are in trouble case-wise and shall be sent to Review.
Violations of these regulations must result in a Committee of
Evidence.
LRH:lb-r.jp.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
, 1967 Founder
[Note: This revision changed Ad Council to Exec Council and
substituted No. 17 above for the 5 hour per week rule. it was later
cancelled by HCO P/L 9 January 1968, page 491, and then revised and
reissued as HCO P/L 12 August 1971 Issue 111, Advanced Courses Regulations-
Advanced Courses Supervision, in the 1971 Year Book.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 NOVEMBER 1967
WW & SH Execs
Ethics
Advanced Courses Personnel
CC Students
OTC Students
CLEARING AND OT COURSE REGULATIONS
(Continues HOD Pol Ltr of 30 Sept 1966 of same name)
18. Clearing and OT Course students' worksheets and auditor reports
must be legible; otherwise it will be considered a No Report.
19. Clearing Course students are expected to remain on location
until given permission to go home in writing by their Clearing Course
Supervisor.
Ch. Super Adv Courses Janet Guilford
Qual Sec SH Helen Pollen
HCO Area Sec WW Len Regenass
Exec Council WW Tony Dunleavy
Eunice Ford
LRH Comm WW Ken Delderfield
D/Guardian WW Joan McNocher
Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:jp.cden The Guardian WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
488
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 NOVEMBER 1967
Remimeo
HCO Div I
Dir I & R
Ethics
HCO Area Sec
Advanced Courses Hats
Security Checker Hat
ADDITIONAL POLICIES ON ADVANCED COURSES SECURITY
Mixed Practices and Clearing Course Security
Any applicant for Advanced Courses (Solo Audit Course, Clearing Course
or OT Course) discovered or known to have any current record of mixed
practices may not be accepted on such until he has had a thorough Review in
Qual with the matter handled and passed a probationary period of at least
three months.
The PURPOSE OF THIS POLICY is to ensure that it be ascertained beyond
any shadow of a doubt that the person has truly left former practices,
because a 'mixed Practice Case' is a risk to Advanced Course Security.
ADDITIONAL POLICIES ON ETHICS CLEARANCE FOR CLEARING COURSE
When passing on Ethics Clearance for the Clearing Course, the Ethics
Officer must examine the Applicant's Central File Folder and Org Personnel
File in addition to his Ethics File.
SUMMARY OF ETHICS RECORD
The Ethics Officer WW is to check the Advanced Scheduling Book on the
I st of every month for anyone who intends enrolling on an Advanced Course
the following month (i.e., on the first of January the book is checked for
applicants in February). When such a name is found, the Ethics Officer WW
is to contact Airmail the Continental Org concerned for a summary of the
person's Ethics Record. The Ethics Officer of the Continental Org concerned
fills in the following form:
SUMMARY OF ETHICS RECORD
TO: ETHICS OFFICER WW
FROM: ETHICS SECTION
APPLICANT'S NAME:
LOCAL ADDRESS:
1. Was the applicant ever ORG STAFF PRECLEAR
STUDENT -
2. Number of chits in Ethics File
3. Number of Ethics Orders issued on the Applicant
4. Nature of Ethics Orders
489
Has the Applicant ever been:
5. Subject of an SP Order Yes - No -
6. Subi . ect of a Non-Enturbulation Order Yes - No
7. Subject of a Type 111 Ethics Order Yes - No
8. Dead Filed Yes - No
9. Guilty of writing Entheta comms to the Org Yes - No
10. Guilty of a Criminal Record Yes - No
11. Guilty of Breach of Security Yes - No
12. Guilty of a badEthics Record Yes - No-
IF THE ANSWERS TO ANY OF THESE POINTS 5 to 12 is 'Yes' then the Ethics
Folders and other supporting data or documents must be forwarded at once by
Airmail to the Ethics Officer WW. In carrying this out the Ethics Officer
must make reference to all files in the Continental Area of the Applicant.
This form can only be filled out by an Ethics Officer properly
appointed by the Office of LRH WW.
Attested
Ethics Officer
Location
Date
DEADFILING
ANY record of the applicant being deadfiled must be considered a bad Ethics
Record and a special Board of Investigation must be called for by the
Ethics Officer WW per HCO POLICY LETTER OF Sept 30, 1966, "Clearing and OT
Course Regulations". In such a case, all the files of the person must be
called for, including the C/F Folder from any outer Org as well as any
Ethics Files so that the Board of Investigation has these folders at hand
in its investigation.
ONLY DULY APPOINTED ETHICS OFFICERS
Only a properly appointed Ethics Officer (authorized by the Office of
LRH WW) who has checked out on all of the Ethics Officer checksheet, which
must include pertinent policies on Advanced Courses Security, may give
final Ethics clearance for entry onto an Advanced Course (Solo Audit
Course, Clearing Course and OT Course).
Written by a Board of Investigation
CHAIRMAN Monica Quirino
SECRETARY Dalene Regenass
MEMBER David Ziff
LRH:jp.rd for Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW
for L. RON HU13BARD
Founder
[Note: HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 November 1967, Additional Policies on
Advanced Courses Security, is cancelled. - LRH. HCO P/L 28 January 1968.1
[This Policy Letter was later revised and reissued as HCO P/L 12
August 1971 Issue 11, same title as above, in the 1971 Year Book.)
490
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JANUARY 1968
Remirneo
CANCELLATION OF HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPT 1967
AND HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 SEPT 1967
HCO Policy Letter 13 September 1967, "Clear Check Outs", and HCO POLICY
LETTER OF 12 September 1967, "Clearing and 0. T. Course Regulations,
Clearing and O.T Course Supervision", are hereby cancelled as both policies
contain inspection before the fact and therefore violate the Fast Flow
System of Management.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:jp.rd Copyright (j) 1968
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 DECEMBER 1969
Class VIII
Level V1 SHSBC
MEW Solo Course
SOLO AUDITING AND PREGNANCY
Solo Auditing from the Clearing Course upwards is not permissible for
pregnant women.
One may proceed with solo auditing after the baby is born.
Quentin Hubbard Class VIII for
L. RON HUBBARD Founder
LRH:QH:Idm.rd
491
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
AOs HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I AUGUST 1971
SHs Issue V
Tech Hats
Qual Hats (Replaces HCO P/L of 10 Nov 66)
Ethics
ROW, CC &
OT Course Packs ADVANCED COURSES MATERIALS
SECURITY OF DATA
Issued with a small amount of R6 data in 1964, three or four persons
promptly used it on pcs knowing well it was forbidden. The pcs became ill
or misernotional toward us. And just the day I write this (original writing
4 October 1965) 1 myself encountered a pc, very ill, who had had some
original R6 data misused on her and did not suspect why her case and health
had worsened. She was not ready for it at all.
The issue earlier was a trial balloon, in a sense. I found certain
persons (a small minority) were not up to responsibility for the material
of April 1964.
Therefore our firm action will be that the moment we find the material
of the Clearing Course or OT Course has escaped or been misused we will
quickly trace the person who was insecure and cut off all further or any
future Clearing or OT data issue to that person. The likelihood of
independent discovery even with clues has proven to be non-existent by
actual review of auditors trying to find pieces of it when they had over
half of the answers already.
You must realize that we suffer, all of us, from the misuse of
knowledge concerning the mind at a very early period. To place this data
near such people as psychiatrists or even states places them in a position
to enslave people or repeat the original action and cave people in. A very
small minority, receiving incorrect data did promptly use it harmfully on
others after April 1964.
Until we ourselves have climbed well out of the hole, we must
safeguard the materials. Our case gains depend on it. And others could make
our salvage of people impossible.
We do not safeguard these materials from any commercial consideration.
Our futures, those of each of us and those of all Scientologists, depend on
our keeping this material under lock and safeguarded from abuse until we
are well away as a group and can handle things better as individuals as
well as a group.
The road is wide open to anyone to come up the grades and obtain them.
But it is shut to any who misuse them or injure their security.
Students of the Advanced Courses, the Advanced Course C/S and
Supervisor, Ethics Officers and all HCO and Org staff have it in their
personal interest to enforce security of materials to the limit.
These restrictions apply to no data up to Grade V.
From Power Processing on up the data is confidential. Up to there, you
can release Scientology data as you always have-freely and to everyone. But
this last bit is dangerous in unskilled or uneducated or unscrupulous hands
and it is purely ours. It belongs to the Scientologists who keep the show
on the road and must be available to
them when they are ready.
Reissued by
Flag Advanced Courses Supervisor
for
LRH:BW:LR:sb.rd Training and Services Aide
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
492
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 OCTOBER 1968
Issue 11
Remimeo
Class VIII Course
CLASSIFIED MATERIALS
Class VIII students are taught the following classified materials:
Power Processes.
Section IV OT.
Class VIII graduates can NOT NOT NOT offer these to the public or sell
them to the public.
Class VIII students are only taught these as they often have to REPAIR
them, and to repair them, they must know all about them.
This, however, does not give them the authorization to do them on
anyone, nor to offer them for sale, nor to give this processing to others.
Saint Hill and the American Saint Hill Organization are the only authorized
places where the Power Processes can be run and the Sea Org Advanced
Organizations are the only authorized places where Section IV OT may be
run.
LRH:ew.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 SEPTEMBER 1969
Issue Il
Remirneo
BPI SUCCESSFUL CLASS VIIIs
Any Class VIII auditor may have the new Standard Dianetics Course free
of charge at his nearest org or an AO.
The additional certificate of HDG is required of Class VIIIs so they
can handle Case Supervision and Standard Dianetic Auditing as well as audit
well in Standard Dianetics.
The certificate of HDG is a prerequisite (along with a Class VI) for
all new AO Class VIII enrollees after the date of receipt of this Policy
Letter.
STANDARD DIANETICS
The Course is. available at AOs and SHes.
It has been found that the ability to audit Standard Dianetics; well
in its simplicity speeds Academy, VI and VIII training greatly and reduces
failed students in the Academy, VI and VIII Courses to zero.
It is not the intention of this Pol Ltr to interrupt the plans or
activities of Scientology Classed Auditors or applicants and all possible
adjustment will be made in orgs to accommodate Scientology Classed Auditors
to quickly obtain their HDG during this period of adjustment.
We now have a smooth flowing tech training line and have found there
are no failed cases where training is'good and which follows this gradient.
LRH:Idm.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1969 Founder
493
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 OCTOBER 1969
Remimeo
CLASS VIII & HDG
(Modifies Earlier Requirements)
No Class VIII Auditor may have his final certificate until he has also
acquired his HDG.
All Class VIII enrollees are required to have an HDG before being
admitted to the Class VIII Course.
Requirements for course enrollments are
HDC required for HDG Course.
HDG required for Class 0-1-11-111-IV.
HPA-HCA required for Class VI Course.
HDG and Class VI required for Class VII.
HDG-Class VI required for Class VIII.
LRH:nt.ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
fCancelled by HCO PIL 17 November 1969, Dianetics and Scientology
Services, page 401.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 JANUARY 1970
Remimeo
Registrar
Qual Secs
Tech Secs
CLASS VIII REQUIREMENT
The requirements for enrolment on the Class VIII Course are HDG, Class
VI and enrolment and successful progress on OT 111. It is not a requirement
that one has to have completed OT III but his III Solo Auditing must be
successfully in progress before beginning Class VIII studies.
Lt. Nate Jessup
CS-4
LRH:NJ:jz.ei.rd for
Copyright Q 1970
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
494
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
Extracted from CLINICAL PROCEDURE OF 20 MAY 1954
ATMOSPHERE OF THE CLINIC
The atmosphere is a most important part. It should be business-like
and friendly. By no means should any person be allowed on the premises who
does not have business there. There is nothing so disturbing to a preclear
as to have a bunch of auditors hanging around discussing techniques and
their own cases or seeking to recruit clinic preclears.
THE AUDITORS OF THE CLINIC
The auditors of the clinic should have their own bulletin and schedule
board, but this is not to be in the reception room.
Auditors must not congregate in the reception room and should not talk
to preclears except in session.
[Unsigned]
Issued by HCO London in Digest I re-issue of 18 March 1958.
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
20 Buckingham Street, Strand, London W.C.2
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 SEPTEMBER 1956
ORGANIZATIONAL BULLETIN
REGISTRAR
The Registrar has responsibility for procurement, interview, signing
up, legal and finance. The Registrar is directly responsible for all
students and pc procurement and keeping place full.
The Registrar is not responsible for auditing rooms, auditors,
assignment of pcs to auditors or states of cases. These are the function of
the Director of Processing.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ebh.rd
495
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
20 Buckingham Street, Strand, London W.C.2, Gt. Britain
ORGANISATIONAL BULLETIN OF 26 SEPTEMBER 1956
PROCEDURE FOR PUTTING AUDITORS ON STAFF
AUTHORITY -DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING
EMERGENCY - Bring auditor on, put on the pc, assign room, advise
Accountant at once by slip he has been hired. Do not give him any advice.
Brief later when finished with case if auditor to be retained.
HIRING AUDITORS ON STAFF - This assumes always that Auditor is an HCA
(HPA) at least. Hire one to two weeks before needed. Give him incidental
Organisational duties-correcting tests, mailings, 'phone, anything so he'll
have 8c on Organisation itself. Have him attend auditors' conferences.
Let him observe staff auditors at work.
Have a set of Briefing lectures on tape for him to listen to between
3.30 and 4.45 p.m. daily. (Machine with Earphones.) Have him listen to each
about three times.
Give him High School Indoctrination.
Make him define Staff Auditor.
Have a staff auditor patch him up with a small amount of evening
auditing on handling preclears.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ebh.rd
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington 9, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 NOVEMBER 1956
HGC PRECLEAR COMPLAINTS
On any HGC preclear complaint, we will give more auditing for cash,
and tear up any old HGC note (requisite: real complaint grounds).
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mek.rd
POLICY LETTER OF 17 MAY 1957
c to London
The Hubbard Guidance Center is primarily a service unit.
Priority on Auditors is this:
I . Outside preclears including complaints and extra weeks.
2. Staff in general.
3. Staff Auditor processes Staff Auditor.
Categories 2 and 3 must have the permission of the Organizational
Secretary before any processing can be done.
Richard F. Steves
Organizational Secretary
496
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
(FOR LONDON AND WASHINGTON)
HCO PROCESSING BULLETIN OF 10 JUNE 1957
WHAT TO TELL NEW HGC AUDITORS TO
PROCESS ON PRECLEARS
When a new auditor is taken on at HGC we do not
1. Train him while he is processing his first preclear.
2. Tell him what process to run.
3. Add to his already tense confusion of being on staff by
unstabilizing all his stable auditing data, too.
We Do this:
1 . We ask him what process he has the greatest certainty on.
2. We tell him to audit the pc with that process and no other.
3. If he has certainty on several we have him select one best
suited to pc and have him use that.
Then we train up the new staff auditor by auditor's conferences and
HCO Board of Review at a leisurely pace.
STABLE DATUM:
It will be found that any auditor using a process on which he has high
reality will obtain high results with a pc using that process.
LRH:md.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
6-10-57
THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C.
FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 10 JULY 1957
HIRING OF STAFF AUDITORS
Before a staff auditor may be hired it is necessary that he have an
interview with me.
LRH:md.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
NOT HCO POLICY I-ETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1957
When a verbal direction is given to the HGC Staff Auditors concerning
the processing of preclears, such as what process is to be run, etc, the
auditor is to write out verbatim the order and have it initialed by myself
and present it to the Director of Processing immediately. The processing
directions are to be followed exactly without variation until ordered to
change.
This is the Stable Datum: If given an order by myself and it isn't
written, you are to write it out.
LRH:md.nm
L. RON HUBBARD
9-2-57 497
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HASI POLICY LETTER OF 5 SEPTEMBER 1957
All preclears are expected to:
1
1 . Attend the evening PE Course
2. Work the Handbook for Preclears evenings while being processed at
the
HGC.
Effective at once.
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HASI POLICY LETTER OF 16 SEPTEMBER 1957
To: Tech Dir
Assoc Sec
Director of Processing
Registrar
All Auditors
H.G.C. POLICY
RESULTS OR ELSE
On preclears, call them back where they felt no gain occurred.
Clean up all flubbed cases.
LRH:rd
L. RON HUBBARD
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HASI STAFF NOTICE OF 16 SEPTEMBER 1957
Please note that our Clinical activities are dealt with by the Hubbard
Guidance Centre (see the Organizational Board). Therefore this title should
be used in reference to that service.
Jack Parkhouse
498
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HASI POLICY LETTER OF 8 FEBRUARY 1958
(Issued at Washington)
Since people will begin to expect being cleared, all processing must
be sold on basis of estimate to clear.
Therefore the pkgs are now as follows:
I week - 50 gns. Pro. 25 gns.
3 weeks - 125 gns. Pro. 75 gns.
5 weeks - Pro.
7 weeks - Pro.
these prices to be issued at a later date).
The conditions monitoring acceptance or establishment of number of wks
are as follows:
One wk.-Would show up top of graph, high on meter, no field, generally
nul on needle, no psychosomatic or visual difficulty. IQ above 125.
3 wks.-Middle range of graph, IQ above 100. No psychosomatics. No
field.
S wks.-Middle lower range of graph, IQ above 80. Psychosomatics or
visual difficulty. Some field.
7 wks.-Lower area of graph. Psychosomatic or visual difficulties.
Black field. Mental problems.
Unacceptable. Psychotic persons who would require institutionalization
to be processed.
A person is disqualified from processing by severe medical illness
needing a doctor's care.
There is no guarantee of clearing or even case gain.
All state of case is established by Dir of Processing, never by
Registrar. The above tests are all made by Dir of Pr after pc has been
signed up by Registrar for something and has been given written tests. Then
person goes to Dir Pro and is looked over, and accepted or rejected. If
rejected on grounds not enough processing is bought person is returned to
Registrar to buy it.
We do not care what initial hours the Registrar sells.
We do not care when the person receives the processing or even when he
pays for additional weeks required by Dir Pro. We do care that a reality on
number of wks bought exists. Otherwise we will be giving away too many free
wks. The pe must know what to expect.
Change in Release. All papers signed must reflect that acceptance of
the pc for processing is also contingent on an interview with Dir Pr and
that signing up with the Registrar does not commit org until also accepted
and signed up with the Technical Division.
rs.18.2.58/rd LRH
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOTGREEN ONWHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 MARCH 1958
Addition to HASI Policy Letter of Feb 8, 1958
The following are prices of auditing "packages" to be sold on the
basis of estimate to clear.
I week - 50 gns. Pro. 25 gns.
3 weeks - 125 gns. Pro. 75 gns.
5 weeks - Jf,200 Pro. , 125 gns.
6 weeks - f 240 Pro. 150 gns.
7 weeks - f 275 Pro. 175 gns.
8 weeks - f 300 Pro. 200 gns.
HCO
499
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C. HASI, L.A.
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JULY 1958
STAFF CLEARING
The Director of Processing is in charge of Staff Clearing.
LRH:bt.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO TECHNICAL POLICY LETTER OF 25 NOVEMBER 1958
ACADEMY TRAINING BULLETIN
All Area
Offices
TECHNIQUES TO BE USED ON HGC PRECLEARS
Effective Dec. 1, 1958 in all Area Offices
The following techniques are the only techniques to be used on HGC
preclears, effective Dec. 1, and continuing. These produce clears in the
hands of most auditors.
Deviations by Director of Processing or staff auditors are violations
of the Code of a Scientologist under No. 2 and Auditor's Code under No. 3.
Where needed:
CCH 1 CCH 2 CCH 3 CCH 4.
On all other Pes:
1 . Rudiments (not CCH 0) Establish: Auditor, pc, room, session to
start.
2. Start-Change-Stop on a person or object.
3. Factual Havingness.
4. What can you confront? (Repetitive Command)
5. You make a mock-up for which you can be wholly responsible.
6. General help; Help on the Rock.
7. Step 6 of Clear Procedure.
Exception: Only where staff auditor has been trained in an ACC given
to running engrams only (1 st such ACC was 5th London October-November
1958) may the staff auditor run engrams or use CCH 0. Early Dianctic
auditors are not, repeat not, included in this exception. It is a matter of
judgment here that in event of question about engram running the auditors
not specially trained in 1958 or later to do so will make more clears by
the above than by "running engrams". The running of engrams by Scientology,
rather than Dianetics, is splendid and speeds clearing but only where
specially trained. There is too much new data about it for assimilation
short of an engram running ACC. 20th ACC graduates are not qualified to run
engrams.
L. RON HUBBARD
500
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 DECEMBER 1958
HCO SEC'L LETTER OF 23 DECEMBER 1958
Issued at Washington
To All HCO Personnel
QUALIFICATIONS OF HGC STAFF AUDITORS
Effective 2 April 1959, HCO must pass on all auditors employed by an
HGC from technical qualification standpoint only.
The following criteria only will be used.
I Auditor must have a certificate HPA/HCA or above in force and in
good
standing.
2. Auditor's certificate must have been Validated for CCH 0 to 4
and TR 0 to 9.
3. Auditor's OCA/APA profile and IQ must comply with staff
acceptance requirements.
4. Auditor must have had run on him at least 50 hours of ARC Break
Straight Wire plus Factual Havingness (See HCO Bulletin of Dec. 22, 1958)
and the auditor who did it must furnish a certificate that it has been
done.
HCO BOARD OF REVIEW
The HCO Bd of Review shall keep files relating to any auditor passed
for HGC employment including miscellaneous data, a profile copy, IQ final
score, Validation slip, etc.
The HCO Bd of Review may issue a letter on HCO stationery stating that
the auditor named has been passed for employment on staff at the HGC of any
central organization. The letter should be sent to LRH for signature after
being counter-signed by the Area HCO Bd of Review. A copy must be kept in
the auditor's files.
The HCO Bd of Review should encourage the D of P to have in field
auditors every Thursday night to teach them the routines and activities of
an HGC and to get them up to HGC qualification level.
After the effective date no auditor not so passed can be used by a D
of P.. Therefore, the program should begin at once and all possible
auditors should be included.
The HCO Secretary and the HCO Bd of Review of any given area are
responsible for this program.
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
Convert to HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 JUNE 1959
Sec ED
CORRECTION OF HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 DECEMBER 1958
QUALIFICATION OF HGC STAFF AUDITORS
The following criteria only will be used:
4. Auditor must have had run on him at least 50 hours of
"From where could you communicate"
and the auditor who did it must furnish a certificate that it has been
done.
LRH:gh.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
501
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HCO SECRETARIAL LETTER
December 31,1958
ROUTING OF PROFILES
HGC profiles are to be sent at once after viewing by auditor, D of P
and PC via HCO to L. Ron Hubbard directly, by air mail.
They will be returned to D of P via HCO Area Secretary for her
interest and any needful interview with D of P to clarify points.
The profile used is to be OCA for sterling area, APA for S areas. The
IQ grades are to be contained on it. The profile only is to be specially
printed locally in two forms. One on Airmail weight paper, the other on
regular paper. When profile is drawn two more copies are made, one on
featherweight for L. Ron Hubbard and one on regular paper for CF. The
original is filed with case reports. This means when a profile is made
there will be also made two added copies. The profile original is drawn
first and the copies are made by use of a pin piercing through needful
points.
The profile is accompanied by a Case Analysis report made by D of P or
Case Analyst. This is to be printed on featherweight paper. There is only
one copy of this. It is pinned to the profile copy for L. Ron Hubbard. (A
Case Analysis form is attached hereto.)
The packet of profiles is accompanied by a D of P report, saying
whatever he cares to say about week's work. Every, case in an HGC is
reported on every week with a profile for each week to L. Ron Hubbard. The
responsibility for this action is primarily the Processing Administrator's.
If we do this we can improve processing results in general. We can
also say with truth that all cases are reviewed personally when they are
processed in an HGC.
This will apply at once to Washington, London and Melbourne and
eventually Johannesburg, Los Angeles, and New Zealand. Do not wait to get
new report forms printed to get into action.
L. RON HUBBARD
502
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 AUGUST AD9
[Excerptl
CenOCon
PROMOTIONAL FUNCTIONS OF THE HGC
The promotion function of the HGC consists of turning out cases that
rave about their auditors and the HGC. It is unfortunately true that an HGC
is not as well attended as it gets results. Indeed a good HGC from a
standpoint of results is often less well attended than one that really
chews PCs to ribbons. This is because of the victim complex in the society.
But good or bad-which is after all a technical, not,promotional. question-
the results of the HGC MUST include enthusiasm on the part of PCs for their
Auditors and the services rendered. Handling the private lives of PCs is
forbidden by the Auditor's Code when done directly. But sometimes this has
to be done to get the case upscale. The best promotion of an HGC is
interest in the PCs in or out of session. And this is furthered by the HGC
use of tests. An Auditor must not evaluate for a PC. This does not include
the D of P. A good D, of P evaluates as harshly as an instructor and more
or less follows the Instructor's Code. An overbearing evaluating D of P
always has more PCs than a meek and mild one. The sending of tests to the
PC after he gets home, the hounding him afterwards for reports on what and
how he is doing, is all a promotional function of the HGC. There is a five
year standing order that a PC must,be written to three times after leaving
the HGC, the first letter one week after he leaves, the second letter one
month after that, and the third letter three months after that. An HGC that
doesn't stay in communication with the PCs never has very many. It's not up
to PrR to stay in communication with the PCs who had Intensives even though
the PrR does. It is up to the D of P to stay in communication with these
PCs.
LRH:brb.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q1959
[Excerpted from HCO P/L 26 August AD9, Promotional Functions of
Various Depts. A complete copy is in Volume 7, page 135.]
503
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
SECRETARIAL TO THE EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
Applicable to:
Founding Church - Washington, D.C.
No. 150
3 September 1959
DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING - HAT
The, Purpose of the Hubbard Guidance Center is to do more for people's
health and ability than has ever before been possible and to give the best
auditing possible. To Help People.
An Outline of the Duties of the Director of Processing
I . He accepts all preclears for processing.
2. He releases all preclears from processing.
3. He interviews all incoming preclears and all outgoing preclears.
4. He interviews all persons interested in processing who have
first seen the Registrar.
5. He interviews and has -interviewed all persons receiving group
processing.
6. He gives Case Analysis interviews.
7. He gives estimates for clear.
8. He gives tests for clear.
9. He maintains his schedule.
10. He is responsible for his part in the proper routing of
preclears.
11. He is responsible for the proper routing and handling of
dispatches.,
12. He is responsible for answering all mail properly routed to him.
13. He is responsible for the proper routing of new personnel in his
department and for the proper routing of personnel leaving his department.
14. He is responsible for knowing and being able to properly
interpret tests and test results.
15. He is responsible for the proper maintenance of his department.
16. He is responsible for knowing his hat and the hat of each person
in his department.
17. He hires and dismisses all personnel in his department subject
to the okay of the Organization Secretary.
18. He is responsible for handling all personnel in his department.
19. He is responsible for getting the people in his department to
get the job done.
20. He is responsible for training auditors.
21. He attends meetings of the Technical Council and the Advisory
Council.
22. He promotes and sells processing in the HGC.
23. He maintains the Code of a Scientologist.
24. He follows all organizational policies.
504
The Acceptance and Release of all Preclears in the HGC
The Director of Processing accepts all preclears for processing in the
HGC. His acceptance of them becomes official once he has placed his
signature on the Contract for Processing, which Contract is sent to him
immediately after the preclear has been signed up by the Registrar and the
preclear has completed all financial arrangements with Accounts. He may
never refuse preclears because he does not have enough auditors. The
Registrar signs them up and he handles.
Who Cannot Be Accepted for Processing in the HGC (Refer to Sec'I ED
153)
It is a long standing policy of the Board of Directors of the Founding-
Church that certain persons are ineligible for processing. These policies
are our law, not the law of society, as we can legally give spiritual
guidance to anyone. Our law must be strictly, adhered to.
I . The Director of Processing may not and must not accept any
psychotic persons for processing.
2. The Director of Processing may not and must not withhold a pupil
from school for processing without a letter from that school so authorizing
his absence and stating he is to come to us, not an un-named agency.
3. The Director of Processing may not and must not process in the
HGC any student with a psychotic or institutional background.
4. The Director of Processing may not and must not process in the
HGC any person who is chronically ill.
Definitions
I . Insane: Having been pronounced insane by a psychiatrist or being
incapable of. any responsibility for social conduct.
2. Institutionalized: Having been committed- to a public or private
institution for theinsane.
3. Ill: Being medically diagnosed as suffering from a known, well
defined physical illness susceptible to medical care and relief.
Rights of the Director of Processing Concerning the Acceptance of
Preclears
Although. all incoming preclears are signed up for processing for the
number of weeks of processing which it is estimated that he will clear in,
some preclears for various reasons may not be able to take in a full
package all the weeks necessary; therefore, the Director of Processing has
certain rights governing the preclears already registered. They are as
follows:
1. He may refuse a preclear on the grounds that the preclear's low
profile or connections may bring a risk to the HGC.
2. He may refuse to accept a preclear who cannot take enough weeks
of his estimated time to clear.
3. He may refuse to accept a preclear on the grounds of the non-
payment of former debts to the HGC.
4. He may refuse to accept a preclear on the grounds of poor
financial arrangements, past and present, by the preclear.
In all cases of -refusal, he returns the preclear to the Registrar.
The Release of Preclears from Processing
The Director of Processing is responsible for releasing preclears from
processing. He may refuse to release a preclear from processing whom he
considers in further need of processing. In which case he sends the
preclear to the Registrar and informs the Registrar of such.
505
The Acceptance of Staff for Processing
Before the Director of Processing can accept any staff member for
processing, he must have received a dispatch containing the permission of
the staff member's Department Head and the Executive Director or the
Organization Secretary. In the case of a Department Head's receiving
processing, he must have received a dispatch containing the permission of
the Executive Director or the Organization Secretary.
On Staff processing, outside preclears in every case always have
priority; therefore, a staff member may not be processed at any time when
by being processed it would necessitate the hiring of an extra auditor. A
staff member may have only twenty-five hours of processing at any one time.
Interviewing
The Director of Processing interviews all incoming preclears, all
outgoing preclears, all persons interested in processing who have
previously seen the Registrar, all persons applying for a clear estimate,
all persons applying for a clear test, and the auditor-preclear Case
Analysis.
Policy on the Director of Processing's Interviews
It should be made plain by the Director of Processing to all persons
he interviews that he is not processing them, but is only asking questions
or obtaining information.
During all such interviews the Director of Processing should remember
that he is not an Auditor and as such does not have to maintain the
Auditor's Code; quite to the contrary, the Director of Processing should
never permit the preclear to retain any idea which is not correct. It is
the job of the Director of Processing to evaluate for the preclear with a
reality and with truth.
The approximate length of time for all interviews is about twenty
minutes.
Interviewing Incoming Preclears
The Director of Processing goes over briefly with the person the
preclear's profile and other test scores. He then obtains information
needed from the preclear and as contained in the proper interview form for
incoming preclears.
In the case of a preclear having been processed previously in the HGC,
his folder in Testing Files is pulled and reviewed by the Director of
Processing prior to the 'interview. In the interview, the Director of
Processing does re-check the preclear with the interview sheet in order to
find out what has happened to the preclear since the time of his last
processing.
Interviewing Outgoing Preclears
The test results of the American Personality Analysis, the IQ test,
the Tone Scale Test, and the Aptitude test should be gone over thoroughly
by the Director of Processing with the preclear. All his questions
concerning these test results and the tests should be answered. Of main
importance is whether the preclear knows he has obtained results and
whether he is happy with his processing. In this interview the Director of
Processing uses the interview form for outgoing preclears.
Case Analysis Interviews
The purpose of this interview is to check and help improve the
progress of the preclear. The preclear is interviewed with the Auditor
present. It is conducted with the pre.clear on the E-Meter. All points on
the Case Analysis Report are covered. When this has been done, the preclear
is requested to leave the room and the Director of Processing gives his
instructions to the Auditor.
Interviewing Persons who Apply for Clear Estimates or Clear Tests
Many people apply for Clear Estimates and for Clear Checks who have
not signed up for processing or who have not been processed in the HGC. The
Director of Processing conducts these, but at the same time tries to
interest the person in processing at the HGC. It may be that some ARC
breaks exist and if handled, the person will sign up for processing.
506
Post Group Intensive Interviews
The Director of Processing should interview and have interviewed all
persons completing group processing after the tests have been given all of
them.
Scheduling
The Director of Processing is responsible for seeing to it that the
routine Auditing schedule is maintained by the auditors and that preclears
who have been signed up for auditing by the Registrar on a different
auditing schedule get audited on that schedule.
The Director of Processing is also responsible for seeing to it that
all personnel in his department maintain the organization's routine working
schedule.
The Director of Processing also schedules Congress group interviews or
any group intensive. Group processing is always scheduled on the basis of
one hour of group processing alternating with a fifteen minute break.
Present Schedule
Monday
8:00 - 9:30 a.m. Clear Estimates.
9:30 - 12:00 NoonMaking Auditor preclear room assignments, Case
Analysis
interview Schedule, and giving instruction to Auditors con-
tinuing on a case.
12:00 - 1:00 P.M. Lunch
1:00 - 2:00 p.m. Interviewing incoming preclears.
2:00 - 2:30 p.m. Auditor briefing in general and on new preclears in
specific.
2:30 - 3: 15 p.m. Routine duties.
3:15 - 5:30 p.m. Possible Case Analysis of difficult cases, otherwise
Routine duties.
Tuesday
9:00 - 10:30 a.m.Routine duties.
10:30 - 12:00 Noon Case Analysis interviews and possible routine
duties.
12:00 - 1:00 P.M. Lunch
.1:00 - 3:45 p.m. Checking sessions and routine duties.
3:45 - 4:15 p.m. Interviews with auditors or routine duties.
4:15 - 5:30 p.m. Routine duties.
Wednesday
9:00 - 10:30 a.m.Routine duties.
10:30 - 12:00 Noon Case Analysis interviews and routine duties.
12:00 - Afternoon off.
Thursday and Friday
9:00 - 12:00 Noon Routine duties.
12:00 - 1:00 P.M. Lunch
1:00 - 3:45 p.m. Routine duties.
3:45 - 4:15 p.m. Interviews with auditors or routine duties.
4:15 - 5:30 p.m. Routine duties.
Saturday
9:00 - 9:30 a.m. Clear Estimates.
9:30 - 12:00 Noon Interviews with outgoing preclears.
12:00 - 1:00 P.M. Lunch
1:00 - 1:30 p.m. Clear Estimates.
1:30 - 5:30 p.m. Interviews with outgoing or incoming preclears or
routine
duties.
507
Tests and Their Interpretation
The Director of Processing should be familiar with all tests
administered in the Testing Section. In particular he should know how to
read and interpret them. He should thoroughly read and know the Manuals on
the American Personality Analysis, the Tone Scale Test, the Aptitude Test,
and the IQ test.
In interpreting tests he should be thoroughly familiar with the Four
Points of Error and How to Read Profiles on APA: Comparing Current Week
Profile with Week Before.
Clear Estimates
The Clear Estimate is conducted by the Director of Processing. There
is a Clear Estimate Form which he uses to help him administer the estimate
for clear. One section of the estimate involves placing the individual on
the E-Meter, and the other section involves the use of a block test. The
bulletin covering the administration of the Clear Estimate should be
studied carefully by the Director of Processing.
Clear Tests
The entirety of the Clear Test is conducted with the testee on the E-
Meter. The Director of Processing should study carefully the bulletin on
How to Test for Clear. A Clear Test Form is used by the Director of
Processing. The Director of Processing only conducts the E-Meter Clear Test
and forwards all tests up to the HCO Board of Review. He cannot tell the
person he is Clear. Only the Executive Director, L. Ron Hubbard, can
finally say whether a person is Clear.
Maintenance
The Office of the Director of Processing
The Director of Processing keeps his own office in a neat, cleanly
condition and sees that all supplies and equipment are kept in clean neat
condition. Any repairs or maintenance problems should be brought by him to
the attention of the Director of Materiel.
Supplies
The Director of Processing looks over the supply needs of his
department and originates a purchase request or okays the purchase requests
of people in his department according to the policies laid down.
Hats
The Director of Processing keeps his own hat up-to-date and sees that
the personnel in his department keep theirs in the same fashion. He is
responsible for issuing a proper hat to each of his personnel.
Bodies
The Director of Processing keeps his own person in a neat,
professional presentable condition and sees that his personnel do
likewise..
Personnel
The Director of Processing in hiring auditors must be sure that all
Auditors hired are above the center line of the graph on the APA and have
an IQ of 120 or more. And as of April 2, 1959, all Auditors employed must
be passed by the HCO from a technical qualification standpoint. These
qualifications are covered in a Secretarial to the Executive Director
Number 26.
In the hiring of personnel for his department the Director of
Processing uses the Personnel Routing and Check Sheet.
He should keep himself infornied of good field Auditors and of good
students who may be developed into staff auditors on graduation.
508
Dismissal of Auditors
The Director of Processing should dismiss those auditors on staff who
have been found guilty of direct insubordination, flagrant violation of
organizational policies, or for continued bad results with processing. He
must follow, however, policies concerning how personnel are dismissed. He
also handles auditors who leave staff without being dismissed according to
the policy of technical staff leaving a technical post.
Handling of Auditors
The Director of Processing checks each auditor's skill to audit via
the intercom system installed, in the organization. Notes should be taken
by him on certain points where auditors are falling down in auditing
procedure.
The Director of Processing also checks daily all auditor reports and
makes his comments and suggestions to auditors on the reports.
The Director of Processing also gives his instructions to the auditor
after the Case Analysis interview and notes his instructions on the Case
Analysis Report form.
Routing
The Director of Processing is responsible for seeing to it that the
routing procedure of preclears is properly followed.
The Routing of Dispatches and Mail
The Director of Processing sees that communications coming into his
department and communications leaving his department follow the policies
established concerning the proper form of dispatches, the proper handling
of dispatches, and the proper usage to the Comm Center. The Director of
Processing sees to it that all mail coming into his department and all mail
leaving his department follow the policies laid down concerning the routing
of mail.
The Routing of New Personnel
The Director of Processing in the hiring of staff auditors makes sure
that the Personnel Routing and Check Sheet is properly handled.
Personnel Leaving Staff
The Director of Processing sees that personnel leaving his Department
are routed to the proper terminals.
Routing of Tests
The Director of Processing routes the original profiles, auditor
report sheets and the Case Analyses to the Executive Director after he has
finished interviewing outgoing preclears. When the Executive Director is
not present in the area, the Director of Processing routes the light weight
profile, the light weight Case Analysis form and any comments he may have
of the processing to the Executive Director. When the original profiles are
returned and all written comments by the Executive Director to individual
auditors about their preclears are received, these are routed by the
Director of Processing to Test Files after he has reviewed and handled
them.
Routing of Preclears
All persons involved with the routing of preclears see to it that
bodies are properly routed in their department and in agreement with the
routing of bodies as established by other departments and where bodies pass
from his department into other departments.
Preclears are routed according to the following procedure:
1. The preclear sees the Registrar for signing up.
2. The preclear goes to the Director of Processing for a clear
estimate.
509
3. The preclear goes to the Registrar for the completion of the
processing contract on the basis of the clear estimate.
4. The preclear goes to Accounts for the invoicing and payrqent of
his account.
5. The preclear goes to the Testing Section for his tests.
6. The preclear sees the HGC for obtaining an appointment with the
Director of Processing.
7. The preclear sees the Director of Processing for his incoming
interview.
8. The preclear reports to the auditor for his processing.
9. The preclear is released by the auditor at the end of his week
of processing.
10. The preclear is routed by the auditor to testing.
NOTE: Steps 8, 9 and 10 are repeated from week to week for the number
of weeks the preclear continues.
11. The preclear sees the HGC Administrator for obtaining an end of
intensive interview with the Director of Processing.
12. The preclear reports to the Director of Processing for his
interview.
13. The preclear goes to the Registrar for a final interview.
All persons involved in this routing procedure are responsible for
seeing to it that the preclear has reported to the proper terminal and that
that terminal has initialed the Body Routing Sheet which the preclear has
been given by the Registrar. If any terminal has not initialed the Body
Routing Sheet, the preclear should be returned to that person for getting
the Body Routing Sheet properly initialed. Only after this has happened can
the next terminal on the routing procedure handle the preclear.
The Training of Auditors
Training of Auditors on New Material
It is up to the Director of Processing to train Auditors on new
material issued to the HGC as instructions on the procedure to be used in
the processing of HGC preclears. Such information is normally issued in HCO
Bulletins. It is not the job of the Director of Processing to interpret
these Bulletins. It is his job to see that Auditors are trained in the
procedures or processes. If the Director of Processing finds that there is
needed further information he should dispatch the Executive Director to get
that information. The main thing that can happen wrong in the training of
Auditors is for the Auditor or the Director of Processing to place a
totally wrong interpretation on the usage, the purpose, or the clearing of
some command or procedure. That is the reason he should dispatch the
Executive Director if further information is needed.
Sometimes training tapes are sent by the Executive Director to the
Director of Processing. In such instances the tape should be played many
times for the Auditors. Also the Director of Processing may upon request
play certain tapes to his Auditors. He must never, however, play a MASTER
tape. He can only play copies of tapes.,
Retraining of Auditors
The Director of Processing must see to the continual retraining of
Auditors. It is normally the basics of Auditing of which Auditors get slack
in performing. The Director of Processing should go over with auditors the
basic fundamentals of Auditing, such as the Auditor's Code, definitions of
Affinity, Reality, and Communication. Training Sessions should be conducted
on all Training Drills. Auditors who, in spite of this retraining in the
processing department, still continue to get bad auditing results should be
suspended until they have been retrained, at no charge to them, to the
satisfaction of the Director of Training in the Training Department. If the
Auditor is getting poor results because of his own case level he should be
recommended to auditing at staff rates. If he does not avail himself of
this auditing, he should be suspended from staff until he has obtained
auditing. If he gets-audited by an auditor not on staff, he must have his
Auditor send a report of the processing to the Director of Processing
stating what processing was given and how many hours it was given. Until
such a report is received by the Director of Processing, he cannot be
placed back on staff.
510
The Assignment of Auditors to Preclears
The Director of Processing should know his Auditors. Some Auditors
cannot handle certain kinds of people. One Auditor does not do well with a
teenager; another does not do well with an elderly woman. Therefore, the
Director of Processing has to use judgement in the assignment of Auditors
to preclears.
Promotion and Sales
The Director of Processing does his utmost to promote all activities
of the organization. If he sees to it that his department is well run and
that it gives good effective service to the public, he will greatly assist
in the promotion of the organization.
He should make certain that all the activities of his department are
advertised in Ability magazine. He writes advertisements for Ability
magazine and submits them at least twice a month to the HCO Secretary to
the Executive Director.
The Director of Processing should submit to the Organization Secretary
promotional mailing pieces, projects, and other ideas in order to keep the
inflow of preclears up.
Sales
The Director of Processing sells processing to people; he sells more
processing to people. He should consider everyone as a potential preclear
of the HGC.
Reporting
Technical Council Report
The Dire~ctor of Processing in conjunction with the Director of
Training are to hold a meeting once a week prior to the Advisory Council
meeting and are to submit their report to the Advisory Council. The
information usually required in such a report of the Director of Processing
is the following:
1 . The number of preclears processed in the previous week.
2. The number of preclears who completed processing in the previous
week.
3. The number of preclears in for the current week.
4. A general statement as to the condition and activities of the
Processing
Department.
Advisory Council
The Director of Processing attends or sends a representative to the
Advisory Council once a week when all department heads meet.
Other Reports
The Director of Processing sees to it that any other reports that may
be required of him are submitted by him to the proper terminals.
Reports to the Executive Director
The Director of Processing submits to the Executive Director the
profiles and other material including the Case Analyses and the daily
auditor reports to the Executive Director when he is present, immediately
after outgoing preclears are interviewed. When the Executive Director is
not present, the Director of Processing routes the light weight profile and
the light weight Case Analyses with any comments he has to make to the
Executive Director.
I.,
L. RON HUBBARD
. 0 Executive Director
- . 4 : . . '.7 . *.
. rrjVP01?Ar$-, C- I
40'
0 . ...............
...'44 IFORTk\,0~
"I 11 I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 OCTOBER 1959
CenOCon
STAFF AUDITORS
Staff Auditors may not audit more than twelve consecutive weeks
without being given a two week assignment to another Org post.
The arrangement of this rotation is up to the Assoc Sec with the
advice of the D of P.
The assignment of a staff auditor to another post for two weeks must
not deny his services to the organization. Therefore I would suggest that
some post be nominated to be held by staff auditors and filled thereafter
by rotation of auditors through that post.
This scheduling must be worked out according to the spirit of this
directive, which is that staff auditors should get a two week break from
auditing every twelve weeks. They should not be pulled back on post simply
because there are too many pes. Adequate auditors should be taken on from
Academy and field sources. Too few staff auditors are being taken on from
Academies to the end result of overworking existing staff auditors and
denying the organizations trained personnel. Therefore part of the sense
behind this consists of compelling D of Ps to increase their available
staff.
LRH:ph.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Executive Director
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
GREEN ON GOLD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 16 OCTOBER 1959
Cen(DCon
HANDLING STUDENTS' AND AUDITORS' REPORTS
(Cancels all previous directives on this subject)
Directors of Training are not to abbreviate their students' reports in
any way. They are to send the full reports by surface mail to Ron at Saint
Hill, and these will be returned.
Anything startling or dangerous that shows training improvement or
decay should be briefed by the HCO Area Secretary in the Training Digest,
so that it can be handled speedily.
All HCO Communicators are required to make sure that the students'
reports are sent by surface mail and not by airmail. They are further
requested to see that the students write legibly. If they do not, issue
them infraction theses. Also see that they use flimsy paper to save bulk.
All Directors of Processing are to see that their auditors use airmail
weight paper for their reports. Because of the weight, money is being
wasted on airmail goods.
LRH:NW:dd.rd HCO Secretary WW
Copyright Q 1959 for
L. RON HUBBARD
512
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HOD POLICY LETTER OF 16 OCTOBER 1959
D of Ps
WW and HCO Area Secs
HOW TO PREPARE HGC WEEKLY REPORTS FOR REVIEW
HGC reports should be submitted every week by the Director of
Processing to L. Ron Hubbard, as follows: -
I PC's graph showing before and after test results, on flimsy
paper.
2. PC's case analysed on flimsy paper.
3. PC's end of intensive report, where applicable, on flimsy paper.
4. Original copies on flimsy paper of auditor's reports for every
session.
5. Attach drawings to auditor's report, if PC drew answers to the
commands of comm process.
6. Director of Processing's comments on PC's case and results.
The above 6 items should be stapled together for each individual
preclear and be forwarded under cover of apierno from the D of P stating:-
(a) Date of report for week ending
(b) Number of PCs in the HGC for the week this report covers, and
their names.
(c) Which preclears received an intensive.
(d) Which preclears received an assist.
(e) Summary of week's results and any general comments.
Always note which processes were run on which PC and how many hours of
processing each PC received.
Please write all reports neatly and legibly at all times.
Staff Research Auditor WW for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dd.cden
513
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I JANUARY 1960
Fran Hldrs (Reissued from St Hill)
HCO Sees
Assn Sees
HCO & Central Org Staff
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURE FOR REDUCING OVERTS
This Policy Letter is to be followed in HGCs, Co-Audits, and with
staff and field auditors and PCs as far as it can be practically applied.
It is a breach of the auditor's code to audit without establishing two
way communication with the PC. This cannot be established while there are
still overts and withholds on the part of the PC in present lifetime and
sometimes from earlier lives. Thus two way communication cannot exist so
long as withholds and overts are still unreduced.
As PCs are sometimes afraid to disclose their private lives to
auditors and as the PC will eventually want a wider relief of his overts
and withholds, insofar as practicable, whenever a PC discloses important
overts and withholds to the auditor, the auditor should have him write
these down and sign them and send them to me. The auditor should then
flatten these with a responsibility process. The PC can then be assured
that his data is not privately retained and the auditor is then to some
degree relieved of the secrecy involved, a thing which has caused some
auditors discomfort. Any overt the PC considers to be involved in voicing
these overts or in sending them to me should also be flattened as we don't
want PCs to wind up with a new overt in their own consideration-though
factually it's no overt, let me assure you, for me to know that somebody
else is en route to clear.
In those cases where this is done by correspondence the following
procedure is to be followed. All carping and critical letters containing
imagined wrongs should be answered by all persons responsible for
correspondence as follows: "Write down your overts and withholds against
Scientology, its organizations and all connected personnel and send them to
me so that I can forward them to HCO WW." When this list is received or
when any such list is received, the reply to the person writing the list
should be as follows: "Make restitution where you can. Inform me of the
steps taken. Write down a long list of what responsibility you could take
for these various overts and send them to me so they can be forwarded to
HCO WW." Mary Sue's name may be added in any of the above.
Whenever such lists are received by HCO WW I will endeavour to
acknowledge the receipt. To assist this a complete address should be put on
each list.
Persons calling in person on HCOs or Central Orgs, with carping
criticism, should be set at once to the above tasks as outlined.
Do not take action on or report to police any unconfessed crimes found
in this activity. You will find that police are themselves too bowed down
with their own overts to be able to handle any part of this.
The full extent of our justice will be to demand that persons guilty
of severe crimes shall be audited at their own expense until checked out
clear on them and earlier sources.
HCO Sees are authorised to E-Meter check out any and all such lists on
staff
514
members or important field auditors and to send the result of such
check outs to be for the file. Without such HCO check outs my files will be
incomplete.
Any person still withholding after every effort to free him and
discovered later to have been guilty of serious crimes he has not
volunteered may be dealt with in any way Assn Sees or HCO Sees may see fit
as they have not availed themselves of our gssistance.
My total use of all such lists and files received by me will be to
keep them under lock and key and to see that they are eventually completed
in terms of responsibility and to utilise the data in advising the
processing of persons.
Should any person aver he has already done this with another auditor
he may pay the expense of cable query and reply to HCO Sthil for my
verification or denial or further advice.
We are going to clear more than you think. So a tight administrative
procedure is indicated.
I contemplate only one punitive action in any of this and that is any
action necessary to prevent any such disclosed data from being employed
against the disclosing person in any way to the profit of any receiving
person, organization or criminal or political group.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:js.rf.cden
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JANUARY 1960
CenOCon
REQUIREMENTS FOR HG4C AUDITORS
The 21st ACC in Washington and the special HCA/HCS Course held in
Washington in July and August of 1959 did not teach the CCHs.
Therefore it is recommended that any auditor who received his
validation or HCA certificate at one of those courses be checked out on the
CCHs before being permitted
to audit as a staff auditor at any HGC.
Peter Hemery
LRH:js.eden HCO Secretary WW
Copyright (D 1960
by L Ron Hubbard for
L. RON HUBBARD
515
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 AUGUST 1960
1 copy to
Assn Sec
HCO Sec
Registrar
D of P REGISTRAR LOST LINE
Once again the key line is lost in some Central Orgs between Registrar
and D of P. This costs us about �25,000 a year internationally.
The Body Registrar drops the ball. The D of P doesn't locate it or
insist on, it. Then 1 get letters from whining pcs or D of Ps start giving
free weeks of processing.
The line has been going out every three months for years. So please
keep it in.
Proper sign-up includes this line. Check sheets exist for it. Pcs not
signed up this way are improperly signed up.
Line: Reg signs up pc fully. Pc is taken to D of P at once (not next
Monday). D of P checks out pc. Says, "I will not take you'unless you have
signed up for enough weeks to clear you. 1 don't care whether you pay for
them or take them ever. But you have to sign for them anyway." He cheeks
out pc without graphs or 1Qs. Only a meter. He says, "Seven weeks to
clear." Pc goes back to Body Reg. Signs up for seven weeks. Pc doesn't have
to take them now or ever. Pc doesn't have to pay for them. Then pc is told
to come in for testing and processing.
This is the line. It has no exceptions.
Failure to hold that procedure in results in horrible flukes. Reg has
no right to do a technical survey of pc. Only D of P has that right. D of P
can simply refuse to process pc as a psycho if pc is psycho.
NO D OF P MAY ACCEPT A PC FOR PROCESSING IF THIS LINE IS NOT FOLLOWED.
Why is it only I hold this line in in so many places? Pc signed up for
121/2 hours can complain of no results and demand free time. And we've got
to give it. A pc signed up for 7 weeks taking 121/2 hours of it has no
choice but to buy more of his sign-up time.
You'll clear them now in five weeks if you drill staff on Regimen One
and run help on motion and good 8c and follow the HCO Bulletins.
You're off to a new start in processing so keep that body-tech line
in! Help me do it.
Now just to show you 1 help too, get the Ltr Registrar to go back
through all contracts signed the past few years for untaken weeks and write
the person who signed up for them "Ron wants you to come in now and finish
getting cleared on your processing contract. We need a clear in your area."
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:js.rd Copyright (Z 1960
516
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 SEPTEMBER 1960
D of Ps Assn Secs HCO Secs
GIVING THE PC FULL HOURS
It has come to attention that pcs are sometimes deprived of a part of
their full 25 hours in an intensive by including coffee breaks in the
auditing time.
As this is one of the most fruitful sources of pc dissatisfaction even
when unexpressed, the practice is forbidden.
If the pe demands a break or if the auditor declares one, the time so
spent is added to the 25 hours, which is to say, the time is made up in
actual auditing in the same day it occurred. Careful count must be kept of
a break since it must be added to session time and given in actual
auditing.
Auditing time is very precious to pcs. Please don't waste it.
HAVINGNESS INJUNCTION
No pe may be run on two-way comm, confront, help or other process
until a process has been found that remedies his havingness and brings the
tone arm to clear read.
Overt-withhold on the auditor or other terminal may be considered a
preliminary process as it assists duplication and therefore havingness. It
is not, however, to be considered a havingness process for purposes of
running a case.
Havingness processes meant herein are those of the Ist Saint Hill ACC
issued in contemporary bulletins.
MODEL SESSION
HGCs will hereafter use Model Session form immediately that a
havingness and a confront process are established for a particular pc.
Thereafter all sessions shall be in Model Session form.
The purpose of this is to get the rudiments covered to the end of
obviating ARC breaks and present time problems, the only two things which
can stall a case which has once gotten started.
L RON HUBBARD
LRH:dm.oden
517
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 JANUARY 1961
Central Orgs
D of Ps
A BRIEF OUTLINE OF AN HGC
AS CURRENTLY DONE
D of P - Technical Supervision first. Then general supervision.
HGC Admin - Case Acceptances
Supervises HGC tests
Report Files
Auditor Procurement
Room Procurement
Comm Centre for HGC
Reception for D of P
D of P interviews Pc and. Auditor every 5 hours or thereabouts.
A leading Auditor is made Training Officer to Auditors (and takes a
pc).
The Auditor brings in the complete pc's file at each interview. These
are otherwise in open files in HGC kept by HGC Admin.
LRH.js.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 MARCH 1961
HCO Sees
Assoc Sees
Ds of P
RESTRICTION ON S.O.P. GOALS PROCEDURE
HCO Bulletin of February 18, 196 1, S.O.P. Goals, is not to be sent at
present to Franchise Auditors or other field auditors. It must not be
republished as notes.
Its distribution is strictly restricted to the persons as shown on the
original bulletin, i.e. HCO Sees, Assoc Sees, Ds of P, all HGC Personnel,
all Auditors auditing staff, all 22nd American ACC students, and all 3rd
S.A. ACC Students.
LRH:js.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
518
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 MARCH 1961
Issue 11
CenOCon
D of P
All Staff Auditors
HCO Area Sec: Hat Check
thoroughly and often
and on all new auditors
BASIC STAFF AUDITOWS HAT
(This applies mainly to the relationship of the Staff Auditor to the
pc and the D of P and does not modify existing policies but bears directly
on Case Assessments and SOP Goals. This hat is needed to smooth out its use
and Admin of SOP Goals on pes.)
The staff auditor is directly responsible for the HGC preclear
assigned to him, Results, lack of results, ARC breaks, recovering the pc
after "blows", getting the pc to the D of P for interviews, getting the pc
to the D of P and Registrar for after intensive interviews and handling all
matters relating the pc to the Org during the delivery of auditing are all
up to the staff auditor.
The staff auditor may refuse to accept a pc and may refuse to release
a pc from auditing. The staff auditor may also refuse to give a particular
session if in giving one the Auditor's Code is violated as to the pc's need
for food, rest or the lateness of the hour.
The staff auditor is to deliver all the hours of auditing purchased by
the pc. Case Assessments and Goals Assessments are part of the pc's
auditing time when done by the staff auditor. No time spent on the case by
the D of P in conferences, interviews or assessments are part of the pc's
auditing time.
Any time missed by reason of auditor lateness, unavailability of
rooms, breaks, travel to see the D of P, etc, must be made up on the pc by
the staff auditor.
Case Assessment
(See HCO B of Nov 18, 1960 for exact form)
The first action of an auditor with a pc new to him is to fill in the
Case Assessment Form. This is done on the pc's auditing time.
If a Case Assessment has already been done and is part of the pc's
record, but was not done by the same auditor, it may be checked over with
the pc by his new auditor. In any event the staff auditor's first action
with a new pc is Case Assessment, whether done from an existing completed
form or on a new Case Assessment Form. This does not apply to assists. This
does apply to staff cases as well as outside pes.
First Auditing
The first formal auditing that the pc receives is given at once when
the Case Assessment Form is complete.
ALL sessions given in an HGC except those devoted to Assists, CCH
sessions or "Coffee shop" auditing (inevitably done casually out of
auditing rooms by staff on staff or students on friends and students even
when you try to prevent it) are done in Model Session form (HCO Bulletin of
March 21, 1961). To repeat, Assists and CCHs are not done in Model Session
form. ALL Assessments even are done in Model Session form in an WC. Assists
or CCHs can be explained first and the pc should be started in such a way
as not to cause ARC breaks, but are not Model Session.
A Goals Assessment should now be done in Model Session. This permits
the auditor two cracks at withholds, PTPs and ARC breaks twice in every
session, using Model Session HCO B of March 21, 1961, which includes
withholds in end rudiments as well as beginning rudiments. This makes a
smoother picture than trying to get off withholds with no ARC and no
session properly going. Further, even a goals assessment really puts the pc
in session in Goals SOP, so a Model Session is better all around.
The first formal session, then, is run by Model Session.
519
The staff auditor takes off ARC breaks, a few withholds and any PTP
and then, in lieu of a process, does an SOP Goals Assessment.
When the assessment is completed, even down to terminal Pro-Hav level
and finding the auditing command that falls, the staff auditor takes the pc
to the D of P and has the assessment checked. The D of P, at this time,
does not touch rudiments, but only sees that goal falls more than other
listed goals and that terminal and command fall at least as much as the
main goal.
Unless only a few minutes remain of the day's auditing, the auditor
then takes the pc back to the auditing room and starts the second session.
Second Session
In this session as in all remaining sessions the staff auditor runs
SOP Goals in Model Session form.
The auditor must allow, always, enough time to end the session for the
day. He makes a nice judgment on this. Half an hour is often spent on End
Rudiments. Early in the first intensive, the withholds and ARC breaks take
precedence in End Rudiments. PTPs, ARC breaks and Withholds take precedence
in Beginning Rudiments. A session cannot be gotten going with a PTP
unhandled. And a session cannot be ended with an ARC break in full bloom.
However, a session can be ended with a PTP unhandled, and this is the most
lengthy item usually encountered in rudiments.
Thus if only one hour remained in the first day's schedule for the
second session, the staff auditor would run beginning rudiments, then end
rudiments with no process run in the middle of the Model Session.
Third Session
This session like any other is run in Model Session form.
If the pc is still falling on the meter when asked about withholds,
even with sensitivity raised, at least half an hour should be spent getting
them off. Even if the needle still falls a bit after that half hour, one
goes on to run the PT Problem and then the process of SOP Goals, which is
run exactly according to its bulletin. This process occupies the bulk of
the auditing period. Then in the last half hour one runs the End Rudiments
and of course has another crack,at withholds.
Fourth Session
Runs the same as the Third Session.
In a 5-day intensive, the 3rd and 4th sessions probably occurred on
same day.
Fifth Session
During this auditing day or before the fifth session, the pc is taken
by the staff auditor to the D of P, who checks the pc out on rudiments.
The D of P finds out what is being run from the pc, and cheeks out but
does not run anything on the Rudiments.
The whole record of the pc including the Case Assessment and SOP Goals
Assessment Sheets are in a folder along with all session reports. The
folder is in the hands of the staff auditor before the D of P interview,
the last session report on top.
The D of P adds any and all advices and comments to the last session
report.
The staff auditor takes the pc back to the auditing room. The fifth
session is then begun. If the interview took place after the session was
started, the Model Session was of course completed before the interview.
The auditor follows the D of P's advices in the next session after the
interview. This may be, then, the Fifth Session or the Sixth Session.
A difficulty may now occur in the next session after the interview.
The pc, because of D of P altitude, may have "transferred" to the D of P,
which is to say, may now consider the D of P his auditor.
520
Therefore, in the next auditing after this D of P interview, heavy
attention must be given to No. 3 of the Beginning Rudiments. A new process
could be used here in lieu of TR5N to correct this~ The process is "Who
should I be in order to audit you?" or "Who am IT' This, run briefly, takes
off any "transfer" to the D of P and is a good basic rudiment type process
anyway. A little of it goes a long way, however..
The SOP Goals terminal (or the D of P's advice) is run in Model
Session form.
Subsequent Sessions
In subsequent sessions the case is continued on up the line, with
reassessments for new level each time the tone arm stops moving well and
for a new goals assessment, adding to the old list any goals the pc now has
as a result of auditing.
When the First Terminal is Flat
When the first terminal gets no needle reaction on any part of the Pre-
Hav scale, it is flat. If needle action is still found, take the level with
heaviest reaction, put together a command that falls also and go on with
the terminal at that level. But when this no longer occurs, the first
terminal is said to be flat. This may take a few or many hours. But the
thing is to be sure it's flat.
Now and now only the auditor is to find the Havingness Process and the
Confront Process of the pc in accordance with earlier bulletins. He then
runs these enough to stabilize them. He now does his next complete Goals
Assessment.
The auditor now uses the Havingness and Confront processes along with
his new Goals Terminal. This is like old Regimen 3except that the Goals
Terminal and Pre-Hav Scale are used instead of help. The bulk of auditing
is spent, of course, on the Pre-Hav Terminal on the Pre-Hav Scale in
accordance with SOP Goals.
The Third D of P check-out occurs when the Havingness, Confront and
new Goals Terminal are all found. The D of P cheeks each one of these and,
briefly, the Rudiments. The D of P does not run any of these.
When this is done, the staff auditor goes back to the auditing room
and starts his next session, remembering to again give attention to the
"transfer" possibility and to again use at level 3 of the Beginning
Rudiments "Who should I be in order to audit you?" or "Who am IV'
The Intensive or new intensives continue. The D of P must cheek out
rudiments at least every 10 hours of auditing time. and, until toward the
end of the pc's clearing, must check all new goals and terminals.
The D of P is not permitted to do goals assessments except for
demonstration or when the staff auditor completely fails. The D of P is not
permitted to audit rudiments for the staff auditor, only to check them.
Pes Priorly Audited
Pes who have been audited before in the HGC but not by the present
staff auditor are handled much in the same way as a new pc.
The whole record and all auditor reports are taken into the auditing
room. The staff auditor looks for the Case Assessment. If he or she doesn't
find one, a new one is niade. If the Case Assessment is present, the staff
auditor reads it all off, verifying each point with the pc.
This done, the staff auditor cheeks in the.reports for any terminals
that were run on the pc or any Goals SOP run or goals assessments done
before.
Only if a goals assessment has been done does he pay much attention to
the records. If one has been done (but never run) the staff auditor cheeks
it over with the meter. He or she accepts it or rejects it and uses his or
her own assessment. If it was ever run, the staff auditor cannot reject it
but must carry on.
If any Goals SOP has been run, the terminal that has been run is
thoroughly meter
checked on the Pre-Hav Scale. Any reaction ' s found are flattened as
per SOP Goals, in
Model Session form. In short, the staff auditor, locating unflatness
on the terminal first
521
found by some other for SOP Goals running, starts his Model Session,
does the rudiments thoroughly and then assesses the first terminal ever run
on the Pre-Hav Scale again (as he did before he started session), finds the
level accurately, gets a command that will work and carries on.
The new auditor on the old case cheeks out and flattens on the whole
Pre-Hav Scale, as indicated by meter reaction for any level, every Goals
Terminal over found by any other auditor before he does his own goals
assessment.
If the staff auditor finds a Havingness and Confront process already
listed as found in the records he or she may use it or find new ones as
best judgment seems to indicate on inspection.
If help terminals or Dynamic Assessment terminals are listed as run in
the days before Pre-Hav, they can be neglected.
Clearing
When all terminals seem flat and the assessments find terminals only
to "blow" almost at once, the pc is near-Clear. SOP Goals is carried right
on until no assessments register on the meter, but the meter remains free.
Old Help and Dynamic terminals from the pc's file or memory are now
checked out and run like Goals terminals.
When all this is done, the pc is Clear.
Things That Prevent Clearing
If the pc is run with a PTP in* full bloom, or if a goal is really a
long time PTP and is not audited, the pc will not change toward Clear.
Remedy: Reduce any PTP that produces needle reaction during Beginning
Rudiments. Run as the first goal the one which assesses best on the meter,
whether you agree with it or not-if in doubt choose by meter the goal which
is the reason the pc is being audited according to the pc.
If the pc has heavy ARC breaks registering he will not only not
progress, he may worsen the graph. Reduce all ARC breaks found by meter
falls in the Beginning and End Rudiments of the Model Session.
If the pc has heavy withholds which register on the meter and yet the
pc will not give them, the case will not progress.
If a terminal being run on Goals is left unflat (if it registers on
the needle for any part of the Pre-Hav Scale and that is not flattened) the
next terminal addressed will not run well and pc will not clear. Check over
every level of Pre-Hav by needle reaction and flatten any residue, before
you go on to assessing another terminal.
Overts or overt thinking on Scientology Orgs or personnel can prevent
Clearing.
Always follow the Auditor's Code.
Pc Blows
A pc is most likely to blow (leave) if withholds are not given good
attention and pulled. If withholds still register, and pc after several
hours of auditing still won't give, run a Joburg Security Cheek on the pc
as part of Model Session Rudiments 4.
A pc will blow if ARC breaks are not repaired properly when they
happen. An ARC break can be repaired at any time in the session by TR5N.
Only repair ARC breaks that fall on the meter.
A PTP unhandled can cause a no-gain and therefore an eventual blow.
If the pc blows, his or her staff auditor alone is responsible for
getting him or her back into session. If all else fails the D of P can
help. It's a black mark for a staff auditor if a pc blows.
The whole prevention of blowing is contained in this section if we add
that the staff auditor's air of competence and facile command of his tools
are sufficient to inspire pc confidence~
Auditing Maxims
Follow the Code. Particularly Clauses 1 and 2.
522
Get an answer for every question asked before asking another question.
Ask a question or give a command for every answer you expect. Don't
expect two answers for one auditor question or command.
Assess and run only what the pc says and the meter says. Don't write
script and try to audit your own troubles out of the pc or avoid the pc's
troubles because you have an aversion for them.
Follow the Model Session Script and the TRs exactly. These are the
badges of a skilled auditor.
The clearer you get the better you will audit. But case is no excuse
for bad auditing.
Always be real. Don't have big withholds on the pc. Tell the pc the
truth without violating 1 and 2 of the Code. If you are tired, carry on but
say so. If the pc wants to see the meter read show it to the pc briefly.
Only cover a meter during an assessment as pc will start pushing at it.
Tell the pc what he wants to know about the meter reads.
Don't try to educate the pc on Scientology while you're auditing him
or her. Tell the pc to be sure to take a PE if they haven't.
Newcomers
Getting a pc started who has never been given any data on Scientology
is simple now. Just do the sessions of Goals SOP as given above. They
respond to Case Assessment and Goals Assessments with total interest.
A pc is in session when he or she is interested in own case and
willing to talk to the auditor.
Cases Not On SOP Goals
About 3 out of 22 cases cannot be started with SOP Goals.
The test is only this: Does the needle move enough, even on high
sensitivity, to do a goals assessment? If it can, do one.
If totally stuck run the concentrate-shift attention process in
regular Model Session in lieu of Goals Assessment until the Tone Arm is
moving well, at least 3 tone arm dial divisions per half hour. This
process, coupled with heavy rudiments, will start most cases so that they
can then be assessed.
If the case is incapable of answering sensibly various questions, run
the CCHS. By answering sensibly is meant "an intelligible response dealing
at least vaguely with the question".
CCHs are not run in Model Session.
Stopping Processes
Processes are run as long as they produce Tone Arm change. Processes
which do not produce Tone Arm change are then stopped. If a process doesn't
produce a Tone Arm change in a half an hour, it must be stopped. Processes
which freeze a needle and do not free it must be stopped.
A process is never stopped on the recommendation of the pc or because
of the pc's objections. Such objections in SOP Goals always precede huge
gains on the process. A process is stopped only when it no longer produces
meter change.
A process that produces change must be flattened.
The process that turns on a bizarre or unwanted condition will always
turn it off. If in doubt, flatten the process.
Don't "Q and A". That is where the change in the pc causes the auditor
to stop or change the process. If the pc changes, continue the process. If
the pc isn't changing, change the process.
Stop processes and sessions on the auditor's determination, never the
pc's. The auditor's determination is established by meter reaction, never
pc reaction. If the meter doesn't act, change the process or end the
session according to session time. If the meter is acting, don't change the
process and don't stop the session unless time is up.
523
Before Giving Up
Before chucking in your hand on a trying and unchanging pc and leaving
it up to the D of P or the Org, do the following:
1. Thoroughly cheek rudiments with high sensitivity and get them
flat on the needle with the Model Session Rudiments Processes.
2. Run a Johannesburg Security Cheek on the pc and clear every drop
of the needle fully.
3. Run Formula 16.
4. Run Formula 13.
5. Run Formula 15.
6. Run "Concentrate -shift attention" process from SOP Goals until
Tone Arm is very active.
7. Keep rudiments cleared while doing the above.
If you do all these and still get no action, see the D of P. Of
course, it's impossible to do all the above well on a case and not get it
going,providing only that you do do them well with good TRs.
End of Intensives
At the end of the intensive be sure, if the pc is continuing, that all
is in order with the Registrar and D of P before you continue on into the
next intensive.
1 At the end of all the intensives the pc has bought, be sure the pc
sees the D of P and the Registrar before the pc leaves the Org.
These actions are wholly up to the staff auditor.
A Completed PC
Be sure, when all the intensives given are over, that the pc's
complete record, with all its papers, assessments and session reports are
turned in, in a folder, to HGC Admin for filing. You may add to this file
your own summary and recommendation on the case if you wish so the next
auditor who gets it will be assisted.
Additional Staff Auditor Duties
Other staff auditor duties are assigned by the D of P only. No other
executive may issue direct orders to a staff auditor about his duties or
cases.
Reports
All staff auditor reports go to the D of P. Copies go to myself at HCO
WW via the HCO Area and HCO WW Technical Secretary.
Nothing gets as much attention from me as the results, graphs, reports
and comments of the staff auditor.
The whole future stability of the Org rests on the technical skill of
the staff auditor.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jl.rd Copyright Q 1961
[See also HCOP/L 26 May 1961, Basic Staff Auditor's Hat, page 536.]
524
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIO
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinst
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31
Assn Sec HCO Sec D of P All Staff Auditors Mimeo Directions: Mimeo
whole report as a Policy Letter. Then mimeo each form separately for D of
P. Then have them letter pressed on flimsy paper.
THE DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING'S CASE CHECKING HAT
A system has been set up whereby a double check of every case at its
most difficult crossroads in processing can be done.
While the staff auditor does all of the basic work and actual
assessments, the D of P thoroughly checks each decisional step which would
commit the case to an erroneous track or which would permit the case to
continue less swiftly than is possible.
This checking system does not arise because staff auditors are
unskilled. It arises from the fact that two points of view on a case are
better than one. As an example of this it can occur that a staff auditor
has the same withhold as the pc resulting at times in the staff auditor
unconsciously avoiding that withhold. As another example, the pc terminal
may be one to which the staff auditor has an antipathy resulting in an
avoidance of that terminal. But in addition to these unlikely instances the
pe will very often give up something to the D of P, thinking in terms of
altitude, that he will not say to the staff auditor.
Our whole interest here is case speed of advance. The more accurately
assessments are done and the more accurately rudiments are handled the more
rapidly the case progresses.
The D of P only checks. The D of P does not actually audit the pc. It
can happen that the pc gives up withholds to the D of P rather than the
staff auditor. This is quite in order but the D of P may not drum for them
the way a staff auditor would.
There are eight types of checkouts that the D of P does oil a pe. Each
one of these as below is the subject of a technical report form. These
forms should be mimeoed out at first and later printed on flimsy paper by
letterpress. They are in red ink on white paper.
We are not now checking arbitrarily every five hours. We are checking
only when the pc has reached certain stages. Now that SOP Goals is proving
itself we must smooth out every possibility of error in its running. It is
a complex process but it is invariable. It has many steps but these are
unchanging. Very little if anything in it is equivocal. Its answers are all
in the black and white of being right or wrong once one actually reads the
meter with precision.
CHECK TYPE ONE
HCO WW FORM CT I
Pre-Intensive interview and Pre-Goals Assessment Check.
Before the preclear is audited in an intensive where SOP Goals may be
employed the following check sheet is filled out by the D of P and passed
by pc before a Goals assessment is made.
Name of Pe Date
Location of HGC
............................................................................
.............................
The Pc is put on the Meter.
The following statement is read to the pc: "You are about to receive
Hubbard Guidance Centre Processing. Your auditor will do your case
assessment in your first session. All I am going to do here is test your
meter reaction for technical purposes."
525
TA Needle Character
Have you ever received mental treatment of any kind?
TA Needle Character
How do you feel about help9
TA Needle Character
Do you wish to attain the state of release?
TA - Needle Character
Does any of your family oppose Scientology?
TA Needle Character
How do you feel about control?
TA- Needle Character
Are you prepared to answer your auditor truthfully when he or she asks
you questions about your past?
TA Needle Character
"This is the end of this check out. Please be sure to get good food---
and plenty of rest during the time of your processing. 1 will see you again
from time to time to make certain your processing is going well. Best of
luck to you."
Adjudication (No other significance than TA and needle are given heed
at this time): (given to auditor): Did TA move during questioning?
Did needle move during questioning?
If both moved, the auditor is to go right on and assess with a case
assessment and then SOP Goals assessment in accordance with staff auditor's
partial hat. If TA did not move but needle moved, the auditor is to run the
concentrate-shift attention process given in SOP Goals and come back for
this type check again. If neither TA nor needle moved during questioning
auditor is to run: "How have you tried to change a person?" "How have you
failed to change a person?" "How have you tried to change yourselM "How
have you failed to change yourselP" If pc gave no intelligible answers to
the questions, regardless of TA and needle motion, tell auditor to run
CCHs.
Assess Attention Process
Change Process CCHs
Signed D of P.
Repeat this form without reading beginning and end to pc but reading
only questions when the auditor says TA is moving well and comes back for
recheck. If CCHs were assigned tell auditor to now do Change Process.
Auditor returns for recheck when TA moving well. When Change Process doing
fine, assign Attention Process. When Attention Process doing fine assess
for SOP Goals.
Use new cheek type one sheet for every D of P check on above. Include
this sheet in pc folder.
CHECK TYPE TWO
HCO WW Form CT2
Assessment Confirmation
Name of Pc Date
Location of HGC
................................................................
Cheek by D of P to confirm case assessment, Goals Assessment, Terminal
level and command.
Done before any of these are run on pc. Questions are made. to pc with
pc on the meter.
526
Has the auditor asked you all about your family and former life?
About how many goals did you find? (Should be 50 or more)
Did the auditor cover secret or withheld goals too?
Did you cover childhood goals as well?
What was the principal goal found?
(D of P looks at assessment sheet): Was the
principal goal found? (Note number of meter divisions it falls)
What was the terminal found for this?
(D of P looks at assessment sheet): Was the
principal terminal found? (number of divisions it falls on meter).
If the number of divisions the terminal falls does not equal or exceed
the number of
divisions the goal fell auditor must reassess.
If reassessment ordered end cheek here. Sign and put in folder.
What level of scale was found for this terminal?
(D of P looks at assessment sheet): Was
the level of scale found for the terminal?
Meter must fall the same number of divisions for the level as for the
Goal and the
terminal. If this does not happen even when the terminal and level are
repeated by D of
P to Pc, tell auditor to reasses and end check at this point.
What command did you evolve for this?
(D of P looks at Assessment sheet): Was
the command evolved for this? (Notes divisions of fall)
If the command does not fall as much as the goal, terminal and level
the D of P may
try a better command remembering to take into account the phenomena of
stuck flows
and putting the pc at cause.
New command evolved which falls as much as Goals, Terminal and Level -
Auditor told to
Signed D of P.
CHECK TYPE THREE
HCO WW Form CT3
General Check up on a Session
May be run at any time or when D of P unconvinced of Case Progress
Name of Pc Date
Location of HGC
................................................................
All questions are addressed to pc who is on a meter.
What processes are being run on you?
Do you have any ARC breaks with your Auditor?
Are you worried about something in your life?
527
Have you done anytl-dng while you have been in the HGC you shouldn't
have done? -
Do you think what we are doing with you is in error?
Is your auditor doing anything that upsets you?
If needle did a marked dip on any of the above the D of P should
continue the question until the dip vanishes, using various different forms
of the question until he gets the whole story to his satisfaction.
D of P findings:
Recommendation to Auditor:
Signed D of P.
CHECK TYPE FOUR
HCO WW Form CT4
Rudiments Check
NameofPc Date
Location of HGC
................................................................
After eight or ten hours of auditing on processes that were in Model
Session (not CCHs) the D of P checks rudiments to make sure that they are
cleaned up.
Cheek done on Pc who is on a meter.
What goals have you been setting for your sessions?
Do you have any upset with your auditor about anything at all?
Are you withholding anything from us about yourself or your
processing?
Do you have any present time problems?
Is there anything you dislike about your auditing?
Is there anything you would like to change about your auditor?
Is there anything it would embarrass you to tell us about?
Is there something you wouldn't want known?
Is there anything in your life right now that is very upsetting to
you?
D of P sorts out any needle fall until he is sure that there is
something there that needs attention and either it has cleared by his
asking or he gives the auditor an alert to it so it can be handled.
Recommendation to auditor:
Signed D of P.
528
CHECK TYPE FIVE
HCO WW Form CT 5
Flat Cheek
When the staff auditor states that the terminal he has been running is
now flat the D of P makes a very careful check before he permits a new
assessment to be started. The TA
does not have to be on clear read for a terminal to be flat.
Name of Pc Date
Location of HGC
Terminal that has been run 'flat' according to auditor
Check terminal on every level of the Pre Hav Scale against the needle
only. Cheek from
bottom to top of scale then back to bottom of scale.
Needle changed characteristic or fell on the following levels
If any change or fall noted, send auditor back to flatten that level,
or those levels and do his own recheck and flattening before returning,
Use this form for D of P recheck.
If no level reacted on the terminal, take the Goal which the terminal
represented and check it out thoroughly on the meter.
Goal Terminal Represented
Reaction of the Goal:
If goal had a reaction send auditor back to find another terminal that
reacts as much as the Goal reacts, flatten that terminal on any and all
levels and return for recheck on
this same form.
I . Return for recheck or
2. Do new Goals, Terminal, Level, Command Assessment
Signed D of P.
CHECK TYPE SIX
HCO WW Form CT6
Bog Check
NameofPc Date
Location of HGC
................................................................
When the Auditor reports or D of P thinks case is not progressing well
the following
check offs are done: (This is a "When all else fails" check off)
D of P does check type one without the message to the Pe:
D of P does check type three:
D of P orders Johannesburg Security Check. Done:
D of P does check type four
If SOP Goals has been 'flattened' on one or more terminals D of P does
check type five
on all SOP terminals run to date
Only when all of this has been cared for according to each check type
listed and the
Johannesburg Security Check has been fully cleared on all questions
does the D of P
make further recommendation to the Staff Auditor:
Recommendation:
Signed D of P.
529
CHECK TYPE SEVEN
HCO WW Form CT7
A 'Welease- Cheek Sheet
Name of Pc Date
Location of HGC
The following may be made out on the pc at any time but preferably at
a time when
the pc is to receive no further intensives at the moment or is leaving
the HGC.
This whole check sheet is rechecked by RCO Area as indicatedi
Pc is put on a meter and asked:
Are you happy With the auditing you have had?
D of P HCO Area See
Do you think you will get any worse?
D of P HCO Area Sec
Do you intend to get more auditing?
D of P HCO Area Sec
Did they find your Havingness process?
D of P HCO Area See
Did they find your Confront process?
D of P HCO Area Sec
Do you think you can handle life any better?
D of P HCO Area See
Do you think Scientology works?
D of P HCO Area See
If satisfactory meter reaction (fairly free needle) and if Tone Arm is
not abnormally
high or low, and if pc answers "Yes" to above, a D of P sends the pc
with this form to
HCO Area, and HCO Area again checks it out, has Address prepare a
Certificate, HCO
Continental gets Certificate and this form and signs, and Certificate
is handed to or
mailed to the pc. A pin is also given or sent when available, denoting
pc is a "Release".
D of P HCO Area Sec
CHECK TYPE EIGHT
HCO WW Form CT8
Clear Check
D of P cheeks out this form and then sends it to HCO Area See for a
second cheek out.
The whole pc file folder with all filed forms, Assessments, various
sheets and auditor's
reports are to hand when this check out is done.
Check over all goals listed on the Goals Assessment Sheet and any
subsequent
additions. Look for a fall of the needle on any of them.
Any fall disqualifies the pc.
Check over all terminals listed in all auditor's reports and note any
fall on any of them
with high sensitivity.
Any fall disqualifies pc.
We find the needle without reaction and pronounce this person to be
clear.
D of P HCO Area See
Give letter to HCO Continental and send bracelet to pc.
LRH:jl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
[Modified by HCO P/L 25 April 1961,
530 D of P Form-Check Type One, page 532.1
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 APRIL 1961
CenOCon
S.O.P. GOALS GOOFS
Having examined the reports of several HGCs I must assume the
following:
1. That the many situations arising in Admin and staff in some HGCs
stem directly from an unconscious avoidance of clearing or of running SOP
Goals.
2. That getting SOP Goals run properly is my one and only goal for
HGCs at this time.
3. That I have no interest in reasons why it is not being run
properly.
4. That all organization and staff problems will resolve with the
attainment of successful clearing of staffs.
5. That problems blow into view as this is being attempted and
should get no more attention from me than a pc's protests would in a
session.
6. That we can and will win out in getting SOP Goals properly
applied.
7. That sooner or later staff auditors will realize it is a simple
procedure with many steps and apply it bravely.
8. That auditors will suddenly realize it does work and clear and
is to be used.
9. That staff auditors will read and follow the bulletins and
policy letters on SOP Goals.
10, That my job is to insist that it be run, whether people on staff
are trained or not trained.
11. That all difficulty stems from lack of successful technical
application and that technical, fully repaired, solves all Admin problems.
12. That we can and will get SOP Goals in proper use, not only
through existing staff but new staff as they arrive.
13. That neither you or I can Q and A with reasons it is not being
run.
I am very, very earnest about these matters.
Typical goofs: Terminal started at Pre-Hav level run for a while with
good TA motion. Motion of TA vanishes (as it should). Auditor non-plussed.
Promptly starts attention process and does 20 hours of it, where he should
have reassessed same terminal for new level.
Auditor finds goal dips only one division. Decides it isn't enough
(which it is), runs off and runs change process.
D of P does assessment in 45 minutes (D of P shouldn't, and also it
takes me 2 hours for a goals assessment), gives it to auditor. Auditor runs
with no Model Session or rudiments for 100 hours with pc going mad from
PTPs. Never changes level. Never checks rudiments. Nobody ever re-cheeks
for level. E-Meter ignored.
Auditor has goal, terminal, level, command, all set to roll, and D. of
P says, "Needle seems a little sticky, run the attention process". SOP
Goals promptly abandoned in favour of wasting 4 days of auditing.
Goofs like this are just a dramatization of wasting auditing.
It's in the bulletins. There's no reason to goof. It'sjust a question
of doing it!
As soon as somebody, anybody on staff gets clear or near clear on SOP
Goals, this situation will change. The more that get clear or near clear,
the more effective the Org will be, the better SOP Goals will run.
My policy then is clearly to get SOP Goals run in every HGC on every
pc, staff and outside, not waiting "until staff are trained" or "when we
get a new Admin", or "as soon as staff auditors can read an F-Meter".
My brand new idea on SOP Goals is "Do It". Only familiarity will beget
confidence.
LRH:ph.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
531
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Assn Sec HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 APRIL 1961
HCO See D of P All Staff Auditors Mimeo Directions: Mimeo whole report
as a Policy Letter. Then mimeo the form separately for D of P. Then have it
letter pressed on flimsy paper.
D OF P FORM
CHECK TYPE ONE
(Rewritten, Modifies HCO Policy Letter March 31, 196 1)
In view of improved technology and the fact that I've found there
aren't enough questions to produce a tone arm shift in D of P's Cheek Type
One, I have rewritten it as follows. Destroy the first issue of it and use
this Cheek Type One instead.
CHECK TYPE ONE
HCO WW Form CT2
Pre-Intensive interview and Pre-Goals Assessment Check.
Before the preclear is audited in an intensive where SOP Goals may be
employed the following check sheet is filled out by the D of P and passed
by pc before a Goals assessment is made.
NameofPc Date
Location of HGC ......................................................
The Pc is put on the Meter.
TA Reading Sensitivity Reading
The following statement is read to the pc: "You are about to receive
Scientology
Auditing 1 am (name) Director of Processing of the
Hubbard Guidance Centre. Your auditor's name is All 1
am going to do here is check your case. I am not auditing you. Your
auditor will do
that. We are your friends. We want you to make the fastest possible
gains. Now please
answer the following questions."
TA Needle Character
Have you ever received mental treatment of any kind?
TA Needle Character
How do you feel about help?
TA Needle Character
Do you wish to attain the state of release?
TA Needle Character
Does any of your family oppose Scientology?
TA Needle Character
How do you feel about control? -
TA Needle Character
Are you prepared to answer your auditor truthfully when he or she asks
you questions about your past?
TA Needle Character
Would you be embarrassed if we found out all about you?
TA Needle Character
Do you realize you will prevent yourself from being released if you
withhold information from your auditor?
TA Needle Character
Do you realize that if you indulge in alcohol at any time during the
intensive you will slow down the results?
TA Needle Character
532
Do you understand that if you get insufficient sleep each night you
will have a harder
time in processing? -
TA Needle Character -
Is it clear to you that you should not stay with antagonistic persons
or restimulative
people while getting your processing?
TA Needle Character
Do you know you should cat breakfast each morning before being
audited?
TA Needle Character
Do you understand you could add three hundred percent or more to the
time it takes
to clear you by withholding data from your auditor?
TA - Needle Character
Do you know we will do our best for you?
TA Needle Character
Are you aware that you are one of the people selected to become clear?
TA Needle Character
Will you cooperate with us in every way you can to achieve that goal?
TA Needle Character
"That is the last of these questions. Is there anything you would care
to know before
we end this check out?
TA Needle Character
Thank you. Best of luck in your auditing. You may go now."
Adjudication
Total TA Motion (TA Dial Divs) Average Character of needle -
If average sensitivity knob was above 1.5 to get a 3rd of a dial drop
(regardless of TA motion) run a change process.
If answers didn't make sense, run CCHs.
If needle was sticky and Tone Arm moved less than 1 division of TA
dial during questioning, run Change Process.
If TA moved at least 1 division of TA Dial, begin SOP Goals.
If puzzled or in doubt, run a Change Process.
Recommendation to Auditor
CCHs
Change Process
SOP Goals
If CCHs, return for check without pc. Run until pc is intelligible_ If
Change Process, run all but 118 of a TA division out of the TA motion and
then return for ok to do SOP Goals before starting on SOP Goals.
If SOP Goals, do all Assessments and return for Check Type Two when
done
Signed D of P.
Use new check type one sheet for every D of P Cheek on above.
Include this sheet in pc folder.
LRH:jl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
533
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 MAY 1961
HGCs
HCO Sees
Assoc Sees
STAFF AUDITORS
All day staff auditors must report to HGC Admin at least twice a day
in person no matter where they are auditing. Once before beginning morning
sessions and once after completing the day's auditing.
In the case of night or week end auditors, the report must be made in
person at least once between broad auditing periods not to exceed five
hours.
Every staff auditor must have a basket, just as every staff member
must have a basket. A comm centre in the HGC may be provided for staff
auditors, with a basket or a 3 basket station for each auditor, but even if
this is done, the staff auditor must also have a basket in the comm centre
of the Org.
The location of these baskets must be pointed out to each new auditor
by HGC Admin whose responsibility it is to see that the auditors report and
hand in session reports or pick up all messages for them about the case.
SOP,Goals is too touchy to run with loose supervision of what is being
run.
Ds of P must make every effort to keep themselves advised of every
auditing period being run and to help staff auditors in every possible way
to know their technology and keep them out of trouble with pcs.
We can clear people. This, to be effective. requires communication,
not only with the pc but with HGC.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jl.rd
534
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 MAY 1961
CenOCon
SOP GOALS ASSESSMENTS
(Effective on Receipt)
No person signing for auditing in an HGC may be started in an
assessment for SOP Goals unless he or she has 50 hours of auditing time
signed up and arranged for ahead of the pc at the moment the assessment is
to begin.
No case may be started on a goals assessment until the case has been
properly prepared to be assessed by earlier processes as have been or will
be issued.
This is law for the Chief Registrar and D of P and staff auditors.
Violations .an lead to serious consequences for the repute of the HGC, for
the preclear and for personnel involved.
Nothing in this policy letter forbids assessment for preliminary steps
such as general assessment on the Pre-Hav Scale.
The reason for this order is that experience is showing that staff
auditors. are occasionally taking up to 35 hours to find the goal and
terminal and be sure of them and that pcs who leave with incomplete
assessments for SOP Goals are very unhappy.
CHIEF REGISTRAR
The Chief Registrar should make much out of the therapeutic value of
an SOP Goals Assessment. If it isn't done right, auditing then requires an
infinity of auditing time to clear. Field assessments are being displayed
as careless, dangerous and deplorably wrong. Say it takes as much as fifty
hours to know your basic goal and beingness. (See Book One for basic goal
and basic personality.)
A good goals-terminal assessment almost clears people when done by HCO
Bulletin of May 13, 1961, and certainly makes a Release.
DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING
The D of P should make the Central Org specialise in good and accurate
assessments, and be the central authority on them. No field assessment
result may be used by a staff auditor or the HGC. The HGC may only run
assessments it itself does and these must be right.
A wrong assessment robs the pc of all his money and harms his case.
HCO SECRETARY
The HCO Area Sec must hat cheek this HCO Policy Letter on all
technical personnel on receipt and often thereafter.
HGCs must become expert in assessment for SOP Goals NOW.
LRH:iet.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
535
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 MAY 1961
CenOCon
BASIC STAFF AUDITOR'S HAT
(Refers to HCO POLICY LETTER OF March 20, 1961)
This remains the same. But there will shortly be a third form of Check
Type I which has, as one of its possibilities, the makings of a Release.
Other staff auditor skills include how to do a Security (Joburg) check
and run general pre-havingness scale without a terminal, both as per HCO
Bulletin of May 13, 1961.
LRH:jl.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 AUGUST 1961
CenOCon
HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
Until further notice the HGC allowed processes shall be:
Routine I
Routine I A
Routine 3.
Routine 1 A is preferred on all pcs and should be begun as early as
possible and flattened fully before a Routine 3 Assessment is attempted.
Routine 3 has failed only where rudiments are flagrantly out during
assessment or in running.
Routine I A inhibits out rudiments and ARC breaks. It flattens in from
25 to 100 hours. It speeds goals assessment to as little as 2Y2 hours if I
A is flattened.
Routine I A consists of any version of problems and all HCO WW Form
Security Checks.
Not know, unknown version of problems processes and security checks
are allowed.
It is policy that no preclear on staff or in the HGC be assessed for
goals or run on goals or run further on goals until Routine I A is flat in
all versions.
This guarantees clearing if auditors are also technically expert and
flatten all processes begun by them.
Saint Hill Tapes of recent date and other materials cover and will
continue to cover this subject.
This is policy. It must be followed.
LRH.jI.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1961
.536
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 SEPTEMBER 1961
All HCO Secs
All Assn Secs
HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
(Cancels all previous HCO Bulletins and Policy Letters on
HGC Allowed Processes)
HGCs must begin clearing.
All academies must get auditors trained up so their skill is adequate
to clear.
In an HGC, all auditing is done by staff auditors of course. But if
individual staff auditors cannot handle the skills of clearing, no clearing
will get done.
Therefore a program of increasing skills of staff auditors must be
undertaken, not just in training but in gradient skills they are permitted
to use on pcs. A staff auditor must only use skills he can command and with
which he can win.
Saint Hill Special Briefing Course Tape of September 26, 1961 is a
part of this Policy Letter. It enjoins that auditors increase and use their
skills as follows:
CLASS ONE: Relatively unskilled. HCA/HPA graduate, field auditor
called in part or full time or current staff auditor or HGC or Academy
personnel or executive. This auditor is asked what process he has had
success with on pcs. What process he has confidence in. Whatever it is, as
long as it's Scientology, a Class One Auditor is not permitted to use any
other process on HGC pcs, regardless of their "case requirements". This is
mandatory.
CLASS TWO: Any auditor auditing on staff who has finally passed a
perfect score on HCO quizzes on
I . E-Meter Essentials
2. Model Session
3. Security Checking HCO Bulletins
4. Saint Hill Special Briefing Course
Tape of September 26, 196 1.
(these quizzes must embrace the most minute details of these items.)
This auditor is thereafter permitted only to use Security Checks on
HGC pcs, either standard checks or checks combined with specially devised
checks.
CLASS THREE: Any staff auditor who has graduated up through Class Two
skills and who is having excellent results with Class Two skills and who
thereafter has been specially trained directly by a person who has attended
and passed the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course and who has also passed a
perfect examination by HCO on
I . All HCO Bulletins relating to Routine 3.
2. All Saint Hill Tapes on Routine 3.
3. Who has a good grasp of the technical side of auditing and can
run a smooth session.
537
This Class Three Auditor may use Routine 3 on HGC PCs but may only
utilize goals and terminals and levels that have been checked out and
verified by a person graduated from the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course.
He may not run engrams on HGC PCs.
4. Who can find rudiments when out and get them in.
CLASS FOUR: Any Class Three Auditor who has achieved excellent results
with Routine 3 and who has had his or her goal and terminal found and is a
release and who has had engrams run on his or her own goals terminal chain
and who has excellent subjective reality on engrams. This auditor may run
Routine 3 and engrams on HGC PCs.
In an HGC as of receipt of this HCO Policy Letter there are no other
classes of auditors and no special permissions may be granted contrary to
this policy letter.
All HCO Area Secretaries are enjoined to make this program stick, get
this HCO Policy Letter immediately hat checked on all Central Org technical
staff and all executives including the Association Secretary. A copy of
this HCO Policy Letter, carrying a list of all those who have passed a
check on it and all who can't or won't should be airmailed back to me.
This is the first positive and effective step toward getting broad
clearing done in HGCs. This is a very important step. It will be with us a
long while. For even when we are routinely clearing, every new staff
auditor will go up this ladder.
Rapidity in getting this into effect will bring the HGC that much
closer to clearing.
It is not permitted that HGC PCs are security checked or run on
Routine 3 or engrams until the auditor doing so has been awarded the class
that permits him to do SO.
If HCO Area Sees or Assn Sees find anything else more important than
getting this done, pause a bit and ask why.
For only broad general clearing in HGCs and training in Academies
toward clearing skills will resolve any and all of a Central Org's
problems.
(Note: PCs who are being run contrary to this Policy Letter on its
receipt and who would be upset by a sudden change may be continued on
whatever the auditor was running on receipt.)
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:jl.rd Copyright@ 19 61
[Added to by HCO P/L 29 November 1961, Class of Auditors, page 541.1
538
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 NOVEMBER 1961
Assn Sees
D of P
DofT
HGC PROCESSING LIABILITY
If every field auditor were trained on Sthil or Special Courses and
yet HGC auditors remained untrained, only field auditors could clear and
HGCs would suffer badly.
With the advent of 3D, clearing is placed in the reach of all cases,
as you will soon see.
Routine 3D depends almost wholly on accurate and rapid assessment.
The only reason auditors cannot assess is because they can't read E-
Meters.
Therefore your fastest steps to clearing all persons who enter an HGC
are:
I . Make sure you have adequate senior personnel trained at Saint
Hill; and
2. Make all HGC auditors excellent Class 11 auditors in practice,
not just in theory, with emphasis on 100% accuracy in reading meters.
If you will do these two things, you will maintain excellence of
auditing and be able to clear people in an HGC.
In training a Class 11 auditor, while not skimping other necessities,
concentrate hard on the skill of staff auditors in reading E-Meters. Note
the drill in E-Meter Essentials and make them do it. Devise means of
getting a staff auditor to recognize all the various phenomena of needle
action instantly.
I will try to make some 8mm sound films for you on this. But don't
wait for them,
I have a great certainty on what even the early steps of 3D can do for
a case. But they are all assessment steps. They can be done in error only
where the auditor cannot, or does not, read an E-Meter. If they are done in
error, you'll have endless grief, for an error in 3D is comparable to
exploding a mine. It's ghastly.
Your pcs must be able to attain clear and stay clear. The Central Org
in South Africa, with all the clearing, failed to maintain sufficiently
high HGC standards and flubbed on a few cases and is now almost broke. So
clearing can occur, but if unstable clearing occurs or errors are made, all
hell breaks loose.
Right now the biggest available wins from HGC auditors consist of Sec
Checking
with no flubs.
If your pcs are being Sec Checked even on just Sec Check Forms 3, 4
and 6, you should be getting enormous wins on all cases.
If you're not getting those wins, then the staff auditors can't or
don't read E-Meters. That's your gross auditing error.
A Problems Intensive requires skill in assessing and Sec Checking.
Once more if
539
you're not getting wild wins on this, your staff auditors cannot or do
not read E-Meters well or consistently.
Doing these items, See Checking and Problems Intensives as per HCO
Bulletin of November 9, 1961, your staff auditors will achieve a high
enough accuracy on the E-Meter to do Routine 31) easily.
If 3D is done wrong, it is because the E-Meter was read wrong or not
read. If 31) is done wrong, you'll have a disaster that isn't limited to
just one case.
So be safe. Get your staff auditors able to do Sec Cheeks and Problems
Intensives and win with them. If they don't get wins with these, they're
not reading the meter right. The wins are there to be had if the auditor
can and does run a session and read a meter. If you're not already getting
uniform case wins on Sec Checking and Problems Intensives, the meter isn't
being read. It's that simple.
If an auditor cannot win steadily and well with Class II skills, never
trust that auditor with 3D.
The hidden factor that the D of T and D of P don't see is the missed
meter reaction. That's where any case trouble is. So work on it, please. I
don't care what lengths you go to to be comfortable that when the needle
reacts the auditor saw it and knew what it was.
In running any part of an org, if you can lick this, you can clear. If
you don't lick this, you will have endless trouble with cases and
procurement.
We can get greater gains with Class II skills than were ever before
attainable by earlier processes IF the auditor is reading the meter all the
time.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ese.rd
540
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 NOVEMBER 1961
Sthil
Franchise
CenOCon
BPI
CLASS OF AUDITORS
(Adds to HCO Pol Ltr of Sept 29, 196 1 -HGC Allowed Processes)
All auditors shall be considered Class I until validated Class II by a
Saint Hill Graduate or a Central Organization or at Saint Hill.
Classification as Class 11 may not be awarded by any class. It may be
attained only by severe practical demonstration, and oral examination by an
HCO Secretary or an appointee of HCO.
Class II auditors trained by anyone may not have pay status as Class
II in a Central Organization until given a complete examination after going
on staff by the HCO Area Secretary, regardless of any earlier examination.
The only exception is a Saint Hill Graduate who has been specifically
examined and specifically designated as Class Il by HCO examiners at Saint
Hill.
No auditor may be designated as or draw pay in a Central Organization
as a Class III auditor unless first designated Class 11 and thereafter
passing all examinations for Class III under the tutelage of a Saint Hill
Graduate and operating as a Class III auditor. A Class III auditor must
have successfully and correctly assessed and run preclears. Class III
auditors must be examined and their preclears examined by HCO before the
award of Class III is given.
A Class 11 auditor may assess and run advanced procedures only under
the close personal supervision of a Saint Hill Graduate, and not by mail,
telegrams or long distance telephone, but personally.
At Saint Hill all enrollees will be trained up to and examined as
Class II auditors on arrival, regardless of any earlier training by anyone
or any organization. No assessment or advanced procedures may be run by the
Saint Hill trainee before Class 11 classification is awarded -and only then
under the closest supervision. When examined for Class II the passing grade
is perfect.
(It follows that persons earlier classified as Class 11 will be able
to reach Class Il much more rapidly at Saint Hill. It also follows that a
field classification as Class 11 may be able to reach Class II more rapidly
in a Central Organization. But prior classification has no bearing on the
Saint Hill Course and field classification has no bearing on Central
Organization or City Office classification.)
Unauthorized Processes
Any auditor found using Class III skills in violation of the above
shall be subject to suspension of certificate and, if continuing in fault,
subject to public warning and revocation of all certificates and awards.
Serious damage can be done to Scientology and preclears by
unauthorized use of Routine 3, 3A and 3D.
While no penalty attaches to a Class I auditor trying to security
check and running
541
problems intensives, he or she should clearly understand that all pc
upset in their area is traceable to inexpert handling of security checks.
Class I auditors are free to handle and use any procedure earlier than
security checking (or October 1, 1960) except 'Step 6' and Creative
Processes.
Class I auditors are urged to obtain Class 11 classification as soon
as possible in order to increase their results and minimize area
disturbance. Good use of Class 11 skills gives wins. Use by persons not yet
classified gives loses. Any inexpert use of Class III skills can be ruinous
by actual test. We have, in Class III skills, for the first time violated
the maxim that any auditing is better than no auditing. This is still true
of processes prior to October 1, 1960. With clearing at speed has come
liability of misuse. If we're going to have clears, we must have accurate
Class III auditors.
Appended to these policies it is understood that Class 11 and Class
III auditing will be done only on British Mark IV E-Meters or as improved.
The discovery that 1958-59-60 and 61 American meters are wholly unsuitable
for clearing and that sq,,,irrel meters are even less useful, makes it
mandatory upon us, in order to guarantee any result to insist upon the use
only of meters I have supervised in construction and which have been tested
after manufacture by HCO WW. The only American meter suitable for clearing
was the 1957 blue meter I supervised. Unknown to me the pattern was
thereafter altered. The only suitable UK meters prior to the Mark IV were
the 'Green and Gold' ACC Meter actually used on that London ACC, the Mark
1, the Mark 11, and the Mark III. I cannot guarantee any meter I did not
check on. This is not a commercial statement. It is a vital fact in
clearing. Therefore Class 11 and III auditors may not be classified as such
unless they own or are issued a British Mark IV (or improved) E-Meter
checked out by HCO WW.
These policies are vital and are binding on receipt.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:esc.cden
542
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 DECEMBER 1961
HCO Secs
Org Secs
Ds of P
Tech Depts
HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
Directors of Processing are asked to note, and bring VERY strongly to
the notice of Staff Auditors, that the use of 'unknown', 'not know',
'forgotten', 'hidden' etc, is now forbidden under ALL circumstances.
Instead, for Processing Checks, use varied questions in an impasse;
for PTPs find the Prior Confusion and use "What did you do wrong in that
time of confusion" and "What did you withhold in that time of confusion"-
each question cleared separately (as in a Processing Check).
For chronic PTPs, use the Prior Confusion in the same way in a
Problems Intensive.
Also, please note that Routine la is not to be used: run a Problems
Intensive instead. NB: In a Problems Intensive DO NOT use sec-check-type
questions on specific terminals. Keep the questions general, e.g., "What
did you do wrong?", NOT "What did you do to Aunt Bessie?".
Issued by HCO Technical Secretary WW for
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ew.cden
543
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JANUARY 1962
HCOSecs Assoc Secs Lis of P
REPORTS FROM HGCs
Effective immediately, HGCs are required to adopt this Policy
regarding weekly reports to HCO Technical Secretary WW at Saint Hill.
Each Wednesday (at latest) please send a package consisting of-fn this
order:-
1 . A summary report on all the previous week's auditing by the
Director of Processing-on a form to be mimeoed on white foolscap flimsy
paper; (the exact format of this form is given at the end of this Policy
Letter).
2. All reports on Staff Auditing.
3. All reports on Public Auditing.
The report on each individual Pc is to be made up of-and in this exact
order:-
(a) An accurate copy of the Pc's APA/OCA/SAPA Profile showing
'before and after' graphs.
(b) 'Before and after Intensive' D of P checks.
(c) '0 & P' Forms, where a Problems Intensive has been given.
(d) The pre-processing Sec-Check and any completed Ist Processing
Check (HCO Form 3).
(e) The Auditor's Reports on EVERY session (NOT INFERIOR CARBON
COPIES), with the latest report Ist, and the preceding reports appearing in
reverse consecutive order below this so that the earliest session-report is
last in the package.
NB: American Orgs: Please staple the APA Profile-sheet by its top left
corner to the top left corner of the rest of the package; for all other
orgs, the OCA/SAPA profile sheet is to be stapled by its LOWER LEFT corner
to the top left corner of the package.
EVERY Profile-sheet must be marked VERY clearly 'STAFF' or 'PUBLIC' as
the case may be, AND with the location of the HGC.
All particulars must be filled out on EVERY Profile-sheet.
All reports must be on flimsy white paper-to take up less room in our
files-and to save you postage.
When Remimeoing D of P's report extend it to a full foolscap page omitting
everything marked with an asterisk.* (Extend the report, that is, by using
the space to take particulars of 1 or 2 more Pcs.)
544
(Foolscap)*
DIRECTOR OF PROCESSING WEEKLY REPORT
HGC (location)*
WEEK ENDING
TOTAL NUMBER OF PCs AUDITED THIS WEEK
NUMBER OF STAFF AUDITED THIS WEEK
NUMBER OF PUBLIC AUDITED THIS WEEK
LISTPCs: (STATE IF STAFF OR PUBLIC AFTER NAME)
1. PC's NAME -AGE-SEX RUN ON
(Block letters) (*eg Routine 1, Probs Int)
PROGRESS
AUDITOR-AUDITOR'S STATUS - CLASS
(*eg reg. staff, casual, etc)
2. PC's NAME AGE-SEX-RUNON
PROGRESS
AUDITOR-AUDITOR'S STATUS - CLASS-
3. PC's NAME AGE- SEX - RUN ON
PROGRESS
AUDITOR -AUDITOR'S STATUS - CLASS
4. PC's NAME -AGE-SEX-RUNON
PROGRESS
AUDITOR - AUDITOR'S STATUS CLASS
5. PC's NAME -AGE-SEX-RUNON
PROGRESS
AUDITOR-AUDITOR'S STATUS - CLASS-
6. PC'sNAME -AGE-SEX-RUN ON-
PROGRESS
AUDITOR- AUDITOR'S STATUS- CLASS
(If there is not room for ail your pcs on this form, use another one)
D of P COMMENTS
DATE SIGNED _D of P
*LRH:EW:esc.rd
Copyright Q 1962 *Issued by: HCO Technical Secretary WW
for
545
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Gen Non
Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JANUARY 1962
Qual Hats Reissued on 7 June 1967
Tech Hats
Level VI Students
& Above RESPONSIBILITY AGAIN
The common denominator of the Goals Problem Mass is "No
Responsibility". This is the end product that continues any circuit or
valence.
This is a deterioration of Pan Determinism over a game into "No
responsibility" as follows:
No Previous or Current Contact - No responsibility or liability.
Pan Determinism - Full responsibility for both sides of game.
Other Determinism - No responsibility for other side of game.
Self Determinism - Full responsibility for self, no,responsibility
for other
side of game.
Valence (Circuit) - No responsibility for the game, for
either side of the
game or for a former self
The Goals Problem Mass is made up of past selves or "valences", each
one grouped and more or less in a group.
Therefore, the characteristic of the part (the valence) is the
characteristic of the whole, the collection of valences known as the Goals
Problem Mass.
The way a being is hung with persistent masses is the mechanism of
getting him to believe certain things are undesirable. These, he cannot
then have. He can only combat or ignore them. Either way, they are not as-
ised. Thus they persist.
Only undesirable characteristics tend to persist. Therefore the least
desirable valences or traits of valences persist.
The way not to have is to ignore or combat or withdraw from. These
three, ignoring or combatting or withdrawing sum up to no having. They also
sum up to no responsibility for such things.
Thus we can define responsibility as the concept of being able to care
for, to reach or to be. To be responsible for something one does not
actually have to care for it, or reach it or be it. One only needs to
believe or know that he has the ability to care for it, reach it or be it.
"Care for it" is a broader concept than but similar to start, change or
stop it. It includes guard it, help it, like it, be interested in it, etc.
When one has done these things, and then had failures through overts
and withholds, one cycles down through compulsive and obsessive care, reach
and be and inverts to withdraw from, combat or ignore.
Along with ignore goes forgetting or occlusion. Thus a person has
occlusion on past valences and past lives go out of sight. These return to
memory only when one has regained the concept that they can be reached, or
that one dares be them again or that one can care for them.
Herein is the cause and remedy of whole track occlusion.
There are many uses of these principles.
See Checking gets off the overts and withholds and opens the gates.
All chronic somatics and behavior patterns are contained in valences
and are not traceable to the current life time since one can reach present
life, is caring for present life and is being present life, so present life
is an area of responsibility.
All real difficulty stems from no responsibility.
However, one can use these principles even on present life with
considerable gain.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:sf.jp.cden Founder
546
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JANUARY 1962
HCO Sets
Assoc Secs
Tech Depts
URGENT
SECURITY CHECKS
Effective immediately, all Security Security Checks, i.e. HCO WW Forms
5A, 7A and 7B etc, when being used specifically as Security Checks, must be
done in Model Session form.
This is because it has been found that bad security risks have been
passed on these forms due to wildly out rudiments nulling the needle.
Conversely, good staff members have been flunked because questions read on
ARC Breaks etc, rather than on the
question being asked.
Issued by: Mike Rigby
Senior Instructor
LRH:jw.pp.kd Saint Hill Special
Briefing Course
for
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 MAY 1962
Central Orgs
Tech Depts
RUDIMENTS CHECKS
It has been discovered that Rudiment Checking has become a matter of
form. If an auditor found a rudiment in after a checker had found it out,
it was assumed that either the trouble had blown or that the checker was
wrong. They overlooked the possibility that the checker had found a mutual
rudiment out.
If therefore an auditor finds a rudiment "in" that the checker had
found "out" he should ask a simple question on the lines of "What did you
think of when the rudiment checker asked this question (or checked. this
rudiment)?"
Auditors should regard a rudiments check as a help, not as an attempt
to put
them in the wrong.
Issued by: Reg Sharpe
Course Supervisor
LRH:cw.cden Saint Hill Special
Copyright (D 1962 Briefing Course
for
L. RON HUBBARD
547
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I JUNE 1962
Sthil Form
All Academies
All HGCs AUDITING
RUDIMENTS CHECK SHEET
(This is the only Rudiments Check Sheet
to be used in straightening up HGC pcs
or cancelling sessions on Students.)
The following cheek sheet should be used by Ds of P, supervisors and
instructors seeking to establish whether or not the, HGC or student auditor
got the rudiments in during a session.
This check is not done in Model Session. Only the R factor is put in
and "End of Cheek" is given at end.
Only a British Mark IV Meter is used. Sensitivity is at 16 throughout
check.
Note:
During the first two sessions of a pc by that auditor randomity can be
expected And the auditor should not be rebuked, as it sometimes takes two
or three sessions for the rudiments to be put in solidly for an auditor and
for a pc's needle to get smooth enough to be read by a checker.
Note:
See HCO Bulletin of May 25. 1962 on needle reading.
The checker should carefully repeat at least once any rudiment on
which he or she gets a read, stressing "By the end of your last session".
And at first even ask the pc when that was.
As auditing continues for several sessions, if the auditor is putting
rudiments in every session, the needle will smooth out and checks become
highly accurate. If this does not take place, then the rudiments are not
ever being put in by the auditor.
RUDIMENTS CHECK
(Repeat the leading line before each numbered item.
Mark those that give an instant read [HCO B May 25, 19621
By the end of your last session had your auditor failed to find and
clear
1. A half truth?
2. An untruth?
3. An effort by you to impress him (her)?
4. An effort by you to influence the E-Meter?
5. Something you were withholdinO.
6. An unanswered question?
7. An unanswered command?
8. An unwillingness to talk to him (her)?
9. A problem?
10. An unwillingness to be audited in that room?
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd
548
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER.OF 2 JULY 1962
CenOCon
URGENT
RUDIMENTS POLICY
On all WC, staff and Academy pcs use only Repetitive Rudiments as per
HCO Bulletin of July 2, 1962 and as outlined in that and future bulletins,
combined with Model Session HCO Bulletin June 23, 1962 and its future
changes.
It is forbidden to use any other rudiments approach than HCO, Bulletin
of July 2, 1962 in an organization and it is forbidden to use any other
session form or additional questions.
Lack of Scientology results has stemmed from out rudiments when
grosser errors were not present. This rudiments system and HCO Bulletin
June 23, 1962 (and as improved) Model Session, properly used, by auditors
who know how to read a meter (HCO Bulletin May 25, 1962) and who do not Q
and A (HCO Bulletin May 24, 1962) will produce comfortable, advancing pcs
and, with Routine 3GA, clears. I make no reservations on this fact.
It is incumbent on all Assn and Org Sees, HCO Continental Sees, HCO
Area Secs, Technical Directors, Ds of P and Ds of T to get this HCO Policy
Letter into full force at once in all organizational activities. With the
above the gTeatest stumbling blocks to clearing, given Prepchecking and
Routine 3GA, have been vigorously swept aside. Get this policy letter in
force!
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.oden
549
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, Fast Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 JULY 1962
Sthil Students
CenOCon
All Sthil Grads
URGENT
AUDITINGALLOWED
I want every auditor auditing to be perfect on a meter. To be
otherwise can be catastrophic.
By perfect is meant:
I Auditor never tries to clean a clean read;
2. Auditor never misses a read that is reacting.
One mistake on M.S. or TRs may not ruin a session. One mistake on a
meter read can ruin a session. That gives you the order of importance of
accurate never-miss meter reading.
All bad auditing results have now been traced to inaccuracy in meter
reading. Other aspects of a session should be perfect. But if the session,
even vaguely following a pattern session, comes to grief, IT IS ONLY METER
READING ACCURACY THAT IS AT FAULT.
I have carefully ferreted this fact out. There is only one constant
error in sessions that produce no results or poor results; inaccurate meter
reading. This is also true for student and veteran auditors alike.
When an auditor starts using unusual solutions, he or she was driven
to them by the usual solution not working. The usual solution always works
unless the meter needle reading is inaccurate.
If an auditor is using unusual solutions, then THAT AUDITOR'S METER
READING IS INACCURATE. Given this, consequent ARC breaks and failures drive
the auditor to unusual solutions.
A D of P who has to dish out unusual solutions has auditors who are
missing meter reads.
Meter reading must be perfect every session. What is perfect?
I . Never try to clean a read that is already clean.
2. Never miss an instant reaction of the needle.
If you try to clean a clean rudiment, the pc has the missed withhold
of nothingness. The auditor won't accept the origination or reply of
nothingness, This can cause a huge ARC break, worse than missing a
somethingness. A nothingness is closer to a thetan than somethingness.
If you miss an instant reaction you hang the pc with a missed withhold
and the results can be catastrophic.
550
If you fumble and have to ask two or thr ee times, the read damps out,
the meter can become inoperative on that pc for the session.
If you miss on one rudiment, the next even if really hot can seem to
be nul by reason of ARC break.
A meter goes nul on a gradient scale of misses by the auditor. The
more misses, the less the meter reads.
Meter perfection means only accurate reading of the needle on instant
reads. It is easily attained.
An auditor should never miss on a needle reaction. To do so is the
basis of all unsuccessful sessions. Whatever else was wrong. with the
session, it began with bad meter reading.
Other auditing actions are important andmust be done well. But they
can all be overthrown by one mistake in metering.
1 . Never clean a clean needle.
2. Never miss a read.
Unless metering perfection is attained by an auditor, he or she will
continue to have trouble with preclears.
The source of all upset is the missed withhold.
The most fruitful source of missed withholds is poor metering.
The worst TR 4 is failure to see that there is nothing there or
failing to find the something that is there on an E-Meter.
This is important: Field Auditors, Academies and HGCs are all being
deprived of the full benefit of processing results by the one read missed
out of the 200 that were not missed. It is that critical!
A good pro, by actual inspection, is at this moment missing about
eight or nine reads per session, calling one that is clean a read and
failing to note a read that read.
This is the 5 to I ratio noted between HGC auditing and my auditing.
They miss a few. I don't. If I don't miss meter reads, and don't have ARC
breaky pcs, why should you? With modern session pattern and processes well
learned, all you have to acquire is the ability to never miss on reading a
needle. If I'can do it you can.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden Copyright@ 1962
551
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 JULY 1962
Sthil Students
CenOCon
CLEARING-FREE NEEDLES
Any auditor running a Routine 3 process and obtaining a free needle on
an E-Meter should, on. the Saint Hill course, have an Instructor observe
and verify that condition and in a Central Organization should have it
observed by an HCO Area Secretary.
Any auditor obtaining a free needle on all lines continuously (the
state of a first goal clear) should, on the Saint Hill course, demonstrate
that condition to an Instructor and, in a Central Organization, to an HCO
Area Secretary.
An Instructor or HCO Area Secretary should make a statement on the
auditing report testifying to the fact and existence of the free needle.
In short, there are two stages of observation-the first free needle
obtained on one line and the state of continuous free needle on all lines.
No verbal statement by an auditor, not otherwise confirmed as above is
to be given credence or be used to establish the condition of a case.
The early observation on one line being difficult to maintain for
observation is not mandatory, but if not verified as above may not be
claimed.
The state of a "first goal clear" is established by:
I . A free needle on each line fisted from the goal.
2. No reaction of the goal on the meter after a final prepcheck on
that goal as per HCO Policy Letter 15 July 1962.
3. Tone Arm near Clear Read.
A free needle is not a stage 4 needle or an inverted stage 4. It is
floating and free.
In Routine 3GA we have actual, lasting clearing. It is accomplished by
expert and exact auditing. There is no reason to fake the condition or
rumour that someone is clear when he or she is not, or to tell someone he
or she is clear when they are not.
We are on solid ground with technology and procedure. Let's keep it
that way. The goal has been sought on Earth for 2,500 years. We have
achieved 8 first goal clears on the Saint Hill course in the last two
months. People, with reason, trust a clear. We have attained the state of
clear in Man. We must not upset that Trust.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.cden Copyright (D 1962
552
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 AUGUST 1962
CenOCon
CLEARING
Use of Saint Hill graduates in auditing should be limited to finding
goals only.
Regular Staff Auditors not trained at Saint Hill should do all the
Prepchecking and goals listing necessary to obtain a complete list, all
under the close supervision of a Saint Hill Graduate.
The Saint Hill Graduate should then nul the goals by the latest
current procedure and find the goal.
The goal found must be checked out by another Saint Hill Graduate
cleaning it up as needed with Mid Ruds and proving it out conclusively.
The Saint Hill Graduate should then prove out the four listing lines
so they can be seen to react on the meter like the goal and can be answered
by the pc.
The preclear should then be turned over to a regular staff auditor for
the listing of lines.
After 200 items have been listed on each list a Saint Hill Graduate
must ascertain that pain occurs on lines 1 and 3 and sensation on lines 2
and 4. Only then can listing continue.
The regular staff auditor must clean up the goal immediately after
beginning ruds in every listing session and must call for observation by a
Saint Hill Graduate of any free needle he declares.
This arrangement has the force of policy. No other auditing use of
Saint Hill Graduates may be made in an HGC except in demonstration.
All possible effort must be made to clear or advance toward clearing
every HGC preclear.
The HCO Bulletins of August 1, AD 12 and the four lectures and
demonstration tapes of the week ending August 11, AD 12, or as amended,
shall constitute 3GA practice on Central Organizations.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd Copyright (D 1962
553
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 AUGUST 1962
Central Orgs
Tech Depts
HOW TO WRITE AN AUDITOR'S REPORT
The following rundown, written by Phoebe Mauerer, Director of
Processing in Los Angeles, should be used by all auditors in writing their
auditors' reports.
1 . Reports are written in duplicate-i.e., one original, one carbon.
(Original is
sent to HCO WW, carbon is retained in local org files.)
2. Reports should be written clearly and legibly-in ink.
3. EACH REPORT SHEET should be filled in at top with:
(a) Preclear's name (full name)
(b) Auditor's name (full name)
(c) Date
(d) No of intensive hours scheduled (121/2-25-50, etc).
(c) Time length of session (or sessions) for that day. (Ex: 5 hrs 15
min.)
(f) Running total of scheduled hours completed to date.
4. LEFT HAND COLUMN should reflect exactly what was done by the
auditor
from beginning to end of session, as follows:
(a) Start of Session (with time, TA read and Sens read noted in
middle columns).
(b) Beginning Rudiments (with time, TA reads,and sens at which ruds
are run (16) in middle columns).
(c) Any specific rudiments which took some time to clear should be
written in under Beg Ruds (Ex: Withhold- cleared.)
(d) Process. (Name the process run and give the process commands in
full. If a Havingness Process, specify whi ch Havingness process was
run)with time, TA reads and sens at which process was run noted in middle
columns.
(e) Middle Ruds-with' time, TA reads and sens (16) noted in middle
columns.
(f) End Ruds-with time, TA reads and sens (16) noted in middle
columns. Again, note any rudiment which was difficult or required unusual
amount of time to clear.
(g) End of Session-with time, TA read and sens noted in middle
columns.
5. RIGHT HAND COLUMN should include:
(a) Session goals (each one numbered).
(b) Life& Livingness goals, specified as "L.L."
(c) Notations as to which session goals pc made.
(d) Notations as to other gains made in session.
(c) Notations as to PC's: attitude, emotional changes, physical
changes,
somatics, communication changes, cognitions. I`..
(f) Auditor comments or opinions- CLEARLY LABELLED AS SUCH.
554
In other words-each auditor's report should show at a glance exactly
what was done in the session AT ANY GIVEN TIME DURING THE SESSION.
TA reads and sens reads in middle column should correspond with
notations in left hand column as to what was being done in the session at
the time.
It is important that the length of time taken for Beginning, Middle
and End Ruds is clearly indicated-that the length of time any Havingness
Process was run is clearly indicated, or evident, from LEFT HAND COLUMN
notations corresponding with time, TA and sens reads in Middle Columns.
If for any reason a rudiment or Prepcheck question must be left
unflat, indicate clearly at end of report that it is UNFLAT-so that it may
be picked up in the next session.
Completed copies of auditor's reports for each week's intensive (25
hours) should be placed in a folder in the HGC AUDITOR REPORTS basket on
Friday night. They are then checked on Saturday, clipped to the pc's
beginning and end profile, and made up into the Director of Processing's
report to HCO World Wide on HGC preclearswhich report must be on the Org
See's desk by Monday noon, at the latest.
Each set of reports for a pc should be completed by the auditor as
follows before it is turned in Friday night to the HGC AUD REPORTS basket:
1 One set of originals, stapled together; one set of carbons,
stapled together.
2. Each set should read from the last day of the intensive back to
the beginning day of intensive-i.e., last report is on the top of the
bunch, first report is on the bottom.
3. If there is more than one sheet per day, number---the sheets and
staple them together, with the last numbered sheet on top. In other words,
the entire report reads from end to beginning throughout.
4. Original set and carbon set are identical, and should both be in
the folder which goes into the HGC AUD REPORTS basket on Friday.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
HCO Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by: Mary Sue Hubbard
LRH:dr.pm.eden
555
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
(Reissued from Washington D.C.)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I SEPTEMBER AD 12
CenOCon
BPI
URGENT
HEALING PROMOTION
One never achieves the high mark without finding something else on the
way up.
We have resolved healing.
Clearing, of course, resolves it, and we can clear. There is however a
lower level of resolution of sickness which any trained HCA/HPA can do
easily. Indeed it is about the easiest Auditing that any auditor ever did.
The entire technical run-down on it is contained in HCO Bulletin of July
30, 1962, "A Smooth HGC 25 Hour Intensive". I will be writing other
bulletins on this. When this was first released reports began to come in
from various quarters, that it was extremely successful. Further research
reveals that, with the new series of buttons (HCO Bulletin of August 30,
1962) this is an easily applied solution to chronic somatics. Without
exaggeration, this address to healing is the resolution of illness at lower
technical levels when properly done. Fifty to two-hundred hours can be
devoted to a case. using this, as. well as twenty-five. Do not confuse this
with the 1961 Problems Intensive. It has similarities but is new.
Central Organizations, Centres and Field Auditors should begin an
immediate programme on this. By healing you can graduate a pc up to
clearing interest and thus we have a lower level feeder line, capable of
successful accomplishment with normal HCA/HPA training.
1Iiis programme has the following thought major:
MAYBE YOU'RE NOT SICK
MAYBE YOU'RE JUST SUPPRESSED
SEE US AND FIND OUT
The phrasing can be more elegant, the message remains the same.
Legally, this permits us to heal without engaging in healing as, in
actual fact, we address no illnesses and indeed, deny people are ill-they
are only suppressed. Sickness occurs, we say, where suppression has been
too great.
The argument is-have you been sick? Did you go to doctors to be cured?
Did they cure it? Then (as they didn't) maybe you're not sick, maybe you're
just suppressed. So take some processing and find out.
And the person gets well! We use on him the exact button he came to us
on. So he's never dismayed at any change of tack on our part- Then we
interest him in clearing.
This, 1 am sure, is the long sought gradient. This, used right, will
build our new buildings, use our Academy Graduates and give us a chance to
train up auditors to clearing.
Therefore, 1 recommend you get versions of this on cards for students
and staff to hand out, retail or public literature handouts, and even get
ads as we can in papers and street bus ads. Many promotion ideas leap to
mind on this.
556
The legal argument is simple, we don't believe in sicknessl we do not
address illness, we do not diagnose, we believe that freeing the human
spirit also incidentally prevents sickness. We are doing prevention. We
also find people do not have to be crazy to be suppressed, that nearly
everybody is suppressed. We do send acutely ill people to doctors. We
advertise to cure no diseases! That last is important legally. We only
infer that people who think they are sick are really not, but only
suppressed.
Technically we train up our staffs to handle, in addition to other
skills, this new Problems Intensive and we use it in the HGC at all times
except when we are actually clearing-and we use CCHs only to prepare to
deliver a Problems Intensive.
The Problems Intensive can be many Intensives. I
This I recommend. Don't downgrade it. It's a suddenly emerged major
tool.
We have at this writing these valid processes:
CCHs - HCA/HPA
The New Problems Intensive - HCA/HPA
Goals Listing - HCA/HPA
Goals Finding - Sthil Grads
Item Listing - HCA/HPA
So let's use our reserves of good HCA's and HPA's and wipe out illness
while waiting for enough auditors to clear them all.
LRH:gl.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1962
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
(Re-issued from Washington DC)
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPTEMBER AD 12
Issue Ill
CenOCon
AUTHORIZED PROCESSES
Only the following processes are authorized for use on Staff Members
and on HGC Preclears:
Assists. Problems Intensives (Modem Version). Ordinary 3GA. 3GA by
Dynamic Assessment.
No other processes are to be used on Staff or HGC Preclears.
LRH:jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
557
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 SEPTEMBER 1962
Franchise CenOCon
VALID PROCESSES
(Changes all earlier Issues)
The following processes should be used by all Scientologists.
Class 1: Assists.
Class 1: CCHs, Op Pro by Dup and SCS.
Class 1: ARC Straight Wire.
Class II: Problems Intensives (Modern).
Class 11: Prepchecking Auditing, goals, etc.
Class II: Goals Listing.
Class III: 3GA Ordinary.
Class IV: 3GA by Dynamic Assessment.
Class II: Items Listing.
Classes 11, 111 and IV: Tiger and Big Tiger Drills on goals, items,
lines, single words, names, persons.
All except Assists, CCHs, Op Pro by Dup and SCS are done in Model
Session.
If a process is not mentioned above, do not use it.
NOTE: Any of the above Processes, except 3GA ordinary goals finding
and 3GA Dynamic Assessment may be done in Co-audits under direct
supervision of classed auditors.
For the greatest gain achievable by an auditor in his class, use the
above. An auditor attempting processes above his class will have failures
and spoiled cases.
Use of processes above Classification can result in cancellation of
certificates.
We can clear Earth. Why spoil cases in the process?
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden Copyright Q 1962
558
HUBBARD COMMUNICATION
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstea
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 OCT
CenOCon
Sthil Students
Registrars
Ds of P
Saint Hill Grads
HCO Secs
Assn & Org Sees IMPORTANT
HGC CLEARING
The plan of HGC Clearing is simple and direct but unless it is
scrupulously followed, it will cause upset and dissatisfaction.
If a Central Org is not clearing the public, the public will be upset
with it. This is the simple matter of the penalty of not-auditing.
You can make lots of Clears on the staff or in special cases but if
you do not do routine clearing in an HGC you will continue to have trouble.
As only recent Saint Hill Graduates are qualified to find goals-in
actual fact, they are the only ones who safely can-the backbone of an HGC
is a Saint Hill Graduate.
No Saint Hill graduates can be D of P or D of T at this time, and may
be Technical Directors or Association or Organization Secretaries only with
my specific permission. This will hold true until the scarcity is solved.
The primary appointment of a Saint Hill Graduate in an Organization is
"Goal Finde?' in the HGC. When enough exist in an organization to fill the
bare needs of the HGC, then a Saint Hill Graduate will be appointed Staff
Staff Auditor as per Staff Clearing Programme HCO POLICY LETTER OF
September 10, 1962.
The HGC system is therefore as follows:
HPA or HCA Staff Auditors do the following:
1. Handle any CCH case.
2. Give Problems Intensives.
3. Give the "In Auditing" and "On GoaW' and past goals Goals
Prepcheck (TV Demo tape 3 October 1962 and other lectures of the Saint Hill
Special Briefing Course). This includes all old goals that were found or
went out hard.
4. Do the required 850 goals list.
5. List goals to clear.
At this point, unless the goal was found in (3) above [not (4) above],
tile HPA/HCA staff auditor turns the pc over to the Goal Finder. This can
happen at any time that the Goal Finder has time available.
Once the pc is turned over to the Goal Finder he or she receives no
further auditing from other staff auditors, only the Goal Finder. The Goal
Finder takes the new pc the moment the last pc's goal was found.
There is no extra charge for the Goal Finder's Auditing and the
auditing time of a Saint Hill Graduate may not be sold as such by an HGC.
The Goal Finder's Units may be high. The Goal Finder may not take private
pcs on his or her own. There may be no part time HGC Goal Finders. Any
Sthil Graduates willing to work part time to help the organization should
be assigned to the Staff training Programme or the Academy to heighten the
level of technology. An exception is the Auditing of Staff members,
559
particularly the Organization or Association Secretary. Part Time
Saint Hill Graduates may not be used in the HGC.
FEES
A Central Organization or City Office does not sell auditing hours by
the hour ever. It sells (1) Clearing (2) De-Suppression (3) Longevity. It
sells these by Intensives as always. It cannot sell "Ten Hours from a Saint
Hill Graduate" or charge fees "for special auditing by a Saint Hill
Graduate".
Goals finding by an HGC is only undertaken as a part of the clearing
assembly line. One cannot come into an HGC just to have a goal found or
checked and get other auditing elsewhere. The practice would be very
pernicious and result in few clears and many wrecked cases.
A Saint Hill Graduate's Auditing time is available in the HGC only if
the pc signs the Clearing Contract ("We take Full Responsibility for
Clearing you"). Then the person who signed the contract is put on the
assembly line for clearing. This policy is not to be varied in any way.
Casual pcs coming in for intensives who do not sign the Clearing
Contract must sign up for Intensives as always.
All former "Estimate of number of hours" procedures are now abandoned
due to effectiveness of pulling missed W/Hs and a modern Problems
Intensive.
A pc signing up for health reasons is just given a routine Missed W/H
cheek and a Problems Intensive. The same is done for Geriatric Cases
(longevity of life).
So a pc signs up in the HGC either for Clearing and is put on the
Assembly Line, or for Intensives and is given Missed Withholds and a
Problems Intensive by an HPA/HCA and is made satisfied by good technical
application in either case.
Single hours of auditing may not be sold by a Central Organization,
City Office or District Office "to see how it goes". It's Intensives or
nothing.
CLEARING ASSEMBLY LINE
Clearing is sold by Intensives, purchased when auditing is available.
A careful log of time is kept. This is TIME IN THE HGC, not time for this
or that.
The pc buys one or more intensives and is handed over to the D of P.
The D of P thereafter tells the pc what the pc gets and assigns the pc
as necessary.
The line is regulated by the number of Goal Finders and the goal
finder time available.
Care is taken not to waste the pc's time. Depending on state of case
and lack of Goal Finder time available, the pc has the following, some of
it or all of it, done.
1. Missed withholds and hav process found.
2. Problems Intensive.
3. (For a long-time pc, Diancticist or Scientologist.) One or more
Intensives cleaning up "In Auditing" and "In Self Auditing", Prepchecks.
4. Do an 850 goals list.
5. (For pcs who have had former goals found, wrongly or otherwise.)
Prepcheek on the goal or goals, each one chronologically cared for (1st one
taken up first, etc.)
6. (For pcs who have been listed on goals or wrong goals and not to
clear.) Prepcheck on the Auditing of goals, listing, etc.
7. Tiger Drill on every button (on suppress has anything been
suppressed, etc).
8. Straighten up pc's HGC time with a Prepcheek.
560
All the above are HPA/HCA actions. They are not done by the Goal
Finder. If they have to be done, the Goal Finder turns the pc back to
HPA/HCAs.
The mom6nt a Goal Finder has completed finding and checking a goal or
finding one which must wait for checking by another Goal Finder, the goal
finder grabs another pc out of the HGC or has one called in. No Goal Finder
time is wasted. This may become the source of much sweat and urgency by HGC
Admin, but Goal Finder time must be salvaged by grabbing up pcs for him or
her.
The Goal Finder uses current methods to find the goal and check it
out.
The moment that action is done the pc is returned to an HPA/HCA for a
prepcheck on the goal and listing it.
The Goal Finder must review the lines and personally see the goal fire
before permitting it to be listed and must see the pc's folder routinely to
make sure it is going well.
All further Prepcheeking and listing is done by HPA/HCAs.
The freeness of needle is checked by the D of P.
The goal is fully Tiger Drilled and Prepchecked after the needle goes
free on all lilies.
This is the Assembly Line for Clearing. The Goal Finder is on no other
line, does no other auditing. The only way the pc can be on this line is by
signing a clearing contract.
AUDITOR'S REPORTS
All auditor's reports are reviewed by the. Auditing Supervisor and in
them such comments must be made as to guide the judgment of the auditor or
remedy his or her misconceptions about auditing.
Auditor's reports are written in Session not afterwards from a
notebook. They must be placed in the Auditing Supervisor's basket 15
minutes after the session's end. The report is always carried in the pc's
folder and is not handled separately.
SUMMARY
We are making auditors. We normally make good ones. While Theory and
Practical are the backbone of the course, only in demonstrated good
auditing can we be sure of oul: auditors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.cden Copyright (D 1962
561
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 OCTOBER 1962
CenOCon
AUDITING HOURS LIMITED
A Goal Finder in the HGC may audit no more than SY2 routine auditing
hours per day and 2 hours of check-outs or supervision. The Goal Finder's
routine auditing period should start later in the day than an HPA's, to
permit supervision of listing sessions, check-outs, etc.
An HPA/HCA in an HGC is limited to 371/2 auditing hours per week when
also doing a 121/2 hour week end pc, and to 25 hours per week when not
doing a week end pc. This time may be extended by the D of P only to make
the staff auditor clean up missed withholds or out rudiments left on the
pc.
These limits of auditing hours may not be extended even for extra pay.
The above applies only to HGC auditing and does not include staff
clearing or personal auditing of family.
PRIVATE PCS
No auditing for pay may now be undertaken by a staff member on a
private basis or, after the staff member leaves the Org, on students or pcs
within two years after the student or pc leaves the Academy or WC, on
penalty of loss of certificates. Note that this states staff member not
just an HGC auditor. The 8 hour rule is thereby cancelled. If a staff
member is given money for this it is to be paid in full into the
organization so that all may benefit.
The No Private Pcs for Staff Members we will call the "Johannesburg
Rule".
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.cden
562
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 JANUARY AD 13
Central Orgs
All HGCs
ROUTINE 2-12
When the six lectures of January 8, January 10 and January 15, AD13,
are in your hands and understood by staff auditors, the See EDs banning
Routine 2-12 on HGC pcs are at end.
These lectures alter to some extent the original format of Routines 2-
10 and 2-12 by removing arbitrary assessment lists and using only lists
completed by the pc.
All case repair data is also contained in these lectures.
They also give methods of avoiding endless lists, dead horses and
skunks.
HCO Bs will eventually condense all this material. However various
emergencies have inhibited the condensation and correction of the data
except in lecture form.
The above mentioned lectures take priority over and correct all
earlier bulletins and lectures, as they contain two months' experience in
observing errors being made in application by auditors, needful Indicators
and correction of points that were giving trouble.
Routine 2 is being in general very successful and has been getting
better case gains than any earlier process.
However, Routine 2 is complicated and exact and can worsen cases where
applied without complete knowledge. It is urgent that Objective One be
completed and that auditors who have no R2-12 seal have this pointed out to
them.
Squirrel versions should be mercilessly stamped on, as they cannot
compete with the thousands of hours of case experience which has gone into
creating Routine 2, and can bring disrepute to Scientology.
Accurate R2 repairs inaccurate R2 and is the only process that will
repair it.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dr.rd
563
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 FEBRUARY AD 13
CenOCon
URGENT-GOALSCHECK
Issue as Secretarial Executive Director:
All Goals and Reliable Items found on students staff or HGC pcs must
be checked out and seen to rocket read by a qualified executive or staff
Class IV before being run.
Only Routine 3M is permitted as a clearing procedure and exactly as
given in bulletins and tapes.
All clears must be checked out by a qualified executive before being
pronounced clear by the Organization or reported to me as such.
No auditor may be permitted to audit staff members or HGC pcs or
students who is not a regular staff member.
No auditor may use Routine three unless qualified by the Staff
Training Officer ot the Academy.
No auditors not staff members may frequent the premises of the
Organization for the purposes of obtaining private preclears.
LRH:jw.cden
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (D 1963
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I APRIL 1963
CenOCon
GOALS FINDING AND GOAL FINDERS
Since finding a right goal has become a matter of routine with recent
improved techniques, and a wrong goal found can be quickly detected before
serious damage is done to a case, any previous policies which granted a
bonus for finding a right goal, or which stipulated a penalty for finding;
a wrong goal, are cancelled herewith.
The title of "Goal Finder" is changed herewith to "A Clearing
Consultant".
LRH-.jw.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
564
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 APRIL AD 13
CenOCon Franchise
POLICY OF HGCs
Due to the workability of current technology, the following policy is
laid down for all Hubbard Guidance Centres throughout the world.
HGCs MAY ONLY CLEAR
HGCs WILL ENDEAVOUR TO CLEAR HGC PRECLEARS. NO OTHER
DIRECTION OF PROCESSING WILL BE UNDERTAKEN. ONLY PROCESSES
DIRECTLY CONTRIBUTING TO CLEARING THE HGC PC WILL BE USED IN AN
HGC.
This should be well disseminated as a policy and should be posted in
the registrar's office and on the public bulletin board.
The processes envisioned are:
1 . Preparatory processes to get the pc into session;
2. Prepchecking to obtain the pc's goal;
3. Obtaining a pc's goal;
4. Clearing a GPM;
5. Completing a GPM;
6. Obtaining new goals;
7. Clearing the new GPMs;
8. Completing the GPMs.
Secure and workable technology now exists to accomplish each one of
the above.
HGC Auditors must become expert at this technology and be well
supervised in its execution.
Any and all earlier Auditing any HGC pc has had is now contributive to
clearing, giving many Items on which goals can be found and smoothing the
way.
No registrar may promise or sell any particular technique. This is
entirely at the discretion of the HGC.
The prospective preclear must be warned as follows:
"Clearing is not easy to do and it is not easy on the preclear. We
must be sure that you realize this before we undertake your clearing."
Any and all requests for "healing treatment" must be refused. It
should be made very plain that HGCs only Clear,
Clearing has been described in various literatures and the prospective
preclear should be referred to these or told what clearing is.
The earliest Earth hopes for clearing were uttered about ten thousand
years ago. For the first time we are able to accomplish this for all cases
on whom a goal may be found.
All clearing is conditional to finding the pc's basic purpose. The
difficulties of this
should not be minimized.
I-RHAr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1963
565
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 MARCH 1964
CenOCon
HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
(Cancels previous issues on same subject)
Effective immediately, the following processes are allowed in the HGC
on any preclear, on the judgment of the Case Supervisor.
For psychosomatics: ARC '63.
For clearing: Recall a Terminal and Problems Intensive, alternated
with R-2H.
8-C and any older processes the auditor has confidence in are allowed.
Study and use the materials of the last six tapes of the Saint Hill
Briefing Course, but do not run or list any Goals or Items on any preclear.
Refresh the Case Supervisor on ARC Break assessments and have ARC
Breaks handled by the Case Supervisor. Clean up all the ARC Breaks in the
area.
Train your auditing staff on the above and on the new "Auditing by
Lists" process, when issued.
Campaign to the public: "Clean up your ARC Breaks with life."
The above, with clarifications, will remain standard HGC fare for
years, as it contains the cream of all processes for the last fourteen
years, and actual clearing.
Avoid advertising Itsa. Relegate it to Co-audits. Avoid R-2-12, R-3
and R-4 type processes. Advertise and deliver clearing as above.
Flatten, flatten all processes begun in the HGC.
Preclear Log Books will conform to this rundown.
L RON HUBBARD
LRH:gf.rd
566
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo
RAP Hats HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 AUGUST 1964
Tech Hats Reissued on 7 June 1967
Qual Hats
STAFF AUDITORS
All auditors working in an HGC in any Central Organization or City
Office must be full time staff members in the Day Org or full time in the
Evening and/or Weekend Foundation.
No auditor may be "on call" or "part time" in a Central Org or City
Office HGC. An auditor is either a staff auditor, working full time on
units, or he may not audit for the organization.
There will be no exceptions to this policy permitted.
Three organizations have at one time or another nearly gone extinct
because they employed outside auditors on an occasional or "consultant"
basis. They keep several auditors "on call" and when they have a pc for
them call them in. This measure is only an effort to preserve units. It is
foolish as it eventually destroys units.
At least three great evils result from "the consultant policy".
1. There is no way of setting up a staff training programme or a
staff auditing programme that includes such people.
2. Technical result suffers because the pc is not really given an
HGC auditor but someone who is not under direct control of the D of P.
3. HGC pcs often wander off from the HGC and turn up later in
somebody's practice-even though the org investment in procuring that pc was
great.
There are other lesser reasons. But there is no point in detailing
them.
Outside (non-staff) auditors have often been of great assistance to
orgs and it is regretted if this seems critical of them. Other outside
auditors, however, have not been.
The FIRST REASON AND LAST REASON FOR THE EXISTENCE OF A CENTRAL ORG OR
CITY OFFICE IS TO HOLD UP THE TECHNICAL STANDARD OF AN AREA.
That is POLICY ONE in every Central Org and City Office. I would never
have established them except that it became obvious that they were the only
way to hold up and maintain the technical standard of Dianetics and
Scientology.
I ran get data to them, supervise their auditing and training and act
to correct technical abuses. I cannot do this in areas where there are no
orgs that are in effect part of my office.
The moment an Org passes auditing and training to the field, the field
is holding
the standard and I can no longer directly maintain a high technical
standard in that area.
The final test is the actual experience. In an area where an org uses
the field on a casual labour basis to do its technical, I very soon begin
to receive nothing but entheta on my Standing Order j~ I lines (public comm
lines). The theta comms vanish. There's nothing but natter. So I look and I
find every time that the org responsible for that area has ceased to
deliver tech service through staff members, but is using a "consultant"
plan.
This "consultant plan" seems sound to orgs. In weeks when there are no
pcs they don't have to pay the auditors. Sounds good.
But it is in violation of Org Policy Number One. The org is only there
to hold a standard. When it passes that to the field, it isn't there at
all. And sure enough it rapidly starts to go broke.
There is another aspect to this. How about the field auditor who
depends on "an occasional pc in the HGC". It sounds good to be able to do
his own too. But actually he is often merely being denied his rightful job
as a staff auditor.
So there will be no more of this "consultant auditor" idea.
Hire only full time Auditors. And hire in high ratio to the number of
admin staff.
LRH:jw.jp.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
567
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 SEPTEMBER 1964
BPI
Remimeo
CLAY TABLE USE
Clay Table auditing is for use by Central Organizations, City Offices
and field auditors who have received training in it.
,Clay Table is for Levels III and IV. Clay Table Healing is Level III
and Clay Table Clearing is Level IV where the auditor is also trained to
handle ARC breaks.
Central Orgs are to use only on HGC pcs or in the staff co-audit but
may permit use by an auditor only where that auditor has been fully checked
out on its HCO Bulletins and is supervised.
Clay Table public use or use on public co-audits Or HAS courses will
bring about casualties.
These Clay Table processes are extremely powerful and therefore very
restimulative. To give lectures on them to uninformed persons may have
repercussions in their cases.
Clay Table is also deceptively simple. It appears so easy to read
about that one is likely to miss. It's simple but only if you consider
driving between two ravines at a hundred miles an hour is simple.
It looks easy until you run off the road by failing to locate the
steering wheel before you drive.
A Central Organization may teach Classification Courses at Level III
for Clay Table Healing as soon as it has Instructors trained in it at Saint
Hill. It may teach Classification Courses at Level IV in Clay Table
Clearing to students who took the Class III course.
Staffs may be trained and checked out in Clay Table work but
preferably by Saint Hill graduates.
There is no penalty attached to misusing Clay Table work except the
penalty of coping then with a messed up process and messed up pcs.
Used right Clay Table is the fastest thing we ever had. But Clay Table
Auditing isn't just fooling about with Clay. It's simple, powerful
technology and requires expert usage to produce results and protect pcs.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH..-jw.pm.oden Copyright Q 1964
568
I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Gen Non Rennmeo
Qual Div HATS HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 MAY 1965
Tech Div HATS Issue Il
Registrar HATS
ACCTS HATS REBATES
No rebate may be given any preclear for any reason on his or her
processing.
Some cases are more difficult than others and give auditors more
trouble.
A case can be sufficiently enturbulative that an auditor can be
diverted from his task and commit minor errors resulting in an apparent
loss of time.
The more resistive case also causes a D of P to fumble on occasion.
The auditors and case supervisors try their best and do the best
possible under the circumstances.
To claim a pc "lost time" in auditing because of an error in choosing
processes or having to reflatten one, is highly fallacious.
The usual pc does not lose such time under the same auditors and D of
Ps.
We do our job as best we possibly can and when we know more we do
more.
We are already the only agency anywhere that can increase IQ and
resolve human problems.
We handle a living thing-life.
We do our best.
Sometimes a pc throws us a curve with a rough case, bad between
session behaviour, roughing up auditors and D of Ps. It is natural that
goofs occur on such cases.
We retrain auditors who are routinely erring and we do all we can to
ensure good case gains. We don't permit squirreling. Our Ethics are
stronger than any other organization's.
Pes who claim "lost time" or ask for rebates of part of their auditing
time for any reason except no auditing whatever (meaning no session of any
kind, no auditor or pc in the room) should be turned over to Ethics. They
are rough cases and tend to be suppressive.
We are selling hours of auditing and what that is is for us to judge.
Further, no auditor may rebate any part of a pc's fee personally or be
made to rebate it, as to do so is to shatter any possibility of delivering
auditing at all.
Auditing is already the cheapest form of treatment there is. It is
cheaper without any argument in favour of time taken to get a result-that
is bonus. Medicos, surgeon~, psychiatrists, psycho-analysts charge the Moon
for nothing or even for damage. We are not in their line of business. But
fees can be compared. It is nothing for a psycho-analyst to charge �9,000
for a course of treatment! A US surgeon thinks nothing of a $5,000 bill.
The Mayo Clinic doesn't think twice to send a bill for S35,000 or more to
the widow of their patient.
The government pays in some countries. And that too is high.
By rights our minimum fee for a 25 Hour Intensive should be �250 or in
the US S820. If we only processed, we would have to charge that. It takes
several people to deliver real auditing to a preclear. The field auditor
usually goes broke even on high fees. He just doesn't pay out the salary
needed to give the pc proper service.
How much is a man's life worth to him? How much is it worth not to die
at all? I'm afraid it has no price tag.
We are selling actual salvage from Death itself.
Rebate. How silly. The person was lucky we were around at all and took
an interest. We don't have to do anything for anybody. Remember that. We
can lose interest in certain people, too, you know.
No org has to accept anyone it doesn't want to for training or
processing.
No Auditor has to accept a pc he doesn't honestly want to help.
No Supervisor has to train any student he doesn't want to train.
We sell pearls for pennies already.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.rd
Copyright (D 1965
569
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 MAY 1965
Rcrairneo Qual & Tech Divs
Sthil Cl V11 Course All HATS
Students
Sthil Staff HCO Div
Ethics HATS All HA TS
Star-Rated Check
PROCESSING
Since 1950 we have had an iron bound rule that we didn't leave pcs in
trouble just to end a session.
For fifteen years we have always continued a session that found the pc
in trouble and I myself have audited a pe for nine additional hours, all
night long in fact, just to get the pc through.
Newer auditors, not trained in the stern school of running engrams,
must learn this all over again.
It doesn't matter whether the auditor has had a policy on this or not-
one would think that common decency would be enough as to leave a pc in the
middle of a secondary or an engram and just coolly end the session is
pretty cruel. Some do it because they are startled or afraid and "Rabbit"
(run away by ending the session).
Auditors who end a process or change it when it has turned on a heavy
somatic are likewise ignorant.
WHAT TURNS IT ON WILL TURN IT OFF.
This is the oldest rule in auditing.
Of course people get into secondaries and engrams, go through
misernotion and heavy somatics. This happens because things are running
out. To end off a process or a session because of the clock is to ignore
the real purpose of auditing.
The oldest rules we have are
(a) GET THE PC THROUGH IT.
(b) WHAT TURNS IT ON WILL TURN IT OFF.
(c) THE WAY OUT IS THE WAY THROUGH.
These now are expressed as POLICY.
A falsified auditor's report is also subject to a Court of Ethics.
Any auditor violating this policy letter is liable to an immediate
Court of Ethics convened within 24 hours of the offence or as soon as is
urgently possible.
Auditing at all levels works well when it is done by the book.
The purpose of Ethics is to open the way for and get in Tech.
Then we can do our job.
THERE IS NO MODERN PROCESS THAT WILL NOT WORK WHEN EXACTLY APPLIED.
Therefore in the eyes of Ethics all auditing failures are Ethics
failures-PTS, Suppressive Persons as pes, or non-compliance with tech for
auditors.
And the first offence an auditor can commit is ceasing to audit when
he is most needed by his pc.
Hence it is the first most important consideration of Ethics to
prevent such occurrences.
Then we'll make happy pcs, Releases and Clears.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:wme.pm.cden Copyright @ 1965
570
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 JUNE 1965
ALL HGCs
ALL CASE CRACKING UNITS
Remimeo
Staff Auditor Hats
Interne Hats
Class VII Internes
FOLDERS, MARKING OF
No staff auditor or Interne may proceed with the next session on any
case unless the folder of the last consecutive auditing period has been
marked by the Case Supervisor or Director of Processing or the person in
normal charge of all cases.
Where two sessions occur in one day, these count as one session and
need only one summary report by the auditor for marking purposes.
LRH:mh.kd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright@ 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 JULY 1965
Remimeo
RELEASES
When any pc signed up and being audited on any 25 hour intensive
reaches the state of First Stage Release, the processing is immediately
ended (with a gentle That's It). The intensive is not completed. However,
as the goal of the processing has been achieved, the money of the balance
of the intensive is not refundable.
However, in celebration of the person having reached the State of
Release, the org may credit the person with that amount (of the unused
balance of the intensive) toward training. If no training is going to be
undertaken by the person, then, of course, there is no crediting. Training
should be heavily encouraged since that is the route to Cl VI and Clear and
it is not envisioned that there will not be plans on the part of the person
for training.
The fact that, in the case of Releasing the person before the
completion of the 25 hours, the money will not be refunded, due to the goal
of the processing having been achieved, should be added to the HGC
Contract.
LRH:mh.kd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright @ 1965
571
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo
Class V11 Auditors HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 JULY 1965
Class VII Internes
Tech Execs
HGC Auditors RELEASE POLICIES
Review Auditors
Qual Execs STARTING THE PC
Due to the vast number of Former Releases and the way the cheek cuts
can hold up case, NO PC WHO HAS BEEN AUDITED BEFORE MAY BE ACCEPTED FOR
PROCESSING (LOWER GRADE OR POWER) WHO HAS NOT BEEN CHECKED OUT FOR FORMER
RELEASE.
These check outs are done in Review by a Review Auditor. They consist
of doing well the Pol Ltr Form 26 June 1965.
The pc is then shifted to the HGC for a complete rehabilitation as per
HCO B 30 June 1965.
The HGC auditor must be good on a meter and know a clear condition on
a meter (floating needle) when he sees one. The meter TA should be anywhere
between 2 and 3 for either sex.
The HGC auditor is to get the meter to clear condition and then must
end off as per new Model Session at once and send the pc to Qual to be
Declared a Ist Stage Release or Ist Stage Released OT.
Great care must be taken by Qual personnel or the Examiner not to fool
about with the pc's folder or Review cheek cuts on a Declare as such can
key the Release back in again and ARC Break the pc by Invalidation.
The pc may only be audited further on Power Processes but the pc may
be trained and may audit others. Also ARC Breaks, PTPs and withholds may be
done on Former Releases but not by repetitive processes.
GRADE PROCESSING
For the purpose of re-establishing Former Releases earlier policy is
modified, permitting the pc to buy a minimum of 5 hours of processing which
includes the price of the Review, the time of the Review being deducted
from the 5 hours.
If the pc is raw meat, never before audited, the above formality of
Review is dispensed with by the Registrar in registering them and the rules
concerning intensives apply.
If the person is not found to have been &Former Release by Review,
whatever is found is handled by the HGC auditor in completing the 5 hours.
POWER PROCESSING
All the above except the 5 hour limit applies to Power Processing.,
The person is first checked out by Review, then sent to the HGC and
rehabilitation of any Former Release is declared when rehabilitated.
The preclear is then returned to the HGC with as small a loss of
scheduled auditing time as possible and is entered into Power Processing.
The auditing continues until the preclear is a Second Stage Release or
Second Stage Released OT.
ACTIONS TAKEN
RAW MEAT
Registrar establishes that the person has never been audited before
and signs the person up accordingly.
Person goes straight to HGC and is audited to Release.
The moment the auditor sees a Floating needle and a TA between 2 and
3, the auditor stops the session and sends the pc to the Examiner to
Declare.
If the pc looks good and feels okay the Examiner sends through to
Certs and Awards for Release award.
Any rebate from any intensive bought is credited to training for the
pc.
The above actions are covered in more detail in Body Routing Forms.
572
FORMERLY AUDITED PC
The Registrar, if the pe is asking for Former Release check (the
Registrar must not push it or bring it up but should try to sell a 25 hour
intensive), signs the person up for a 5 hour intensive (if the person does
not sign up for 25 hours).
The preclear is routed to Review for a Form 26 June 65.
The preclear is then routed to the HGC to complete the time signed up
in rehabilitation of Former Release.
If the person was not found by Review to have been a Former Release,
the HGC auditor starts the grade applicable to the pc-Level Zero in pcs who
have not had it completed on them.
Every effort must be made to sign the non-Former Release up for more
processing if not yet Released in the HGC.
Body Routing Forms will be issued to cover these routes.
FREE PASS
If the pc presents a letter from me for a Former Release check, the
check only is given in Review.
The person is not entitled to rehabilitation of the state in Review or
to HGC auditing by reason of a Free Pass.
If Former Release is found, the person is routed at once to the
Registrar for a sign up for 5 hours to get the state rehabilitated, the TA
down and needle floating.
The person may only be declared a Former Release by Certs and Awards
if the rehabilitation work is done.
There is no declaration of Release on a Free Pass to Review. The Free
Pass does not include it.
Any amount left to the nearest whole hour is applied to training.
If the needle floats during the Review free check out, the person is
routed to the Registrar for a 5 hour rehabilitation intensive and when the
rehabilitation is done every effort is made by the Registrar to sell
training-the only thing that will take the person to Clear. If the person
is an HCA and wants no more local training the Registrar may select the
person to Saint Hill as per the Field Staff Member Programme, the org;
being credited with the 10%.
SUMMARY
The Review auditor does the Form 26 June 65 only.
The preclear is rehabilitated in the HGC.
Free passes to Review checks open the door to a 5 hour rehabilitation
intensive that is then sold.
Reattainment of Release opens the door to selling training at once.
Raw meat is sold 25 hour intensives.
Examiners do not key in Releases by heavy handed examinations. They
look for good indicators. If these are present the rehabilitated Former
Release is passed through to Certs and Awards. If the person does not think
he or she is released, or bad indicators are in plain view, the Examiner
routes to Review.
In Power Processing all formerly audited people are begun by a Review
Check. Its cost is included in their intensives. On all persons found to be
Former Releases the first few hours of Power Processing are spent
rehabilitating the state of Ist Stage Release. The person is then sent by
the auditor for Declare? First Stage Release. Then Power Processing is
begun.
In Power Processing Raw Meat, pcs are just entered into Power
Processing without Review but with a pc Information Form done.
The pc Information sheet is also done on pcs returned from Review as
Former Releases.
Note: No testing is done now on any of these lines, being abolished.
This Pol Ltr supersedes or modifies any policy or SEC ED in conflict
with it. The
above are the correct actions.
LRH:ml.rd
Copyright @ 1965
L. RON HUBBARD
573
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 JULY 1965
Remimeo
Qual Div
Org Div
Tech Div
RELEASE CHECKS,
PROCEDURE FOR
(Modifies any earlier policy where in conflict)
For ANY Release check, free or otherwise the following procedure only
is followed. There may be no deviations.
RECEPTION
Pc asks reception for Former Release cheek.
REGISTRAR
Reception sends person to Registrar. Whether pc presents free letter
or not, Registrar says, "You may have the cheek out itself in the
Qualifications Division without charge. However, you will also want the
state returned to you if it is found and that is done in the HGC. You can
buy a 5 hour intensive in the HGC to get it done." Signs up pc as usual for
Rehabilitation Intensive at rates pc is entitled to (student, professional,
public).
If person says "maybe they won't find it", Registrar says, "Then
you'll have five hours of auditing to get closer to it." And signs up.
CASHIER
Cashier accepts payment. Gives pc Invoice. Sends pc to Dept 10.
TECH SERVICE
Tech Service checks pc into HGC and routes pc to Interview-Invoice
Officer of Qual Div.
QUAL DIV
Interview-Invoice Qual Div makes No Charge Invoice. Sends pc to Review
auditor direct.
REVIEW AUDITOR
The Review Auditor puts pc on meter (no Itsa from pc, please) and
checks "Former Release" "Former Thetan Exterior" "Sudden Resurgence in
auditing or afterwards". Notes reads. Sends pc to Interview-Invoice to get
out of Qual.
Note that THE REVIEW AUDITOR DOES NOT DO FORM 26 JUNE 65 OR ENCOURAGE
PC TO ITSA.
This Review check takes under 5 minutes. There is NO attempt to
restore the pc's state of Release.
Only the note saying pc was or wasn't found reading on Former Release
is made or done.
574
The total allowed time in Qual is fifteen minutes. If Qual can't get
person invoiced, Reviewed and out in 15 minutes it isn't functioning af all
as a Division.
TECH SERVICE
Interview-Invoice of Qual routes pc to Tech Service.
HGC Adinin assigns an auditor and gets pc to session as soon as
possible.
AUDITING IN HGC
The Auditor takes Qual note and whether it says pc was or wasn't a
Release, does fully the following:
1 . Does the full Assessment Form of 26 June 65 designed for Review
(and being redesigned for HGC by changing captions).
This form is an assessment form. In HGC it is used as Auditing by
List. But if there is any read on ARC Break in Sessions, the Auditor does
List 1, Session ARC Breaks, as Auditing by List, cleaning each one he finds
BUT NOT CLEANING LATENTS OR CLEANS.
The Auditor completes the Form 26 June 65 and handles anything on it.
The Former Release question on Form 26 June 65 may prevent the Auditor
from going on as this is where pc's interest lies.
If pc very interested in this and it reads, the Auditor promptly
shifts to
2. HCO B 30 June 65 and rehabilitates any and all former release
moments found.
3. The Auditor's object is to obtain a floating needle. The moment
this is attained ANYWHERE IN THIS INTENSIVE the Auditor gives a soft
"That's W' and that's it.
4. The Auditor writes a chit to Qual, giving pc's name and
"Declare?"
5. Auditor routes pc to Tech Service.
TECH SERVICE
Tech Service routes the pe promptly to Qual with the folder (in the
hands of a Tech page).
QUAL
Interview-Invoice Qual checks pc in and routes to Examiner.
EXAMINER
Examiner looks at pc, notes note in folder from Auditor. If good
indicators in on pc, Examiner sends to Certs and Awards.
However if pc says he is not now a Release, examiner examines the pc's
Form 26 June and routes to Ethics if SP or PTS indicated, to Review if pc
needs smoothing out,
REVIEW
If Review has to smooth out, Review does so at charge. This charge can
be deducted from any remaining time pc had. If no time remained pc must
pay. Review does Form 26 June 1965 carefully.
575
EXAMINER
Examiner sends pc back to Tech Service if pc doesn't believe he was
Released.
TECH SERVICE
Tech Service routes to Registrar who sells pe more auditing.
ETHICS
If Examiner sent pc to Ethics, Ethics examines for SP or PTS and
handles accordingly.
HGC
If HGC gets the pc again, it is up to the Case Supervisor.
CERTS AND AWARDS
If the pc (as will be usual) has good indicators in, whether just in
from HGC or just back from second Review, the Examiners whisk the pc to
Certs and Awards.
Certs and Awards writes a Declared Ist Stage Release or Ist Stage
Released OT, writes the certificate letter, logs it and calls HCO.
HCO COURIER
An HCO Courier conies down from HCO to Certs and Awards.
Certs and Awards gives the Courier the papers and pin and the pc's
folder which it got from the Examiner.
If the pc is not paid up, the Courier takes the pc to Cashier, to pay
and leaves the pc.
The Courier then gets a signature and seal on the Declaration from
authorized HCO, personnel at once and rushes the declaration, pin and
folder to the Registrar (Dept 6).
The Courier has finished all required actions.
REGISTRAR
The Registrar at once accepts the paid invoice from the pc and hands
over the Declaration and pin and congratulates the pc.
The Registrar then sells the person training as the only road to
Clear.
PAID UP PC
The route of the Courier is varied for a paid up pc. The Courier drops
the person off in the Registrar waiting area, gets the signature and seal
and pops back with them.
If you don't have all these posts, if some are doubled, still the pc
has to go through all these points.
Body Routing Forms will cover this route of PC to Release
Rehabilitation.
You can go broke if you don't follow it. These lines must flow and
fast.
LRH:ml.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright @ 1965
576
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 NOVEMBER 1965
Remimeo Students SH & Academies All Auditors
AUDITING REPORTS
An auditing report is the report of a session given, written during
the session, on the session.
It is not a copy of the report of a session given. Or a report drawn
from notes taken on a session given.
Auditing reports and work sheets should be neat as possible under the
circumstances of a session.
They must contain pertinent data of the session given, i.e. BDs noted
TA and time notations etc. These should be entered on the worksheet at the
time they occur.
Later entries done to clarify bad writing where one was rushed or
where a shorthand was done that is not clear to the D of P or Examiner,
should be indicated as a later entry by using a different colored pen etc.
A made up report, or one done later to obtain neatness or completeness
by an auditor who failed to keep a good session report at the time of the
session, will be disqualified as evidence of auditor ability when presented
to the examiner and chitted by the D of P when turned in by an HGC auditor.
The whole idea of requiring an auditor report of a session is to have
a record of the session for the D of P or Examiner, upon which to
adjudicate what is going on with a PC. And a report done later is NOT a
report of the session given.
The Summary Report, done after the session should be a 15 minute or so
summary and should be done immediately after the session, not a day later,
and should be done as per policy on summary reports. A Summary cannot be
substituted for the actual auditing report.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ep.rd Copyright @ 1965
577
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 DECEMBER 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo
PTS AUDITING AND ROUTING
A PTS CANNOT BE AUDITED OR TRAINED UNTIL THE PTS SITUATION IS HANDLED.
The handling of PTS cases will remain with Ethics. Ethics may do a
casual location of SPs or may order a Stabilization Intensive in the HGC.
(See below.)
SEARCH AND DISCOVERY
In cases where a handle or disconnect does not resolve the PTS
situation, or in auditing a preclear to maintain stability of Release
Levels, the action follows Search and Discovery technology.
This will be called a Stabilization Intensive and may be ordered by
Ethics in severe cases or may be sold by the Registrar. This intensive may
be sold only as a five hour package, continued in 5 hour minimum amounts,
delivered by the HGC as a special action and sold for S100.00 or its
Sterling equivalent. It will be done in the HGC, and may not be done as
part of Power Processing.
A Stabilization Intensive may not be concluded, whether bought
casually to assist reaching more Release Grades faster or ordered by Ethics
without the Ethics Officer passing upon the Suppressive Person or Group
located as being correct.
If Ethics declares the Suppressive Person or Group is incorrect, the
preclear must be sent to Review, not back to the HGC, and a more basic
(earlier) Suppressive or Group found, with Ethics passing on the final
result.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden Copyright Q 1965
578
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 OCTOBER AD 16
Gen Non
Remirneo
Applies to
Saint Hill
SH STAFF AUDITOR'S PURPOSE
TO HELP RON AUDIT SAINT HILL
PRECLEARS PRECISELY TO RELEASE GRADES
SH Staff Auditor's Code
1. Follow the Auditor's Code.
2. Don't commit the 5 GAEs.
3. Give no late or premature acks or encouragements.
4. Deliver crisp auditing commands.
5. Use precise, swift auditing command duplication.
6. Precisely start and stop sessions.
7. Take no breaks.
8. Use excellent auditor deportment, very model.
9. Keep the battery of your E-Meter charged and check it before each
session.
10. Be totally honest with TA.
11. Precisely keep your Auditor Report Form.
12. Write legibly.
13. Report everything that happens in a session.
14. Use only Saint Hill Model Session.
15. Use only Saint Hill auditing style.
16. Get enough sleep before an auditing day.
17. Eat well and don't audit when hungry.
18. Dress well (remember we issue clothes).
19. Refuse to audit a pc you detest or dislike.
20. Never blow a session.
21. Keep calm and neverblow up ata pc.
22. Never audit a process beyond a floating needle.
23. Follow auditing instructions exactly without any worry about
consequences.
24. Never apologize for having to carry out auditing instructions.
25. Never sympathize, never agree or disagree with the "bad
treatment" a student or pc has received to the student or pc.
26. Don't Q and A.
27. Make certain pc is on time for session.
29. Do not audit a pc who has not slept.
29. Do not audit a pc who has not eaten.
30. Do not audit a pc who is acutely ill.
3 1. Do not enturbulate students by detailing to them higher level
processes, thus making them unhappy with what they are doing and achieving.
579
32. Do not overwhelm students and other pcs with your ability or
position-do what I do and just be pleasant to them.
33. Don't try to run a Level V course in your lodgings, in cars or
coffee shops.
34. Don't try to instruct students or the Course Supervisors will be
unhappy with you.
35. Insist students hold to their own level and classification
skills in their own auditing and not try to up-grade themselves by using
your processes.
36. Don't audit Power Processes or assists outside your auditing
room or on East Grinstead people-make them come to Saint Hill.
37. Be a credit to Scientology and Saint Hill.
38. Obtain results.
LRH:lb-r.rd L, RON HUBBARD
Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 APRIL 1970
Issue 11
Remimeo
All Auditors
All Students
Level 0 Checksheet
AN AUDITOR AND "THE MIND'S PROTECTION"
No Auditor should audit with the fear that he will do some irreparable
damage if he makes an error.
"Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health" provides the answer
to the question, "What happens if I make a mistake?"
The following extracts are from "Dianetics: The Modern Science of
Mental Health", Book 3, Chapter 1, "The Mind's Protection":
"The mind is a self protecting mechanism. Short of the use of drugs as
in narco-synthesis, shock, hypnotism or surgery, no mistake can be made by
an Auditor which cannot be remedied either by himself or by another
Auditor."
"Any case, no matter how serious, no matter how unskilled the auditor,
is better opened than left closed."
LRH:nt.ei.rd L RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1970
580
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH
RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 MARCH 1971
Remimeo
CIS Series 25
THE FANTASTIC NEW HGC LINE
(A marvelous new CIS Auditor line has just
been piloted in for HGCs.)
In the new CIS line the Auditor, in his Admin time at the end of the
day, or when he has no preclears, does Folder Error Summaries or Progress
and Advance programs for his pcs and does the CIS form for the Tech CIS as
well as adds the day's process and the length of the session and amount of
Admin time on that folder to the inside front cover of the folder, with the
process run and result.
If his programs and C/Ses are acceptable to the Tech CIS, the Auditor
gets full Well Done Auditing Hour credit on his stat.
The Auditor logs his sessions for the day in the general HGC Auditor's
log and his Admin time is also logged.
This Admin time is subtracted from the bought hours of the pe where
auditing is sold by the hour.
Where Auditors are so engaged and the new folder routing line is in
use, this CIS form is used:
Full blank page.
PC's Name (Red) Date
Auditor's Name (Red) Class of Auditor required next sess.
(Session Grade) left blank
Auditor's comment (Red) or think about the case if he wishes.
The next CIS
I Blue
2. Blue
3. Blue
4. Blue
Auditor Signature (Red)
The Auditor does not grade his own session. He leaves this blank.
The correctly Admined folder is then given to Tech Services which
routes it (usually with the Auditor's other folders for the day) to the
CIS.
The CIS looks it over (it is HIS final responsibility for the case
being run right).
The CIS looks to see if the Examiner form taken by the Examiner at
session end
F/Ned. If it did not he leaves the grade line blank as it is a no
Grade session (see FIN
and well done hours) as the Auditor gets no hour credit for the
session. If the CIS and
other admin is ok he writes OK with his initial in the session grade
space. If no , ne of it
is okay he leaves it blank and does the CIS form or programs
completely new. In this
last case he enters a subtract figure in his log for the auditing time
for the week Against
that Auditor's name.
If the Exam form F/Ned, but the Admin is not okay and the session
actions were not okay the CIS writes "Well Done by Exam" on his own new CIS
in its. proper place and ignores the form and subtracts the Admin time in
his book to subtract the Admin from the Auditor's week's stat.
If the session was not okay with no FIN at Exams yet the Admin and
next CIS are ok, the Auditor loses the session time in the CIS but gets the
Admin time credited to his week's stat. The CIS subtracts the session time
in his book, not the Admin time.
Of course, as we hope is usually the case, if the Auditor did the CIS,
did a correct session, got an FIN at Exam and did the Admin and next CIS is
correct, then the CIS
marks "Very well done" in the blank space for session grade with his
initial. After inspection, this would be the sole action of the CIS
regarding that folder.
By the CIS writing in the session grade (Very well done, well done,
okay, flunk,
to cramming) the Auditor is receiving acknowledgement for his work and
is not just acking himself.
THE NEW LINE
The Ideal Folder-C/S line can shift the number of well done hours from
a ceiling
of 250-300 to 600-800 with one CIS. No mat ter how many Auditors an
org has, older lines put a 250-300 top ceiling on the org's well done
hours.
When hours could go above 600 due to the available Auditors, (20 or
30) a new
parallel line has, to be manned by a new CIS, new D of P and another
Examiner and more Tech Services personnel.
Despite how hard the CIS and anyone else in tech works, a line not so
run will
ceiling at about 250 hours, no matter how many Auditors are hired.
A CIS using the old lines can CIS for about 5 working Auditors only
with the line
running any old way. And even so will work himself half to death.
In trying to get pcs handled, Auditors will be added. The CIS will not
be able to
handle his job. The line, being faulty, gets pegged at about 250 hours
no matter how hard the CIS and Admin people work.
With the same CIS and Tech Services people, and a correct new line 24
to 30
Auditors will be kept busy at their 5 hours a day (given auditing
rooms) and the stat will be able to rise to 600 to 800.
NEW SEQUENCE
I . Auditor picks up his pc folders and his pc schedule list at Tech
Services at the start of his day from the LEAVING rack.
2. Tech Services (having a duplicate list) begins sending pcs to
him (using Tech Pages).
3. The Auditor gives the session.
4. The Auditor leaves the folder in the Auditing room at session
end and takes the pe to the Examiner.
5. The Examiner simply does the Exam form on a meter with no
folder. He sends the Exam form (hand route) to Tech Services.
6. The Auditor returns at once to his auditing room and a Tech Page
has a pc there waiting for him.
7. Having done all his pcs for the day, the Auditor carries his
folders to the Auditor Admin Room.
Tech Services has placed the Exam forms in the Auditor Admin Room and
sees they get into the Auditor's basket and the folder.
9. The Auditor does the complete Admin of the session.
10. The Auditor does any program needed for future sessions.
11. The Auditor C/Ses the folder for the next session.
12, The Auditor marks in a box (2 columns) on a sheet stapled to the
inside front cover the process, the Exam result, the session time and the
Admin time he has just put in.
13. The Auditor hands his completed folders in to Tech Services.
14. Tech Services gets the folders to the CIS using a Folder Page
who comes on late and works the CIS's hours.
15. Fed the folders rapidly by the Folder Page who is standing in
the CIS area, the CIS does his CIS work. If the Folder Page is fast,
removing folders and putting the new one in, chasing up data and other bits
for the CIS, the time of C/Sing even when done very carefully will be found
to average 3 to 5 minutes a folder even when some require full programming,
(but not FESing). This makes a ceiling of about 100 folders (sessions) a
day for the CIS, an output of 30 Auditors. Needless to say the CIS and the
Auditors have to know their business and Qual Cramming is used extensively
both for new material and for flubs both in auditing and C/Sing by
Auditors.
16. The Folder Page gets the Folders over to the D of P office
preserving the piles per auditor as much as possible.
The CIS posts the data he wants Auditors to know or do on the
AUDITORS'
582
BOARD of the Auditors'Admin Room. He turns in his Cramming Orders into
the D of P basket. This finishes his actions.
Where there is a senior Review C/S there is a hot spur line from the
C/S to the senior C/S and back to the C/S. This is not necessarily an
instant line. It can be a 12 hour lag line. In orgs where a C/O or Exec Dir
or Product Officer or Org Officer is also a very skilled C/S this hot line
would probably be in. New tech in use, fantastic completions and utter dog
cases nobody can make anything out of go on this senior C/S hot spur line.
There are very few of these, only two or three a day in a very busy org.
The senior C/S "does" these and sends them back to the C/S. They are then
sent on as usual to the D of P.
17. The Director of Processing comes on duty very early. The C/Sed
folders will all be there. The D of P has assignment master sheets that are
kept up by the D of P.
The D of P does the day's schedules, a list for each auditor. The
lists preferably have a few too many pcs on them.
The D of P can tell what Class of Auditor is required for the next
session because the Auditor has marked it in in the upper right hand corner
of the C/S for the next session.
When the D of P has the lists done the folders are placed in the
"leaving" rack of Tech Services and Tech Services, now up and about, is
given the lists and gets to work on the scheduling board, moving the names
about to agree with the lists.
Tech Services does any room shifts or handlings at this time.
18. The D of P now goes to the Auditor Admin Room and begins to
muster Auditors from her muster list as they come in and gets them over to
Tech Services.
19. A Cramming personnel will be in there trying to get any
crammings scheduled.
20. Tech Services hands out folders (which are in neat piles for
each Auditor) and schedules to the Auditors as they turn up and handling
any arguments or shifts in sequence.
21. Tech Pages are on phones or running to round up pcs and get them
going to sessions, which work continues all day.
22. The D of P interviews.any hung up or curious pcs or as requested
by the C/S or gets new Auditors or keeps up Admin. This goes on until the
C/S comes in when the D of P is off.
23. The Auditor picking up his folders begins the cycle all over
again at (1) above.
ABOVE 600
When the well done hours go above 600 a week, A WHOLE NEW HGC is put
in duplicating the first, with its own C/S, D of P, T/S, auditing rooms and
Auditor Admin Room. It would be HGC Section Two or HGC2 with the original
being HGC 1.
A special second cramming would have to be provided in Qual for it.
At first they would share new hours and build up independently. More
HGCs are added to the Department at each multiple 600 wd hours.
SENIORS
The two chief seniors in the area are the C/S (for tech) and the D of
P (for Auditors and bodies).
It is the D of P who must see that Auditors exist and are on post.
It is Tech Services who sees pcs are rounded up and audited. The D of
T/S is actually in charge of pcs and all folder files and all board keep up
work.
The D of P should have some tech training. The D of T/S need not have
any. The C/S of course is the Tech Expert and should be an HSST.
If there are no Auditors it is the D of P's neck.
If there are no C/Ses it is the C/S's neck.
If there are no folders it is the D of T/S's neck.
And if there are no auditing rooms it is the D of T/S's neck.
If signed up scheduled pcs don't get to session it is the D of T/S's
neck.
If there are no NEW pcs it is the D of P's neck who should begin to
shoot Dissem Sees and registrars and procure new pcs on a by-pass for the
org.
583
From this a table of seniors and duties can be made.
CRAMMING
You will notice no pcs are sent to Review on this new line. Review
actions are done in Tech as a patch up in Tech. The Qual See is responsible
for overall tech quality BUT DOES IT BY CRAMMING C/Ses or Auditors.
Thus Cramming is a busy street.
Cramming must be good, check outs excellent.
If an Auditor doesn't grasp a C/S he has received he gets help from
Cramming.
Auditors new to the HGC are given a fast hard grooving in in Cramming
or a Qual Interne Course. (New Auditors never audit until grooved in.)
Tech will be as good as the Cramming Officer can cram.
This line is grooved in by the HAS and kept in by Qual. Or if there is
no Qual, it is kept in by the HAS who will find no Qual very embarrassing.
DUMMY RUN
The line should be dummy run by folders, "pcs" and Auditors until they
understand it.
People are often totally unaware of lines and get very sloppy.
Thus this line has to be drilled hard on old and new tech personnel.
All must know this exact line.
It is a good line.
Fully in, it raises the well done hours stat from 250 per week maximum
at total overload to an easy 600 to 800.
Auditors must audit five hours a day, 25 minimum per week of well done
hours for any bonus to be paid at all. In the SO they get no pay at all
much less bonuses if short on their 25.
Tech Services and an unenergetic D of P or a bad Dissem See and
Registrar set up can cause a no pe situation. And often do unless pushed.
But counting FESes and Admin in on an Auditor's wd time helps slack
periods to even out. And one Auditor can FES and program folders for others
or from files if he is left adrift and short-timed by the D of P or D of
T/S or until the Tech Division forces the Dissem Div and Distribution Div
to really get on the ball andwear their hats on pc flow.
PROCUREMENT
The D of P has always had new pe procurement responsibility when all
else failed or even when it didn't.
Old folders, for example, are a marvelous source of new auditing
repairs and intensives. An FES done on an old folder and a letter to "come
in and get audited before you fall apart" is excellent pc procurement,
usually neglected by Registrars. Any procurement by a D of P is legitimate.
Auditors who have no pcs can write procurement letters and have for 20
years.
SUMMARY
This is a beautiful line. It has been piloted hard.
It will serve as well as it is checked out, drilled in and used.
This line is the key to affluence from pcs alone.
(But if the org isn't training Auditors heavily, you'll soon have no
Auditors to be on it and the org will not gain its high income low cost
cushion from training.)
This line is the answer to really getting auditing done in an area.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:nt.rd Founder
584
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 MARCH 1971
Remimeo
Prod Org Hats
Tech Hats Org Seties No. 24
Qual Hats
LINE DESIGN
HGC Lines, An Example
The present lines for the HGC in any org are the subject of HCO B 5
March 71, C/S Series 25, "The Fantastic New HGC Line", which is to be
considered part of this policy letter.
This modifies early Tech Org Boards to some extent.
The old line in,'65 policy did not include a Case Supervisor as such
and shunted failed pcs to Qual Review.
Today Tech does its own pe repairs and Qual concentrates on Cramming
HGC auditors as well as students. Qual can also cram the Tech C/S.
It is completely amazing that a statistic ceiling on well done
auditing hours delivered could not have exceeded 250-300 well done hours a
week no matter how many auditors were hired or posted. The post of the C/S
overloaded and the D of P post could not function well without overload.
The new line is capable of a statistic ceiling of 600 to 800 well done
hours a week, After that a new second HGC is manned fully and given new
space.
The importance of a properly formed line, traveling in correct
sequence is then driven home.
An Improper line will reduce the statistic ceiling by 1/2 to 1/3 of
what can be achieved by the same number of people.
The overload of seniors usually occurs because of improperly set up
lines.
Lines are invisible to most people and they are unable to conceive of
them until given full drills.
Unless this new C/S line is used you will not be able to average more
than 250 well done hours a week no matter how many auditors you put in the
HGC. The auditors will be idle, confused and causing upsets.
If an org cannot get more than 250 well done hours a week, it will
find that it cannot really make money from processing.
Thus the new line will give volume, quality and viability in
processing pcs.
Advantages of the line are that one HSST can handle up to 30 auditors.
The earlier ceiling was eight or ten auditors.
With higher volume, backlogs vanish rapidly.
The Admin personnel in the line can be afforded.
Line design, then, is a strong and unsuspected cause of low statistic
ceilings.
Product and Org Officers must be intimately familiar with this HGC
line. And they must be aware of the fact that faulty line design can
cripple an org's income and overload its posts and excellent line design
can double the stat ceiling in any department while lightening the load.
LRH:mes.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
585
NOT HCO POLICY ~.ETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 25 AUGUST 1971
Remimeo
CIS Series 56
HOW TO GET RESULTS
IN AN HGC
Obtaining excellent case results is an ADMINISTRATIVE not a wholly
technical function.
Auditors and C/Ses are often weak on Administrative. They think
general tech results improve only by more tech study. If they continue to
think this way they wind up squirreling. For they are working on a wrong
target for improvement, a wrong WHY or reason.
Auditing is a team activity. The day of the individual country doctor
is dead. Even if an individual field auditor starts out as an individual he
goes one of two directions-he overworks and squirrels himself into failure
or he builds up a team-may only be a receptionist and an apprentice auditor
but he is still building up a team. I have never seen individual auditors
succeed over a long period. Failing to form or become part of a team, they
eventually fade out or squirrel.
The reason is simple enough.
These rules apply:
TO IMPROVE TECH RESULTS YOU MUST IMPROVE ADMINISTRATION.
And I don't mean just writing better in folders.
DEFINITION
ADMINISTRATION consists of the formation and handling of the lines and
terminals involved in production.
Unless an auditor understands this fully, he will never insist on a
Tech Sec, a Tech Establishment Officer, D of P, C/S, Examiner, pages,
Folder Admin and himself will begin to omit keeping a folder summary and
then omit the session actions and then, with big loses, retire from it all.
If I were an auditor and saw some of these things missing, I'd be
liable to say, "Are you guys kidding? I thought we were here to audit pcs."
Without the correct pattern of lines and terminals YOU DON'T GET
RESULTS, you get headaches, mad neighbors and refunds.
Auditing on lines, an auditor should regard himself as a highly
skilled expert, a technical specialist whose work requires respect and
service.
And Case Supervising on lines, a Case Supervisor should consider
himself a sort of Czar whose word is so law even the Exec Director thinks
several times before he approaches-duly servile of course and bowing the
prescribed three times as he exits.
A Class XII on Flag is listened to by others with a hush even if he is
only commenting on the weather.
These are the stars of the team. Their worldwide reputation for smooth
flubless auditing is an administrative result!
. I
Short of space, overloaded, short of admin personnel, turning out the
highest well done hours in the world, Flag's Div IV produces because of an
Admin system.
The highest of these C/Ses and auditors goes to cramming if he
misplaces a comma or drops a TR I.
If the sessions' exams at Examiner drop from 90% F/N the whole place
gets overhauled.
586
Folders are Folder Error Summaried by an FES section. The Folder
Summary is kept up each session (or Cramming). The folder is studied and
C/Sed. The D of P assigns the sessions. The C/S is done correctly (or
Cramming). The folder travels on its lines. The tests are done.
In short it is a complex but constantly flowing pattern of moving pes,
folders and examinations interspersed with testing and interviews and re-
registration.
There is a right way to do it.
RESULTS
If an org has only 65% of its sessions F/N VGIs at Examiner the right
answer is to organize the place.
Why?
Well, the first answer is that the third dynamic is stronger than the
first dynamic.
An auditor auditing alone is a first dynamic. The pc is a first
dynamic. As it is the auditor plus pe that must be greater than the
reactive mind, one can easily work the rest out.
If the auditor is part of a functioning third dynamic, not just an
individual, the auditor plus pe versus the bank is a LOT more than the
bank.
Another answer is that an auditor knows the pc if only because of
sessions and personal opinion enters into it. That is not a pure technical
view as a C/S's must be.
Another answer is that an auditor in a group gets more auditing done.
Individually practising auditors often fail because nobody is taking
care of the auditor as a person. Further they get loses. No one sends them
to cramming. When they get loses they often start squirreling. Then they
really get loses.
That ends them as auditors.
An auditor working in a good on policy organization is given service.
He does get sent to cramming. He does keep his tech updated. He gets wins.
When he doesn't he's put back on standard tech. So he happily keeps going
and makes lots of happy people.
So if I were auditing in a group I would insist as a condition of work
that Div IV and Div V be good on policy divisions, fully organized with no
nonsense.
I know whereof I speak. As a part time duty I work as a consulting C/S
with a good IV and a good V. Sometimes I have had to take over the whole
C/S line. When the organization bogs in any way I know the whole thing is
heading toward single-handing the lot. So I get the lines back in and get
people to Cramming and get the F/N at examiner ratio approaching 100%
again.
Thus, the advice you get about C/Sing is live-live-live, not canned
theory.
ORG WINS
Being on administrative lines to all orgs, I can tell you point blank
that
THEIR STATS DEPEND ON THEIR VOLUME AND QUALITY OF SERVICE.
That isn't propaganda. It's pure fact.
The F/N-no F/N at Examiner ratio tells you at once if Divs IV and V
are organized and operating or if they are just fooling about.
At 50% to 75% F/N at Examiner the administrative functions of Divs IV
and V are stinking bad. C/S Series 2S is out. Cramming is out. Hidden data
lines exist. HCOBs, books and tapes are not used.
The public, at that % of F/N will stay away in droves. Registrars will
go batty and adopt "Hot Prospect Systems".
The staff -will go low pay and the execs will be a perpetual dark
shade of purple from yelling. The cash bills ratio will be the subject of
finance missions and the neighbors will be phoning the police.
Why?
587
Because an org is itself a technical delivery organization and 50% to
75% F/N at Examiner is an overt product.
The Academy has already failed to apply student study tech and word
clearing. Qual is a joke.
There is no library of tech available and if available isn't read.
The org as a tech service delivery unit is treating its public to a no-
auditing situation and will get in trouble.
REMEDY
The way to remedy is to get on policy with tech organization.
Put in a Qual with word clearing and a library and cramming.
Put in the C/S Series 25 Tech lines.
Tolerate NO out tech or out-Admin in folders.
Dummy run the lines until they're in.
Cram Cram Cram C/S and auditor and tech personnel flubs whenever they
occur.
Get the organization functioning.
Your F/N at Examiner ratio will climb straight up to 90% 95% 98%.
By actual test pcs will flood in, Reg lines will get easy, success
stats soar.
More auditors more C/Ses, more organization. A second, a third HGC.
And the more thoroughly the admin lines are manned the better the tech
lines work.
This conclusion came from actual inspections of orgs and studies of
their stats.
Orgs should be seJling more training than processing.
But why train if you can't interne them in a good Qual and HGC?
They'll never amount to anything as auditors unless they work in an
organization that is on tech and on policy.
So you need an HGC.
Tech, done in a proper administrative framework works.
Some orgs really don't believe they could ever attain the flubless
auditing quality of Flag.
But they can.
It is even easy.
It is even easier to attain flubless quality of auditing than any
other kind.
You put in a real on policy admin pattern. in IV and V. You begin with
a Qual Interne Course.
You send to Cramming for any C/S or auditing error no matter how
minute.
The results come up.
The errors cease.
You're a success! If you do it.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:nt.rd Copyright Q 1971
588
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 SEPTEMBER 1971
Remimeo ED Hat Product Officer Hat Org Officer Hat Reg Hat Tech See Hat
SELLING AND DELIVERING AUDITING
Up into the 1960s there was never any trouble selling or delivering
auditing or, with similar volume of training, keeping an org very
prosperous.
Then some "know bests" in orgs changed the pattern of more than a
decade. Processing and Class IV orgs have not been really prosperous since.
I traced this out, looking for the WHY of Class IV orgs having an
occasional rough time making it. It led back to this major change.
Originally and from 1950 forward into the early '60s, the processing
that was offered and sold and delivered (without fail) was the 25 Hour
Intensive. The cost of it varied between the US and other continents. But
it was always and only a 25 hour intensive.
The Case Supervisor Hat was wom by the Director of Processing.
The pc began his intensive on Monday and finished on Friday. He was
tested and ready to go by 1:00 PM Monday and the time was made up during
the week.
Then Johannesburg and London "knew best" and began to sell "5 hour
Intensives" or "Introductory Intensives".
It was exactly at this point that finance trouble set in for Class IV
orgs. Until this writing they have not done all that well.
The reason is dropping the 25 hour intensive.
Any handling would of course be to slide back onto the 25 hour
Intensive as smoothly as possible.
Another factor that hurt orgs was heavy student discounts. Anyone
apparently could become a student. This cut the price 50% and made it hard
to be viable.
Selling anything but hours asks the pc and Registrar to C/S. The
person may not buy what has to be done.
Therefore we will groove back over to this policy without creating
public shocks. But the deadline should not be later than I February '72 and
as soon as feasible.
THE SYSTEM
LENGTH
The 25 Hour Intensive was in 1950 a 36 hour intensive and the first
write up of it is given as 36 hours. Within 2 or 3 years this became a 25
hour intensive as being easier on auditors and easier to schedule and sell.
This is easily done in the five days Monday to Friday.
SIGN UP
A pc was signed up (began in 1955) for 25 hours by the Registrar. He
was then sent to a Tech personnel for estimate. From simple 5 minute tests,
done at once after the sign up, no wait.
589
The Tech personnel returned the pc to the Registrar with a time
estimate in terms of number of intensives, usually up to 6.
The original sign up was then extended to the Tech estimate.
The reasons for this line were several. (a) A Registrar must not
analyse the case, usually not being a tech-trained person. (b) The PRIMARY
CAUSE OF PROCESSING FAILURES WAS TRACED TO NOT ENOUGH AUDITING BOUGHT. (c)
The pc was thereby getting all his auditing in one block making fast case
gain not interrupted by life throwing ruds out. (d) It was a never failing
opportunity to sell more auditing, making for a more viable org. (e) It
gives consecutive scheduling week after week, very easy to do.
SCHEDULING
It is of the utmost importance for an org engaged in selling auditing
in one week 25 hour lots to have a regular HGC and staff, a C/S, a D of P
and a short test section and a full test section.
The auditors work enough hours to allow for 5 hours in the chair, 31/2
hours of Admin time and 21/2 hours of study on their own time. The auditing
hours can extend by reason of waiting a half hour for a C/S within the
day's auditing.
The auditor handled one pc that week. It was utterly forbidden for a
Reg to offer bit and piece scheduling to the pc. The Reg took it for
granted the person would take a week off or several, no Q and A with "21/2
hours auditing Saturdays" because it literally denied the pc all his gains.
.
It was strictly "Be here Monday at 9 for testing."
The auditors on Monday morning helped test and mark tests.
The pcs went into session at 1:00 PM Monday and went on to about 6:00
to get in the 5 hours.
The C/S "did" the folders after auditing hours Gust like C/S Series 25
says).
The D of P was NOT permitted to audit. HGC collapses always followed
when he did. He got the auditors mustered, interviewed and soothed pcs and
kept things going Oust as in C/S Series 25).
- There was little day C/Sing as the C/Ses were very long. In
emergency the D of P did it or the C/S, coming on duty later in the day,
did them.
Cramming was handled in evening study time, the auditor just being
corrected until the end of the day, usually by a "listen in" on the session
D of P system.
Tuesday, Weds, Thurs and Friday completed the Intensive at a regular
five hours a day plus any make up time for lost hours.
Today this auditing would fully repair the pc's life, handle what is
now C/S 54 and take him on up the Grade Chart the long way, the longer the
better both from the org point of view and the pc's.
AVAILABLE AUDITORS
An auditing staff of six full time auditors is small for this system.
Six is a minimum. To these are added a Tech Service, a D of P, a C/S
and a page for folders.
As the system can easily use 15 auditors full time if the Registrar is
good, it should be built up to this.
The auditors may in part be Internes.
When an auditor has no pc for the week, a staff member can have the
Intensive by giving up his units and tending to the more important of his
traffic in hours he is not
590
audited just to keep his post in PT. A staff member on public lines
can get a substitute for the week.
A Qual Division is used for Word Clearing, library, Interne Course,
Cramming, Exams and Certs and Awards. (Just as modernly posted.)
OVERLOADS
Backlogs were never permitted. Trained staff members and field
auditors were yanked in to prevent any backlog. The D of P was supposed to
be skilled at this.
Pes never were told "You will have to wait until next month .......
UPSETS
There were almost never upsets with this line. Pcs almost never blew.
Ds of P had no trouble finding emergency auditors for overloads or in
finding or training auditors to audit.
The scheduling is so plain and simple that it just rolled along.
The staff got audited and were happy.
The only upset caused was when the Reg would not get a short test done
5 minutes after sign up and get the pc handled. The Reg would sometimes
wait for the long Monday test. The D of P is the short test person, usually
a meter check and a glance at the folder.
SUCCESSES
This system raised OCA tests off the bottom of the graph to high
range, increased IQs up to 1 point per hour of processing.
Pcs were happy. The success stories were great.
They made their completions and kept on going to the next process or
level.
It was sometimes a strain to find enough to audit on them, but as
today's C/S 54 (Dianetic Narrative), complete with drug or medical rundown,
and a Dianetic completion can consume up to 150 hours and as single
expanded grades (much less triple) take at least 25 hours, along with other
repairs and rundowns, any pc can run up to about 250 hours and some many
more before SH Power is even approached.
All this makes success on cases.
CONCLUSION
As there is nothing against resuming the most successful HGC pattern,
as no policy or HCO B is contrary to it and all fit within it, the
conclusion is that a successful org should procure personnel and train up
auditors and get it in if it wants to be prosperous.
The line has to be held hard. The first staff member who offers "an
introductory package" or a "S hour intensive" or "Let's start pcs on
Tuesday or any day" should be rapidly told "This is the way the orgs went
into trouble."
FOUNDATIONS
The same pattern applies to Foundations with 121/2 hour intensives and
21/2 hour evening sessions. But again, the person must buy enough
intensives.
COMPLETIONS
Completions of a grade or Rundown in the middle of the week are
attested to and the pc goes on to the next RD or grade same day. This could
be said to violate letting
591
pc have his win. But it doesn't as he is now on his next major action.
The pc needing more hours at week's end buys another week.
PRICING
Pricing must take into account that field professionals and students
and members get heavy discounts.
Inflation has raised costs over the years.
Therefore it is necessary that 5 0% of the Intensive Cost be at least
as high as 100% of it in 1950. Example: In the US $500 intensives in 1950-
60 would have to be S 1000 in 1971 so that at 50% they would still be S500.
And even then this is figuring it close. Today's psychiatrist gets S40 an
hour, no discount, for lousing people up and a "full course of analysis"
costs L9,000.
Franchises get much higher prices than orgs and the public pays them.
Right in the same town an org was going broke thinking its prices high When
Franchises charging more were rolling in pcs!
ADMIN
You have to have a very good kept up Central Files and Letter Regs.
You have to provide afriendly org with upstat appearance. (By survey.)
Your divisions have to be manned and your org has to be ON POLICY.
You have to sell BOOKS and have a cracking good Div VI getting new
people.
SUMMARY
This was the period when Class IV orgs were successful and prosperous.
It traces back to the fact that they never sold even an assist.
They trained (by cash income) about I for I with processing.
Power at SH even made it a rule to have the pe buy only intensives.
Then the pc was fully set up and Power was really delivered. The hours left
over were scrubbed (which could have led to Quickie Power). But that's how
Power was sold. The break down of the schedule of 25 hour intensives must
not occur because of this way of selling Power.
The 25 hour Class IV one week Intensive delivered in orgs was the
successful pattern. No other pattern has ever worked.
It should be guarded against not again to depart from this successful
pattern.
It takes time to handle pcs well and to total success.
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
LRH:mes.rd Copyright@ 1971
592
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 APRIL 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo Issue III
All Orgs
Sthil Staff
Sthil Students POWER PROCESSES
Only the HGC at Saint Hill and the Case Cracking Section of the
Department of Review may use the 3 new Power Levels I recently developed
until they have on staff Review Cl VI Personnel who have interned at Saint
Hill in the Saint Hill Dept of Review.
The processes require the most skilled and exact application and have
exact phenomena to be observed which becomes impossible to supervise
outside the above departments.
Only Class VI auditors may audit these processes first only at Saint
Hill and only under the supervision of Mary Sue Hubbard until they have
learned them perfectly.
Training on such processes can be undertaken only by Provisional Class
VI auditors after leaving the, course, and only enrolled on staff as
Intemes in the Department of Review or the HGC.
Orgs not having personnel so trained by Interneship may not use these
processes in their Review Departments.
The fact of having a Review personnel trained in Review at Saint Hill
does not permit an org to train new Review personnel in the org. Anybody in
an org's Review who will be using or supervising the use of Power Processes
must have been interned at Saint Hill. Such training, however, gives no
right to train others.
Holding this policy firmly guarantees the full success technically in
all cases in any org in the world. Avoiding it in any way jeopardizes that
success. These power processes are simple. But so is T.N.T.
The reason for this is that there is no adequate repair for errors
made in running these processes if their existing remedies are also goofed.
The strongest, swiftest Ethics action must follow any slightest
violation of the above for these processes alone guarantee sweeping success
for Scientology on the roughest cases everywhere.,
Any auditor who discovers that the pe he is auditing has bee n
illegally audited previously on a power process or any higher level process
for which the pc is not graded must report the matter at once to the
nearest HCO Ethics Section by collect wire or 'phone call.
R6 NEW STUDENTS
Before enrolment in the R6 unit of the SHSBC all students who have not
been run on the Power Processes and who have any slightest difficulty with
R6 EW must be ordered at once to the Review Case Cracking Section for Power
Processes.
Any student not showing adequate case gain on the course must be
ordered to the Review Case Cracking Section.
The Power Processes must not appear on any check sheet.
TRUSTED AUDITORS
I reserve, my right to give a process to a trusted Class VI auditor to
run on one pc for testing.
REVIEW, ORDERS TO
No D of T or Course Supervisor or Academy Instructor may threaten a
student who is disruptive of course discipline with Review auditing or
training.
Such students may only be ordered to Ethics.
Auditing may no longer be used as discipline by any Comm Ev or
Scientology Executive.
593
Students who obtain too few passes may be ordered to Review.
Students who are ARC Broken may be ordered to Review.
REVIEW EXPENSES
Any student ordered to the Review Cramming Section or Case Cracking
Section is ordered at his or her own expense at prevailing Review rates.
Students who cannot pay and whose credit is compromised may be ordered
by Review to the Hardship Section where student auditors who have failed in
classification may be needful of pcs to catch up on check sheets or get
experience with processes. If no such students are available the hardship
case or backward student must simply wait for one to show up if one does.
PACE OF ORG
The organization is geared to the average case and study rate and
there is no reason why it should have to pay above its narrow costing
allowance for the student who is too bad off or the preclear who cannot
gain normally.
PRECLEARS
When any HGC preclear does not buy enough auditing to attain a case
change, and if no result has been obtained, he or she may not be dismissed
from the org but must be passed to Review at the preclear's own expense.
It is vital that an HGC pc buy enough auditing to obtain a proper
result for his case if it is worse than average. Otherwise the matter
passes from the preclear's hands and is taken over by Review.
No 'Tailed cases" may be dismissed from the org.
ALL TO QUALIFICATIONS
No student or pc may leave an org by any other exit than through the
Department of Examinations.
If students or pcs fail for any reason to be up to required standards
they are shunted by Examinations to Review.
If the student or pc passes the Department of Examinations' appraisal,
he or she is sent to the Department of Certifications for attestation of
attainment and for logging out of the org.
Until so logged the student or pc has not technically left the org.
Departure without logging is "Departure unauthorized" and is treated
as a "blow" and passes into the hands of Ethics at once.
ETHICS AND STUDENTS AND PCs
Students and pcs shunted about from the Academy or HGC to
Examinations, Review and Certification or back again are not considered
transferred or subjected to discipline in the Ethics meaning of these words
and have therefore no recourse.
The entire object of an org is to produce a satisfactory auditor or
higher state of case in the pc and anything that impedes this would be an
arbitrary and unreasonable restraint upon an org and its Technical and
Qualification Divisions and their personnel.
A student or pc should signify an understanding of this on enrolling
in an org for training or scheduling processing. They are buying progress
in life and may not act to prevent its occurrence.
If they enter an org they are understood to consider improvement
desirable and therefore tacitly agree to be improved by the technology
furnished.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden Copyright 1--" 1965 by L. Ron)Yubbard
594
I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 MAY 1965
Remimec,
Qual Div HATS TECH AND Q UAL DIVS
Cl V11 Check Sheet
POWER PROCESSES
The Power Processes or any version of them may not be used by persons
not trained at Class VII at Saint Hill.
The data on this overwhelmingly demands this policy be FIRMLY applied
with no exceptions.
These wonderful processes are capable of making a Release from even
-34 in every case to which they are applied.
Run by new Class V1 auditors who have been star-checked at Saint Hill
on them, goofs of huge magnitude have been made.
In orgs, without full Class VII trained auditors, the Power Processes
just wouldn't work at all.
Pes would be folding up like accordions, Releases just wouldn't
happen.
Tremendous experience and the closest supervision preceded by full
training in the D of P-ing of the Processes as well as running them is
vital to success.
They are easy.
But until every faintest kink is taken out of an auditor's auditing
and every possible eventuality has been shown to him and until he has seen
what misuse can do, the auditor cannot handle them.
Thus Ethics must be very alert to illegal use of Power Processes. And
must be very severe about it. Otherwise there will be some very sick pcs
around and administrative chaos.
There are then two grades of processes which demand the highest
quality of training before they produce results.
One is Class VI materials.
The other is Class VII materials, the Power Process.
This is no effort to make a monopoly. It is simply responsibility.
After all, auditing on them is available right now.
Training for Class VI and VII is available this very minute at Saint
Hill.
The technology will be passed on for training use in an Org when an
Org is a Class
VII Org-to wit when it is fully qualified to teach and use them an , d
when its Executive
Secretaries of HCO and the Org and its Division Secretaries are Clears
and its Tech and
Qual personnel are Releases.
The processes aren't denied anyone. We are simply protecting people
from the fallout of the most powerful auditing weapons ever developed.
We are taking responsibility for our own creation and using it for the
greatest good of the greatest number of dynamics.
One wishes the atomic scientist had been that socially responsible.
LRH:mh.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright @ 1965
595
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 JUNE 1965
Remimeo
Sthil Students
Franchise
SIX POWER PROCESSES
There are six Power Processes. Use of these processes is restricted to
CI VIIs and may only be used at Saint Hill in the Qualifications Div or
later in orgs as outlined in Sec EDs.
Having been Released does not qualify one to use the Power Processes.
Policy regarding the use of Power Processes will be severely enforced.
Processes at the various levels that are OK for use ARE IN HCO
BULLETINS.
Hearing about a process from a student, pc , etc" DOES N OT QUALIFY IT
FOR USE. THAT IS OFF-LINE AND QUITE OFTEN ALTER-ISED TECH.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.rd Copyright (D 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 AUGUST 1965
St Hill
CONTINUING PC TO THIRD STAGE RELEASE
Any preclear who has paid in full for 50 hours of Power Processing,
and who reaches the state of Second Stage Release in 25 hours may, at the
discretion of the Director of Processing, be continued on to Third Stage
Release.
The above action is not a right of the preclear. He paid for
preference on Power Processing to Second Stage Release. The action of
taking him to Third Stage as above is entirely at the whim of the D of P.
No pressure, duress, cajoling or, any other means of getting the D of
P to exercise her whim may be used, either on the part of the preclear or
the auditor.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.kd Copyright @ 1965
596
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 OCTOBER 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo
Tech Div
Qhal Div RELEASE DECLARATIONS
Any untrained person may not be declared at a grade of Release higher
than that to which Power Processing will take him, namely Grade VA, and no
one may be declared Grade VI Release or above who has not been properly
trained in the skills of solo auditing at Saint Hill. Also, a person who
has trained to Level VI but not been audited up through the grades, and so
cannot do solo auditing on Class VI (Clearing Course) materials, may only
be classed as Prov Class VI.
Before being permitted to engage on the processes of solo auditing
(the first being R6 EW), all students in Training will have to be released
on the Power Processes, in order to ensure a successful passage through the
higher. levels.
There will be cases such as those which are handled by SEC ED 122 SH
on which Power Processing may not be a prerequisite to higher level
Training and materials, but each such case will be handled on its own
merits.
LRH:ml.kd L. RON HUB13ARD
Copyright @ 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 APRIL 1971
SH Tech Services
Cl VII Checksheet
C1 VII Auditors POWER BADGES
All pcs being audited on Power Processes are to wear Power Badges as
described below.
This badge consists of a 3" X 2" white card with the lettering neatly
printed on it in black, preferably sheathed in plastic.
It is to be issued to the pc and pinned noticeably on a lapel, breast
pocket or similar place by Pc Administrator at the commencement of his
Power Processing cycle and collected back when he completes. Pc
Administrator is to tell the pc to wear this badge throughout his Power
Processing.
His Power Auditor is responsible for seeing that his pc is wearing the
Power Badge.
Text of Badge:
I AM ON POWER PROCESSING.
DO NOT ASK ME ANY QUESTIONS
ABOUT MY CASE, THE PROCESSES
OR MY AUDITING.
Reconstructed from 1965 LRH Sec ED by Tr & Serv Msn
LRH:JR:D&MM:nw.rd for Tr & Serv Aide
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
597
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 FEBRUARY, 1964
CenOCon
RUNDOWN OF CASE SUPERVISOR HAT
The function of Case Supervisor is to see that cases are cracked. This
applies to all cases, including Staff, HGC, Academy, PE and Co-Audit. The D
of P, D of T, Staff Co-Audit Director and PE Director continue to function
as before, but are subject to the advices and instructions of the Case
Supervisor in deciding what should be run on any case.
In order to understand the exact function of the Case Supervisor, read
the following directive issued to the course at Saint Hill, together with
Ron's instruction to the person who took over the post.
These have been modified slightly to make them more applicable to
Central Orgs.
Here is the Directive:
"The post of Auditing Supervisor is abolished since all instructors
are doing auditing supervision as a training measure.
The missing action is that of Case Supervisor.
The Auditing Supervision done by all instructors quite rightly
concentrates on student skill in auditing.
A Case Supervisor is needed, therefore, whose sole interest and
concern is the advance of cases by any and various means.
The Case Supervisor will be instructed and supervised by the HCO Area
See in the marking of folders and handling various cases and will take over
the full handling of case folders as soon as feasible.
All problems having to do with the individual cases of students or
pes, any and all auditing assignments and all individual case problems are
to be routed to the Case Supervisor.
In all questions of what is to be run on a student or pc, regardless
of his situation in training, the word of the Case Supervisor, under the
supervision of the HCO Area Sec, is final."
Here is Ron's instruction:
"Dear John: From Conference Data,
You are going to be hopelessly tangled up on post if you put any time
in on auditors. You are Case Supervisor. It's up to the other instructors
to get auditors to audit.
You are not supposed to hang up on getting something done via the
auditors. Only courtesy to inform the auditing instructors that seine
auditor is weak on something. But it's no part of your hat. You'll never
get cases running if you try to do the jobs of the Auditing Instructors and
your own job of Case Supervisor. That drops it right back in the rat race
where it was-all supervision of auditors, no supervision of cases.
In your boots-and I've worn a hat like yours since Elizabeth days from
time to time in Orgs-I don't recall one single interview with a staff
auditor. As D of P I've handled auditors and cases via. But as a Case
Supervisor when 1 was not D of P, I don't recall ever talking to a single
Auditor about any case before 1 handled the folder or the case. I'd
occasionally say 'Run so and so' and check up in a day or two and if it
hadn't been run (which was seldom) I'd walk in on the session and run it.
No truck with the auditor. Why?
1. Auditors that haven't cracked a case haven't seen the case so
why talk to them?
2. Auditors that won't or can't run what they're told need more
training not
598
more persuasion or a 5 minute ACC from me or you.
3. 1 was interested in the cases.
You will make a fatal error on post if you permit yourself to be
interviewed by Auditors and take their views of the case. See (1) just
above.
Always assume the Auditor can and will run exactly what's ordered. If
that assumption is incorrect don't vary your instruction. Do it yourself
and say to Instructors 'That auditor needs training'.
I could go through this class pc to pc with folders and zoom every
case present, so I expect you to. To do that I wouldn't talk to a single
auditor-indeed, I'd shy off it like mad if I wanted to get my job done.
You are not the D of T. You are wearing my Case Cracker hat. Don't
make like a D of P who has auditors to supervise,and train. Just crack
cases and smooth them out.
Every case you handle is awry in some basic ability as a pc so the
field of action is unlimited.
Definitions: Auditing Supervisor- Supervises the auditing of auditors
and helps them crack casest
Instructor-Instructs in the science of auditing.
D of P-Supervises cases through staff auditor.
Case Supervisor-Keeps the cases looked over and winning, looks only at
cases and advises what to run or runs it, interviews only cases, ignores
auditors to the point of paying even very little real attention,to auditor
report comments or opinions.
Glad I had a look at this and a chance to set it right because you
would have drowned in all the faulty or non-observation going on. You've
kept in the error that made the case run wrong in the first place. Non-
Obnosis.
An auditor can be present if silent while you interview or run a case.
Otherwise that's it.
I used to do a lot of starting a process right on a pe and then step
out and tell the auditor-'O.K. that's what's to be done. Flatten it.'
You from your position viewpoint have half a hundred pcs and only
nominal auditor assistance. Your job is to see that cases get cracked. Your
job is not to see that auditors get trained.
Best,
L. Ron Hubbard."
It will be seen from this that the function of the D of P is only
changed to the degree that he has the specialized assistance of the Case
Supervisor in cracking cases.
A final word to the Case Supervisor: Ron's instruction is: Know
practically by heart the two Saint Hill lectures of 4th February and 6th
February 1964-"Auditor Self-Criticism" and "Comm Cycle in Auditing". These
two lectures are your bible.
Good hunting.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
Org Supervisor WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gl.rd
Copyright@ 1964
[Note: The directive referred to above appears on Page 435.1
599
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 FEBRUARY 1964
HCO Secs Assoc Sets for info
NOMINATION OF CASE SUPERVISOR
In HCO POLICY LETTER OF February 24, 1964, "Technical Supervision Changes",
it was mentioned that the present Technical Director should take over the
post of Case Supervisor initially.
This step is taken to avoid sudden change and randomity. However, it
should be borne in mind that the post is quite different and that therefore
the present Tech Director may not be the most suitable personnel for this
key post.
Basically, the Case Supervisor is an excellent auditor, a person who likes
to audit and who can crack cases. His functions may be well understood from
studying HCO POLICY LETTER OF February 24, 1964, "Rundown of Case
Supervisor Hat".
Therefore, as soon as possible after receiving this Policy Letter, the
HCO Area See should consult with the Assoc See and the members of the
Technical Council, and, using his or her judgment, nominate the most
suitable person for the post.
This may also affect other posts, such as D of P, D of T, etc.
Therefore, it is essential to effect the action smoothly.
Nominations should be sent for final approval, together with any other
changes, by cable to L. Ron Hubbard as soon as possible.
Get your best Tech line up into action soon, since good Tech means
happy pcs and students and excellent survival for the Org.
Issued by: Peter Hemery
HCO See WW
LRH:gl.rd for
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright Q 1964 Authorized by:
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 JUNE 1965
ALL HGCs
ALL CASE CRACKING UNITS
Remimeo
Staff Auditor Hats
Interne Hats
Class VII Internes FOLDERS, MARKING OF
No staff auditor or Interne may proceed with the next session on any
case unless the folder of the last consecutive auditing period has been
marked by the Case Supervisor or Director of Processing or the person in
normal charge of all cases.
Where two sessions occur in one day, these count as one session and
need only one summary report by the auditor for marking purposes.
L. RON HUBBARD LRH:mh.kd Copyright (R) 1965
600
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint HUI Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex -
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1965
Remimeo
ALL TECH DIV
ALL QUAL DIV
ETHICS SECTION
CLASS VII INTERNES
STAFF AUDITOR ADVICES
No Staff Auditor or Interne or organization auditor or any auditor on
a Staff Co-audit may seek advices on what to do from any person except the
officially appointed person doing the auditing folders.
Seeking advice on cases verbally or in writing from the person not
doing the folders is OFF LINE except in Ethics matters when Ethics may be
consulted or Saint Hill advised.
When an auditor seeks advice off-line and accepts it, unbeknownst to
the official supervising the auditing via the folders, a random factor is
introduced into the running of cases that can be quite fatal.
At, Saint Hill, on Power Processes, such an action is a crime as the
consequences can be so catastrophic to cases run on Power Processes.
The proper sources of instruction are tapes and HCOBs. Adding bits to
these that aren't there is the commonest auditor error.
Asking for unusual solutions from a case supervisor who is doing the
folders is a sure sign that the last directives have not been followed;
giving instructions that are unusual is useless because they won't be
complied with either.
The Dev-T situation of asking for advice off-line burdens lines and
fouls up cases.
COMM CYCLE AND ETHICS
When an auditor has a fractured comm cycle very often processing still
works on the average pe.
When an auditor has a fractured comm cycle and the pc is an Ethics
type case (SP, PTS, W/hs) a mess ensues. One can always tell if an
auditor's comm cycle is poor or if the Code is being broken because when
put on an Ethics type pe, things collapse.
When a pc won't run, one can be sure that
1. The Auditor's Comm Cycle is out and
2. The pc is an Ethics type case.
When both these are present, no results can possibly occur.
When only one is present, usually the auditing works somewhat.
CASE SUPERVISOR PUZZLE
When a Case Supervisor doing folders sees a process going wrong, he
should not blame the process or his own advice if these are even faintly
educated.
601
Instead the pc is an Ethics type or the Auditor's Comm Cycle is out.
If neither of these seem to be the case, and things still go wrong
then the auditor just isn't running what he says he is or running what he
is supposed to run.
If all the above seems not to be the case, then the auditor is seeking
off-line advices and some screwball interpretation has been added to the
process.
A clever Case Supervisor -marking folders, goes by the text-case
running well, continue the standard approach. Case not running well, send
to Review for analysis REGARDLESS OF ANY AUDITING TIME LOST.
When a pc goes to Review, it is clever to send the auditor to the
Review Cramming Section to check over his Auditor's Code and Comm Cycle
with TRs.
If when auditor and pc still don't run well, send the pc to Ethics.
(Review may already have done so.)
ETHICS
If the Case Supervisor ever finds an auditor not following
instructions or seeking or taking off-line directions he must at once send
the auditor to Ethics. It is usually an Ethics Hearing and a minor
suspension.
If a Case Supervisor doing the folders finds a false report has been
made, he must send the offender to Ethics.
WITHHOLDS
A pc is not sent to Ethics because of withholds gotten off in a
session. However, on the Invalidation button one commonly finds suppressive
persons around the pc and the auditor must send the pc to Ethics at session
end to get the matter disconnected or handled.
Sometimes one finds another person's offences than the pc's in getting
off withholds. These are reported to Ethics for investigation.
TEXT BOOK
D of P work is completely text book. PC doing okay-get on with it as
per the process, the next process to be run, or the next grade.
PC not doing okay-to Review to find out why.
If Review finds pc is an Ethics type, sends pc to Ethics.
It's all text book. It is so easy.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mh.bp.oden Copyright @ 1965
602
HUBBARD COMMUNICAT
Saint Hill Manor, East Gri
HCO POLICY LETTER OF
Remimeo
All Tech Hats
All Qual Hats Tech Div
Class V11 Qual Div
Students
PC ROUTING
REVIEW CODE
The Code has four symbols
REV!
REV FL?
DECLARE?
ETH?
When the Case Supervisor sends (by marking the summary report in the
folder) a pc from the Tech Div to the Qual Div, the following code is used.
REV!
Means "This pc is in trouble! Please do a Review hard." Review does
HCO Pol Ltr 26 June 1965 Form with extreme care and handles thoroughly all
points uncovered. PC GOES STRAIGHT TO INVOICE AND REVIEW AUDITOR.
REV FL?
Means "Could you please find out if this process is flat for me? And
anything else you care to do, of course." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO INVOICE AND
REVIEW AUDITOR.
DECLARE?
Means "Pc has reached a grade or Release. Please look at pc and if
okay, pass on to Certs and Awards." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO EXAMINER. IF PC
LOOKS ALL RIGHT TO EXAMINER AND FOLDER IS OKAY EXAMINER SENDS PC TO CERTS
AND AWARDS WITH A CHIT. Review auditor does not get on line at all. However
if a casual glance tells the Examiner this pc is not all right or if folder
shows a mess, the Examiner routes by a chit to invoice and Review. The pc,
however, is not returned to the HGC, but can, of course, in the case of a
grade, sign up for more.
ETH?
Means "This pc may be an Ethics case, roller coasters or no case
gain." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO INVOICE AND REVIEW AUDITOR who does HCO Pol Ltr
26 June 65 and returns pc to Examiner who may-or may not-direct pc to
Ethics depending on results of the Review.
AUDITOR'S PC
Note that an auditor may take his pc to Qual if the session won't
start or run. The route is not auditor to D of P to Review, but the Auditor
with the pc to Invoice to Review auditor. The pc's auditor leaves the pc at
invoice in Qual and reports then at once to the D of P who must assign some
work or send the auditor to Dept of Schedules to pick up a low priority pc
or even, on peak loads, to the Director of Review to help out. The auditor
must not remain unassigned, even if he is put to Files.
603
DEPT OF SCHEDS
HGC Admin (The Dept of Schedules, Tech Div) receives folders at the
end of the session or the day's auditing and gets them to the Case
Supervisor. When the Case Supervisor sends them back (before the next
session), HGC Admin then sees what should happen in the folders and routes
the pc promptly and as promptly handles any auditor re-assignment. Pes who
are going to come back are promptly reviewed and sent back and the auditor
is not changed on them and the auditor is temporarily assigned by HGC Admin
to bridge the gap. Pcs who are not going to come back are struck off the
assignment board and the auditor is instantly reassigned. If the next pc on
the list cannot instantly be found by HGC Admin then the next pc on the
list is grabbed.
The auditor, then, does not go to Qual with the pc. It is not the
auditor who discovers the pe is destined for Review. This is discovered by
HGC Admin before sessions normally begin for the day.
The whole interest here is economy of auditing time. Save all of it
you can in any way you can.
THE ASSIGNMENT BOARD
A large cellulose or soft board at least 3 ft by 5 high exists in HGC
Admin. Each Auditor's name is printed on a card and each pc's name is put
on a card.
There is a column for each session period if there are more than one
in the day. And one column for pcs who have been sent to Review. The
auditors' names are in the column on the left on green cards and the pes'
are in the other columns on white cards.
HGC Admin assigns and routes by moving cards on the Assignment Board.
There are three possible sessions, morning, afternoon and evening.
There is also the Review column. Thus one has 5 vertical columns on the
Assignment Board.
WAITING LIST BOARD
Any pc waiting list is posted, with the pc's name on a white card, on
another board in HGC Admin. It reads from left to right in horizontal lines
and the white card is removed to the Assignment Board.
Students who are waiting for auditing are also put on the waiting list
board but their names are on a different (paler) shade of green from that
of auditors. These quite commonly are scheduled half days so that one
auditor is auditing two of them a day. The student studies the other half
of the day.
This can also be done (half day scheduling) with town pcs. Out of town
pcs are always full day scheduled.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright @ 196S
604
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 JULY 1965
Gen Non-Remitneo
SEPARATION ORDER
There are instances met with by Ethics Officers, especially in
relation to husbands and wives, where there may be suppressions on
individual people but not suppressive of Scientology.
In such cases a "Separation Order" for a specific period of time is
the best action. For example, Joe S-- and Mary S- are hereby placed under a
Separation Order while Joe is undergoing Processing. They are to have no
contact with each other during this
period from (date) to (in this case to the end of the Power
Processing 2nd
Stage Release).
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.pm.kd Copyright @ 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 JULY 1965
Issue II
Remirneo
Tech Hats
Qual Hats
CASE SUPERVISOR,
SPECIAL ATTENTION
The D of P is usually the Case Supervisor. Therefore the D of P has no
Case Supervisor on own case.
The Case Supervisor andlor the D of P's case folders are done by the
Director of Review.
The Case Folders of the Tech See and Qual Sec and all Secretaries
otherwise are done by the Case Supervisor except as above.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.rd Copyright Q 1965
605
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 JULY 1965
Sthil
Tech Div
Qual Div
PRECLEAR ROUTING TO ETHICS
There is no direct routing of preclears to the Ethics Officer except
through the channels of the Qualification Division and Review.
This, therefore, cancels the direct routing to Ethics as covered in
the Class VII, Confidential, HOD Bulletin of 28 June 1965.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ml.cden Copyright (D 1965
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 AUGUST 1965
Gen Non-Remimeo
PCs RELEASED ROUTING
A pc who is recommended to Ethics and also to declare must be sent to
Ethics first to ensure no possibility of Roller Coastering.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:inl.kd Copyright @ 1965
606
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 OCTOBER 1968
1
Remimeo
STAT FOR CLASS VIII C/S QUAL IS NUMBER NAMES IN CF.
LRH:ei.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (c) 1968 Founder
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JANUARY 1969
Remimeo
PC ATTESTATIONS
(COVERS PCs AND PRE-OTs)
Although the right of a preclear to attest completion may not be
denied him, it is still ultimately the Case Supervisor who says whether or
not the case is complete.
This appertains QUAL DIV pcs and pro-ots.
It was found conclusively that no matter how good and radiant and
great the pc feels, and how fantastic the indicators are even at the
examiner's desk, the pc will come to grief when out tech has occurred.
A large number of pcs and pre-ots attested complete whilst the Case
Supervisor detected out tech in their sessioning. As they had been audited
by Class VIIIS with excellent TRs, good indicators and meter phenomena were
in, and remained in, on some cases for several days even, but sooner or
later the case was found in Ethics or medical or post trouble, or a
combination of all of these.
So let him attest complete all he wants, but the CIS decides. And this
is done solely on what he sees in the folder. NOTHING ELSE unless he
requires additional data for which lines exist.
Tech is far too deadly in its accuracy to let any pc out of Qual
whilst knowing there is out tech on the case.
This is not invalidation of pcs as releasing them from Qual with
technical outness constitutes the validation of a lie.
Auditing is too precise and accepts only the STANDARD in application
and result.
Lt. O.J. Roos
LRH:OJR.Idm.ei.rd Flag C/S
for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder
607
THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C.
FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 20 MAY 1957
OUTSIDE AUDITING
Staff of the Founding Church may do 8 hours of outside auditing on
their own, but no more.
Students and current HGC preclears may not be audited by staff
auditors except as assigned by the Director of Processing or Director of
Training.
A staff auditor may not audit outside any preclear he has audited for
the HGC in the past year.
A staff auditor on leaving the HGC shall not audit anyone who has been
an HGC preclear in the past 2 years.
LRH:md.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I
ASSOCIATION SECRETARY DIRECTIVE OF 9 JULY 1957
PRIVATE PRECLEARS OF HASI STAFF
AUDITING LIMIT
HASI Staff Members are limited to eight hours per week of auditing
private preclears in their own time.
These eight hours weekly are not cumulative.
Jack Parkhouse
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
(Issued from Washington)
HASI LONDON
POLICY LETTER OF 26 JULY 1957
To All Staff
Bulletin Board
FUNDS OR FAVORS RECEIVED
Any funds or favors received from persons outside the HASI London by
any staff member by reason of his connection with HASI London or
Scientology must be reported in writing to the HCO Secretary.
This includes cash, loans, dinners, loans of vehicles, quarters,
clothing or presents.
There is no restriction in receiving such items but it shall be deemed
cause for instant dismissal if the report of such favors is not so made.
This includes all outside auditing done by a staff member for which
pay is received.
The intention of this policy is to tighten the security of the HASI as
it moves into the possible sphere of government contracts.
LRH:jd.cden.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
Agent for Great Britain
608
NOT HCO POLICY LETTER
ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH
NOT GREEN ON WHITE
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF I I APRIL 1958
(with amendment of 3/6/58)
STAFF MEMBERS' OUTSIDE AUDITING REGULATION
The regulation applying to staff members' outside auditing is as
follows: No staff member may audit for pay, gratuity, or without pay or
gratuity, any HGC preclear or outside student for a period of two years
after the person completed processing at the HGC or study at the Academy.
LRH
(Note: The amendment was change of staff auditors to read staff
members. I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. 1
HASI POLICY LETTER OF 27 MAY 1958
(Issued at Washington)
(Modification of Assoc Sec Directive
of 9 July 1957)
All Staff
Field Offices
Bulletin Board
OUTSIDE AUDITING
Staff of the HASI London may do 8 hours per week of outside auditing
on their own, but no more.
Current students and HGC preclears may not be audited by staff
auditors, or other staff members, except as assigned by the Director of
Processing or the Director of Training.
. staff auditor may not audit any preclear he has audited for the HGC
in the past year.
. staff auditor, or any other staff member, on leaving the HGC or the
HASI, shall not audit anyone who has beenan HGC preclear or Academy student
in the past two years. If he does, his certificate may be subject to
cancellation.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rs.rd Copyright (~) 1958
609
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF I APRIL 1960
CenOCon
REGULATIONS FOR STAFF MEMBERS AND EX-STAFF MEMBERS
(Supersedes all previous directives on same subject)
Regulations Affecting all Staff Members:
I Any staff member of the organization may do eight hours of
outside (private)
auditing on their own per week, and no more than this per week.
2. Any staff member of the Organization may not audit any current
preclear or student unless that preclear or student has been signed up for
processing in the Hubbard Guidance Centre by the Registrar and has been
assigned to the auditor by the Director of Processing.
3. Any staff member may not audit for pay or reward any preclear
who has been audited in the Hubbard Guidance Centre in the past two years.
The ruling of only eight hours of outside auditing applies in all cases.
4. Any staff member may not audit for pay or reward anyone who has
been an HGC preclear or an Academy student of any course of the
organization in the past two years (this includes A.C.C. students).
5. A staff member is permitted to do group auditing and can receive
pay or reward for this. Staff may process other staff members, as in a co-
audit team or an auditing arrangement amongst staff.
This policy is intended to insure that prospects developed on Org comm
lines by Org personnel get into the HGC and/or Academy, rather than on to a
personal comm line which would deny the HGC and/or Academy of a prospective
preclear or student which the Org has developed. It is also intended to
insure that prospects receive the service we intend for them, i.e.
supervised service at the HGC and/or Academy.
6. A staff member may not be a member of the Communist Party.
7. Staff members may initiate or form any Scientology group
activity, but in all such cases the matter shall first be submitted to the
Advisory Committee (Advisory Council) for their approval, and only on
specific acceptance by the Executive Director shall any such activity have
Organizational sanction.
8. If a staff member who has not been hired on a temporary or part
time basis leaves a technical post without good and sufficient reason in
the first year of his employment and he has not been dismissed by the
Director of the Department or the Organization Secretary, he is charged 2SO
guineas sterling (1,000 dollars) for the training he received on that
technical post. The reason for this is that the organization has
occasionally been victimized in the past by persons coming on staff for the
sole purpose of acquiring training. The services of such a staff member
only become fully effective after several months of training, and since
training is expensive it is only right that persons doing this be charged
for it.
The following regulation applies to ex-Staff members:
On leaving staff, and for a period of two years thereafter, an ex-
Staff member may not audit for pay or reward any person who has been an HGC
preclear in the past two years nor a person who has been an Academy or
A.C.C. student in the past two years. However, he is permitted to do group
auditing of such persons and may receive pay or reward for it.
Violation of these regulations can result in the HCO Board of Review
cancelling all of the individual's certificates. A person may apply to the
HCO for a relaxation of these regulations if he thinks it is justified in a
particular case, but the decision of the HCO is final.
LRH:js.cden Peter Hemery
HCO Secretary WW
for
L. RON HUBBARD
610
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 FEBRUARY 1961
Staff B. Board
Do not re-mimeo
OUTSIDE PCS OF STAFF MEMBERS
It would be wise to have all staff members who do 8 hours of private
auditing per week to report to HCO, the names and addresses of such PCs.
In security check the matter of private processing should also be
checked.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ln.jl.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 JUNE 1962
CenOCon
STAFF MEMBERS AUDITING PRIVATE PCS
(Summarizes current policy)
The following regulations apply without exception to all staff members
who audit private preclears for fees.
Staff members must not do more than eight hours private auditing in
any one week.
Staff members must not charge less than the HGC fees of the Central
Org of the area.
Staff members must report to the HCO Secretary on any private auditing
they do, and inform the HCO See of the name and address of any private
preclear.
Staff members should give the D of P a technical report on their
private preelears.
Staff members are not allowed to audit privately anyone who is, or has
been during the preceding two years, an Academy student or HGC preclear.
LRH:dr.rd
L. RON HUBBARD
-----------------------
[1] BMA: British Medical Association